PP66 HHeellpp FFoorr PPrriinntt

RReelleeaassee 88..00

2

Copyright © 1999, 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The Programs (which include both the software and documentation) contain proprietary

information; they are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use

and disclosure and are also protected by copyright, patent, and other intellectual and

industrial property laws. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of the

Programs, except to the extent required to obtain interoperability with other

independently created software or as specified by law, is prohibited.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you

find any problems in the documentation, please report them to us in writing. This

document is not warranted to be error-free. Except as may be expressly permitted in your

license agreement for these Programs, no part of these Programs may be reproduced or

transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose.

The platform-specific hardware and software requirements included in this document

were current when this document was published. However, because new platforms and

operating system software versions might be certified after this document is published,

review the certification matrix on the My Oracle Support (formerly OracleMetaLink) Web

site for the most up-to-date list of certified hardware platforms and operating system

versions. The My Oracle Support (formerly OracleMetaLink) Web site is available at the

following URL:

http://metalink.oracle.com/

or

http://support.oracle.com/

If the Programs are delivered to the United States Government or anyone licensing or

using the Programs on behalf of the United States Government, the following notice is

applicable: U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related

documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are

"commercial computer software" or "commercial technical data" pursuant to the

applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental

regulations. As such, use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation of the

Programs, including documentation and technical data, shall be subject to the licensing

restrictions set forth in the applicable Oracle license agreement, and, to the extent

applicable, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer

Software -- Restricted Rights (June 1987). Oracle USA, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway,

Redwood City, CA 94065.

Copyright

Copyright

3

The Programs are not intended for use in any nuclear, aviation, mass transit, medical, or

other inherently dangerous applications. It shall be the licensee's responsibility to take all

appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy and other measures to ensure the safe use of

such applications if the Programs are used for such purposes, and we disclaim liability for

any damages caused by such use of the Programs.

Oracle and Primavera are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its

affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. The Programs may

provide links to Web sites and access to content, products, and services from third

parties. Oracle is not responsible for the availability of, or any content provided on,

third-party Web sites. You bear all risks associated with the use of such content. If you

choose to purchase any products or services from a third party, the relationship is directly

between you and the third party. Oracle is not responsible for: (a) the quality of

third-party products or services; or (b) fulfilling any of the terms of the agreement with the

third party, including delivery of products or services and warranty obligations related to

purchased products or services. Oracle is not responsible for any loss or damage of any

sort that you may incur from dealing with any third party.

To view the P6 Commercial Notices and Disclosures for Documentation, go to the

\Documentation\<language>\Notices and Disclosures folder of the P6 physical media

or download.

5

Contents

Copyright ........................................................................................................................................... 2

Preface ............................................................................................................................................ 39

About Oracle Primavera P6 Enterprise Project Portfolio Management ....................................... 39

Working with Oracle Primavera P6 Enterprise Project Portfolio Management Suite .................. 41

About P6 ..................................................................................................................................... 43 About P6 Professional................................................................................................................ 44 About P6 Progress Reporter ...................................................................................................... 45 About Contract Management .................................................................................................... 45 About the Oracle Business Process Management Suite ......................................................... 45 About Oracle BI Publisher and the OBIEE Platform ................................................................. 46 About P6 Reporting Database ................................................................................................... 46 About P6 Analytics ..................................................................................................................... 46 About the P6 Integration API ..................................................................................................... 48 About P6 Web Services .............................................................................................................. 48 About Oracle Universal Content Management ......................................................................... 48 About Oracle Primavera Risk Analysis ...................................................................................... 49

P6 EPPM Release 8 New Feature Summary ................................................................................. 51

Web Administration and Configuration ..................................................................................... 53 Easy Web Setup, Configuration, and Administration........................................................ 53 Web-Based User Administration ........................................................................................ 53 One Source for All Enterprise Data .................................................................................... 54

Project and Portfolio Management ........................................................................................... 57 Web-Based EPS and Project Views ................................................................................... 57 Enhanced Portfolio Filtering .............................................................................................. 57 Schedule Preview ............................................................................................................... 57 Recalculate Assignment Costs .......................................................................................... 58 Project Baselines ................................................................................................................ 58

Project Templates ...................................................................................................................... 59 Reusable Project Templates .............................................................................................. 59

Resource Management ............................................................................................................. 61 Completely Redesigned Resource and Role UI ................................................................ 61 Improved Resource Planning and Analysis ....................................................................... 61 Optimized Resource and Role Team Handling ................................................................. 61

Risk Management ...................................................................................................................... 63 Qualitative Risk Management ........................................................................................... 63 Risk Scoring Matrix, Categories, and Thresholds ............................................................. 63

Enterprise Reporting .................................................................................................................. 65 Integrated On-Demand or Scheduled Reports ................................................................. 65

Workflow ..................................................................................................................................... 67 Oracle BPM Integration ...................................................................................................... 67

Technological Advances ............................................................................................................ 69 Integrated LDAP Provisioning ............................................................................................ 69 Enhanced and Expanded Job Services ............................................................................. 69 Expanded Event Support ................................................................................................... 69 Integration Ready ............................................................................................................... 70

P6 Help

6

P6 Web Services Security Enhancements ........................................................................ 70 Platforms............................................................................................................................. 70

User Productivity ........................................................................................................................ 71 Auto-Complete Field Values ............................................................................................... 71 Customizable Toolbars ....................................................................................................... 71 Enhanced Activity, Assignment, and EPS Filters .............................................................. 71 E-mail Activity Views ........................................................................................................... 71 Keyboard Shortcuts ............................................................................................................ 72 Menus and Icons ................................................................................................................ 72 Redesigned Detail Windows .............................................................................................. 72

Learning Assistance ................................................................................................................... 73 Completely Redesigned Online Help ................................................................................. 73 UPK Multimedia Tutorials .................................................................................................. 73

P6 Professional .......................................................................................................................... 75 Timescaled Logic Diagrams ............................................................................................... 75 Tabbed Views ...................................................................................................................... 75 Customizable Menus .......................................................................................................... 75 Customizable Toolbars ....................................................................................................... 75 Page Breaks by Group Band .............................................................................................. 75 Apply Actuals and Summarize Project Now Run as Services ........................................... 76 Auto-Refresh Grouped Data by Window ............................................................................ 76 Client-Web Delineation and Integration ............................................................................ 76 Streamlined Installer .......................................................................................................... 76 Improved HTML Editor ....................................................................................................... 76 Command Line Support ..................................................................................................... 76

P6 EPPM Documentation ............................................................................................................... 77

Where to Get Support ..................................................................................................................... 79

P6 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 81

Working with P6............................................................................................................................... 81

Customizing the P6 User Experience ............................................................................................. 83

About the User Interface ................................................................................................................. 84

Working with the P6 User Interface .......................................................................................... 84 About Screen Controls ....................................................................................................... 87 Working with the Main Menus ........................................................................................... 87 About the Most Recently Used List.................................................................................... 89

Working with Tables ........................................................................................................... 90 About Columns (Fields) ...................................................................................................... 91

Showing or Hiding Columns in a Table .............................................................................. 91 Configuring Columns or Values ......................................................................................... 91 Working with Toolbars ........................................................................................................ 93 Customizing Toolbars ......................................................................................................... 94

Working with "Select a Value" Dialog Boxes ..................................................................... 95 Selecting Values from "Select a Value" Dialog Boxes ...................................................... 97

Working with Data in P6..................................................................................................... 98 Working with Detail Windows ............................................................................................ 99 About Portlets ................................................................................................................... 101 About Data Entry Controls ................................................................................................ 101

Printing Pages Using P6 Printing Tools ........................................................................................ 101

Printing Pages Using Your Web Browser ...................................................................................... 102

Contents

7

About E-Mail Notifications ............................................................................................................ 103

Working with E-Mail Notifications............................................................................................ 103 Sending E-Mail to Resource Teams................................................................................. 104 Sending E-Mail Notifications about Resource Assignments .......................................... 105

About Grouping and Sorting ......................................................................................................... 105

Working with Group and Sort Features ................................................................................... 105 Grouping and Sorting Information .......................................................................................... 107

About Find, Search, and Filter Features ...................................................................................... 108

Working with Find, Search, and Filter Features ..................................................................... 108 Finding Entries .................................................................................................................. 109 Searching for Entries ........................................................................................................ 109 About Filters ...................................................................................................................... 110 Working with Filters .......................................................................................................... 110

Filtering Data .................................................................................................................... 113

Pages Supporting Filters .................................................................................................. 113

Creating, Modifying, and Deleting Data ....................................................................................... 114

Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Data ......................................................................................... 115 About Removal vs. Deletion..................................................................................................... 116

Deleting Entries ................................................................................................................ 116 Undoing Mistakes .................................................................................................................... 116

About Metrics and Calculations.................................................................................................... 117

Using Visual Indicators ............................................................................................................. 118

About Importing and Exporting Data ............................................................................................ 118

About Importing and Exporting Projects ................................................................................. 119 Configuring Browser Settings .................................................................................................. 119

About P6 Help ................................................................................................................................ 120

Viewing Help Content ............................................................................................................... 120 Working with P6 Help Topics ................................................................................................... 121

About Integration with Other Applications ................................................................................... 123

About Timesheets .................................................................................................................... 124 Working with Timesheets ................................................................................................. 124

Dashboards and Workspaces ....................................................................................................... 127

About Dashboards, Workspaces, and Workgroups ..................................................................... 127

About Dashboards.................................................................................................................... 127 Working with Dashboards ................................................................................................ 128 Creating Dashboards ....................................................................................................... 131 Customizing Dashboards ................................................................................................. 131 Configuring Dashboard Content ...................................................................................... 132

Configuring Dashboard Access ........................................................................................ 132

Configuring Dashboard Filters ......................................................................................... 133

Configuring Dashboard Layout ........................................................................................ 133

Showing and Hiding Dashboards .................................................................................... 134

Working with Workflows ................................................................................................... 134 About Project Workspaces ....................................................................................................... 137

Working with Project Workspaces ................................................................................... 138

P6 Help

8

Customizing Project Workspace ...................................................................................... 138 Configuring Workspace Content ...................................................................................... 139

Configuring Workspace Layout ........................................................................................ 139

Sending E-Mail to Project Resources .............................................................................. 140 About Project Performance Metrics ................................................................................ 141 Assessing Project Performance ....................................................................................... 141

Assessing Project Health ................................................................................................. 142

Customizing Project Statistics ......................................................................................... 143

Identifying Critical Activities Behind Schedule ................................................................ 143

About Performance Thresholds ....................................................................................... 144

Working with Performance Thresholds ........................................................................... 145 About Milestones .............................................................................................................. 145

Sending E-Mail about Milestones .................................................................................... 145 About Cost Performance Index (CPI) ............................................................................... 146

About Schedule Performance Index (SPI) ....................................................................... 146

About To-Complete Performance Index (TCPI) ................................................................ 146

About Contract Management .......................................................................................... 147 Working with Contract Management ............................................................................... 147

Opening the Contract Management Control Center ....................................................... 148

Linking P6 and Contract Management Projects ............................................................. 148

Linking P6/P6 Professional and Contract Management Applications .......................... 149

About Project Workgroups ....................................................................................................... 149 Working with Workgroups ................................................................................................ 150 Assigning Documents to Projects .................................................................................... 150

Creating Workgroups ........................................................................................................ 151

Customizing Workgroups ................................................................................................. 151

Assigning Workgroup Activities ........................................................................................ 152

Creating Workgroup Issues .............................................................................................. 153

Sending E-Mail to Activity Resources .............................................................................. 154

About Portlets ........................................................................................................................... 155 List of Portlets ................................................................................................................... 155 Customizing Portlets ........................................................................................................ 159 Customizing the My Risks Portlet .................................................................................... 159

Customizing the Resource Analysis Chart Portlet .......................................................... 159

Customizing the Open Requests for Resources Portlet ................................................. 160

Customizing Portfolio View Portlets ................................................................................. 160

Customizing Scorecard Portfolio View Portlets ............................................................... 161 Analyzing Resource Team Usage in the Resource Team Summary Portlet .................. 161

Creating Portfolio View Portlets ....................................................................................... 162 Document Review and Workflow Portlets ....................................................................... 163 Participating in Document Reviews ................................................................................. 163

Terminating Document Reviews ...................................................................................... 163

Contents

9

About Workflows ............................................................................................................... 164

Working with Workflows ................................................................................................... 165 Participating in Workflows ............................................................................................... 168 Linking the Cost Worksheet to Contract Management .................................................. 169 Opening Projects from Dashboard Portlets .................................................................... 170 Sending E-Mail to Resource Teams................................................................................. 170 Sending E-Mail Notifications about Resource Assignments .......................................... 171 Creating Custom Portlets ................................................................................................. 171

Portfolios ....................................................................................................................................... 173

About Portfolios ............................................................................................................................. 173

Working with Portfolios ................................................................................................................. 173

Creating Portfolios .................................................................................................................... 174 Creating Projects While Working with Portfolios .................................................................... 174 Creating Projects in a Portfolio View Scorecard Portlet ......................................................... 175 Creating Projects on the Portfolio Analysis Page ................................................................... 175 Assigning Projects to a Portfolio .............................................................................................. 176 Defining Performance Thresholds........................................................................................... 177

Portfolio Views ............................................................................................................................... 179

About Portfolio Views ............................................................................................................... 179 Working with Portfolio Views ................................................................................................... 179

Creating Portfolio Views ................................................................................................... 180 Working with Portfolio View Scorecards ................................................................................. 181 Working with Portfolio View Bubble Charts ............................................................................ 184 Working with Portfolio View Pie Charts ................................................................................... 186 Working with Portfolio View Histograms ................................................................................. 187

Portfolio Scenarios ........................................................................................................................ 191

About Portfolio Scenarios ........................................................................................................ 191 About What-if Analysis ............................................................................................................. 191 Working with Portfolio Scenarios ............................................................................................ 191

Creating Portfolio Scenarios ............................................................................................ 191 Sending E-Mail About Scenarios ..................................................................................... 192

Capacity Planning .......................................................................................................................... 195

About Capacity Planning .......................................................................................................... 195 Working with the Capacity Planning Page .............................................................................. 195

Analyzing Role Allocation (Capacity Planning) ................................................................ 198

Projects ......................................................................................................................................... 201

About Projects ............................................................................................................................... 201

Working with Projects .............................................................................................................. 201 Opening Projects, Portfolios, or Templates ............................................................................ 202

Opening Projects from Dashboard Portlets .................................................................... 202 Opening Recently Used Projects, Templates, or Portfolios ............................................ 202 Opening Selected Projects or Templates ........................................................................ 203 Opening the Last Project or Projects ............................................................................... 203 Opening Dependent Projects ........................................................................................... 203

The EPS .......................................................................................................................................... 205

About the Enterprise Project Structure (EPS) ......................................................................... 205 Working with the EPS ....................................................................................................... 205

P6 Help

10

Creating EPS Elements .................................................................................................... 207 Configuring the EPS.......................................................................................................... 208

About Projects .......................................................................................................................... 208 Creating Projects .............................................................................................................. 208 Creating Projects from Existing Projects or Templates .................................................. 209 Deleting Projects or EPSs ................................................................................................ 210 Opening Projects or Templates in the EPS ..................................................................... 210 Customizing Detail Windows ........................................................................................... 211 Configuring Project Preferences ...................................................................................... 212 Configuring Project Calculations...................................................................................... 213

Linking P6 and Contract Management Projects ............................................................. 213

Configuring Project Defaults ............................................................................................ 214

Configuring General Project Preferences ........................................................................ 214

Configuring P6 Progress Reporter ................................................................................... 215

Configuring Project Summarization ................................................................................. 215

About Gantt Charts ................................................................................................................... 215 Working with the Activity Gantt Chart .............................................................................. 216 Configuring Gantt Charts ................................................................................................. 216

About the Activity Table ........................................................................................................... 217 About Baselines ....................................................................................................................... 218

Working with Baselines .................................................................................................... 219 Creating Baselines ........................................................................................................... 220

About the Summarizer Service ................................................................................................ 221 Working with the Summarizer Service ............................................................................ 222 Summarizing Projects ...................................................................................................... 222

About Importing and Exporting Projects ................................................................................. 223 Working with Primavera XML Project Import/Export ...................................................... 223 Exporting Projects using Microsoft Project XML ............................................................. 224 Configuring Microsoft Project Templates ........................................................................ 224

Exporting Projects using Primavera XML Format ........................................................... 225 Importing Projects using Microsoft Project XML ............................................................. 226 Importing Projects using Primavera XML Format ........................................................... 226 Exporting Projects to Excel ............................................................................................... 227

About Budget Change Logs ..................................................................................................... 228 Creating Budget Change Requests ................................................................................. 228 Approving/Denying Budget Change Requests ............................................................. 229

About Project Views.................................................................................................................. 229 Configuring Project Views ................................................................................................ 229 Configuring Project View Columns ................................................................................... 230

Configuring Project View Grouping .................................................................................. 231

Configuring Project View Filters ....................................................................................... 232

Applying Filters ................................................................................................................. 232 Creating Filters ................................................................................................................. 233 Configuring Filters ............................................................................................................ 234 Configuring Project View Bars .......................................................................................... 234

Configuring Project View Gantt Chart .............................................................................. 235

Configuring Project View Access ...................................................................................... 235

About Bars ................................................................................................................................ 236

Contents

11

About Columns (Fields) ............................................................................................................ 236 About Grouping and Sorting .................................................................................................... 236 About Gantt Charts ................................................................................................................... 237 About Filters.............................................................................................................................. 237 About Funding Sources ............................................................................................................ 237

Assigning Project Funding Sources ................................................................................. 237 About Notebooks ...................................................................................................................... 237

Working with Notebooks .................................................................................................. 238 About Notebook Topics ............................................................................................................ 238

Assigning Notebook Topics .............................................................................................. 238 About Project Codes ................................................................................................................. 239

Assigning Project Codes ................................................................................................... 239 About P6 Progress Reporter .................................................................................................... 239 About Contract Management .................................................................................................. 240

Linking P6/P6 Professional and Contract Management Applications .......................... 240

About Project Templates ............................................................................................................... 240

Working with Project Templates .............................................................................................. 241 Creating Project Templates ..................................................................................................... 241

Activities ......................................................................................................................................... 243

About Activities ......................................................................................................................... 243 Working with Activities ..................................................................................................... 243 Creating Activities ............................................................................................................. 244 Configuring General Activity Information ........................................................................ 245 Recalculating Assignment Costs ..................................................................................... 246 Sending Project Data to ERP ........................................................................................... 246 Customizing Detail Windows ........................................................................................... 247

About Activity Types ................................................................................................................. 248 About Suspending and Resuming Activities ........................................................................... 248 About WBS Summary Activities ............................................................................................... 249 About Gantt Charts ................................................................................................................... 249

Working with the Activity Gantt Chart .............................................................................. 249 Configuring Gantt Charts ................................................................................................. 250

About the Activity Table ........................................................................................................... 251 About Activity Networks ........................................................................................................... 251

Working with Activities in the Activity Network ............................................................... 252 About Calendar View ................................................................................................................ 253

Working with Activities in Calendar View ........................................................................ 254 About Siblings and Children .................................................................................................... 255 About Work Breakdown Structures (WBS) .............................................................................. 255

Working with WBS Elements ............................................................................................ 255 Creating a WBS ................................................................................................................. 256 Adding a WBS from Template .......................................................................................... 257 Configuring General WBS Information ............................................................................ 258

About Baselines ....................................................................................................................... 258 Working with Baselines .................................................................................................... 259 Creating Baselines ........................................................................................................... 261

About Scheduling ..................................................................................................................... 262 Scheduling Projects .......................................................................................................... 262 Configuring General Scheduling Options ........................................................................ 263

Configuring Advanced Scheduling Options ..................................................................... 264

P6 Help

12

About Float ............................................................................................................................... 265 About Critical Path Activities .................................................................................................... 265

Working with Critical Path Activities ................................................................................ 265 About Schedule Preview .......................................................................................................... 267

Enabling Schedule Preview .............................................................................................. 267 About Resource Leveling ......................................................................................................... 268

Leveling Resources .......................................................................................................... 268 Configuring Resource Leveling Options and Priorities ................................................... 269

About The Apply Actuals Feature ............................................................................................ 271 Working with the Apply Actuals Feature .......................................................................... 271 Applying Actuals to a Project............................................................................................ 273

About Updating Progress ......................................................................................................... 274 Working with Updating Progress...................................................................................... 274

About the Auto Compute Actuals Feature .............................................................................. 275 Working with the Auto-Compute Actuals Feature ........................................................... 275 Applying Auto Compute Actuals to Activities ................................................................... 276

About Store Period Performance............................................................................................. 277 Storing Period Performance............................................................................................. 277

About Importing and Exporting Data ....................................................................................... 278 Importing Activities from Excel ........................................................................................ 278 Exporting Activities to Excel ............................................................................................. 279 Creating Import Templates .............................................................................................. 279

About Progress Spotlight ......................................................................................................... 280 About Relationship Lines ......................................................................................................... 280 About Progress Lines ............................................................................................................... 281 About Activity Views ................................................................................................................. 281

Working with Activity Views .............................................................................................. 281 Creating Views .................................................................................................................. 282 Configuring Activity Views ................................................................................................ 283 Configuring Activity View Columns ................................................................................... 284

Configuring Activity View Grouping .................................................................................. 284

Configuring Activity View Filters ....................................................................................... 285

Applying Filters ................................................................................................................. 286 Creating Filters ................................................................................................................. 287 Configuring Filters ............................................................................................................ 287 Configuring Activity View Bars .......................................................................................... 288

Configuring Activity View Gantt Chart .............................................................................. 289

Configuring Activity Network ............................................................................................ 290

Configuring Activity View Access ...................................................................................... 290

Sending E-Mail of an Activity View ................................................................................... 291 About Bars ................................................................................................................................ 291 About Columns (Fields) ............................................................................................................ 292 About Filters.............................................................................................................................. 292 About Grouping and Sorting .................................................................................................... 292 About Resource Assignments .................................................................................................. 293

Assigning Activity Resources............................................................................................ 293 Configuring Activity Resources ........................................................................................ 294 Requesting Resources for Activities ................................................................................ 294 Specifying Resource Assignment Rates .......................................................................... 295

Contents

13

Adding Activity Resource Estimates ................................................................................ 296 About the Recalculate Assignment Costs Feature ......................................................... 296

About Resources ...................................................................................................................... 297 About Roles .............................................................................................................................. 297

Assigning Activity Roles .................................................................................................... 297 Configuring Activity Roles ................................................................................................. 298 Assigning Resource Curves to Resource or Role Assignments from the Activities Page299

About Activity Codes ................................................................................................................. 300 Creating Activity Code Values for Activities ..................................................................... 300 Assigning Activity Code Values to Activities .................................................................... 301

About Documents ..................................................................................................................... 302 Assigning Documents to Activities ................................................................................... 302

About Expenses ........................................................................................................................ 303 Creating Expenses ............................................................................................................ 303 Configuring Expenses ....................................................................................................... 303 Configuring Auto Compute Actuals for Expenses ........................................................... 304

About Feedback ....................................................................................................................... 304 Adding Feedback .............................................................................................................. 304 Adding the New Feedback Column ................................................................................. 305 Acknowledging Feedback ................................................................................................ 306

About Status ............................................................................................................................. 306 Configuring Status ............................................................................................................ 306 Configuring Status Units and Costs ................................................................................. 307

About Duration Types ............................................................................................................... 308 Working with Duration Types ........................................................................................... 308 Configuring Status Durations........................................................................................... 309

About Constraints ..................................................................................................................... 309 Working with Activity Constraints .................................................................................... 310 Configuring Status Constraints ........................................................................................ 310

About Issues ............................................................................................................................. 311 Creating Activity Issues .................................................................................................... 312 Configuring Activity Issues ............................................................................................... 312

About Notebooks ...................................................................................................................... 313 Working with Notebooks .................................................................................................. 313

About Notebook Topics ............................................................................................................ 313 Assigning Notebook Topics .............................................................................................. 313

About Relationships ................................................................................................................. 314 Creating Activity Relationships ........................................................................................ 314 Configuring Activity Relationships ................................................................................... 315 Assigning Predecessor Relationships ............................................................................. 316 Configuring Predecessor Relationships .......................................................................... 317 Assigning Successor Relationships ................................................................................. 318 Configuring Successor Relationships .............................................................................. 318

About Risks ............................................................................................................................... 319 Working with Project Risks .............................................................................................. 319 Assigning a Risk to an Activity ......................................................................................... 321

About Steps .............................................................................................................................. 322 Working with Activity Steps .............................................................................................. 322 Creating Activity Steps ..................................................................................................... 323 Configuring Activity Steps ................................................................................................ 324

About Step Templates .............................................................................................................. 324 Adding Activity Steps from a Step Template ................................................................... 324

About Trace Logic ..................................................................................................................... 325

P6 Help

14

Viewing Relationships with Trace Logic .......................................................................... 325 About Budget Change Logs ..................................................................................................... 326

Creating Budget Change Requests ................................................................................. 327 Approving/Denying Budget Change Requests ............................................................. 327

About Earned Value ................................................................................................................. 328 Configuring WBS Earned Value ....................................................................................... 329

About Milestones ..................................................................................................................... 329 Creating WBS Milestones ................................................................................................ 329

Team Usage ................................................................................................................................... 331

About Team Usage ................................................................................................................... 331 Customizing Team Usage ................................................................................................. 331 Assigning Resources to Unstaffed Activities ................................................................... 331 Exporting Team Usage Spreadsheets ............................................................................. 332 Searching Resources ....................................................................................................... 333 Sending E-Mail to a Project Manager .............................................................................. 334

Issues ............................................................................................................................................. 337

About Issues ............................................................................................................................. 337 Working with Issues ......................................................................................................... 337 Creating Project Issues .................................................................................................... 338 Configuring Project Issues ............................................................................................... 339 Customizing Project Issues .............................................................................................. 339 Assigning Related Items to Issues................................................................................... 340 Sending E-Mail about Issues ........................................................................................... 341

About Issue Codes ................................................................................................................... 342 Assigning Issue Codes...................................................................................................... 342

About Issue Forms ................................................................................................................... 342 Creating Issue Forms ....................................................................................................... 343 Assigning Projects to Issue Forms ................................................................................... 344

Risks ............................................................................................................................................... 345

About Risks ............................................................................................................................... 345 Risk Enterprise Data ................................................................................................................ 347

Working with Risks Enterprise Data ................................................................................ 347 Configuring Risk Enterprise Data .................................................................................... 347 Risk Thresholds ................................................................................................................ 349 About Risk Thresholds ..................................................................................................... 349

Working with Risk Thresholds .......................................................................................... 349 Creating Risk Thresholds ................................................................................................. 350 Modifying Risk Thresholds ............................................................................................... 351 Risk Scoring Matrices ...................................................................................................... 353 About Risk Scoring Matrices ............................................................................................ 353

Working with Risk Scoring Matrices ................................................................................ 354 Creating Risk Scoring Matrices ....................................................................................... 357 Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project ................................................................... 358 Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the Enterprise Data Pane ............... 358 Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the EPS Page .................................. 359 Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the Portfolios Section ..................... 359 Risk Categories ................................................................................................................. 361 About Risk Categories ...................................................................................................... 361

Creating Risk Categories .................................................................................................. 361 Risk UDFs .......................................................................................................................... 363 About Risk User Defined Fields ....................................................................................... 363

Contents

15

Creating Risk UDFs ........................................................................................................... 363 Project Risks ............................................................................................................................. 365

Working with Project Risks .............................................................................................. 365 Managing Project Risks ................................................................................................... 367 Creating Project Risks ...................................................................................................... 367

Adding Detailed Project-Level Risks ................................................................................ 367 Adding Project Risks to Activities .................................................................................... 368 Adding High-Level Project Risks ...................................................................................... 369 Assigning a Risk to an Activity ......................................................................................... 370

Risk Response Plans ........................................................................................................ 371

About Risk Response Plans ............................................................................................. 371 Working with Risk Response Plans ................................................................................. 371 Developing a Risk Response Plan ................................................................................... 372 Adding Risk Response Plans ........................................................................................... 372 Adding Risk Response Plan Action Items ....................................................................... 373 Assigning Activities to Risk Response Plan Action Items ............................................... 374 Exporting Risk Data .......................................................................................................... 374

Documents .................................................................................................................................... 377

About Documents ..................................................................................................................... 377 Working with Documents ................................................................................................. 377 Adding Documents to a Project without the Content Repository................................... 378 Assigning Documents to Workgroups ............................................................................. 379 Creating Document Folders ............................................................................................. 379

Creating Document Templates ........................................................................................ 380 Copying Documents from Existing Templates ................................................................ 381 Sending E-Mail about Documents ................................................................................... 382

About the Content Repository ................................................................................................. 383 Working with the Content Repository .............................................................................. 383 Adding Documents to a Project and Storing Them in the Content Repository ............. 384 Adding Documents to a Project from the Content Repository ....................................... 385 Checking Out Documents ................................................................................................ 386 Checking In Documents ................................................................................................... 387 Configuring Document Details ......................................................................................... 387 Assigning Related Items to Documents .......................................................................... 388

About Document Reviews ................................................................................................ 389 Reviewing Documents ...................................................................................................... 390

Creating Document Reviews ............................................................................................ 390

Searching for Documents ................................................................................................ 391 Searching for Documents (Advanced Search) ................................................................ 392

Searching for Documents (Quick Search) ....................................................................... 392

Viewing Documents .......................................................................................................... 393 Downloading Documents ................................................................................................. 394

About Scheduled Services ............................................................................................................ 395

Creating Scheduled Services ................................................................................................... 395 Configuring Scheduled Services.............................................................................................. 395

Resources ..................................................................................................................................... 397

Roles .............................................................................................................................................. 397

P6 Help

16

About Roles .............................................................................................................................. 397 Creating Roles .......................................................................................................................... 397 Assigning a Resource to a Role ............................................................................................... 398 Assigning a Role Team to a Role ............................................................................................. 399 Assigning Rates to Roles ......................................................................................................... 400 Assigning Work Limits to Roles ............................................................................................... 400

Role Teams .................................................................................................................................... 401

About Role Teams .................................................................................................................... 401 Creating Role Teams ................................................................................................................ 401 Assigning a Role to a Role Team ............................................................................................. 401

Resources ...................................................................................................................................... 403

About Resources ...................................................................................................................... 403 Adding Resources .................................................................................................................... 403 Assigning a Role to a Resource ............................................................................................... 404 Assigning a Resource Team to a Resource ............................................................................ 404 Configuring Resource Settings ................................................................................................ 405 Assigning Calendars to Resources .......................................................................................... 406 Configuring Timesheet Reporting for Resources ................................................................... 407

Configuring Resource Settings for Timesheet Reporting ............................................... 407 Assigning Resource Codes ...................................................................................................... 408 Assigning Resource Rates ....................................................................................................... 409 Creating Import Templates ...................................................................................................... 410 Importing Resource Data ......................................................................................................... 411

Resource Teams ............................................................................................................................ 413

About Resource Teams ............................................................................................................ 413 Creating Resource Teams ....................................................................................................... 413 Assigning a Resource to a Resource Team ............................................................................ 414

Resource Assignments ................................................................................................................. 415

About Resource Assignments .................................................................................................. 415 Working with Resource Assignments in the Gantt Chart ....................................................... 415

Viewing Resource Assignments in a Gantt Chart ........................................................... 415 Customizing the Resources Assignments Gantt Chart Bars .......................................... 416 Setting the Resources Detailed Assignments Gantt Chart Timescale .......................... 417 Modifying Resource Assignment Dates in the Gantt Chart ............................................ 417

Viewing Assignment Unit and Cost Spreads ........................................................................... 418 Exporting Resource Assignment Data .................................................................................... 419 Assigning Resource Curves to Resource or Role Assignments from the Resources Assignments

Page .......................................................................................................................................... 419 Applying the Progress Spotlight to the Resources Assignments View .................................. 420

Resource Planning ........................................................................................................................ 421

About Resource Planning ........................................................................................................ 421 Customizing the Resource Planning Spreadsheet ................................................................. 421 Assigning Projects or WBS Elements to Resources or Roles ................................................ 423 Assigning Resources or Roles to Projects or WBS Elements ................................................ 424 Modifying Resource or Role Assignment Dates ..................................................................... 425 Allocating Units or the Percentage of Available Units to Resources or Roles ...................... 426 Synchronizing Resource Planning Dates ................................................................................ 427 Splitting a Resource or Role Assignment ............................................................................... 428

Contents

17

Categorizing Resource or Role Assignments using Status Codes ........................................ 429 Exporting the Resource Planning Spreadsheet ...................................................................... 430

Resource Analysis ......................................................................................................................... 431

About Resource Analysis ......................................................................................................... 431 Analyzing Resource Allocations ............................................................................................... 431 Assigning Resources to Unstaffed Activities .......................................................................... 433 Viewing Role Usage .................................................................................................................. 434 Viewing Resource Usage.......................................................................................................... 435 Exporting Resource or Role Usage Data ................................................................................. 437

Exporting Resource Data .............................................................................................................. 438

Exporting Resource Administration Data ................................................................................ 438 Exporting Resource Assignment Data .................................................................................... 438 Exporting the Resource Planning Spreadsheet ...................................................................... 439 Exporting Resource or Role Usage Data ................................................................................. 439

Reports ......................................................................................................................................... 440

About Reports ................................................................................................................................ 440

Working with Reports ............................................................................................................... 442 Scheduling Reports .................................................................................................................. 443 Running Reports On-Demand.................................................................................................. 444 Exporting a List of Reports....................................................................................................... 445 Viewing the Report Run History ............................................................................................... 445

Administration............................................................................................................................... 447

About Administration ..................................................................................................................... 447

About My Preferences ................................................................................................................... 447

Working with My Preferences .................................................................................................. 448 Customizing My Preferences Global Preferences .................................................................. 449

Customizing Global Currency Preferences ...................................................................... 449 Customizing Global Date Format Preferences ................................................................ 449 Customizing Global General Preferences ....................................................................... 450 Customizing Global Issues Preferences .......................................................................... 450 Customizing Global Performance Threshold Preferences ............................................. 450 Customizing Global Project Score Preferences .............................................................. 451 Customizing Global Resources Preferences ................................................................... 451 Customizing Global Row Number Preferences ............................................................... 452 Customizing Global Time Units Format Preferences ...................................................... 452 Sending E-Mail Notifications about Resource Assignments .......................................... 453

Customizing My Preferences View Preferences ..................................................................... 454 Changing Your Own Password ................................................................................................. 455

About My Calendar ........................................................................................................................ 455

Configuring My Calendar ......................................................................................................... 456 Setting Work Hours Per Time Period for My Calendar ................................................... 456 Configuring the Standard Work Week for My Calendar ................................................. 456 Modifying Calendar Days on My Calendar ...................................................................... 456 Importing Events to My Calendar .................................................................................... 457

About Application Settings ............................................................................................................ 458

Working with Application Settings ........................................................................................... 458 Configuring Data Limits Settings ............................................................................................. 459

P6 Help

18

Configuring Earned Value Settings ......................................................................................... 459 Configuring General Settings................................................................................................... 460 Configuring ID Lengths Settings .............................................................................................. 461 Configuring Timesheets Settings ............................................................................................ 461 Configuring Time Periods Settings .......................................................................................... 462

About Enterprise Data ................................................................................................................... 462

Working with Enterprise Data .................................................................................................. 463 About Baseline Types ............................................................................................................... 464

Creating Baseline Types ................................................................................................... 464 About Funding Sources ............................................................................................................ 465

Creating Funding Sources ................................................................................................ 465 About Notebook Topics ............................................................................................................ 465

Creating Notebook Topics ................................................................................................ 465 About Calendars ....................................................................................................................... 466

Working with Calendars ................................................................................................... 466 Creating Global Calendars ............................................................................................... 467 Configuring Global Calendars .......................................................................................... 467 Setting Work Hours Per Time Period for Global Calendars ............................................ 468

Configuring the Standard Work Week for Global Calendars .......................................... 468

Modifying Calendar Days on Global Calendars............................................................... 468

Setting the Default Global Calendar................................................................................ 469

Creating Project Calendars .............................................................................................. 469 Configuring Project Calendars ......................................................................................... 470 Assigning a Base Calendar to a Project Calendar .......................................................... 470

Setting Work Hours Per Period for a Project Calendar ................................................... 470

Configuring the Standard Work Week for Project Calendars ......................................... 471

Modifying Calendar Days on Project Calendars .............................................................. 471

Changing a Project Calendar to a Global Calendar ........................................................ 472

Creating Resource Calendars .......................................................................................... 472 Configuring Resource Calendars ..................................................................................... 473 Assigning a Base Calendar to a Resource Calendar ...................................................... 473

Assigning a Resource to a Resource Calendar ............................................................... 474

Setting Work Hours Per Time Period for a Resource Calendar...................................... 474

Configuring the Standard Work Week for Resource Calendars ..................................... 475

Modifying Calendar Days ................................................................................................. 475

Changing the Calendar Type ............................................................................................ 476

About Project Codes ................................................................................................................. 476 Creating Project Codes ..................................................................................................... 476 Creating Project Code Values .......................................................................................... 477 Configuring Project Codes ................................................................................................ 478 Configuring Project Code Values ..................................................................................... 478

About User Defined Fields ....................................................................................................... 479 Creating Project UDFs ...................................................................................................... 479 Defining Formulas for User Defined Fields ..................................................................... 480 Defining Indicators for User Defined Fields .................................................................... 480 Defining Statements for User Defined Fields ................................................................. 481

Contents

19

Creating WBS UDFs .......................................................................................................... 482 Creating Activity UDFs ...................................................................................................... 483 Creating Expense UDFs .................................................................................................... 483 Creating Step UDFs .......................................................................................................... 483 Creating Risk UDFs ........................................................................................................... 484 Creating Issue UDFs ......................................................................................................... 484 Creating Document UDFs................................................................................................. 485 Creating Assignment UDFs .............................................................................................. 485 Creating Resource UDFs .................................................................................................. 485

About Work Breakdown Structures (WBS) .............................................................................. 486 Creating WBS Categories ................................................................................................. 486

About Activity Codes ................................................................................................................. 486 Creating Activity Codes ..................................................................................................... 487 Creating Activity Code Values .......................................................................................... 488 Configuring Activity Code Values ..................................................................................... 489 Configuring EPS-Level Activity Codes .............................................................................. 490

About Cost Accounts ................................................................................................................ 490 Creating Cost Accounts .................................................................................................... 490

About Expenses ........................................................................................................................ 491 Creating Expense Categories ........................................................................................... 491

About Step Templates .............................................................................................................. 492 Creating Step Templates ................................................................................................. 492 Configuring Step Templates ............................................................................................ 492

About Risks ............................................................................................................................... 493 Working with Risks Enterprise Data ................................................................................ 493 Configuring Risk Enterprise Data .................................................................................... 494 About Risk Scoring Matrices ............................................................................................ 494 Working with Risk Scoring Matrices ................................................................................ 495

Creating Risk Scoring Matrices........................................................................................ 498

Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project ................................................................... 499

Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the Enterprise Data Pane ............... 499

Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the EPS Page................................... 500

Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the Portfolios Section ..................... 500

About Risk Thresholds ..................................................................................................... 501 Working with Risk Thresholds .......................................................................................... 501

Creating Risk Thresholds ................................................................................................. 503

Modifying Risk Thresholds ............................................................................................... 504

About Risk Categories ...................................................................................................... 505 Creating Risk Categories .................................................................................................. 505

About Issues ............................................................................................................................. 506 Creating Issue Codes ....................................................................................................... 506 Creating Issue Code Values ............................................................................................. 507

About Document Categories and Statuses ............................................................................ 507 Creating Document Categories........................................................................................ 507 Creating Document Statuses ........................................................................................... 508

About Currencies ...................................................................................................................... 508 Adding a Currency ............................................................................................................ 509 Defining a Base Currency ................................................................................................ 509

About Financial Periods ........................................................................................................... 509

P6 Help

20

Creating Financial Periods ............................................................................................... 510 Creating a Financial Period Batch ................................................................................... 511

About Overhead Codes ............................................................................................................ 512 Creating Overhead Codes ................................................................................................ 512

About Timesheet Periods ......................................................................................................... 512 Creating Timesheet Periods ............................................................................................. 512

About Resource and Role Rate Types ..................................................................................... 513 Configuring Resource and Role Rate Types .................................................................... 513

About Resource Codes ............................................................................................................. 513 Creating Resource Codes ................................................................................................ 513 Creating Resource Code Values ...................................................................................... 514

About Resource Curves............................................................................................................ 515 Defining Resource Curves................................................................................................ 515

About Units of Measure ........................................................................................................... 516 Creating Units of Measure ............................................................................................... 516

About User Access ......................................................................................................................... 516

About Users .............................................................................................................................. 517 The Default Admin Superuser.......................................................................................... 517 Creating User Accounts for P6 EPPM .............................................................................. 517 Configuring User Access .................................................................................................. 519 Assigning Associated Resources ..................................................................................... 519

Assigning Global Security Profiles ................................................................................... 520

Assigning Module Access ................................................................................................. 520

Assigning OBS Elements to Users ................................................................................... 521

Assigning Resource Access.............................................................................................. 521

Assigning User Interface Views ........................................................................................ 522

Changing Passwords ........................................................................................................ 522 Changing User Passwords ............................................................................................... 523

Counting Users ................................................................................................................. 523 About the OBS .......................................................................................................................... 524

Creating an OBS ............................................................................................................... 524 Assigning Users to an OBS ............................................................................................... 525

About Security Profiles ............................................................................................................. 526 Working with Security Profiles ......................................................................................... 527 Creating Global Security Profiles ..................................................................................... 528 Creating Project Security Profiles .................................................................................... 529

About User Interface Views ........................................................................................................... 530

Working with User Interface Views .......................................................................................... 530 Creating User Interface Views ................................................................................................. 531 Configuring User Interface Views ............................................................................................ 533

Context-Sensitive Help Topics ...................................................................................................... 535

Access Tab of the Create Filter Dialog Box of the Assignments Page ....................................... 535

Access Tab of the Create or Modify Filter Dialog Box ................................................................. 535

Access Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box ............................................................... 536

Access Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page ........................................................................... 536

Access Tab of the Customize Project View Dialog Box................................................................ 537

Contents

21

Access Tab of the Customize Resources Assignments View Dialog Box of the Assignments Page

........................................................................................................................................................ 537

Access Tab of the Issue Forms Page ........................................................................................... 538

Action Required Tab of the Document Reviews Portlet .............................................................. 539

Action Required Tab of the Workflows Portlet ............................................................................. 540

Activities Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page ................................................... 543

Activities Detail Window of the Risks Page .................................................................................. 544

Activities Page ............................................................................................................................... 547

Activities Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page .................................................................. 550

Activities Work Area of the Timesheet Approval Page ................................................................ 551

Activity Codes Details Page of the Activity Form Page ................................................................ 554

Activity Codes Page ....................................................................................................................... 555

Activity Details Dialog Box of the Resource Staffing Dialog Box ................................................ 555

Activity Details of the Resources Dialog Box ............................................................................... 556

Activity Editing Tab of the User Interface View Details Page ...................................................... 557

Activity Form Page ......................................................................................................................... 558

Activity List for WBS Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 559

Activity Network Format of the Activities Page ............................................................................ 560

Activity Network Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box ................................................ 561

Activity Tab of the Modify Template Dialog Box of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box ........ 562

Activity UDFs Page ......................................................................................................................... 563

Add Activity Expenses Page of the Activity Form Page ................................................................ 564

Add Document Page (without Content Repository) ..................................................................... 565

Add Folder Dialog Box ................................................................................................................... 567

Add Issue Page .............................................................................................................................. 568

Add Steps Page of the Activity Form Page ................................................................................... 569

Add User Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................... 570

Add Users from LDAP Dialog Box of the Users Page ................................................................... 571

Administration Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page .......................................... 572

Administration Page ...................................................................................................................... 573

Advanced Tab of the Add Project Dialog Box ............................................................................... 574

Advanced Tab of the Add Project Template Dialog Box .............................................................. 576

Advanced Tab of the Scheduling Options Dialog Box ................................................................. 577

Analysis Page ................................................................................................................................. 579

Application Settings Pane ............................................................................................................. 579

Apply Actuals Dialog Box of the Activities Page ........................................................................... 580

Approve Document Review Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 581

Assign by Search Dialog Box of the Planning Page ..................................................................... 582

Assign Project Manager Delegate Dialog Box of the Timesheet Approval Page ....................... 584

Assign Resource Manager Delegate Dialog Box of the Timesheet Approval Page ................... 584

Assignment UDFs Page ................................................................................................................. 585

Assignments Detail Window of the Activities Page ..................................................................... 586

Assignments Page ......................................................................................................................... 590

P6 Help

22

Bars Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box ................................................................... 591

Bars Tab of the Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the Activities Page ................... 593

Bars Tab of the Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the Assignments Page ............ 595

Bars Tab of the Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the EPS Page ........................... 597

Bars Tab of the Customize Project View Dialog Box ................................................................... 598

Bars Tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the Assignments Page599

Baseline Types Page ..................................................................................................................... 600

Baselines Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 601

BEI - Activities with No Project Baseline Finish Date Section of the Schedule Check Report Dialog

Box.................................................................................................................................................. 602

Budget Log Detail Window of the EPS Page ................................................................................ 603

Calculations Page of the Project Preferences Dialog Box .......................................................... 604

Calendar Tab of the Global Calendars Page ................................................................................ 605

Calendar Tab of the Project Calendars Page ............................................................................... 606

Calendar Tab of the Resource Calendars Page .......................................................................... 607

Calendar Tab of the View Calendar Dialog Box ........................................................................... 609

Calendar Tab of the View Calendar Dialog Box ........................................................................... 611

Calendar View Format of the Activities Page ............................................................................... 612

Cause Detail Window of the Risks Page ...................................................................................... 613

Change Password Dialog Box of the Users Page ........................................................................ 613

Chart Tab of the Customize Project Issues Dialog Box ............................................................... 614

Check Schedule Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 616

Check Summary Section of the Schedule Check Report Dialog Box ......................................... 619

Codes Detail Window of the Activities Page ................................................................................ 620

Codes Detail Window of the EPS Page ........................................................................................ 620

Codes Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page ........................................................ 621

Codes Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page ....................................................... 624

Codes Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page .................................. 625

Codes Section of the Activity Form Page ..................................................................................... 626

Columns Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box ............................................................ 627

Columns Tab of the Customize Cost Worksheet Dialog Box ...................................................... 628

Columns Tab of the Customize Project Issues Dialog Box ......................................................... 628

Columns Tab of the Customize Project Statistics Dialog Box ..................................................... 629

Columns Tab of the Customize Project View Dialog Box ............................................................ 630

Columns Tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the Assignments Page

........................................................................................................................................................ 631

Columns Tab of the Customize Risks Portlet Dialog Box ............................................................ 632

Columns Tab of the Customize Scorecards Dialog Box of the Portfolio Views Section of the

Customize Dashboard Page ......................................................................................................... 633

Columns Tab of the Customize Spreadsheet Dialog Box of the Planning Page ........................ 634

Common Screen Elements for Customizing Columns or Values ................................................ 634

Communication Center Portlet of the Dashboards Page ............................................................ 635

Communication Center Portlet of the Workspace Page ............................................................. 636

Contents

23

Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page ......................................................................... 637

Content Tab of the Customize Workgroup Workspace Page ...................................................... 638

Content Tab of the User Interface View Details Page ................................................................. 639

Content Tab of the Workspace Details Page ............................................................................... 643

Contract Documents Portlet of the Workspace Page ................................................................. 644

Contract Issues Portlet of the Workspace Page .......................................................................... 644

Contract Management Page of the Project Preferences Dialog Box ......................................... 645

Contract Management Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page .......... 645

Contract Management Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Workspace Page .......... 646

Contract Reports Portlet of the Workspace Page ........................................................................ 648

Copy Project Options Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 648

Cost Accounts Page ....................................................................................................................... 650

Cost Worksheet Portlet ................................................................................................................. 651

Count Dialog Box of the Users Page............................................................................................. 652

Create Filter Dialog Box of the Assignments Page ...................................................................... 652

Create or Modify Filter Dialog Box of the Activities Page ............................................................ 653

Create Portfolio Page .................................................................................................................... 654

Critical Activities Behind Schedule Portlet of the Workspace Page ........................................... 655

Currencies Page ............................................................................................................................ 656

Currency Section of Global Tab of the My Preferences Page ..................................................... 658

Curve Definition Detail Window of the Resource Curves Page .................................................. 659

Custom Field Mapping Tab of the Modify Template Dialog Box of the Import/Export Project Dialog

Box.................................................................................................................................................. 659

Custom Portlet ............................................................................................................................... 660

Custom Portlet Section of the Content Tab of the Workspace Page ......................................... 661

Custom Portlets Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page ..................... 661

Customize Activity List for WBS Dialog Box ................................................................................. 662

Customize Activity Network Dialog Box of the Activities Page .................................................... 662

Customize Activity View Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 664

Customize Capacity Planning Chart Tab ...................................................................................... 665

Customize Capacity Planning Columns Tab ................................................................................ 666

Customize Capacity Planning Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 667

Customize Capacity Planning Grouping Tab ................................................................................ 668

Customize Capacity Planning Waterline Tab ............................................................................... 669

Customize Chart Dialog Box of the Resource Analysis Chart Portlet ......................................... 670

Customize Chart Dialog Box of the Resource Analysis Tab of the Analysis Page ..................... 671

Customize Columns Dialog Box of the Activities Page ................................................................ 672

Customize Columns Dialog Box of the EPS Page ........................................................................ 673

Customize Cost Worksheet Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 674

Customize Dashboard Page ......................................................................................................... 674

Customize Detail Windows Dialog Box of the Activities Page ..................................................... 675

Customize Detail Windows Dialog Box of the EPS Page ............................................................. 676

Customize Dialog Box of the Portfolio View Portlet ..................................................................... 676

P6 Help

24

Customize Dialog Box of the Team Usage Page .......................................................................... 678

Customize Filters Dialog Box of the Activities Page .................................................................... 680

Customize Filters Dialog Box of the Assignments Page .............................................................. 681

Customize Filters Dialog Box of the EPS Page ............................................................................ 682

Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the Activities Page ............................................. 682

Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the Assignments Page ....................................... 683

Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the EPS Page ..................................................... 683

Customize Groupings Dialog Box of the Activities Page ............................................................. 684

Customize Groupings Dialog Box of the EPS Page ...................................................................... 685

Customize Project Issues Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 686

Customize Project Score Dialog Box of the Project Score Section of the Global Tab of the My

Preferences Page .......................................................................................................................... 687

Customize Project Statistics Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 688

Customize Project View Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 688

Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the Assignments Page ......................... 689

Customize Risks Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 690

Customize Scorecard Columns Tab ............................................................................................. 691

Customize Scorecard Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 692

Customize Scorecard Dialog Box of the Portfolio Views Section of the Customize Dashboard Page

........................................................................................................................................................ 693

Customize Scorecard Group Tab .................................................................................................. 693

Customize Scorecard Waterline Tab ............................................................................................ 695

Customize Spreadsheet Dialog Box of the Planning Page ......................................................... 697

Customize Spreadsheet or Histogram Dialog Box of the Analysis Page .................................... 697

Customize Toolbar Items Dialog Box............................................................................................ 698

Customize Toolbar Items Dialog Box of the Assignments Page ................................................. 699

Customize Usage Options Dialog Box of the Assignments Page ................................................ 700

Dashboards Page .......................................................................................................................... 700

Data Limits Page ........................................................................................................................... 702

Date Format Section of the Global Tab of the My Preferences Page ........................................ 702

Day View Detail Window of the Calendar View of the Activities Page ........................................ 703

Defaults Page of the Project Preferences Dialog Box ................................................................. 704

Definition Tab of the Create Filter Dialog Box of the Assignments Page ................................... 706

Definition Tab of the Create or Modify Filter Dialog Box ............................................................. 707

Description Detail Window of the Cost Accounts Page ............................................................... 709

Description Detail Window of the EPS Page ................................................................................ 710

Description Detail Window of the Funding Sources Page .......................................................... 710

Description Detail Window of the OBS Page ............................................................................... 711

Description Detail Window of the Reports Page ......................................................................... 711

Description Detail Window of the Risk Scoring Matrices Page .................................................. 712

Description Detail Window of the Risks Page ............................................................................. 712

Description Detail Window of the Roles Tab of the Administration Page .................................. 713

Description Section of the Documents Details Page (without content repository) ................... 713

Contents

25

Description Tab of the Document Details Section (with content repository) ............................ 714

Document Categories Page .......................................................................................................... 715

Document Details Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 715

Document Details Page of the Documents Page (without content repository) ......................... 716

Document Details Section of the Documents Page (with content repository) .......................... 717

Document Review Details Dialog Box of the Project Tab ........................................................... 718

Document Reviews Portlet ........................................................................................................... 720

Document Statuses Page ............................................................................................................. 720

Document UDFs Page ................................................................................................................... 721

Documents Detail Window of the Activities Page ....................................................................... 721

Documents Details Page of the Activity Form Page .................................................................... 722

Documents Page (with content repository) ................................................................................. 723

Documents Page (without content repository) ............................................................................ 724

Documents Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page ............................................................. 725

Documents Section of the Activity Form Page ............................................................................ 726

Earned Value Page ........................................................................................................................ 727

Earned Value Performance Portlet of the Dashboards Page ..................................................... 728

Earned Value Performance Portlet of the Workspace Page ....................................................... 729

Edit Dates and Constraints Page of the Activity Form Page ....................................................... 731

Edit Day Dialog Box of Calendars ................................................................................................. 734

Edit Duration and Units Page of the Activity Form Page ............................................................. 736

Edit Relationship Dialog Box of the Activities Page ..................................................................... 737

Edit Resource Assignment Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 738

Edit Resource Assignment Section of Activity Details of the Resources Dialog Box................. 739

Edit Resource or Role Details Page of the Open Requests for Resources Portlet .................... 741

Add or Edit Service Dialog Box of the Scheduled Services Page ............................................... 742

Edit Spending and Benefit Plans of Project Page ....................................................................... 743

Effect Detail Window of the Risks Page ....................................................................................... 744

Enterprise Data Page .................................................................................................................... 745

Enterprise Project Data Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 747

Enterprise Resource Data Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 749

EPS and Projects Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page ..................................... 750

EPS Budget Log Detail Window of the EPS Page ........................................................................ 752

EPS Funding Detail Window of the EPS Page .............................................................................. 753

EPS General Detail Window of the EPS Page .............................................................................. 754

EPS Notebooks Detail Window of the EPS Page ......................................................................... 755

EPS Page ........................................................................................................................................ 755

EPS Tab of the Activity Codes Page .............................................................................................. 757

Exceptions Section of the Leveling Report Log ........................................................................... 758

Exceptions Section of the Scheduling Report Dialog Box of the Activities Page ....................... 759

Expense Categories Page ............................................................................................................. 760

Expense Details Page of the Activity Form Page ......................................................................... 760

Expense UDFs Page ...................................................................................................................... 762

P6 Help

26

Expenses Detail Window of the Activities Page ........................................................................... 763

Expenses Section of the Activity Form Page ................................................................................ 765

Export Tab of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box ................................................................... 767

Feedback Detail Window of the Activities Page .......................................................................... 767

Filter Tab of the Customize Project Issues Dialog Box ................................................................ 768

Filter Tab of the Customize Risks Dialog Box .............................................................................. 770

Filters Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box ................................................................. 771

Filters Tab of the Customize Project View Dialog Box ................................................................. 771

Filters Tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the Assignments Page772

Financial Periods Page .................................................................................................................. 773

Formula Detail Window of the Project UDFs Page ...................................................................... 774

Funding Detail Window of the EPS Page ..................................................................................... 775

Funding Sources Page .................................................................................................................. 776

Gantt Chart Format of the Activities Page ................................................................................... 776

Gantt Chart Format of the EPS Page ............................................................................................ 778

Gantt Chart Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box ........................................................ 779

Gantt Chart Tab of the Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the Activities Page ....... 780

Gantt Chart Tab of the Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the Assignments Page 782

Gantt Chart Tab of the Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the EPS Page ............... 782

Gantt Chart Tab of the Customize Project View Dialog Box ........................................................ 783

Gantt Chart Tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the Assignments Page

........................................................................................................................................................ 784

General Detail Window of the Activities Page ............................................................................. 785

General Detail Window of the EPS Page ...................................................................................... 789

General Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page ............................... 791

General Page ................................................................................................................................. 793

General Page of the Project Preferences Dialog Box .................................................................. 794

General Section of the Activity Form Page .................................................................................. 795

General Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page ................................... 798

General Section of the Documents Details Page (without content repository) ......................... 799

General Section of the Global Tab of the My Preferences Page ................................................ 800

General Tab of the Add Project Dialog Box .................................................................................. 802

General Tab of the Add Project Template Dialog Box ................................................................. 803

General Tab of the Customize Spreadsheet Dialog Box of the Planning Page ......................... 804

General Tab of the Document Details Section ............................................................................ 805

General Tab of the Modify Template Dialog Box of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box ...... 808

General Tab of the Scheduling Options Dialog Box .................................................................... 809

Generate Financial Periods Dialog Box of the Financial Periods Page ...................................... 811

Generate Timesheet Periods Dialog Box of the Timesheet Periods Page ................................. 812

Global Calendars Page .................................................................................................................. 813

Global Data Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page ............................................... 814

Global Data Section of the Import Tab of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box ...................... 815

Global Security Profiles Page ........................................................................................................ 816

Contents

27

Global Tab of the Activity Codes Page.......................................................................................... 817

Global Tab of the My Preferences Page ....................................................................................... 818

Group Tab of the Customize Cost Worksheet Dialog Box ........................................................... 819

Group Tab of the Customize Project Issues Dialog Box .............................................................. 820

Group Tab of the Customize Project Statistics Dialog Box ......................................................... 822

Group Tab of the Customize Scorecard Dialog Box of the Portfolio Views Section of the Customize

Dashboard Page ............................................................................................................................ 823

Grouping Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box ............................................................ 824

Grouping Tab of the Customize Project View Dialog Box ............................................................ 826

Grouping Tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the Assignments Page

........................................................................................................................................................ 828

Hard Constraints - Constraints That Prevent Activities Being Moved Section of the Schedule Check

Report Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................... 829

History Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................... 830

History of Workflow Instance Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 831

History Tab of the Document Details Section (with content repository) .................................... 832

ID Lengths Page ............................................................................................................................ 833

Impacts Detail Window of the Risk Scoring Matrices Page ........................................................ 834

Import Calendar Events Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 835

Import Tab of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box ................................................................... 835

Import/Export Project Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 837

Index Performance Portlet of the Dashboards Page ................................................................... 838

Index Performance Portlet of the Workspace Page .................................................................... 839

Indicators Detail Window of the Project UDFs Page ................................................................... 841

Invalid Progress Dates - Activities with Actual Dates After the Data Date Section of the Schedule

Check Report Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 842

Invalid Progress Dates - Incomplete Activities Before the Data Date Section of the Schedule Check

Report Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................... 844

Issue Codes Page .......................................................................................................................... 845

Issue Codes Section of the Issue Forms Page ............................................................................ 846

Issue Details Page ......................................................................................................................... 846

Issue Form Tab of the Issue Forms Page .................................................................................... 849

Issue Forms Page .......................................................................................................................... 850

Issue UDFs Page............................................................................................................................ 851

Issues Detail Window of the Activities Page ................................................................................ 852

Issues Detail Window of the EPS Page ........................................................................................ 853

Issues Page .................................................................................................................................... 854

Issues Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page ...................................................................... 857

Issues Section of the Global Tab of the My Preferences Page ................................................... 859

Lags - Relationships with a Positive Lag Duration Section of the Schedule Check Report Dialog Box

........................................................................................................................................................ 860

Large Durations - Activities That Have a Remaining Duration Greater Than 352 Hours Section of the

Schedule Check Report Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 861

P6 Help

28

Large Float - Activities with a Total Float Greater Than 352 Hours Section of the Schedule Check

Report Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................... 862

Late Activities - Activities Scheduled to Finish Later Than the Project Baseline Section of the

Schedule Check Report Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 863

Layout Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page ........................................................................... 864

Layout Tab of the Customize Workgroup Workspace Page ........................................................ 865

Layout Tab of the Workspace Details Page ................................................................................. 866

Level Resources Dialog Box of the Activities Page...................................................................... 867

Leveling Report Log ....................................................................................................................... 867

Leveling Results Section of the Leveling Report Log .................................................................. 868

Leveling Settings Section of the Leveling Report Log ................................................................. 869

Leveling Warnings Section of the Leveling Report Log ............................................................... 870

Levels Detail Window of the Risk Thresholds Page .................................................................... 871

Limits Detail Window of the Roles Tab of the Administration Page ........................................... 872

Links to Closed Projects - Activities with Links to Closed Projects Section of the Schedule Check

Report Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................... 872

Logic - Activities Missing Predecessors or Successors Section of the Schedule Check Report Dialog

Box.................................................................................................................................................. 874

Long Lags - Relationships with a Lag Duration Greater Than 352 Hours Section of the Schedule

Check Report Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 875

Manage Dashboards Page ........................................................................................................... 876

Manage Portfolio Views Page ....................................................................................................... 877

Manage Portfolios Page ................................................................................................................ 878

Manage Scenarios Page ............................................................................................................... 879

Milestone Status Portlet of the Workspace Page ........................................................................ 880

Modify Template Dialog Box of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box ....................................... 881

Module Access Detail Window of the Users Page ....................................................................... 882

My Activities Portlet ....................................................................................................................... 884

My Calendar Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 886

My Calendar Portlet ....................................................................................................................... 887

My Documents Portlet ................................................................................................................... 887

My Issues Portlet ........................................................................................................................... 888

My Preferences Page .................................................................................................................... 890

My Projects Portlet ........................................................................................................................ 890

My Reviews Tab of the Document Reviews Portlet ..................................................................... 892

My Risks Portlet ............................................................................................................................. 893

My Workflows Tab of the Workflows Portlet ................................................................................ 894

My Workgroups Portlet of the Dashboards Page ........................................................................ 896

Negative Float - Activities with a Total Float Less Than 0 Section of the Schedule Check Report

Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................................... 897

Negative Lags - Relationships with a Lag Duration of Less Than 0 Section of the Schedule Check

Report Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................... 898

Notebook Details Page of the Activity Form Page ....................................................................... 899

Notebook Section of Activity Details of the Resources Dialog Box ............................................ 900

Contents

29

Notebook Section of the Activity Details Dialog Box ................................................................... 901

Notebook Section of the Activity Form Page ............................................................................... 902

Notebook Topics Page .................................................................................................................. 903

Notebook Topics Portlet of the Workspace Page ........................................................................ 904

Notebooks Detail Window of the Activities Page ......................................................................... 904

Notebooks Detail Window of the EPS Page ................................................................................. 905

Notebooks Tab of the Modify Project Template Dialog Box of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box

........................................................................................................................................................ 906

Notes Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page ................................... 907

Notes Detail Window of the Risks Page ....................................................................................... 907

OBS Page ....................................................................................................................................... 908

Open a Request for a Resource Dialog Box................................................................................. 908

Open a Request for a Resource Dialog Box of the Assignments Detail Window of the Activities Page

........................................................................................................................................................ 909

Open Portfolio Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 910

Open Projects Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 911

Open Requests for Resources Portlet .......................................................................................... 912

Options Tab of the Level Resources Dialog Box of the Activities Page ...................................... 912

Options Tab of the Report Settings Dialog Box ........................................................................... 914

Overallocated Resources Portlet of the Workspace Page .......................................................... 916

Overhead Codes Page ................................................................................................................... 916

Password Tab of the My Preferences Page ................................................................................. 917

Performance Threshold Section of the Content Tab of the Workspace Page ........................... 918

Performance Threshold Section of the Global Tab of the My Preferences Page ...................... 920

Planning Page ................................................................................................................................ 922

Portfolio Analysis Page .................................................................................................................. 925

Portfolio Capacity Planning Page ................................................................................................. 926

Portfolio Details Page .................................................................................................................... 928

Portfolio Gantt Chart Page ............................................................................................................ 930

Portfolio Performance Status Page .............................................................................................. 931

Portfolio ROI Page ......................................................................................................................... 933

Portfolio Scenario Details Page .................................................................................................... 935

Portfolio Scenario Notes Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 936

Portfolio Scenario Save As Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 937

Portfolio View Details Page ........................................................................................................... 937

Portfolio View Portlet ..................................................................................................................... 940

Portfolio View Save As Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 943

Portfolios Page .............................................................................................................................. 943

Predecessors Detail Window of the Activities Page .................................................................... 944

Predecessors Section of the Relationships Section of the Activity Form Page ......................... 945

Prices Detail Window of the Roles Tab of the Administration Page ........................................... 946

Private Documents Tab of the My Documents Portlet (with content repository) ...................... 947

Probability and Impact Diagram Detail Window of the Risk Scoring Matrices Page ................ 948

P6 Help

30

Probability and Impact Diagram Detail Window of the Risks Page ............................................ 948

Probability Detail Window of the Risk Scoring Matrices Page .................................................... 949

Progress Reporter Page of the Project Preferences Dialog Box ................................................. 950

Project Access Detail Window of the Users Page ........................................................................ 950

Project Calendar Portlet of the Workspace Page ........................................................................ 951

Project Calendars Page ................................................................................................................. 952

Project Codes Page ....................................................................................................................... 952

Project Collaboration Section of the Content Tab of the Workspace Details Page ................... 954

Project Data Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page ............................................. 954

Project Data Section of the Import Tab of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box ..................... 956

Project Documents Portlet of the Workspace Page (with content repository) .......................... 957

Project Documents Portlet of the Workspace Page (without content repository) ..................... 957

Project Gantt Chart Portlet ............................................................................................................ 958

Project Health Portlet of the Dashboards Page ........................................................................... 960

Project Health Portlet of the Workspace Page ............................................................................ 960

Project Issues Portlet of the Workspace Page ............................................................................ 961

Project Notebooks Portlet of the Dashboards Page ................................................................... 963

Project Preferences Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 964

Project Risks Portlet ...................................................................................................................... 965

Project Score Section of Global Tab of the My Preferences Page.............................................. 966

Project Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Workspace Page .................................... 967

Project Security Profiles Page ....................................................................................................... 968

Project Statistics Page .................................................................................................................. 970

Project Statistics Portlet................................................................................................................ 971

Project Tab of the Activity Codes Page ......................................................................................... 973

Project Tab of the Documents Page (with content repository) ................................................... 974

Project Tab of the Documents Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page ............................... 974

Project Tab of the Project Documents Portlet of the Workspace Page (with content repository)975

Project UDFs Page ......................................................................................................................... 976

Projects Checked Have Links to the Following Closed Projects Section of the Schedule Check Report

Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................................... 977

Projects Checked Section of the Schedule Check Report Dialog Box ....................................... 978

Projects Detail Window of the Risk Scoring Matrices Page ........................................................ 979

Projects Page ................................................................................................................................. 980

Rate Types Page ............................................................................................................................ 981

Recent Documents Tab of the My Documents Portlet ................................................................ 982

Reject Document Review Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 982

Related Applications Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page................................ 983

Related Items Section of the Document Details Page (without content repository) ................ 984

Related Items Tab of the Document Details Section (with content repository) ........................ 985

Relationship Types - The Majority of Relationships Should be Finish to Start Section of the Schedule

Check Report Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 986

Relationships Details Page of the Activity Form Page ................................................................ 988

Contents

31

Relationships Section of the Activity Form Page ......................................................................... 989

Report Settings Dialog Box ........................................................................................................... 990

Report Settings Dialog Box (Add Report Schedule) .................................................................... 991

Reports Page ................................................................................................................................. 992

Reports View of the Reports Page ................................................................................................ 993

Request for Information (RFI) Portlet of the Workspace Page ................................................... 994

Resource Analysis Chart Portlet ................................................................................................... 995

Resource Analysis Tab of the Analysis Page ............................................................................... 997

Resource Assignments Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page ............................ 998

Resource Calendars Page.......................................................................................................... 1000

Resource Codes Page ................................................................................................................ 1000

Resource Curves Page ............................................................................................................... 1001

Resource Details Page of the Activity Form Page .................................................................... 1002

Resource Search Criteria Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 1005

Resource Search Results Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 1008

Resource Staffing Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 1010

Resource Staffing Dialog Box of the Team Usage Page .......................................................... 1012

Resource Tab of the Modify Template Dialog Box of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box . 1013

Resource Team Summary Portlet ............................................................................................. 1014

Resource Teams Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page .............. 1016

Resource Teams Tab of the Administration Page .................................................................... 1016

Resource UDFs Page .................................................................................................................. 1017

Resource Usage Tab of the Analysis Page ................................................................................ 1018

Resource/Cost - Activities That Do Not Have an Expense or a Resource Assigned Section of the

Schedule Check Report Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 1019

Resources Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page .............................................. 1020

Resources Detail Window of the Resource Teams Tab of the Administration Page .............. 1022

Resources Detail Window of the Roles Tab of the Administration Page ................................ 1023

Resources Page .......................................................................................................................... 1024

Resources Section of Activity Details of the Resources Dialog Box ........................................ 1024

Resources Section of the Activity Details Dialog Box ............................................................... 1026

Resources Section of the Activity Form Page ........................................................................... 1028

Resources Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page ........................... 1029

Resources Section of the Global Tab of the My Preferences Page ......................................... 1031

Resources Tab of the Administration Page .............................................................................. 1033

Resources Tab of the Level Resources Dialog Box of the Activities Page .............................. 1037

Response Plans Detail Window of the Risks Page ................................................................... 1037

Responsibility Detail Window of the OBS Page ........................................................................ 1041

Return on Investment of Project Page ...................................................................................... 1041

RFI Turnaround Portlet of the Workspace Page ....................................................................... 1043

Risk Categories Page ................................................................................................................. 1044

Risk Scoring Matrices Page ....................................................................................................... 1044

Risk Thresholds Page ................................................................................................................. 1046

P6 Help

32

Risk UDFs Page .......................................................................................................................... 1047

Risks Detail Window ................................................................................................................... 1047

Risks Detail Window of the Activities Page ............................................................................... 1049

Risks Page .................................................................................................................................. 1050

Role Teams Detail Window of the Roles Tab of the Administration Page .............................. 1053

Role Teams Tab of the Administration Page ............................................................................ 1054

Role Usage Tab of the Analysis Page ........................................................................................ 1054

Roles Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page ................................ 1056

Roles Detail Window of the Role Teams Tab of the Administration Page .............................. 1057

Roles Tab of the Administration Page ....................................................................................... 1057

Safety Portlet .............................................................................................................................. 1058

Schedule Check Report Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 1059

Schedule Detail Window of the Reports Page .......................................................................... 1061

Schedule Performance Portlet of the Dashboards Page ......................................................... 1063

Schedule Performance Portlet of the Workspace Page ........................................................... 1064

Schedule Project Dialog Box of the Activities Page .................................................................. 1065

Schedule Tab of the Report Settings Dialog Box...................................................................... 1066

Scheduled Services Page .......................................................................................................... 1067

Schedules View of the Reports Page ........................................................................................ 1068

Scheduling Options Dialog Box.................................................................................................. 1070

Scheduling Report Dialog Box of the Activities Page ............................................................... 1071

Scheduling Results Section of the Leveling Report Log .......................................................... 1072

Scheduling Results Section of the Scheduling Report Dialog Box of the Activities Page ...... 1072

Scheduling Settings Section of the Leveling Report Log ......................................................... 1073

Scheduling Settings Section of the Scheduling Report Dialog Box of the Activities Page ..... 1075

Select Projects Dialog Box of the Project Calendars Page ...................................................... 1077

Select Projects Dialog Box of the Project Tab of the Activity Codes Page .............................. 1078

Send Projects to ERP Dialog Box of the Activities Page ........................................................... 1079

Service Status Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 1080

Service Summary Detail Window .............................................................................................. 1081

Set Time Periods Dialog Box of Calendars ............................................................................... 1081

Settings Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page ............................ 1083

Soft Constraints - Constraints That Do Not Prevent Activities Being Moved Section of the Schedule

Check Report Dialog Box ........................................................................................................... 1084

Standard Work Week Tab of the Global Calendars Page ........................................................ 1085

Standard Work Week Tab of the Project Calendars Page ....................................................... 1086

Standard Work Week Tab of the Resource Calendars Page ................................................... 1087

Standard Work Week Tab of the View Calendar Dialog Box .................................................... 1088

Standard Work Week Tab of the View Calendar Dialog Box .................................................... 1089

Start Review Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 1090

Statistics Section of the Leveling Report Log ........................................................................... 1092

Statistics Section of the Scheduling Report Dialog Box of the Activities Page ...................... 1093

Status Section of the Activity Form Page .................................................................................. 1094

Contents

33

Status Tab of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box ................................................................ 1097

Step Templates Page ................................................................................................................. 1098

Step UDFs Page .......................................................................................................................... 1098

Steps Detail Window of the Activities Page .............................................................................. 1099

Steps Detail Window of the Step Templates Page ................................................................... 1101

Steps Details Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 1101

Steps Details of Activity Details of the Resources Dialog Box ................................................. 1102

Steps Details Page of the Activity Form Page ........................................................................... 1103

Steps Section of Activity Details of the Resources Dialog Box ................................................ 1104

Steps Section of the Activity Details Dialog Box ....................................................................... 1106

Steps Section of the Activity Form Page ................................................................................... 1107

Store Period Performance Dialog Box of the Activities Page ................................................... 1108

Submittals Portlet ....................................................................................................................... 1109

Successors Detail Window of the Activities Page..................................................................... 1110

Successors Section of the Relationships Section of the Activity Form Page ......................... 1111

Summarization Page of the Project Preferences Dialog Box ................................................... 1112

Summary Indicators Detail Window of the Project UDFs Page ............................................... 1113

Table Format of the Activities Page ........................................................................................... 1115

Table Format of the EPS Page ................................................................................................... 1115

Team Usage Page ....................................................................................................................... 1116

Templates Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page .............................................. 1118

Time Periods Page ...................................................................................................................... 1119

Time Units Format Section of the Global Tab of the My Preferences Page ............................ 1120

Timesheet Approval Page .......................................................................................................... 1121

Timesheet Periods Page ............................................................................................................ 1123

Timesheet Table of the Timesheet Approval Page ................................................................... 1123

Timesheets Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page............................................ 1125

Timesheets Page ........................................................................................................................ 1125

Tolerance Detail Window of the Risk Scoring Matrices Page .................................................. 1127

Tools Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page ....................................................... 1128

Tools Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page ...................................................... 1129

Trace Logic Detail Window of the Activities Page ..................................................................... 1130

Units and Prices Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page .............. 1131

Units of Measure Page ............................................................................................................... 1132

Usage Page of the Resource Team Summary Portlet .............................................................. 1133

Usage Tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the Assignments Page

..................................................................................................................................................... 1134

Used By Tab of the Global Calendars Page .............................................................................. 1135

Used By Tab of the Project Calendars Page ............................................................................. 1135

Used By Tab of the Resource Calendars Page ......................................................................... 1136

User Access Page ....................................................................................................................... 1136

User Defined Fields Section of the Issue Forms Page ............................................................. 1136

User Defined Section of the Activity Form Page ....................................................................... 1137

P6 Help

34

User Interface View Details Page .............................................................................................. 1138

User Interface Views Page ......................................................................................................... 1139

Users Detail Window of the OBS Page ...................................................................................... 1140

Users Page .................................................................................................................................. 1141

Users Tab of the User Interface View Details Page .................................................................. 1144

Version Tab of the Document Details Section (with content repository) ................................ 1145

View Calendar Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 1147

View Calendar Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 1147

View Tab of the My Preferences Page ....................................................................................... 1148

Views and Reports Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page ................................. 1152

Views and Reports Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page ................................ 1153

Warnings Section of the Leveling Report Log ........................................................................... 1154

Warnings Section of the Scheduling Report Dialog Box of the Activities Page ...................... 1155

WBS Budget Log Detail Window of the Activities Page ............................................................ 1156

WBS Category Page .................................................................................................................... 1157

WBS Documents Detail Window of the Activities Page ............................................................ 1157

WBS Earned Value Detail Window of the Activities Page ........................................................ 1158

WBS General Detail Window of the Activities Page .................................................................. 1160

WBS Issues Detail Window of the Activities Page .................................................................... 1162

WBS Milestones Detail Window of the Activities Page ............................................................ 1164

WBS Notebooks Detail Window of the Activities Page ............................................................. 1164

WBS UDFs Page.......................................................................................................................... 1165

Workflow Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page ............................. 1166

Workflows Portlet ....................................................................................................................... 1166

Workgroup Tab of the Documents Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page ..................... 1167

Workgroups Details Page ........................................................................................................... 1168

Workgroups Portlet of the Workspace Page ............................................................................. 1169

Working with the Activity Gantt Chart........................................................................................ 1169

Workspace Details Page ............................................................................................................ 1170

Workspace of Workgroup Page ................................................................................................. 1171

Workspace Page ......................................................................................................................... 1172

WP & Docs Tab of the Documents Page (with content repository) ......................................... 1173

WP & Docs Tab of the Project Documents Portlet of the Workspace Page (with content repository)

..................................................................................................................................................... 1174

Reference Topics ........................................................................................................................ 1175

Action Required for Document Reviews Toolbar ...................................................................... 1175

Action Required for Workflows Toolbar ..................................................................................... 1175

Actions Menu of the Assignments Page ................................................................................... 1177

Actions Menu on Activities Page ............................................................................................... 1178

Actions Menu on EPS Page ........................................................................................................ 1180

Activities Toolbar ........................................................................................................................ 1182

Activity View Toolbar ................................................................................................................... 1182

Contents

35

Applying Actuals Based on the Auto Compute Actuals Method (Reference) .......................... 1184

Applying Actuals Based on the Timesheets Method (Reference) ........................................... 1184

Assignments Toolbar .................................................................................................................. 1185

Assignments Toolbar of the Activities Page .............................................................................. 1187

Assignments View Toolbar ......................................................................................................... 1188

Available Columns of the Activities Page .................................................................................. 1189

Available Columns of the Assignments Page ........................................................................... 1213

Available Columns of the EPS Page .......................................................................................... 1223

Baselines Dialog Box Toolbar .................................................................................................... 1243

Bubble Chart Settings Area ....................................................................................................... 1244

Budget Log Toolbar .................................................................................................................... 1245

Capacity Planning Chart Toolbar ............................................................................................... 1245

Capacity Planning Toolbar ......................................................................................................... 1247

Codes Toolbar of the Activities Page ......................................................................................... 1248

Codes Toolbar of the EPS Page ................................................................................................. 1249

Command Line Support ............................................................................................................. 1249

Customizable Menus.................................................................................................................. 1249

Customizable Toolbars ............................................................................................................... 1250

Document Search Criteria ......................................................................................................... 1250

Document Security (Reference) ................................................................................................ 1251

Documents Toolbar of the Activities Page ................................................................................ 1251

Edit Menu of the Assignments Page ......................................................................................... 1252

Edit Menu on Activities Page ..................................................................................................... 1253

Edit Menu on EPS Page ............................................................................................................. 1254

Enterprise Data Activity Codes Toolbar ..................................................................................... 1255

Enterprise Data Baseline Types Toolbar ................................................................................... 1257

Enterprise Data Categories Toolbar .......................................................................................... 1258

Enterprise Data Cost Accounts Toolbar .................................................................................... 1260

Enterprise Data Currencies Toolbar .......................................................................................... 1261

Enterprise Data Document Statuses Toolbar ........................................................................... 1263

Enterprise Data Financial Periods Toolbar ............................................................................... 1264

Enterprise Data Funding Sources Toolbar ................................................................................ 1265

Enterprise Data Global Calendar Toolbar ................................................................................. 1267

Enterprise Data Issue Codes Toolbar........................................................................................ 1268

Enterprise Data Notebook Topics Toolbar ................................................................................ 1270

Enterprise Data Overhead Codes Toolbar ................................................................................ 1271

Enterprise Data Project Calendar Toolbar ................................................................................ 1272

Enterprise Data Project Codes Toolbar ..................................................................................... 1274

Enterprise Data Rate Types Toolbar ......................................................................................... 1276

Enterprise Data Resource Calendar Toolbar ............................................................................ 1276

Enterprise Data Resource Codes Toolbar ................................................................................. 1278

Enterprise Data Resource Curves Toolbar ................................................................................ 1280

Enterprise Data Risk Categories Toolbar .................................................................................. 1281

P6 Help

36

Enterprise Data Risk Scoring Matrices Toolbar ........................................................................ 1282

Enterprise Data Timesheet Periods Toolbar ............................................................................. 1284

Enterprise Data Units of Measure Toolbar ............................................................................... 1285

EPS Toolbar ................................................................................................................................ 1286

EPS View Toolbar ........................................................................................................................ 1286

Expenses Toolbar of the Activities Page ................................................................................... 1287

Filters Dialog Box Toolbar .......................................................................................................... 1288

Filters Tab Toolbar ...................................................................................................................... 1289

Funding Toolbar .......................................................................................................................... 1290

Histogram Chart Settings Area .................................................................................................. 1290

Import Templates (Reference) ................................................................................................... 1291

Issues Toolbar ............................................................................................................................ 1292

Level Resources Dialog Box (Reference) .................................................................................. 1292

My Calendar Dialog Box Toolbar ............................................................................................... 1293

My Reviews Toolbar ................................................................................................................... 1294

My Workflows Toolbar ................................................................................................................ 1294

Notebooks Toolbar ..................................................................................................................... 1295

Open Projects Dialog Box Toolbar ............................................................................................. 1296

Pages Supporting Filters ............................................................................................................ 1296

Performance Status Calculations .............................................................................................. 1297

Personal Information Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page .......... 1299

Pie Chart Settings Area .............................................................................................................. 1301

Planning Toolbar......................................................................................................................... 1302

Portfolio Analysis Settings Area ................................................................................................. 1303

Portfolio Analysis Toolbar ........................................................................................................... 1304

Portfolios Navigation Bar ........................................................................................................... 1305

Pre-defined BI Publisher Reports .............................................................................................. 1306

Predecessors Toolbar of the Activities Page ............................................................................ 1311

Preferences Columns of the EPS Table .................................................................................... 1312

Print Preview Toolbar ................................................................................................................. 1315

Private Documents Toolbar ....................................................................................................... 1316

Project Gantt Chart Portlet Toolbar ........................................................................................... 1318

Project Tab Toolbar of the Documents Page ............................................................................ 1319

Project Tab Toolbar of the Documents Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page .............. 1322

Project Tab Toolbar of the Project Documents Portlet ............................................................. 1323

Recent Documents Toolbar ....................................................................................................... 1325

Related Items Toolbar of the Project Tab ................................................................................. 1327

Reports Schedules View Toolbar ............................................................................................... 1327

Reports View Toolbar ................................................................................................................. 1328

Resources Navigation Bar ......................................................................................................... 1329

Resources Tab Toolbar .............................................................................................................. 1330

Response Plans Toolbar ............................................................................................................ 1333

Risk Activities Toolbar ................................................................................................................ 1333

Contents

37

Risk Scoring Method Description .............................................................................................. 1334

Risk Thresholds Toolbar ............................................................................................................ 1336

Risks Toolbar .............................................................................................................................. 1338

Risks Toolbar of the Activities and EPS Pages ......................................................................... 1339

Roles Tab Toolbar ....................................................................................................................... 1340

Schedule Detail Window Toolbar .............................................................................................. 1342

Scheduled Services Toolbar ...................................................................................................... 1343

Scorecard Settings Area ............................................................................................................ 1345

Select Projects Toolbar .............................................................................................................. 1345

Service Status Toolbar ............................................................................................................... 1346

Status Toolbar of Import/Export Project Dialog Box ................................................................ 1347

Step Templates Toolbar ............................................................................................................. 1347

Steps Detail Window Toolbar ..................................................................................................... 1348

Steps Toolbar of the Activities Page .......................................................................................... 1349

Successors Toolbar of the Activities Page ................................................................................ 1350

Tabbed Views.............................................................................................................................. 1351

Teams Tabs Toolbar ................................................................................................................... 1351

Text Editor Toolbar ..................................................................................................................... 1352

Timesheet Approval Toolbar ...................................................................................................... 1353

Toolbars Sub-Menu of the View Menu ...................................................................................... 1355

Trace Logic Toolbar of the Activities Page ................................................................................ 1355

User Access OBS Toolbar ........................................................................................................... 1356

User Access Security Profiles Toolbar ....................................................................................... 1358

User Access Users Toolbar ........................................................................................................ 1359

User Defined Fields Toolbar ...................................................................................................... 1361

View Menu of the Assignments Page ........................................................................................ 1362

View Menu on Activities Page .................................................................................................... 1365

View Menu on EPS Page ............................................................................................................ 1368

WBS Documents Toolbar of the Activities Page ....................................................................... 1369

WBS Earned Value Toolbar ........................................................................................................ 1370

WBS General Toolbar of the Activities Page ............................................................................. 1371

WBS Milestones Toolbar of the Activities Page ........................................................................ 1371

Workgroup Tab Toolbar of the Documents Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page ........ 1372

Working with Activity Progress ................................................................................................... 1374

WP & Docs Tab Toolbar ............................................................................................................. 1375

39

In This Chapter

About Oracle Primavera P6 Enterprise Project Portfolio Management ............ 39

Working with Oracle Primavera P6 Enterprise Project Portfolio Management Suite

..................................................................................................................................... 41

P6 EPPM Release 8 New Feature Summary ........................................................... 51

P6 EPPM Documentation ......................................................................................... 77

Where to Get Support .............................................................................................. 79

About Oracle Primavera P6 Enterprise Project Portfolio Management

Oracle Primavera P6 Enterprise Project Portfolio Management (P6 EPPM) is a robust and

easy-to-use integrated solution for globally prioritizing, planning, managing, and

executing projects, programs, and portfolios. It optimizes role-specific functionality to

satisfy each team member's needs, responsibilities, and skills. It provides a single solution

for managing projects of any size, adapts to various levels of complexities within a

project, and intelligently scales to meet the needs of various roles, functions, or skill levels

in your organization and on your project team.

Thousands of companies rely on P6 EPPM to:

Plan, schedule, and manage the right strategic mix of projects

Make informed project, cost, and resource management decisions

Enhance team collaboration and workflow productivity

Maximize each project contributor's skills and responsibilities

Track progress and optimize capacity for maximum profitability

Deliver programs and projects on time and within budget

Share data with human capital, financial management, and enterprise resource

planning systems

Actual deployments require a variety of databases, servers, applications, and supporting

technologies. Review the topics below to get a general understanding of the primary

components of the suite:

P6 (see "About P6" on page 43)

P6 Professional (see "About P6 Professional" on page 44) for EPPM

P6 Reporting Database (see "About P6 Reporting Database" on page 46)

P6 Progress Reporter (see "About P6 Progress Reporter" on page 45)

P6 Integration API (see "About the P6 Integration API" on page 48)

P6 Web Services (see "About P6 Web Services" on page 48)

Preface

40

BI Publisher (see "About Oracle BI Publisher and the OBIEE Platform" on page 46)

P6 Analytics (see "About P6 Analytics" on page 46)

Oracle Business Process Management Suite (see "About the Oracle Business Process

Management Suite" on page 45)

Oracle Universal Content Management (see "About Oracle Universal Content

Management" on page 48)

P6 EPPM also integrates with many other optional Oracle solutions such as Contract

Management (see "About Contract Management" on page 45), Oracle Risk Analysis,

Oracle PPM, and Cost Manager.

Preface

41

Working with Oracle Primavera P6 Enterprise Project Portfolio Management Suite

Depending on your organization's specific deployment, P6 EPPM generally consists of the

applications, functions, and databases depicted below.

Applications:

P6: Most users will rely almost exclusively on the P6 web application running in a standard

web browser. Simply termed P6, it is the primary interface for administering and

managing projects.

42

P6 Professional for EPPM: The P6 web application is the main interface for all project

management functionality; however, you can also use the optional P6 Professional

software to take advantage of its core project planning and scheduling functionality.

The P6 Professional application and its features, including the built-in TSLD viewer, run on

the Microsoft Windows operating system.

P6 Progress Reporter: P6 EPPM includes the P6 Progress Reporter integrated timesheet

entry software. Resources use P6 Progress Reporter to record their time spent working on

assignments via electronic timesheets, and approving managers use P6 to review and

approve them.

P6 Integration API: A Java-based application programming interface (API) enabling your

P6 EPPM deployment to interface with other components and systems.

P6 Web Services : P6 Web Services is an integration technology that extends P6

functionality and business objects. Based on open standards including SOAP, XML and

WSDL, P6 Web Services enables developers to leverage standard interfaces to create

integrated software solutions that interoperate with a wide variety of enterprise software

applications running on a diversity of hardware and operating system platforms.

P6 Analytics: An optional integrated dynamic reporting tool with advanced visual

features, including dashboards.

Functionality (included with P6 EPPM):

Core Enterprise Functionality: Use P6 for all of the following core enterprise functionality:

Administration and Enterprise Data: Administer user accounts, preferences, views,

application settings, and enterprise data.

Project, Portfolio, and Resource Management: P6 provides an extensive array of

features designed to optimize all phases of Project Management, Resource

Management, and Portfolio Management. It includes full support for activities,

work breakdown structures, costs, resource administration and assignment, roles,

teams, portfolio analysis, capacity planning, and convenient dashboards for

measuring status at any level at every moment.

Document Management: P6 includes document management support with or

without the optional document repository option. Use the optional document

collaboration features to conduct document reviews with key stakeholders to

keep projects moving or meet regulatory compliance.

Workflows: The workflow engine bundled with P6 EPPM provides Business Process

Modeling Notation (BPMN) compliant graphical notation that depicts the steps in

your project initiation workflows. Use the integrated Workflows portlet to

coordinate the sequence of tasks that flow between different process participants

in a series of stages.

Reports: Generate and view reports using your standard web browser running P6.

Reports can be generated electronically and routed via e-mail, saved to a shared

or local file, or printed to a traditional printer.

Preface

43

Planning and Scheduling: The optional P6 Professional component of the suite provides a

robust set of features primarily for planners and schedulers, including reflections,

schedule comparison (Claim Digger), and a report designer. Use the new built-in

Timescaled Logic Diagram (TSLD) viewer to create and customize condensed visual

depictions of complex project schedule information.

Time Reporting: P6 EPPM includes P6 Progress Reporter, an optional integrated timesheet

entry application.

Integrated Solutions: Build or deploy other systems and use the P6 Integration API or P6

Web Services to integrate them with P6 EPPM.

P6 Analytics: Extend your solution by adding P6 Analytics with the Oracle Business

Intelligence (OBI) metadata layer to facilitate the creation of ad-hoc reports and

interactive custom dashboards reflecting trends and metrics for activities, portfolios,

resource assignments, utilization, and project history. Also receive proactive alerts based

on integrated report data mined from the ODS and star databases.

Technology:

The P6 EPPM Database: The main database for all your P6 EPPM data.

BPM Workflow: The separate workflow engine bundled with P6 EPPM.

Oracle BI Publisher: The database server hosting the reporting library, templates, and

views required to build complex reports with ease.

The Reporting Database: The P6 Reporting Database portion of the suite consists of the

Star database and the Operational Data Store (ODS) database used to extract,

transform, and load data from the P6 EPPM database. This data is specifically designed

to be used to create reports.

Oracle Universal Content Management: This server hosts documents in a shared

repository enabling collaborative functionality such as document check-out/check-in

and versioning.

About P6

P6 is the main web application of the P6 EPPM solution. P6 provides enterprise-wide web

access to features arranged into the following sections:

Dashboards

Portfolios

Projects

Resources

Reports

Administration

44

P6 is a complete Enterprise Project Portfolio Management application with a powerful

but easy-to-use interface. It completely tracks projects, portfolios, and resources across

their full project lifecycles capturing all related costs, issues, risks, and performance

metrics along the way. It also supports project templates, allowing you to reuse projects

in full or in part. It is designed for organizations that need to simultaneously manage

multiple projects and support multi-user access across job sites and throughout the entire

organization.

The user interface provides structured menus where you can access a wide range of

data views and features that enable you to manage your projects from initial concept

review and approval through to completion. You can customize your own web pages,

called dashboards, to create a custom view of the specific projects and categories of

project data that are most relevant to your role in managing projects and resources.

Project workspaces and workgroups extend the model of customizable, focused data

views by enabling designated project members to create a uniform view of data that

relates to one specific project or to a subset of activities within a project.

P6 provides centralized resource administration, planning, and management, which

even includes resource timesheet approval and the ability to communicate with project

resources who use P6 Progress Reporter, the Web-based timesheet management

application of P6 EPPM. Use P6 to match people with roles and proficiency levels, and

then use that information to assign tasks effectively.

P6 includes robust reporting, workflow, e-mail notifications, events, and document

collaboration and review features.

Finally, P6 is the single source for administrative functions, including centralized enterprise

data, user accounts, application settings, and security for all users in P6 EPPM.

About P6 Professional

P6 Professional is a separate optional module that integrates traditional project

management with streamlined resource and cost management. It is ideal for planners

and schedulers.

Note: If you decide to use P6 Professional, you must still use P6 to

administer user accounts, enterprise data, and other settings.

The P6 Professional software includes a subset of the P6 features, as well as several of its

own specialized features. As a primary example, P6 Professional includes the new

Timescaled Logic Diagrams viewer for the creation, viewing, and modification of

timescaled logic diagrams (TSLDs). TSLDs condense the project plan displayed in the

Gantt chart into a more concise visual snapshot illustrating the chain of activities that

drive the project schedule. When you create a TSLD, it appears in the TSLD viewer.

Note: The TSLD viewer is designed for use with only the P6

Professional application.

Preface

45

About P6 Progress Reporter

The P6 Progress Reporter module is a Web-based project communication and

timekeeping system. As a team-level tool for project participants, it helps project

participants focus on the work at hand with a simple cross-project to-do list of their

upcoming assignments. Project team members can record time worked and enter

information about their project assignments. Regardless of location, team members can

communicate timesheet and activity status directly to their managers.

Because all project participants can use P6 Progress Reporter to enter up-to-the-minute

information about their assignments and to record the time they spent working on each

one, project managers can make crucial project decisions with the confidence that only

comes from having the most current information possible. Timesheet review and

approval takes place directly from within P6.

About Contract Management

Oracle Primavera Contract Management is a multi-user, multi-project database that

manages all aspects of contract control including changes and submittals. It can be

used in conjunction with P6 EPPM.

Essential features include:

Provides information to keep contracts on-time and within budget

Enables you to cross-reference and link documents for quick, easy retrieval

Maintains historical data that can be used for the life of the project and referenced in

future projects

Aids in resolving disputes or claims

About the Oracle Business Process Management Suite

The Oracle Business Process Management (BPM) Suite provides an integrated

environment for developing, administering, and using business applications centered

around business processes. BPM supports BPMN and BPEL standards from modeling and

implementation to run time and monitoring.

P6 directly integrates with BPM allowing you to initiate and manage workflows. Take

advantage of the ready-to-run project initiation workflow sample included with P6 EPPM

or design your own workflows.

You can also expand your use of BPM to include all stages of your application, program,

project, or product development life cycle from design-time and implementation to

run-time and application management.

The Oracle BPM Suite enables you to:

Create and customize business processes, models, and standards using pre-defined

components for web-based applications.

Collaborate between process developers and process analysts.

46

Expand business process management to include flexible, unstructured processes.

Add dynamic tasks and support approval routing using declarative patterns and

rules-driven flow determination.

Unify different stages of your development life cycle by addressing end-to-end

requirements for developing process-based applications. Oracle BPM unifies the

design, implementation, run time, and monitoring stages based on an SCA

infrastructure. This allows different personas to participate through all stages of the

workflow life-cycle.

About Oracle BI Publisher and the OBIEE Platform

BI Publisher and the Operational Data Store (ODS) are integrated with the P6 EPPM suite.

These components deliver on-demand web-based reporting through P6.

You have the option of expanding the capabilities of P6 EPPM using these components.

Oracle Business Intelligence Publisher: Oracle Business Intelligence Publisher (formerly

XML Publisher) is an enterprise reporting solution allowing you to design, manage, and

deliver highly formatted documents. Because it is built on open standards, your IT

developers can create data models against practically any data source and use BI

Publisher APIs to build custom applications leveraging existing data sources and

infrastructure. BI Publisher users can design report layouts using familiar desktop tools,

reducing the time and cost needed to develop and maintain reports. Extremely efficient

and highly scalable, BI Publisher can generate documents with minimal impact to

transactional systems. Using the convenient P6 web interface, reports can be viewed

online or scheduled for delivery to a wide range of destinations.

Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition (OBIEE): Expand your business intelligence

capabilities with this optional foundation platform. OBIEE enables your organization to

buy and plug in ready-to-run analytics packages or to build your own applications on

one common BI architecture.

About P6 Reporting Database

The P6 Reporting Database works with the P6 EPPM database to provide a robust and

powerful reporting solution. Project data from the P6 EPPM database is periodically

extracted, transformed, and loaded into an Operational Data Store (ODS) database.

Use P6 Reporting Database with BI Publisher to create and administer reports.

About P6 Analytics

P6 Analytics provides an in-depth and comprehensive method for gathering, analyzing,

sharing, and storing project performance, project history, resource assignment, and

utilization data. Use the P6 Analytics add-on application with P6 EPPM to create powerful

custom dashboards and reports to help your organization make better business

decisions. P6 Analytics requires Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition (OBIEE) or

Oracle Business Intelligence Standard Edition.

Preface

47

Built upon the Oracle Business Intelligence (OBI) suite, P6 Analytics delivers a catalog of

requests called Dashboards and Answers that provide an interactive way of viewing,

analyzing, and evaluating P6 EPPM data. In addition, it provides a Repository (RPD) file

which contains the data mappings between the physical data and the presentation

layer of OBI.

The dashboards provide detailed insight into your P6 EPPM data, through the use of

analytical charts, tables, and graphics. Dashboards have the ability to navigate to other

requests, to provide precise root cause analysis. In addition, you can configure individual

requests with the P6 EPPM Action Link, which enables you to navigate directly to your P6

site for true "Insight to Action" capabilities. Reports created with Oracle BI Answers can be

saved in the Oracle BI Presentation Catalog, and can be integrated into any Oracle BI

home page or dashboard. Results can be enhanced through options such as charting,

result layout, calculation, and drill-down features.

In summary, use P6 Analytics to:

Perform root-cause analysis and employ management-by-exception.

Gather critical insights into current and historical performance of all projects,

programs, and portfolios.

Make better decisions to eliminate project failure.

Quickly visualize critical project performance in early stages from dashboards.

Predict and identify cost trends early in project lifecycle to rescue troubled projects.

Gain visibility into resource performance through s-curves in dashboards with

interactive dashboards you can drill down to examine the root-cause problem.

Show staffing needs by portfolio with early warning indicators for upcoming

under-staffed project work.

Performance Data

P6 Analytics provides an RPD file to be used with the Oracle Business Intelligence suite.

The RPD file contains:

A physical representation of the Star schema.

A business layer where customized calculations are performed.

A presentation layer that groups all of the Star database fields into logical subject

areas.

The RPD delivers an extensive amount of earned value, cost, unit, percent complete,

and other key performance indicators. It enables data to be sliced by items such as time,

project, eps, portfolios, activities, and resources.

P6 Analytics delivers a sample dataset (P6 EPPM, Stage, ODS, and Star) from which the

Dashboards and Answers requests in the catalog are built. This sample data can be used

to view the power of Dashboards and Answers requests delivered in the catalog, which

will give the user an idea of how the catalog can be integrated with their data. For

information on configuring the sample dataset, see the SampleData.pdf document that

is included in the P6Analytics\Sample folder on your release media pack or download.

48

The Star Database

The Star database enables your organization to perform advanced business analysis on

project and portfolio data. It supplies a dimensional schema that organizes P6 EPPM

hierarchical relationships, enables the highest level of query efficiency and flexibility in

data analysis, and accumulates project data over time. This provides organizations with

baselines for tracking trends and for advanced business intelligence.

About the P6 Integration API

The P6 Integration API is a Java-based Application Programming Interface (API) and

server that enables developers to create application code aligned with P6 EPPM

business rules in order to seamlessly access P6 EPPM data.

About P6 Web Services

P6 Web Services enables your organization to seamlessly integrate P6 EPPM functionality

into other applications using open standards, languages, and protocols, including XML,

SOAP, SOA, and WSDL. P6 Web Services enables your organization to share P6 EPPM

data between applications independent of operating system or programming

language. Use P6 Web Services when you need to extend or customize integrated

functionality, for example, with BPM workflows, events, or forms-based applications.

About Oracle Universal Content Management

Integrated with P6, Oracle Universal Content Management (UCM) turns cluttered, often

unstructured content into organized assets by making it easier to catalog, access,

search, and reuse. All popular document formats such as HTML, XML, DOC, XLS, GIF, and

PDF are supported.

Using P6 with UCM, project participants can better manage their documents. Specific

functions include:

Upload new documents for storage in the unified UCM database

Categorize documents within folders for better organization

Link projects, WBS elements, activities, and issues to documents

Check in and check out documents (version control)

Review documents

You can also extend UCM to deliver content via Web sites, desktops, RSS feeds, mobile

devices, and Web Services.

Preface

49

About Oracle Primavera Risk Analysis

The optional Oracle Primavera Risk Analysis component extends the risk management

capabilities built into the P6 web application with its own full-lifecycle cost and schedule

risk analytics solution. Deploy Oracle Primavera Risk Analysis to integrate directly with

your project schedules and cost estimates to model risks and uncertainty.

51

P6 EPPM Release 8 New Feature Summary

Building on a tradition that includes worldwide sales and recognition spanning the last

quarter century, this release of P6 EPPM offers significant new or improved functionality

described in the following topics.

Note: This New Feature Summary is intended solely to remind

readers of various P6 EPPM documentation deliverables of the

major new or changed features since the last release. Refer to the

separate online help systems and individual documents for the

various components that comprise the P6 EPPM suite to learn more

about the features.

In This Chapter

Web Administration and Configuration ................................................................ 53

Project and Portfolio Management ....................................................................... 57

Project Templates ..................................................................................................... 59

Resource Management .......................................................................................... 61

Risk Management ..................................................................................................... 63

Enterprise Reporting ................................................................................................. 65

Workflow .................................................................................................................... 67

Technological Advances ........................................................................................ 69

User Productivity ....................................................................................................... 71

Learning Assistance .................................................................................................. 73

P6 Professional ........................................................................................................... 75

53

Web Administration and Configuration

Easy Web Setup, Configuration, and Administration

Routine setup, configuration, and administration tasks can be achieved using only the P6

application from a single centralized new menu with the following options:

My Calendar: Customize your personal work schedule.

My Preferences: Customize P6 for the way you prefer to work. Personalize the units,

formats, views, and other settings unique to each user.

Application Settings: Configure global application settings for data limits, earned

value calculations, timesheets, IDs, and time periods.

Enterprise Data: Define the data entities, types, categories, and user-defined fields

recognized by your industry or organization.

User Access: Configure who will use the various components of the P6 EPPM suite and

the P6 application, and what permissions to assign to them.

User Interface Views: In a single convenient location, configure the main menus and

pages of the application users of each view are permitted to access. This improved

feature helps you enforce a consistent enterprise-wide user experience.

Web-Based User Administration

Create and administer user accounts for all P6 EPPM users via the P6 web application. Set

each user's contact and login information, and configure their security privileges, profiles,

access, and user interface views. Configure the management hierarchy at your

organization (the organizational breakdown structure, or OBS) and manage project

assignments to reflect the areas of responsibility within your entire enterprise.

Also new in this release, you can use the P6 web application to define privileges for a set

of global and project security profiles and then assign them to users to restrict access in

accordance with your organization's information assurance and security policies.

In addition, the P6 web application now includes integrated Lightweight Directory

Access Protocol (LDAP) support for user provisioning. In the previous release, a Windows

PC was required to perform these tasks. You can now configure, search for, and add

users directly from your company's central LDAP directory using P6 in your web browser.

Enterprise deployments can also batch import multiple user accounts from an LDIF file.

The P6 Web Services module now supports single sign-on via Security Assertion Markup

Language (SAML).

In summary, improvements have been made in this release to the native, single-sign on

(SSO), LDAP, API, and Oracle Access Manager (OAM) features supporting more secure

user authentication for P6.

54

One Source for All Enterprise Data

Use P6 as a one-stop shop for administering all the enterprise data used by P6 and P6

Professional users. Centrally manage all enterprise data grouped by category, including:

Global category

Currencies

Financial Periods

Global Calendars

Overhead Codes

Timesheet Periods

Projects category

Baseline Types

Funding Sources

Notebook Topics

Project Calendars

Project Codes

Project User-Defined Fields

WBS Categories

WBS User-Defined Fields

Activities category

Activity Codes

Activity User-Defined Fields

Cost Accounts

Expense Categories

Expense User-Defined Fields

Step Templates

Step User-Defined Fields

Resources category

Assignment User-Defined Fields

Rate Types

Resource Calendars

Resource Codes

Resource Curves

Resource User-Defined Fields

Units of Measure

Risks category

Risk Thresholds

Preface

55

Risk Scoring Matrix

Risk Categories

Risk User-Defined Fields

Issues category

Issue Codes

Issue User-Defined Fields

Documents category

Document Categories

Document Statuses

Document User-Defined Fields

57

Project and Portfolio Management

Web-Based EPS and Project Views

Configure the project hierarchy at your organization (the enterprise project structure, or

EPS) and use it to structure projects and control user access to project and portfolio data.

Project managers will also use the new web-based EPS features to create and edit

projects, templates, preferences, baselines, and summaries. Other useful new features

include configuring multi-user EPS views that target key data, importing and exporting

Primavera XML, Microsoft Excel, and Microsoft Project 2007 data, and creating new

projects and templates directly within the EPS hierarchy.

Similar to the traditional activity views users have relied on for multiple releases, this

release now offers project managers more robust project views at the EPS level. Now, you

will be able to configure the entire EPS and monitor the status of multiple projects, all from

this single page.

The new EPS Gantt chart view on the web is also included. It shows a flat list or grouped

list of projects on a timeline. You can choose to display multiple bars, such as current

dates versus baseline dates for a comparison view. The timescale can be shown in

increments of years (for a long-range view), quarters, months, all the way down to days

(for a more granular view.)

Enhanced Portfolio Filtering

Automatic filter refreshing helps keep your portfolios in sync with the latest project data,

without the need for user intervention. This release also supports an expanded number of

filter parameters offering greater precision when configuring and comparing filtered

portfolios.

Schedule Preview

When hundreds or thousands of activities appear in a Gantt chart, P6 allows you to add,

modify, or delete them; however, historically, it wouldn't immediately update the results

in order to maximize performance. You could reschedule the project in order to view the

impacts of your changes and share them with other users, but what if you wanted to

preview the results before applying them?

New in P6 for this release is the optional Schedule Preview feature which will instantly

generate a preview of any schedule changes locally on your PC. This allows you to

preview the impact of adding, deleting, or modifying activities on the overall project

schedule before deciding to save the schedule changes or discard them.

58

Recalculate Assignment Costs

The web application now provides an optional command for updating resource and

role assignment cost data in your project to reflect recent changes to one or more rates.

Use this command during or after scheduling a project in case changes to dates cause

assignments to span periods with more than one rate in effect. This command can also

be run during leveling.

Project Baselines

In addition to supporting the administration of baseline types, this release of the P6 web

application also enables you to convert projects into baselines and then restore

baselines back into projects.

59

Project Templates

Reusable Project Templates

The new templates feature in P6 represents a significant feature improvement for this

release, replacing the Methodology Management functionality from the previous

release.

A template is a stored copy of, or blueprint for, a project. It includes all the details, best

practices, and de facto standards your organization associates with projects of a

particular type. For example, use project templates to create a library of predefined

project structures that can later be used as starting points for new projects. In addition,

specific WBS branches and their activities can be copied from projects or templates and

inserted wherever you need them.

Organize your template projects within the EPS, assign them project codes, and provide

them with descriptions to aid in reuse. Because templates and projects now share a

common database and user interface, it is easy to create templates from projects or to

create projects from templates. You can also create projects based on other projects,

and templates based on other templates.

Note: Methodologies from the previous release can be converted

into P6.

61

Resource Management

Completely Redesigned Resource and Role UI

The entire Resources section has been redesigned with a new, more intuitive interface

that offers robust and responsive enterprise-wide resource management features. A

single centralized resource page now provides point-and-click access to administration,

detailed and high-level planning, and resource and role usage and analysis. Editable

tables and supplemental windows empower you to manage enterprise resource

information quickly and efficiently. You'll see all resources at a glance and be able to

edit details and make resource team and primary role assignments with ease.

Access important enterprise data directly within the Resources section without

navigating away from your current resource management tasks.

Improved Resource Planning and Analysis

Navigate to a central location to view and evaluate resources by project, role, resource,

allocation, or your own custom filter. Toggle between resource analysis and resource

planning modes.

Optimized Resource and Role Team Handling

Select the resources that make up a team faster with fewer steps using the redesigned

resource team components. Rather than creating and configuring new resource teams,

save time by first duplicating the closest matching team and then simply editing its

configuration. When you use this "copy and paste" technique for creating a resource

team, all its resources are included in the new copy. You can also use copy and paste to

create and manage role teams.

63

Risk Management

This release of P6 includes significantly expanded Risk Management functionality based

on industry best practices and standards for project risk management.

Qualitative Risk Management

Using the new Risk Register, project managers can now assess potential risks on a project

plan, associate risks with activities, assign risk probabilities, calculate impacts to schedule

and cost, and develop risk response and contingency plans to mitigate risks.

The application's built-in qualitative risk management features are complemented by

the quantitative risk analysis features available with the full Oracle Primavera Risk Analysis

solution, an optional integrated component.

Risk Scoring Matrix, Categories, and Thresholds

Define risk probability, tolerance, and impact thresholds using the new risk scoring matrix.

When assigned to a project, users can assess risks in order to calculate relative project risk

scores. This feature includes a new color-coded probability and impact diagram (PID),

probability threshold scale, tolerance scale, and impact severity table.

Enhanced support for risk categories enables you to manage, track, and analyze your

own particular conventions for grouping and managing risk. A new risk threshold page

provides ways to configure color-coded assessment levels to measure the probability,

cost, and schedule impacts of each risk.

65

Enterprise Reporting

Integrated On-Demand or Scheduled Reports

This release of P6 includes the P6 Reporting Database integrated with Oracle Business

Intelligence Publisher. BI Publisher is an enterprise reporting solution allowing you to

design, manage, and deliver highly formatted documents. Report formats include

Microsoft Word, Excel, OpenOffice, PDF, and support an array of familiar columnar and

graphical styles. P6 provides more than 30 new reports dynamically generated when BI

Publisher accesses P6 data in the Operational Data Store (ODS).

Other key features include:

Ready-to-Run Reports: Run pre-defined reports to quickly get started

Room to Grow: Create reports via data models or templates (also includes custom

layout designer)

E-mail or save a report to a file: E-mail reports to your predefined distribution lists and

even save reports to a shared content repository.

Deliver the same report in multiple formats to satisfy different users: BI Publisher

supports several file formats including HTML, PDF, Excel, PPT, MHTML, RTF, XML, and

CSV. Each report can be published to all these formats or configured to only specific

formats and will have a default format defined.

Schedule reports or generate ad hoc reports on-demand: Schedule reports to be

generated on a defined interval. Reports can be scheduled to execute once, daily,

weekly or monthly. A report can have multiple schedule runs defined, each with its

own interval, delivery recipients, template and parameters. Of course, any report can

also be instantly generated on-demand.

Store archives and access report histories: Previous runs of a report can be saved,

providing a report archiving solution to allow for access to historical reports.

Organizations can configure BI Publisher to save reports for a defined time period,

and individuals can access the historical reports through BI Publisher.

Adjustable Parameters: To further reduce the effort and cost of creating and

maintaining reports, parameters can be defined within a report, and passed in during

runtime. Parameters can be used to filter and organize the information on a report. By

using parameters, a single report can meet the need of several project managers,

planners and stakeholders.

Secure Access: The new reporting capabilities provide three layers of security to

ensure data is protected and individuals only have access to the reports they are

permitted to run.

The entire reporting section can be hidden through the new Enterprise Reporting

module access setting. Provisioning this new module will expose the reporting

section and create database views in the ODS for each user.

The hierarchical folder structure used for organizing the reports can also define

which reports each user has access to run.

66

Reports pulling project information from the ODS will only return data for projects a

user has access to, as determined by P6 application security settings.

Also provided with this release are the ODS and its associated Extract, Transform and

Load (ETL) process. The ODS is part of the P6 Reporting Database and provides secure

access to information in an easy to use data schema.

Users seeking even greater leverage and analysis of their report data should consider

deploying P6 Analytics, available separately from Oracle.

Note: Users of the previous version of P6 may notice the removal of

the Project Reports and My Reports portlets. The new Reports

section replaces those old features. Users still interested in viewing

P6 Professional reports in a P6 portlet can select the Store report in

Work Products and Documents option in P6 Professional when

creating report batches or printing reports. See the P6 Professional

Help for more information.

67

Workflow

Oracle BPM Integration

Teams can collaborate with greater efficiency using the built-in project initiation

workflow included with P6. Additional workflows can be managed and customized using

the separate and optional Oracle Business Process Management (BPM) Suite. Oracle

BPM supports BPMN and BPEL at all stages from modeling and implementation to run

time and monitoring.

In prior versions of P6, there were embedded workflow engines (jBPM or Interwoven) to

automate only three P6 EPPM processes: project initiation, project processes, and

document review. While easy to configure, these lacked the depth of functionality to

truly model real-world processes. The prospect of using that legacy workflow integration

to automate additional processes was limiting. Beginning with Release 8, P6 leverages

Oracle’s Unified Business Process Management (OBPM) solution to serve as the engine to

automate any process related to the management of projects, programs, and portfolios.

All users participating in workflows are not required to use any other application besides

P6. Users can initiate, participate, approve, reject, delegate, escalate, and continuously

monitor any project workflow process flow by launching it from within a P6 dashboard.

Note: BPM is not the only solution for deploying custom workflows in

P6. This release also supports creation of an unlimited number of

custom workflows using P6 Web Services and P6 Events.

69

Technological Advances

Integrated LDAP Provisioning

The web application now directly includes Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)

provisioning support for seamless LDAP or SSO user authentication. In the previous

release, a Windows PC was required to configure and add users from an LDAP repository.

You can now configure, search for, and add users from your company's central LDAP

directory using the P6 web application.

Note: Improvements have also been made in this release to the

native, LDAP, single-sign on (SSO), API, and Oracle Access

Manager (OAM) features supporting more secure user

authentication for P6.

Enhanced and Expanded Job Services

The historic client/server job services architecture has been completely redesigned. Now,

all jobs can be invoked and run in real-time from the web. Examples of on-demand jobs

include Recalculate Assignment Costs and Store Period Performance.

In addition, job scheduling also takes place in a web-based environment. The following

key jobs can be scheduled, for example, you might run these every Tuesday at a

particular time:

Summarize Project

Schedule Project

Level Project Resources

Apply Actuals

Expanded Event Support

In alignment with all its new features, this release also supports an expanded number of

events, triggered by interactions with various classes of objects that comprise the

solution. For example, specific types of interactions with activities, projects, EPS elements,

risks, documents, jobs such as Apply Actuals, and other special operations such as

copying a project will now trigger events. Compared with the previous release, nearly

three times as many events are available to developers at organizations where they are

used for a variety of purposes such as workflows, notifications, data warehousing, or

integrations with other enterprise software.

For more information, refer to the Using Events with P6 manual.

70

Integration Ready

P6 is now designed and tested to support major integrated enterprise management

solutions, including Oracle Primavera Portfolio Management 8.0 (formerly ProSight),

Oracle Enterprise Business Suite (EBS), JD Edwards, and other ERP products. Other popular

integrations include P6 Progress Reporter for timesheets, Contract Management for

contract management, and new in this release, BPM for workflows and BI Publisher or P6

Analytics for reporting.

P6 Web Services Security Enhancements

The P6 Web Services module now supports:

Single sign-on via Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML)

XML encryption

Digital signatures

Improvements have also been made in this release to the native, single sign-on (SSO),

LDAP, API, and Oracle Access Manager (OAM) features supporting more secure user

authentication.

Platforms

With each release of P6 EPPM, the supported platforms are updated to reflect new

technologies and the discontinuation of support for older technologies.

New Supported Platforms:

Apple Mac OS X with Safari browser for P6

Oracle Business Intelligence Publisher 10g for reporting

Oracle BPM 10g & 11g for workflows

HP Itanium application servers

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g for enterprise administration

Components or Versions No Longer Supported:

JackRabbit previously used for document management

jBPM previously used for workflows

JBoss application server

WebLogic 10g application servers

Oracle HTTP 2.0 (10.1.3.2.0), IIS 6.0, and Apache 2.0 web servers

SiteMinder previously used for Single Sign-On

71

User Productivity

Auto-Complete Field Values

Available on select pages and dialog boxes, the new Auto-Complete feature offers

helpful functionality during data entry. As you key in an entry in a field that only accepts

values from a predefined list of existing values, the closest single matching value is

automatically selected for you. If multiple values match your input, they are displayed in

a list for you to make a selection.

Customizable Toolbars

On most pages of the application, fixed toolbars appear by default wherever they are

needed based on your current selection. This functionality existed in the last release and

was continued where needed for new pages in this release. However, on three of the

most commonly used pages of the application, the Activities, EPS, and Resource

Assignments pages, you can now customize the toolbars. Optimize your productivity by

hiding the commands you rarely use to make room for the ones you use most often. In

addition, you can rearrange and dock toolbars on these pages by clicking and

dragging.

Enhanced Activity, Assignment, and EPS Filters

Apply filters to the Activities, Assignments, and EPS pages to constrain the number of

activities, resource assignments, and projects, respectively, based on precise criteria you

specify. Filter enhancements in this release include:

Create, configure, and apply your own custom filters independent of the current

activity view. Even apply multiple combinations of custom or shared filters at the

same time. The filters you want to apply can also be saved with a customizable view,

so they are automatically reapplied along with all the other settings stored in the

view.

Share filters globally with all users, designate them only for certain users, or keep them

private for your own exclusive use.

Cut, copy, and paste filters.

Specify a greatly expanded number of filter criteria rules, a significant improvement

over the previous release's 10-rule limit.

Define nested logical filter rules for pinpoint accuracy when scanning rows of data.

For example, define inclusive (any of the following) and exclusive (all of the following)

rules.

E-mail Activity Views

Instantly capture one or more projects in your current multi-user view as a hyperlink you

can e-mail to others so they can also view the same project, WBS, activity, and step data

with all your customized settings applied.

72

Keyboard Shortcuts

The menus on the EPS, Activities, and Resource Assignments pages include new

time-saving keyboard equivalents for important commands. The Enterprise Data pages in

the administration section of the application also include keyboard equivalents for many

of its popular commands (for example, press the Insert key to add a new item). Most

pages and dialog boxes generally support Tab key traversal for easy access and

navigation between fields.

Menus and Icons

New in this release, the Activities, EPS, and Resource Assignments pages now organize

their feature-rich offering of commands within a series of standard menus titled Actions,

Edit, and View. Throughout the entire suite, nearly 100 icons representing various

commands have been redesigned and optimized for recognition and ease-of-use.

Redesigned Detail Windows

When a table of entries includes specific related information in a detail window, all detail

window tabs appear at the same time as a series so users are more aware of their

presence. Users no longer need to open and close each detail window separately. For

added convenience, tabbed detail windows are minimized and restored collectively as

a group.

Overall, for user efficiency, the application makes greater use of the consistent detail

window design. For example, detail windows now appear when administering resources

or user accounts and security profiles. The new EPS page includes eight detail windows

with specific supporting information related to EPS elements and projects. And finally, the

Activities page adds three new detail windows for issues, risks, and general data. The

detail windows on the Activities and EPS pages, two of the most widely used pages in the

application, can individually be shown or hidden from view.

73

Learning Assistance

Completely Redesigned Online Help

A new context-sensitive Online Help system is both re-authored and re-architected to

provide instant support to users in a time-saving structured interface. Topics include

descriptions for all screen elements, icons, and fields. Key concepts, related links,

step-by-step tasks, and valuable reference information are provided. Also includes new

hierarchical table of contents and search features.

UPK Multimedia Tutorials

Take advantage of the built-in integration with Oracle's User Productivity Kit (UPK)

allowing you to launch context-sensitive tutorials. In addition to opening the online help,

the expanded Help menus and buttons also present options for viewing UPK multimedia

simulations from within the P6 interface.

As your organization grows, expand your UPK investment to include custom tutorials

developed exclusively for your particular environment, training needs, or business

requirements. Oracle UPK must be purchased separately to create new simulations or

modify existing ones.

75

P6 Professional

An overview of the new features available only in P6 Professional, the client edition of P6

for Microsoft Windows PCs designed for planners and schedulers, follows.

To learn more about the features included in or removed from this release of P6

Professional, see the P6 Professional online help topic What's New in P6 Professional?

Timescaled Logic Diagrams

A much-anticipated new feature, Timescaled Logic Diagrams allows users to condense

the project schedule into smaller snapshots. A convenient timescale logic viewer,

seamlessly launched from within the P6 Professional application, facilitates the creation,

customizing, saving, and printing of timescaled logic diagrams and Gantt charts.

Tabbed Views

By popular demand, users can now switch between open layouts, screens, or views by

clicking their identifying tab. Tabs can also be grouped, splitting the window, and then

merged back into a single group of tabs within a window. This means that all main

windows in the entire application, including Projects, Activities, and Resources, can be

displayed simultaneously as tabs and can be tiled horizontally, vertically, or some

combination of both.

Customizable Menus

Users can now change the display order of menus, rearrange menu commands, delete

menus and commands, and create custom menus.

Customizable Toolbars

An improved default arrangement of toolbars and command buttons reduces visual

clutter. In addition, users can fully create and customize any toolbars in the client

interface with the commands of most importance to their goals and assignments.

Page Breaks by Group Band

P6 Professional now supports page breaks within layouts. Similar to reports, layouts can be

printed and page breaks determine if output will split your charts or other data onto

separate pages. Page breaks can be set manually, on customary Page Setup dialog

boxes, or automatically based on group band values.

76

Apply Actuals and Summarize Project Now Run as Services

Apply Actuals and Summarize Project jobs now run as java services. These jobs are no

longer processed locally within P6 Professional. You can view the status of these services

in the Job Status dialog box accessible from the Tools menu in P6 Professional and will be

notified when a service completes or fails.

Auto-Refresh Grouped Data by Window

Enable and disable automatic refresh of grouped data per window. This setting applies

to the active window only, and can be different for each open window.

Client-Web Delineation and Integration

his release offers greater web support and ease of use without sacrificing the raw power

our P6 Professional users have found indispensable. The P6 Professional client

application's legacy administrative functionality has been shifted to a redesigned web

interface to allow the client interface to focus entirely on planner/scheduler

functionality. P6 Professional users can decide to continue to rely on the optional client

application, with its strong core scheduling features, while most enterprise users will

migrate to and benefit from the greatly-expanded capabilities and convenience now

found in the P6 web application.

Streamlined Installer

P6 Professional now installs all of its files into a single directory with fewer required registry

settings. (Note: Only certain secondary applications using the API and the optional SDK

use registry settings.) The two main benefits of the new installer are that its footprint is

simple and that it is generally easier for IT administrators to deploy (e.g., installations can

be pushed over the network down to users' desktops).

Improved HTML Editor

A new HTML editor provides an expanded set of formatting options for use with notebook

and description fields.

Command Line Support

This release supports running batch report jobs and exporting projects from a command

line.

Note: To view P6 Professional reports in P6, select the Store report in

Work Products and Documents option when creating report

batches or printing reports. See the P6 Professional Help for more

information.

Preface

77

P6 EPPM Documentation

You can access reference manuals and administrator’s guides from the P6 EPPM

Documentation Center, located in the \Documentation\<language> folder of the P6

EPPM physical media or download. Most documentation assumes a standard setup of

the product, with full access rights to all features and functions.

Media packs include all files necessary to install P6 EPPM applications, all manuals and

technical documents related to the installation, administration, and use of P6 EPPM

components, and the Quick Install Guide. For information on the contents of the P6 EPPM

Media Pack, see the P6 EPPM Quick Install Guide.

The following table describes documentation publications and lists the recommended

readers by role. P6 EPPM roles are described in Installation Process Overview in the P6

EPPM Administrator's Guide.

Title Description

P6 EPPM

Administrator’s Guide

Explains how to set up the P6 EPPM database, servers,

and components; it also provides an overview of all the

components in the P6 EPPM solution. The guide

describes the procedures required to administer P6

EPPM, including setting up security and configuring

global preferences. The P6 EPPM network

administrator/database administrator and P6

administrator should read this guide.

P6 EPPM User's Guide This guide explains how to plan, set up, and manage

projects in a multiuser environment. If you are new to P6

EPPM, start with this guide to learn how to use the

software effectively to plan and manage projects.

When you need more detail, refer to the P6 Help. The

program manager, project manager, resource/cost

manager, and team leader should read this guide.

P6 Professional Help Explains how to use P6 Professional to plan, set up, and

manage projects in a multiuser environment. If you are

new to P6 Professional, use this Help to learn how to use

the software effectively to plan and manage projects.

The P6 Professional administrator, program manager,

project manager, resource/cost manager, and team

leader should read this Help.

P6 Help Describes how to create, manage, plan, and schedule

projects, group projects into portfolios, administer all

enterprise data, application settings, user accounts,

and security profiles, maintain both the organizational

breakdown structure (OBS) and enterprise project

structure (EPS), manage resources and roles, track risks,

78

issues, and notebooks, create and reuse templates,

evaluate budgets, analyze performance and ROI for

project portfolios, participate in workflows and

document reviews, approve timesheets, and generate

reports. The operations executive, P6 EPPM and P6

administrator, program manager, project manager,

resource/cost manager, and team leader should read

this Help.

P6 Progress Reporter

Administrator Help

Describes how to enter database connection

information for the P6 Progress Reporter server and

modify P6 Progress Reporter server and application

settings. The P6 EPPM network administrator/database

administrator should read this Help.

P6 Progress Reporter

Help

Describes how to use P6 Progress Reporter to enter and

update time spent on assignments. Team members

should read this Help.

Primavera Timescaled

Logic Diagram Help

Describes how to create, modify, and manage

Timescaled Logic Diagrams. Timescaled Logic Diagrams

condense the project schedule displayed in the Gantt

Chart into a more readable, easier to understand

format that provides a snapshot of the entire project

plan and the chains of activities that drive the project

schedule.

P6 Integration API

Administrator’s Guide

Explains how to install and configure the P6 Integration

API, which allows direct access to P6 EPPM via Java.

Those creating client code in Java and needing direct

access to the P6 EPPM database should read this guide.

P6 Web Services

Administrator’s Guide,

P6 Web Services

Programmer’s Guide,

and P6 Web Services

Reference Manual

Explains how to install and configure P6 Web Services,

which enables organizations to seamlessly integrate P6

EPPM functionality into other applications using web

services standards. The P6 Web Services Programmer’s

Guide, available as an HTML help system, describes

how to invoke, use, and troubleshoot the available

services/operations within supported environments. The

P6 Web Services Reference Manual, also available as

an HTML help system, describes all services and

operations available in P6 Web Services in a

comprehensive manner.

Preface

79

P6 SDK Web-based

documentation

Describes how to use the P6 SDK to connect to the P6

EPPM database. The tables, fields, and stored

procedures that you can access through the P6 SDK are

described. Examples are also provided to show how

you can use the P6 SDK to perform several basic tasks,

such as creating a new project or assigning a resource

to a project activity. The P6 EPPM network

administrator/database administrator and P6

administrator should read this documentation, which is

available in local drive\Program

Files\Oracle\Primavera P6 Professional\PMSDK\Doc\

by default. Double-click the INDEX.HTML file to open the

Table of Contents.

P3 to P6 EPPM

Migration Guide

This guide provides best practices for migrating your P3

data to P6 EPPM, and details how P3 functionality maps

to P6 EPPM functionality.

P6 Reporting Database

Administrator’s Guide

This document explains how to install and configure the

P6 Reporting Database application, and generate the

ODS database. It describes how to install and configure

the Oracle Gateway if the P6 Reporting Database is

installed on a Microsoft SQL Server. It also provides

information about how to run the Configuration Utility

P6 Reporting Database

User’s Guide

Provides information about using ODS and Star (if you

purchased P6 Analytics) with the P6 EPPM database to

extract data that you can use to create reports.

Distributing Information to the Team

You can copy the online documentation to a network drive for access by project

participants. Each team member can then view or print those portions that specifically

relate to his or her role in the organization.

Where to Get Support

If you have a question about using Oracle Primavera products that you or your network

administrator cannot resolve with information in the documentation or help, go to:

http://www.oracle.com/us/support/index.html

This page provides the latest information on contacting Oracle Global Customer Support

and the support renewals process.

Go to http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/E17266_01/index.htm for the latest updates

to the P6 EPPM 8.0 Documentation library.

81

Working with P6

After logging into P6 with a secure user name and password, navigate to one of the

following main sections enumerated below to begin your work. Because your

capabilities within the application are limited based on security profiles, access settings,

optional user interface views, personal preferences, and other assignments, you may not

be able to view all the sections or use all the features within a section.

The P6 web user interface is composed of the following main sections:

Dashboards

This section presents highlights of major areas in resizable windows called portlets

arranged in customizable workspaces called dashboards.

Who Uses Dashboards?

Temporary subcontractors checking their next assignment, activity, or calendar entry.

Employees reporting or resolving issues preventing them from moving forward.

Financial executives checking costs, earned value performance, or resource analysis

charts to prepare forecasts.

Portfolios

This section presents data, metrics, and comparisons of related projects bundled into

portfolios. This section includes portfolio details, views, scenarios, portfolio Gantt with

spreadsheet or histogram, portfolio or single project ROI, portfolio analysis, resource

demand/capacity planning, and overall performance status.

Who Uses Portfolios?

Executives and critical thinkers interested in planning and analysis, ROI, and other

metrics spanning multiple projects.

Projects

The working core of the application. This section includes WBS, activities, risks, issues,

project workspaces, Gantt charts, calendars, expenses, and resource assignments.

Who Uses Projects?

Project Managers planning new projects.

Project leads and activity owners coordinating the completion of tasks.

Risk Managers implementing risk assessments or mitigation policies.

P6 Overview

82

Executives who want hands-on access to the EPS to view a portfolios's issues and

other status details

Resources providing input about the status of their activities including progress

updates, notebook entries, and issues.

Resources

This section helps you plan and manage resources, roles, and teams.

Who Uses Resources?

Human resource specialists, buyers, and purchasing officers assessing labor,

non-labor, and material resources.

Project Directors coordinating teams and managing the planned roles across the

entire company.

Project Managers planning resources for a particular project or time period.

Administer

This section provides administrative settings for configuring the framework for the

application. This includes user accounts, security profiles, views, application settings, and

enterprise data such as codes, user-defined fields, categories, templates, forms,

calendars, roles, units of measure, and other items used throughout the application.

Who Uses Administer?

Application and System Administrators and other users authorized to define the

essential framework for all other sections of the application, ultimately influencing

how work is performed and measured at the organization.

Users accessing their own personal preferences and calendars.

Note: Resource managers and project managers can take

advantage of a shortcut to an abbreviated set of enterprise data

to self-administer applicable information related to resources and

projects.

Reports

This section provides users with reports they can run on-demand or schedule for recurring

output.

Who Uses Reports?

A cross-functional array of users from all departments at your organization will likely be

generating, receiving, and analyzing reports.

83

Customizing the P6 User Experience

P6 includes sophisticated layers of security, view, and customization features designed to

control access and structure the collaborative experience of your entire team while also

allowing users to individually customize views and format their data. Periodically perform

the sequence of steps below for each user to optimize their experience.

When customizing your user experience, consider the following questions. These checks

may be performed in whole or in part, and in any sequence. The order shown here is not

mandatory. These items simply provide a basic checklist when examining your

interaction with the application.

Do I have the right module access settings? This determines which main components

of the solution you can access, such as Portfolios, Reports, P6 Professional, and P6

Web Services.

Do I have the right user interface view? This determines which main pages in the

application you can access. Your administrator may assign you to an optional

role-specific user interface view that corresponds to your assignments and work

processes. A group of users with similar roles will often be assigned the same user

interface view. You can edit your own personal view settings on the My Preferences

page.

Do I have the right security profiles? This determines what functions you can perform.

Your administrator will likely assign you to a role-specific global security profile and

project security profile that corresponds to your assignments and work processes. A

group of users with similar roles will often be assigned the same security profile.

Do I have the right OBS (project) access settings? This determines which projects are

available to you based on your assigned responsible manager.

Do I have the right global preferences? This determines the general formatting and

preferred settings of data across the application. For example, you can specify the

currency and date format you want to use. Even though you can customize these

preferences, it is recommended that teams make choices aligned with team goals.

Do I have the right application settings? This determines how P6 information is handled

and appears for all users. For example, the default hours per time period, ID string

lengths, integration links, and other default settings.

Do I have the current page customized to fit my needs? There are two main ways to

customize a page, detailed below.

Customizable Page-Specific Views: Certain pages of the application provide a

standard mechanism for configuring shared views and customizing individual

views. These include Activity, EPS, Resource Assignment, and portfolio views in

portlets or on the Portfolio Analysis page. They provide common ways to view and

work with data on their respective pages of application. Instead of manually

adjusting the current page, you can simply switch the applied view.

84

On-Screen Controls: Manually invoke the customization features provided on

each page. Throughout the application, these features are available through

Customize links or other context-specific toolbars and options displayed on the

page. Examples of screen customization follow:

Generally speaking, within all pages, you can hide, show, expand and

collapse elements as needed.

The Activities page and Portfolio Capacity Planning page, for example,

offer extensive options that enable you to retrieve, organize, and chart data

according to your specific requirements.

In the Issues portlet, you can filter, group, and chart issues as well as choose

the data details to display.

You can customize dashboards to display the portlets you want and to

specify how you want to organize them within the workspace. The

dashboard filtering feature lets you focus on information related to a single

project or all projects associated with a specific portfolio or project code. If

you have the required privileges, you can customize the workspace and

workgroups associated with a project.

About the User Interface

The application's user interface consists of familiar screen controls such as pages, tabs,

and dialog boxes, data entry controls, buttons, and links appearing in a standard web

browser.

Note: Your access to data and ability to interact with the user

interface are controlled by various security features. See About

Security.

Working with the P6 User Interface

The user interface presents familiar screen elements you manipulate in your web browser.

They include all of the following common types of user interface objects and several

more special objects not listed:

pages

tabs

dialog boxes

detail windows

portlets

fields

lists

buttons

links

P6 Overview

85

tables

charts

calendars

Refer to the sample images below to orient yourself with the P6 graphical user interface

inside your web browser.

Table of Common User Interface Elements

Item Description

P6 navigation bar: This bar is always visible and shows buttons

representing your access to dashboards and any of the main modules of

the application. Use it to navigate to the pages and menus in the

dashboards, portfolios, projects, resources, or reports sections of the

application.

Administer menu: This menu offers access to My Preferences for all users

and can include access to My Calendar for users with an associated

resource. Application administrators will also have access to one or more

of the following menu items: application settings, enterprise data, user

access, or user interface views.

86

Item Description

Personal Workspace dashboard: This default dashboard displays the

portlets you have selected that are important to your work goals. In this

example, notice the familiar hyperlinks including Customize which you

can click to configure the dashboard for use by you or multiple users.

Notice too that Personal Workspace is also the name for the tab you

would click to open this dashboard if more than one dashboard

appeared on this page.

Toolbars: From top to bottom, the Private Documents toolbar, the

Activities toolbar, and the Issues toolbar. There are hundreds of toolbars

throughout the application made up of over 400 icons. The Activities, EPS,

and Resource Assignments toolbars in the application also feature their

own Actions, Edit, and View menus.

Scorecard portfolio view portlet: In this example, the user has customized

this dashboard by adding a portfolio view of type scorecard within its

own portlet. The portlet also shows color-coded indicators in the Strategic

Alignment column of the scorecard and can be further customized to

suit work goals. The colors of a bar chart or histogram are also visible in

the Original Budget portfolio view portlet.

Projects navigation bar: This bar shows buttons representing pages

determined by your assigned user interface view and any custom

preferences you made. Similar bars can be found under the Portfolios,

Projects, and Resources sections.

Activity Table: One of the central work areas of the entire application,

this table allows you to customize its columns (fields), color-coded

grouping bands, and sort options, and of course apply filters.

Activity Gantt chart: Shown adjacent to the Activity Table, the Activity

Gantt chart represents your schedule and offers robust customizable

project management features including drag and drop editing,

timescale, progress lines, relationship lines, spotlights, bar necking, and

helpful mouseover tips.

Issues detail window: To gather the related details associated with a

particular item in certain tables, the application often provides one or

more detail windows in a series along the bottom. On pages supporting

applied views, you can determine which detail windows are shown or

hidden with your view.

P6 Overview

87

About Screen Controls

Screens - As is typical with enterprise software, the application's main pages present

more detail the further the user navigates within them. The following types of screen

controls will appear:

Pages

Tabbed Pages or simply, Tabs

Detail Windows

Dialog Boxes

Portlets

Working with the Main Menus

The seven main menus of P6 are located in the title bar and navigation bar. The menus

are:

Dashboards

Portfolios

Projects

Resources

Reports

Administer

Help

You can click each main menu directly on its icon or text to execute its default

command; however, you must click only on the triangle portion ( ) of the menu for the

additional Dashboard, Portfolio, Project, or Resource menu items to appear. If no triangle

appears next to the menu, this indicates your user interface view settings do not include

access to its menu items.

In all of the main menus except Help and Reports, your assigned user interface view and

your view settings on the My Preferences page determine which menu items appear, if

any. The portfolios and projects menus also display a list of your most recently used

portfolios and projects.

Each menu item will take you to another page or dialog box. If the first page for projects

or portfolios is already open, and you select one of the most recently used items in the

menu, it will open the selected projects or portfolios and refresh the page.

88

The sample image below demonstrates what you might see in your main menus. For the

most accurate details regarding your menus, see the help topic for the Content Tab of

the User Interface View Details Page and check your actual settings in the application.

Table of P6 Main Menus

Item Description

P6 title bar: Located in the P6 title bar, the Administer menu provides links

to related pages based on your view settings and personal preferences.

The Help menu items are standard and cannot be changed.

P6 navigation bar: Located in the P6 navigation bar, each menu opens

up additional pages within the section it represents. The Dashboards,

Portfolios, Projects, and Resources menus provide links to related pages

based on your view settings and personal preferences. The menus for

portfolios and projects also display links to your most recently used items.

Dashboards menu: Provides links to manage dashboards and timesheets.

Portfolios menu: Provides links to open and manage portfolios, views, and

scenarios. This example also shows three recently used portfolios, opened

by project code, manually-defined portfolio, and EPS element.

Projects menu: Provides links to open one or more projects, adjust specific

enterprise data for projects, and schedule services. This example also

shows five recently used projects or project groups, including two

individual projects, and all projects within the Energy Services EPS

element, Projects over $100K global filtered portfolio, and Mobile Product

project code group.

P6 Overview

89

Item Description

Resources menu: Contains a single link to adjust resource-specific

enterprise data without navigating away from the current page.

Administer menu: Assuming all its menu items are configured, this menu

provides links to adjust your own calendar and personal preferences. In

addition, it can also display links to the Application Settings, Enterprise

Data, User Access, and User Interface Views pages.

Help menu: A fixed menu providing links to the Online Help, P6 Library of

documents available online, and the Oracle Primavera Customer

Support website. If so configured, the Help menu can also provide links to

multimedia tutorials powered by Oracle UPK technology.

About the Most Recently Used List

As you work, when you click the Portfolios or Projects menu, by default P6

displays the five most recently used items, with the item you most recently opened listed

first.

Note: Your administrator can increase the list of most recently used

items to a maximum of ten.

The most recently used projects include individual projects or project groups (EPS nodes,

portfolios, or project code values). The most recently used portfolios include project

groups.

Projects are not added to the most recently used projects list when you create a project,

initiate a project request, or open a random set of projects (for example, projects from

multiple portfolios, but not the full portfolio itself). Projects you access from portlets are

added to the list, unless you access only activity detail information (such as activity

notebooks or documents) directly from a portlet.

90

Working with Tables

Tables appear throughout the application to not only display information, but also to

allow you to modify it, as permitted. The following general features are common to most

tables.

Table of Common Table Features

Item Description

Sort Order Indicators: Indicates the column you have selected to sort the

rows. Each time you click a column header, the sort order toggles from

ascending order, to descending order, and, for some tables, it cycles

back to unsorted order (the original order in which the entries were

created).

Grouping Levels: Many tables group related rows into hierarchical levels

you can click through to expand or collapse. Some tables use colored

bands to help you view these levels.

Selection Highlighting: The currently selected row is highlighted for you.

You can directly click and drag to select one or more entries. Hold down

the Ctrl key as you mouse click rows to select more than one. Hold down

Shift as you click two entries to select all contiguous rows.

Changed Data Icons: When rows change in a table, three color-coded

icons are used to signal the type of change that has occurred. A gold

icon indicates a pending change, a green icon indicates a new

entry, and a red icon indicates an error.

Data Entry Features: Tables allow you to directly edit data with

convenient controls to assist you in entering the right type of data. For

example, a date field will display a calendar.

P6 Overview

91

Column Resizing: You can directly drag to resize column widths.

Column Configuration: On most pages, a convenient Select Columns

icon allows you to select which columns are shown or hidden in the table.

Column Order: You can directly drag and drop column headings to

customize your tables.

About Columns (Fields)

Fields hold data. They generally either allow you to enter values or just display the field's

current value (called a read-only field).

Pages with tables often permit you to configure the fields that make up the columns of

the table. See Showing or Hiding Columns in a Table (on page 91).

Showing or Hiding Columns in a Table

When the list of available fields or columns for a table is relatively short, indicated by the

presence of the Select Columns icon and field list in the toolbar, use it to show and hide

the columns that appear.

To show and hide columns:

1) On the toolbar, click Select Columns.

2) From the resulting list of fields or columns:

a. Select an available column (not checked) to immediately display it in the table.

b. Select a currently visible column (checked) to immediately hide it in the table.

Note: You might have to scroll to the right end of a table to see all

the columns.

Configuring Columns or Values

When the list of available fields, columns, or values for a list, table, view, scorecard, or

other entity is relatively long, follow these common steps to configure the fields or values

you want. Essentially, you move the items you want from the available side to the

selected side.

For example, these steps apply when selecting projects or templates in the Open

Projects dialog box, when configuring the fields to display as columns in a table, and

when assigning individual users to a user interview view.

To configure fields, columns, or values:

92

1) In the Available Items list, select one or more items. If arranged in a hierarchy, click

to expand a group and view its items. Hold down the Ctrl key as you click to select

individual items or press the Shift key to extend your selection to an entire block of

items including the first and last items you clicked.

2) Click or double-click each item to add them to the Selected Items list. This is the

list of selected fields or values you want to appear in your customized list, table, view,

scorecard, or other entity.

3) To remove items, select them in the Selected Items list and click or double-click

them. If you need them again, the items are available in the list of available items.

4) In the Selected Items list, if applicable, adjust the order of appearance of your items:

a. Click to advance the item up or to the left in a table.

b. Click to advance the item down or to the right in a table.

Note: You can also directly click and drag columns in tables to

configure their order of appearance.

P6 Overview

93

Working with Toolbars

Throughout the application, pages, tabs, portlets, detail windows, and dialog boxes

provide access to essential commands in toolbars. Most toolbars are static, however, the

ones on the Activities, EPS, and Resource Assignment pages can be moved and

customized.

Table of Toolbar Elements

Item Description

Toolbar shortcut menu: Right-click within blank space on this panel to

select the toolbars you want in your customized view. You can also select

Rearrangeable or Customize Toolbars, both described below.

Rearrangeable toolbar: Click and hold the mouse button down on the

toolbar's edge until you see the move cursor. Then, drag to position the

toolbar wherever it is needed.

94

Item Description

Docked toolbar: In this example, the user has dragged the Edit toolbar

from its typical location on top to the page's left edge until it snaps into a

vertically-oriented position.

Customize Toolbar Items dialog box: In this example, the user has

selected Customize Toolbars from the Toolbars submenu of the View

menu. On this dialog box, the user has elected to hide the Fill Down

command icon from their Edit toolbar.

Activity View toolbar: This toolbar represents an example where a subset

of the commands found under the View menu are presented here in a

static or fixed toolbar for convenient access.

Toolbar in a detail window: The Steps detail window, like many other

detail windows, has its own fixed toolbar.

Customizing Toolbars

Toolbars are made up of icons that represent the commands you can invoke. You can

customize the appearance of icons on toolbars and move the toolbars on the following

pages only:

EPS page

Activities page

Resource Assignments page

P6 saves any custom settings you make with toolbars. When you return to one of these

pages with customizable toolbars, the settings you specified last will be reapplied to the

toolbars.

To customize a toolbar:

1) Navigate to one of the pages that support toolbar customization.

2) From the View menu, select Toolbars and then select Customize Toolbars...

3) On the Customize Toolbar Items dialog box:

a. In the Toolbar pane, select a toolbar.

b. In the Toolbar Item check box list, select the check box for the icons you want to

include. Clear the check box for the items you want to hide.

c. Click Save.

4) To reposition a toolbar:

a. On the page you selected for step 1, right-click in the blank space between

toolbars and select Rearrangeable.

P6 Overview

95

b. Click the grab handle for the toolbar you want to move and drag it to a new

position. Supported positions include the left, right, top, or bottom margins of the

main work area of the page.

Working with "Select a Value" Dialog Boxes

Throughout the application, certain types of fields require specific types of values. To

assist you in selecting from only a constrained list of available choices, the interface will

display Select a Value dialog boxes for you to search for and select a specific value

appropriate for the current field.

Note: Field lists of values are used when the available choices are

manageable (usually, less than 10 values). However, when the

number of available choices is large (for example, there might be

hundreds of projects), the application will offer Select a Value

dialog boxes.

Table 1 of 2: Select a Value Dialog Boxes

Item Description

Select a Value Button: Throughout the application, click Select a

Value to open a selection dialog box.

96

Item Description

Search Area: The top part of the dialog box contains search controls to

help you constrain the values based on your criteria.

Results area: The middle part of the dialog box displays the available

values based on your search criteria, if any. Make your selection here.

Command buttons: The bottom part of the dialog box contains

command buttons. Standard buttons include OK or Assign to accept the

value you selected, and Close to cancel the operation, close the dialog

box, and return to the previous screen.

Similar selection buttons: The Select a Date and Select a URL dialog boxes

function in a similar manner to the selection dialog boxes. Click these

buttons, when present in the interface, to select a constrained value for

the specific field.

Table 2 of 2: Select a Value Dialog Boxes

Item Description

Selection Buttons: Similar to the button, in these examples, click or

to choose a particular item.

P6 Overview

97

Item Description

Search Area: The top part of the dialog box contains custom search

controls to help you constrain the values based on your criteria. In one

example, option buttons are used to constrain Global, EPS, or Project

code values.

Results Area: The middle part of the dialog box displays the available

values based on your search criteria, if any. Make your selection here.

Command Buttons: The bottom part of the dialog box contains

command buttons. Standard buttons include Assign or OK to accept the

value you selected, and Close to cancel the operation, close the dialog

box, and return to the previous screen. Other buttons can also appear in

this area.

Selecting Values from "Select a Value" Dialog Boxes

To assist you in selecting from a constrained list of available values, the application will

often display Select a Value dialog boxes. Use these special dialog boxes to search for

potential matching values and select one or more specific values appropriate for the

current field.

Note: Although commonly used throughout the application, each

dialog box can contain unique options.

To select a value from a Select a Value dialog box:

1) Enter any search criteria to reduce the number of values shown.

2) Select a value in the list. If grouped in a hierarchy, expand a group to view the values.

3) Click OK or Assign.

4) Repeat these steps to select additional values if necessary.

5) When finished, click Close.

98

Working with Data in P6

The application's data entry controls are convenient and easy to use.

Table of Common Data Entry Controls

Item Description

Expandable sections: Often times a screen will reduce visual clutter by

hiding its fields and other controls. Expand these regions to show its fields.

In the sample image, we say that the Custom Portlets section is

expanded or opened, and the Performance Threshold section is

collapsed or closed. Also of note, you can directly modify the Title field

but the Last modified by field information is read-only.

Note: Data you enter can later become read-only for you or other users.

P6 Overview

99

Item Description

Auto-Complete: Also known as type-ahead. As you type in a field that

must be assigned a value from a pre-defined list of acceptable values,

the closest single matching value is automatically selected for you. If

multiple values match your typed input, they appear in a list. To select a

value, click one or press the up or down arrow keys on your keyboard

and then press Enter.

Select a Value from an Extended List: Click to select a field value from

a Select a Value dialog box listing only valid values. You cannot type in

your own entry in fields where the Select from Value List icon appears. This

convention is used whenever a field's value must be logically constrained

and validated against a pre-defined set of values. To illustrate this point,

consider the following example. You can type whatever you want in a

Name field for a new item you are creating; however, in a User field, you

must enter a valid user.

Select a Value from a Short List: In this example, the Activity Type field is

shown at rest. Below that, after the user has selected the field's list, its

values appear. For these kinds of fields, you will see references in the

documentation to selecting a value from the Activity Type list.

Options: For simplicity's sake, both radio buttons and check boxes are

referred to as options.

Dates: You can type a date in a valid format directly into a date field. Or,

you can select a date, including the time, from a small pop-up calendar.

Indicators: To help you readily identify the meaning of a given metric,

these color-coded graphics appear. You can also define your own

custom user-defined indicators.

Working with Detail Windows

When additional details about an item are necessary, rather than clutter the main work

area, the application will often use subordinate tabbed panels called detail windows.

Detail windows supplement their parent pages with related data and often include their

own toolbars. These special windows allow you to:

minimize them to a series of tabs

float, drag and drop, and freely resize them

tile them, or align them as overlapping tabs

dock or pin them (when docked, allowable placement includes bottom, left, and

right of the current work area)

100

When you customize the detail windows on the EPS, Activities, or Assignments pages, P6

prompts you to save the settings with the current view.

Note: Visual clues guide you when docking floating panels. As you

click the titlebar and drag it within the work area, a gray

rectangular outline indicates the panel will "snap to" this available

location.

Table of Key Detail Window Elements

Item Description

A series of detail windows: In this example, the three detail windows for

Steps, Documents, and Issues appear in a series aligned at the bottom of

the page with their titles shown in tabs.

Floating detail window: The user has dragged and dropped the Expenses

detail window to a position where it appears to be floating above the

rest. Click the Restore button in the titlebar to make the window go back

with its siblings.

Docked detail windows:The Assignments and Trace Logic detail windows

have been docked or pinned by the user to the space immediately to

the right of the main work area.

Minimized detail window: The Codes detail window has been minimized.

In this particular example, it also happens to be minimized to a position

along the right edge of the page. Typically, detail windows are minimized

along the bottom.

P6 Overview

101

Item Description

Detail window titlebar icons: Click these icons to Float, Restore, and

Minimize detail windows individually or collectively as a series.

About Portlets

Portlets are small expandable windows representing a specific theme or particular

subject matter. They are only available on dashboards, project workspaces, or

workgroup pages. Portlets provide a concise way to organize, present, and assess

project data within a single page and also offer tools for adding, modifying, and

personalizing portfolio, project, and resource data. Portlets on shared dashboards or

workspaces provide a centralized place for collaborating with other users.

The same portlet might display information differently depending on the page on which

it appears. On a dashboard, portlets display data based on association, ownership, or

applied filters. On a project workspace, portlets reflect data for the open project. On a

workgroup workspace, portlets show information belonging to that workgroup.

About Data Entry Controls

Data Entry Controls: P6 provides easy-to-use controls for entering data. To assist you in

choosing the right types of values, fields will sometimes present dialog boxes or calendars

for selecting from a pre-defined list of values or dates. Familiar value lists help narrow

choices and enforce consistency. You'll also recognize standard options (a term used for

both check boxes and option buttons or radio buttons), tables, spreadsheets, Gantt

charts, calendars, and other on-screen controls.

Printing Pages Using P6 Printing Tools

Available on most pages within the application, the printing tools and options provided

with the user interface offer the best options and output. It is recommended that you use

the Print Preview feature before generating actual output.

To print application pages:

1) Navigate to the specific page or tab and customize the view to meet your data

requirements.

2) In the toolbar, if available, click Print Preview to preview the printed output.

3) (Optional) In the Print Preview toolbar, adjust the preview using the commands

provided. For example, click Portrait to orient output to a standard tall page, or

click Landscape to orient output to a wide page.

4) In the toolbar, click Print to send the output to your default printer.

102

5) (Optional) In the Print dialog box, adjust the printer, page range, number of copies,

PDF settings, and other printing options. Click OK to print the output.

Tips

If the application printing tools are not available for the specific page or view you want

to print, you might be able to print the page using your web browser; however, this

method can never be guaranteed and might produce substandard results. See Printing

Pages Using Your Web Browser (on page 102).

Printing Pages Using Your Web Browser

Because P6 runs inside your web browser, you can print any data from any page at any

time using your browser's Print command. For example, in Microsoft Internet Explorer,

choose Print from the File menu. P6 application pages also feature a Print link you can

click. In addition, many pages also include separate Print toolbuttons in a toolbar.

Note: Whenever they are available, the printing commands

provided by the application offer the best options and output. It is

also recommended that you always use the Print Preview feature

before generating actual output.

To print data:

1) On any page that supports printing, click the Print link in the top right corner.

2) In the resulting Print dialog box for your operating system, choose a printer and click

OK to print.

Note: You have completed this task. Continue with the following

steps only if necessary to improve or customize the output.

3) In the Print dialog box, if available, click Print Preview. Refer to Print Preview

Toolbar to learn more about the Print Preview toolbar. If not available, use your

browser's Print Preview command. For example, in Internet Explorer choose Print

Preview from the File menu.

4) In the Print Preview dialog box, to customize the output, click Page Setup or click

your browser's Page Setup button.

5) In the Page Setup dialog box, apply the following optional settings on separate tabs if

available:

a. Click the Page or Page Layout tab to set the paper size and margins.

b. Click the Header/Footer tab, or separate tabs if available, to select pre-defined

headers or footers, or define your own.

c. Click the Sheet tab, if available, to set the range and tiled page order.

6) Click OK to close the Page Setup dialog box.

P6 Overview

103

7) In the Print Preview dialog box, click Print or Print (Alt+P) to make any final

adjustments in the Print dialog box. For example, click the Pages option and enter a 1

in both the from and to fields if you only want to print the first page of a lengthy report.

8) Click OK or Print.

Tips

When printing a spreadsheet or histogram on the Team Usage page, right-click in the

work area and choose Print.

The Print Preview dialog box for the Portfolio Analysis page includes special options.

About E-Mail Notifications

Notifications is a feature that enables users to be contacted by e-mail when changes

occur relating to project data such as issues, timesheets, or workflows. For example, you

can be notified when a project workflow is awaiting your approval.

When new user accounts are created, the user's e-mail address can be stored. This

allows them to receive e-mail notifications when certain events occur such as when a

user also mapped to a resource is assigned to an activity. Using issues as another

example, users can be notified about issues when the issue's priority level is set to "high",

when a specific issue code is assigned, or when any change to an issue occurs.

E-mail notifications can be sent manually or configured to be sent automatically by the

application.

Working with E-Mail Notifications

If available on the current page, portlet, or dialog box, you can click to manually

send an e-mail message.

P6 provides the following e-mail notifications. Follow the summary steps below (or, if

needed, see more detailed task topics) to configure automatic e-mail notifications for a

particular item.

Requirements:

In general, you should have an e-mail address stored in your user account to send e-mail

and recipient users should have an e-mail address stored in their user accounts to

receive e-mail. The e-mail accounts are required in order to send e-mail to users by

selecting them from a list. They are then automatically applied to the e-mail message.

However, it is also possible to manually enter a recipient's e-mail address in the E-Mail

dialog box just before sending the message.

To use the Notifications feature, your administrator will enable settings in P6 Administrator

application and configure it for use with a mail server.

After notifications are enabled, each individual can specify their personal notification

preferences enumerated below:

104

To configure automatic e-mail to a resource when that resource is added or removed

from an assignment, select the Send e-mail to resources upon adding or removing

assignments option in the General section of the Global tab of the My Preferences

page.

To receive e-mail notifications about issues, configure the Issues section of the Global

tab of the My Preferences page. You can be notified about issues based on an issue's

priority level. For example, you can be notified only when an issue's priority is listed as

"high." You can also be notified when issues are modified, or when issues are assigned

a specific issue code. You can be notified about issues for projects and workgroups

based on whether you have project access rights, issue access rights, if you are the

Project Owner or Issue Owner, or if you are assigned as a resource to that activity.

To automatically send e-mail to a designated temporary project manager delegate

assigned to approve timesheets, select the check box on the Assign Project Manager

Delegate dialog box. This will notify the delegate of their temporary assignment to

review timesheets and will list the designated projects.

To automatically send e-mail to a designated temporary resource manager

delegate assigned to approve timesheets, select the check box on the Assign

Resource Manager Delegate dialog box. This will notify the delegate of their

temporary assignment to review timesheets and will list the designated projects and

individual resources.

To automatically send e-mail to a resource about a rejected timesheet, reject the

timesheet on the TimeSheet Approval page from within P6. You will be prompted to

send a notice.

Administrators can configure BPM to notify a user when a project workflow is awaiting

that user's approval.

Sending E-Mail to Resource Teams

You can send e-mail to an entire resource team of your choosing.

To send e-mail to a resource team:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the Resource Team Summary portlet:

4) In the Resource Team Summary portlet:

a. Click Filter by and select the team to which you want to send an e-mail.

b. Click E-mail resource team.

5) In the E-mail dialog box:

a. Edit the recipient list, message, and subject as needed.

b. Click Send E-mail.

Tips

You must have an e-mail address listed in you user profile to send an e-mail.

P6 Overview

105

Sending E-Mail Notifications about Resource Assignments

An automatic notification feature can be configured to send e-mail to the affected

resources when you add, change, or remove a resource assignment.

To configure P6 to automatically send e-mail about resource assignments:

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab, expand the General section.

4) In the General section:

a. Select the Send e-mail to resources upon adding or removing assignments option.

b. The system automatically selects the Prompt before sending e-mail option. Clear

the option if you do not want prompts.

5) On the Global tab, click Save and Close.

Tips

The address and subject line for the e-mail are generated based on the specific

assignment circumstances. For example, when you first assign a resource to an

activity, the e-mail subject line tells the resource they have been assigned and

provides the activity name. In all cases, the message text includes the project name,

resource start and finish dates, planned units, and planned units/time.

When the automatic e-mail option is on, confirmation messages are sent to you,

indicating the names of the recipients.

If a resource does not have an e-mail address specified on the Resources tab of the

Administration page, no e-mail can be sent.

When a resource is replaced on an activity, an e-mail is sent to the removed resource

and to the replacement resource.

About Grouping and Sorting

To simplify the display of complex tables of data, you can group rows of similar data and

sort the grouped bands as well as the data under them. Grouping helps you block

distracting data and focus only on the information you need. It also permits you to

collapse and expand hierarchical arrangements of your data rather than navigate large

flat lists.

Working with Group and Sort Features

This set of controls appears throughout the application (most notably on the Activities,

EPS, and Assignments pages) and offers similar functionality for grouping and sorting the

fields (or columns) in a list, table, or scorecard. Options for text color, band background

color, and showing data in bands are also provided.

106

To answer questions you need answered involving two or more fields, consider grouping

by those fields. For example, if you need to know Do we have any code yellow activities

that started this month or last and that are assigned to vendor ABC? then group and sort

by your code, start date (to the month level), and vendor fields.

Table of Common Grouping and Sorting Screen Elements

Item Description

Common Group and Sort Example: In this example, the Activities page is

grouped by the Project, WBS, and Start Date fields.

Custom Group and Sort Example: In this example, the Activities page is

grouped by the Crew project code, then by Action, Primary Resource,

and finally the Status activity code. This helps the user pinpoint the exact

data they were looking for.

P6 Overview

107

Item Description

Custom Group and Sort Settings: These are the corresponding Customize

Groupings dialog box settings applied to achieve the example in item 2

above. Even though the hierarchical fields are capable of displaying

data in more nested levels, the user is only concerned with the top two

levels indicated by a 2 in the To Level field.

Notes:

Most groupings support up to ten (10) levels with some pages

such as the Activities, EPS, and Resource Assignments pages

supporting up to twenty (20) levels of grouping by one or more

fields.

Because projects can be in two different portfolios, the same

project can appear in two different group bands when you are

grouped by portfolio. If you edit one of these bands, the other

bands will automatically be updated.

Grouping and Sorting Information

Grouping and sorting data helps reduce its visual complexity.

To group and sort data:

1) Navigate to a page supporting grouping and sorting.

2) If available in a toolbar, click Grouping and select a grouping option. The entries

are grouped hierarchically and sorted alphabetically.

3) If available in a toolbar, click Group... to open the Customize Groupings dialog

box.

4) On the Customize Groupings dialog box:

a. In the Level 1 Field list, select the first field you want to use to group all other data.

The available fields are arranged into categories that apply to your specific

context within the application.

b. In the remaining levels, select additional fields you want to use to further group

data empirically.

c. For each field, in the To Level list, select how deep the hiearchical groupings of

each field should appear. For example, if your project contained ten levels of

hierarchical WBS elements, enter 2 here if you only want to group all activities by

their top two WBS values. This is useful if you only want to see tasks grouped into

high-level arrangements, making them easier to scan. Instead of having to click

through each nested level, you might only be interested in seeing activities for

Phase II that fall under the Planning stage. To see activities grouped by all ten

levels, choose 10 or All.

108

d. For each field, in the Sort Order list, select how you want the grouped data bands

to be sorted when your grouping options are applied.

Note: You can click a column header in the actual table you just

customized later to change the column used to sort the data rows

under each band, but the sort order for the grouping bands

themselves is only determined by your selections in the Sort Order

list on the Customize Groupings dialog box.

e. Click OK to close the dialog box and apply your grouping options to the page you

selected in step 1.

About Find, Search, and Filter Features

The application provides three main ways to find the data you need: Find, Search, and

Filter.

The Find feature is available in tables to help you find the next matching row in a column.

Use the Find feature in table columns to locate matching rows of data one at a time up

or down the table.

Note: For pages with static data, use the Find feature in your web

browser to locate fixed elements of the user interface. See the help

documentation for your web browser.

The Search feature is available on certain pages or dialog boxes to help you reduce the

number of available values, showing only those values that meet your search criteria. Use

the Search feature wherever it is available to locate only matching values.

The Filter feature is available on certain pages to help you reduce the amount of data in

tables, showing only those values that meet your filter criteria. Use the Filter feature

wherever it is available to view only matching values. For example, you might configure

a view with pre-defined filter, group, and sort parameters.

Working with Find, Search, and Filter Features

The application supports three general ways to find only the data you need. The options

available vary from page to page.

Find: Use the basic Find feature to search for matching entries, one at a time, in

tables.

Search: Use Search to view all matching entries in certain dialog boxes and special

pages.

Filter: An advanced type of search, filters show all matching entries while hiding the

data you don't want to view on the Activities, EPS, and Resource Assignments pages.

You can also apply filters to include only certain kinds of projects in a portfolio, or to

include only specific project codes on a dashboard.

P6 Overview

109

Finding Entries

Another common feature of P6 tables is the Find command. Unlike the Search feature

which shows you all matching results at once, the Find feature searches up or down in a

column to find the next single matching entry.

To find entries in a table:

1) Navigate to any page with a table of entries.

2) Right-click in a specific column of the table and choose Find.

3) In the Find dialog box:

a. In the Find what field, enter your search criteria

b. Mark the Match whole words only option to constrain the results to only values that

match the exact words as typed.

c. Mark the Match case option to constrain the results to only values that match the

upper or lowercase spelling of the words as typed.

d. In the Direction section, select either Up or Down to indicate the direction of the

search.

e. Click Find or press Enter to search up or down through the rows of values in the

selected column. Your matching search results are highlighted in the current table.

4) To find the next matching entry, right-click and select Find Next.

To find matching data on a page, however, use your web browser's Find command.

To find entries on a page:

1) Navigate to any page displaying field data.

2) In your web browser, select Find from the Edit menu. For Internet Explorer 8.x, select

Find on this Page from the Edit menu.

3) In the Find field, enter your search criteria and click OK or press Enter.

4) Your matching search results are highlighted on the current page.

Searching for Entries

The application provides similar search tools wherever they are required to help you

search for matching entries. For example, if you create a new issue while viewing a

project on the Activities page, one of the required fields you'll need to complete is called

Responsible Manager. To complete the field, you can either type a value if known, or

click to open the Select Responsible Manager dialog box. If you open the dialog box,

you can use the search field provided to search for a particular name in the OBS rather

than manually click through all the OBS entries. As another example, when you open

projects, templates, or portfolios, you can use the search tools to find matches by name

or ID.

To search for matching entries:

110

1) If a search button such as Search is available, click it to show the Search field. If

not, proceed to the next step.

2) If a Search field is available, enter your search criteria and . If no search options are

available, the current page or dialog box does not support searching.

3) Click Search or press Enter to perform the search.

Note: Common dialog boxes in which you are asked to select a

value (accessible by clicking Select a Value throughout the

application) often include search features. See Working with

'Select a Value' Dialog Boxes (see "Working with "Select a Value"

Dialog Boxes" on page 95).

About Filters

As you work with increasing amounts of data over time, you will recognize a need to limit

your focus to only the data most relevant to your particular task or need. A filter is a

predefined constraint you place on data so that data that does not meet your filter

criteria is hidden and only the data you need are shown.

Working with Filters

Apply filters to large tables or complex pages in the application so their complexity and

time to display are reduced. For example, rather than displaying all activities for all

resources from all projects, likely to result in an unmanageable volume of data, you

might filter the Activities page to display only the activities assigned to you from a single

project. In this example, your filter criteria include an identifier for the single project and

an identifier for you.

Some pages feature basic filter options while others handle the most advanced logical

parameters. Applied alone or in combination, filters represent a powerful tool for

managing vast amounts of data.

P6 Overview

111

Basic Filters

The application presents simple filters you can apply to refine the data displayed. Basic

filters do not require you to define very detailed parameters.

Table of Basic Filter Elements

Item Description

A dashboard filter: In this example, the user has decided to apply a filter

to their personal dashboard. The applied filter will determine the data

that appears in all the portlets of the dashboard.

112

Item Description

The dashboard filtered by portfolio: The user's filter parameters are basic.

Essentially, the user selects a portfolio. Notice here that the user could

have elected to filter the dashboard by a special type of portfolio called

a filtered portfolio that is itself defined by more advanced filter criteria.

These examples illustrate how you can use filters to refine the precision of

the data you need while eliminating the noise or data you don't need.

Advanced Filters

You can create advanced filters to control with pinpoint accuracy the data displayed.

Advanced filters enable you to define what some users might perceive as complicated

logical parameters.

Example: A project manager for Product Release Y is tasked with assigning resources to

all non-Red Priority activities. She wants to examine all of John Brunner's assignments to

see if he is available to assign to other activities that have not yet started and do not yet

have resources assigned to them. Her filter criteria is demonstrated below:

Product Release equals Product Release Y (a custom project code) any of the following rules Priority is not equal to Red Primary Resource equals johnb - John Brunner Primary Resource is empty

The PM applies both her own user filter and the standard Not started activities only filter to

view activities matching either set of criteria in order to cast a wider net and review the

results.

P6 Overview

113

Table of Advanced Filter Elements

Item Description

Creation of a new filter: In this example, the user wants to reduce the

number of activities on the Activities page. After naming the new filter,

the user defines custom parameters to constrain the data.

Filters applied to the current activity view: After creating the new single

user filter, the user marks it and also marks one of the standard filters. The

user has also elected to show matches for any applied filters.

Filtering Data

Filters use logical rules you define to hide the data that you don't want to display. This

allows you to work with only the "good" data you want. Filters help reduce visual clutter

and improve performance.

To use filters:

1) Navigate to a page that supports filtering.

2) Define and save your filter criteria.

3) Enable or apply the filter.

Note: Defining filter criteria varies within the application from

making a few simple selections to applying advanced logic.

Pages Supporting Filters

The following areas of P6 support filtering:

Page Description

Activities page Apply filters based on project and activity parameters to

target specific activities.

EPS page Apply filters based on EPS and project parameters to

target specific projects.

Resource Assignments page Apply filters based on resource and role parameters to

target specific assignments.

Dashboards page Apply filters based on portfolios, projects, or codes to

target specific project and portfolio data displayed in

portlets on the dashboard.

Timesheet Approval page Apply filters based on timesheet status to target specific

timesheets.

114

Page Description

Portfolio Analysis

page

Apply filters based on EPS, portfolio, and project code to

target specific portfolio data.

Issues page and

Issues portlets

Apply filters based on issue parameters to target specific

issues.

Risks page Apply filters based on risk parameters to target specific

risks.

Create Portfolio and

Portfolio Details

pages

Apply filters based on project data, codes, and UDFs to

target specific projects that make up a portfolio.

Workflow portlet Apply basic filters to view workflow tasks on the Action

Required tab and filter by role or status on the My

Workflows tab.

Creating, Modifying, and Deleting Data

In general, you can create items and then directly modify the data in any field at any

time; however, the application will often guide you by making certain fields read-only or

hiding them when appropriate. To create items, follow the steps in the task topics

included in this online help or user guide. To modify data, follow the Getting Here steps to

navigate to a page or dialog box where you can directly view and edit the data. For

example, to modify activity data, navigate to the Activities page.

Once on a page, click in a field on a page or double-click in a table cell to edit or

remove a value. Changes made will cascade through P6 automatically.

If you cannot modify the data item, consider the following reasons:

The item is read-only. In other words, the data on the page is only being displayed for

you to view; however, it cannot be modified.

Your current view settings do not allow you to access the data. For example, you

might be able to access the data by adjusting your group and sort or filter settings.

Or, you might need to customize your user interface view settings or ask your

administrator to configure or reassign your user interface view.

Your current security settings do not allow you to access the data. You do not have

security, OBS, module access, or other access permissions to modify the item.

Specific business logic prohibits making certain modifications. For example, the item

can only be modified by its creator and cannot be modified by other users, or it

cannot be changed after a certain date.

P6 Overview

115

Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Data

Use the standard Cut, Copy, and Paste features to save time while working with a variety

of items in the application. For example, you can copy an entire resource or role

assignment table row from one project to another in the resource planning spreadsheet

on the Resource Planning page. Instead of creating a new user from scratch,

administrators might add a new user by simply copying and pasting an existing entry on

the Users page for a similar user.

The steps for copying and pasting the following types of data in the application are

essentially the same:

individual field and cell values

activities, including their steps and other associated data items

projects, including their WBS, activities, steps and other associated data items

EPS nodes, including their project & WBS data and activity data

resource and role assignments

user accounts and their associated data items

global and project security profiles, including their privileges

currencies, funding sources, calendar data, project codes, activity codes, and other

enterprise data supporting copy and paste functionality

scheduled reports

Note: The list above is not meant to represent all areas of the

application supporting this feature. Cut, Copy, and Paste

functionality is supported when these commands appear in a

toolbar or shortcut (right-click) menu.

To copy and paste a value:

1) Right-click on a row in a table and choose Copy (Ctrl+C) to copy the data item.

To remove the original item instead of creating a copy, choose Cut (Ctrl+X). In

fields, select the entire cell value or just a portion and then right-click and select Cut or

Copy.

2) Navigate to the supported destination for the new copied item, right-click, and

choose Paste (Ctrl+V). The supported destination should be compatible in order

for the copied data to paste successfully. For example, a row in a table pasted as a

row in another table, or a date-time field value pasted into another date-time field.

Note: Hold down the Ctrl key while clicking to select multiple rows

in a table. Hold down the Shift key to select contiguous rows.

116

About Removal vs. Deletion

In general, when you have the required security privileges, the application supports

direct modification, removal, and deletion of data. For example, you can directly input a

value over an existing field value or select an entry in almost any list or table and click

Delete to remove an assignment or delete an item. In some cases, certain additional

security settings might be required. You should also be aware of subtle differences

between removing an item and permanently deleting an item. Be aware that there may

be undesired consequences of your decision to remove or delete an item.

Deleting Entries

The steps for deleting any entry in the entire application, such as activities, steps, or users,

are generally the same.

To delete an entry:

1) Navigate to any table or list of entries in the application.

2) Select an entry. To select multiple entries, press and hold the Ctrl key down as you

click additional entries. Press and hold the Shift key down to select all contiguous

entries.

3) Delete the entry using one of the following generally available methods:

a. In tables, right-click and select Delete.

b. If a toolbar is available, click Delete (Delete).

c. On other pages or dialog boxes, click the available Delete button or link.

4) If prompted to confirm, click OK.

To learn more about the options, details, and consequences associated with deleting

various types of entries, refer to Removal vs. Deletion (see "About Removal vs. Deletion"

on page 116).

Undoing Mistakes

Mistakes happen from time to time and P6 includes some standard methods for reversing

unwanted changes. Follow the steps below and stop at the step that fixes your data

entry error. If a step does not undo your accidental entry, proceed to the next step.

To undo mistakes:

1) In a table with unsaved changes, click Cancel to discard any pending changes

and revert back to the last saved state.

2) If the page you are viewing shows a Cancel button or link, click it to discard any

pending changes and revert back to the last saved state.

3) If the page you are viewing shows a Restore to Defaults button or link, click it to restore

the page.

P6 Overview

117

Caution: This command will discard all changes that have ever

been made and will revert back to the original default values.

4) In a limited number of fields on only a few pages and dialog boxes, press Ctrl+Z to

undo only the most recent unsaved changes to only that field.

5) If you made an assignment and want to remove or change it, navigate back to the

page where you made the assignment and remove or change it. For example, you

can easily remove or change the users assigned to a user interface view, OBS

element, or portfolio. Begin by following the procedures in this help system for

assigning an entity and simply remove the assignment instead of making it.

6) If you created an item by mistake, and want to permanently delete it, begin by

following the procedures in this help system for creating the entity and simply delete it:

a. Navigate to the page showing the items.

b. Select the item you want to delete and click Delete.

c. Click Save to save your changes.

About Metrics and Calculations

P6 automatically calculates and displays various performance metrics designed to

enhance your company's competitive edge within your industry. Color-coded indicators,

such as Critical, Warning, Acceptable, and Exceptional, appear on

dashboards, workspaces, and portfolio pages to provide instant visual feedback.

The following categories of performance metrics are applied to portfolios, projects, or

even a single WBS to help you assess status relative to your goals.

Schedule - Metrics based on the current schedule, baseline duration, performance

percent complete, and schedule percent complete. This category also calculates

metrics at completion based on the current schedule. Examples include Schedule to

Date, Cost to Date, Schedule at Completion, and Cost at Completion.

Earned Value - Metrics based on Earned Value calculations. This category includes the

same metrics as the Schedule category, but uses different methods based on Earned

Value concepts such as SV and CV.

Index - Metrics based on cost or labor unit indices. This category includes:

SPI - A measure of the work accomplished as a percentage of the work

scheduled. The Schedule Performance Index helps determine if your schedule is

meeting earned and planned values.

CPI - A measure of the value of work accomplished as a percentage of the actual

costs. The Cost Performance Index helps assess spending vs. budget.

TCPI - A measure of the value of the remaining project work. The To Complete

Performance Index helps determine the level of performance required to achieve

your objectives within budget and on time.

118

Additional summaries, forecasts, variances, and other calculations are also provided

automatically. For example, portfolios provide built-in ROI calculations and projects will

automatically help you determine critical float paths.

Using Visual Indicators

Indicators are a special type of user-defined field (UDF) that enable you or other users to

select color-coded icons (such as ) to display as values in columns to highlight

specific activities, activity steps, activity resource assignments, documents, projects,

resources, risks, WBS elements, expenses, and issues.

To configure and apply user-defined indicators:

1) Click the Administer menu and choose Enterprise Data.

2) On the Enterprise Data pane, expand a group and select a UDF entry. For example,

expand Activities and click Activity UDFs.

3) On the UDFs page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. Enter a name for the UDF and then select Indicator from the Data Type list.

c. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

4) Navigate to the page where you want to display the color-coded indicator field,

such as Activities, EPS, or Risks, and add the indicator field to the table. Depending on

the page, click Customize, Columns, or Select Columns. See Showing and

Hiding Columns in a Table (see "Showing or Hiding Columns in a Table" on page 91) or

Configuring Columns or Values (on page 91).

5) In the indicator field, select a color-coded visual indicator (such as ) from the

list.

6) Click Save or Save.

About Importing and Exporting Data

Import/Export features allow you to bring data into P6 as well as export data to other

tools when needed.

Available Import Options:

Import Projects from other Oracle Primavera users or Microsoft Project

Import Activities

Import Resources

Import Appointments as personal non-work exception time from Microsoft Outlook

and other applications that support the iCalendar format

Available Export Options:

Export Projects

Export Activities

P6 Overview

119

Export Resources

Export Resource Allocation and Cost

Export Project Data to an ERP System

About Importing and Exporting Projects

You can import and export information to and from P6 using external files and then share

this information with other P6 EPPM users, Oracle Primavera Contractor users, other

project management tools (such as Microsoft Project and Microsoft Excel), and your

organization's human resource and accounting systems. You can also use external files

to archive your projects or create a backup of your database.

You can import and export project data between P6 and other applications using the

following file formats:

Oracle Primavera's XML format which enables you to share project information stored

in the P6 EPPM database.

Microsoft Project XML format which enables you to share information with Microsoft

Project 2007.

Note: All project data is stored in a central database. You can also

import projects using the Primavera XER format in P6 Professional.

Configuring Browser Settings

Before importing resource or Outlook data into P6, you must first give the browser

permission to invoke scripting commands on the ActiveX control that is part of the data

you want to import, such as Microsoft® Outlook or Excel. Since these applications are not

generally used for Web scripting, they are not marked as "safe for scripting", and

therefore web pages on sites that are part of your normal Internet zone do not have

permission to run script commands on it.

To allow P6 import features to invoke script commands on external applications, you

need to make the P6 web application site a member of a zone that has the privilege

"Initialize and script ActiveX controls not marked as safe". The "Trusted Sites" zone by

default has this privilege set to Prompt, which is recommended for this zone.

To set up P6 as a Trusted Site zone for importing data:

1) In your Web browser, choose Tools, Options.

2) Click the Security tab.

3) Click the Trusted Sites zone icon, then click the Sites button.

4) Enter the P6 hostname or IP address into the Add this web site to the zone field. Click

Add. If the message, "Sites added to this zone must use the https prefix" displays and

you do not want to use server verification, click OK and then clear the "Require Server

verification (https:) for all sites in this zone" option.

5) Click OK.

120

6) Once these settings are enabled, you will be prompted by P6 with the following

message "An ActiveX control on this page might be unsafe to interact with other parts

of the page. Do you want to allow this interaction?" Choose "Yes" to continue with the

import feature that you selected from P6.

About P6 Help

Use this online help system to learn more about the P6 application. Context-sensitive help

is available from almost every screen by clicking its Help link or Help button.

Use the Table of Contents, Search, and Related Topics features to find the topics of most

interest to you and your team.

Note: The help files include information about all features; however,

each user might not be authorized by their administrators to access

every feature. The help files are written as if you have the access

settings required to perform the task or view all the screen

elements. If you cannot perform a step or view an element, try

adjusting your security settings. Your access to data and ability to

interact with the user interface are controlled by various security

features. See About Security.

Viewing Help Content

As you work in the application, there will be times when you need assistance, on varying

levels. You might need just a reminder or a complete series of tasks to follow step by step.

Refer to the information below if you need help as you work in the application.

1) Consult your internal procedures. Your organization might enforce certain rules and

policies that override any instructions provided by Oracle Primavera.

2) If you want to access the P6 Online Help system, consult the table below to determine

how to open it from your current location in the application.

Current Location: How to Open the Online Help:

a page or tab Click the Help link at the top right of the page.

a dialog box Click the Help button, if available. If no help button is

available, try searching for the name of the dialog box as

stated in the titlebar or use the related topic links

provided for similar topics in the Online Help.

a dashboard portlet Click the Help button in the portlet's titlebar.

P6 Overview

121

Current Location: How to Open the Online Help:

a detail window

(panel)

Click the Help link at the top right of the detail window's

parent page and then click the link for the detail window

in the Online Help.

a work area in

full-screen view

Exit the full-screen view and click the Help link at the top

right of the page.

Working with P6 Help Topics

The online help appears in your default web browser whenever you need help using P6.

Table of Key Concepts: P6 Help

Item Description

The online help appears in your default web browser whenever you click

the Help command available from the following user interface screen

elements...

...the Help link on most main pages and tabbed pages;

...the Help button or menu on a few dialog boxes;

...the Help button or menu in the titlebar of all portlets.

Note: Help is context-sensitive. This means if the current page has a help

link or button, then the online help will open the closest matching help

topic. The help documentation includes a topic for almost every major

page and dialog box. If the dialog box you need help with does not

feature a help link, click Cancel and open the help topic for the

preceeding page which should include the help links you need.

122

Item Description

Key Help Window Elements: The Contents tab presents the table of

contents for the help system showing topics arranged by subject. Use the

Search tab to find help content by entering your own choice of

characters, keywords, or phrases.

The search feature will help you find partial word matches. For example,

searching for site will return pages that include site, website, or sitemap.

The search uses combination AND logic when you type multiple words or

fragments. Only help topics that include all of the words or fragments

appear in the results (e.g., word 1 AND word 2).

If the topic is in the table of contents, click Up/Previous to view the

previous help topic in the order shown in the table of contents. Click

Down/Next to view the next help topic in the order shown in the table of

contents. After a search, click Contents, if available, to view the topic

within the table of contents.

Key Help Page Elements: Context-sensitive help topics include an

overview, details for all screen elements on the actual P6 page, a Getting

Here section listing the steps required to navigate to the page, and

related topic links. Other types of topics include conceptual topics that

tell you about main ideas, conceptual topics that summarize how a

feature works often with sample screen images, task topics that take you

step-by-step through a procedure, and reference topics that describe

icons, fields, and other information. All topics may also include

applicable notes, tips, examples, and other information. Notes with

security considerations are indicated by .

P6 Overview

123

Common P6 Commands

To reduce repetition, the following screen elements are considered common and are

documented once in the table below rather than on every help topic. They may appear

in P6 as links or buttons, as illustrated in the samples above:

Save: Validates the data you entered or changed and then stores it. If it cannot

validate and save your data, the application will alert you so you can make

corrections; for example, when a required field value is missing or if a logical

constraint is not met.

Close: Closes the current page or dialog box. If you modified but did not yet save

data, you will be prompted to save or discard your changes.

Save and Close: Attempts to save the data and then close the current page or dialog

box, returning you to the previous page.

Cancel: Closes the page without saving any changes.

Restore to Defaults: Restores all options on the current page to their original default

settings.

Apply: Applies your modified settings to the object you are editing but does not save

them. This allows you to preview the impacts of your changes and decide if you want

to save them or make additional changes.

Customize: Opens the available options for customizing the current item. The custom

settings you make may be available to only you or to other users depending on the

item being customized.

OK: On a message box or alert dialog box, acknowledges that you have read the

message and want to continue rather than close or cancel the operation. On a

typical application dialog box, accepts your input and attempts to continue the

current task.

Assign: Applies your selection and continues the current task.

About Integration with Other Applications

Users at your organization are likely using other software and may be wondering about

compatability or ways P6 can work with other solutions.

P6 is part of a suite and works with or is compatability with the following add-ons and

applications:

Contract Management

P6 Progress Reporter

P6 Analytics

P6 Professional

Document Repository (UCM)

Microsoft SharePoint

Microsoft Project

Workflow features (BPM)

124

Microsoft Office, OpenOffice, and other third party productivity software; for

example, copy and paste notebooks into a word processor or export spreadsheet

data to .xls or .csv files.

iCalendar (.ics) format for importing personal calendar exception time

Oracle Primavera Risk Analysis

ERP systems

Consult your administrator to determine your precise deployment environment, access

settings, import/export options, and other features. More robust integration is achieved

using P6 Web Services, the P6 Integration API, or events.

About Timesheets

With the optional P6 Progress Reporter module installed, users can submit timesheets

reflecting their work assignments on projects. Timesheet approval managers can then

approve or reject those timesheets.

Timesheets allow the user to record hours for assigned activities. Timesheets are assigned

a period and an approval level. The period defines the amount of time the timesheet

covers, lasting from one week to a month, and what day of the week will conclude the

timesheet. The approval level specifies how many levels of approval are necessary to

submit a timesheet. Approval levels range anywhere from no approval required to two

approval levels.

Working with Timesheets

Resources required to submit their time using the optional timesheets provided by P6

Progress Reporter will navigate to an online timesheet they can fill in and submit for

approval by their manager.

Resources submitting a timesheet must meet the following requirements:

a) The resource must be assigned to activities in the project.

b) The resource must be assigned to a user account with Team Member or Progress

Reporter module access by their administrators.

c) The resource must be designated to use timesheets.

Approval managers must meet the following requirements:

a) Approval managers must be assigned as the P6 Progress Reporter Approval Manager

for the resource submitting the timesheet.

b) Approval managers must be granted P6 Progress Reporter access by their

administrators to utilize the full set of timesheet features; however, a manager strictly

reviewing timesheets just needs access to the Timesheet Approval page from

dashboards.

After a resource completes an online timesheet, the assigned approval manager for the

resource, or a designated delegate, then performs any of the following tasks:

P6 Overview

125

approves or rejects the timesheet

notifies the resource about the status of the timesheet

views/determines if a resource has started or submitted a particular timesheet

adds timesheet notes

runs a timesheet report in the Reports section of P6

Note: If you are a timesheet approval delegate for a project

manager, you can review timesheets for resources who are

assigned to activities within the projects for which you have been

granted approval rights. A project manager can transfer timesheet

approval rights to different delegates for each project.

127

About Dashboards, Workspaces, and Workgroups

P6 provides three types of user-customizable pages you can use to monitor and share

concise snapshots of data in a single place without having to navigate to other sections

of the application. They are:

Dashboards

Project Workspaces

Workgroups (a workspace within the project workspace)

You can customize the content and layout of each dashboard, workspace, and

workgroup to display related data inside smaller windows called portlets. Portlets provide

the means for adding, editing, and viewing up-to-date information about portfolio,

project, resource, workflow, document, and personal data. They provide a single

location for collaborating with other users.

You can have multiple dashboards and workgroups; however, each project has just one

project workspace.

About Dashboards

A dashboard is a customizable page consisting of the data you need to perform your

role. Dashboard data appears in one or more smaller regions called portlets. Custom

workspaces are available in the Dashboards section, where each workspace appears in

its own tab. The Projects section also presents a single dashboard for the current projects

you are viewing, called a workspace.

There are three types of dashboards:

User dashboards are private workspaces you create or customize that are not

available to other users. Use them to organize information meaningful to you. For

example, a dashboard that only contains My Activities, My Projects, My Documents,

and My Calendar.

Multi-user dashboards are accessible to a specific group of users you select. If

another user configures a dashboard for your use, you can view it on the Dashboards

Home page. Only the dashboard's creator can modify its content, layout, or access.

Dashboards created by other users and made available to you should contain

project or resource information relevant to you.

Global dashboards contain information relevant to all users. All users can view them.

You must have the appropriate security privileges to create, edit, and delete global

dashboards.

Dashboards and Workspaces

128

Working with Dashboards

P6 provides three types of customizable dashboards: dashboards (representing multiple

projects), the project workspace (representing a single project), and workgroups

(representing the data important to sub-groups or teams within a project). You can

customize the content and layout of each dashboard or workspace to display the

portlets you want to view. Portlets provide a means for adding, customizing, editing, and

viewing portfolio, project, resource, and personal data, as well as for collaborating with

other users.

The Dashboards page displays the global and multi-user dashboards available to you as

defined in your user interface view settings, along with your private user dashboards.

Each dashboard displays one or more portlets.

Note: An administrative setting limits the number of portlets that

can display in a dashboard to 12; however, administrators can

specify a different maximum.

Use the Manage Dashboards page to modify the list of available dashboards that display

on the Dashboards page or to create your own private or multi-user dashboards. Refer to

Showing and Hiding Dashboards (on page 134). The Personal Workspace dashboard is a

common default title used for the default dashboard assigned to a user. You can

customize dashboards. See Customizing Dashboards (on page 131).

The Project Workspace page is the default dashboard for a project and provides many

categories of project information, also shown in portlets. Each team member views the

same project-related portlets, including Project Milestone Status, Activities Behind

Schedule, Project Documents, and so on.

The two primary types of dashboards appearing on the Dashboards page or Project

Workspace page, enable you to view and manage project data based on your module

access, security privileges, and role relative to a project.

Note: When multiple projects are open on the Project Workspace

page in the Projects section , the Select Project list displays each

one. You must select the project you want to work with from the

Select Project list. If a single project is open, the Select Project list

does not appear. Any action you perform and all data that

appear on the page apply to the selected project only.

The Workgroups page is a collaborative space for people working on a project. It is a

subset of the workspace for an individual project. Project members can use the

Workgroups page to view activities, issues, and documents (requires optional document

repository) relevant to their area of the project.

Dashboards and Workspaces

129

Global Dashboards

As an administrator, you can create one or more global dashboards, customized for your

company's business needs, that apply to all P6 users. If your administrator creates global

dashboards and assigns one or more to your view:

they are automatically displayed as tabs on the Dashboards page when you login to

P6

the title of the global dashboard is determined by the administrator, for example,

Personal Workspace or Special Projects

only users with the required security privilege can modify the global dashboard's

content, layout, or access

If the administrator who created the global dashboard did not select the Restrict users

from changing the dashboard filter option on the Content tab of the Dashboard Details

page, you can specify your own dashboard filter in the Filter by field on the dashboard.

To hide a global dashboard, choose Manage Dashboards from the Dashboards menu in

the global navigation bar, then clear the dashboard's corresponding check box in the

Displayed Dashboards section.

Multi-user Dashboards

As an administrator, you can configure one or more multi-user dashboards, customized

for your needs. If you assign a multi-user dashboard to a user interface view, only users

who have access to the dashboard as specified in the Access tab of Dashboard

Preferences can view the dashboard.

Using Dashboards

As an administrator, you can configure and assign a user interface view for all users, even

new users. As users, you can access global and multi-user dashboards as defined in your

view when you log into P6. If you have the rights to access the Manage Dashboards

page, you can create and display the dashboards you want to view. On the Manage

Dashboards page, dashboards currently displayed are listed in the Displayed

Dashboards section; dashboards you have access to, but that are currently not

displayed, are listed in the Available Dashboards section. If you do not have the rights to

access the Manage Dashboards page, you can view only the dashboards included in

your view.

You can customize the Project Workspace page only if you have the appropriate

module access and security privilege.

130

Caution: Exercise caution whenever you delete a multi-user

dashboard. Other users might be using it and should be notified

before you make such a change.

Table of Screen Highlights

Item Description

Customize link: On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard and click

Customize to open a page with three tabs where you can configure the

dashboard's settings such as its portlet content, size and positioning in the

dashboard layout, and user access.

Content tab: In this example, the General and Personal Information

sections are expanded (the other sections are collapsed). This shows the

available fields and options you can configure. Select a portlet's check

box to show it on the dashboard.

Custom Portlets: Click the Add link to create your own portlets on the

dashboard.

Layout Tab: Use the arrow icons or drag and drop to change the position

of portlets within the dashboard. You can also choose from Narrow or

Wide size.

Access Tab: Use the common controls to select the user accounts

permitted to view this dashboard. You can also enable all users to view

the dashboard or restrict access to only you, the current user.

Dashboards and Workspaces

131

Creating Dashboards

Create dashboards to display portlets and data that pertain to your role. Multi-user

dashboards are also available, including global dashboards for all users to share data.

To create a dashboard:

1) Click the Dashboards menu and select Manage Dashboards.

2) On the Manage Dashboards page, click Create Dashboard.

3) On the Copy from Existing Dashboard dialog box:

a. Select Default Dashboard or an existing dashboard to use as the basis for your new

dashboard.

b. Click OK.

4) On the New Dashboard page, click the Content tab.

5) On the Content tab:

a. Expand the General section.

b. In the Dashboard Title field, enter a name.

6) On the New Dashboard page, click Save and Close.

Tips

The New Dashboard page is identical to the more commonly referenced Customize

Dashboard Page.

After creating a new dashboard, you will likely need to customize it, which consists of

configuring its content, layout, and user access settings. For help customizing

dashboards, see Customizing Dashboards (on page 131).

Customizing Dashboards

You can customize dashboards to display and organize the content you want to view.

For each user-defined or multi-user dashboard you create, you can customize the

dashboard's content, layout, and access.

To customize dashboards:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, click Customize.

4) On the Customize page:

a. Click the Content tab and configure what portlets display on the dashboard

page. For help, see Configuring Dashboard Content (on page 132).

b. Click the Layout tab and customize the display of the dashboard portlets. For help,

see Configuring Dashboard Layout (on page 133).

c. Click the Access tab and select an option to determine which users can use the

dashboard. For help, see Configuring Dashboard Access (on page 132).

d. Click Save and Close.

132

Tips

You can also select a dashboard on the Manage Dashboards page to customize it.

You can always customize your private dashboards, as well as multi-user dashboards

you create. You cannot customize multi-user dashboards created by another user.

You must have the required security privilege to customize a global dashboard. For

global and multi-user dashboards you have access to view, but not edit, you might

be able to specify a user filter that overrides the dashboard filter specified by the

dashboard's owner. Be aware this may lead to unexpected results.

Configuring Dashboard Content

You can determine which portlets appear on a dashboard and how they display their

information. Your changes apply to all users of the current dashboard.

To customize dashboard content (select the portlets you want to appear):

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab and click Customize.

3) On the Dashboard Details page, click the Content tab.

4) On the Content tab:

a. Expand the General section to modify the dashboard title and its filters, or to

specify the maximum number of rows displayed in portlets.

b. Expand the other sections representing the data of interest to users of this

dashboard. For example, Resources.

c. Select the portlets you want to display by checking the box adjacent to the name

of the portlet.

d. For portfolio view and custom portlets, click Add.

e. Expand a portlet name to configure its options, fields, and lists that determine what

will display on the dashboard. Click Customize if available for the selected portlet.

5) On the Customize page, click Save and Close.

Tips

The default maximum number of portlets you can display in a dashboard is twelve;

however, your administrator can specify a different maximum.

Configuring Dashboard Access

You can make a dashboard available only to you (user dashboard), to all users (global

dashboard), or to a list of users you specify (multi-user dashboard).

To configure dashboard access:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab and click Customize.

3) On the Customize page, click the Access tab.

Dashboards and Workspaces

133

4) On the Access tab, select an option to determine which users can use the

dashboard. If you select List of Users, use the common set of controls to specify which

user accounts can use the dashboard.

Tips

You must have the appropriate security privilege to specify access. You cannot

change the access setting for a multi-user dashboard created by another user.

Configuring Dashboard Filters

For multi-user and global dashboards, the dashboard owner can elect to restrict users

from changing the dashboard filter. If the dashboard owner selects this option, the

dashboard displays data according to the specified dashboard filter. If the dashboard

owner does not select to restrict users from changing the dashboard filter, users can

select their own filter for the dashboard.

To configure dashboard filters:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, click Filter by at the top of the tab and select a filter from

the dialog box.

Tips

You can also change the filter from the General section on the Content tab of the

Customize page.

Configuring Dashboard Layout

You can arrange the portlets on the dashboard to accommodate your viewing

preferences.

To configure the layout of the portlets on a dashboard:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, click Customize.

4) On the Dashboard Details page, click the Layout tab.

5) On the Layout tab:

a. Select the Narrow or Wide option for each portlet to make it one or two columns

wide.

b. Select a portlet and click the up, down, left, or right arrows; or, drag and drop the

portlet to change its position.

c. Click Save and Close.

134

Showing and Hiding Dashboards

Determine which of the dashboards available to you should appear on your Dashboards

page as its own separate tab.

To show or hide dashboards:

1) Click the Dashboards menu and select Manage Dashboards.

2) On the Manage Dashboards page, expand both the Displayed Dashboards and the

Available Dashboards sections.

3) In the Available Dashboards section, select the dashboards you want to show on the

Dashboards page. When you check a dashboard, it immediately moves to the

Displayed Dashboards section.

4) In the Displayed Dashboards section:

a. Select the dashboards you want to hide from the Dashboards page. When you

check a dashboard, it immediately moves back to the Available Dashboards

section.

b. If more than one dashboard appears, click the up and down arrows to customize

their order of appearance.

5) Click Dashboards to view the results of your selections on the Dashboards page.

Tips

There is no need to save your changes on this page; they are automatically applied.

Click Delete to permanently delete the dashboards you created or have permissions

to delete.

If there is not enough room to display all the dashboard tabs on the Dashboards

page, a black triangular arrow appears after the last tab. Click it to view a list of

dashboards from which you can make a selection.

Caution: Exercise caution whenever you delete dashboards. Other

users might be using them and should be notified before you make

such a change.

Working with Workflows

Use workflows to route business processes such as project initiation requests through your

organization to gather information and visibility before a go/no go decision is made.

Template data, routing designators, and approval rules can be set for each stage of a

workflow. To illustrate these options, pretend we have a workflow involving five key

approval managers. You can define the workflow such that all five must approve and in

what sequence, if any. A much more relaxed approval rule would require only one out of

the five to approve.

Dashboards and Workspaces

135

Workflows begin in BPM where your administrator defines the human tasks involved and

assigns them to specific users, a role, or a group. An actual business need kicks off a

separate instance of the workflow and its human tasks are automatically routed to their

users, roles, or groups.

When a specific user or any user assigned to a role or group logs into P6, the Workflow

portlet on their dashboard will display their relevant tasks at this stage of the workflow, as

authenticated by BPM. As a workflow participant, you can select a task in the workflow

instance and claim ownership for it. This means you will be responsible for performing the

task. The application refreshes itself to show only the actions permitted for this particular

stage of the workflow for you (the currently logged in user).

136

Table 1 of 2: Key Workflow Screen Elements

Item Description

Setup and Configuration: After your administrator sets up BPM, configure

a dashboard to display the Workflows portlet.

Action Required Tab: This tab shows the tasks important to you (the

currently logged in user).

My Workflows Tab: This tab enables you to view all workflows according

to role and status filters you can set.

Initiate a Workflow: Click Initiate a Workflow to start a new instance of

a workflow based on a predesigned template.

Dashboards and Workspaces

137

Table 2 of 2: Key Workflow Screen Elements

Item Description

Workflow Form: Most workflows include forms which enable you to

update the progress of each task. In general, possible actions you can

perform on a human task during the routing of a workflow include:

Escalate, Suspend, Purge, Delete, Withdraw, Submit, Reassign, Claim,

Approve, and Reject.

Note: For tasks with no associated form, this icon is disabled. To perform

an action on a workflow task with no associated form, log into BPM and

use its Actions menu. It is also possible to design a solution using the P6

Integration API.

Workflow Status: The Workflow Status image is accessible from either tab

in the Workflows portlet. It shows the sequence of events in the workflow.

Items shown with a green border indicate the furthest level of progress

within the workflow. The current status of the workflow corresponds with

the last item to "go green".

Sample Workflow: A basic workflow image with tasks for an engineer, a

second task for an assigned role, and a third task for a manager to

complete the workflow. The current workflow task is Third User Task

because it is the last item in the sequence that has a green outline.

Workflow History: View a chronological sequence of all the previous

activities, users, and stages in the current workflow.

About Project Workspaces

A project workspace is a type of dashboard exclusively designed for your entire team to

share access to only the data needed for a single project. Configure workspaces to

display one or more smaller windows, called portlets, each with its own particular subject

matter or theme. Project workspaces can also include one or more child workgroups,

also displayed in a portlet.

Notes:

Although the user interface for the P6 web application

distinguishes between dashboards, project workspaces,

personal workspaces, and workgroups, they are all essentially

the same type of object: a customizable page made up of the

portlets you want to view. One major differentiating factor is the

source of information to appear within the portlets in each type

of dashboard.

138

Project workspaces and workgroups portlets are not available

for project templates.

Working with Project Workspaces

The Workspace page is the home page for the project and provides many categories of

project information. Each team member views the same project-related information,

including project milestone status, activities behind schedule, project documents, and so

on. You can access a project's workspace by opening a project or group of projects,

and then clicking Workspace on the project navigation toolbar.

Note: Project Workspace portlets display data for the selected

project only. When multiple projects are open, you must choose

the project you want to work with in the Select Project list at the top

right of the Project Workspace page. When a single project is

open, the Select Project list does not appear.

Customizing Project Workspace

Customize each project's workspace to determine which portlets are visible on its

Workspace page and how they display.

To customize a project's workspace:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Projects list.

b. Click Customize.

4) On the Customize page:

a. Click the Content tab and select the portlets you want to appear on the

Workspace page. See Configuring Workspace Content (on page 139).

b. Click the Layout tab and customize the size and position of the portlets. See

Configuring Workspace Layout (on page 139).

c. Click Save and Close when finished.

Dashboards and Workspaces

139

Configuring Workspace Content

You can determine what portlets display on the Workspace page and how they display

their information.

To customize workspace content:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Projects list.

b. Click Customize.

4) On the Customize page, click the Content tab.

5) On the Content tab:

a. Expand the sections you want to configure.

b. Select the portlets you want to appear on the Workspace page.

c. If you select a portlet with additional options, click to expand it and configure

the options or fields.

d. (Optional) Add a custom portlet. See Creating Custom Portlets (on page 171).

6) On the Customize page, click Save and Close.

Tips

Some portlets offer additional customization options. See Customizing Project Statistics

(on page 143), Customizing My Risks (see "Customizing the My Risks Portlet" on page

159), and Customizing Project Issues (on page 339).

In the Performance Threshold section, if the value calculated for the project is:

Greater than the critical value, the status will be critical .

Greater than the warning value and less than the critical value, the status will be

warning .

Less than the exceptional value and less than the warning value, the status will be

acceptable .

Greater than the exceptional value, the status will be exceptional .

Configuring Workspace Layout

You can arrange the portlets on your workspace to accommodate your viewing

preferences.

140

To configure workspace layout:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, select a project from the Select Project list if more than one

project is open and click Customize.

4) On the Customize page, click the Layout tab.

5) On the Layout tab:

a. Select the Narrow or Wide option for each portlet to make it one or two columns

wide.

b. Select a portlet and click the movement arrows to determine where it will sit on the

Workspace page.

c. Click Save and Close.

Sending E-Mail to Project Resources

You can send e-mail to the resources listed for a project.

To send e-mail to project resources:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Projects list.

b. Expand the Communication Center portlet.

4) In the Communication Center portlet:

a. Click to expand a project and view its assigned resources.

b. Select the check box for each resource you want to add to the mailing list. Each

name you select will appear in the e-mail message's distribution list (the To: field).

c. On the E-mail tab, click the Send an e-mail link.

Dashboards and Workspaces

141

5) In the E-mail dialog box:

a. Edit the recipients, subject, and message text if needed.

b. Click Send E-mail.

Tips

You can also send e-mail to project resources from the Communication Center portlet

on the Dashboards page.

Select the check box next to the project name to automatically select all resources

listed. Clear the same check box to automatically clear all resources.

You must have an e-mail address listed in your user account to send e-mail.

About Project Performance Metrics

An array of performance metrics can be employed to measure project success against

time, cost, and other standards. Baselines are also often used to measure how a project

is progressing.

Project performance ratings are determined based on thresholds set for each of three

metrics: schedule, earned value, and index. Project health is calculated based on these

schedule performance thresholds.

Assessing Project Performance

You can use the workspace to quickly measure project performance. You can measure

project earned value, schedule, index, or statistics performance according to both

project cost and schedule.

To assess project performance:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Projects list.

b. Expand the Earned Value Performance, Schedule Performance, Index

Performance, or Project Statistics portlet and select a project to see its individual

performance.

Tips

If applicable, you can continue to follow the WBS down its line of children to view

individual WBS performance.

142

If the portlet is not available, add it to the workspace. See Configuring Workspace

Content (on page 139).

You can also assess project performance from the Performance or Statistics portlets

on the Dashboards page.

Assessing Project Health

You can use the workspace to quickly determine the health of a project and identify

areas where you might need to focus attention.

To assess project health:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Projects list.

b. Expand the Project Health portlet to see a quick summarization of the project.

Tips

If the portlet is not available, add it to the workspace. See Configuring Workspace

Content (on page 139).

You can also assess project health from the Project Health portlet on the Dashboards

page.

143

Customizing Project Statistics

Customize project statistics to define how columns and groups are displayed in the

workspace.

To customize project statistics:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Projects list.

b. Click Customize.

4) On the Customize page, click the Content tab.

5) On the Content tab, expand the Project Performance section and expand Project

Statistics.

6) In the Project Statistics section, click Customize Columns.

7) In the Customize Project Statistics dialog box, click the Columns tab.

8) On the Columns tab:

a. Configure the columns in the Selected Columns list. See Customizing Selected Lists

(see "Configuring Columns or Values" on page 91).

b. Select options from each list.

9) In the Customize Project Statistics dialog box, click the Group tab.

10) On the Group tab, repeat the following for each level you want to customize:

a. Select options from the lists for each Level.

b. Select or clear the options.

11) In the Customize Project Statistics dialog box, click Save.

12) On the Content tab, click Save and Close.

Tips

1) You can also customize project statistics columns from the Project Statistics portlet of

the Workspace page or the Project Statistics portlet of the Dashboards page.

Identifying Critical Activities Behind Schedule

You can use the workspace to identify activities that have zero or negative float and a

negative finish date variance.

To identify critical activities behind schedule:

144

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Projects list.

b. Expand the Critical Activities Behind Schedule portlet and select an activity to see

its details.

Tips

If the Critical Activities Behind Schedule portlet is not available, add it to the workspace.

See Configuring Workspace Content (on page 139).

About Performance Thresholds

To help you assess the relative performance, earned value, index, and other calculations

for a WBS, project, or portfolio, P6 includes performance thresholds with visual indicators.

These thresholds capture the current calculation, variance, or metric and re-routes it into

one of four ranges or "buckets" as follows:

Exceptional: Indicates that the metric falls into a range your organization

considers better than normal or exceeding expectations.

Acceptable: Indicates that the metric falls into a range your organization

considers aligned with normal or within expectations.

Warning: Indicates that the metric falls into a range your organization considers

below normal. The project may need attention.

Critical: Indicates that the metric falls into a range your organization considers

far below normal. The project likely requires significant corrective action.

Instead of each project member assessing a variance of, say 2.9%, and wondering if that

is good or bad, thresholds will assign an easily recognized visual indicator based on

standards and business goals at your organization. With thresholds, everyone can agree

what 2.9% under means.

As an example, if you consider falling 50 days behind schedule to be critical, set the

critical thresholds setting to 50 days. For each performance metric, you can specify the

values used to determine if the result is exceptional, acceptable, warning, or critical.

Project health is calculated based on performance schedule thresholds described in this

topic.

Dashboards and Workspaces

145

Note: The same metric result may be Acceptable for one

project and a Warning for another.

Working with Performance Thresholds

Project performance ratings are determined based on thresholds set for each of three

metrics: schedule, earned value, and index. Project health is calculated based on the

performance schedule thresholds. Use the Workspace page to set threshold values to

aid in evaluating progress against plans for each specific project.

For each performance metric, you can specify the values used to determine if the status

of a project is exceptional, acceptable, warning, or critical. For example, if you want to

raise a warning flag when the project Cost Performance Index (CPI) falls 5% below 1, set

the CPI warning threshold to 5 for the index metric. If the project CPI falls between 5%

below 1 and the value set for the critical threshold, the project status will be displayed as

Warning in the Index Performance portlet on the Workspace page.

In the Performance Threshold section on the Content tab of the Project Workspace

Details page, if the value calculated for the project is:

Greater than the critical value, the status will be critical .

Greater than the warning value and less than the critical value, the status will be

warning .

Less than the exceptional value and less than the warning value, the status will be

acceptable .

Greater than the exceptional value, the status will be exceptional .

About Milestones

A milestone represents any significant event, goal, or gate in a project. Although P6

considers them a type of activity, milestones have zero duration; at any given moment

they are either achieved or not. Some examples of milestones in an office building

addition project might include the following:

project definition complete

structure complete

end bidding process.

Milestones can also be assigned at the WBS-level, and each one given a weight which

indicates its importance to the project schedule. When you mark a milestone as

complete, the weight is used to calculate the performance percent complete of all

activities included in the WBS level.

During project planning, you will want to identify the major milestones as they will help

you monitor the project's progress.

Sending E-Mail about Milestones

You can send an e-mail about the major goals in a project. This includes activities of type

milestone but not WBS milestones.

146

To send e-mail about milestones:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Projects list.

b. Expand the Milestone Status portlet and click E-Mail for one of the milestones.

4) In the E-mail dialog box:

a. Edit the recipients, subject, and message text if needed.

b. Click Send E-mail.

About Cost Performance Index (CPI)

Cost Performance Index (CPI) is a measure of the value of work accomplished as a

percentage of the actual costs. In this way, CPI helps you assess spending versus budget.

The CPI is computed as CPI equals Earned Value Cost divided by Actual Cost. A CPI

threshold value is expressed as a ratio. A value less than one indicates that actual costs

have exceeded the value of work performed. If the lower threshold value is one, an issue

is generated whenever the actual costs exceed the value of the work performed.

About Schedule Performance Index (SPI)

Schedule Performance Index (SPI) is a measure of the work accomplished as a

percentage of the work scheduled, SPI indicates whether you are meeting earned and

planned values within your schedule.

SPI threshold values are expressed as ratios, where SPI is equal to Earned Value Cost

divided by Planned Value Cost. A value less than one indicates that less work was

actually performed than was scheduled. If the threshold value is one, the work

performed is aligned with the expected cost of performing that work according to the

schedule.

About To-Complete Performance Index (TCPI)

The To-Complete Performance Index (TCPI) is a calculated projection of the cost

performance that must be achieved on the remaining work to meet recognized business

goals, such as the Budget at Completion (BAC) or the Estimate at Completion (EAC).

TCPI is essentially a ratio of the remaining work to the remaining funds. It enables a

project manager to determine the level of performance needed to achieve the cost or

time objectives.

Dashboards and Workspaces

147

Based on the BAC, TCPI is calculated as (Budget at Completion minus Earned Value)

divided by (Budget at Completion minus Actual Cost). Based on the EAC, TCPI is

calculated as (Budget at Completion minus Earned Value) divided by (Estimate at

Completion minus Actual Cost).

Example: During the course of a project, the project manager (PM)

determines that the sum of all the budgets for the work to-date, the

total planned value, exceeds the business goals of the

organization. The Budget at Completion (BAC) is no longer a

realistic goal. The PM develops a projected Estimate at

Completion (EAC) that replaces the BAC as the new cost

performance goal. The PM uses the forecasted EAC minus AC for

the funds remaining denominator in the TCPI equation.

About Contract Management

Oracle Primavera Contract Management is a multi-user, multi-project database that

manages all aspects of contract control including changes and submittals. It can be

used in conjunction with P6 EPPM.

Essential features include:

Provides information to keep contracts on-time and within budget

Enables you to cross-reference and link documents for quick, easy retrieval

Maintains historical data that can be used for the life of the project and referenced in

future projects

Aids in resolving disputes or claims

Working with Contract Management

If your P6 deployment is integrated with Contract Management, you can launch the

Contract Management Control Center from the Workspace page. In addition, when

your project is linked to a Contract Management project, you can view up-to-date

Contract Management information for the project, such as submittals or requests for

information, directly within portlets on the Workspace page.

You can select up to eight Contract Management portlets to display on the Workspace

page:

Contract Documents

Contract Issues

Contract Reports

Cost Worksheet

Request for Information (RFI)

RFI Turnaround Time

Safety

Submittals

148

Click on items or sections in the portlets to launch Contract Management and view

detailed information. For example, in the Request for Information (RFI) portlet, you can

click a section of the chart, such as OPN, to launch Contract Management and view a

list of all requests with an Open status.

Notes:

The Cost Worksheet portlet is also available in the Dashboards

section and shows data for multiple projects useful to users with

interests that extend beyond the project-specific context.

If your user name and password for Contract Management and

P6 are the same, you can immediately access information in

Contract Management. If you do not have the same user

name and password, the Login page appears, where you must

type a valid Contract Management user name and password.

Opening the Contract Management Control Center

If your organization is set up to access the Contract Management application, you can

launch the application from the Project Workspace. Additionally, if your project is linked

to a Contract Management project, you can also view up-to-date information such as

submittals or requests for information for the project within portlets on the Project

Workspace page.

To open the Contract Management Control Center:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, click Launch Contract Management.

4) On the Contract Management Logon page, log on using your Contract Management

user name.

Linking P6 and Contract Management Projects

When the P6 and Contract Management applications are linked, you can then link a

specific project in P6 to a Contract Management project. This will enable you to view

up-to-date contractual information for the project within portlets.

To link a P6project to a Contract Management project:

1) Click Projects.

Dashboards and Workspaces

149

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a project.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Set Project Preferences....

4) In the Project Preferences dialog box, click the Contract Management tab.

5) On the Contract Management tab, click Group Name: Project Name .

6) In the Primavera P6 dialog box, log on to Contract Management.

7) In the Select Project and Group dialog box, expand a project, select a group, and

click OK.

8) In the Project Preferences dialog box, click Save to continue working or click Save

and Close if you are finished.

Tips

To link the project to a Contract Management project, you must have a valid user name

and password. If you have a Contract Management user name and password that is the

same as the user name and password with which you are currently logged in to P6, you

are not prompted to login again. If you do not have the same user name and password

for both applications, you must enter a valid Contract Management user name and

password in the Primavera P6 dialog box.

Linking P6/P6 Professional and Contract Management Applications

Perform the steps below to link P6 and P6 Professional to Contract Management. This link

at the application level allows you to establish links at the project level. When the

applications and projects are linked, P6/P6 Professional users can directly navigate to, or

directly show data from, the Contract Management application.

To link P6/P6 Professional to Contract Management:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Application Settings.

2) On the Application Settings pane, click the General tab.

3) On the General tab:

a. Enter a URL in the Contract Management URL field of the Contract Management

section.

b. Click Save and Close.

About Project Workgroups

The Project Workgroup Workspace page (or Workgroup Workspace) is a collaborative

space for people working on a project. It is a subset of the workspace for an individual

project. Project members can use the Workgroup Workspace to view documents, issues,

and other information relevant to their area of the project.

150

Working with Workgroups

Workgroups provide a way for a team to focus on specific project activity, issue, and

document information visible inside these three portlets found on the Workgroup

Workspace page:

Activities Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page

Issues Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page

Documents Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page

The data in each portlet inside a workgroup portlet is specific to the project workgroup or

to activities assigned to the workgroup. The portlets appear on a special Workspace of

Workgroup page showing the name of the workgroup. For example, if your workgroup is

called Team A, you would click the Team A link in the Workgroups portlet to open the

Workspace of Team A page.

Note: The Documents portlet is only available when the optional

Content Repository feature is enabled.

Assigning Documents to Projects

You can move documents from a workgroup to a project.

To assign documents to a project:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Projects list.

b. Expand the Workgroups portlet and select a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, expand the Documents portlet and click the

Workgroup tab.

5) On the Workgroup tab, select a document and click Assign to Project.

6) In the Select Project dialog box, select a project and click OK.

Tips

The Assign to Project option is disabled if the document is already assigned to a

project.

You can only assign documents to the project to which the workgroup was

associated.

Dashboards and Workspaces

151

If the Workgroups portlet is not available, add it to the workspace. See Configuring

Workspace Content (on page 139).

If the Documents portlet is not available, add it to the workspace. See Customizing

Workgroups (on page 151).

You can also access workgroups from the My Workgroups portlet of the Dashboards

page.

Creating Workgroups

Create workgroups as a focus area for issues, activities, and documents of a specific

project segment.

To create workgroups:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Projects list.

b. Expand the Workgroups portlet and click Add.

4) In the Add a Workgroup dialog box, enter a name in the Workgroup name field and

click Save.

Tips

If the Workgroups portlet is not available, add it to the workspace. See Configuring

Workspace Content (on page 139).

You can also access workgroups from the My Workgroups portlet of the Dashboards

page.

Customizing Workgroups

Customize workgroups to determine which portlets are visible on the Workgroup

Workspace page.

To customize workgroups:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

152

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Projects list.

b. Expand the Workgroups portlet and select a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, click Customize.

5) On the Customize page, click the Content tab.

6) On the Content tab:

a. Select or clear the options to add or delete workgroup portlets.

b. Enter a value in the Maximum number of rows displayed in Workgroup lists field.

7) On the Customize page, click the Layout tab.

8) On the Layout tab:

a. Select the Narrow or Wide option for each portlet to make it one or two columns

wide.

b. Select a portlet and click the movement arrows to determine where it will sit on the

Workspace page.

9) On the Customize page, click Save and Close.

Tips

If you select the Issues portlet, you can click Customize to customize issue columns,

filters, groups, or charts.

If you select the Documents portlet, you can opt to show activity documents.

If the portlet is not available, add it to the workspace. See Configuring Workspace

Content (on page 139).

You can also access workgroups from the My Workgroups portlet of the Dashboards

page.

Assigning Workgroup Activities

Assign activities to a workgroup to relate them to a specific segment of a project.

To assign activities to a workgroup:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

Dashboards and Workspaces

153

3) On the Workspace page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Projects list.

b. Expand the Workgroups portlet and select a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, expand the Activities portlet.

5) In the Activities portlet, click Assign.

6) In the Select an Activity dialog box, assign activities and click Close.

Tips

Any issues and documents associated with the assigned activity are automatically

assigned to their respective portlets in the workgroup.

If the Workgroups portlet is not available, add it to the workspace. See Configuring

Workspace Content (on page 139).

If the Activities portlet is not available, add it to the workspace. See Customizing

Workgroups (on page 151).

You can also access workgroups from the My Workgroups portlet of the Dashboards

page.

Creating Workgroup Issues

Create workgroup issues to identify problems that must be addressed before a project

can be completed.

To create workgroup issues:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Projects list.

b. Expand the Workgroups portlet and select a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, expand the Issues portlet.

5) In the Issues portlet, click Add and select a form from the dialog box.

6) On the Add Issue page, enter or select a value for each of the required fields and

click Save.

Tips

The Default Form, displays all issue fields. If no issue forms are assigned to the project,

the Default Form is the only form you can select.

154

If the Workgroups portlet is not available, add it to the workspace. See Configuring

Workspace Content (on page 139).

If the Issues portlet is not available, add it to the workspace. See Customizing

Workgroups (on page 151).

You can also access workgroups from the My Workgroups portlet of the Dashboards

page.

Sending E-Mail to Activity Resources

You can send e-mail to the resources listed for an activity.

To send e-mail to activity resources:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Projects list.

b. Expand the Workgroups portlet and select a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, expand the Activities portlet and select an

activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Resources section and click E-mail these

resources.

6) In the E-mail dialog box:

a. Edit the recipient list, message, and subject as needed.

b. Click Send E-mail.

Tips

You must have an e-mail address listed in you user profile to send an e-mail.

If the Workgroups portlet is not available, add it to the workspace. See Configuring

Workspace Content (on page 139).

If the Activities portlet is not available, add it to the workspace. See Customizing

Workgroups (on page 151).

You can also e-mail resources from the Activity Details page of the Open Requests for

Resources portlet of the Dashboards page.

Dashboards and Workspaces

155

About Portlets

Portlets are small expandable windows representing a specific theme or particular

subject matter. They are only available on dashboards, project workspaces, or

workgroup pages. Portlets provide a concise way to organize, present, and assess

project data within a single page and also offer tools for adding, modifying, and

personalizing portfolio, project, and resource data. Portlets on shared dashboards or

workspaces provide a centralized place for collaborating with other users.

The same portlet might display information differently depending on the page on which

it appears. On a dashboard, portlets display data based on association, ownership, or

applied filters. On a project workspace, portlets reflect data for the open project. On a

workgroup workspace, portlets show information belonging to that workgroup.

List of Portlets

Listed below, grouped by theme, are all possible portlets available on the Dashboards

page and Project Workspace page. The portlets available in your configuration may

vary. Click the portlet name to view a description of the portlet, the steps required to

navigate to it, and any related tasks you can perform using the portlet.

Dashboard Portlets:

Personal Data for the Currently Logged-In User

Communication Center Portlet of the Dashboards Page

My Activities Portlet

My Issues Portlet

My Projects Portlet

My Workgroups Portlet of the Dashboards Page

My Calendar Portlet

My Documents Portlet

My Risks Portlet

Portfolio Views

Portfolio View Portlet

Project Performance

Earned Value Performance Portlet of the Dashboards Page

Schedule Performance Portlet of the Dashboards Page

Index Performance Portlet of the Dashboards Page

Project Statistics Portlet

Project Health Portlet of the Dashboards Page

Project Notebooks Portlet of the Dashboards Page

Project Gantt Chart Portlet

156

Workflow

Workflows Portlet

Document Reviews Portlet

Resources

Open Requests for Resources Portlet

Resource Analysis Chart Portlet

Resource Team Summary Portlet

Custom Portlets

Custom Portlet

Contract Management

Cost Worksheet Portlet

Project Workspace Portlets:

Project Data for the Currently Selected Project

Project Documents Portlet of the Workspace Page (with Content Repository)

Project Documents Portlet of the Workspace Page (without Content Repository)

Project Risks Portlet

Project Issues Portlet of the Workspace Page

Notebook Topics Portlet of the Workspace Page

Overallocated Resources Portlet of the Workspace Page

Critical Activities Behind Schedule Portlet of the Workspace Page

Milestone Status Portlet of the Workspace Page

Custom Portlets

Custom Portlet

Contract Management

Contract Documents Portlet of the Workspace Page

Contract Issues Portlet of the Workspace Page

Contract Reports Portlet of the Workspace Page

Cost Worksheet Portlet

Request for Information (RFI) Portlet of the Workspace Page

RFI Turnaround Portlet of the Workspace Page

Safety Portlet

Submittals Portlet

Project Collaboration

Communication Center Portlet of the Workspace Page

Project Calendar Portlet of the Workspace Page

Dashboards and Workspaces

157

Workgroups Portlet of the Workspace Page

Activities Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page

Documents Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page

Issues Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page

Project Performance

Schedule Performance Portlet of the Workspace Page

Earned Value Performance Portlet of the Workspace Page

Index Performance Portlet of the Workspace Page

Project Statistics Portlet

Project Health Portlet of the Workspace Page

159

Customizing Portlets

In general, click Customize within a portlet to set options for it. The following tasks help

guide you through the steps to customize the specific portlets listed.

Customizing the My Risks Portlet

Customize the My Risks portlet to determine which columns and filters to apply to the

portlet.

To customize My Risks:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the My Risks portlet and click Customize.

4) In the Customize Risks dialog box, click the Columns tab.

5) On the Columns tab, configure the columns in the Selected Columns list. See

Configuring Columns or Values (on page 91).

6) In the Customize Risks dialog box, click the Filter tab.

7) On the Filter tab:

a. Select an option from the Display list.

b. If applicable, select or clear the options.

8) In the Customize Risks dialog box, click Save.

Tips

You can also customize the risks that appear in the Project Risks portlet of the project's

Workspace page.

Customizing the Resource Analysis Chart Portlet

Customize the Resource Analysis Chart portlet to determine how information will display

in the portlet.

To customize the portlet:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Resource Analysis Chart portlet.

4) In the Resource Analysis Chart portlet:

a. In the Resource field, click Select a Resource and select a resource from the

dialog box.

b. In the Group by field, click Select Grouping and select a project code from the

dialog box.

c. Click Customize.

5) In the Customize chart dialog box:

160

a. Select a value in the Chart Type field.

b. Configure the other settings as needed.

c. Click Save.

Tips

You can also customize portlets from the Content tab of the Customize Dashboard page.

Customizing the Open Requests for Resources Portlet

Customize the Open Requests for Resources portlet to determine what information will

display in the portlet.

To customize the portlet:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab and click Customize.

3) On the Customize page, click the Content tab.

4) On the Content tab, expand the Resources section and expand the Open Requests

for Resources section.

5) In the Open Requests for Resources section, configure the options, lists, and fields to

determine what will display in the portlet.

6) On the Customize page, click Save and Close.

Tips

You can also click Customize in the Open Requests for Resources portlet to access the

Customize page.

Customizing Portfolio View Portlets

Customize portfolio view portlets to determine what and how information will display in

the portlet.

To customize portfolio view portlets:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the portfolio view portlet you want to customize and click

Customize.

4) In the Customize dialog box:

a. Configure the settings to determine the information that appears in the portfolio

view portlet. The settings vary based on your choice of chart, scorecard, or

histogram in the Type field.

b. Click Save.

Dashboards and Workspaces

161

Tips

For help customizing scorecards, see Customizing Scorecard Portfolio Views Portlets

(see "Customizing Scorecard Portfolio View Portlets" on page 161).

You can also customize Portfolio View portlets from the Content tab of the Customize

Dashboard page.

Customizing Scorecard Portfolio View Portlets

You can customize scorecard portfolio view portlets to reflect the data you need.

To customize a scorecard portfolio view portlet:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand a scorecard portfolio view portlet and click its Customize

link.

4) In the Customize dialog box, click the Columns tab.

5) On the Columns tab:

a. Select the columns you want to show in the scorecard using the common controls.

b. Specify values for the two sort fields.

c. Select the Show Project Requests check box to include potential project data.

6) In the Customize dialog box, click the Group tab.

7) On the Group tab, configure how you want to group the data in the scorecard using

common controls.

8) In the Customize dialog box, click Save.

Tips

You can also customize the portlet from the Content tab of the Dashboard Details page.

Analyzing Resource Team Usage in the Resource Team Summary Portlet

You can use the Resource Team Summary portlet to analyze resource team usage in a

spreadsheet or histogram.

To analyze resource team usage:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Resource Team Summary portlet.

4) In the Resource Team Summary portlet:

a. Click Filter by to select a resource team.

b. In the Resource column, click the link for a resource team.

5) On the Resource Usage page:

a. Select a Spreadsheet or Histogram display option.

b. Click Customize.

162

6) In the Customize dialog box:

a. Configure the Display, Timescale, and other options

b. Click Save.

7) Click Return one or more times to go back to the Resource Team Summary portlet

on a dashboard.

Tip

The same resource team usage data can also be viewed by selecting a resource team

on the Resource Usage tab of the Analysis page in the Resources section.

Creating Portfolio View Portlets

Create portfolio view portlets to display project portfolio data in a bubble chart, pie

chart, scorecard, histogram, side-by-side histogram, or stacked histogram portfolio view.

To create a portfolio view portlet:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, click Customize.

4) On the Customize page, click the Content tab.

5) On the Content tab, expand the Portfolio Views section and click the Add link.

6) In the Create View dialog box, select a new or existing portfolio view and click OK.

7) In the Portfolio Views section, expand the new view:

a. Enter a name in the Title field.

b. Select a portfolio view format from the Type list.

c. Configure the settings that vary based on your choice in the Type field. If you

selected Scorecard, click the Customize link to configure it.

8) On the Content tab, click Save and Close.

Tips

To show the portlet on the dashboard, select the check box near its name before you

click Save and Close. To remove the portlet from the dashboard, clear its check box.

To remove the portlet from appearing as a potential portfolio view, click the Remove

link.

Your security access settings determine if you can create new portlets based on new

or existing portfolio views.

163

Document Review and Workflow Portlets

The following topics apply to document reviews and workflows in portlets.

Participating in Document Reviews

If you have configured the optional Content Repository with P6, and you are assigned as

a reviewer for a specific document, you can review documents from the Document

Reviews portlet on a dashboard. As a reviewer, you can access review details, add

comments or attachments, and approve or reject the document.

To respond to a document review:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Document Reviews portlet and click the Action

Required tab.

4) On the Action Required tab:

a. Select a document to review.

b. Click View to view the document.

c. Click Details to view attachments and comments from previous reviewers.

d. Click Approve Document or Reject Document.

5) In the Approve Document Review or Reject Document Review dialog box:

a. Enter any supporting comments.

b. Attach any supporting documents.

c. Click Approve or Reject.

Tips

If the review type is set to Everyone Must Review in Sequence, the review will not

appear in subsequent reviewers' Action Required portlets until the document has

been approved by the previous reviewer.

If the Document Reviews portlet is not available, add it to the dashboard. For help,

see Configuring Dashboard Content (on page 132).

Terminating Document Reviews

You can terminate document reviews that you initiated.

To terminate a document review:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Document Reviews portlet.

4) In the Document Reviews portlet, click the My Reviews tab.

5) On the My Reviews tab:

a. Select the name of the document review you want to terminate.

164

b. Click Terminate.

Tips

If the portlet is not available, add it to the dashboard. For help, see Configuring

Dashboard Content (on page 132).

About Workflows

A workflow is an automated business process that routes information and tasks between

participants according to a defined set of procedures or rules designed to coordinate a

specific business goal. Workflows are primarily characterized by their level of procedural

automation involving one or more dynamic related series of processes, and their

combination of human and machine-based tasks involving interaction with software and

systems.

The following industry segments, marked by relatively high office labor costs and

transaction volume, have demonstrated successful workflow implementations:

insurance

banking

legal

general & administrative

design

engineering

manufacturing

Business process modeling and workflow automation allow transactions to be

conducted electronically without the need for manual intervention such as conducting

certain validations or re-keying data. When workflow IT systems are processing repetitive,

mundane, and often error-prone work, talented staff resources become available to

handle activities that add real value to the enterprise.

P6 includes a sample project initiation and review workflow used to evaluate proposed

work. It automates the process of reviewing and approving new project requests. You

can also create your own workflows implemented through the use of templates typically

created by your P6 administrator using BPM. Each workflow template defines the data,

business processes, review phases, and approval requirements for the varying types of

workflows specific to your organization. The necessary security privileges must be in place

for you to create, initiate, or participate in workflows.

Dashboards and Workspaces

165

Working with Workflows

Use workflows to route business processes such as project initiation requests through your

organization to gather information and visibility before a go/no go decision is made.

Template data, routing designators, and approval rules can be set for each stage of a

workflow. To illustrate these options, pretend we have a workflow involving five key

approval managers. You can define the workflow such that all five must approve and in

what sequence, if any. A much more relaxed approval rule would require only one out of

the five to approve.

Workflows begin in BPM where your administrator defines the human tasks involved and

assigns them to specific users, a role, or a group. An actual business need kicks off a

separate instance of the workflow and its human tasks are automatically routed to their

users, roles, or groups.

166

When a specific user or any user assigned to a role or group logs into P6, the Workflow

portlet on their dashboard will display their relevant tasks at this stage of the workflow, as

authenticated by BPM. As a workflow participant, you can select a task in the workflow

instance and claim ownership for it. This means you will be responsible for performing the

task. The application refreshes itself to show only the actions permitted for this particular

stage of the workflow for you (the currently logged in user).

Dashboards and Workspaces

167

Table 1 of 2: Key Workflow Screen Elements

Item Description

Setup and Configuration: After your administrator sets up BPM, configure

a dashboard to display the Workflows portlet.

Action Required Tab: This tab shows the tasks important to you (the

currently logged in user).

My Workflows Tab: This tab enables you to view all workflows according

to role and status filters you can set.

Initiate a Workflow: Click Initiate a Workflow to start a new instance of

a workflow based on a predesigned template.

168

Table 2 of 2: Key Workflow Screen Elements

Item Description

Workflow Form: Most workflows include forms which enable you to

update the progress of each task. In general, possible actions you can

perform on a human task during the routing of a workflow include:

Escalate, Suspend, Purge, Delete, Withdraw, Submit, Reassign, Claim,

Approve, and Reject.

Note: For tasks with no associated form, this icon is disabled. To perform

an action on a workflow task with no associated form, log into BPM and

use its Actions menu. It is also possible to design a solution using the P6

Integration API.

Workflow Status: The Workflow Status image is accessible from either tab

in the Workflows portlet. It shows the sequence of events in the workflow.

Items shown with a green border indicate the furthest level of progress

within the workflow. The current status of the workflow corresponds with

the last item to "go green".

Sample Workflow: A basic workflow image with tasks for an engineer, a

second task for an assigned role, and a third task for a manager to

complete the workflow. The current workflow task is Third User Task

because it is the last item in the sequence that has a green outline.

Workflow History: View a chronological sequence of all the previous

activities, users, and stages in the current workflow.

Participating in Workflows

All workflow tasks requiring your participation are listed in the Action Required tab of the

Workflows portlet on a dashboard. For example, you might be asked to evaluate new

project initiatives as part of a new project evaluation workflow.

The process form that accompanies each workflow task is based on the workflow type

and stage, so the information displayed might vary each time you perform this task.

Note: The Workflows portlet requires installation of BPM. See your

administrator.

To review a workflow task:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Workflows portlet.

4) In the Workflows portlet, click the Action Required tab.

5) On the Action Required tab, select a task and click View Form.

Dashboards and Workspaces

169

6) On the BPM Workflow Form dialog box, select an action to perform. The title and

available screen elements of this form vary depending on the selected workflow task

and stage.

7) Click Submit.

Linking the Cost Worksheet to Contract Management

You can link the Cost Worksheet portlet to Oracle Primavera to view cost data for

projects in a single Contract Management module database. Before you can link the

portlet to Contract Management, you must first enter a Contract Management URL in

the application and link a project to the Contract Management application. For help,

see Linking the Project Management Application to Contract Management (see "Linking

P6/P6 Professional and Contract Management Applications" on page 149) and Linking

Contract Management Data.

To link the portlet to Contract Management:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, click Customize.

4) On the Customize page, click the Content tab and expand the Contract

Management section.

5) In the Contract Management section:

a. Select Cost Worksheet and click to expand the additional options.

b. To enter a value in the Database Group Filter field, click Select Database Group

and select a group from the dialog box.

6) On the Content tab, click Save and Close.

7) On the dashboard tab, click Filter by.

8) In the Filter by dialog box, select a known project, portfolio, or group of projects by

code that includes one or more known projects linked to at least one Contract

Management project. Click OK.

9) On the dashboard tab, expand the Cost Worksheet portlet and log in to Contract

Management if prompted.

Tips

In order to access this portlet, you must have a valid Contract Management user name

and password. If you have a Contract Management user name and password that is the

same as the user name and password with which you are currently logged in to P6, you

are not prompted to login to Contract Management when you expand the Cost

Worksheet portlet.

170

Opening Projects from Dashboard Portlets

You can open projects from within certain project-related portlets such as My Projects or

Project Health. You must have OBS access, be the owner, or assigned as a resource or

activity owner in the project. In these portlets, wherever the project name appears as a

link, you can click it to open the project in the Projects section.

Note: Not all portlets allow you to open projects in this fashion. For

example, the Project Statistics and Schedule Performance portlets

will not open the project when its project link is clicked. Instead,

these portlets offer more detailed views into the data they

represent.

To open a project from within a portlet:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the portlet and select a project.

Tips

In scorecard Portfolio View portlets, click next to the project you want to open.

In the Project Gantt Chart portlet, hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple projects

and click Open Projects in the portlet toolbar to open them.

Sending E-Mail to Resource Teams

You can send e-mail to an entire resource team of your choosing.

To send e-mail to a resource team:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the Resource Team Summary portlet:

4) In the Resource Team Summary portlet:

a. Click Filter by and select the team to which you want to send an e-mail.

b. Click E-mail resource team.

5) In the E-mail dialog box:

a. Edit the recipient list, message, and subject as needed.

b. Click Send E-mail.

Tips

You must have an e-mail address listed in you user profile to send an e-mail.

Dashboards and Workspaces

171

Sending E-Mail Notifications about Resource Assignments

An automatic notification feature can be configured to send e-mail to the affected

resources when you add, change, or remove a resource assignment.

To configure P6 to automatically send e-mail about resource assignments:

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab, expand the General section.

4) In the General section:

a. Select the Send e-mail to resources upon adding or removing assignments option.

b. The system automatically selects the Prompt before sending e-mail option. Clear

the option if you do not want prompts.

5) On the Global tab, click Save and Close.

Tips

The address and subject line for the e-mail are generated based on the specific

assignment circumstances. For example, when you first assign a resource to an

activity, the e-mail subject line tells the resource they have been assigned and

provides the activity name. In all cases, the message text includes the project name,

resource start and finish dates, planned units, and planned units/time.

When the automatic e-mail option is on, confirmation messages are sent to you,

indicating the names of the recipients.

If a resource does not have an e-mail address specified on the Resources tab of the

Administration page, no e-mail can be sent.

When a resource is replaced on an activity, an e-mail is sent to the removed resource

and to the replacement resource.

Creating Custom Portlets

Create custom portlets if the existing portlets do not fulfill your needs.

To create custom portlets:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, click Customize.

4) On the Customize page, click the Content tab.

172

5) On the Content tab, expand the Custom Portlets section.

6) In the Custom Portlets section:

To create a custom portlet:

1. Click Add on the Custom Portlets heading line.

2. Expand the new custom portlet and enter a value in each field.

To add the custom portlet to the Workspace page, select the option next to the

portlet name.

7) On the Content tab, click Save and Close.

Tips

You can also create custom portlets from the Customize page of the Dashboards page.

173

About Portfolios

A portfolio is a collection of projects. Group projects into portfolios so you can easily view

data from more than one project at a time. For example, you might filter a dashboard by

a portfolio to view a wide range of information for multiple related projects at one time.

In a more strategic sense, you should group projects and programs together to facilitate

the effective new product development and management of those projects to optimize

your organization's success at meeting business objectives.

Using portfolios, you can review summary data and status information for the group as a

whole or for individual projects in a portfolio.

You can create portfolios for your own use or for sharing with other users. You can also

create global portfolios, which are available to all users.

Portfolio views, such as pie charts, enable you to visually compare portfolios. For

example, compare costs for all projects in region A (one portfolio) vs. region B (another

portfolio).

Historical snapshots of grouped project data, called scenarios, aid in your analysis of

project groups on the Portfolio Analysis and Capacity Planning pages.

Working with Portfolios

To begin using the analysis features in the portfolios section, you must already have

created and updated multiple projects. Begin your work in the portfolios section by

creating and configuring at least one portfolio. It's also possible for another user to create

one and share it with you. Over time, your team will create additional portfolios, views,

and scenarios in order to perform comparative analysis, obtain status and ROI, and

perform other operations.

When creating a portfolio, decide whether you want to hand pick the projects that it will

comprise, or if you want the application to create and periodically update the set of

projects in your portfolio based on your filter criteria. Either way, you can change these

settings at any time.

Note: An administrative option is available to increase or decrease

the refresh interval for filtered portfolios. Refer to Filter Portfolio Stale

Period in the P6 Administrator's Guide.

Portfolios

174

Creating Portfolios

Perform these steps to create a new group of projects called a portfolio. When creating

a portfolio, decide whether you want to hand pick the projects that it will comprise

(manual), or if you want the application to create the set of projects in your portfolio

based on your filter criteria (automatic). Either way, you can change these settings at

any time.

To create a portfolio:

1) From the Portfolios menu, select Manage Portfolios.

2) On the Manage Portfolios page, click Create Project Portfolio.

3) On the Create Portfolio page:

a. In the Project Portfolio Name field, enter a unique portfolio name.

b. In the Manage this portfolio area, decide if you want to add projects to the

portfolio manually or automatically using a filter. The fields on the Create Portfolio

page will adjust based on your selections.

If you selected Manually, add the projects you want to include from the

Available Projects list to the Selected Projects list.

If you selected By Filter, enter your filter criteria.

c. Configure access to the portfolio by making a selection from the This portfolio is

available to options.

To restrict access to the new portfolio to only you, select Current User.

To designate a global portfolio, select All Users.

To restrict access to only another user, select Another User, and make a

selection from the Select a User dialog box.

d. Click Save.

Tips

To edit a portfolio, including its projects or filter criteria, click Details.

There are two alternate ways to create a portfolio:

Click Portfolios, click Portfolio Analysis, and then select a scorecard in the View

field. From the toolbar, click Create Portfolio from Selected Projects.

Click Portfolios, click Capacity Planning, and then click Create Portfolio from

Selected Projects.

Creating Projects While Working with Portfolios

Generally, you create projects while working in the Projects section of the application.

However, you can also create a project while viewing a portlet in the Dashboards

section or analyzing a portfolio in the Portfolios section. Refer to the tasks below:

Creating Projects in a Portfolio Portlet (see "Creating Projects in a Portfolio View

Scorecard Portlet" on page 175)

Portfolios

175

Creating Projects on the Portfolio Analysis Page (on page 175)

Creating Projects in a Portfolio View Scorecard Portlet

Generally, you create projects while working on the EPS page in the Projects section of

the application. However, it is also possible to create what-if projects while viewing a

portfolio view scorecard portlet on a dashboard.

To create a project in a portfolio view scorecard portlet:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, click a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, locate your portfolio view scorecard portlet's titlebar and click

Click here to maximize or minimize this section to expand and maximize it.

4) In the expanded and maximized portfolio view scorecard portlet:

a. Select a project row.

b. Click Add.

5) For the first project you create, if defaults are not already set, the Add Project dialog

box appears:

a. Select a default Parent EPS element.

b. Select a default Responsible Manager.

c. Click Select.

6) In the portfolio view scorecard portlet:

a. Select your new project row by clicking on it in the Name column.

b. Enter a name for your new project to replace the default name.

c. Click Save.

Tips

When you create a project from a scorecard on a dashboard, the project is

automatically added to the filter currently associated with the dashboard. However,

if the dashboard is filtered by a global portfolio and you do not have the required

security privilege to edit global portfolios, the new project is removed from the

scorecard when you click Save.

You can change the Project Status field on the General detail window of the EPS

page. For example, you may later want to change a project from What If to Planned

status.

Creating Projects on the Portfolio Analysis Page

Generally, you create projects while working on the EPS page in the Projects section of

the application. However, it is also possible to create what-if projects while analyzing

portfolios. During the process of evaluating a portfolio, you will often want to capture a

new project idea.

176

To create a project on the portfolio analysis page:

1) Click Portfolios.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Portfolio Analysis.

3) On the Portfolio Analysis page:

a. Make sure you are working with the primary portfolio (at top or left) and not the

comparison set for the next steps.

b. In the Scenario list, select a scenario for your analysis.

c. In the View list, select a portfolio view scorecard.

d. In the scorecard, select a row where you want to add a new project.

e. Click Add Project.

4) For the first project you create, if defaults are not already set, the Add Project dialog

box appears:

a. Select a default Parent EPS element.

b. Select a default Responsible Manager.

c. Click Select.

5) On the Portfolio Analysis page, click Save.

Tip

You can change the what-if project's Project Status field value on the General detail

window of the EPS page. For example, you may later want to change a project from

What If to Planned status.

Assigning Projects to a Portfolio

When comparing portfolios on the Portfolio Analysis page, you can assign a project to

the selected portfolio in either half of the page.

To assign a project to the selected portfolio:

1) Open a portfolio in the Portfolios section using one of the following methods:

Click Portfolios to open the last portfolio you were working with.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose one of the most-recently used

portfolios.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose Open Portfolio to select a group of

projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Portfolio Analysis.

3) On the Portfolio Analysis page:

a. In either work area, choose a scorecard view in from the View list.

b. In the same work area, select <Latest Data> from the Scenario field list.

Portfolios

177

c. In the same work area, click Assign a Project to this Portfolio

4) In the Select Project dialog select a project, then click Assign.

Tips

You cannot assign a project to a portfolio when displaying a scenario; you must

select <Latest Data>.

The selected portfolio must be manually-administered; you cannot assign a project to

a filtered portfolio.

Defining Performance Thresholds

To help you assess the relative performance, earned value, index calculations, and other

metrics for a WBS, project, or portfolio, you can set performance thresholds. These

thresholds capture the current calculations, variances, and metrics and re-route them

into one of four ranges or "buckets" as follows:

Exceptional: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio is exceeding

expectations.

Acceptable: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio is performing within an

expected range.

Warning: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio needs attention and is

performing below expectations.

Critical: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio requires significant corrective

action.

The threshold values you set for a project apply to all users viewing metrics for that

project from the Workspace page and Portfolios pages. You have the option of

overriding these thresholds for your own use on a personal dashboard. Both sets of steps

are detailed below.

To define performance thresholds for a project:

1) Click Projects and select Open Projects.

2) In the Open Projects dialog box, select one or more projects by name, code, EPS, or

portfolio. Click OK.

3) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

4) On the Workspace page, click Customize.

5) On the Workspace Details page:

a. Click to collapse all the sections except Performance Threshold.

b. Click to expand the Performance Threshold section and then expand

Performance, Earned Value, and Index.

c. For each parameter, shown with its color-coded visual indicator, enter a threshold

value. For lists, select a value from the list.

d. Click Save and Close.

178

6) If you opened more than one project, select the next project in the Select Project list

and repeat these steps after clicking Customize.

To define your own performance thresholds:

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click Global tab.

3) On the Global tab:

a. Click to collapse all the sections except Performance Threshold.

b. Click to expand the Performance Threshold section and then expand

Performance, Earned Value, and Index.

c. For each parameter, shown with its color-coded visual indicator, enter a threshold

value. For lists, select a value from the list.

d. Click Save and Close.

Tips

If any logical constraints are not satisfied by your selections, a message appears at the

top of the page. For example, if you set a warning to 25 days late, a critical threshold

cannot be set to 10 days late; logical constraints require that critical thresholds be

greater than warning thresholds. Correct the thresholds and try saving again.

179

Portfolio Views

About Portfolio Views

A portfolio view is a scorecard or chart providing high-level information spanning an

entire group of projects. Portfolio views can appear in an individual user's personal

dashboard or shared among users in shared dashboards. They are also used when

comparing portfolios on the Portfolio Analysis page.

Working with Portfolio Views

Each user’s personal portfolio views and any global portfolio views appear on the

Portfolio Views page. From this page, you can manage the following types of portfolio

views:

Scorecard: Similar to tables or spreadsheets, you can display the columns you want in

scorecards on the Portfolio Analysis page, the Capacity Planning page, or the

Portfolio View portlet. To assist with more sophisticated analysis on a set of projects,

you can also use a scorecard to conduct a waterline analysis. A waterline is a visual

modeling tool that ranks projects into two separate groups by sorting and applying a

constraining limit. Scorecards also permit you to edit some of their fields.

Bubble Chart: A bubble chart displays four project data fields. The X-axis represents

the values from one data field, the Y-axis represents a second field, the size of the

bubble represents a third, and the field selected for grouping the data represents a

fourth field. A bubble chart is useful when you want to analyze three independent

project variables at one time, grouped by a fourth set of values.

Pie Chart: A pie chart is a circular chart divided into proportional slices, where each

slice represents its contribution to the whole. The size of the slice represents the value

of the selected data field. A pie chart is useful for analyzing relative parts of a whole.

Histogram: There are three types of bar charts, or histograms.

Basic Histogram: A basic histogram lets you analyze project data in a vertical bar

chart format. You can select a project data field to display on the X-axis and

another field to display on the Y-axis of the chart; typically, the X-axis represents

categorical data, and the Y-axis represents individual data values.

180

Side-by-Side Histogram: A histogram where categorized data can be grouped,

side-by-side, to assist with comparisons. A side-by-side histogram chart is useful

when analyzing relative parts of a whole. For example, use a side-by-side

histogram to analyze original budget based on project status.

Stacked Histogram: A more sophisticated version of the histogram, where

categorized data is grouped, or stacked, to assist with comparisons. A stacked

histogram is useful when analyzing relative parts of a whole.

Creating Portfolio Views

When creating portfolio views, specify the scorecard or chart type, the project

information you want to appear, and the users who will have access to the view. Portfolio

view types include scorecard, bubble chart, pie chart, and three types of histograms

(basic, side-by-side, and stacked).

To create a portfolio view:

1) Click the Portfolios menu and choose Manage Portfolio Views.

2) On the Portfolio Views page, click Create View.

3) On the Create View dialog, decide if your new view should be entirely new or based

on an existing view.

To create an entirely new view, expand New Portfolio View, select a chart type,

and click OK.

To create a new view based on an existing view, expand Existing View, select one

from the expanded user and global views shown and click OK.

4) On the Create Portfolio View page, expand any collapsed groupings, complete the

required fields, and specify any additional details about the view. The fields on the

Create Portfolio View page automatically adjust based on the value you select for

the Type field.

5) Click Save.

Tips

You can save a portfolio view as a scenario and save a scenario as a portfolio view.

You can use any of these alternate methods to create a portfolio view:

Click Portfolios, click Portfolio Analysis, and then click Create Portfolio View.

Click Portfolios, click Portfolio Analysis, configure a particular view or scenario, and

then click Save As.

Click Dashboards, select a dashboard, and then click Customize. In the Portfolio

Views group, click Add. Using this method, your new view appears in the Portfolio

View portlet with the title you assigned to it.

Portfolios

181

Working with Portfolio View Scorecards

A scorecard is a type of portfolio view you can use to analyze project data in a table

with projects in rows and up to 30 data fields in columns. You can display scorecards on

the Portfolio Analysis page, the Capacity Planning page, and the Portfolio View portlet,

and choose the columns of information you want to display. A scorecard is beneficial

when you want to analyze data in a spreadsheet-type format.

To assist with more sophisticated analysis of a set of projects, you can also use a

scorecard to conduct a waterline analysis. A waterline is a visual modeling tool that ranks

projects into two separate groups by sorting and applying a constraining limit.

It is also possible to edit some global and project data in a scorecard, such as project

codes, user-defined fields, and responsible manager. Additionally, you can add projects

with default data and delete projects directly from a scorecard.

Table of Key Scorecard Elements

Item Description

Portfolio Analysis toolbar.

Portfolio Analysis settings area.

More/Basic buttons: Click More to display more options in the Portfolio

Analysis settings area. Click Basic to hide the additional settings.

182

Item Description

Scorecard work area: The first scorecard will appear in this upper work

area.

Scorecard work area: The second scorecard will appear in this lower

work area. In this example, the user has customized the view with a

waterline. Use a waterline to analyze a project group by sorting projects

into two separate groups based on a defined sorting and constraint limit.

Projects above the waterline, displayed with a white background, are

those that fall outside the constraint limit value; all other projects,

displayed with a light blue background, appear below the waterline.

Project Selection checkboxes: Check a box to add a project's data to

the cumulative Total line.

Note: To support comparative analysis, the Portfolio Analysis work

area is divided into two parts. The elements above generally

appear within both parts.

More About Scorecards

You can save the same scorecard view used on the Portfolio Analysis page and display it

in private or share it later in a portlet on a dashboard.

Portfolios

183

Note: The application also makes use of general tables of data also

referred to sometimes as scorecards; however, they are not the

same as your individually named portfolio view scorecards.

Table of Related Scorecards

Item Description

Dashboard: The John's Projects dashboard. You can show portfolio views

on private, multi-user, or global dashboards.

Scorecard in a portlet: The Budget View scorecard in a portlet on a

dashboard. This example demonstrates a named portfolio view of type

scorecard.

Click here to maximize or minimize this section button: Click to

maximize and expand the scorecard. Additional command links will

appear at the top of this portlet when it is maximized.

Scorecard on the Capacity Planning page: This example demonstrates a

general table format also referred to as a scorecard; however, this is not

a named portfolio view of type scorecard.

184

Working with Portfolio View Bubble Charts

In addition to plotting data along the X axis and Y axis, bubble charts also adjust the

relative size of each entity's bubble or circle to depict a third value, and they group the

data by still a fourth value.

Example: A user wants to analyze original budget, cost variance, and at completion

total cost for each project in a portfolio. The user also wants to compare this data to

another portfolio grouping projects by division/office and showing risk level, actual total

cost, and at completion total cost. The user navigates to the Portfolio Analysis page and

customizes the portfolio views, filters, scenarios, and bubble chart options shown below.

The user sets Original Budget to display on the X-axis and Cost Variance on the Y-axis.

Next, the user selects At Completion Total Cost as the bubble size and sets the Group by

to Project. When the chart appears, each bubble represents a single project; the size of

the bubble represents the At Completion Total Cost value for the project; the bubble's

position on the X-axis represents the original budget value for the project; and the

bubble's position on the Y-axis represents the cost variance value for the project. The user

configures a second bubble chart to display Risk Level on the X-axis, Actual Total Cost on

the Y-axis, and At Completion Total Cost for the bubble size. This time, the projects in the

portfolio are grouped into bubbles by division/office.

Portfolios

185

Note: To support comparative analysis, the Portfolio Analysis work

area is divided into two identical parts with the only difference

being the data that appears in each part. The elements below

appear within each part.

Table of Key Bubble Chart Elements

Item Description

Portfolio Analysis toolbar.

Filter: The currently applied filter appears. The top chart's filter is

determined by the currently selected portfolio. You can set the bottom

chart's filter by clicking .

More/Basic buttons: Click More to display more options in the Portfolio

Analysis Settings area. Click Basic to hide the additional settings.

Portfolio Analysis settings area.

Bubble Chart work area: Your chart will appear in this main work area.

Legend: Based on the Group By field, each item in the legend is given a

color based on the selected color theme.

186

Working with Portfolio View Pie Charts

A pie chart is a circular chart divided into slices, where each slice represents a particular

group. The size of the slice represents the value of the selected data field, relative to the

group's total value. A pie chart is useful for analyzing relative parts of a whole.

Example 1: You can create a pie chart to analyze current budget for projects, based on

project status. To do this, customize the chart and select Current Budget as the data

field, then choose to group by Project Status. When the chart displays, each slice

represents a single project status (e.g., Planned, Active, Inactive, What If); the size of the

slice represents the current budget value for all projects assigned the project status.

Example 2: The pie chart below shows At Completion Total Costs in slices representing

Location.

Table of Common Pie Chart Elements

Item Description

Portfolio Analysis toolbar.

Portfolio Analysis settings area.

More and Basic buttons: Click More to display more options in the

Portfolio Analysis Settings area. Click Basic to hide the additional

settings.

Legend: Based on the Group By field, each item in the legend is given a

color based on the selected color theme.

Portfolios

187

Item Description

Slice: Each data group's proportionate contribution to the total is

represented by a color-coded wedge or piece of the pie. In the

example, this slice represents Mainland Europe's cost of 163,385 which

equates to 13% of the At Completion Total Cost by Location.

Working with Portfolio View Histograms

Histograms provide bars to help you compare data. Three similar types of histograms are

available: basic, side-by-side, and stacked.

188

Example: Todd wants to analyze original budget values for each responsible manager

(OBS) in the organization. He also wants to compare this data to another portfolio

showing original budget for each risk level. He navigates to the Portfolio Analysis page

and customizes the portfolio views, filters, scenarios, and histogram chart options shown

below. He sets Responsible Manager to appear on the X-axis and Original Budget on the

Y-axis. When the chart appears, each bar represents a responsible manager (OBS)

element; the size of the bar represents the Original Budget. He configures a second

histogram to display Risk Level on the X-axis and Original Budget on the Y-axis.

Table of Key Histogram Elements

Item Description

Tooltip: Mouse over a bar to view a summary.

Show all values on axis: Select this option to include all values on the

X-axis and not just values with data. The histogram includes Very Low and

Very High risk level values even though there is no data to display.

Portfolios

189

Item Description

Side-by-Side Histogram: The Group By field is added. In this example,

Actual Labor Cost is tracked along the Y-axis for each Division/Office

grouped by low, medium, and high Risk Level along the X-axis.

Stacked Histogram: The Stack By field is added instead of the Group By

field. In this example, remaining labor costs expressed in units of time

(hours) are graphed for each phase. The data is stacked by location.

191

Portfolio Scenarios

About Portfolio Scenarios

Scenarios are snapshots of historical project data at a given point in time. You can use

them to compare against the latest summarized data, or to compare to other scenarios.

About What-if Analysis

Rooted in business management principles of sound decision theory (which option

should we pursue?) is the what-if analysis technique aimed at assessing the results and

impacts of potential scenarios. Its name stems from the question, "What if the scenario

actually came to fruition?"

Use what-if scenarios and what-if projects to determine the impact different costs or

investments have on business goals. Unanticipated adversities can make a business or

project unstable and proactive handling of these uncertainties is required. With what-if

scenario analysis, your organization can evaluate the feasibility of completing the

project under unfavorable conditions, prepare contingency and response plans to avoid

or overcome the worst scenario, and mitigate the impact of uncertain or unexpected

situations.

P6 portfolio scenarios help you calculate multiple project costs or durations and

compare different sets of assumptions about project activities. Sample scenarios might

include the following:

What if we extend the duration of a particular project phase?

What if regulatory changes require us to invest more in certain areas?

What if the price of a critical component increases to unsustainable levels?

What if a crucial part is delayed?

Working with Portfolio Scenarios

Use scenarios to compare against the latest summarized data, or to compare to other

scenarios. The list of available scenarios includes scenarios you have access rights to

view that are associated with the open project group. As you modify the data displayed

on the tab (for example, you change the type of Capacity Planning chart you want to

view or change the list of selected projects and roles), you can create new scenarios or

save changes to the view to further assist you in role planning.

Creating Portfolio Scenarios

Create portfolio scenarios to capture a specific state you can later use for what-if

analysis.

To create a portfolio scenario:

192

1) Open a portfolio in the Portfolios section using one of the following methods:

Click Portfolios to open the last portfolio you were working with.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose one of the most-recently used

portfolios.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose Open Portfolio to select a group of

projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Portfolio Analysis.

3) On the Portfolio Analysis page:

a. In the View list, select a portfolio view. If you need to create a view, click

Create Portfolio View.

b. Configure the current view in the lower work area by performing any of the

following optional steps.

1. Click Filter by to filter the current view by EPS, portfolio, or project code.

2. In the Scenario list, select an existing scenario.

3. Click More and make your selections on the settings area.

4. Click Save As.

4) In the Save As dialog box, enter a Title, choose the New Scenario option, and click

Save.

Tips

Another way to create a scenario is to click Capacity Planning, configure the options on

that page, and then click Save As.

Sending E-Mail About Scenarios

Perform these steps when you want to notify other users about a particular scenario and

its associated filter so that they can share a portfolio view or use your scenario as a basis

for creating their own. The Subject line displays the scenario name, while the body of the

e-mail displays the scenario name and associated filter.

To send e-mail about a scenario:

1) Click the Portfolios menu and select Manage Scenarios.

2) On the Scenarios page:

a. Click Expand Item to view the available global, multi-user, and user scenarios

sorted by EPS element, project code value, or portfolio.

b. In the row for your selected scenario, click E-Mail.

3) In the Send dialog box:

a. Select the recipients in the To and cc lines. You can also manually enter e-mail

addresses. If access to the scenario was limited to certain users, their e-mail

addresses are automatically entered in the To line.

Portfolios

193

b. You can also modify the Subject line or provide additional text in the message

body.

c. Click Send E-mail. A message box will appear confirming the message has been

sent.

Tip

To review the scenario before sending e-mail, click Portfolios, click Portfolio

Analysis, and select it in the Scenario field.

The e-mail button does not appear on the Scenarios page for scenarios where the

This scenario is available to field has been set to the Current User option. In other

words, you cannot send e-mail to anyone about a private scenario that only you can

access.

195

Capacity Planning

About Capacity Planning

Executives, managers, and planners tasked with managing a portfolio of existing projects

and new opportunities in the pipeline need a way to evaluate both active and

proposed projects to answer one essential question: Do we have the resource capacity

to successfully complete all the work? The Capacity Planning process helps answer this

question. It reveals when your organization is over or under allocated. Decisions to

proceed, delay, freeze, or terminate projects can then be made.

Working with the Capacity Planning Page

Use the Capacity Planning page to perform What-if analysis, graphically change project

forecast dates, and apply waterline analysis techniques to assist with critical,

executive-level decision making. Before assessing capacity or demand on resources,

create resource and role estimates for each project. During your analysis, you can

create and update scenarios that provide varying snapshots of project and role

allocation data. After conducting your analysis, you can create new portfolios

containing only the projects that meet your planning criteria.

When you choose to display a stacked histogram, area chart, or spreadsheet, the

Capacity Planning chart displays the total at completion units or costs over time for the

combination of selected roles and projects. Each of these charts contains the same

information in different formats with a data stacking option for the projects and roles you

select.

196

When you choose to display a net availability chart, the chart displays each selected

role's under- or over-allocated units over time for the currently selected projects. The limit

line is always placed at zero. If the total units for a role equals the limit, no bar is displayed

for that role. Bars placed above the limit line indicate net under-allocation for the

associated role during the displayed time period; bars placed below the limit line

indicate net over-allocation for the associated role during the displayed time period.

Portfolios

197

Table of Key Capacity Planning Page Elements

Item Description

Navigation: Before you begin, first open the portfolio you want to work

with. After clicking Capacity Planning, remember to click Show

Capacity Planning Chart in the toolbar. This displays the four (4) main

screen areas used in capacity planning.

Scorecard: Use this table to analyze, sort, and select projects. Only the

projects you mark in the check box column appear in the Capacity

Planning chart.

Note: The scorecard on this page is not related to the set of defined portfolio view scorecards.

Gantt chart: View current and forecast schedules. Drag the bars to adjust

the Capacity Planning chart data.

Role Selection Area: Mark the check boxes for the roles you want to

include in the Capacity Planning chart.

Capacity Planning Chart (Under-Allocated): View role allocation as a

stacked histogram, area chart, net availability chart, or spreadsheet.

Capacity Planning Chart (Over-Allocated): Customize the chart to show

a limit line representing the maximum capacity of all resources for the

currently selected roles by timescale period.

Customize Capacity Planning Chart: Customize the columns, grouping,

waterline, or chart options. You can customize the chart to display units

or costs, a limit line, and an allocation limit line. You can also choose to

show data for all projects in the database (except what-if projects),

rather than for the projects you select in the scorecard.

If you elect to view costs, but do not have the required security privileges

to view costs for any project in the selected project group, the Capacity

Planning chart does not display any data. This option is not available for

the net availability chart because the chart displays only units.

Note: The net availability charts are often the best place to begin a

resource capacity or demand analysis since they represent a

streamlined birds-eye view. These charts include all related projects

and roles in a single view allowing you to expand or drill down into

only the roles with perceived problems.

198

Analyzing Role Allocation (Capacity Planning)

You can analyze role allocation over time for one or more projects on the Capacity

Planning page. Using multiple chart formats and role groupings, you can identify areas of

under-allocation or over-allocation. Using scenarios, you can also perform what-if

analysis.

To analyze role allocation:

1) Open a portfolio in the Portfolios section using one of the following methods:

Click Portfolios to open the last portfolio you were working with.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose one of the most-recently used

portfolios.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose Open Portfolio to select a group of

projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Capacity Planning.

3) On the Capacity Planning page:

a. Click Show Capacity Planning Chart to display the scorecard (top left), Gantt

chart (top right), role selector (bottom left), and Capacity Planning chart (bottom

right).

b. (Optional) Choose to complete any number of the following optional sub-steps:

1. Click Customize to set column, grouping, sorting, waterline, and other chart

options.

2. Click the Scenario list to apply a scenario. Select <Latest Data> to display the

latest summarized data for the project group.

Note: If you customize the Capacity Planning page to display

allocation data for all projects in the database (rather than for

selected projects only), you cannot apply a scenario.

3. In the scorecard (top left), mark or clear the check box next to each project to

include or exclude the project's data in the Capacity Planning chart. Data in

the Capacity Planning chart is updated to reflect your changes.

4. In the role selector (bottom left), click Group Roles By or Search to

pinpoint the roles you want to analyze in the chart. Mark or clear the check

box next to each role to include or exclude the role's allocation data in the

Capacity Planning chart. Role data is immediately updated in the chart.

Note: When grouped by Current Portfolio Roles or Role Team, all

child roles are automatically selected when you select a parent

role.

5. In the Capacity Planning chart (bottom right) toolbar, select a chart or

spreadsheet format, and then choose how you want to stack the chart (by

project, role, project code, or staffed versus unstaffed units or costs).

Portfolios

199

6. Drag your mouse over a color-coded section of the chart to view the capacity

data for that section.

201

About Projects

A project is any temporary series of activities performed in some coordinated

arrangement in order to create a product, service, or measurable business result.

Projects have a definite beginning and end. A project is concluded when its objectives

have been reached or when the project is terminated.

Working with Projects

Opening Projects

If no projects are open when you log on to P6 or if you are a new user, clicking Projects

will take you directly to the EPS page as long as this page is available in your user

interface view. If you do not have access to the EPS page or you navigate to another

page in the Projects section, the Open Projects dialog box is displayed when you click

Projects. You can use this dialog box to open the projects or groups of projects you need.

Once you have projects open, the next time you click Projects in the P6 navigation bar

(and each time thereafter), the application automatically opens the last project or

project group you opened. You can always open a different project or project group

from the Open Projects dialog box, the most recently used projects list in the Projects

menu, or the EPS page. To access the Open Projects dialog box at any time, select Open

Projects from the Projects menu.

Note: When you upgrade P6, the projects you previously had open

are not lost. When you click Projects, the application will open the

last open project or group of projects.

Project Profiles

To restrict or grant access to projects and their data, you must assign project profiles to

users. A project profile is a role-based profile that limits privileges to specific project data,

such as baselines and the WBS. Project profiles are linked to users through one or more

OBS assignments. You assign responsibilities to specific projects and work within projects

by assigning OBS elements to various levels of the EPS and each project’s WBS.

The combination of the user assignment to an OBS element, and the OBS assignment to

the EPS/project/WBS, determines which projects and project data the user can view. For

each OBS element a user is assigned to, the user’s assigned project security profile (per

OBS assignment) further determines the project data the user can view or edit.

Projects

202

Opening Projects, Portfolios, or Templates

You can open a single template, project, or group of projects such as a portfolio from

several locations in the application. Select a related topic below:

Tips

After initial installation or upgrade, the first time you launch P6 and click Projects, the EPS

page will open if this page is available in your user interface view. If the EPS page is not

available in your user interface view or you navigate to another page in the Projects

section, the Open Projects dialog box will open.

Opening Projects from Dashboard Portlets

You can open projects from within certain project-related portlets such as My Projects or

Project Health. You must have OBS access, be the owner, or assigned as a resource or

activity owner in the project. In these portlets, wherever the project name appears as a

link, you can click it to open the project in the Projects section.

Note: Not all portlets allow you to open projects in this fashion. For

example, the Project Statistics and Schedule Performance portlets

will not open the project when its project link is clicked. Instead,

these portlets offer more detailed views into the data they

represent.

To open a project from within a portlet:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the portlet and select a project.

Tips

In scorecard Portfolio View portlets, click next to the project you want to open.

In the Project Gantt Chart portlet, hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple projects

and click Open Projects in the portlet toolbar to open them.

Opening Recently Used Projects, Templates, or Portfolios

Open recently used projects, templates, or portfolios from a list of your previous selections

stored for quick access.

To open recently used projects, templates, or portfolios:

Click the Projects menu and select a project from the most recently used list.

Tips

The maximum number of items available in the most recently used lists for projects and

portfolios is determined by your administrator.

Projects

203

Opening Selected Projects or Templates

Perform these steps to open a template or one or more projects from the Open Projects

dialog box.

To open templates or projects:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Open Projects.

2) In the Open Projects dialog box:

a. Click Select Project Type and select Projects or Templates.

b. Click Group by:

Select EPS or Project Codes to organize available templates.

Or

Select EPS, Portfolios, or Project Codes to organize available projects.

c. In the Available Templates or Available Projects list:

Add a template to the Selected Templates list.

Add projects or groups of projects to the Selected Projects list.

d. Click OK.

Tips

You can open a combination of items, for example, an EPS node and a portfolio.

Press Shift+click or Ctrl+click to select the projects, or select an EPS to open all of its

projects. When you open an EPS node, the application opens all projects belonging

to that EPS node and its children EPS nodes. You cannot open a template in

combination with any other item including another template. If a template is already

listed in the Selected Templates list, the application will not allow you to move

another template into the list.

You cannot select a project code; you can only select project code values. When

the dialog is organized by project codes, you must expand the list of project codes to

display the values associated with those codes.

Opening the Last Project or Projects

After navigating away from the Projects section and then returning to it from other

sections of the application, the last project, template, or project group you had open is

re-opened by default.

To open the last project or project group:

Click Projects.

Opening Dependent Projects

When an activity in one project has a relationship to an activity in another project

(external relationship), these projects are dependent on each other. When working with

projects on the Activities page, you can open a project's dependent projects.

204

To open dependent projects:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Open Dependent

Projects.

4) In the Open Dependent Projects dialog box, select a dependent project and click

OK.

Tips

To open multiple dependent projects, use Ctrl+click or Shift+click to select them. The

Open Dependent Projects dialog box lists all currently open projects.

If a dependent project is already open, a message displays. Click OK to close the

message and the dialog.

205

The EPS

About the Enterprise Project Structure (EPS)

The enterprise project structure (EPS) represents the hierarchical structure of all projects in

the database. The EPS can be subdivided into as many levels or nodes as needed to

represent work at your organization. Nodes at the highest, or root, level might represent

divisions within your company, project phases, site locations, or other major groupings

that meet the needs of your organization; projects always represent the lowest level of

the hierarchy. Every project must be included in an EPS node.

The number of EPS levels and their structure depend on the scope of your projects and

how you want to summarize data. For example, you might want to define increasingly

lower levels of EPS nodes, similar to an outline, to represent broad areas of work that

expand into more detailed projects. Specify as many projects as needed to fulfill the

requirements of your operations executives and program managers.

Multiple levels enable you to manage projects separately while retaining the ability to roll

up and summarize data to higher levels. For example, you can summarize information for

each node in the EPS. Conversely, you can use top-down budgeting from higher-level

EPS nodes down through their lower-level projects for cost control.

User access and privileges to nodes within the EPS hierarchy are implemented through a

global organizational breakdown structure (OBS) that represents the management

responsible for the projects in the EPS. Each manager in the OBS is associated with an

area of the EPS, either by node or by project, and the WBS of the particular level of the

hierarchy.

Once you have added users and associated them with OBS elements and project

profiles, you can define the EPS and assign a responsible manager (OBS element) to

each level. You must specify a responsible manager for each node of the EPS.

Working with the EPS

Your database of projects is arranged in a hierarchy called the enterprise project

structure (EPS). The EPS can be subdivided into as many levels or nodes as needed to

parallel work at your organization. Nodes at the highest, or root, level might represent

divisions within your company, project phases, site locations, or other major groupings

that meet the needs of your organization. Projects always represent the lowest level of

the hierarchy. Every project must be included in an EPS node.

Ideally, one person or group controls the EPS across the organization. The project control

coordinator creates the hierarchical structure that identifies the company-wide projects.

The coordinator works with the project manager in each area of the organization to

define basic project information for each group and to develop standards before any

projects are added.

Organizational breakdown structure (OBS)

206

User access and privileges to nodes within the EPS hierarchy are implemented through a

global OBS that represents the management responsible for each project. Each

manager in the OBS is associated with an area of the EPS, either by node or by project,

and the WBS of the particular level of the hierarchy.

Build the hierarchy

After you set up an EPS, you can define additional data about each EPS node, such as

anticipated dates, budgets, and spending plans. Use the detail windows on the EPS

page to specify this information. Or, you can begin adding projects under the applicable

nodes in the structure if you have access rights to these functions. Access rights are set by

your application administrator.

Throughout the application, when selecting projects to work with, you can open all

projects that belong to an EPS node or sort them by EPS. When you create a project, you

must specify a single parent EPS node.

The EPS Page

Item Description

Actions, Edit, and View menus: Use these menus to customize the EPS

page. See Actions Menu on EPS Page, Edit Menu on EPS Page, or View

Menu on EPS Page.

EPS toolbars: Customize the toolbars to include toolbuttons that you use

often. See Customize Toolbar Items Dialog Box.

Projects

207

Item Description

Project View toolbar: Determines how you see data on the EPS page.

Project table: Displays each project within the EPS. In this example, the

data is grouped to three (3) levels by EPS, grouped at a fourth level by

Original Budget, and sorted by Risk Level.

EPS Gantt chart: Displays project and EPS data in a Gantt chart format.

Creating EPS Elements

Create enterprise project structure (EPS) elements to represent the hierarchical positions

of all the projects in your database. You can create sibling EPSs to represent those that

are hierarchically equal, or child EPSs to represent those that are subordinate.

To create EPS elements:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select an EPS. The EPS can act as a sibling or a parent.

b. Click the Actions menu:

To add a sibling, select Add Add Sibling EPS (Shift+Insert).

To add a child, select Add Add Child EPS (Ctrl+Insert).

c. Enter a name in the EPS/Project Name field of the new EPS.

d. Click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

You might find it helpful to apply the EPS Only standard filter when creating an EPS

element. This will remove all projects and templates from the view so you can easily

see where your new EPS fits into the EPS hierarchy as a whole. See Applying Filters (on

page 232).

To create an EPS, the entire EPS hierarchy must be visible, so you might have to

configure your grouping or filter settings. Grouping should be configured to have the

Field list set to EPS and the To Level list set to All. Also, the Hide if empty option cannot

be selected. See Configuring Project View Grouping (on page 231). Filtering cannot

be configured to display projects that belong to an EPS as this will select the Hide if

empty option. See Configuring Project View Filters (on page 232).

The application automatically names the new EPS New EPS, New EPS-1, New EPS-2, et

cetera.

208

You can also right-click an EPS on the table and select Add Child EPS or Add Sibling

EPS to create an EPS.

Configuring the EPS

Configure the EPS for your organization to develop a hierarchy that establishes the way

your organization operates. Divide the EPS into multiple levels or nodes to represent the

work that needs to be done in your organization. You can then assign projects to these

nodes and levels to reflect work that needs to be done in each area.

The number of EPS levels and their structure depend on the scope of your projects and

how you want to summarize data. For example, you might want to define increasingly

lower levels of EPS nodes, similar to an outline, to represent broad areas of work that

branch into more detailed projects.

To configure the EPS:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Create the EPSs you need to represent the divisions in your company, site

locations, or other major groupings of projects. See Creating EPS Elements (on

page 207).

b. Use the Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up), Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down), Move Left

(Ctrl+Alt+Left), and Move Right (Ctrl+Alt+Right) arrows on the Edit menu to

arrange the EPS nodes in a hierarchy that establishes the highest level and lowest

level EPSs.

c. Add projects to the EPS nodes. See Creating Projects (on page 208) or Creating

Projects from Existing Projects or Templates (on page 209).

4) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

The farther to the left an EPS is, the higher-level EPS it is.

About Projects

A project is any temporary series of activities performed in some coordinated

arrangement in order to create a product, service, or measurable business result.

Projects have a definite beginning and end. A project is concluded when its objectives

have been reached or when the project is terminated.

Creating Projects

Create projects to define a set of activities and WBSs that work toward a common goal.

To create a project:

Projects

209

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select the EPS element to which you want to add the new project.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Add Add Project.

4) In the Add Project dialog box:

a. Click the General tab and select an option or enter a value in each required field.

Note: You can add a description or a Must Finish By date. You can

also copy the project from an existing project or template.

b. Click Create.

Tips

To configure advanced options, you must select a project to copy. This will enable

the Advanced tab. If you select to copy a template, the Advanced tab will not be

enabled.

You can also right-click the table and select Add Project to create a project.

You can copy existing projects to create new projects. See Cutting, Copying, and

Pasting Data (on page 115).

Creating Projects from Existing Projects or Templates

In place of making a project from scratch, you can use a template or a copy of an

existing project as a starting point.

To create a project from an existing project or template:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select the EPS element to which you want to add the new project.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Add Add Project.

4) In the Add Project dialog box, click the General tab.

5) On the General tab:

a. Select an option or enter a value in each required field.

b. In the Copy from existing project or template field, click Select Project or

Template to Copy and select an option from the dialog box.

Note: Click Select Project Type and select Projects or

Templates to open the list of projects or templates.

c. Click Create.

210

Tips

To configure advanced options, you must select a project to copy. This will enable

the Advanced tab. If you select to copy a template, the Advanced tab will not be

enabled.

You can also right-click the table, select Add Project, and follow steps 4. and 5. to

create a project from an existing project or template.

Deleting Projects or EPSs

Delete projects or EPSs when they are no longer necessary.

To delete projects or EPSs:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select the project or EPS to delete.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Delete (Delete).

c. In the Primavera P6 dialog box, click Yes.

d. Click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Caution:

You cannot retrieve deleted projects.

When you delete a project or EPS, you are also deleting all of

the WBSs, activities, and projects (if you are deleting an EPS)

contained therein.

Opening Projects or Templates in the EPS

You can open projects or templates from the EPS page. When you then move to other

areas of the application, such as the Workspace page, these projects or templates will

be open.

To open EPS node projects or templates:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a project, project template, or EPS to open.

Note: If you select an EPS, all the projects contained in that EPS will

also open.

Projects

211

b. Click the Actions menu and select Open Project or Open Project

Template.

Tips

You can open more than one project or EPS at a time. Use Shift+click or Ctrl+click to

select all the items you want to open.

You can also right-click a project and select Open Project or Open Project Template

from the menu to open a project or project template.

You cannot open a template in combination with any other item.

To close a project, right-click the project you want to close and select Close Project.

To close all of the open projects on the EPS page, click the Actions menu on the EPS

page and select Close All.

When a project is open, it will display an open folder icon . When a project is

closed, its corresponding folder icon will also be closed .

The Team Usage, Workspace, Documents, and Issues pages are not available if you

are working with a project template.

Customizing Detail Windows

You can customize which detail windows appear on the EPS or Activities pages.

To customize detail windows:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Project navigation bar, click Activities or EPS.

3) On the Activities or EPS page:

a. Select a view from the Activity or EPS View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize Detail Windows.

4) In the Customize Detail Windows dialog box:

a. In the Area section, select one of the options to determine which listing of detail

windows is available for you to customize.

b. In the Detail Window section, select or clear the options beside detail windows to

add or remove them from the page.

c. Click Save.

212

Tips

Select or clear the option beside the Detail Window title to add all or remove all the

detail windows.

Right-click a detail window tab to customize detail windows. Click Customize on the

menu to open the Customize Detail Windows dialog box, or click a detail window

name to add or remove it from the page.

Click and drag detail windows to change their order. Otherwise, the detail windows

appear in the same order that they appear in the Customize Detail Windows dialog

box.

Click Float on the detail window to convert it to a dialog box. You can then drag

this dialog box to change its position.

When you navigate to a new page, you can save or cancel the view changes you

made to the detail windows. These changes will only be saved for the view selected

in the Activity or EPS View list.

Configuring Project Preferences

Set project preferences to configure basic settings for the selected project.

To configure project preferences:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a project.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Set Project Preferences....

4) In the Project Preferences dialog box, configure the tabs as needed for the selected

project.

a. Configure the Calculations tab. See Configuring Project Calculations (on page

213).

b. Configure the Contract Management tab. See Linking Contract Management

Data.

c. Configure the Defaults tab. See Configuring Project Defaults (on page 214).

d. Configure the General tab. See Configuring General Project Preferences (on page

214).

e. Configure the Progress Reporter tab. See Configuring P6 Progress Reporter (on

page 215).

f. Configure the Summarization tab. See Configuring Project Summarization (on

page 215).

g. When you are finished, click Save and Close.

Projects

213

Configuring Project Calculations

Configure project calculations to define how the application will compute values

concerning activities, earned value, and units and costs.

To configure project calculations:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a project.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Set Project Preferences....

4) In the Project Preferences dialog box, click the Calculations tab.

5) On the Calculations tab:

a. Configure the options in each section.

b. Click Save to continue working or click Save and Close if you are finished.

Linking P6 and Contract Management Projects

When the P6 and Contract Management applications are linked, you can then link a

specific project in P6 to a Contract Management project. This will enable you to view

up-to-date contractual information for the project within portlets.

To link a P6project to a Contract Management project:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a project.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Set Project Preferences....

4) In the Project Preferences dialog box, click the Contract Management tab.

5) On the Contract Management tab, click Group Name: Project Name .

6) In the Primavera P6 dialog box, log on to Contract Management.

7) In the Select Project and Group dialog box, expand a project, select a group, and

click OK.

8) In the Project Preferences dialog box, click Save to continue working or click Save

and Close if you are finished.

214

Tips

To link the project to a Contract Management project, you must have a valid user name

and password. If you have a Contract Management user name and password that is the

same as the user name and password with which you are currently logged in to P6, you

are not prompted to login again. If you do not have the same user name and password

for both applications, you must enter a valid Contract Management user name and

password in the Primavera P6 dialog box.

Configuring Project Defaults

Configure project defaults to define how new activities and assignments will display in a

project.

To configure project defaults:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a project.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Set Project Preferences....

4) In the Project Preferences dialog box, click the Defaults tab.

5) On the Defaults tab:

a. Configure the defaults to represent how you want the application to handle new

activities and assignments.

b. Click Save to continue working or click Save and Close if you are finished.

Configuring General Project Preferences

Configure general project preferences to specify general information concerning the

project such as when the fiscal year begins.

To configure general project preferences:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a project.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Set Project Preferences....

4) In the Project Preferences dialog box, click the General tab.

5) On the General tab:

a. Configure the field and list.

b. Click Save to continue working or click Save and Close if you are finished.

Projects

215

Configuring P6 Progress Reporter

Configure statusing and managing activities options to specify how users interact with

activities.

To configure P6 Progress Reporter:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a project.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Set Project Preferences....

4) In the Project Preferences dialog box, click the Progress Reporter tab.

5) On the Progress Reporter tab:

a. Configure the options for each section.

b. Click Save to continue working or click Save and Close if you are finished.

Configuring Project Summarization

You can configure how projects are summarized.

To configure project summarization:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a project.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Set Project Preferences....

4) In the Project Preferences dialog box, click the Summarization tab.

5) On the Summarization tab:

a. Select or clear the Enable Summarization option.

b. If you select the option, configure the newly enabled options and list.

c. Click Save to continue working or click Save and Close if you are finished.

Tips

If you clear the Enable Summarization option on the table, you will be asked if you would

like to delete the summary information. If there is no summary information, then the

application will not prompt you.

About Gantt Charts

A Gantt chart is a graphical representation of the duration and sequence of activities or

projects. It is useful for planning, scheduling, and monitoring progress against a timeline.

216

Working with the Activity Gantt Chart

Use the Activity Gantt chart to view the progression and relationships of activities or

projects on a timeline.

Gantt chart bars and activity dates or durations

You can easily update dates and durations by resizing or moving Gantt chart bars. When

you change bar positions in a Gantt chart, the start and finish date columns update

automatically to reflect the new bar position. After moving a Gantt bar, when you save

your changes, the remaining duration is recalculated based on the new dates and the

activity or project calendar. Because this calendar is applied when you save, if you

move but do not resize a Gantt bar, the duration might shorten or lengthen based on the

calendar's nonworktime.

Note: If you click the center of a bar and drag it along the

timescale, you will be prompted to add a Start On or After

constraint. In the Gantt chart, you can impose only a Start On or

After constraint.

Customizing the Gantt chart

You can change the progress line options or the timescale for the Gantt chart in the

Customize Activity View dialog box.

Viewing the Gantt chart

In the Gantt chart, a vertical blue line represents the current data date for the project.

Vertical sightlines appear at each minor increment (bottom) of the timescale. Horizontal

sightlines appear at the bottom of every fifth table row. The timescale background is

shaded to indicate nonworktime based on the global default calendar.

Activity highlight

To quickly locate the activities you need to update, you can use the Progress Spotlight

feature, which highlights all activities that should have progressed during a specific time

period. This time period is defined by the smallest increment of the current timescale

since the last data date. For example, if the current timescale is set to Month/Week,

Progress Spotlight highlights all activities that should have progressed during the week

since the data date.

Configuring Gantt Charts

Configure the Gantt chart to adjust activity beginning and finishing dates as well as

constraints.

To configure the Gantt chart:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Projects

217

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Project navigation bar, click Activities or EPS.

3) On the Activities or EPS page, click the View menu and select Gantt Chart.

4) On the Gantt chart:

a. To resize bars, select a bar and click and drag the beginning or end of it to a new

date. (Only applicable on the Activities page.)

b. To focus the Gantt chart on a specific time interval, double-click a year, quarter,

month, week, or day on the timescale. The Gantt chart timescale will expand or

shrink to show the entire time interval.

c. To expand a specific area of the Gantt chart, click the timescale at the top of the

Gantt chart once (the pointer will become a double-headed arrow), move the

pointer to select the portion of the timescale you want to expand, and click again.

You can perform this step several times.

d. To apply a Start On or After Activity Constraint, click the middle of a bar and drag it

along the timescale. (Only applicable on the Activities page.)

5) On the Activities or EPS page, click the View menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

To back out of a zoom, double-click the top bar of the timescale.

For more information on configuring Gantt charts, see Configuring Activity View Gantt

Chart (on page 289) or Configuring Project View Gantt Chart (on page 235).

After resizing or moving a Gantt bar, when you save your changes, the activity

remaining duration is recalculated based on the new dates and the activity's

calendar. Because the calendar for the activity is applied when you save, a date you

specified for an activity might change slightly if it occurs during calendar

nonworktime. Also, if you move, but do not resize, a Gantt bar, the duration might

shorten or lengthen based on the activity calendar's nonworktime.

If you select the option Do not show this again in the Activity Constraint dialog box, it

will not reappear until the next time you log in.

To create or configure activity relationships in the Gantt chart, see Creating Activity

Relationships (on page 314) or Configuring Activity Relationships (on page 315).

About the Activity Table

The Activity Table presents all WBS and activity information for the currently open projects

in a familiar table format. You can customize Activity Table columns, filters, grouping,

sorting, fonts, and colors.

218

For example, you might change the information displayed in columns to show

scheduling data, resource and cost data, user-defined fields, or any data items you

select, including calculated data. You can also format specific information to call

attention to it by using the filter, group and sort, and other table display features.

Use the Activity Table to:

Create a list of activities and activity information quickly when you don't need to see

the information graphically over time as in a Gantt chart.

Group activities that share a common attribute into hierarchies. For example, focus

on activities by resource, responsibility, or date. Once you organize activities into

groups, you can summarize or "roll up" project data to simplify their presentation.

Sort activities to arrange them in an order you specify. For example, to view activities

chronologically, you might sort them by a date field.

About Baselines

A baseline is a copy, or snapshot, of project data at a given time. Because a baseline is a

static representation of a project plan, it can be used as a benchmark against which to

measure performance as a project progresses.

You can create multiple baselines to establish metrics throughout the project life cycle.

Typically, you would want to create an initial baseline once the project plan is approved,

then you would create additional baselines according to your organization's

requirements. For example, you could create new baselines at specific reporting

intervals.

Although many baselines can be created for a project, only two baselines can be used

at any given time to display and compare data. These are known as the Project Baseline

and User's Primary Baseline. The current project can also be used as the baseline, for

example, in situations where no other baseline yet exists.

The Project Baseline is a single metric for comparison that enables all members of a team

to have a shared and consistent set of data against which to evaluate project progress.

There is only one Project Baseline at any time. All pages that display summarized data

compare and display data against the Project Baseline.

The User's Primary Baseline is an optional personal baseline that is used to evaluate

project progress.

Related Topics

About Baseline Types ............................................................................................. 464

Projects

219

Working with Baselines

Before you update a schedule for the first time, you should create a baseline plan. The

simplest baseline plan is a complete copy, or snapshot, of the original schedule. This

snapshot provides a target against which you can track a project's cost, schedule, and

performance. You can save a copy of the current project to use as the baseline or you

can convert another project in the EPS hierarchy to a baseline for the current project.

To help categorize, or track, multiple baselines for a single project, you can assign each

baseline a type that reflects its purpose, for example, initial planning baseline, What-if

project baseline, customer sign-off, or midproject baseline.

Regardless of the number of baselines you store for a project, at any given time you can

only select at most two baselines for use in making comparisons in P6. The project-level

baseline is used for project/activity usage spreadsheets and profiles, as well as for

earned value calculations.

You can convert another project in the EPS hierarchy to a baseline for use in comparisons

with the current project. Before converting a project to a baseline, if you still want to

have access to the original project, you should make a copy of it. Once you convert a

project to a baseline, it is no longer available in the project hierarchy. You can restore a

baseline, making it available again as a separate project in the project hierarchy, in

order to modify it or update it.

Note: You must have the Edit Project Details Except

Costs/Financials and Assign Project Baseline project privileges to

set the project baseline.

220

Table of Working with Baseline Elements

Item Description

Define Baselines: Use Define Baselines to add, modify, convert, and

restore projects and baselines.

Add Baselines: When you add a baseline, give it a name, assign it a type,

and decide if you want to make it the Project Baseline or User's Primary

Baseline for the currently selected project. Baseline designations are

made in the projects rows of the table highlighted in blue.

Convert a Project to Baseline: Save a copy of the baseline before you

convert it. Convert a project to use it as a baseline for a current project.

Restore a Baseline: Use restore a baseline to modify a baseline project.

You must first unlink a baseline from its current project by restoring it as a

separate project. You can then work with this restored baseline project as

you would any other project in the EPS.

Baseline Type: Assign baseline types to baselines to help categorize

multiple baselines for a single project. Configure the available baseline

types along with your other Enterprise Data settings.

Project Baseline: Lists the available baselines for the selected project.

Select the baseline to use as the project baseline. If a baseline does not

exist, the current project is the default value.

User's Primary Baseline: Select the user's primary baseline from the list of

available baselines. If a baseline does not exist, the current project is the

default value.

Note: You can define up to three baselines for a project in P6

Professional.

Creating Baselines

Create baselines to measure project performance.

To create a baseline:

1) Open the project or projects for which you want to create a baseline using one of the

following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and select one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Projects

221

Click the Projects menu and select Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Project Navigation bar, click Activities or EPS.

3) On the Activities or EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Define

Baselines....

4) In the Baselines dialog box:

a. Select the project to which you will add the baseline.

b. Click Add Baseline.

c. Enter a name in the Baseline Name field.

d. Select a type from the Baseline Type list.

e. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

The application automatically assigns the baseline a name based on the selected

project. For example, if you select Project A, the application will name the newly

created baseline A - B1.

Specify the default Project Baseline and User's Primary Baseline by selecting from the

list of available baselines for each project in the table on the Baselines dialog box.

Click Convert a Project to Baseline and select a project to convert a project into a

baseline.

Select a baseline and click Restore a Baseline to remove the baseline and make it a

project.

About the Summarizer Service

Many features in P6 and P6 Professional use summary enterprise or project data

calculations spanning multiple records and therefore rely on the creation of

up-to-the-minute summarized data. When you think of summary data, think of math

sums: totals and subtotals. You already have all the project data, you just want it added

up and presented to you so you can easily evaluate it.

To ensure that enterprise records are current, you need to summarize projects.

Summarization performs the series of calculations that update records with any new

information that has been entered since the last update. Summary data tables

temporarily store and share the data.

The summarizer is responsible for generating the following data:

Project and WBS-level summary data including subtotals for each month, week, and

financial period

Resource and role summary data including subtotals for each WBS, month, week,

and financial period

Enterprise-level summary data including project and resource subtotals for each EPS

element

222

Summarizer services update project records for the selected projects.

Example: You want to see resource assignments spanning multiple resources and break

out the subtotals by project and WBS. By summarizing the selected projects, the

database performs the calculations necessary to display subtotals for all cost and unit

fields by resource, by project, by WBS, and by time period.

Working with the Summarizer Service

You can summarize data at any time or you can use the Scheduled Services page to

schedule a time when data are regularly summarized. For example, set the application

to summarize every Monday at 8:00 a.m. In each case, project data are summarized

according to the settings you specify and the new summary values are saved to the

project database, overwriting any previously calculated summary data. If you run the

summarizer from the Scheduled Services page, you can select to summarize an EPS

rather than individual projects. Otherwise, an EPS node uses the sum of all the project

records beneath it.

Resources

Resource-related features in P6 that use summary data rely on the creation of enterprise

(EPS) resource records. Each record is the sum of all assignments for a resource. When

you summarize a project, the application creates resource records for that project. Each

time the service runs, the records are updated.

Summarizing Projects

Summarize projects to maintain up-to-date project data.

To summarize projects:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a project or EPS node.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Summarize Projects.

Projects

223

Tips

When you summarize projects from the Activities page, the application will

summarize any of the currently open projects. When you summarize from the EPS

page, only the selected projects will be summarized.

You can have the application summarize projects automatically. See Creating

Schedule Services (see "Creating Scheduled Services" on page 395).

These services are removed from the database based on the ASAP Cleanup Rate

your P6 administrator specifies on the Configurations tab in P6 Administrator

application. Once the time is met all ASAP jobs that have a status other than running

or delegated will be removed from the table automatically. Running and delegated

jobs will be removed if they are older than the cleanup rate or if they are older than

one day, whichever is greater.

You can also summarize projects from the Actions menu of the Activities page.

About Importing and Exporting Projects

You can import and export information to and from P6 using external files and then share

this information with other P6 EPPM users, Oracle Primavera Contractor users, other

project management tools (such as Microsoft Project and Microsoft Excel), and your

organization's human resource and accounting systems. You can also use external files

to archive your projects or create a backup of your database.

You can import and export project data between P6 and other applications using the

following file formats:

Oracle Primavera's XML format which enables you to share project information stored

in the P6 EPPM database.

Microsoft Project XML format which enables you to share information with Microsoft

Project 2007.

Note: All project data is stored in a central database. You can also

import projects using the Primavera XER format in P6 Professional.

Working with Primavera XML Project Import/Export

You can import projects in Primavera XML format or Microsoft Project XML format.

When you import Primavera XML projects several considerations apply:

You are not required to have All Resources access. The import process continues

even for users without full resource access.

You can import resources at or below your access level in your resource hierarchy.

This includes the ability to create new resources at or below your level.

If the import would result in the creation of resources above your level in the resource

hierarchy, it will not continue.

224

If the import would result in the creation of resources at or below your level in your

resource hierarchy, and this new data is in conflict with existing resource data, it will

not continue. For example, if resource IDs are in conflict.

To prevent the import process from attempting to create new resources in P6, select

the Do Not Import option for Resources. This option will still match existing resources

and allow their assignments to be imported and updated, but it will not import new

resources.

Even when you have sufficient project security access, if you do not have the proper

resource access, you will not be able to assign or modify a resource above your

access level in the resource hierarchy to a project to which the resource is already

assigned.

Even when you have sufficient project security access, if you do not have the proper

resource access, you will not be able to export projects, in their entirety, when

resources are above your access level in the resource hierarchy. The export will not

necessarily fail, but data will be limited since not all resources in the project can be

included.

Exporting Projects using Microsoft Project XML

You can export projects to locations outside of P6 using the Microsoft XML format to

share information with Microsoft Project.

To export projects using Microsoft Project XML format:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export , XML

Project Import/Export....

4) In the XML Project Import/Export dialog box, click the Export tab.

5) On the Export tab:

a. In the Export Type field, select Microsoft Project XML 2007.

b. In the Microsoft Project Template field, select a template.

c. In the Export Project field, click Select Project and select a project from the

dialog box.

d. Click Export.

Tips

Click the Status tab to see the status of the export. On the Status tab, you can delete the

export.

Configuring Microsoft Project Templates

Configure Microsoft® Project® templates to define data exchange options for both

exporting to and importing from Microsoft® Project®.

Projects

225

To configure Microsoft® Project® templates:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export , XML

Project Import/Export....

4) In the XML Project Import/Export dialog box, click the Import or Export tab.

5) On the Import or Export tab:

a. Select Microsoft Project XML from the Import or Export Type list.

b. Select a template from the Microsoft Project Template list.

c. Click MSP Import Template Options or MSP Export Template Options.

6) In the Modify Template dialog box:

a. Configure the lists, options, and fields on each tab.

b. Click Save.

Tips

The area you select from the Select Subject Area list on the Custom Field Mapping tab

determines what appears in the Project Management and Microsoft Project Fields.

Exporting Projects using Primavera XML Format

You can export projects to locations outside P6 using the Primavera XML format to share

project information between Project Management databases.

To export projects using Primavera XML format:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export , XML

Project Import/Export....

4) In the XML Project Import/Export dialog box, click the Export tab.

5) On the Export tab:

a. In the Export Type field, select Primavera XML.

b. In the Export Project field, click Select Project and select a project from the

dialog box.

c. Click Export.

Tips

Click the Status tab to see the status of the export. On the Status tab, you can delete the

export.

226

Importing Projects using Microsoft Project XML

You can import projects using the Microsoft Project XML format to create and manage

them as new projects in P6.

Note: To import a project via XML using P6 or P6 Professional, your

user account's Resource Access field must be set to All Resources.

This change can be made temporarily and then restored on the

Users Page.

To import projects using the Microsoft Project XML format:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export , XML Project

Import/Export....

4) In the Import/Export Project dialog box, choose the Import tab.

5) On the Import tab:

a. In the Import Type field, select Microsoft Project XML.

b. In the Import File field, click Browse.

6) In the File Upload dialog box, select a file and click Open.

7) On the Import tab:

a. In the Microsoft Project Template field, select a template.

b. Select an option for Select Import Action.

If you select Create New Project, click Select Parent EPS and select the

EPS where you want to import the XML file.

c. Click Import.

Tips

Click the Status tab to see the status of the import. On the Status tab, you can also

delete the import.

Do not import a Microsoft Project XML file that was exported from P6, back into P6.

Instead, do the following:

1. Export the project to Microsoft Project XML from P6.

2. Open the project in Microsoft Project.

3. Save the project as an XML file in Microsoft Project.

4. Import the project into P6 and create a new project.

Importing Projects using Primavera XML Format

You can import projects using the Primavera XML format and create or update a project.

To import projects using Primavera XML format:

Projects

227

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export , XML Project

Import/Export....

4) In the Import/Export Project dialog box, choose the Import tab.

5) On the Import tab:

a. In the Import Type field, select Primavera XML.

b. In the Import File field, click Browse.

6) In the File Upload dialog box, select a file and click Open.

7) On the Import tab:

a. Select an option for Select Import Action.

If you select Create New Project, click Select Parent EPS and select the

EPS where you want to import the XML file.

If you select Update Existing Project, click Select Project and select the

project where you want to import the XML file.

b. Click Import.

Tips

Click the Status tab to see the status of the import. On the Status tab, you can also delete

the import.

Exporting Projects to Excel

You can export the list of projects in your project view to a Microsoft® Excel® (.xls) file.

To export projects:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a project view from the EPS View list.

b. Configure the project view to determine what data are exported. See Configuring

Project Views (on page 229).

c. Click the Actions menu and select Import/Export Export to Excel.

4) In the File Download dialog box, click Open to open the Excel spreadsheet or Save to

save the file to your computer.

Tips

All data, except grouping row information, are exported as they appear in the current

project view.

228

About Budget Change Logs

A Budget Change Log helps you keep track of budget alterations as they occur. The

Current Budget field (original budget plus approved budget changes) and Proposed

Budget field (original budget plus approved and pending budget amounts) incorporate

changes so you have up-to-date and accurate budget information for each EPS node

or project.

The Budget Change Log enables you to track modifications that affect the budget; this

log also provides a clear indication of the who, what, when, where, and how behind the

change.

Change amounts are not incorporated in the current budget until these amounts have

an Approved status. Only authorized project participants can issue budget changes and

mark them as approved. You can post a change amount as Pending; the program

manager of the affected EPS node, or the project manager of the affected project, must

then mark the amount as Approved or Not Approved. The module recalculates the new

budgeted amount and adjusts the current budget based on approved changes to the

log:

Proposed Budget equals Original Budget plus Approved Budget Changes plus

Pending Budget Changes

Current Budget equals Original Budget plus Approved Budget Changes

Creating Budget Change Requests

Create budget change requests when seeking approval to change an EPS or WBS

budget.

To create budget change requests:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, select an EPS or project and click the Budget Log detail window.

Note: You can also create budget change requests for WBSs or

projects from the Budget Log detail window of the Activities page.

4) In the Budget Log detail window:

a. Click Add (Insert) to add a budget log line item.

b. Enter a value in the Amount and Responsible fields.

c. Select Pending from the Status list.

5) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

The person listed in Responsible will move the request to Approved or Not Approved.

Projects

229

The program manager of the affected EPS node or the project manager or the

affected project will enter a reason for approval or denial in the Reason field.

Approving/Denying Budget Change Requests

If you have the authority, you can approve or deny a budget change request.

To approve or deny a budget change request:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, select the EPS or project with a budget change request and click

the Budget Log detail window.

4) In the Budget Log detail window:

a. Select and review the budget change request.

b. Select Approved or Not Approved from the Status list.

c. Enter reasoning for the new status in the Reason field.

5) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

To update the original budget, enter the amount in the Original Budget field and

press enter. The Current Budget and Proposed Budget are updated with the new

value.

Only authorized project participants can issue budget changes and mark them as

Approved.

You can also approve or deny budget change requests for WBSs or projects from the

Budget Log detail window of the Activities page.

About Project Views

Project views are the visual layout of project and EPS node information. Project views are

customizable; you can change their filters, Gantt chart options, columns, et cetera.

Selecting the best view or customizing a view that suits your needs can facilitate the

process of recording project data. For example, to quickly record a range of details for a

project or projects, you might select a table view which maximizes the number of data

columns available.

Configuring Project Views

Configure project views to define how you see a project. Project views affect the filters,

grouping, columns, et cetera that are applied to the EPS page. Detail window visibility is

also affected by the selected project view.

To configure project views:

1) Click Projects.

230

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

1. Click the EPS View list and select a project view.

2. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Project View dialog box:

a. Configure the Columns tab. See Configuring Project View Columns (on page 230).

b. Configure the Grouping tab. See Configuring Project View Grouping (on page

231).

c. Configure the Filters tab. See Configuring Project View Filters (on page 232).

d. Configure the Bars tab. See Configuring Project View Bars (on page 234).

e. Configure the Gantt Chart tab. See Configuring Project View Gantt Chart (on page

235).

f. Configure the Access tab. See Configuring Project View Access (on page 235).

g. Click OK.

Tips

You can modify any view you create. You can only modify multi-user and global

project views if you have the appropriate security privileges.

Many of these configurations, configuring columns and filters for example, do not

require you to open the Customize Project View dialog box. If the necessary

toolbuttons are available on your toolbar, you can use them to configure the project

view.

Configuring Project View Columns

Configure project view columns to specify which columns are visible in the Gantt chart or

table.

To configure project view columns:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Click the EPS View list and select a project view.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Project View dialog box, click the Columns tab.

5) On the Columns tab:

a. In the Select the columns to display section, customize the Selected Columns list.

See Configuring Columns or Values (on page 91).

b. In the Column Options section, select an option from each list.

c. Click OK.

Projects

231

Tips

The top-to-bottom order of fields in the Selected Columns list corresponds to the

left-to-right display order of the columns on the EPS page.

You can display a maximum of 30 columns.

To move multiple columns at a time into the Selected Columns list, use Shift+click or

Ctrl+click to select the appropriate columns, then click the right arrow.

Click Font Picker and select a font and size from the dialog box to change the font for

a column.

If you make changes to the Responsible Manager column for an EPS, the application

will prompt you to decide if you want to assign these changes to the child EPS

elements of the selected EPS. The responsible manager will not be changed for the

child projects of this EPS; project responsible managers must be changed individually.

You can customize project view columns from the View menu. Click the View menu

and select Columns.

Configuring Project View Grouping

Configure grouping to define how fields are grouped on the EPS page.

To configure project view grouping:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Click the EPS View list and select a project view.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Project View dialog box, click the Grouping tab.

5) On the Grouping tab, configure the grouping options for each section and click OK.

Tips

When activities are grouped, the Gantt chart displays a summary bar for each group.

The summary bar represents the time period from the earliest Start to the latest Finish

for the group.

Use the To Level list to select the number of hierarchy levels when grouping by a

hierarchical field. When grouping by dates, use the To Level list to select a time

interval.

The band color you select will be displayed in the table.

You can also customize project view grouping from the View menu. Click the View

menu and select Group.

Grouping bands are displayed by default when you group by a project code or EPS

even if the bands are empty. Select the Hide if empty option in the Customize View or

Customize Groupings dialog boxes to remove these bands from view.

232

Configuring Project View Filters

You can modify or create filters. These filters can then be applied to several different

project views.

To customize project view filters:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Click the EPS View list and select a project view.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Project View dialog box, click the Filters tab.

5) On the Filters tab:

a. You can modify a filter. See Configuring Filters (on page 234).

b. You can create a filter. See Creating Filters (on page 233).

c. You can apply filters. See Applying Filters (on page 232).

d. Click OK when finished.

Tips

You can also customize project view filters from the View menu. Click the View menu,

click the Filters submenu, and select Filters.

Applying Filters

Apply filters to a project to specify the data you want to display. You can add

user-created filters or select from the list of standard filters.

To apply filters:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Project navigation bar, click Activities or EPS.

3) On the Activities or EPS page:

a. Click the Activity View or EPS View list and select a view to which you will add the

filters.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View or Customize Project View dialog box, click the Filters

tab.

Projects

233

5) On the Filters tab:

a. Select an option from the Show matches for list.

b. In the Apply to View column, select the option for each filter you want to apply.

c. Click OK.

Tips

If you have Team Member module access, either assigned as a resource or activity

owner, applying the My Activities filter will have no affect on the activity list display

because your access is already restricted to your assigned and owner activities.

You can also click the View menu and select Filters from the Filters submenu to open

the Customize Filters dialog box. You can apply filters from this dialog box.

If you want to save the application of these filters to the view, click Yes in the

Primavera P6 dialog box which opens when you navigate away from the page.

Creating Filters

Create filters to to narrow activity or project information to a specific data group.

To create filters:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Project navigation bar, click Activities or EPS.

3) On the Activities or EPS page:

a. Click the Activity or EPS View list and select a view to which you will add the filters.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View or Customize Project View dialog box, click the Filters

tab.

5) On the Filters tab, click Add Filter.

6) In the Create Filter dialog box:

a. Click the Definition tab and configure the fields and lists for one or more filter

statements.

b. Click the Access tab and define user access.

c. Click OK.

234

Tips

To add more criteria statements, click . To remove a criteria statements, click . To

nest a criteria statement inside another, click . You can add up to ten levels of

nesting.

You can also click the View menu and select Filters from the Filters submenu to open

the Customize Filters dialog box. From this dialog box, you can create filters.

Configuring Filters

You can configure the detailed statements of a filter and who can use it.

To configure filters:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Project navigation bar, click Activities or EPS.

3) On the Activities or EPS page:

a. Click the Activity or EPS View list and select a view to which you will add the filters.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View or Customize Project View dialog box, select a filter

and click Modify Filter.

5) In the Modify Filter dialog box:

a. Click the Definition tab and configure the fields and lists to edit the filter

statements.

b. Click the Access tab, and select an access option.

c. Click OK.

Tips

You can not edit Standard Filters.

To add more filter statements to the Definition tab, click . To remove a filter, click .

To nest a criteria statement inside another, click . You can add up to ten levels of

nesting.

You can also click the View menu and select Filters from the Filters submenu to open

the Customize Filters dialog box. You can configure filters from this dialog box.

Configuring Project View Bars

Configure bars to represent different items on the timeline in the Gantt chart.

To configure project view bars:

Projects

235

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Click the EPS View list and select a project view.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Project View dialog box, click the Bars tab.

5) On the Bars tab, configure the bar options in each section and click OK.

Tips

The color you select for the Color option determines how the bar will be represented.

You might find it helpful to vary the position of the label on the Current bar.

Click Font Picker and select a font and size from the dialog box to change the font for

a bar.

You can also customize activity view bars from the View menu. Click Gantt Chart

Options on the View menu and click the Bars tab.

Configuring Project View Gantt Chart

Configure Gantt chart options to determine how the chart will display.

To configure project view Gantt chart:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Click the EPS View list and select a project view.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Project View dialog box, click the Gantt Chart tab.

5) On the Gantt Chart tab, configure the Gantt chart options in each section and click

OK.

Tips

You can also configure the Gantt chart from the View menu. Click Gantt Chart Options

on the View menu and click the Gantt Chart tab.

Configuring Project View Access

Configure project view access to define who can see a view.

To configure project view access:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

236

a. Click the EPS View list and select a project view.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Project View dialog box, click the Access tab.

5) On the Access tab, select one of the access options and click OK.

Tips

Unless you specify otherwise, Current User is the default access.

About Bars

Bars are used in different views to graphically represent the project timeline. They can

symbolize milestones, activities, or projects. Available bar types are:

Current bar: Spans the early remaining/actual start to the early remaining/actual

finish for each activity, and indicates how the schedule is progressing according to

the original plan.

Float bar: Shows the total amount of time that an activity can be delayed without

delaying completion of a project.

Free Float bar: Shows the amount of time that an activity can be delayed without

causing subsequent activities to be delayed.

Late bar: Shows the late start to the late finish of an activity.

Percent Complete bar: Shows the completion percentage of an activity.

Plan bar: Shows the forecasted status of planned activities, and is used for simulating

the outcome of the project schedule as part of project planning.

Primary baseline bar: Shows the primary baseline start and finish dates of an activity,

and indicates how the schedule is progressing according to the original plan.

Project baseline bar: Shows the project baseline start and finish dates of an activity,

and indicates how the schedule is progressing according to the original plan.

About Columns (Fields)

Fields hold data. They generally either allow you to enter values or just display the field's

current value (called a read-only field).

Pages with tables often permit you to configure the fields that make up the columns of

the table. See Showing or Hiding Columns in a Table (on page 91).

About Grouping and Sorting

To simplify the display of complex tables of data, you can group rows of similar data and

sort the grouped bands as well as the data under them. Grouping helps you block

distracting data and focus only on the information you need. It also permits you to

collapse and expand hierarchical arrangements of your data rather than navigate large

flat lists.

Projects

237

About Gantt Charts

A Gantt chart is a graphical representation of the duration and sequence of activities or

projects. It is useful for planning, scheduling, and monitoring progress against a timeline.

About Filters

As you work with increasing amounts of data over time, you will recognize a need to limit

your focus to only the data most relevant to your particular task or need. A filter is a

predefined constraint you place on data so that data that does not meet your filter

criteria is hidden and only the data you need are shown.

About Funding Sources

Funding sources are the agencies, businesses, or groups that provide funding for a

project. You can keep funding sources in a dictionary that categorizes and groups similar

funds in a hierarchy. The dictionary allows you to quickly assign specific funding sources

to budgets as a project develops. You can assign the same funding source multiple times

with varying amount and share contributions for different levels of the EPS. The amount

contributed by a specific funding source is called the fund share value.

Assigning Project Funding Sources

Configure funding sources to update the amount and fund share of a funding source in

a project budget.

To assign a funding source:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, select a project or EPS to which you want to assign a funding source

and click the Funding detail window.

4) In the Funding detail window, click Add (Insert).

5) In the Select Funding Source dialog box, select a funding source and click OK.

6) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

About Notebooks

A notebook is another name for a log or binder of electronic details about an activity,

WBS, project, or EPS element. All the notes users enter or paste into the notebook,

including e-mail messages, web links, tables, and other entries, share a single common

theme called a notebook topic. See About Notebook Topics (on page 238).

238

Working with Notebooks

Notebook topics are created by the administrator on the Enterprise Data page of the

Administer menu. These topics are then assigned to activity, WBS, project, or EPS node

notebooks.

About Notebook Topics

Notebook topics help multiple users apply a common theme or label to shared

information about an activity, WBS, project, or EPS element such as its purpose,

completion instructions, or other helpful notes. For example, you might place an e-mail

message, a web link, a table of observations, and a series of text notes into a notebook

topic called Budget Recommendations to capture the ongoing cost impacts of a

recurring project.

Assigning Notebook Topics

Depending on the page you are working on, you can assign notebook topics to a

selected project or activity.

To assign a notebook topic to a project:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, select a project or EPS node and click the Notebooks detail

window.

4) In the Notebooks detail window, click Assign (Insert).

5) In the Select Notebook Topic dialog box, select a notebook topic, click Assign, then

Close.

6) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

You can also create notebook topic descriptions. In the Notebooks detail window,

double-click the Description field and click (browse). Enter a description in the

dialog box.

You can also assign notebook topics to activities from the Notebooks detail window

of the Activities page or the Activity Details page of the Open Requests for Resources

portlet of the Dashboards page.

Projects

239

About Project Codes

Project codes help you track different projects based on characteristics they share. You

can use project codes to arrange projects hierarchically when your EPS contains many

projects within many levels. If you have many projects in the hierarchy, project codes

help you group and filter potentially vast amounts of information spanning different areas

of the organization. The application supports an almost unlimited number of hierarchical

project codes and values; you can establish as many as you need to meet the filtering,

sorting, and reporting requirements of your organization.

Assigning Project Codes

Assign project codes to categorize projects.

To assign a project code:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, select a project and click the Codes detail window.

4) In the Codes detail window, click Assigning Project Codes (Insert).

5) In the Select Project Codes dialog box, assign codes and click Close.

6) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and click Save (Ctrl+S).

About P6 Progress Reporter

The P6 Progress Reporter module is a Web-based project communication and

timekeeping system. As a team-level tool for project participants, it helps project

participants focus on the work at hand with a simple cross-project to-do list of their

upcoming assignments. Project team members can record time worked and enter

information about their project assignments. Regardless of location, team members can

communicate timesheet and activity status directly to their managers.

Because all project participants can use P6 Progress Reporter to enter up-to-the-minute

information about their assignments and to record the time they spent working on each

one, project managers can make crucial project decisions with the confidence that only

comes from having the most current information possible. Timesheet review and

approval takes place directly from within P6.

240

About Contract Management

Oracle Primavera Contract Management is a multi-user, multi-project database that

manages all aspects of contract control including changes and submittals. It can be

used in conjunction with P6 EPPM.

Essential features include:

Provides information to keep contracts on-time and within budget

Enables you to cross-reference and link documents for quick, easy retrieval

Maintains historical data that can be used for the life of the project and referenced in

future projects

Aids in resolving disputes or claims

Linking P6/P6 Professional and Contract Management Applications

Perform the steps below to link P6 and P6 Professional to Contract Management. This link

at the application level allows you to establish links at the project level. When the

applications and projects are linked, P6/P6 Professional users can directly navigate to, or

directly show data from, the Contract Management application.

To link P6/P6 Professional to Contract Management:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Application Settings.

2) On the Application Settings pane, click the General tab.

3) On the General tab:

a. Enter a URL in the Contract Management URL field of the Contract Management

section.

b. Click Save and Close.

About Project Templates

Project templates are reusable models of projects you can store and use later, in whole

or in part, to save time and standardize your operations.

A template includes all the details, best practices, and de facto standards your

organization associates with projects of a particular type. For example, use project

templates to create a library of predefined project structures that can later be used as

starting points for new projects. In addition, specific WBS branches and their activities

can be copied from projects or templates and inserted wherever you need them.

You can organize your template projects within the EPS, assign them project codes, and

provide them with descriptions to aid in reuse. You can create templates from projects or

to create projects from templates. You can also create projects based on other projects,

and templates based on other templates.

Projects

241

Working with Project Templates

Project templates act as a format that you can use when creating new projects or

templates.

Working with project templates

The Documents, Issues, Team Usage, and Workspace pages are not available for project

templates. If you navigate to one of these pages while working with a project template,

you will see the message: Project templates are not supported on this page. When

working with templates on the Activities or EPS pages, the Issues and Documents detail

windows are visible but their icons are disabled.

Creating project templates

You can create a brand new project template, or you can copy and modify an existing

template or project to make a new template. If you select to copy a project or template,

you can copy the entire template, or you might insert only the WBS portion into a project.

Because issues and documents are not available for project templates, when you copy

an existing project to make a template, the issue and document information does not

carry over.

When you copy a project to create a template, some fields are automatically cleared of

any values and disabled to prevent the reuse of data out of context. For example,

actual dates and costs are not permitted in templates.

Opening project templates

Project templates cannot be opened in conjunction with other project templates or with

projects. If you open a project or a project template on the EPS page when you have a

project template open, the initial project template will close. Conversely, if you have a

project or group of projects open and you open a project template, the projects will

close.

This is also true when working in the Open Projects dialog box. For example, when you

have a project template open, the Open Projects dialog box will display the template in

the Selected Templates list. If you add a project to the Selected list, the application will

remove the project template from the list. If you already have a project template

selected, the application will not allow you to add another template to the list. On the

other hand, if you try to open a project template when projects are already open, the

projects are replaced by the project template.

Creating Project Templates

You can create project templates to act as a standard or format for future projects.

To create project templates:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

242

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select the EPS element to which you want to add the new project template.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Add Add Project Template.

4) In the Add Project Template dialog box:

a. Click the General tab and configure each required field.

Note: You can add a description or copy from an existing project

or template.

b. Click Create.

Tips

To configure advanced options, you must select to copy from an existing project or

template. This will enable the Advanced tab.

If you choose to copy from an existing project, select either the Use Actual Costs and

Units or Use Planned Costs and Units option. If you select to copy from a template, the

application will disable the Use Actual Costs and Units option.

You can also right-click the table and select Add Project Template to create a

project template.

243

Activities

About Activities

Also known as tasks, events, or work packages, activities are the lowest level

manageable work elements in a project or WBS. Activities typically have expected

durations, costs, and resource or role requirements. Milestone activities, however, have

no duration or cost. Collectively, all activities form the foundation of the entire project,

driving resource assignments, relationships, constraints, expenses, and durations.

Activities are sometimes further divided into any number of discrete steps.

Working with Activities

Although you might view activities any number of ways in P6, including on dashboards,

workspaces, reports, and the Resource Assignments page, the most common way to

work with project activities is on the Activities page and, specifically, in the Activity Table.

The Activity Table

Item Description

Open Projects: Open the projects you want to work with using the Open

Projects menu item. Then click the navigation bar icon for the Activities

page. The page shows which projects are currently open.

244

Item Description

Activity View: Next, select an activity view that already includes the

Activity Table or click Table. The view should be sorted hierarchically

by WBS in order to optimize your ability to manage WBS elements and

activities within them. When working with activities, always make sure you

have set the grouping, sorting, and filtering view options that help you

focus on only the data that matches your needs.

Menus and Toolbars: The menus and customizable toolbars on the

Activities page provide you with convenient access to the commands of

most importance to your work.

Activity Table: You can select activities and update them within the table

itself or on the detail windows. In the table, you can modify, Cut, Copy,

Paste, and Fill Down values. When multiple projects are open, you can

copy and paste activities between projects just as you would within a

single project. When you cut or copy an activity, all attributes are copied

along with it.

Activity Gantt: Refer to the optional Gantt chart to supplement your work

in the table with a visual representation of the schedule.

Assignments detail window: Update resource and role assignments in this

detail window. The first resource also appears in the Primary Resource

column in the table. In this example, the Assignments detail window is

floatable, meaning it can freely be moved within the screen.

Steps detail window: Break the activity down into smaller units called

steps. The progress of steps can also be measured. In this example, some

progress has been recorded in the Step % Complete field for each of

three steps for the activity. The user in this example, has also elected to

dock the Steps detail window above the other windows but below the

Activity Table.

General detail window: Record basic details about the activity in this

detail window. You can show or hide the series of detail windows that

appears for each activity and WBS.

Note: Using P6 Administrator application, your administrator can set

a default value for the maximum number of activities that appear

within an activity view.

Creating Activities

Create activities to define a more detailed breakdown of projects or WBSs.

To create activities:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Projects

245

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select a project, WBS, or activity; the new activity will be added beneath your

selection.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Add Add Activity.

c. Enter a name in the WBS/Activity field.

d. Click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

Right-click a project, WBS, or activity and select Add Activity to quickly add an

activity.

The application automatically names new activities New Activity.

You can create up to 15000 activities per activity view.

Configuring General Activity Information

You can configure some of the general information for activities, including Activity Type,

Duration Type, and activity constraints.

To configure general activity information:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the General detail window.

4) In the General detail window, configure the Details, Durations, Units and Costs, Status,

and Constraints sections to represent the information you want to display for that

activity.

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

246

Recalculating Assignment Costs

Recalculate assignment costs to update price per time values on activities. This ensures

that project costs reflect any updates.

To recalculate assignment costs:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select an activity.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Run Recalculate Assignment Costs.

4) In the Recalculate Assignment Costs dialog box:

a. (Optional) Select the Synchronize Overtime Factor option to synchronize the

overtime factor defined for each resource when recalculating costs.

b. Click Recalculate.

Tips

When activity dates change, run Recalculate Assignment Costs to update resource

costs based on the new dates.

These services are removed from the database based on the ASAP Cleanup Rate

your P6 administrator specifies on the Configurations tab in P6 Administrator

application. Once the time is met all ASAP jobs that have a status other than running

or delegated will be removed from the table automatically. Running and delegated

jobs will be removed if they are older than the cleanup rate or if they are older than

one day, whichever is greater.

Sending Project Data to ERP

If P6 is configured to function with an Oracle Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)

application, such as JD Edwards EnterpriseOne, and your administrator has granted you

appropriate security privileges, you can send project cost data for an approved and

baselined project to the configured ERP application for integration. The data from your

projects then becomes available within your ERP applications for assignment and

tracking.

To send project data to ERP:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Projects

247

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export

Send to ERP.

Note: Any pending changes are automatically saved.

4) In the Send Projects to ERP dialog box:

a. Select the projects you want to send to ERP.

b. Select or clear the options.

c. Click Send.

Customizing Detail Windows

You can customize which detail windows appear on the EPS or Activities pages.

To customize detail windows:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Project navigation bar, click Activities or EPS.

3) On the Activities or EPS page:

a. Select a view from the Activity or EPS View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize Detail Windows.

4) In the Customize Detail Windows dialog box:

a. In the Area section, select one of the options to determine which listing of detail

windows is available for you to customize.

b. In the Detail Window section, select or clear the options beside detail windows to

add or remove them from the page.

c. Click Save.

248

Tips

Select or clear the option beside the Detail Window title to add all or remove all the

detail windows.

Right-click a detail window tab to customize detail windows. Click Customize on the

menu to open the Customize Detail Windows dialog box, or click a detail window

name to add or remove it from the page.

Click and drag detail windows to change their order. Otherwise, the detail windows

appear in the same order that they appear in the Customize Detail Windows dialog

box.

Click Float on the detail window to convert it to a dialog box. You can then drag

this dialog box to change its position.

When you navigate to a new page, you can save or cancel the view changes you

made to the detail windows. These changes will only be saved for the view selected

in the Activity or EPS View list.

About Activity Types

One of many attributes for an activity, the Activity Type determines how the activity is

scheduled according to various scheduling scenarios:

Task Dependent: This type of activity indicates that assigned resources should be

scheduled based on the activity's calendar, rather than the calendars of the

resources.

Resource Dependent: This type of activity indicates that resources should be

scheduled based on their assigned calendars. Use this type when the activity

duration may be affected by resource availability.

Level of Effort: This type of activity indicates that it is ongoing with a duration

determined by its dependent activities. The duration is calculated based on the

schedule dates of its predecessors and successors. Administrative activities are

typically designated as Level of Effort.

Start Milestone: This type of activity indicates the beginning of a major project phase.

Activities of this type have a duration of zero (0) with no resource assignments.

Finish Milestone: This type of activity indicates the end of a major project phase.

Activities of this type have a duration of zero (0) with no resource assignments.

About Suspending and Resuming Activities

When updating progress for a project, you might need to record that the work on a

particular activity has been suspended or resumed after a period of inactivity. For

example, an activity might be suspended or resumed due to a plant shutdown. To

record this, you must enter suspend and resume dates. The suspend date is the date on

which an activity's progress has, or is planned to be, stopped. The resume date is the

date progress on an activity begins again. When you indicate a suspend or resume date,

work for the activity is considered to be suspended or resumed at the beginning of the

specified day.

Projects

249

About WBS Summary Activities

A WBS summary activity type represents a group of activities that share a common work

breakdown structure (WBS) level. The summary-level WBS activity enables the rollup of

dates for the activity group. Rollup values for a WBS summary activity are calculated

when the project is scheduled. The duration of a WBS summary activity extends from the

start of the earliest activity in a group to the finish of the latest activity.

The WBS summary activity type combines the summary capabilities of the WBS structure

with task-level attributes such as relationships, resource assignments, and notebooks. Use

this activity type to roll up dates, duration, and percent complete values for a group of

activities that share a common WBS code.

The WBS code of a WBS summary activity determines which activities comprise the

group. For example, a WBS summary activity assigned to WBS code A, would roll up

values for all activities under any subordinate WBS that relates to code A: A.1, A.1.1, A.2,

A.2.1, and so on. If the WBS summary activity in this case were assigned to WBS code A.1,

it would roll up values for activities under WBS A.1 and A.1.1, but not for those activities

under A.2 or A.2.1.

About Gantt Charts

A Gantt chart is a graphical representation of the duration and sequence of activities or

projects. It is useful for planning, scheduling, and monitoring progress against a timeline.

Working with the Activity Gantt Chart

Use the Activity Gantt chart to view the progression and relationships of activities or

projects on a timeline.

Gantt chart bars and activity dates or durations

You can easily update dates and durations by resizing or moving Gantt chart bars. When

you change bar positions in a Gantt chart, the start and finish date columns update

automatically to reflect the new bar position. After moving a Gantt bar, when you save

your changes, the remaining duration is recalculated based on the new dates and the

activity or project calendar. Because this calendar is applied when you save, if you

move but do not resize a Gantt bar, the duration might shorten or lengthen based on the

calendar's nonworktime.

Note: If you click the center of a bar and drag it along the

timescale, you will be prompted to add a Start On or After

constraint. In the Gantt chart, you can impose only a Start On or

After constraint.

Customizing the Gantt chart

You can change the progress line options or the timescale for the Gantt chart in the

Customize Activity View dialog box.

250

Viewing the Gantt chart

In the Gantt chart, a vertical blue line represents the current data date for the project.

Vertical sightlines appear at each minor increment (bottom) of the timescale. Horizontal

sightlines appear at the bottom of every fifth table row. The timescale background is

shaded to indicate nonworktime based on the global default calendar.

Activity highlight

To quickly locate the activities you need to update, you can use the Progress Spotlight

feature, which highlights all activities that should have progressed during a specific time

period. This time period is defined by the smallest increment of the current timescale

since the last data date. For example, if the current timescale is set to Month/Week,

Progress Spotlight highlights all activities that should have progressed during the week

since the data date.

Configuring Gantt Charts

Configure the Gantt chart to adjust activity beginning and finishing dates as well as

constraints.

To configure the Gantt chart:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Project navigation bar, click Activities or EPS.

3) On the Activities or EPS page, click the View menu and select Gantt Chart.

4) On the Gantt chart:

a. To resize bars, select a bar and click and drag the beginning or end of it to a new

date. (Only applicable on the Activities page.)

b. To focus the Gantt chart on a specific time interval, double-click a year, quarter,

month, week, or day on the timescale. The Gantt chart timescale will expand or

shrink to show the entire time interval.

c. To expand a specific area of the Gantt chart, click the timescale at the top of the

Gantt chart once (the pointer will become a double-headed arrow), move the

pointer to select the portion of the timescale you want to expand, and click again.

You can perform this step several times.

d. To apply a Start On or After Activity Constraint, click the middle of a bar and drag it

along the timescale. (Only applicable on the Activities page.)

5) On the Activities or EPS page, click the View menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Projects

251

Tips

To back out of a zoom, double-click the top bar of the timescale.

For more information on configuring Gantt charts, see Configuring Activity View Gantt

Chart (on page 289) or Configuring Project View Gantt Chart (on page 235).

After resizing or moving a Gantt bar, when you save your changes, the activity

remaining duration is recalculated based on the new dates and the activity's

calendar. Because the calendar for the activity is applied when you save, a date you

specified for an activity might change slightly if it occurs during calendar

nonworktime. Also, if you move, but do not resize, a Gantt bar, the duration might

shorten or lengthen based on the activity calendar's nonworktime.

If you select the option Do not show this again in the Activity Constraint dialog box, it

will not reappear until the next time you log in.

To create or configure activity relationships in the Gantt chart, see Creating Activity

Relationships (on page 314) or Configuring Activity Relationships (on page 315).

About the Activity Table

The Activity Table presents all WBS and activity information for the currently open projects

in a familiar table format. You can customize Activity Table columns, filters, grouping,

sorting, fonts, and colors.

For example, you might change the information displayed in columns to show

scheduling data, resource and cost data, user-defined fields, or any data items you

select, including calculated data. You can also format specific information to call

attention to it by using the filter, group and sort, and other table display features.

Use the Activity Table to:

Create a list of activities and activity information quickly when you don't need to see

the information graphically over time as in a Gantt chart.

Group activities that share a common attribute into hierarchies. For example, focus

on activities by resource, responsibility, or date. Once you organize activities into

groups, you can summarize or "roll up" project data to simplify their presentation.

Sort activities to arrange them in an order you specify. For example, to view activities

chronologically, you might sort them by a date field.

About Activity Networks

An Activity Network is a graphical display of activities and their logical relationships

according to the WBS. You can use an Activity Network to view activity relationship paths

and the flow of work through a project. Activity Networks also allow you to examine and

edit an activity and its predecessors and successors.

252

Working with Activities in the Activity Network

In addition to the Activity Table format, you can also view activities in an Activity

Network. You can also include your choice of WBS and activity detail windows in this

alternate viewing format.

The Activity Network maps the WBS elements and activities in your project into a series of

interconnected boxes. Arrows between boxes represent the relationships between

activities. The standard color-coded activity status icons also appear in this viewing

format: black diamonds represent milestones, and other status icons reveal when an

activity is not yet started, in progress, completed, or critical. Activity boxes

outlined in red represent critical activities while activity boxes outlined in blue are not.

Activity Network

Item Description

Activity View: Select an activity view that already includes the Activity

Network or click Activity Network.

Projects

253

Item Description

Activity Network: The arrow from a predecessor activity points to its

successor. Solid red lines between boxes represent critical relationships,

while blue lines represent non-critical relationships. Solid lines represent

driving relationships, which indicate when a predecessor activity

influences the start date of its successor. The predecessor drives the start

date of the successor activity by causing it to start earlier or later than the

scheduled date depending on the finish date of the predecessor.

Dashed lines represent non-driving relationships, which include all

predecessor and successor activity relationships: Start-to-Start,

Finish-to-Start, Start-to-Finish, and Finish-to-Finish. You can show only

driving relationships or show all relationships.

Customize Activity Network: You can customize the content and

arrangement of the boxes that represent your activities in the network. If

you select the Show progress option on the Customize Activity Network

dialog box or on the Activity Network tab of the Customize Activity View

dialog box, you can view activity progress in the Activity Network.

Completed activities are marked with an X across the activity box.

Activities in progress are marked with a slash (\) across the activity box.

Detail Windows: The same WBS and Activity detail windows are available

with any activity viewing format. In this example, the user has elected to

show the Risks detail window. When you select an Activity Network box,

the selected box displays a light blue background while the boxes that

are not selected display a gray background.

Note: P6 identifies relationships as driving when all of the following

are true: 1) the successor activity has Free Float less than or equal

to zero; 2) the activity does not have a Start On or Finish On

constraint; and, 3) the activity does not have an Actual Finish date.

About Calendar View

The Calendar View displays activities in a monthly calendar format. Bars on the calendar

represent each activity and its duration.

254

Working with Activities in Calendar View

In addition to the Activity Table format, you can also view activities in a calendar format,

including a special Day View detail window. You can also include your choice of WBS

and activity detail windows in this alternate viewing format.

The Activity Calendar Viewing Format

Item Description

Activity View: Select an activity view that already includes the Calendar

or click Calendar View.

Calendar Work Area: View project activities in the calendar by month.

Use the controls at the top to view the next or previous month. In

Calendar View, activity bars display in the color specified within the First

Bar section of the Bars tab in the Customize Activity Views dialog box, or

as the color assigned to an activity code value. Critical activities display

as red bars. Milestones display as black diamonds.

Day View Detail Window: Double-click an activity in the Calendar View to

see the activities assigned to an individual day. When more activities are

scheduled on a day than can be displayed in a day of Calendar View,

an ellipsis is displayed within the day.

Projects

255

Item Description

Detail Windows: The same WBS and activity detail windows are available

with any activity viewing format. In this example, the user has elected to

show the Trace Logic detail window below the Calendar View.

About Siblings and Children

Siblings and children represent levels in a hierarchy. Elements at the same level are

siblings, and are of equal importance. A subordinate element is a child.

About Work Breakdown Structures (WBS)

A WBS, or work breakdown structure, is a hierarchical arrangement of work activities that

divides a project into discrete levels, phases, or layers. The WBS is structured in levels of

work detail, beginning with the deliverable and separated into identifiable work

elements.

When creating a project, the project manager typically develops the WBS first. The

manager assigns documents to each WBS element, and then defines activities to

complete that element. In addition to document and activity assignments, each WBS

element can also have specific earned value calculation settings, issue assignments,

and notebook topics.

Each project has its own WBS hierarchy with the top-level WBS element equal to that of

each enterprise project structure (EPS) node or project. Each WBS element can contain

more detailed WBS levels, activities, or both.

Working with WBS Elements

If you have the required privilege, you can add, modify, or delete WBS elements.

Before you begin

To add, edit, or delete WBS elements, whether you are working with a single project or a

group of projects, you must be working in an EPS view that is organized based on all

levels of the WBS hierarchy. Either select this type of view from the EPS View list or, if

necessary, create one.

Add WBS elements

Except for the top level element of the WBS hierarchy, which represents the project, you

can add a WBS element at the same level as an existing element (sibling) or at a

subordinate level (child). At the top level of the WBS, you can add only child elements.

Modify WBS elements

256

Horizontal arrows change the level of an element in the hierarchy. Vertical arrows

change the position of an element within its current level.

Delete WBS elements

If you attempt to delete a WBS that has activities associated with it, you must specify

what you want to do with the activities:

To delete the WBS, but reassign its activities to the parent WBS, select Merge.

To delete both the WBS and its associated activities, select Delete.

Note: These two options also appear if the WBS has both activities

and planned resource allocations. However, resource allocations

cannot be merged. Regardless of the option you choose, the

planned resource allocations are deleted. For this reason, when a

WBS has planned resource allocations but no activities, these

options do not appear.

Creating a WBS

Create a work breakdown structure to divide a project into levels. You can create sibling

WBSs to represent WBSs that are hierarchically equal, or child WBSs to represent WBSs that

are subordinate to projects or other WBSs.

To create a WBS:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select a WBS or project. The WBS can act as a sibling or a parent. The project will

act as a parent.

b. Click the Actions menu:

To add a sibling, select Add Add Sibling WBS (Shift+Insert).

To add a child, select Add Add Child WBS (Ctrl+Insert).

c. Enter a name in the WBS/Activity field of the new WBS.

d. Click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Projects

257

Tips

To add, edit, or delete WBS elements, whether you are working with a single project or

a group of projects, you must be working in an activity view that is organized based

on all levels of the WBS hierarchy. This type of view is identified by the (WBS) icon.

Click the Activity View list on the Activities toolbar, and select this type of view or, if

necessary, create one. See Creating Activity Views (see "Creating Views" on page

282).

The WBS will automatically be assigned a name based upon the project or WBS you

select. For example, if the project or WBS is named WBS: Business Project 1.5, the

application will automatically name the new WBS: Business Project 1.6.

You can also right-click a WBS or project and select Add Sibling WBS or Add Child WBS

to create a WBS.

Adding a WBS from Template

You can add a predefined WBS element from a template to a project.

To add a WBS from template:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Click the View menu and select Table.

b. Click the View menu and select Group....

c. On the Customize Groupings dialog box, set the Level 1 field to WBS and the Sort

Order to Hierarchy. Click OK.

d. In the Activity Table, right-click a project or WBS element and select Add WBS

from Template.

4) In the Select WBS dialog box, select a WBS from the list of templates and click OK.

5) On the Activities page:

a. Update the name in the WBS/Activity field.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

The application automatically assigns the WBS element a name based upon the

selected WBS.

258

Configuring General WBS Information

Configure WBS information to account for any updates or changes made to the WBS.

To configure general WBS information:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select a WBS and click the General detail window.

4) In the General detail window:

a. Add the columns you need to configure to the detail window. See Showing and

Hiding Columns in a Table (see "Showing or Hiding Columns in a Table" on page

91).

b. Select an option or enter a value for each field.

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

About Baselines

A baseline is a copy, or snapshot, of project data at a given time. Because a baseline is a

static representation of a project plan, it can be used as a benchmark against which to

measure performance as a project progresses.

You can create multiple baselines to establish metrics throughout the project life cycle.

Typically, you would want to create an initial baseline once the project plan is approved,

then you would create additional baselines according to your organization's

requirements. For example, you could create new baselines at specific reporting

intervals.

Although many baselines can be created for a project, only two baselines can be used

at any given time to display and compare data. These are known as the Project Baseline

and User's Primary Baseline. The current project can also be used as the baseline, for

example, in situations where no other baseline yet exists.

The Project Baseline is a single metric for comparison that enables all members of a team

to have a shared and consistent set of data against which to evaluate project progress.

There is only one Project Baseline at any time. All pages that display summarized data

compare and display data against the Project Baseline.

The User's Primary Baseline is an optional personal baseline that is used to evaluate

project progress.

Projects

259

Related Topics

About Baseline Types ............................................................................................. 464

Working with Baselines

Before you update a schedule for the first time, you should create a baseline plan. The

simplest baseline plan is a complete copy, or snapshot, of the original schedule. This

snapshot provides a target against which you can track a project's cost, schedule, and

performance. You can save a copy of the current project to use as the baseline or you

can convert another project in the EPS hierarchy to a baseline for the current project.

To help categorize, or track, multiple baselines for a single project, you can assign each

baseline a type that reflects its purpose, for example, initial planning baseline, What-if

project baseline, customer sign-off, or midproject baseline.

Regardless of the number of baselines you store for a project, at any given time you can

only select at most two baselines for use in making comparisons in P6. The project-level

baseline is used for project/activity usage spreadsheets and profiles, as well as for

earned value calculations.

You can convert another project in the EPS hierarchy to a baseline for use in comparisons

with the current project. Before converting a project to a baseline, if you still want to

have access to the original project, you should make a copy of it. Once you convert a

project to a baseline, it is no longer available in the project hierarchy. You can restore a

baseline, making it available again as a separate project in the project hierarchy, in

order to modify it or update it.

260

Note: You must have the Edit Project Details Except

Costs/Financials and Assign Project Baseline project privileges to

set the project baseline.

Table of Working with Baseline Elements

Item Description

Define Baselines: Use Define Baselines to add, modify, convert, and

restore projects and baselines.

Projects

261

Item Description

Add Baselines: When you add a baseline, give it a name, assign it a type,

and decide if you want to make it the Project Baseline or User's Primary

Baseline for the currently selected project. Baseline designations are

made in the projects rows of the table highlighted in blue.

Convert a Project to Baseline: Save a copy of the baseline before you

convert it. Convert a project to use it as a baseline for a current project.

Restore a Baseline: Use restore a baseline to modify a baseline project.

You must first unlink a baseline from its current project by restoring it as a

separate project. You can then work with this restored baseline project as

you would any other project in the EPS.

Baseline Type: Assign baseline types to baselines to help categorize

multiple baselines for a single project. Configure the available baseline

types along with your other Enterprise Data settings.

Project Baseline: Lists the available baselines for the selected project.

Select the baseline to use as the project baseline. If a baseline does not

exist, the current project is the default value.

User's Primary Baseline: Select the user's primary baseline from the list of

available baselines. If a baseline does not exist, the current project is the

default value.

Note: You can define up to three baselines for a project in P6

Professional.

Creating Baselines

Create baselines to measure project performance.

To create a baseline:

1) Open the project or projects for which you want to create a baseline using one of the

following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and select one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and select Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Project Navigation bar, click Activities or EPS.

262

3) On the Activities or EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Define

Baselines....

4) In the Baselines dialog box:

a. Select the project to which you will add the baseline.

b. Click Add Baseline.

c. Enter a name in the Baseline Name field.

d. Select a type from the Baseline Type list.

e. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

The application automatically assigns the baseline a name based on the selected

project. For example, if you select Project A, the application will name the newly

created baseline A - B1.

Specify the default Project Baseline and User's Primary Baseline by selecting from the

list of available baselines for each project in the table on the Baselines dialog box.

Click Convert a Project to Baseline and select a project to convert a project into a

baseline.

Select a baseline and click Restore a Baseline to remove the baseline and make it a

project.

About Scheduling

Schedule is the order in which activities occur over the course of a project. A schedule

follows the constraints imposed by activity relationships and the date types to which an

activity must adhere. A good project schedule can serve as a key management tool for

making decisions and predicting whether the project will finish on time and within

budget. When there are updates to activities or resources, you can reschedule projects

to account for these changes. Regularly updating schedules and comparing them with

baseline schedules ensures that you are using resources effectively, monitoring project

costs against budget, and keeping track of actual durations and costs.

Scheduling Projects

Schedule projects to keep track of activities, actual durations, and costs. Knowing where

these stand will help you when making decisions and predictions about the project.

To schedule projects:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Projects

263

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Scheduler...

(F9).

4) In the Schedule Project dialog box:

a. Configure the options and fields.

b. Click Schedule.

Tips

See Configuring General Scheduling Options (on page 263) or Configuring Advanced

Scheduling Options (on page 264).

This schedules all open projects at the same time. If you do not have scheduling

privileges for all the open projects, Scheduler is disabled.

You can have the application schedule projects automatically. See Creating

Schedule Services (see "Creating Scheduled Services" on page 395).

These services are removed from the database based on the ASAP Cleanup Rate

your P6 administrator specifies on the Configurations tab in P6 Administrator

application. Once the time is met all ASAP jobs that have a status other than running

or delegated will be removed from the table automatically. Running and delegated

jobs will be removed if they are older than the cleanup rate or if they are older than

one day, whichever is greater.

Configuring General Scheduling Options

Configure general scheduling options to define general defaults used when scheduling

projects.

To configure general scheduling options:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Scheduler...

(F9).

4) In the Schedule Project dialog box, click Options.

5) In the Scheduling Options dialog box, click the General tab.

6) On the General tab:

264

a. Select or clear the options.

b. If your selections enable a field or list, enter a value or select an option from the list.

c. Click Save.

Tips

When multiple projects are open, the scheduling options that display by default are

the options defined for the first project listed.

These options are applied to all open projects; close or open projects to control

which projects are configured.

Activities whose float does not exceed the value you specify in the Total Float less

than or equal to field are considered critical.

Configuring Advanced Scheduling Options

Configure advanced scheduling options to define float paths.

To configure advanced scheduling options:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Scheduler...

(F9).

4) In the Schedule Project dialog box, click Options.

5) In the Scheduling Options dialog box, click the Advanced tab.

6) On the Advanced tab, select the Calculate multiple float paths option.

a. Select Total Float or Free Float.

b. Enter or select a value for each field.

c. Click Save.

Tips

These options are applied to all open projects; close or open projects to control

which projects are configured.

You can select any activity in the Display Multiple Float Paths ending with activity

dialog box; however, typically this activity is a milestone or some other major activity

in the project schedule.

To optimize performance, type a low number (10 or less) in the Specify the number of

paths to calculate field.

Projects

265

About Float

Float is a discretionary measure of a schedule's flexibility or slack. While managers are

most often concerned with overall network float variance along the critical path (Total

Float), the float time for a single activity (Free Float) is also helpful in managing day to

day operations. For example, if an activity has ten days of free float, management may

decide to assign its intended resource to another task.

Free Float is the maximum number of hours or days an activity can be delayed without

also delaying the early start dates of any immediate successor activities.

Total Float is the total maximum number of hours or days an activity can be delayed

without also delaying the project finish date or another scheduling constraint. Total Float

is calculated using the critical path method to determine the variance between early

finish and late finish dates.

About Critical Path Activities

Critical path activities are project tasks that must start and finish on time to ensure that a

project ends on schedule. A delay in any critical path activity will delay completion of

the project, unless the project plan can be adjusted so that successor tasks finish more

quickly than planned. Critical activities can be one of two types: float and longest path.

Float is a measure of schedule flexibility. The application uses the Critical Path Method

(CPM) to generate a project schedule. This method calculates four dates for each

activity in the project plan: Early Start, Late Start, Early Finish, and Late Finish. If the Early

Start date and Late Start date for an activity are the same, the activity is said to have

zero float. Activities that have zero float must start on time to prevent the schedule from

slipping. When an imposed finish date creates a schedule that is shorter than the

duration calculated to complete the activities on the critical path, a project has

negative float. A project with negative float is behind schedule.

To meet the specific requirements of your project, you can specify the float tolerance

used to identify activities as critical. For example, in some situations you might want

critical activities to be those with zero or negative float. In other situations, activities with

float of three days or less might be identified as critical.

Longest path defines the sequence of driving activities that determine the project end

date. Longest path calculation includes interproject relationships. Therefore, activities

designated as on the longest path might change depending on whether you schedule a

project alone or with its related projects. If a project has interproject relationships and

you schedule it alone, the interproject relationships are treated as scheduling constraints.

The longest path is broken when activities are no longer driven by relationships; that is,

when activity dates are driven by constraints or resource leveling.

Working with Critical Path Activities

Analyze the schedule using multiple critical float paths

266

When you schedule a project, you can choose to calculate multiple critical float paths

(sequences of activities) that affect the project schedule. By calculating multiple critical

float paths, you can determine the most critical path in the project schedule, along with

sub-critical paths that affect the completion of the most critical path.

While you can determine the critical path of activities based on total float or longest

path, these methods do not offer insight into sub-critical paths that might also affect the

project schedule. For example, if you choose to identify critical activities based on a

maximum total float threshold, P6 will identify all activities beyond the threshold as critical

even if the activities have no relationships or do not affect the project end date.

Likewise, if you choose to identify critical activities based on longest path, P6 will identify

the critical path of activities but will not identify sub-critical paths that affect the critical

path.

On the Advanced tab of the Scheduling Options dialog box, you can choose to

calculate a specific number of critical float paths based on total float or free float. You

can also choose the activity you want the float paths to end on. By choosing an activity,

you can calculate multiple float paths that affect the entire project schedule, a specific

part of the schedule, or a milestone in the schedule.

When you schedule the project, P6 identifies the most critical float path in the schedule

and assigns those activities a Float Path value of 1. Then, depending on the number of

paths you choose to calculate, P6 identifies other float paths (sub-critical float paths)

that affect the most critical float path and numbers the paths in ascending order

(beginning with 2) based on the criticality of the path.

After you schedule a project, you can display the Float Path and Float Path Order

columns in the table on the Activities page. Group by Float Path to view the activities in

each critical float path, then sort by Float Path Order to view the order in which the

activities were processed.

Note: Calculating multiple critical float paths does not affect how

you define critical activities. When you schedule a project, you

must choose to define critical activities by a maximum float time or

by longest path on the General tab of the Scheduling Options

dialog box. When you run the scheduler, activities are flagged as

critical based on this setting. If you also choose to calculate

multiple critical float paths, the float paths are calculated after the

project has been scheduled. Critical activities that are not part of a

critical float path remain tagged as critical.

Projects

267

About Schedule Preview

After modifying activity, relationship, and assignment data, but before deciding to

formally schedule a project, use the optional Schedule Preview feature to estimate

schedule changes without actually committing them to the project. Schedule Preview

automatically recalculates the schedule for activities that have changed or were

affected by a change to a relationship, resource assignment, or another activity. You

can then decide to commit these changes to the schedule or, if the preview produces

unwanted results, discard them. If Schedule Preview is disabled, changes to activities are

not reflected in the schedule until you manually calculate the schedule again.

Enabling Schedule Preview

Enable Schedule Preview to have the application automatically calculate the schedule

for a project each time you add or delete an activity relationship, change an activity

duration or relationship type, or change anything that affects schedule dates. This

feature is available on the Activities page when you open a single project; it is disabled if

more than one project is open.

To enable Schedule Preview for a project:

1) Open the project you need to schedule using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project you were working with.

Click the Projects menu and select one of the most-recently used projects.

Click the Projects menu and select Open Projects to select a project by

portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Click the Actions menu and select Run Schedule Preview to turn on

Schedule Preview mode.

b. Update one or more activities; the activities will automatically be rescheduled.

c. Click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

4) In the Schedule Project dialog box:

a. To keep the changes and schedule the project, click Yes.

b. If you do not want to keep these changes or do not want to schedule the project,

click No.

Tips

The Schedule Preview icon is disabled if more than one project is open, or if you do

not have the Schedule Project privilege for the open project.

To turn Schedule Preview mode off, click the Actions menu and select Run

Schedule Preview again so it is not highlighted on the Run menu.

268

If filters are applied to your current view, the application will prompt you to remove

the filters before the project is scheduled. You might find it helpful to create an

unfiltered activity view that you can use when you want to enable the Schedule

Preview. See Creating Views (on page 282) for help. If the removal of filters from the

current view causes you to exceed your activity limit, you will receive a message and

the feature will not be turned on. You will then need to ask your administrator to

increase the activity limit to run this feature.

About Resource Leveling

Resource leveling is an automated process that can change the start date of activities.

Level resources in your project schedule to ensure that resource demand does not

exceed resource availability. Typically, you level during the forward pass through a

project. This determines the earliest dates to schedule an activity when sufficient

resources will be available to perform the task. If forward leveling delays the project's

early finish date, a backward pass might be necessary to recalculate late dates.

During resource leveling, the resource requirements of all scheduled activities are

compared to the maximum quantity available at the time of leveling, and an activity is

only scheduled to occur when its resource demands can be met. To accomplish this,

tasks can be delayed to resolve resource availability conflicts.

Leveling Resources

Level one or more projects whenever the required shared or critical resources have

limited supply or availability or to generally keep resource usage at a constant level. For

example, when a resource has been assigned to more than one activity during the same

time period, level the projects to eliminate potential resource over-allocation. In short,

resource leveling re-distributes work among other available resources.

To level resources:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Leveler...

(Shift+F9).

4) In the Level Resources dialog box:

Projects

269

a. Select the Options tab to configure resource leveling options and set optional

leveling priorities to specify which assignments are leveled first when a conflict

exists.

b. Select the Resources tab to specify which resources should be leveled.

c. (Optional) Click Save to save your settings and close the dialog box.

d. Click Level.

Tips

You can have the application level resources automatically. See Creating Schedule

Services (see "Creating Scheduled Services" on page 395).

These services are removed from the database based on the ASAP Cleanup Rate

your P6 administrator specifies on the Configurations tab in P6 Administrator

application. Once the time is met all ASAP jobs that have a status other than running

or delegated will be removed from the table automatically. Running and delegated

jobs will be removed if they are older than the cleanup rate or if they are older than

one day, whichever is greater.

Configuring Resource Leveling Options and Priorities

Level resources in your project schedules to ensure that resource demand does not

exceed resource availability. To handle scheduling conflicts that might occur during

leveling, you can add priorities that specify which project or activity is leveled first. Before

leveling, configure the options and priorities specified in the steps below.

To configure resource leveling options and priorities:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Open Projects.

2) On the Open Projects dialog box, open the projects for which you need to configure

resource leveling options and priorities. See Opening Projects, Portfolios, or Templates

(on page 202).

3) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

4) On the EPS page, click the View menu and select Columns.

5) In the Customize Columns dialog box, expand the General section in the Available

Columns list and double-click Project Leveling Priority to add it to the Selected

Columns list and click OK.

6) On the EPS page:

a. Enter a value in the Project Leveling Priority field for each project.

Note: Enter a value from 1, the highest priority, to 100, the lowest.

The default is 10.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

7) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

8) On the Activities page, click the View menu and select Columns.

270

9) In the Customize Columns dialog box, expand the General section in the Available

Columns list and double-click Activity Leveling Priority to add it to the Selected

Columns list and click OK.

10) On the Activities page:

a. Enter a value in the Activity Leveling Priority field only for those activities that

require a specific change to their leveling priority. For example, a Normal activity

might become a Top priority.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Run Leveler... (Shift+F9).

11) In the Level Resources dialog box, click the Options tab.

12) On the Options tab:

a. Select the Consider assignments in other projects with priority equal or higher than

option and select a value from the list to include in the leveling process projects

that are not currently open, but that do fit the required priority level.

b. Select or clear the Preserve scheduled early and late dates option to determine if

the leveling process can alter activity dates or not.

If you select this option, configure the options it enables.

c. Select or clear the Recalculate assignment costs when leveling option to

determine if the application should automatically recalculate assignment costs if

they are affected by the leveling.

d. Select the Display leveling log upon completion option if you would like to see a

summary of activities delayed by leveling and exceptions made for critical

activities.

e. In the Leveling Priorities section, specify priorities that will be used to level the

activities. Add priorities in the order in which you want the application to consider

them. For each priority you add, repeat the following steps:

1. Click Add.

2. In the Field Name list, select Project Leveling Priority, Activity Leveling Priority, or

another field.

3. In the Sort Order list, select Ascending, Descending, or, for some fields,

Hierarchy.

13) In the Level Resources dialog box, click the Resources tab.

14) On the Resources tab, select an option and click Save.

Note: If you select Selected Resources, add resources to the

Selected Resources list. See Customizing Selected Lists (see

"Configuring Columns or Values" on page 91).

Tips

You cannot edit the Project Leveling Priority of a project if you do not have the

appropriate security privileges or if the project is checked out or opened exclusively by

another user.

Projects

271

About The Apply Actuals Feature

After progress is recorded by approving timesheets, entering actual data, or setting the

Auto Compute Actuals option, you can run the Apply Actuals feature to update the

schedule. The Apply Actuals feature runs as a service and schedules activities with

progress and/or activities that have the Auto Compute Actuals option set.

When you run Apply Actuals, you can move the data date. P6 schedules activities only

within the specified time period (between the current data date and new data date)

and calculates progress for those activities that are set to automatically calculate

actuals.

Working with the Apply Actuals Feature

Before you run the Apply Actuals command, decide which method you will use to

update progress, Auto Compute Actuals or P6 Progress Reporter (timesheets). If using the

Auto Compute Actuals method, ensure project managers have marked the Auto

Compute Actuals option for select activities, resources, and expenses. If using timesheets,

make sure all project resources have recorded their timesheets in P6 Progress Reporter

and those timesheets have been approved.

When you run the Apply Actuals command, both methods are invoked to determine the

actuals that are applied to a given project:

1. Auto Compute Actuals method: Actual values and dates are progressed for the

activities (and their resources and expenses) that are scheduled to occur

between the last data date and the new one. This method acts on activities,

resources, and expenses that have their Auto Compute Actuals option selected.

2. Timesheets method: Actual timesheet hours from P6 Progress Reporter are applied.

This method acts on resource assignments for resources with the Uses timesheets

option set. In P6 Progress Reporter you also have the option of updating the

following, depending on what fields are being updated:

a. Actual units

b. Actual and Remaining Units

272

c. Actual and Percent Complete

Table of Key Elements When Applying Actuals

Item Description

Uses Timesheets option: Select this option to indicate you want to allow

this resource to enter hours using timesheets provided by P6 Progress

Reporter. When applying actuals to the schedule, actual duration units

(e.g., hours) for all the selected resource's assignments will be updated

based on timesheet data.

Projects

273

Item Description

Auto Compute Actuals option: Select this option to indicate you want

actual hours to be updated for resources (shown in this example),

activities, and/or expenses when project actuals are applied.

Auto Compute Actuals option: Select this option to indicate you want

actual hours to be updated for activities (shown in this example),

resources, and/or expenses when project actuals are applied.

Apply Actuals icon: Click this toolbar icon or select it from the Actions

menu to open the Apply Actuals dialog box.

Apply Actuals dialog box: From the list of open projects, select the ones

you want actuals to be applied to. You can also apply a new data date.

Right-click and select Fill Down to apply the new date to multiple

projects. Select a method for calculating the remaining durations in the

Remaining Duration Calculation field.

Example (Labor Resource): Sarah enters her hours for the most recent timesheet period in

P6 Progress Reporter. She then submits her timesheet for review and approval. Once

approved, the timesheet hours are ready to be applied to the project. Paul, the project

manager, runs the Apply Actuals command. P6 looks for all approved timesheets that fall

within the timesheet period and that are less than or equal to the New Data Date value

Paul entered on the Apply Actuals dialog box. Only Sarah's approved actuals that fall

within the timesheet period will get posted. If she enters actuals in timesheets for 5 weeks

but the timesheet period is set for every 2 weeks, the entries that were entered for the 5th

week will not get posted until the next timesheet period. Her approved actual hours will

be applied to the Actual Units field for the appropriate Labor or Non-Labor assignment

which will then trigger the Remaining Units, Actual Duration and Percent Complete fields

to be recalculated.

Example (Non-Labor Resource): A special pump is listed as a non-labor resource for a

project. Since non-labor resources cannot enter actual hours per day in a timesheet, a

designated user defined as a resource enters a lump sum amount of hours used for the

non-labor resource per timesheet period in the Prior Actuals field. When the Apply

Actuals command runs against the project, P6 determines if a value appears in this field,

and if it does, it applies this value (with a special calculation for AIA ERP integrations) to

the Actual Units field.

Applying Actuals to a Project

Apply actuals to update progress on the currently selected projects as of the specified

data date.

To apply actuals:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

274

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Apply

Actuals.

4) In the Apply Actuals dialog box:

a. Select the projects to which you want to apply actuals.

b. Select a date from the New Data Date calendar.

c. Select an option from the Remaining Duration Calculation list.

d. Click Apply.

Tips

You can have the application apply actuals automatically. See Creating Schedule

Services (see "Creating Scheduled Services" on page 395).

These services are removed from the database based on the ASAP Cleanup Rate

your P6 administrator specifies on the Configurations tab in P6 Administrator

application. Once the time is met all ASAP jobs that have a status other than running

or delegated will be removed from the table automatically. Running and delegated

jobs will be removed if they are older than the cleanup rate or if they are older than

one day, whichever is greater.

About Updating Progress

To determine how a project is performing and what remains to be done, update its

progress weekly, daily, or as frequently as required. Updating your projects is a two-step

process. First, you record the work progress. Then, you update the project data to reflect

the reported progress; also known as applying actuals.

You can record work progress in a number of ways: you can record progress for

individual activities or resources by entering status data you have collected; you can use

P6 Progress Reporter and collect actual data from resources using timesheets; or you can

automatically calculate progress based on the schedule plan.

Working with Updating Progress

To determine how a project is performing and what remains to be done, update its

progress. Updating a project to reflect the actual work performed to date can be

achieved using any of the following methods:

Projects

275

Manually record progress: Record progress for individual activities or resources by

entering status data from each contributor. Then, run the Apply Actuals feature.

Automatically calculate progress: For individual activities, resources, and expenses,

use the convenient Auto-Compute Actuals feature to estimate work progress based

on the schedule plan. Then, run the Apply Actuals feature. Using these features, the

application calculates and applies the expected progress from the previous data

date to the new data date you specify.

After you update work progress, run the Apply Actuals feature to update actual and

remaining values as of a specified data date. To regularly update a project so that it

reflects current actual and remaining values, run the Apply Actuals process using the

Scheduled Services page.

About the Auto Compute Actuals Feature

Instead of manually recording actual progress or collecting data from P6 Progress

Reporter users, you can automatically calculate expected progress based on the

schedule plan. This technique, which uses an option called auto-compute actuals, is a

quick and convenient way to update your project.

Working with the Auto-Compute Actuals Feature

You can use the auto compute actuals option to automatically calculate expected

progress based on the schedule plan. The auto compute actuals feature is available for

individual activities, resources, or expenses. Because the auto-compute actuals option is

available for these individual elements, you can choose to selectively perform automatic

progress calculations as needed for your project.

Activities

If you select to compute actuals automatically for an activity, the application calculates

the actual dates, percent complete, remaining duration, and actual and remaining units

for all assigned resources and for the activity expenses.

Caution: If you are collecting timesheet data for an activity, you

should not choose the auto-compute actuals option. If you

auto-compute actuals for an activity, when you update the

project, actual and remaining units/costs are automatically

updated for all of the activity's assigned resources. If assigned

resources have existing actuals that they reported for the activity

through P6 Progress Reporter, their reported data is overwritten by

the auto-compute calculations.

If you want to automatically update progress for some, but not all, of an activity's

resource assignments, clear the Auto Compute Actuals option for the activity and select

the option for the specific resources you want to update automatically.

Resources

276

If you select to compute actuals automatically for a resource, the application calculates

the actual and remaining units for all of the resource's assignments.

Note: To turn on the Auto Compute Actuals option for individual

resources, you must have access to the features available through

the Resources section of P6 and have access to the specific

resources through Resource Security privileges.

Expenses

If you select to compute actuals automatically for an expense, the application will

automatically calculate the estimated expenditure for an expense, based on the

schedule plan.

Applying Auto Compute Actuals to Activities

Apply auto compute actuals to activities and P6 will calculate the actual dates, percent

complete, remaining duration, and actual and remaining units for assigned resources

and activity expenses.

To apply auto compute actuals:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

1. Click the Activity View list and select an activity view.

2. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View dialog box, click the Columns tab.

5) On the Columns tab, expand General in the Available Columns list and double-click

Auto Compute Actuals to add it to the Selected Columns list.

6) In the Customize Activity View dialog box, click OK.

7) On the Activities page:

a. Select the Auto Compute Actuals option for one or more activities.

Projects

277

Caution: If you are collecting timesheet data for an activity, you

should not select the auto compute actuals option. If you auto

compute actuals for an activity, when you update the project,

actual and remaining units/costs are automatically updated for all

of the activity's assigned resources. If assigned resources have

existing actuals that they reported for the activity through P6

Progress Reporter, their reported data is overwritten by the auto

compute calculations.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

About Store Period Performance

Using the Store Period Performance feature, you can track actual to date units and

costs. Storing period performance records actuals for the selected financial period along

with earned value and planned value, so you can track previous periods and compare

current and future trends. Users can store period performance for any predefined period

in the Financial Period dictionary.

Storing Period Performance

Use the Store Period Performance feature, to track actual units and costs to date. This

feature allows you to track previous periods and compare current and future trends.

To store period performance:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Store Period

Performance.

4) In the Store Period Performance dialog box, select projects for which you want to

store performance and click Store.

Tips

To select or clear all projects, select or clear the option at the top of the options

column.

278

These services are removed from the database based on the ASAP Cleanup Rate

your P6 administrator specifies on the Configurations tab in P6 Administrator

application. Once the time is met all ASAP jobs that have a status other than running

or delegated will be removed from the table automatically. Running and delegated

jobs will be removed if they are older than the cleanup rate or if they are older than

one day, whichever is greater.

About Importing and Exporting Data

Import/Export features allow you to bring data into P6 as well as export data to other

tools when needed.

Available Import Options:

Import Projects from other Oracle Primavera users or Microsoft Project

Import Activities

Import Resources

Import Appointments as personal non-work exception time from Microsoft Outlook

and other applications that support the iCalendar format

Available Export Options:

Export Projects

Export Activities

Export Resources

Export Resource Allocation and Cost

Export Project Data to an ERP System

Importing Activities from Excel

You can import new activities into a P6 project from a Microsoft® Excel® (.xls) file.

To import activities:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export

Import from Excel.

4) In the Import Activities dialog box:

a. Click Import File and select a file from the dialog box.

Projects

279

b. Click Select Project and select a project from the dialog box.

c. Click Import.

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

The import file must be in Microsoft® Excel® (.xls) format.

Exporting Activities to Excel

You can export activity data to a Microsoft® Excel® (.xls) file.

To export activities:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select a view from the Activity View list.

b. Configure the activity view to determine what data are exported. See Configuring

Activity Views (on page 283).

c. Click the Actions menu and select Import/Export Export to Excel.

4) In the File Download dialog box, click Open to open the Excel spreadsheet or Save to

save the file to your computer.

Tips

All data, except grouping row information, are exported as they appear in the current

activity view.

Creating Import Templates

Create a Microsoft® Excel® template to use when importing new activities into a P6

project.

To create import templates:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

280

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select an activity view from the Activity View list and configure it to include the

columns you want in the import template. See Configuring Activity View Columns

(on page 284).

b. Click the Actions menu and select Import/Export Create Import

Template.

4) In the File Download dialog box, click Open to modify the template or click Save to

save and close it.

Tips

The import template is created as a Microsoft Excel file with the default file name,

ExportDataToSpreadsheet.

When you select columns for your activity view, include Activity ID or Activity Name to

ensure that these fields are added to the import file spreadsheet. These fields are

required in the spreadsheet to ensure that activities added during import are uniquely

identified in your project when the import has completed.

About Progress Spotlight

Progress Spotlight highlights the activities that should have progressed during a specific

time period. A yellow curtain is dropped behind the activities to enable quick navigation

to the activities in this timeperiod. Use the Progress Spotlight feature (View, Progress

Spotlight) to highlight activities in the layout that have started, progressed, or finished

between the previous data date and the new data date.

About Relationship Lines

Relationship lines graphically illustrate the links between activities in Gantt charts and

Activity Networks. Whether the relationship line is connected to the beginning or end of

an activity bar determines the type of relationship. For more information on relationships,

see About Relationships (on page 314).

Projects

281

About Progress Lines

A progress line is a way to graphically trace progress on activities and see how a project

is performing with regard to its scheduled deadlines. When a progress line is drawn to the

left of the data date, the activity is behind schedule. When a progress line is drawn to the

data date, the activity is on schedule. When a progress line is drawn to the right of the

data date, the activity is ahead of schedule.

Progress lines can be either progress point lines or variance lines. As a progress point line,

the progress line shows either the remaining duration of an activity or the percent of the

activity that has been completed. Progress points are determined by calculating the

difference between current and baseline dates for each activity, or based on actual

progress determined by each activity's remaining duration or percent complete. As a

variance line, the progress line can represent an inconsistency between the planned

and actual start dates or finish dates of a task.

About Activity Views

An activity view is the visual layout of project information. For each view, you can

customize data and content-specific choices such as grouping, column selection, and

visual display options. Selecting the best view for your needs can facilitate the process of

recording project data. For example, to quickly record a range of details for new

activities, you might select a table view which maximizes the number of data columns

available. Or, to automatically apply a particular attribute, such as WBS or activity code,

to newly added activities, you could select a view which groups activities based on that

attribute.

Working with Activity Views

Using activity views

Configure the Activities page and the Customize Activity View dialog box to customize

the views that display the project and activity data you require in a format that meets

your needs. You can save these settings with the view. Save the changes if you want

them to appear the next time you work with the view. Do not save the changes if you

only want your alterations to last for the session.

The view list on the Activities toolbar provides quick and easy access to all activity views

that are available to you. While working with activities, choosing the best view for your

needs can facilitate the process of recording project data.

Choose and organize the data content of a view

You can configure the content and organization of any activity view you create. For

activity views you can access but did not create, you can review activity view settings,

but you cannot make changes.

282

Note: On the Activities page, to quickly rearrange the columns

currently displayed in a view, drag and drop them.

Your ability to perform certain actions in a view depends on the view's access class, your

role as either creator or user of the view, and your security profile. For example, if a

multi-user or global view includes cost data elements and the current user does not have

rights to view costs, the data is dashed out so it is not visible to the user.

Grouping and sorting activities

You can group all activities that contain the same value for a specific data field. For

example, if you choose to group by Project then by Primary Resource, the Activities

page groups activities in project groupings. Then, within each project group, activities

are further categorized according to primary resource. Finally, within each primary

resource group, activities are sorted based upon the sort field and sort order you specify,

for example Start Date.

In the Gantt chart, when you group activities, a summary bar appears for each group.

You can expand and collapse the group as needed to focus only on the project

Summary Schedule or on the Detailed Schedule. In the table, when you group activities,

each grouping level is identified and separated by a colored band or background.

You can elect to show rollups, or summary totals, for each group.

Creating Views

Create views to determine how information is visually displayed. These steps represent

the minimum required to create an activity or project view.

To create an activity or project view:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities or EPS.

3) On the Activities or EPS page:

a. Select a view similar to the view you want to create from the Activity or EPS View

list.

b. Click View and select Save View As.

4) In the Save View As dialog box, type a name in the Please specify the view name

field and click OK.

5) On the Activities or EPS page:

Projects

283

a. Configure the new view to have the properties you want. See Configuring Activity

Views (on page 283) or Configuring Project Views (on page 229).

b. Click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S) when you are finished.

Tips

The application will add your new view to the Users section of the Activity or EPS View list.

Configuring Activity Views

Configure activity views to define how you see activity data. Activity views affect the

filters, grouping, and columns that are applied to the Activities page. Detail window

visibility is also affected by the selected activity view.

To configure activity views:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

1. Click the Activity View list and select an activity view.

2. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View dialog box:

a. Configure the Columns tab. See Configuring Activity View Columns (on page 284).

b. Configure the Grouping tab. See Configuring Activity View Grouping (on page

284).

c. Configure the Filters tab. See Configuring Activity View Filters (on page 285).

d. Configure the Bars tab. See Configuring Activity View Bars (on page 288).

e. Configure the Gantt Chart tab. See Configuring Activity View Gantt Chart (on

page 289).

f. Configure the Activity Network tab. See Configuring Activity View Activity Network

(see "Configuring Activity Network" on page 290).

g. Configure the Access tab. See Configuring Activity View Access (on page 290).

h. Click OK.

Tips

You can modify any view you create. You can only modify multi-user and global

activity views if you have the appropriate security privileges.

284

Many of these configurations, configuring columns and filters for example, do not

require you to open the Customize Activity View dialog box. If the necessary

toolbuttons are available on your toolbar, you can use them to configure the activity

view.

Configuring Activity View Columns

Configure activity view columns to specify which columns are visible in the Gantt chart or

table.

To configure columns:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Click the Activity View list and select an activity view to configure.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View dialog box, click the Columns tab.

5) On the Columns tab:

a. In the Select the columns to display section, customize the Selected Columns list.

See Customizing Selected Lists (see "Configuring Columns or Values" on page 91).

b. In the Column Options section, select an option from each list.

c. Click OK.

Tips

You can display a maximum of 30 columns.

Click Font Picker and select a font and size from the dialog box to change the font for

a column.

You can customize activity view columns from the View menu. Click the View menu

and select Columns.

Configuring Activity View Grouping

Configure grouping to define how fields are grouped on the Activities page.

To configure activity view grouping:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Projects

285

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Click the Activity View list and select an activity view to configure.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View dialog box:

a. Click the Grouping tab and configure the grouping options in each section.

b. Click OK.

Tips

When activities are grouped, the Gantt chart on the Activities page displays a

summary bar for each group. The summary bar represents the time period from the

earliest Early Start to the latest Early Finish for the group.

Use the To Level list to select the number of hierarchy levels when grouping by a

hierarchical field. When grouping by dates, use the To Level list to select a time

interval.

The band color you select will display in the table and the Activity Network.

You can also access activity view grouping from the View menu. Click the View menu

and select Group.

Grouping bands are displayed by default when you group by a project code or EPS

even if the bands are empty. Select the Hide if empty option in the Customize View or

Customize Groupings dialog boxes to remove these bands from view.

Configuring Activity View Filters

You can modify or create filters. These filters can then be applied to several different

activity views.

To configure activity view filters:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Click the Activity View list and select an activity view to configure.

286

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View dialog box, click the Filters tab.

5) On the Filters tab:

a. You can modify a filter. See Configuring Filters (on page 234).

b. You can create a filter. See Creating Filters (on page 233).

c. You can apply filters. See Applying Filters (on page 232).

d. Click OK when finished.

Tips

The My Activities filter displays all project activities you are either assigned to as a

resource or designated as the activity owner.

For the Activities occurring within (blank) days or Activities finishing within (blank)

days filters, specify a number of days.

You can also customize activity view filters from the View menu. Click the View menu

and select Filters from the Filters submenu.

Applying Filters

Apply filters to a project to specify the data you want to display. You can add

user-created filters or select from the list of standard filters.

To apply filters:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Project navigation bar, click Activities or EPS.

3) On the Activities or EPS page:

a. Click the Activity View or EPS View list and select a view to which you will add the

filters.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View or Customize Project View dialog box, click the Filters

tab.

5) On the Filters tab:

a. Select an option from the Show matches for list.

b. In the Apply to View column, select the option for each filter you want to apply.

c. Click OK.

Projects

287

Tips

If you have Team Member module access, either assigned as a resource or activity

owner, applying the My Activities filter will have no affect on the activity list display

because your access is already restricted to your assigned and owner activities.

You can also click the View menu and select Filters from the Filters submenu to open

the Customize Filters dialog box. You can apply filters from this dialog box.

If you want to save the application of these filters to the view, click Yes in the

Primavera P6 dialog box which opens when you navigate away from the page.

Creating Filters

Create filters to to narrow activity or project information to a specific data group.

To create filters:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Project navigation bar, click Activities or EPS.

3) On the Activities or EPS page:

a. Click the Activity or EPS View list and select a view to which you will add the filters.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View or Customize Project View dialog box, click the Filters

tab.

5) On the Filters tab, click Add Filter.

6) In the Create Filter dialog box:

a. Click the Definition tab and configure the fields and lists for one or more filter

statements.

b. Click the Access tab and define user access.

c. Click OK.

Tips

To add more criteria statements, click . To remove a criteria statements, click . To

nest a criteria statement inside another, click . You can add up to ten levels of

nesting.

You can also click the View menu and select Filters from the Filters submenu to open

the Customize Filters dialog box. From this dialog box, you can create filters.

Configuring Filters

You can configure the detailed statements of a filter and who can use it.

288

To configure filters:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Project navigation bar, click Activities or EPS.

3) On the Activities or EPS page:

a. Click the Activity or EPS View list and select a view to which you will add the filters.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View or Customize Project View dialog box, select a filter

and click Modify Filter.

5) In the Modify Filter dialog box:

a. Click the Definition tab and configure the fields and lists to edit the filter

statements.

b. Click the Access tab, and select an access option.

c. Click OK.

Tips

You can not edit Standard Filters.

To add more filter statements to the Definition tab, click . To remove a filter, click .

To nest a criteria statement inside another, click . You can add up to ten levels of

nesting.

You can also click the View menu and select Filters from the Filters submenu to open

the Customize Filters dialog box. You can configure filters from this dialog box.

Configuring Activity View Bars

Configure bars to represent different items on the timeline in the Gantt chart and the

Calendar View.

To configure activity view bars:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

Projects

289

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Click the Activity View list and select an activity view to configure.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View dialog box, click the Bars tab.

5) On the Bars tab, configure the bar options in each section and click OK.

Tips

The Color option you select determines how the bar will be represented, whether by

color or code.

You can configure options for up to three bars.

A Late bar does not display if the project has not been scheduled.

The Progress bar is blue.

Select the Show Critical option to represent critical activities with a red bar instead of

the color you selected for the Current bar.

You might find it helpful to vary the position of the label on the Current bar.

Click Font Picker and select a font and size from the dialog box to change the font for

a bar.

You can also customize activity view bars from the View menu. Click Gantt Chart

Options on the View menu and click the Bars tab.

Configuring Activity View Gantt Chart

Configure Gantt chart options to determine how the chart will display.

To configure Gantt chart options:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Click the Activity View list and select an activity view to configure

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View dialog box:

a. Click the Gantt Chart tab and configure the Gantt chart options in each section.

b. Click OK.

290

Tips

Bar necking extends down to the day.

You can also select Gantt Chart Options on the View menu and click the Gantt Chart

tab in the Customize Gantt Chart Options dialog box to configure Gantt charts.

Configuring Activity Network

Configure an Activity Network to determine how the network displays in the activity view.

To configure an Activity Network:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Click the Activity View list and select an activity view to configure.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View dialog box, click the Activity Network tab.

5) On the Activity Network tab, configure the options, fields, and level and click OK.

Tips

Select the Split Row option in the Activity Box section to divide a row into two fields.

The Second Field list for that row is disabled until the Split Row option is selected.

You can also customize Activity Network options from the View menu. In the Activity

Network view, select Activity Network Options on the View menu.

Configuring Activity View Access

Configure activity view access to define which users will have access to a particular

view.

To configure access:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

Projects

291

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Click the Activity View list and select an activity view to configure.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View dialog box, click the Access tab.

5) On the Access tab, select one of the access options and click OK.

Tips

Unless you specify otherwise, Current User is the default access.

If you select List of Users, search for the user, or select users from the Available Users

list.

Sending E-Mail of an Activity View

You can send e-mail of an activity view to distribute details about activities or projects.

To send e-mail of an activity view:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the View menu and select E-mail View.

4) In the E-mail View dialog box:

a. Edit the recipient list, message, and subject as needed.

b. Click Send E-mail.

Tips

You must have an e-mail address listed in you user profile to send an e-mail.

About Bars

Bars are used in different views to graphically represent the project timeline. They can

symbolize milestones, activities, or projects. Available bar types are:

Current bar: Spans the early remaining/actual start to the early remaining/actual

finish for each activity, and indicates how the schedule is progressing according to

the original plan.

292

Float bar: Shows the total amount of time that an activity can be delayed without

delaying completion of a project.

Free Float bar: Shows the amount of time that an activity can be delayed without

causing subsequent activities to be delayed.

Late bar: Shows the late start to the late finish of an activity.

Percent Complete bar: Shows the completion percentage of an activity.

Plan bar: Shows the forecasted status of planned activities, and is used for simulating

the outcome of the project schedule as part of project planning.

Primary baseline bar: Shows the primary baseline start and finish dates of an activity,

and indicates how the schedule is progressing according to the original plan.

Project baseline bar: Shows the project baseline start and finish dates of an activity,

and indicates how the schedule is progressing according to the original plan.

About Columns (Fields)

Fields hold data. They generally either allow you to enter values or just display the field's

current value (called a read-only field).

Pages with tables often permit you to configure the fields that make up the columns of

the table. See Showing or Hiding Columns in a Table (on page 91).

About Filters

A filter is a set of instructions that determines which data display in the current window.

You can create filters or use the predefined filters available in the application. There are

three types of filters: user-defined, global, or standard. User-defined filters can be

created for multiple users or only the creator of the filter. Global filters are available to all

users for all projects. Standard filters are also available to all users for all projects;

however, users cannot modify standard filters. You can apply a combination of filters to

narrow the data selection even further.

About Grouping and Sorting

To simplify the display of complex tables of data, you can group rows of similar data and

sort the grouped bands as well as the data under them. Grouping helps you block

distracting data and focus only on the information you need. It also permits you to

collapse and expand hierarchical arrangements of your data rather than navigate large

flat lists.

Projects

293

About Resource Assignments

The Resources Assignments area enables you to view a customized list of resource or role

assignments based on the filters you assign to the view. Using this view, you can analyze

assignment unit and cost values and make any necessary modifications to the

assignment data. You can also view unit and cost values in a spreadsheet based on a

specified timescale using the Usage spreadsheet. In addition, you can extend your

customized view by displaying the Gantt chart, which is a graphical display of the start

and end dates for the resource assignments.

Assigning Activity Resources

Assign resources to work on an activity.

To assign a resource to an activity:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select the activity to which you want to assign resources and

click the Assignments detail window.

4) In the Assignments detail window, click Assign Resource and Save (Ctrl+Alt+R).

5) In the Select Resource dialog box, assign resources and click Close.

Tips:

When assigning resources to activities, the list of available resources includes only the

resources that belong to your access node, based on resource access, and

resources who are currently assigned to the project.

Activity resource assignments are displayed in the Resource Names column of the

table.

When you assign a resource to an activity that does not have any resource

assignments, the resource is identified as the primary resource. If you subsequently

assign more resources to the same activity, you can change the primary resource

assignment for the activity. To change the primary resource, click Customize Columns

in the Assignments detail window, and select Primary Resource if not already

selected. Select the Primary Resource option for one of the resources.

294

You can also assign resources to an activity from the Resources dialog box on the

Team Usage page, the Resources dialog box on the Role Usage tab of the Analysis

page, the Open Requests for Resources portlet of the Dashboards page, or the

Activities page Actions menu. To assign resources from the Actions menu on the

Activities page, select an activity and click Assign Resource on the Actions menu.

Configuring Activity Resources

You can configure resource information for activities, including the Planned Units/Time,

Proficiency, or Rate Type for a resource.

To configure activity resources:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Assignments detail window.

4) In the Assignments detail window:

a. Select a resource.

b. Add the columns you need to configure to the detail window. See Showing and

Hiding Columns in a Table (see "Showing or Hiding Columns in a Table" on page

91).

c. Select an option or enter a value for each field.

d. Click Apply Changes (Ctrl+S).

Tips

You can also configure activity resources from the Open Requests for Resources portlet

of the Dashboards page.

Requesting Resources for Activities

When planning for an activity you can assign a role to the activity and replace that role

with the appropriate resource at a later time. To assign a role with specific search criteria,

including role proficiency, resource name, and resource code, use the Request

Resources feature.

To request resources:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Projects

295

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Assignments detail window.

4) In the Assignments detail window, click Request Resources (Ctrl+Alt+Q).

5) In the Open a request for a resource dialog box, enter criteria for the resource and

click Save.

Tips

The list of available resources includes only the resources you have access to, based

on resource security, and current project resources.

You must specify a Primary Role.

The resource request criteria is stored and available when assigning resources to roles

using the Open Request for Resource portlet from Dashboards or the Role Usage tab

from the Resources Analysis page.

Specifying Resource Assignment Rates

You can set rate information for resources or roles.

To specify resource assignment rates:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity in the table and click the Assignments detail

window.

4) In the Assignments detail window:

a. Add the Rate Type and Rate Source columns. See Showing and Hiding Columns in

a Table (see "Showing or Hiding Columns in a Table" on page 91).

b. Select an option for the type and source.

c. Click Apply Changes (Ctrl+S).

296

Tips

When you save your changes, costs for the assignment are recalculated based on the

new rate: Cost equals Units times Price/Unit. You can add the Price/Unit column to the

detail window to view the price used. To manually specify a price/unit, select Override in

the Rate Source field and type a value in the Price/Unit field.

Adding Activity Resource Estimates

You can plan resource usage by adding resource estimates to activities.

To add resource estimates:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Assignments detail window.

4) In the Assignments detail window:

a. Assign a resource or role to the selected activity. See Assigning Activity Resources

(on page 293) or Assigning Activity Roles (on page 297).

b. Add the Planned Units/Time, Planned Units, Planned Cost, and Planned Duration

columns to the detail window. See Showing and Hiding Columns in a Table (see

"Showing or Hiding Columns in a Table" on page 91).

c. Select an option or enter a value for each field.

d. Click Apply Changes (Ctrl+S).

About the Recalculate Assignment Costs Feature

Whenever any of the five (5) possible price per unit values changes for a resource or role

already assigned to activities, run the Recalculate Assignment Costs feature. This feature

recalculates any changed assignment costs.

You should also run this feature during sheduling or leveling because dates will change

and resources might be using time varying rates. This means their activities can shift into

periods with different effective prices. Therefore, the costs would have to be

recalculated.

The Recalculate Assignment Costs feature only applies to currently open projects. This

provides project managers with control over recalculating costs only when prices have

changed.

Projects

297

When another user changes prices for resources or roles, P6 will display a message

indicating that the Recalculate Assignment Costs feature should be run in order for

project assignments to use the new values.

This feature can be run at any time from the Activities page or scheduled as a service.

About Resources

A resource is any quantifiable item in limited supply and of sufficient value to justify

tracking and assigning to specific activities for a project. Resources include general or

specialized labor, non-labor items such as equipment, and material items such as bricks.

Resources perform roles, if defined. Resources are indirectly assigned to activities by first

planning the role required. It is also possible to directly assign resources to activities. For

example, Chris, a level 2 contractor with the confirmed skills and status, is directly

assigned to activity 01. However, a technician level 4 role is assigned to activity 02. The

project will proceed while management determines the best available resource to fulfill

this role.

About Roles

Roles represent personnel job titles or skills needed to execute projects. Architect,

general laborer, quality assurance tester, and engineer are all examples of possible roles.

You can create a standard set of roles that you then assign to labor and non-labor

resources and activities for all projects in the organization. You can establish an unlimited

number of roles and organize them in a hierarchy for easier management and

assignment. The set of roles you assign to an activity defines the activity’s skill

requirements. You can also define multiple price per unit rates and unit per time limits for

each role to accurately plan future costs and allocation.

You can assign one or more roles to individual resources. When you assign roles to a

resource, you also indicate their proficiency in that role and identify which role is their

primary role. A primary role is the main role the resource is currently performing. The

proficiency level describes the resource's skill level in that role. For example, Joe is a

resource and fills the role of both software engineer and manager. He has been a

software engineer for 20 years and is 1 - Master in that role; however, his primary role is

manager, which he has been for 5 years and his proficiency level is 3- Skilled.

Assign roles to activities as you would resources during project schedule and cost

planning. When your plans are finalized, you can replace roles with resources, based on

each activity’s role and skill requirements.

Assigning Activity Roles

Assign roles to an activity to show which roles can perform the work required by that

activity.

To assign a role to an activity:

298

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Assignments detail window.

4) In the Assignments detail window, click Assign Role and Save (Ctrl+Alt+O).

5) In the Select Role dialog box, assign roles and click Close.

Tips

You can also assign roles from the Resources section, the Open Requests for Resources

portlet of the Dashboards page, or the Activities page Actions menu. To assign roles from

the Actions menu of the Activities page, select an activity and click Assign Role on the

Actions menu.

Configuring Activity Roles

You can configure role information for activities.

To configure activity roles:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Assignments detail window.

4) In the Assignments detail window:

a. Select a role.

b. Add the columns you need to configure to the detail window. See Showing and

Hiding Columns in a Table (see "Showing or Hiding Columns in a Table" on page

91).

c. Select an option or enter a value for each field.

5) In the Assignments detail window, click Apply Changes (Ctrl+S).

Projects

299

Tips

You can also configure activity roles from the Open Requests for Resources portlet of the

Dashboards page.

Assigning Resource Curves to Resource or Role Assignments from the Activities Page

You can assign a resource distribution curve to any resource or role assignment on

activities with a duration type of Fixed Duration and Units/Time or Fixed Duration & Units.

Resource usage and costs are distributed evenly during an activity unless you specify

nonlinear distribution using curves.

To assign a resource curve:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, to set the Duration Type to Fixed Duration and Units/Time or

Fixed Duration & Units, click the View menu and select Columns. (If the Duration

Type is already set, select an activity and go to step 5.b.)

4) In the Customize Columns dialog box:

a. Expand General in the Available Columns section.

b. Double-click Duration Type.

c. Click OK.

5) On the Activities page:

a. Select Fixed Duration and Units/Time or Fixed Duration & Units from the Duration

Type list for the activity whose curve you want to configure.

b. Click the Assignments detail window.

Note: The activity must have a resource or role assigned to it. See

Assigning Activity Resources (on page 293) or Assigning Activity

Roles (on page 297).

6) In the Assignments detail window, double-click the Curve field, and click .

7) In the Select Curves dialog box, select a curve and click OK.

8) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

300

Tips

If you assign a resource curve to an assignment with a manual curve, the

manually-entered future period values will be overwritten.

Resource curves do not support expenses. The Accrual Type will continue to spread

the expenses.

If the Curve column is not available, add it to the detail window. See Showing and

Hiding Columns in a Table (see "Showing or Hiding Columns in a Table" on page 91).

You can also assign resource curves to resource or role assignments from the

Resources Assignments page. See Assigning Resource Curves to Resource or Role

Assignments from the Resources Assignments Page (on page 419).

About Activity Codes

Activity codes enable you to categorize activities into logical groups based on your

organization's criteria. An activity code can be one of three types: Global, EPS, or

Project. Global activity codes organize activities across all projects in an organization.

EPS activity codes organize activities within a specific branch or node of the enterprise

project structure (EPS). Project activity codes categorize activities based on specific

features within a project.

Activity codes represent broad categories of information, a department or project

manager for instance. You can create multiple activity codes according to specific

categories, then assign different values for each code. For example, assume your

organization has many departments and you want to review activities within each

department. You can first create an activity code "department," then assign different

values such as quality assurance, finance, and sales. You can then associate activities

with specific departments.

A key characteristic of an activity code as opposed to an activity user defined field is

that activity codes will only allow entries from a predefined list of values. After you create

activity codes, users can assign activity code values to activities to group, sort, and filter

project data based on these values.

Creating Activity Code Values for Activities

You can quickly create activity code values in the Activity Codes detail window of the

Activities page.

To create activity code values in the Activity Codes detail window:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

Projects

301

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Codes detail window.

4) In the Codes detail window, click Assign (Insert).

5) In the Select Code Value dialog box:

a. Select the Global, EPS, or Project option for a list of activity codes.

b. Select an activity code to which you will add the value.

c. Click Add Code Value.

6) In the Add Activity Code Value dialog box, enter a value in each field and click

Create.

7) In the Select Code Value dialog box:

Assign the value to the selected activity and click Close.

Or

Click Close.

8) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

In the Code Value field, you must enter a value that is unique across the project.

You can also create activity code values from the Enterprise Project Data dialog box

or the Administer menu, see Creating Activity Code Values (on page 488).

Assigning Activity Code Values to Activities

Assign activity code values to selected activities to group and filter data.

To assign activity code values:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Codes detail window.

4) In the Codes detail window, click Assign (Insert).

5) In the Select Code Value dialog box, assign code values and click Close.

6) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

302

About Documents

A document is a file or work product that you create and add to your Primavera work

environment. The application provides document management capabilities that enable

you to store, organize, manage, and access documents in a secure environment. The

available document management functionality depends on your configuration. When

the content repository is configured, the complete set of advanced document

management capabilities is available, including check in, check out, and document

reviews. When the content repository is not configured, a limited set of document

management features is available, such as adding, deleting, and relating items to

documents.

When a configured content repository is installed, P6 supports up to three general classes

of documents: project, private, and workgroup. Project documents are documents that

you relate to a project via P6. Only users with the necessary securities can edit project

documents. Private documents are documents that you add to P6 for your own use.

Private documents are not associated with any project and are available only to you.

Workgroup documents are documents that are added to a specific project workgroup.

These documents are available only to members of the workgroup.

When the content repository is not configured for use with P6, you can perform limited

actions on project documents only, and private and workgroup documents are not

available.

Assigning Documents to Activities

You can assign relevant documents to activities, projects, and WBSs.

To assign documents:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Documents detail window.

Note: To assign a document to a project or WBS, select a project or

WBS in place of an activity.

4) In the Documents detail window, click Assign (Insert).

5) In the Select Document dialog box, assign documents and click Close.

6) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Projects

303

About Expenses

Expenses are non-resource costs associated with a project and assigned to a project’s

activities. An expense is typically a one-time expenditure for non-reusable items.

Expenses are project-specific and not time-based. Some examples include facilities,

travel, consulting, and training. Each expense has an actual, remaining, and at

completion value for both cost and units that is either budgeted or planned.

Expense categories classify and standardize expenses, and organize and maintain your

expense information.

Creating Expenses

Create expenses to show costs that you expect each activity to accrue.

To create expenses:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Expenses detail window.

4) In the Expenses detail window:

a. Click Add Expense Item (Insert).

b. Enter a name in the Expense Item field.

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Configuring Expenses

Configure expenses to update costs associated with an activity.

To configure expenses:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

304

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Expenses detail window.

4) In the Expenses detail window:

a. Select an expense.

b. Add the columns you need to configure to the detail window. See Showing and

Hiding Columns in a Table (see "Showing or Hiding Columns in a Table" on page

91).

c. Select an option or enter a value for each field.

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Configuring Auto Compute Actuals for Expenses

You can configure auto compute actuals for activity expenses.

To configure auto compute actuals:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Expenses detail window.

4) In the Expenses detail window:

a. Select an expense item.

b. Select the Auto Compute Actuals option in the Auto Compute Actuals column.

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

If the Auto Compute Actuals column is not displayed, add it to the detail window. See

Showing and Hiding Columns in a Table (see "Showing or Hiding Columns in a Table" on

page 91).

About Feedback

Feedback is the exchange of activity-specific notes between team members. Notes are

added to activities either to or from the resource.

Adding Feedback

Add feedback to or from an activity resource for selected activities.

To add feedback:

Projects

305

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select the activity about which you want to add feedback

and click the Feedback detail window.

4) In the Feedback detail window:

If you are the resource, click the field under Feedback from Resources, enter

feedback, and click Add.

If you are not the resource, click the field under Notes to Resources, enter

feedback, and click Add.

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

Once added, feedback cannot be modified.

Anyone with rights to view the activity can read the feedback.

Adding the New Feedback Column

Add the New Feedback column to act as a visual cue when there are new notes in the

Feedback detail window.

To add the feature feature:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the View menu and select Columns.

4) In the Customize Columns dialog box:

a. Expand Timesheet Feedback in the Available Columns list and double-click New

Feedback to add it to the Selected Columns list.

b. Click OK.

306

Acknowledging Feedback

Acknowledge feedback you receive to show that you have seen comments about an

activity. This task assumes that you have added the feedback feature to your table or

Gantt chart. See Adding the New Feedback Column (on page 305).

To acknowledge feedback:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select the activity with new feedback. (The new New Feedback column option

will be selected.)

b. Click the Feedback detail window to read and respond to the feedback. See

Adding Feedback (on page 304).

c. Clear the option to acknowledge you have read the feedback.

d. Click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

The message is displayed with the timestamp when the note was sent and the name of

the sender.

About Status

Status is a brief representation of an activity's condition at any given time. Status tracks

the duration, beginning and ending dates, percent complete, units and costs, and

constraints associated with an activity.

Configuring Status

Configure status to define percent complete and start and finish dates.

To configure status:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Projects

307

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Status detail window.

4) In the Status detail window, in the Status section:

a. Select or clear the Started and Finished options.

b. If you select an option, click and select a date from the calendar.

c. In the Status section, enter a percentage in the Activity % Complete field.

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Configuring Status Units and Costs

Configure status units and costs to define the units and cost for a selected activity.

To configure status units and costs:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) , select an activity and click the Status detail window.

4) In the Status detail window, in the Units and Costs section:

a. Select an option from the list.

b. Enter a value with a time unit abbreviation in each field.

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

You can only enter At Completion Cost/Units for activities that are not started or in

progress.

The application will calculate the values for Remaining Cost/Units and Actual

Cost/Units.

308

About Duration Types

Duration type is the basis for estimating the selected activity's completion time. It

determines whether the schedule, resource availability, or costs are most important

when updating activities. The duration type applies only when you have resources

assigned to the activity. Select one of the following duration types based on which factor

is most important (least flexible) in planning your project: Fixed Duration & Units/Time,

Fixed Duration & Units, Fixed Units/Time, or Fixed Units.

Fixed Duration & Units/Time or Fixed Duration & Units: Indicate that the schedule is a

limiting factor in your project. The activity's duration does not change regardless of the

number of resources assigned when you modify or update activities. You usually select

one of these duration types when you are using task-dependent activities. When you

update the remaining duration for the activity, you can select to calculate either the

remaining units or the units per timeperiod. The duration type enables you to control

which variables of an equation are calculated when you change a value.

If you want to recalculate the remaining units and keep the units/time for the resource

constant, select Fixed Duration & Units/Time. The application uses the equation:

Remaining Units = Units/Time x Remaining Duration. For example, if a resource is assigned

to an activity for 8 hours/day for 5 days, the remaining units or work is calculated as 40

hours.

If instead you want to keep the remaining units constant and recalculate the units/time,

select Fixed Duration & Units. The application uses the equation: Units/Time = Remaining

Units/Remaining Duration. For example, if a resource is assigned to work 40 hours in 5

days, the units/time is calculated as 8 hours/day.

Fixed Units/Time: Indicates that resource availability is the most critical aspect of your

project. In this case, the units/time or rate of the resource remains constant, even if the

activity's duration or work effort changes. You most often use this duration type when you

are planning resource-dependent activities.

Fixed Units: Indicates that the budget (units or cost) is a limiting factor; that is, the total

amount of work is fixed. When you update activities, the work effort required to complete

the activity does not change, even if the activity's duration or the resource rate changes.

Typically, you would use this type in conjunction with resource-dependent activities.

Increasing resources can decrease the activity duration.

Working with Duration Types

Duration type options

Duration type determines whether the schedule, resource availability, or cost is most

inflexible when calculations are performed to reflect activity progress. Duration type

affects update calculations only when resources are assigned to an activity.

Choose a duration type based on which factor is the most important, or least flexible, in

planning your project.

Projects

309

If schedule is most important, choose Fixed Duration and Units/Time or Fixed

Duration and Units.

If resource availability is most important, choose Fixed Units/Time.

If total work effort or fixed costs are most important, choose Fixed Units.

Configuring Status Durations

Configure status durations to define time assignments for activities.

To configure status durations:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) , select an activity and click the Status detail window.

4) In the Status detail window, in the Durations section, enter a value with a time unit

abbreviation in each field.

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

You can only enter At Completion Duration for activities that are not started or in

progress.

The application will calculate the values for Remaining Duration and Actual Duration.

Durations are rounded to the nearest half hour.

You can quickly and easily change durations in the Gantt chart by dragging and

resizing activity bars. The application will automatically update the activity durations

for you.

About Constraints

Constraints are recognized real-world restrictions that affect project performance. Any

factor that potentially delays when an activity can be scheduled is a constraint. The

most typical constraints are date restrictions. Constraints can apply to the entire project

or only to individual activities and can even reflect external project requirements that

cannot be built into the network logic. Some examples of constraints are: must finish by

(project-level constraint) and start on or after (activity-level constraint).

310

Working with Activity Constraints

P6 supports the following types of activity constraints:

Start On: Imposes the specific start date you select. The Start On constraint can delay an

activity's early start or move forward an activity's late start to satisfy the constraint date.

Start On or Before: Defines the latest date an activity can start. This constraint only affects

late dates and can decrease total float. When calculating a schedule, P6 imposes the

start on or before constraint in the backward pass only if the calculated late start date

will be later than the imposed date.

Start On or After: Defines the earliest date an activity can begin. This constraint affects

only early dates. When calculating a schedule, P6 imposes the start on or after constraint

in the forward pass only if the calculated early start date will be earlier than the imposed

date.

Finish On: Imposes the specific finish date you select. The Finish On constraint can delay

an activity's early finish or move forward an activity's late finish to satisfy the constraint

date.

Finish On or Before: Defines the latest time an activity can finish. The finish on or before

constraint affects only late dates.

Finish On or After: Defines the earliest date an activity can finish. The finish on or after

constraint reduces float to coordinate parallel activities, ensuring that the finish of an

activity is not scheduled before the specified date. It is usually applied to activities with

few predecessors that must finish before the next phase of a project.

As Late As Possible: Imposes a restriction on an activity with positive float to allow it to

start as late as possible without delaying its successors. When calculating a schedule, P6

sets the activity's early dates as late as possible without affecting successor activities. This

option disables the calendar icon.

Mandatory Start: Imposes the early and late start dates you select. P6 uses the

mandatory early start date regardless of its effect on network logic. A mandatory early

start date could affect the late dates for all activities that lead to the constrained activity

and all early dates for the activities that lead from the constrained activity.

Mandatory Finish: Imposes the early and late finish dates you select. P6 uses the

mandatory finish date regardless of its effect on network logic. This constraint affects the

late dates for all activities that lead to the constrained activity and all early dates for the

activities that lead from the constrained activity.

Configuring Status Constraints

Configure status constraints to show restrictions on project performance.

To configure status constraints:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Projects

311

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) , select an activity and click the Status detail window.

4) In the Status detail window, in the Constraints section:

a. Select a constraint from the Primary Constraint list.

b. Click the Primary Constraint and select a date from the calendar.

Note: You may add a Secondary Constraint.

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

When mandatory constraints are placed on calendar nonworktime, the early date is

moved forward to the next valid worktime and the late date is moved back (earlier) to

the first valid worktime. This can cause negative float in the schedule.

About Issues

Issues are perceived problems within a schedule that require attention or corrective

action. When you create them in the Activities section, you can associate them with a

single project or workgroup and assign them to a responsible manager in the OBS for

follow-up based on priority. You can also associate issues with a single activity. When

adding new issues to a project or workgroup, you can control the information you

capture for each new issue. You can choose to receive e-mail notifications when new

issues of a certain priority are added, when existing issues are modified, or when issues

are assigned a specific issue code.

You can also think of issues as impediments, action items, open items, punch lists, logs, or

concerns. Over time, if you do not resolve or close open issues or issues placed on hold,

they can become risks.

Issue codes enable you to organize and categorize issues in a way that is meaningful to

you. For example, you can create an issue code titled Severity, and subsequently create

issue code values: High, Medium, and Low. You can assign each of these code values to

issues across multiple projects, enabling you to categorize each issue according to how

severe it is. Similarly, you can create codes to categorize issues by responsibility,

subproject, or any other classification you require to organize issues. Assigning issue

codes enables you to quickly search for and view issues according to specific criteria.

312

Creating Activity Issues

Create activity issues to identify problems that must be addressed before a project can

be completed.

To create activity issues:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Issues detail window.

Note: To create a project or WBS issue, select a project or WBS in

place of an activity.

4) In the Issues detail window:

a. Click Add Issue (Insert).

b. Enter or select a value for the Issue Name, Priority, Status, and Responsible

Manager fields.

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips:

You cannot add an issue to a project that is checked out or locked.

The application automatically names the issue New Issue. Update the issue so it has a

unique name.

Configuring Activity Issues

Configure activity issues to account for changes since the last update on the issue.

To configure activity issues:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

Projects

313

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Issues detail window.

Note: To configure a project or WBS issue, select a project or WBS in

place of an activity.

4) In the Issues detail window:

a. Select an issue.

b. Add the columns you need to configure to the detail window. See Showing and

Hiding Columns in a Table (see "Showing or Hiding Columns in a Table" on page

91).

c. Select an option or enter a value for each field.

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

About Notebooks

A notebook is another name for a log or binder of electronic details about an activity,

WBS, project, or EPS element. All the notes users enter or paste into the notebook,

including e-mail messages, web links, tables, and other entries, share a single common

theme called a notebook topic. See About Notebook Topics (on page 238).

Working with Notebooks

Notebook topics are created by the administrator on the Enterprise Data page of the

Administer menu. These topics are then assigned to activity, WBS, project, or EPS node

notebooks.

About Notebook Topics

Notebook topics help multiple users apply a common theme or label to shared

information about an activity, WBS, project, or EPS element such as its purpose,

completion instructions, or other helpful notes. For example, you might place an e-mail

message, a web link, a table of observations, and a series of text notes into a notebook

topic called Budget Recommendations to capture the ongoing cost impacts of a

recurring project.

Assigning Notebook Topics

Depending on the page you are working on, you can assign notebook topics to a

selected project or activity.

To assign a notebook topic to a project:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

314

3) On the EPS page, select a project or EPS node and click the Notebooks detail

window.

4) In the Notebooks detail window, click Assign (Insert).

5) In the Select Notebook Topic dialog box, select a notebook topic, click Assign, then

Close.

6) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

You can also create notebook topic descriptions. In the Notebooks detail window,

double-click the Description field and click (browse). Enter a description in the

dialog box.

You can also assign notebook topics to activities from the Notebooks detail window

of the Activities page or the Activity Details page of the Open Requests for Resources

portlet of the Dashboards page.

About Relationships

A relationship defines how an activity relates to the start or finish of another activity or

assignment. An activity can have as many relationships as necessary to model the work

that must be done. These relationships are used together with activity durations to

determine schedule dates. Relationships can also exist between activities in different

projects; this type of relationship is referred to as an external relationship.

Activities that are dependent on one another are known as predecessors and

successors, where the first activity is the predecessor and the second is the successor.

Between these two types of activities, there are four possible relationship types:

Finish to Start - The successor activity cannot start until its predecessor finishes.

Finish to Finish - The successor activity cannot finish until its predecessor finishes.

Start to Start - The successor activity cannot start until its predecessor starts.

Start to Finish - The successor activity cannot finish until its predecessor starts.

A permitted modification to these logical relationships is called lag. Lag values can be

positive numbers (a delay, slower, deceleration of progress) or negative numbers (lead

time, faster, acceleration of progress). For example, in a Finish to Start relationship, if you

specify a ten-day lag (+10), the successor activity cannot start until ten days after the

predecessor has finished. Likewise, if you specify a negative ten-day lag (–10), the

successor activity could start ten days before the related predecessor activity finishes.

Creating Activity Relationships

Create activity relationships to show interdependencies between activities.

To create an activity relationship:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Projects

315

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Click the View menu and select Gantt Chart.

b. Click the View menu and select Show Relationship Lines.

Note: If Hide Relationship Lines is displayed in the View menu,

the lines are already set to show. Exit the menu and return to the

Gantt chart.

c. Right-click the bar to which you want to assign a relationship and click Create

Relationship.

Note: Your cursor will become a cross.

d. With the cross, click the beginning or end of the bar and then click the beginning

or end of the bar you want to relate.

Note: Where you click each bar determines the type of

relationship. See About Relationships (on page 314).

e. Click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

You can scroll through the Gantt chart while your cursor is a cross to find a related bar.

To delete a relationship, right-click the relationship line and select Delete Relationship.

If multiple projects are open, you can create external relationships.

You can also view or configure existing predecessor or successor relationships, from

the Predecessors or Successors detail windows.

Configuring Activity Relationships

Configure activity relationships to adjust interdependencies between different activities.

To configure activity relationships:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

316

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Click the View and select Gantt Chart.

b. Click the View menu and select Show Relationship Lines.

Note: If Hide Relationship Lines is displayed in the View menu,

the lines are already set to show. Exit the menu and return to the

Gantt chart.

c. Right-click the relationship line of the relationship you want to configure and click

Edit Relationship.

4) In the Edit Relationship dialog box, configure the relationship type and lag and click

OK.

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

You can also configure relationships from the Predecessor and Successor detail

windows. See Configuring Predecessor Relationships (on page 317) or Configuring

Successor Relationships (on page 318).

Assigning Predecessor Relationships

You can assign predecessor relationships to the activities in a project.

To assign a predecessor relationship:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity to which you want to assign a predecessor

and click the Predecessors detail window.

4) In the Predecessors detail window, click Assign (Insert).

5) In the Select Predecessor Activity dialog box, assign activities and click Close.

Projects

317

6) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

You can assign relationships to multiple activities at one time. Select multiple activities

using Ctrl+click or Shift+click. Right-click the selected activities and select Link

Selected Activities. Based on their sequence in the view, the application creates

Finish to Start relationships between selected activities. That is, a Finish to Start

relationship is applied between the first and second activity, between the second

and third activity, and so on. If an activity pair already has an Finish to Start

relationship, the application tries, in turn, to apply each of the other relationship

types, if possible. Otherwise, no relationship is applied to the pair.

When selecting a predecessor or successor activity, you can choose from activities in

the open projects only.

Configuring Predecessor Relationships

Configure predecessor relationships to define lag or relationship type.

To configure predecessor relationships:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity whose predecessor relationships you want

to configure and click the Predecessors detail window.

4) In the Predecessors detail window:

a. Select a relationship.

b. Add the columns you need to configure to the detail window if they are not

already available. See Showing and Hiding Columns in a Table (see "Showing or

Hiding Columns in a Table" on page 91).

c. Select an option or enter a value for each field.

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

You can also configure activity relationships from the Gantt chart. See Configuring

Activity Relationships (on page 315).

318

Assigning Successor Relationships

You can assign successor relationships to the activities in your project.

To assign a successor relationship:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity to which you want to assign successors and

click the Successors detail window.

4) In the Successors detail window, click Assign (Insert).

5) In the Select Successor Activity dialog box, assign activities and click Close.

6) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

You can assign relationships to multiple activities at one time. Select multiple activities

using Ctrl+click or Shift+click. Right-click the selected activities and select Link

Selected Activities. Based on their sequence in the view, the application creates

Finish to Start relationships between selected activities. That is, a Finish to Start

relationship is applied between the first and second activity, between the second

and third activity, and so on. If an activity pair already has an Finish to Start

relationship, the application tries, in turn, to apply each of the other relationship

types, if possible. Otherwise, no relationship is applied to the pair.

When selecting a predecessor or successor activity, you can choose from activities in

the open projects only.

Configuring Successor Relationships

Configure successor relationships to define lag or relationship type.

To configure successor relationships:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

Projects

319

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity whose successor relationships you want to

configure and click the Successors detail window.

4) In the Successors detail window:

a. Select a relationship.

b. Add the columns you need to configure to the detail window if they are not

already available. See Showing and Hiding Columns in a Table (see "Showing or

Hiding Columns in a Table" on page 91).

c. Select an option or enter a value for each field.

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

You can also configure activity relationships from the Gantt chart. See Configuring

Activity Relationships (on page 315).

About Risks

Risks are any uncertain events or conditions that, if they occur, have a positive or

negative effect on project objectives. Risks are also known as threats, warnings,

imperatives, escalation notices, or jeopardies. Positive risks are often classified as

opportunities which, if they occur, are realized as rewards. Thorough documentation and

analysis of risks over multiple projects offer lessons, and potentially cost and time savings,

for all future projects.

Working with Project Risks

The risk register on the Risks page is the main area of the application where you identify

and manage risks for a project. Additionally, you can add risks to a project from the

Projects EPS page, and add risks to a project and assign the risks to activities from the

Activities page.

320

Once you add a risk to the risk register, you can perform further analysis on the risk and

create one or more risk response plans which include activities to reduce the negative

impact of the risk. See About Risk Response Plans (on page 371).

Table of Project Risks Elements

Item Description

Risks toolbar. See Risks Toolbar.

Projects

321

Item Description

Risks work area: Risks for all the projects you have open display in the risk

register. You can group by field name, such as project name to view all

risks organized by project, or create a filter to view only the risks that

interest you.

When adding a risk to the risk register, you supply a name for the risk,

identify the risk as a threat or an opportunity, identify the current status of

the risk, identify the owner of the risk, and then assign the values for

probability, schedule, cost, and any other applicable user-defined

impacts. The values for probability, schedule, cost, and additional

user-defined impacts are used to calculate the risk score.

Note: If the Probability, Cost, and Schedule fields

are disabled, a risk scorning matrix has not been

assigned to the project. You can still use the risk

register to track your risks; however, you cannot use

the qualitative risk analysis features in the

application until you create a risk scoring matrix

and assign it to the project.

Risks detail windows:

Response Plans: The area where you add response plans and response

plan action items. See Working with Risk Response Plans (on page 371).

Activities: The area where you associate scheduled activities in your

project to an identified risk. Refer to the example above to see a list of

the project activities impacted by risk R001: Concrete supply

constrained.

Description: The area used to provide a detailed explanation of the risk.

Cause: The area used to explain why this risk is occurring.

Effect: The area used to describe the impact this risk has on this project.

Notes: The area used to capture any additional information regarding

the risk.

Probability and Impact Diagram: The Probability and Impact Diagram

(PID) is a graphical representation of the probability and impact

thresholds assigned to the risk scoring matrix associated with the project.

Assigning a Risk to an Activity

Assign a risk to an activity to explicitly identify the activity impacted by the risk.

322

You can assign a risk to an activity while you are adding project risks on the Risks page or

while managing your activities on the Activities page.

To assign a risk to an activity from the Risks page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Risks.

3) , click on a risk.

4) Click on the Activities detail window and click Assign Activities .

5) On the Select Activity dialog box:

a. Select an activity and click Assign.

b. Select any additional activities impacted by the risk and click Assign.

c. Click Close.

6) On the Risks page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

To assign a risk to an activity from the Activities page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select the activity you want to assign a risk.

4) On the Risks detail window, click Assign Risk.

5) On the Select Risk dialog box, select a risk and click OK.

6) On the Activities page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

About Steps

Steps make it possible to describe and report progress for activity work at a granular level

by breaking an activity into its component parts.

Steps can have a step weight that quantifies the portion of an activity's total work that

each step represents. On a project per project basis, you can use step weights to

calculate Activity Percent Complete. For example, three steps are assigned to an

activity; the first step has a weight of 2, and the second and third steps each have a

weight of 1. When you mark the first step (weight of 2) as complete, the percent

complete is 50. When you mark the first and second steps complete, the percent

complete is 75. When all three steps are marked complete, the percent complete is 100.

Working with Activity Steps

How can I use activity steps?

Projects

323

Activity steps make it possible to describe and report progress for activity work at a more

granular level of detail. If you have privileges to edit activities, you can add individual

steps to activities, or you can add predefined groups of steps based on templates that

have been defined for your organization. You can specify a weight for each step to

show how much work for the activity is contained in a step.

Activity step templates

Step templates enable an organization to define groups of steps that can be shared by

many projects. By creating templates for groups of activity steps that are relevant in

many projects, an organization can streamline data entry and ensure that work is

identified consistently throughout the organization.

In P6, when adding steps to an activity, you can choose from a list of available

templates. You can use more than one template, but you can add steps from only one

template at a time.

If you use a template to add steps to an activity, you can edit the step details but not the

step name.

Weighted activity steps

To indicate the portion of activity work that a single step represents, you can assign it a

numerical value, or weight. Once work for a step is underway, Primavera can use the

step weight and the reported progress of step work (Step Percent Complete) to

calculate the percentage of total work that has been completed for the activity

(Activity Percent Complete).

Creating Activity Steps

Create steps to break activities down into their component parts.

To create steps:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity you want to break down into smaller parts

and click the Steps detail window.

4) In the Steps detail window, repeat the following for each step you want to add to the

activity:

a. Click Add Activity Step (Insert).

b. Enter a value in the Step Name, Step % Complete, and Step Weight fields.

324

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

You can also create steps on the Activity Details page of the Open Requests for

Resources portlet of the Dashboards page.

Configuring Activity Steps

Configure steps to show percent complete and to give a description of the step.

To configure steps:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Steps detail window.

4) In the Steps detail window, repeat the following for each step you need to configure:

a. Select a step.

b. Add the columns you need to configure to the detail window if they are not

already available. See Showing and Hiding Columns in a Table (see "Showing or

Hiding Columns in a Table" on page 91).

c. Select an option or enter a value for each field.

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

Select the Completed option if the step is finished.

You can also configure steps from the Activity Details page of the Open Requests for

Resources portlet of the Dashboards page.

About Step Templates

Step templates enable you to define a group of steps common to multiple activities, and

then assign the template to different activities. By creating templates for groups of

activity steps that are relevant in many projects, an organization can streamline data

entry and ensure that work is identified consistently throughout the organization.

Adding Activity Steps from a Step Template

Add steps from a step template to add a group of predefined steps to an activity.

Projects

325

To add steps from a step template to an activity:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Steps detail window.

4) In the Steps detail window, click Add from Template (Ctrl+Alt+S).

5) In the Select Activity Step Template dialog box, assign templates and click Close.

6) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

Step templates are created on the Enterprise Data or Enterprise Project Data page.

About Trace Logic

Trace logic provides a graphical display of dependency relationships for an activity. You

can step forward or backward through a sequence of activities to focus on predecessor

and successor relationships.This alternative viewing format enables you to examine a

path of relationships while still viewing the entire project.

Trace logic provides visual cues to help you read the diagram. The selected activity is

highlighted in blue. Activity boxes with a red border represent critical activities. Activity

boxes to the left of the selected activity are predecessors. Activity boxes to the right are

successors. Solid lines represent driving relationships, while dashed lines represent

non-driving relationships.

You can manage activity relationships using the detail windows or Gantt chart on the

Activities page. When multiple projects are open, you can even add relationships

between activities in different projects. You can view activity relationships in the Trace

Logic detail window on the Activities page. You can use Trace Logic to determine why

an activity is scheduled at a particular time. It also helps answer questions such as:

Were any of an activity's predecessors delayed?

Do any predecessors or successors have an obsolete constraint?

Are two activities that should be linked start to start currently linked finish to start?

Why is there negative float?

Viewing Relationships with Trace Logic

Use trace logic to follow activity relationships throughout a project.

326

To view relationships with trace logic:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Trace Logic detail window.

4) In the Trace Logic detail window:

a. The selected activity is shown with its predecessor and successor activities.

b. Click another activity in the detail window to see its connections to predecessor

and successor activities.

c. Click Pan and click and drag the detail window contents.

d. Click Trace Logic Options (Ctrl+Y) to configure the number of predecessor and

successor levels shown.

Tips

Click the top edge of the Trace Logic detail window and drag upward to make the

window larger.

About Budget Change Logs

A Budget Change Log helps you keep track of budget alterations as they occur. The

Current Budget field (original budget plus approved budget changes) and Proposed

Budget field (original budget plus approved and pending budget amounts) incorporate

changes so you have up-to-date and accurate budget information for each EPS node

or project.

The Budget Change Log enables you to track modifications that affect the budget; this

log also provides a clear indication of the who, what, when, where, and how behind the

change.

Change amounts are not incorporated in the current budget until these amounts have

an Approved status. Only authorized project participants can issue budget changes and

mark them as approved. You can post a change amount as Pending; the program

manager of the affected EPS node, or the project manager of the affected project, must

then mark the amount as Approved or Not Approved. The module recalculates the new

budgeted amount and adjusts the current budget based on approved changes to the

log:

Proposed Budget equals Original Budget plus Approved Budget Changes plus

Pending Budget Changes

Projects

327

Current Budget equals Original Budget plus Approved Budget Changes

Creating Budget Change Requests

Create budget change requests when seeking approval to change an EPS or WBS

budget.

To create budget change requests:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, select an EPS or project and click the Budget Log detail window.

Note: You can also create budget change requests for WBSs or

projects from the Budget Log detail window of the Activities page.

4) In the Budget Log detail window:

a. Click Add (Insert) to add a budget log line item.

b. Enter a value in the Amount and Responsible fields.

c. Select Pending from the Status list.

5) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

The person listed in Responsible will move the request to Approved or Not Approved.

The program manager of the affected EPS node or the project manager or the

affected project will enter a reason for approval or denial in the Reason field.

Approving/Denying Budget Change Requests

If you have the authority, you can approve or deny a budget change request.

To approve or deny a budget change request:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, select the EPS or project with a budget change request and click

the Budget Log detail window.

4) In the Budget Log detail window:

a. Select and review the budget change request.

b. Select Approved or Not Approved from the Status list.

c. Enter reasoning for the new status in the Reason field.

5) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

328

Tips

To update the original budget, enter the amount in the Original Budget field and

press enter. The Current Budget and Proposed Budget are updated with the new

value.

Only authorized project participants can issue budget changes and mark them as

Approved.

You can also approve or deny budget change requests for WBSs or projects from the

Budget Log detail window of the Activities page.

About Earned Value

Earned Value Project Management, or EVPM, is the best practice concerned with early

comparisons between baseline or planned project data and actual or earned project

data to arrive at an accurate assessment of true schedule and cost performance. The

basic concepts are rooted in early Twentieth Century industrial engineering and factory

productivity techniques.

You have probably already practiced at least a basic form of this technique. If you have

ever verified that the work performed was actually accomplished prior to paying a

contractor's invoice, you were utilizing a simple form of Earned Value. Whenever you

measure the physical work performed against a baseline project plan, you are

employing basic principles of EVPM. When you need a reliable way to predict the true

cost performance of a project including its final costs, scheduling, and resource

requirements, you will use Earned Value calculations.

Spanning industries and decades, Earned Value is also known by any of the following

titles:

Planned Value of Work Accomplished (PVWA)

Budgeted Cost of Work Performed (BCWP)

Cost/Schedule Control Systems Criteria (C/SCSC)

PERT/Costs

Earned Value Management (EVM)

Performance Measurement

Example: Executive management wants to assess a critical project early in its schedule.

The project has a planned value of 10 million dollars for 10 WBS units of equal value and is

expected to last 1 year. At the end of 3 months, its actual costs are 3 million dollars,

however, it has only completed 20% of the work, namely 2 units or 2 million dollars of

earned value. This project is behind its baseline schedule by 1 million dollars. It is

performing at 67%. The project will require a 50% increase in funding or 5 million dollars to

complete the work. This is calculated based on its 10 million dollar budget divided by .67

to yield 15 million. If the project is required to return to its original time schedule, it will

require additional resources and/or overtime.

Projects

329

Configuring WBS Earned Value

Configure earned value to define the techniques and settings used for earned value

computations.

To configure WBS earned value:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select a WBS and click the Earned Value detail window.

4) In the Earned Value detail window:

a. Select one option for each technique section.

b. If your selections enable fields, selectors, or options, select an option or enter a

value for each field.

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

About Milestones

A milestone represents any significant event, goal, or gate in a project. Although P6

considers them a type of activity, milestones have zero duration; at any given moment

they are either achieved or not. Some examples of milestones in an office building

addition project might include the following:

project definition complete

structure complete

end bidding process.

Milestones can also be assigned at the WBS-level, and each one given a weight which

indicates its importance to the project schedule. When you mark a milestone as

complete, the weight is used to calculate the performance percent complete of all

activities included in the WBS level.

During project planning, you will want to identify the major milestones as they will help

you monitor the project's progress.

Creating WBS Milestones

Create WBS milestones to specify goals for a project.

To create WBS milestones:

330

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select a project or WBS and click the WBS Milestones detail

window.

4) In the WBS Milestones detail window, repeat the following steps for each milestone

you want to add:

a. Click Add (Insert) to add a WBS milestone line item.

b. Enter a value in each field.

c. Select or clear the Completed option.

5) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

The Percent Complete field within the the WBS Milestones detail window indicates the

percentage of tasks completed toward achieving the milestone.

Use the Move Up and Move Down arrows to arrange the milestones.

The weight you apply to a milestone is used to calculate the earned value of the

percent of activities completed in achieving the milestone.

331

Team Usage

About Team Usage

Team usage is the display of cost or usage data at the team level and for individual roles

and resources assigned to a project. You can view this data in a graphical (histogram) or

numeric (spreadsheet) timescale.

Customizing Team Usage

Customize team usage to define timescale, limits, and display.

To customize team usage:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Team Usage.

3) On the Team Usage page, click Customize.

4) In the Customize dialog box, configure the team usage lists and options and click

Save.

Tips

To show the histogram legend, select the Histogram option, right-click on the Histogram

chart, and select Show Histogram Legend.

Assigning Resources to Unstaffed Activities

You can assign resources to activities that currently have no resources.

To assign resources to unstaffed activities:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Team Usage.

332

3) On the Team Usage page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Projects list.

b. Click the Organized By list and select Roles.

c. In the left pane, expand a project and select a role.

d. In the right pane, select the Spreadsheet option and click a project.

4) In the Resources dialog box:

a. Select the Unstaffed option to display the unstaffed activities for this project.

b. Select the Select option for each unstaffed activity to which you want to assign

the same resource.

c. Click Assign Resource and assign a resource from the dialog box.

d. Click Close.

Tips

The list of resources you can select from is determined by your resource access

privileges and individual resource's current project association.

To review allocation details before assigning, in the Select Resource dialog box, select

a resource and click Show Detail.

To search for resources who meet specific requirements, see Searching Resources (on

page 333).

You can also assign resources to activities from the Assignments detail window of the

Activities page, the Open Requests for Resources portlet of a dashboard, or the Roles

tab of the Administration page of the Resources section.

Exporting Team Usage Spreadsheets

You can export project team allocation and cost data to a Microsoft Excel *.xls file.

To export team usage spreadsheets:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Team Usage.

3) On the Team Usage page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Projects list.

b. Select an option from the Organized By list.

c. Expand a project and select a resource or role from the left pane.

d. Select the Spreadsheet option in the right pane and click Export Spreadsheet.

Projects

333

4) In the File Download dialog box, click Open or Save.

Note: If you select Save, navigate to a file location in the Save As

dialog box and click Save.

Tips

You can also export spreadsheets from the Overallocated Resources portlet of the

Workspace page.

Searching Resources

You can search for resources to assign to one or more activities.

To search resources:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Team Usage.

3) On the Team Usage page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Projects list.

b. Click the Organized By list and select Roles.

c. In the left pane, expand a project and select the role that the resource must be

able to fill.

d. In the right pane, select the Spreadsheet display option and select the project that

contains the activities to which you want to assign resources.

4) In the Resources dialog box:

a. Select the Unstaffed and Staffed option to show all available activities in that

project.

b. Select the Select option for the activities to which you want to assign resources

and click Search.

c. In the Define Search Criteria section, specify search criteria.

d. In the Define Sort Criteria section, specify criteria to sort the resources.

Note: You must select Sort results by availability to enable the

options in this section.

e. Click Save as Template if you would like to use this criteria as a template in the

future.

334

f. Click Run Search to display the resources that match these requirements.

g. In the list of Resource Search Results:

If you find a desirable resource, select the Select option for the resource and

click Assign Resource.

If you did not find a desirable resource, click Search and begin the search

again.

h. When you are finished, close the Resources dialog box.

Tips

To search using a template, click Select Template in the Resources dialog box and

select a template from the dialog box.

To return to the resource staffing list, click Resource Staffing in the Resources dialog

box.

You can also search resources from the Resource Search Criteria page of the Open

Requests for Resources portlet of the Dashboards page.

In the search criteria, if you specify a primary role and no other role, only those

resources who are available and are assigned that primary role will be included in the

search results. To find all available resources who have the specified role assigned,

even if it is not their primary role, leave the primary role text entry box blank and type

the role you want to search for in the second text entry box of the role criteria section.

Sending E-Mail to a Project Manager

You can send e-mail to the manager of a particular project.

To send e-mail to a project manager:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Team Usage.

3) On the Team Usage page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Projects list.

b. Click the Organized By list and select Resources.

c. In the left pane, expand the project and select a resource.

d. In the right pane, select the Spreadsheet display option and click a project. The

manager of this project will receive your e-mail.

4) In the Resource Project Activities dialog box, click E-mail project manager.

5) In the E-mail dialog box:

Projects

335

a. Edit the recipient list, message, and subject as needed.

b. Click Send E-mail.

Tips

You must have an e-mail address listed in you user profile to send an e-mail.

337

Issues

About Issues

Issues are perceived problems within a schedule that require attention or corrective

action. When you create them in the Activities section, you can associate them with a

single project or workgroup and assign them to a responsible manager in the OBS for

follow-up based on priority. You can also associate issues with a single activity. When

adding new issues to a project or workgroup, you can control the information you

capture for each new issue. You can choose to receive e-mail notifications when new

issues of a certain priority are added, when existing issues are modified, or when issues

are assigned a specific issue code.

You can also think of issues as impediments, action items, open items, punch lists, logs, or

concerns. Over time, if you do not resolve or close open issues or issues placed on hold,

they can become risks.

Issue codes enable you to organize and categorize issues in a way that is meaningful to

you. For example, you can create an issue code titled Severity, and subsequently create

issue code values: High, Medium, and Low. You can assign each of these code values to

issues across multiple projects, enabling you to categorize each issue according to how

severe it is. Similarly, you can create codes to categorize issues by responsibility,

subproject, or any other classification you require to organize issues. Assigning issue

codes enables you to quickly search for and view issues according to specific criteria.

Working with Issues

Issues are known problems within an activity, project, or workgroup that require attention

or corrective action.

Viewing issues

You can view issues from several areas within the application:

From a dashboard, you can access the My Issues portlet to view issues you are

associated with in the context of the filter criteria selected for the dashboard.

From the Workspace page, you can access the Project Issues portlet to view issues

associated with the project selected in the Select Project list.

From the Workgroup Workspace page, you can access the Issues portlet to view

issues associated with the workgroups to which you belong.

From the Issues page, you can access issues for any open project. On the Issues

page, you can view all of the issues for all open projects at one time.

From the Activities or EPS page, you can access the Issues detail window to view

issues associated with an activity, WBS, or project.

338

In each of these areas, depending on your security privileges, you can customize the

issue display. For example, you can choose to view issues in either a list or chart format.

You can also configure group, sort, and filter options to focus on issues that are most

important to you. Additionally, you can add, revise, or delete issues from each of these

areas. When adding new issues to a project or workgroup, the issue forms feature

enables you to control the information you capture for each new issue. If you add issues

from a detail window, the issue is added as a line item and does not require the selection

of an issue form.

Note: Issues cannot be used with template projects.

Organizing and managing issues

To help organize and manage issues for your project or workgroup, additional issue

management features are available, depending on your security privileges.

To organize issues, you can assign enterprise-level issue codes, which enable you to

categorize issues in a way that is meaningful to you.

The features for organizing and managing issues are accessible via the Enterprise Data

option on the Administer menu. Use the issues options in the Enterprise Data pane to add,

edit, and delete issue codes and issue user-defined fields. These options appear only if

you have the required privileges.

Creating Project Issues

Create project issues to identify problems within a schedule that must be addressed

before the project can be completed.

To create issues:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, expand a project and click Add an Issue.

4) In the Select an Issue Form dialog box, select a form to act as the foundation of the

issue and click OK.

5) On the Add Issue page, configure the issue fields and lists and click Save.

Tips

You cannot add an issue to a project that is checked out or locked. You also cannot

create issues for template projects.

Projects

339

If no issue forms are assigned to the project, the Default Form is the only form you can

choose. The Default Form displays all issue fields.

You can also create project issues from the Project Issues portlet of the Workspace

page, the Issues detail window of the Activities or EPS page, or the My Issues portlet

of the Dashboards page.

If you are adding an issue from the My Issues portlet, you can choose any issue form

assigned to any project that falls within the filter criteria specified for a dashboard.

Issue forms are organized by project.

Configuring Project Issues

Configure project issues to update issues that have been identified for a project.

To configure project issues:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, expand a project and click an issue.

4) On the Details of page configure the following sections as necessary:

a. In the General section, configure the fields and lists.

b. Expand the Description section, and enter a description in the text field.

c. Expand the Issue Codes section and assign issue codes. See Assigning Issue

Codes (on page 342).

d. Expand the Related Items section and assign related documents or issues. See

Assigning Related Items to Issues (on page 340).

Tips

You can also configure workgroup issues from the Issues portlet of the Workgroup

Workspace page.

You can also configure issues from the Project Issues portlet of the Workspace page

or the My Issues portlet of the Dashboards page.

Customizing Project Issues

Customize project issues to define how columns, filters, groups, and charts are displayed

in the user interface.

To customize project issues:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

340

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, click Customize.

4) In the Customize Project Issues dialog box:

a. Click the Columns tab and configure the Selected Columns and Sort lists. See

Configuring Columns or Values (on page 91).

b. Click the Filter tab and select to show all available issues or define a filter.

c. Click the Group tab and configure the grouping lists and options.

d. Click the Chart tab and configure the chart format.

e. Click Save.

Tips

Select the All Issues option on the Filter tab if you do not want to apply a filter. To

construct a filter, select Custom Filter and configure the fields and lists to create one

or more filter statements.

You can also customize project issues from the Project Issues portlet of the Workspace

page, the Issues portlet of the Workgroup Workspace page, or the My Issues portlet

of the Dashboards page.

Assigning Related Items to Issues

You can assign related documents and issues to an issue.

To assign related items to an issue:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, expand a project and select an issue.

4) On the Details of page, expand the Related Items section.

5) In the Related Items section:

Projects

341

To relate documents, click Relate Documents and select documents from the

dialog box.

To related issues, click Relate Issues and select issues from the dialog box.

Tips

To remove a document or issue, select the option next to the name of the item and

click Remove.

The instructions in this topic assume that the content repository is configured.

The Related Documents dialog box will only display documents of the selected

project.

You can also assign items to issues from the Project Issues portlet of the Workspace

page. You can assign items to workgroup issues from the Issues portlet of the

Workgroup Workspace page.

Sending E-Mail about Issues

You can send e-mails about project and workgroup issues that include basic information,

such as project, issue name, priority and due date.

To send issue e-mails:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, expand a project and click E-Mail for one of the issues.

4) In the E-mail dialog box:

a. Edit the recipient list, message, and subject as needed.

b. Click Send E-mail.

Tips

You must have an e-mail address listed in you user profile to send an e-mail.

The e-mail message is pre-filled with the addresses of the project manager and

responsible manager. The subject area is pre-filled with basic information, such as

project, issue name, priority and due date.

You can also send issue e-mails from the Issues portlet of the Workgroup Workspace

page, the Project Issues portlet of the Workspace page, or the My Issues portlet on

the Dashboards page.

342

About Issue Codes

Issue codes enable you to organize and categorize issues in a way that is meaningful to

you. For example, you can create an issue code titled Severity, and subsequently create

issue code values: High, Medium, and Low. You can assign each of these code values to

issues across multiple projects, enabling you to categorize each issue according to how

severe it is. Similarly, you can create codes to categorize issues by responsibility,

subproject, or any other classification you require to organize issues. Assigning issue

codes enables you to quickly search for and view issues according to specific criteria.

Assigning Issue Codes

You can assign issue codes to organize and categorize issues in a way that is meaningful

to you.

To assign an issue code:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, expand a project and select an issue.

4) On the Details of page, expand the Issue Codes section and click Assign Issue Codes.

5) In the Select Issue Codes detail window, select a code and click Assign.

Tips

You can only assign one issue code at a time. Click Assign Issue Codes again to

assign another code.

You can also assign issue codes from the Project Issues portlet on the Workspace

page or the My Issues portlet on the Dashboards page.

About Issue Forms

An issue form is a template, or framework, that you can use to create new issues. Issue

forms specify the information required for adding a new issue to the project. You can

create issue forms to capture issue information specific to a department in your

organization, or for any other specific purpose.

Projects

343

Creating Issue Forms

Create an issue form to capture all the attributes your organization wants to track when

users add issues to a project. Each form helps maintain consistency when future issues

are identified. Project members must select an issue form to serve as a template when

they want to create a new issue.

To create an issue form:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, click Issue Forms.

4) In the Issue Forms pane, click Modify and then click Add Form.

5) In the Select a Form to Copy dialog box, select an existing form or the default form to

copy as the basis for your new form. Click OK.

6) On the Issue Forms page:

a. Enter a name in the Form Name field.

b. Select or clear the Display options to determine which attributes appear when

users add new issues based on this form.

c. To associate issues with codes, expand the Issue Codes section, click Assign Issue

Codes, and select issue codes from the dialog box.

d. To associate issues with UDFs, expand the User Defined Fields section, click Assign

User Defined Fields, and select user-defined fields from the dialog box.

7) For all the attributes you assigned or marked with the Display check box:

a. Set their Default Value fields, if available. Select a value from the list, enter a value

in the field, or click and select a value from the dialog box.

b. Select the Required check box for each attribute you want to designate as

mandatory. Users must provide data for these fields when adding new issues

based on this form.

8) On the Issue Forms page, click the Access tab.

9) On the Access tab, click Assign Projects.

10) In the Select a Project dialog box, select a project in which you want to make this

form available for users adding new issues. Click Assign. Repeat this step for all

projects in which this issue form should be available. Click Close.

11) Click Save.

Tips

To modify a form, navigate to the Issue Form Details page and select a form in the

Issue Forms pane.

To delete an issue code, user-defined field, or project assignment, click Delete in

the item's row. To delete an entire issue form, select the form first in the Issue Forms

pane. Then, in that same pane, click Modify, and then click Delete.

344

Assigning Projects to Issue Forms

You can specify the issue forms you want to make available for use in a project. When

you assign a project to an issue form, it becomes available for project members to use

when they add a new issue to a project or workgroup within the project.

To assign projects to issue forms:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, click Issue Forms.

4) On the Issue Forms page, click the Access tab.

5) On the Access tab, expand the Projects section and click Assign Projects.

6) In the Select a Project dialog box, assign projects to the issue form and click Close.

7) On the Access tab, click Save.

Tips

You can assign multiple projects to issue forms.

Your access to pages, tabs, and menu items is controlled by the settings defined in

your assigned user interface view. Depending on your view settings, you might be

able to change your view preferences to show or hide items according to your

needs.

345

Risks

About Risks

Risks are any uncertain events or conditions that, if they occur, have a positive or

negative effect on project objectives. Risks are also known as threats, warnings,

imperatives, escalation notices, or jeopardies. Positive risks are often classified as

opportunities which, if they occur, are realized as rewards. Thorough documentation and

analysis of risks over multiple projects offer lessons, and potentially cost and time savings,

for all future projects.

347

Risk Enterprise Data

Working with Risks Enterprise Data

Risk Enterprise data is used to setup categories, risk scoring matrices, and thresholds that

are standard across your company. The categories and matrices that are assigned to a

project can be displayed in the risk register, which is located in the Projects section under

Risks.

Risk Categories page - Risk categories are used to categorize and organize project risks.

They are global across the enterprise and are a mechanism to group risks across multiple

projects to see risk trends across the organization as well as a single project. Technical,

Operational, External are examples of risk categories that might apply to a typical

project. The risk categories are created in the Risks Enterprise Data area and assigned on

the Risks page under Projects.

Risk Scoring Matrices page - Create a risk scoring matrix to perform qualitative risk

analysis on your project risks. When creating a risk scoring matrix, you must define the

probability, tolerance, cost, and schedule impacts. Additionally, you can add

user-defined impacts to the matrix. You must also assign a risk scoring method (Highest

Impact, Average Impact, and Average Individual Impact) to the matrix. A probability

and impact diagram is created based on the information assigned in the matrix. Click on

the Probability and Impact Diagram detail window to view the diagram.

To use the risk scoring matrix, you must add the projects you want to use the matrix to the

risk scoring matrix from the Projects detail window. You can also assign a risk scoring

matrix to a project from the EPS page from the Projects section.

Note: You can add risks to a project without a risk scoring matrix;

however, you cannot perform qualitative risk analysis and will not

be able to assign probability or impact thresholds without a risk

scoring matrix. You can add a risk scoring matrix to the project at

any time.

Risk Thresholds page - Create risk thresholds, including probability, tolerance, cost

impact, schedule impact, and any additional user-defined impacts, for use in the risk

scoring matrix.

Risk UDFs page - Risk UDFs are used to track additional information about the risk that is

not provided by the standard risk fields. Create Risk user-defined fields (UDFs) when it is

necessary to view additional data fields on the Risks page. A risk UDF can include a text

string, a numerical value, start date, finish date, cost, integer, or indicator.

Configuring Risk Enterprise Data

You can configure enterprise data to include risk categories and risk UDFs, and to define

the criteria for performing qualitative risk analysis using a risk scoring matrix.

348

To define the criteria for performing qualitative risk analysis, perform the following tasks:

1) Creating Risk Thresholds (on page 350)

2) Creating Risk Scoring Matrices (on page 357)

3) Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project (on page 358)

To configure risk categories or risk UDFs, see:

Creating Risk Categories (on page 361)

Creating Risk UDFs (on page 363)

349

Risk Thresholds

About Risk Thresholds

Risk thresholds are a range of values (monetary, time, quality, technical, etc.) used in

rating or assessing the impact of the risk to the project. A risk reaching or crossing over the

defined risk threshold requires attention and might require a risk response action.

These thresholds are the inputs used to create a risk scoring matrix, which is the overall

scoring mechanism used to perform qualitative risk analysis on your project risks.

Working with Risk Thresholds

From the Risk Thresholds page, you create risk thresholds for use in your risk scoring

matrices.

Risk thresholds necessary for a risk scoring matrix are:

Probability: The likelihood of a risk occurring.

Tolerance: The acceptability or manageability of a risk on a project.

Schedule: The amount of time the risk will increase or decrease the project schedule.

Cost: The cost impact if a risk occurs.

You can also add additional user-defined impacts necessary for the calculation of your

risk score.

Table of Risk Threshold Elements

Item Description

Risk Threshold toolbar. See Enterprise Data Risk Thresholds Toolbar.

350

Item Description

Risk Threshold work area: You define the risk threshold name, type

(Probability, Tolerance, Schedule Impact, Cost Impact, User-Defined

Impact), and number of thresholds levels in this work area. Each threshold

can have 2 - 9 levels; however, the cost impact, schedule impact, and

any user-defined impacts must have the same number of levels for a

given risk scoring matrix.

In the example above, the Cost Impact, Schedule Impact, Probability,

and Tolerance thresholds are defined for the Harbour Pointe Assisted

Living construction project. The Cost Impact and Schedule Impact

thresholds are each defined with 5 levels and the Probability threshold is

also defined with 5 levels. The risk scoring matrix that will be using these

thresholds will have a matrix size of 5 x 5.

For each risk scoring matrix, only one threshold for Probability, Tolerance,

Schedule Impact, and Cost Impact is allowed. You can add as many

user-defined impacts as necessary. You create multiple thresholds of the

same type, but with different values, when you create multiple risk

scoring matrices.

Levels detail window: The details for each level are defined in this

window. Define a name for each level and a code, which is a short

name or abbreviation for the name. Also, define the range of

acceptable values for that level; the range levels could be a percentage

value, dollar amount, number of days, or a text string depending on the

chosen threshold. You can define a color for each threshold level;

however, you should define colors for the tolerance threshold. The colors

for the threshold are used to give visual representation in the risk register.

The colors for the tolerance threshold are used in the Probability and

Impact Diagram (PID) to visually represent the threshold values. More

importantly, the colors display in the Score and Score (text) fields on the

risk register on the Projects Risks page. This enables you to easily identify

where in the risk scoring matrix this risk falls in terms of severity.

In the example above, the Tolerance threshold is defined with 3 levels

(High, Medium, and Low) and each range is assigned a color. You will

see the impact the color makes after you create a risk scoring matrix,

assign the thresholds to the matrix, and assign a risk scoring method. See

Working with Risk Scoring Matrices (on page 354).

Creating Risk Thresholds

You create risk thresholds, which you then use as inputs when creating a risk scoring

matrix. When creating risk thresholds, you must define the probability threshold, cost

impact threshold, schedule impact threshold, and tolerance threshold. You can also

define as many user-defined impacts as necessary.

Projects

351

To create risk thresholds:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) Risks and click Risk Thresholds.

3) Repeat the following for each threshold you want to create:

a. On the Risk Thresholds page:

1. Click Add (Insert).

2. In the Name field, double-click and type a threshold name.

3. In the Type field, double-click and select a type of risk from the list.

4. In the Levels field, double-click and select a level number from the list.

b. In the Levels detail window, a default value is assigned for the Code, Name, and

Range values. You can use the default values provided, or double-click any field

to customize that field.

You can define a color for each threshold level to visually represent the values

when working the risk register on the Project Risks page. However, you should

define colors for the tolerance threshold. The colors for the tolerance threshold are

used to color the Score field on the risk register on the Projects Risks page. This

enables you to easily identify where in the risk scoring matrix this risk falls in terms of

severity.

4) On the Risk Thresholds page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Modifying Risk Thresholds

If you are going to change the type or level of a threshold that is currently assigned to a

scoring matrix, you must first remove the threshold from the risk scoring matrix and assign

a new threshold.

To delete a threshold from a risk scoring matrix:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and click Risk Scoring Matrices.

3) Repeat the following for each risk scoring matrix that includes the threshold you are

modifying.

a. On the Risk Scoring Matrices page:

1. Locate the risk scoring matrix that includes the threshold you are modifying.

2. Double-click in the appropriate threshold field.

b. In the Select Threshold dialog box, choose a different threshold and click Assign,

and then click Close.

4) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

To modify a risk threshold:

352

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and click Risk Thresholds.

3) On the Risk Thresholds page:

a. Locate the threshold you are modifying.

b. Double-click in the field you are modifying and update the value.

Note: If you are modifying the number of levels assigned to a

threshold, all data for existing levels are overwritten and replaced

with the default values for that level.

c. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

353

Risk Scoring Matrices

About Risk Scoring Matrices

A risk scoring matrix is a qualitative analysis tool used to calculate the impact of a risk on

a project. A risk scoring matrix includes probability threshold values, cost and impact

threshold values, and any additional user-defined impact threshold values, which are all

used in the calculation of the risk score. The score is used to give an overall rating of a risk

depending on the probability and impact thresholds assessed in the project. The scores

are used to help determine if the risk should be addressed during the course of the

project, or if the risk does not present a significant impact to the cost or schedule of the

project.

354

Working with Risk Scoring Matrices

Use the Risk Scoring Matrices page to create a risk scoring matrix for one or more

projects. The inputs to the risk scoring matrix are the risk thresholds, which you create on

the Risk Thresholds page from the Enterprise Data section.

Table of Risk Scoring Matrices Elements

Item Description

Risk Scoring Matrices toolbar. See Enterprise Data Risk Scoring Matrices

Toolbar.

Projects

355

Item Description

Risk Scoring Matrices work area: This work area contains all the risk

scoring matrices defined for your company. The number of risk scoring

matrices you create is determined by risk analysis practices incorporated

in your business. You might have one corporate-wide risk scoring matrix

that is used for all projects, or you might have a need for separate

matrices which are used depending on different factors, such as project

size. For example, a project that is a new development might require

different cost impact and schedule impact threshold values than a

project for a new feature development on an existing product.

There might also be situations where a project is a joint-venture or is

performed by a contractor and the prime owner's matrix must be used.

However, for any project, only one matrix is assigned.

In the work area above, you can see this company has a need for

multiple risk scoring matrices, including a separate risk scoring matrix for

the Harbour Pointe Assisted Living construction project.

When creating a risk scoring matrix, you choose a matrix size based on

the number of levels assigned to your probability and impact thresholds

defined on the Risk Thresholds page. Using the Harbour Pointe Risk

Scoring Matrix as an example, the risk scoring matrix is 5 x 5. The first 5

represents the number of levels assigned to the probability threshold and

the second 5 represents the number of levels assigned to the cost and

schedule impact thresholds.

Next you choose the risk scoring method to use for risk score calculations.

For more information on risk scoring methods, see Risk Scoring Method.

356

Item Description

Risk Scoring Matrices detail windows:

Description: The area used to describe the risk scoring matrix.

Projects: The area where you assign the matrix to one or more projects.

Note that only one matrix can be assigned to a single project. If a matrix

is not assigned to a project, risks can still be entered in the risk register on

the Projects Risks page; however, the probability, cost impact, and

schedule impact threshold fields are disabled, and you cannot use the

qualitative analysis features of the application. At any time you can

create a matrix and assign it to an existing project.

Probability and Impact Diagram (PID): The PID is a graphical

representation of the selections made in the Risk Scoring Matrices work

area. The number of rows and columns is determined by the matrix size.

The rows are the probability levels and the columns are the impact levels.

The code and name fields for the impact threshold levels are

customizable when creating a threshold; therefore, the column labels for

the impacts are "Severity n." The number of severity columns reflects the

number of levels assigned to the impact thresholds.

The color coding indicates the tolerance threshold assigned to the risk

scoring matrix. These same tolerance colors are also visible in the Score

and Score (Text) fields on the risk register on the Projects Risks page when

risk values are entered.

Probability: The details of the probability threshold assigned to the matrix

needed to perform a qualitative assessment on project risks. This detail

window is read-only. To change anything related to the threshold,

navigate to the Risk Thresholds page.

Impacts: The details for the impact thresholds assigned to the matrix. A

cost and schedule impact must be defined for the matrix to perform a

qualitative assessment on project risks. An unlimited number of

user-defined impact thresholds can be assigned to the matrix. From this

detail window you can add or delete impacts to the matrix; however,

you cannot modify the threshold values. To change anything related to

the threshold, navigate to the Risk Thresholds page.

Tolerance: The details for the tolerance threshold assigned to the matrix.

This detail window is read-only. To change anything related to the

threshold, navigate to the Risk Thresholds page.

Projects

357

Creating Risk Scoring Matrices

Create a risk scoring matrix to perform qualitative analysis on project risks. Project risk is

assessed based on the thresholds defined in the risk scoring matrix.

Before creating a risk scoring matrix, you need to first define risk thresholds.

To create a risk scoring matrix:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and choose Risk Scoring Matrices.

3) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the Name field, click and type a unique name.

c. In the Matrix Size field, double-click and click .

4) In the Select Matrix Size dialog box:

a. Choose a threshold level for the Probability and Impact fields.

Note: You must have already defined thresholds with the number

of levels you are assigning to the matrix (see Creating Risk

Thresholds (on page 350)). If you do not have a threshold with the

same number of levels, you will be able to select the matrix size, but

you will not be able to add a threshold.

b. Click OK.

5) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, double-click in the Probability Threshold field and

click .

6) In the Select Probability Threshold dialog box, choose a probability and click OK.

7) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, double-click in the Impact Thresholds field and

click .

8) In the Select Impact Thresholds dialog box:

a. Select a Cost Impact and click Assign.

b. Select a Schedule Impact and click Assign.

c. Select any additional impacts and click Assign.

d. Click Close.

9) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, double-click in the Tolerance Threshold field and

click .

10) In the Select Tolerance Threshold dialog box, choose a tolerance and click OK.

11) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, double-click in the Risk Scoring Method field and

select a risk scoring method from the list. For a detailed description of each method,

see Risk Scoring Method Description.

12) In the Description detail window, type a description of the risk scoring matrix.

358

13) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project

You need to assign a scoring matrix to a project before it can be used to prioritize risks.

Once you assign a scoring matrix to a project, it is available for use from the risk register

on the Projects Risks page.

You can assign a risk scoring matrix to a project from different areas in the application,

depending on the tasks you are working on at the time.

When setting up a project, see Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the

EPS Page (see "Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the EPS Page" on

page 359).

When defining a risk scoring matrix and applying the matrix to multiple projects, see

Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the Enterprise Data Pane (on page

358).

When managing a portfolio, see Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the

Portfolios Section (on page 359).

Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the Enterprise Data Pane

You need to assign a risk scoring matrix to a project before it can be used to prioritize

risks. Once you assign a scoring matrix to a project, it is available for use from the risk

register on the Projects Risks page.

You can assign a risk scoring matrix to a project from multiple locations in the application.

Use this method when you are defining a risk scoring matrix and need to apply the matrix

to one or more projects.

To assign a risk scoring matrix to a project from the Enterprise Data pane:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and choose Risk Scoring Matrices.

3) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, click the Projects detail window.

4) In the Projects detail window, click Add (Insert).

5) In the Select Project dialog box:

a. Select a project and click Assign.

Note: If the project you selected is assigned to another risk scoring

matrix, the threshold values you previously set for the project are

removed. You will need to select values using the newly assigned

risk scoring matrix.

b. Select any additional projects and click Assign.

c. Click Close.

6) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Projects

359

Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the EPS Page

You need to assign a risk scoring matrix to a project before it can be used to prioritize

risks. Once you assign a scoring matrix to a project, it is available for use from the risk

register on the Projects Risks page.

You can assign a risk scoring matrix to a project from multiple locations in the application.

Use this method when you are setting up a project or modifying project settings.

To assign a risk scoring matrix to a project from the EPS page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Locate the project you want to associate with a risk scoring matrix.

b. Double-click in the Risk Scoring Matrix field and click .

4) In the Select Risk Scoring Matrix dialog box, select a matrix and click OK.

Note: If the project you selected is assigned to another risk scoring

matrix, the threshold values you previously set for the project are

removed. You will need to select values using the newly assigned

risk scoring matrix.

5) On the EPS page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

If the Risk Scoring Matrix field is not visible, click View and select Columns. In the

Customize Columns dialog box, expand General and double-click Risk Scoring Matrix to

move it to the Selected Columns list. Click OK.

Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the Portfolios Section

You need to assign a risk scoring matrix to a project before it can be used to prioritize

risks. Once you assign a scoring matrix to a project, it is available for use from the risk

register on the Projects Risks page.

You can assign a risk scoring matrix to a project from multiple locations in the application.

Use this method when you are creating or modifying a portfolio.

To assign a risk scoring matrix from the Portfolios section:

1) Click Portfolios.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Portfolio Analysis.

3) On the Portfolio Analysis page:

a. Click the View field and select a scorecard view from the list.

b. Select a project.

c. In the Risk Scoring Matrix field, double-click and click .

360

4) In the Select Risk Scoring Matrix dialog box, choose a risk scoring matrix and click OK.

Note: If the project you selected is assigned to another risk scoring

matrix, the threshold values you previously set for the project are

removed. You will need to select values using the newly assigned

risk scoring matrix.

5) On the Portfolio Analysis page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

If the Risk Scoring Matrix field is not visible, click Customize. In the Customize Scorecard

dialog box, click the Columns tab. On the Columns tab, expand General and

double-click Risk Scoring Matrix to move it to the Selected Columns list. Click Apply.

361

Risk Categories

About Risk Categories

Risk categories are a classification of risk types customized to your specific project or

business that are used to categorize and organize project risks. Categorizing risks enables

you to analyze the types of risks occurring and see trends within the project or across

multiple projects. This visibility will enable you to more effectively manage risks over the

long term.

Creating Risk Categories

Create a risk category to categorize and organize project risks.

To create a risk category:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and click Risk Categories.

3) On the Risk Categories page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the Category field, double-click and type a unique name.

c. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

To display the Category field on the Projects Risks page, click Select Columns on the Risks

toolbar and select Category.

363

Risk UDFs

About Risk User Defined Fields

User defined fields allow you to create and maintain data specific to your organization.

For example, you can track additional activity data, such as delivery dates and

purchase order numbers. You can also track additional resource data or project

cost-related data, such as profit, variances, and revised budgets. User defined fields are

global, so they can be used across all projects in your organization.

Creating Risk UDFs

Create risk user-defined fields (UDFs) to store additional project risk data on the Projects

Risks page that is pertinent to your project or business and is not available from the

default fields. For example, you might need to include a location field to identify where

the risk might occur, or a ranking field to determine the order in which the risks will be

handled.

User-defined fields can be of many types: text, start date, finish date, cost, number,

integer, or indicator. Data from UDFs is not used in scoring calculations.

To create a risk UDF:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and click Risk UDFs.

3) On the Risk UDFs page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the User Defined Field, double-click and type a name.

c. In the Data Type field, double-click and choose a data type from the list.

d. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

365

Project Risks

Working with Project Risks

The risk register on the Risks page is the main area of the application where you identify

and manage risks for a project. Additionally, you can add risks to a project from the

Projects EPS page, and add risks to a project and assign the risks to activities from the

Activities page.

Once you add a risk to the risk register, you can perform further analysis on the risk and

create one or more risk response plans which include activities to reduce the negative

impact of the risk. See About Risk Response Plans (on page 371).

Table of Project Risks Elements

Item Description

Risks toolbar. See Risks Toolbar.

366

Item Description

Risks work area: Risks for all the projects you have open display in the risk

register. You can group by field name, such as project name to view all

risks organized by project, or create a filter to view only the risks that

interest you.

When adding a risk to the risk register, you supply a name for the risk,

identify the risk as a threat or an opportunity, identify the current status of

the risk, identify the owner of the risk, and then assign the values for

probability, schedule, cost, and any other applicable user-defined

impacts. The values for probability, schedule, cost, and additional

user-defined impacts are used to calculate the risk score.

Note: If the Probability, Cost, and Schedule fields

are disabled, a risk scorning matrix has not been

assigned to the project. You can still use the risk

register to track your risks; however, you cannot use

the qualitative risk analysis features in the

application until you create a risk scoring matrix

and assign it to the project.

Risks detail windows:

Response Plans: The area where you add response plans and response

plan action items. See Working with Risk Response Plans (on page 371).

Activities: The area where you associate scheduled activities in your

project to an identified risk. Refer to the example above to see a list of

the project activities impacted by risk R001: Concrete supply

constrained.

Description: The area used to provide a detailed explanation of the risk.

Cause: The area used to explain why this risk is occurring.

Effect: The area used to describe the impact this risk has on this project.

Notes: The area used to capture any additional information regarding

the risk.

Probability and Impact Diagram: The Probability and Impact Diagram

(PID) is a graphical representation of the probability and impact

thresholds assigned to the risk scoring matrix associated with the project.

Projects

367

Managing Project Risks

You can perform qualitative analysis on your project risks. Using the tasks listed below, you

can identify a risk for your project and assign probability and impact values to this risk to

calculate a risk score. Additionally, you can assign activities to the risk and create a risk

response plan, which can include actions to mitigate the risk.

1) Creating Project Risks (on page 367)

2) Assigning an Activity to a Risk (see "Assigning a Risk to an Activity" on page 321)

3) Developing a Risk Response Plan (on page 372)

Creating Project Risks

Add project risks to capture potential threats or opportunities that might impact your

project.

For convenience, you can add risks to projects from different areas in the application,

depending on the tasks you are performing at the time.

You can capture risks in the Projects section from the Risks, Activities, or EPS page.

Adding Detailed Project-Level Risks - The Risks page is the risk register where all risk

data for the projects you are working on is stored. You can customize the page using

filters or grouping to view a specific list of project risks. From this page, you can assign

probability and impact values to obtain a risk score, and create risk response plans

that include response plan action items to reduce or eliminate the negative impact

of the risk. If you previously added risks to a project from the Activities page or the EPS

page, you can use this page to add more detailed information about the risk and

perform qualitative analysis.

Adding Risks to Activities - Use the Activities page when you are working in the

detailed activity level to quickly add a risk or assign an existing risk to activity. When

you plan to perform a more detailed analysis on your project risks, use the Risks page.

Adding High-Level Project Risks - Use the EPS page when you are working at the

project level to quickly add a risk to a project. You can enter basic risk information

from this page, including ID, Name, Owner, Category, Type, and Status. When you

plan to enter more detailed information about the risk and perform an analysis on

your project risks, use the Risks page.

Adding Detailed Project-Level Risks

Add project risks to capture potential threats or opportunities that might impact your

project, and to perform qualitative analysis to reduce or eliminate negative impact on

the project.

Note: If a risk scoring matrix is not assigned to the project, you can

add general risk information to the Risks page, but you will not be

able to enter values for probability, schedule and cost, which are

values used to generate the risk score. See Assigning a Risk Scoring

Matrix to a Project (on page 358).

368

To add detailed project-level risks:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Risks.

3) On the Risks page, click Add a Risk (Insert).

4) If multiple projects are open, select a project from the Select Project dialog box and

click OK.

5) On the Risks page:

a. In the ID field, click and type an ID for the risk.

b. In the Name field, click and type the risk name.

c. In the Type field, double-click and select the type of risk from the list.

d. In the Status field, double-click and select the current status for the risk.

e. In the Owner field, double-click then click .

6) In the Select Owner dialog box, select an owner for the risk and click Assign.

7) On the Risks page:

a. In the Probability field, double-click and select a probability from the list.

b. In the Schedule field, double-click and select a schedule impact from the list.

c. In the Cost field, double-click and select a cost impact from the list.

d. Complete any addition fields on the table that are relevant for this risk, including

any user-defined fields.

Note: To display additional columns, click Select Columns and

select the column to add to the table.

8) You can provide more information using the Cause, Description, Effect, and Notes

detail windows.

9) On the Risks page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tip

Click the Probability and Impact Diagram detail window to view the risk scoring matrix

assigned to the project.

Adding Project Risks to Activities

Add project risk to activities to capture potential threats or opportunities that might

impact your project. Use this method if you want to quickly associate a risk to an activity.

You can add a new project risk to an activity, or assign an existing project risk to an

activity.

To add a new or assign an exisitng project risk to an activity:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Projects

369

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Risks detail window.

4) To add a new risk to an activity, in the Risks detail window:

a. Click Add a Risk (Insert).

b. Enter a value in the ID field.

c. Enter a value in the Name field.

d. Select a type from the Type list.

e. Select a status from the Status list.

5) To assign an existing risk to the activity, in the Risks detail window:

a. Click Assign Risk.

b. In the Select Risk dialog box:

1. Click on a risk.

2. Click Assign.

3. Assign any additional risks, and then click Close.

6) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Save (Ctrl+S).

Adding High-Level Project Risks

Add project risks to capture potential threats or opportunities that might impact your

project.

Use this method to quickly add a risk to a project. You can enter basic risk information

from this page, including ID, Name, Owner, Category, Type, and Status.

To add a high-level project risk:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click on a project, and then click the Risks detail window.

4) On the Risks detail window:

a. Click Add a Risk (Insert).

b. In the ID field, double-click and type an ID for the risk.

c. In the Name field, double-click and type the risk name.

d. In the Type field, double-click and select the type of risk from the list.

e. In the Status field, double-click and select the current status for the risk.

f. In the Category field, double-click and select a category from the list, if

applicable.

370

g. In the Owner field, double-click then click .

5) In the Select Resource dialog box, select an owner for the risk and click OK.

6) On the EPS page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Assigning a Risk to an Activity

Assign a risk to an activity to explicitly identify the activity impacted by the risk.

You can assign a risk to an activity while you are adding project risks on the Risks page or

while managing your activities on the Activities page.

To assign a risk to an activity from the Risks page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Risks.

3) , click on a risk.

4) Click on the Activities detail window and click Assign Activities .

5) On the Select Activity dialog box:

a. Select an activity and click Assign.

b. Select any additional activities impacted by the risk and click Assign.

c. Click Close.

6) On the Risks page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

To assign a risk to an activity from the Activities page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select the activity you want to assign a risk.

4) On the Risks detail window, click Assign Risk.

5) On the Select Risk dialog box, select a risk and click OK.

6) On the Activities page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

371

Risk Response Plans

About Risk Response Plans

Response planning allows you to identify and document methods you might use to

manage project risks. When you identify an area with a risk, create a risk response plan to

determine what actions could be taken to promote the most favorable outcome.

Working with Risk Response Plans

The Response Plans detail window is the area in the risk register where you create plans

for handling the identified risks. Once you have identified which project risks need further

action, create a response plan and assign response plan action items for each risk to

reduce the negative impact on the project.

372

Table of Risk Response Plan Elements

Item Description

Response Plans toolbar: See Response Plans Toolbar.

Response Plan row: Create one or more response plans while you are in

the planning phase and indicate the response type. When you have

analyzed your response options, choose one response plan by selecting

the Active option next to the appropriate response plan.

In the example above, two response plans have been created for the

Concrete supply constrained risk. The first plan is to accept the risk and

take no action; the second plan is to reduce the impact of the risk by

contracting with alternative suppliers. You can see this second plan was

selected as the plan of choice.

Response Action Item rows: Each risk response plan can have multiple

response plan action items. Response action items are additional

activities you perform to reduce the impact of the risk.

For each response action item, assign the probability, schedule impact,

cost impact, and any additional user-defined impacts, which is based on

the outcome of the action item, to obtain a post-mitigated score.

In the example above, three activities are assigned to the risk plan. The

risk score will not significantly decrease until all three response items are

complete. By taking action on this risk and creating a response plan, we

can see that the impact of this risk can be significantly reduced.

Developing a Risk Response Plan

Once you have identified a risk for your project, you can then create a risk response plan

to help manage the project risk. A risk response plan includes a name for the plan and

response plan action items. You can create multiple risk response plans for a risk each

with multiple response action items. When you determine which plan will best meet the

project needs, you select the Active option next to the appropriate response plan. One

response plan must always be active.

To develop a risk response plan complete the following tasks:

1) Adding Risk Response Plans (on page 372)

2) Adding Risk Response Plan Action Items (on page 373)

3) Assigning Activities to Risk Response Plan Action Items (on page 374)

Adding Risk Response Plans

Add one or more response plans to a risk to plan alternative activities that might reduce

the probability of a risk occurring, or to reduce the impact of the risk.

Projects

373

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Risks.

3) On the Risks page, click on a risk, and then click the Response Plans detail window.

4) On the Response Plans detail window:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the ID field, double-click and type a response plan ID.

c. In the Name field, double-click and type a name for the new response plan.

d. In the Response Type field, double-click and select a response type from the list.

5) On the Risks page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Note: After you decide which response plan you are implementing,

select the Active option next to the appropriate response plan.

Adding Risk Response Plan Action Items

Each risk response plan can include multiple response plan action items.

To add a risk response plan action item:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Risks.

3) On the Risks page, click on a risk, and then click the Response Plans detail window.

4) Repeat the following for each response action you want to add to a risk response

plan:

a. On the Response Plans detail window:

1. Click on the response plan for which you are adding a response action and

click Add a Response Action.

2. In the ID field, double-click and type an ID for the response action item.

3. In the Name field, double-click and type a name for the response action item.

4. In the Owner field, double-click and click .

b. On the Select Owner dialog box, select a name and click OK.

c. On the Response Plans detail window:

1. In the Status field, double-click and select a status from the list.

2. In the Start Date field, double-click and select a start date from the calendar.

This is an optional field. If you assign an activity to the response action, the

activity date and total cost for the activity will override the values you just

entered.

3. In the Probability field, double-click and select a probability based on the

response action.

Note: If a risk scoring matrix is not assigned to your project, the

Probability, Schedule, and Cost fields are disabled.

374

4. In the Schedule field, double-click and select a schedule impact based on the

response action.

5. In the Cost field, double-click and select a cost impact based on the response

action.

6. If there are any user-defined impact fields, double-click in the field and select

an impact based on the response action.

5) On the Risks page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Note: After you decide which response plan you are implementing,

select the Active option next to the appropriate response plan.

Assigning Activities to Risk Response Plan Action Items

Existing activities can be assigned to a response plan action item to identify the activities

necessary to respond to the risk. If you need a new activity for the response action, first

create that activity, then assign it to a response plan action item.

The cost values for the assigned activity are used in the cost calculations for the response

plan, and the activity start and finish dates are displayed in the response plan.

To assign an activity to a risk response plan action item:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Risks.

3) On the Risks page, click on a risk and then click the Response Plans detail window.

4) Repeat the following for each response plan action item:

a. On the Response Plans detail window:

1. Expand the appropriate risk response plan and click on the response plan

action item for which you are adding an activity.

2. In the Activity field, double-click and click .

b. On the Select Activity dialog box, click the activity and click Assign.

Note: If the Activity field is not displayed, click Select Columns

and click Activity.

5) On the Risks page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Exporting Risk Data

Risks data can be saved to an Excel spreadsheet (*.xls). All data is exported as it appears

in the current view. Customize the rows to display only the data you want to export.

To export risk data:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Risks.

Projects

375

3) On the Risks page, customize the table using the customize features. The fields that

are visible on the page are the fields that are exported to the Excel spreadsheet.

Click Select Columns to select the columns you want displayed in the

spreadsheet.

Click Customize Filter to filter the data by an existing filter, or create a new filter

to customize your view.

4) Click Export to Excel.

If prompted, select whether you want to open or save the export file.

377

Documents

About Documents

A document is a file or work product that you create and add to your Primavera work

environment. The application provides document management capabilities that enable

you to store, organize, manage, and access documents in a secure environment. The

available document management functionality depends on your configuration. When

the content repository is configured, the complete set of advanced document

management capabilities is available, including check in, check out, and document

reviews. When the content repository is not configured, a limited set of document

management features is available, such as adding, deleting, and relating items to

documents.

When a configured content repository is installed, P6 supports up to three general classes

of documents: project, private, and workgroup. Project documents are documents that

you relate to a project via P6. Only users with the necessary securities can edit project

documents. Private documents are documents that you add to P6 for your own use.

Private documents are not associated with any project and are available only to you.

Workgroup documents are documents that are added to a specific project workgroup.

These documents are available only to members of the workgroup.

When the content repository is not configured for use with P6, you can perform limited

actions on project documents only, and private and workgroup documents are not

available.

Working with Documents

There are three types of documents: project, private, and workgroup. P6 supports

document management features for project documents. When the optional content

repository is installed, P6 also supports private and workgroup documents.

Project documents are documents that a user relates to a project. You can work with

project documents from the Documents page, the Project Documents portlet on the

Workspace page, or the Documents portlet on the Workgroup Workspace page. It is also

possible to convert a project document to a private document.

You can add private documents for your own use. Private documents are not associated

with any project and are available only to you. You can add private documents to the

My Documents portlet on a dashboard. All private documents are stored in the My

Documents portlet on the Private Documents tab.

Workgroup documents are added to a specific project workgroup, which can be

thought of as a subset of a project. These documents are available only to viewers of the

workgroup. On the Workgroup Workspace page, workgroup documents are stored on

the Workgroup tab of the Documents portlet. Generally, users who have rights to a

project can see a workgroup and its contents.

378

The availability of a document and the actions you can perform on the document

depend on several factors:

Project and workgroup documents are available only to users who have access to

the corresponding project or workgroup. Private documents are available only to the

person who adds them.

A wider set of features including check in, check out, and versioning are available

only for content repository documents. When the content repository is not configured

for use with P6, you can perform limited actions on project documents only. Private

and workgroup documents are not available. All project documents appear in a flat

list under the project name in the Project Documents portlet and the Documents

page, regardless of whether they were added to the project via P6 or P6 Professional.

The security policy of a project document determines which actions you can perform

on that document; for example, you might only be able to view a document.

Note: Documents cannot be used with project templates.

Adding Documents to a Project without the Content Repository

In standard P6 configurations without the optional content repository, you can add

project documents directly from your computer or a network server to the project. These

documents are available to everyone who has access to the project.

To add a document to a project:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, if you opened more than one project, select a project from

the Select Project list.

4) In the Documents pane:

a. Click Modify.

b. Click Add Document.

5) On the Add Document page, click Add.

6) In the Select File dialog box:

a. Navigate to and select a file.

b. Click Open.

7) On the Add Document page:

Projects

379

a. Enter a name in the Title field.

b. Complete any of the remaining fields, including the optional Description for the

document.

c. Click Save.

Tips

You cannot add documents to template projects.

You can also add documents to a workgroup within the project from the Project

Documents portlet of the Workspace page.

Assigning Documents to Workgroups

Assign documents to a workgroup if they are related to the content the workgroup

covers.

To assign documents to a workgroup:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab:

a. Expand a project and select a document.

b. Click Access Level Options Assign to Workgroup.

5) In the Select Workgroup dialog box, select a workgroup and click OK.

Tips

The Assign to Workgroup option is disabled if the document is already assigned to a

workgroup.

You can only assign documents to workgroups of the selected project.

Creating Document Folders

If P6 is configured to use the content repository, you can create document folders as a

method of document organization in a project.

To create document folders:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

380

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab, select a project to which you will add the folder and click

Add Options Add Folder.

5) In the Add Folder dialog box:

a. Enter a name in the Folder Name field.

b. Select a policy from the Security Policy list.

c. Click OK.

Tips

Types of policies:

Read Only: The folder is not editable by other users.

Shared: The folder can be viewed, moved, edited, and deleted by other users.

Personal: The folder is hidden from other users.

You can also create document folders from the Documents portlet of the Workgroup

Workspace page, the Project Documents portlet of the Workspace page, or the My

Documents portlet of the Dashboards page.

Creating Document Templates

If P6 is configured to use the content repository, you can create document templates

that you can use as a foundation when adding new documents.

To create document templates:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab, select a project and click Add Options Create New

Template.

5) In the Select File dialog box, select a file and click Open.

6) On the Project tab, click the General tab.

Projects

381

7) On the General tab:

a. Enter a name in the Title field.

b. Select a policy from the Security Policy list.

c. Click Save.

Tips

Select the Template Document option to make this document a template.

Types of policies:

Read Only: The folder is not editable by other users.

Shared: The folder can be viewed, moved, edited, and deleted by other users.

Personal: The folder is hidden from other users.

You can also create document templates from the Documents portlet of the

Workgroup Workspace page, the Project Documents portlet of the Workspace page,

or the My Documents portlet of the Dashboards page.

Copying Documents from Existing Templates

If P6 is configured to use the content repository, you can copy documents from

templates to add a new document based on an existing template.

To copy documents from templates:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab, select a project and click Add Options Copy from existing

template.

5) In the Select a Template to copy from dialog box, select a template and click OK.

6) On the Project tab:

a. Click the General tab and enter a name in the Title field.

b. Click and configure each tab as necessary.

c. Click Save.

Tips

The Select a Template to copy from dialog box displays all the template documents

that exist for the project.

382

Types of policies:

Read Only: The folder is not editable by other users.

Shared: The folder can be viewed, moved, edited, and deleted by other users.

Personal: The folder is hidden from other users.

You can also create document templates from the Documents portlet of the

Workgroup Workspace page, the Project Documents portlet of the Workspace page,

or the My Documents portlet of the Dashboards page.

Sending E-Mail about Documents

You can send e-mail for a project or workgroup document that includes basic details

and a bookmark link to the document.

To send document e-mails:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab, select a document and click E-mail Document Details.

5) In the E-mail dialog box:

a. Edit the recipient list, message, and subject as needed.

b. Click Send E-mail.

Tips

You must have an e-mail address listed in you user profile to send an e-mail.

You can also send document e-mails from the Documents portlet of the Workgroup

Workspace page, the Project Documents portlet of the Workspace page, the My

Documents portlet of the Dashboards page, or the Documents page (without the

content repository).

Projects

383

About the Content Repository

The content repository allows users to collaboratively share and manage documents in

the application. The document management functionality available to you depends on

your configuration. When the content repository is configured, the complete set of

advanced document management capabilities is available, including check in, check

out, and document reviews. When the content repository is not configured, a limited set

of document management features is available, such as adding, deleting, and relating

items to documents.

Working with the Content Repository

Document management capabilities

The content repository functionality provides advanced document management

capabilities. With advanced functionality, you can use document version control

features to manage shared access to documents, organize project documents into a

folder hierarchy structure, and start or participate in document reviews.

Specifically, you can:

Download documents

Check in, check out, and undo check out documents

Search for documents

View a document's history

View a document's versions

Add, delete, and rename project folders

Move project documents to a different folder location

Start a document review

Terminate a document review

Review a document

Send e-mail about a document

Repository storage

Your content repository stores documents created in P6 in a folder reserved for these

documents. This folder is referred to as your P6 repository. Depending on your access

privileges and configured content repository, you can access documents that were

created outside P6. These documents are stored in their own folders in the content

repository.

Repository authentication

The application offers two content repository authentication modes. Authentication can

be configured for either single or multiple user authentication. In single user

authentication mode, all users access the repository using a single administrator user

login that is set during repository configuration. In multiple user authentication mode,

each user is authenticated based on their individual login.

384

Single user authentication mode is useful when you want users to have full access to the

content repository through P6 without having to maintain an equivalent list of users for

both P6 and the repository. This allows a repository administrator to maintain one set of

credentials for the repository. Single user authentication is also useful for quickly setting up

test repositories that can be accessed by testers with minimal fuss.

Multiple user authentication mode is the default mode. Multiple user authentication

mode provides increased security by restricting content repository access on an

individual user basis. Because it uses native auditing fields it also allows a clear audit of

who has created and modified files.

Adding Documents to a Project and Storing Them in the Content Repository

You can add documents from your computer or a network server to the content

repository and designate them as private, read-only, or shared within the current project.

When you add shared documents, they are ready for document reviews.

Note: This topic assumes that you have setup the optional content

repository.

To add a document to a project and store that document in the content repository:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab:

a. Expand a project.

b. (Optional) Expand one or more folders. If necessary, create a folder. See the

related topics.

c. Click Add Options Add Document.

5) In the Select File dialog box:

a. Select a document.

b. Click Open.

6) On the Project tab:

a. Click any of the five tabs and complete the data fields.

b. Click Save.

Projects

385

Tips

You can complete all available document management functions on the copy,

which has no relationship to the original document.

To add a document to a folder, select the folder before you click the Add Options

menu. You cannot add a document to a read-only folder.

At any time, you can privatize documents that you added to the application. To

make a document private, select the document in the Projects Documents portlet or

on the Documents page, click Access Level Options/Make Private.

You can also add public documents from the Project Documents portlet of the

Workspace page, the Documents portlet of the Workgroup Workspace page, or the

My Documents portlet of the Dashboards page.

Adding Documents to a Project from the Content Repository

In addition to adding documents to the repository, you can also add them to projects

from the content repository. When you add an existing repository document you can

decide to copy it for a fresh start within the new assigned project or simply link to it.

Note: This topic assumes that you have setup the optional content

repository.

To add a document from the repository and copy it or link it to a project:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab:

a. Expand a project.

b. (Optional) Expand one or more folders. If necessary, create a folder. See the

related topics.

c. Click Add Options Add from content repository.

5) In the Select Document dialog box:

a. Select a document. If necessary, expand any folders or use the search field.

b. Select the Copy selected document or Link to selected document option.

c. Click OK.

6) On the Project tab:

a. Click any of the five tabs and complete the data fields.

386

b. Click Save.

Tips

Add a copy when you want project members to change the new document. Add a

link to a content repository document when you want to preserve the original

document.

The link displays in the folder you selected in your document view, indicating that you

have created a link to the document in its location in the content repository.

You can also link to repository documents from the Documents portlet of the

Workgroup Workspace page, the My Documents portlet of the Dashboards page,

and the Project Documents portlet of the Workspace page.

Checking Out Documents

Check out a document to save a copy to your local machine or another specified

location. Checking out a document locks the document to prevent others users from

making simultaneous updates to it. When a document is checked out, users can still view

and download the document, but they cannot modify, delete, or check it out.

To check out a document:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab, select a project and click Check Out options Check out.

5) In the Check Out Document dialog box, click Check Out document to .

6) In the Save As dialog box, select a location and click Save.

7) In the Check Out Document dialog box:

a. Select or clear the option to determine if you want the document to automatically

open after it is checked out.

b. Click Check Out.

Tips

To undo a check out, click Undo Check Out on the Check Out options menu.

When an item is checked out, it will have a beside it.

The content repository must be configured for use with P6 to enable the functionality

described in this topic.

Projects

387

You can also check out documents from the My Documents portlet of the

Dashboards page, the Documents portlet of the Workgroup Workspace page, and

the Project Documents portlet of the Workspace page.

Checking In Documents

Check in a document when you are finished with it. You must check in a document to lift

the lock that a check out places on a document.

To check in a document:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab, select a checked out document and click Check Out

options Check in.

5) In the Check In Document dialog box:

a. Click Select Document and verify that the path to the document is correct.

b. Click the Comments field and enter any comments you want to include with the

document.

c. Select the Delete Local Files option if you want the application to automatically

delete the document from your local drive or other location.

d. Click Check In.

Tips

When an item is checked out, it will have a beside it.

The content repository must be configured for use with P6 to enable the functionality

described in this topic.

You can also check out documents from the My Documents portlet of the

Dashboards page, the Documents portlet of the Workgroup Workspace page, and

the Project Documents portlet of the Workspace page.

Configuring Document Details

If P6 is configured to use the content repository, you can view and edit detailed

information for private documents, workgroup documents, and documents you have

privileges to modify.

388

To configure document details:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab:

a. Expand a project and select a document.

b. Click the General tab and configure the fields, options, and lists as necessary.

c. (Optional) Click the Description tab and enter a description in the field.

d. Click the Related Items tab to relate items. See Assigning Related Items to

Documents (on page 388).

e. Click Save.

Tips

You can also click Edit Details in the My Documents portlet of the Dashboards page,

the Project Documents portlet of the Workspace page, or the Documents portlet of

the Workgroup Workspace page to access the Document Details dialog box.

Assigning Related Items to Documents

You can assign related activities, WBSs, issues, and documents to a document.

To assign related items to a document:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab:

a. Expand a project and select a document.

b. Click the Related Items tab.

5) On the Related Items tab:

Projects

389

To relate activities or WBSs, click Relate Activities or WBS and select activities or

WBSs from the dialog box.

To relate issues, click Relate Issues and select issues from the dialog box.

To relate documents, click Relate Documents and select documents from the

dialog box.

6) On the Project tab, click Save.

Tips

You can also click Edit Details in the My Documents portlet of the Dashboards page, the

Project Documents portlet of the Workspace page, or the Documents portlet of the

Workgroup Workspace page to access the Related Items tab of the Document Details

dialog box. Expand the Related Items section on the Details of page of the Documents

page to assign related items to documents when your content repository is not

configured.

About Document Reviews

A document review is a process in which a specific version of a document is assigned to

one or more people to review. At some organization, reviews represent a helpful way of

sharing information and gathering specific comments or feedback from others. At others,

this type of collaboration is required as part of a quality process or compliance directive.

Initiate a review when you have a document that requires the approval of one or more

people. For example, you might have a new document that requires that four other

members of your department review it. Before making the document available to all

members of the project, you have each department member review the document for

accuracy.

Note: Document reviews require installation of the content

repository with P6.

When starting a document review, you can specify reviewers and select a review type.

These review types determine the approval requirements and reviewer sequence:

Anyone May Review: Enables any of the listed reviewers to approve or reject the

document version. Once one reviewer approves it, the review status changes to Review

Approved; once one reviewer rejects it, the review status changes to Review Rejected.

Everyone Must Review: Requires each listed reviewer to respond to the document review

to complete it. To change the review status to Review Approved, all reviewers must

approve the document. To change the review status to Review Rejected, only one

reviewer needs to reject the document.

390

Everyone Must Review in Sequence: Requires each listed reviewer to respond to the

document review in a designated sequence to complete it. To change the review status

to Review Approved, all reviewers must approve the document. To change the review

status to Review Rejected, only one reviewer needs to reject the document. Once one

reviewer rejects the document, the review is complete.

Reviewing Documents

If you have P6 installed with configured workflow and content repositories, you can start

or participate in a document review.

Select one of the links below based on whether you are starting or participating in the

review:

Creating Document Reviews (on page 390)

Responding to Document Reviews (see "Participating in Document Reviews" on page

163)

Creating Document Reviews

If you have the optional content repository installed with P6, you can initiate a document

review.

To create a document review:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Projects tab.

4) On the Projects tab:

a. Select the document you want reviewed.

b. Click Start Review.

5) In the Start Review dialog box:

a. Enter a value in each required field.

b. Click Assign Reviewers and select one or more reviewers from the dialog box.

Note: If you select the review type Everyone Must Review In

Sequence, use the Up and Down arrows to arrange the

sequence of reviewers.

c. (Optional) Click Due Date and select a date by which the reviewers must

complete the review.

Projects

391

d. Click Create Review.

Tips

Reviews you have initiated appear on the My Reviews tab of the Document Reviews

portlet on the dashboard. Click Edit Details, and view a list of all reviewer responses,

review details, and the names of reviewers who have not yet responded to the

review. Once the review is complete, the document no longer appears in the

Document Reviews portlet. You can subsequently access details for the completed

review from the Document Details dialog box.

If the Start Review button is disabled, this indicates one of the following conditions

exists, preventing the start of a new review:

The current version of the document is in review or has been reviewed

A previous version of the document is in review

Multiple documents are selected (You can send only one document for review at

a time)

The project or document is already checked out for exclusive use

The document's Security Policy is set to Personal

You do not have the appropriate privileges

A template is open

You can also create document reviews from the Project Documents or

Communication Center portlets of the Workspace page or the My Documents portlet

of the Dashboards page.

Searching for Documents

You can search for documents using a basic search with keywords and operators or you

can conduct an advanced search and construct more complex search queries for

documents.

Click one of the following links to see how to perform a quick or advanced search:

Searching for Documents (Advanced Search) (on page 392)

Searching for Documents (Quick Search) (on page 392)

Tips

From a dashboard, you can search your private documents, and all project

documents to which you have access.

From a workgroup, you can search all documents that belong to the workgroup, and

all other documents in that project.

You can only search for project documents that have been added in P6 by a user

who has a configured content repository installed.

Documents are listed in order of their relevance to the search criteria. Documents

that are most closely related to the search criteria appear first in the list.

392

Searching for Documents (Advanced Search)

You can perform advanced searches for documents using authors and dates.

To search for documents:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab, click Search Options Search.

5) In the Document Search dialog box, click Advanced .

6) In the Advanced Search Options section:

Expand the Search by Person section and configure the Author list.

And/Or

Expand the Search by Date section and configure the option and fields.

7) In the Document Search dialog box, click Search.

Tips

You can search by author, by creation date, or both. If you enter a value in both

sections, the application searches for all documents that were added by the author

and created between the dates you list.

The application lists the most relevant documents first.

Click Clear Criteria to reset the Document Search dialog box.

You can only search for project documents that have been added to P6 by a user

with a configured content repository.

To clear the search results, click Search Options/Clear Search Results.

When using any of the Advanced Search options, you can only search the most

current versions of documents.

You can also search for documents from the Project Documents portlet of the

Workspace page, the Documents portlet of the Workgroup Workspace page, and

the My Documents portlet of the Dashboards page.

Searching for Documents (Quick Search)

You can perform quick searches for documents using only text.

To search for documents:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Projects

393

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab, click Search Options Search.

5) In the Document Search dialog box:

a. Enter keywords and operators in the Search Text field.

b. (Optional) Select the Search title and contents option to search document titles

and content.

c. Enter a value in the Limit results to (maximum 100) field to specify a limit on the

number of search results.

d. Click Search.

Tips

Type operators in capital letters.

The application lists the most relevant documents first.

Click Clear Criteria to reset the Document Search dialog box.

You can only search for project documents that have been added in P6 by a user

who has a configured content repository installed.

To clear the search results, click Search Options/Clear Search Results.

You can also search for documents from the Project Documents portlet of the

Workspace page, the Documents portlet of the Workgroup Workspace page, and

the My Documents portlet of the Dashboards page.

Viewing Documents

If P6 is configured to use the content repository, you can view public documents or your

private documents. If you belong to a workgroup, you can also view workgroup

documents.

To view documents:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

394

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab:

a. Expand a project and select a document.

b. Click View Options View.

5) In the Opening dialog box, select the Open with option to open the file or select the

Save File option to save the file to your computer and click OK.

Tips

If P6 is configured with a content repository and you have the appropriate privileges,

you can view documents with AutoVue from the Documents detail window of the

Activities page.

You can also view documents from the Documents detail window of the Activities

page, the Project Documents portlet of the Workspace page, or the My Documents

portlet of the Dashboards page.

Downloading Documents

If P6 is installed with a configured content repository and workflow repository, you can

download a read-only copy of a document to your local machine or another specified

location.

Downloading enables you to keep a personal copy of the document and make

modifications to it in the document's native application. Any changes you make to the

document are saved locally and do not affect the original document in P6.

To download documents:

1) Open one or more projects in the Projects section using one of the following methods:

Click Projects to open the last project or group of projects you were working

with.

Click the Projects menu and choose one of the most-recently used projects

or group of projects.

Click the Projects menu and choose Open Projects to select a project or

group of projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, select the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab, expand a project, select a document, and click View

Options Download.

5) In the Download Document dialog box:

a. Click the Path field and enter a path or click and select a download location

from the dialog box.

Projects

395

b. Select the Open Document option if you want the document to open

automatically after it is saved.

c. Click Download.

Tips

a. You can also download documents from the My Documents portlet of the

Dashboards page, the Project Documents portlet of the Workspace page, and the

Documents portlet of the Workgroup Workspace page.

About Scheduled Services

Scheduled Services runs a service at the time and frequency that you select for the

projects that you choose. You can schedule the following types of services: schedule,

apply actuals, level, and summarize. Use this feature to schedule services so you do not

have to manually run them.

Creating Scheduled Services

You can schedule services to run at intervals you choose on projects that you select.

Available services include apply actuals, level, schedule, and summarize.

To create scheduled services:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Scheduled Services.

2) On the Scheduled Services page, click Add (Insert).

3) In the Edit Service dialog box:

a. Enter or select a value for every field.

b. Select or clear the Enable Service option.

c. Click Add and assign one or more projects from the dialog box.

d. Click Save.

Tips

You can also enable or disable services directly on the Scheduled Services page;

select or clear the Enabled option for the service you want to enable or disable.

You cannot schedule services for project templates.

Configuring Scheduled Services

You can configure the name, time, frequency, projects, and settings for a scheduled

service.

To configure scheduled services:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Scheduled Services.

2) On the Scheduled Services page, click Edit.

3) In the Edit Service dialog box:

396

a. Configure the fields and lists.

b. Select or clear the Enable Service option.

c. In the Select Projects table:

1. Click Add and assign one or more projects or groups from the dialog box.

2. Click Delete to remove projects or groups from the table.

d. Click Save.

Tips

You cannot change the Service Type.

You can also enable or disable services directly on the Scheduled Services page;

select or clear the Enabled option for the service you want to enable or disable.

Services for project templates cannot be scheduled, they must be run manually.

397

Roles

About Roles

Roles represent personnel job titles or skills needed to execute projects. Architect,

general laborer, quality assurance tester, and engineer are all examples of possible roles.

You can create a standard set of roles that you then assign to labor and non-labor

resources and activities for all projects in the organization. You can establish an unlimited

number of roles and organize them in a hierarchy for easier management and

assignment. The set of roles you assign to an activity defines the activity’s skill

requirements. You can also define multiple price per unit rates and unit per time limits for

each role to accurately plan future costs and allocation.

You can assign one or more roles to individual resources. When you assign roles to a

resource, you also indicate their proficiency in that role and identify which role is their

primary role. A primary role is the main role the resource is currently performing. The

proficiency level describes the resource's skill level in that role. For example, Joe is a

resource and fills the role of both software engineer and manager. He has been a

software engineer for 20 years and is 1 - Master in that role; however, his primary role is

manager, which he has been for 5 years and his proficiency level is 3- Skilled.

Assign roles to activities as you would resources during project schedule and cost

planning. When your plans are finalized, you can replace roles with resources, based on

each activity’s role and skill requirements.

Creating Roles

Create a standard set of roles that you can assign to labor and nonlabor resources and

activities.

To create roles:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Roles tab.

4) On the Roles tab:

a. Click Add (Insert), or click an existing role and click Add Child to add a role

in a hierarchy. A new row is added to the Roles table.

b. In the ID field, click and type a unique identifier for the new role.

Resources

398

c. In the Name field, click and type a unique role name.

d. To create or modify a hierarchy of roles, use the arrows on the toolbar to

position the new row.

For example, if a Project Manager role exists in the system and you just created a

Design Manager role, which is a type of Project Manager, use the up/down arrows

to position the new Design Manager role under Project Manager, and then click

the right arrow to indent the new row.

e. Click the Description detail window.

5) In the Description detail window, type a description of the role's responsibilities.

6) On the Roles tab, click the Prices detail window.

7) In the Prices detail window, click in a rate type field and enter the rate. Repeat for all

applicable rate fields.

8) On the Roles tab, click the Limits detail window.

9) In the Limits detail window:

a. Click Add (Insert) to define the units/time for the role over time.

b. In the Effective Date field, double-click and select the effective date on the

calendar.

c. In the Max Units/Time field, click and type the maximum work units per time for this

role.

10) On the Roles tab, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tip

Click Select Columns to select any additional fields that you want in the table. Then,

enter data in the additional fields you added.

Assigning a Resource to a Role

The set of roles you assign to a resource describes the resource's skill capabilities. These

role assignments make it easy to assign resources to activities according to role. You can

also assign roles to activities directly when you are unsure of the actual resources

available to work on the activities. You can later replace the roles with the applicable

resources.

To assign a role to a resource from the Roles tab:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Roles tab.

4) On the Roles tab:

a. Click the name of the role.

b. Click the Resources detail window.

5) In the Resources detail window, click Add (Insert).

Resources

399

6) In the Select Resource dialog box:

a. Choose a resource and click Assign.

b. Choose any additional resources for the role and click Assign.

c. Click Close.

7) In the Resources detail window:

a. To change the proficiency level for that resource, double-click the Proficiency

field and select a level.

b. If this is the primary role for the resource, select the Primary Role option for the

resource.

8) On the Roles tab, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

You can also assign a role to a resource from the Resources tab. Use this method if you

want to view all roles assigned to a single resource. See Assigning a Role to a Resource

(on page 404).

Assigning a Role Team to a Role

Using role teams can simplify resource planning. You can do this from either the Roles tab

or the Role Teams tab in the Resource Administration area. Use this method if you want to

view all role teams assigned to a particular role.

To assign a role to a role team:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Roles tab.

4) On the Roles tab:

a. Click the role you are assigning to a role team.

b. Click the Role Teams detail window.

5) In the Role Teams detail window, click Add (Insert).

6) In the Select Role Team dialog box:

a. Expand either the Global or User category, choose a role team, and click Assign.

b. Choose any additional role teams and click Assign.

c. Click Close.

7) On the Roles tab, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

You can also assign a role to a role team from the Role Teams tab. Use this method if you

want to view all roles assigned to a particular role team. See Assigning a Role to a Role

Team (on page 401).

400

Assigning Rates to Roles

Use this procedure to assign rates to the roles you created. Assigning rates to roles

enables you to more accurately determine total resource (and activity) costs. You can

assign up to five rate types depending on number of rate types set up by your

administrator.

To assign role rates:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Roles tab.

4) On the Roles tab:

a. Click a role.

b. Click the Prices detail window.

5) In the Prices detail window, click in the appropriate price fields and enter an amount.

The default time period is price per hour unless you specify another time period.

6) On the Roles tab, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Assigning Work Limits to Roles

Assign role work limits to define the maximum amount of work units the selected role can

perform in a single work period.

To assign limits to a role:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Roles tab.

4) On the Roles tab:

a. Click a role.

b. Click the Limits detail window.

5) In the Limits detail window:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the Effective Date field, double-click to open the calendar and choose a date

to start the Max/Unit limit.

c. In the Max Units/Time field, click and type the maximum work units per time for this

role. Enter these values as units per duration or as a percentage, depending on

your choice in the Time Unit Format area on the Global tab of the My Preferences

page.

6) On the Roles tab, click Save (Ctrl+S).

401

Role Teams

About Role Teams

A role team is a collection of roles that are often needed on the same project or the

same activities. Role teams are useful when you want to categorize and view allocation

for related roles. Role teams allow you to categorize and group roles so you can readily

find data relating to a particular role. When working with tabs and pages that display

role data, you can choose to organize the hierarchy by role team. You can view team

data such as total team units or individual unit values. If you have the required security

privilege, you can create global role teams. All users that have access rights to view

resource data can create user role teams.

Creating Role Teams

Use this procedure to create role teams. Role teams let you categorize roles so you can

view and analyze data that relates to a specific group that interests you. When working

with tabs and pages that display role data, you can choose to organize the hierarchy by

role team, then choose to view team data, such as total units for the team, or individual

unit values for each team member.

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Role Teams tab.

4) On the Role Teams tab:

a. Click either Global Role Teams or User Role Teams.

b. Click Add (Insert). A new row is added to the Role Teams table.

c. In the Name field, double-click and type a role name.

d. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

5) To assign roles to the role team, see Assigning a Role to a Role Team (on page 401).

Assigning a Role to a Role Team

Use this task to assign a role to a role team. You can assign a role to a role team from the

Role Teams tab or the Roles tab. Use this method if you want to view all roles assigned to

a particular role team.

To assign a role to a role team:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Role Teams tab.

4) On the Role Teams tab:

402

a. Expand either the Global Role Team or User Role Teams category, and click the

role team for which you are assigning a role.

b. Click the Roles detail window.

5) In the Roles detail window, click Add (Insert).

6) In the Select Role dialog box:

a. Choose a role and click Assign.

b. Choose any additional roles to assign to the role team and click Assign.

c. Click Close.

7) On the Role Teams tab, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

To view all role teams assigned to a particular role, assign a role to a role team from the

Roles tab. See Assigning a Role Team to a Role (on page 399).

403

Resources

About Resources

A resource is any quantifiable item in limited supply and of sufficient value to justify

tracking and assigning to specific activities for a project. Resources include general or

specialized labor, non-labor items such as equipment, and material items such as bricks.

Resources perform roles, if defined. Resources are indirectly assigned to activities by first

planning the role required. It is also possible to directly assign resources to activities. For

example, Chris, a level 2 contractor with the confirmed skills and status, is directly

assigned to activity 01. However, a technician level 4 role is assigned to activity 02. The

project will proceed while management determines the best available resource to fulfill

this role.

Adding Resources

Use this task to add resources to the resource pool. Resources include the personnel and

equipment that perform work on activities across all projects. Resources are generally

reused between activities and/or projects. Resources can be distinguished as either

labor, material, or nonlabor. Labor and nonlabor resources are always time-based, and

material resources, such as consumable items, use a unit of measure you can specify.

To add a resource:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resources tab.

4) On the Resources tab:

a. Click Add (Insert), or click an existing resource and click Add Child to add a

resource in a hierarchy. A new row is added to the table.

b. Click the General detail window.

5) In the General detail window, enter information in the appropriate fields.

6) On the Resources tab:

a. Click Select Columns and select any additional column headings that you

need in your view.

b. Double-click in any additional fields to enter data.

c. Click the Notes detail window.

7) In the Notes detail window, type any notes you want to capture for the resource.

8) On the Resources tab, click Save (Ctrl+S).

404

Tips

See Creating Import Templates (on page 410) and Importing Resource Data (on page

411) to learn more about adding resources to the resource pool by importing resource

data from a Microsoft® Excel (.xls) spreadsheet.

Assigning a Role to a Resource

The set of roles you assign to a resource describes the resource's skill capabilities. These

role assignments make it easy to assign resources to activities according to role. You can

also assign roles to activities directly when you are unsure of the actual resources

available to work on those activities. You can later replace the roles with the applicable

resources.

To assign a role to a resource:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resources tab.

4) On the Resources tab:

a. Click the resource.

b. Click the Roles detail window.

5) In the Roles detail window, click Add (Insert).

6) In the Select Role dialog box:

a. Choose a role and click Assign.

b. Choose any additional roles for the resource and click Assign.

c. Click Close.

7) In the Roles detail window:

a. To change the proficiency level for that role, double-click the Proficiency field and

select a level.

b. A resource can have many roles. The first role added is marked as the primary role.

To change this, select the Primary Role field for the appropriate role.

8) On the Resources tab, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

To view all resources assigned to a particular role, assign a role to a resource from the

Roles tab. See Assigning a Resource to a Role (on page 398).

Assigning a Resource Team to a Resource

Use this task to assign a resource team to a resource. You can do this from either the

Resources tab or the Resource Teams tab. Use this method if you want to view all the

resource teams assigned to a single resource.

Resources

405

To assign a resource to a resource team:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resources tab.

4) On the Resources tab:

a. Click the name of the resource you are assigning to a resource team.

b. Click the Resource Teams detail window.

5) In the Resource Teams detail window, click Add (Insert).

6) In the Select Resource Team dialog box:

a. Expand either the Global or User category, choose a resource team, and click

Assign.

Note: If you need to create a new resource team click on the

Global or User category, and then click Add Team.

b. Select additional teams, if necessary, and click Assign.

c. Click Close.

7) On the Resources tab, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

To view all resources assigned to a particular resource team, assign a resource to a

resource team from the Resource Team tab. See Assigning a Resource to a Resource

Team (on page 414).

Configuring Resource Settings

Use the Settings detail window available from the Administration Resources tab to define

settings for the resource, such as the resource calendar and default units/time, as well as

P6 Progress Reporter settings.

To configure resource settings:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resources tab.

4) On the Resources tab, select the resource for which you want to define general

settings.

5) Click the Settings detail window, review the following options and make selections

based on your project needs.

Calendar: See Assigning Calendars to Resources (on page 406).

406

Default Units/Time: Use the default value or change the default units/time value. Enter

these values as units per duration or as a percentage, depending on your choice in

the Units/Time Format area of the My Preferences page.

Overtime Allowed: Select to enable the labor resource to record overtime hours for

activities.

Overtime Factor: Type the number by which the resource's standard price should be

multiplied to determine the resource's overtime price.

Auto Compute Actuals: Select to automatically calculate the selected resource's

actual quantity of work according to the project plan rather than reported hours in P6

Progress Reporter. Clear this option if you plan to select Uses Timesheets.

Currency: Click to select a currency that is different from the default currency,

and click OK.

Calculate Costs from Units: Select this option to indicate that any new assignment for

this resource will have its cost recalculated whenever any quantity changes occur,

such as changing an activity's remaining duration.

Progress Reporting Settings: See Configuring Timesheet Reporting for Resources (on

page 407).

6) On the Resources tab, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Assigning Calendars to Resources

Assign a global or resource calendar to a resource to determine when the resource is

available to work.

To assign a calendar to a resource:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resources tab.

4) On the Resources tab:

a. Click a resource.

b. Click the Settings detail window.

5) In the Settings detail window, click in the Calendar field.

6) In the Select Calendar Name dialog box:

a. Choose the Global or Resource option.

b. Choose a calendar.

Note: If you want a personal calendar for the resource, click Create

Personal Calendar. See About My Calendar (on page 455). You

can also create a personal calendar from the Enterprise Data

page. See Creating Resource Calendars (on page 472).

c. Click OK.

Resources

407

7) On the Resource tab, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

You can perform the same procedure from the Calendars field on the Resources tab.

A resource can edit exceptions to their personal calendar. See Configuring My

Calendar (on page 456). To view a personal calendar, the resource must be a user in

the system.

Configuring Timesheet Reporting for Resources

Configure timesheet reporting if you are using P6 Progress Reporter.

To configure timesheet reporting for a resource:

1) If the resource is not already defined as a user in the system:

a. Add the user. See Creating Users (see "Creating User Accounts for P6 EPPM" on

page 517).

b. Assign the resource to the new user. See Assigning Associated Resources (on

page 519).

2) Enable access to P6 Progress Reporter. See Assigning Module Access (on page 520)

and mark the Team Member or Progress Reporter option.

3) Set the timesheet configuration options for the resource if you are implementing

non-automatic approval. See Configuring Resource Settings for Timesheet Reporting

(on page 407).

Tips

For faster setup of timesheet reporting, you can set Application Setting options to

automatically require timesheet use and designate a default approval manager

whenever you create a new resource. See Configuring Timesheets Settings (on page

461).

Configuring Resource Settings for Timesheet Reporting

Configure timesheet reporting settings if you are using P6 Progress Reporter and are

implementing non-automatic approval.

To configure resource settings for timesheet reporting:

Note: You must perform these steps in order when configuring

these settings for the first time for each new resource.

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resources tab.

408

4) On the Resources tab, click the Settings detail window.

5) In the Settings detail window, next to the Timesheet User Login field, click .

6) In the Select User dialog box, select the resources name from the list and click OK.

7) In the Settings detail window:

a. Select the Uses Timesheets option to enable timesheet reporting for the resource.

Note: If Auto Compute Actuals is selected, clear the option before

selecting Uses Timesheets.

b. In the Timesheet Approval Manager field, click .

8) In the Select User dialog box, choose a manager to assign to the resource and click

OK.

9) On the Resources tab, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Notes:

If you selected the New Resources Use Timesheets by Default

option on the Timesheets page of the Application Settings

pane, when you create a new resource, the Uses Timesheets

option is selected automatically after you select a user for the

Timesheet User Login field. You must still must grant that user

module access to log into P6 Progress Reporter.

Users designated as timesheet approval managers are not

automatically granted access to P6 Progress Reporter, even if

they are assigned the required module access. To enable

timesheet approval managers to access P6 Progress Reporter,

you must configure them as timesheet resources, as you would

any other resource that requires access to P6 Progress Reporter.

Configuring timesheet approval managers as timesheet

resources enables approval managers to log in to P6 Progress

Reporter to edit the timesheets of their reporting resources.

Assigning Resource Codes

With potentially hundreds of resources in use across the enterprise, resource codes

provide an efficient means for tracking and sorting resources for reporting or analysis.

Use this procedure to assign resource codes to resources. Once assigned, you can

categorize resources using codes.

To assign resource codes:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resources tab.

Resources

409

4) On the Resources tab:

a. Click a resource.

b. Click the Codes detail window.

5) On the Codes detail window, click Add (Insert).

6) On the Select Resource Code dialog:

a. Choose a resource code and click Assign.

b. Select additional resource codes, if necessary, and click Assign.

Note: You can only select one value from each code name

category. If you try to assign a second value from the same

category, the first value will be replaced with the new value.

c. Click Close.

7) On the Resources tab, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Assigning Resource Rates

Use this procedure to assign rates to resources. You can assign multiple rates to resources

to reflect price changes over time. For example, suppose the price per unit for a group of

resources was $20.00 per hour for the months January through June, but the price rate

increases to $30.00 starting in July through December. You can assign time-varying rates

for resources to more accurately determine total resource (and activity) costs.

To assign resource rates:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resources tab.

4) On the Resources tab:

a. Click a resource.

b. Click the Units and Prices detail window.

5) In the Units and Prices detail window:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the Effective Date field, double-click to open the calendar and choose a date

to start the new rate.

c. In the Max Units/Time field, double-click and type the maximum work units per

time for this resource.

d. In the appropriate price fields, double-click and type an amount. The default time

period is price per hour unless you specify another time period.

6) On the Resources tab, click Save (Ctrl+S).

410

Creating Import Templates

Create a Microsoft® Excel® template to use when importing resource data.

To create an import template:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resources tab.

4) On the Resources tab:

a. Click Select Columns and choose the columns you want available in the

import template. The following fields are available for import:

Resource ID

Resource Name

Resource Type

Active

Parent Resource

Note: Enter the ID for the Parent Resource.

E-mail

Office Phone

Other Phone

Notes

Employee ID

Title

Overtime Factor

Overtime Allowed

Calculate Costs from Units

Resource Codes

User-Defined fields

Note: Fields that are not in this list, but are visible in the table are

exported to the spreadsheet and marked with an asterisk. You can

edit the fields in the spreadsheet; however, the data in these fields

is not imported into the resources table.

5) Click Create Import Template.

6) In the File Download dialog box, click Open to modify the template or click Save to

save and close it.

Note: Do not move or change the first two rows in the spreadsheet.

Resources

411

Tips

When entering resource data in the Excel spreadsheet:

Be sure to include a Resource ID and Resource Name for each resource, otherwise all

data for that resource is excluded from the import.

For fields that include a check box in the application, enter the values true/false, or

y/n. The default system setting values are applied to these fields if no value is entered.

The following is a list of the check box fields available for import along with their

default values:

Active = true

Calculate Costs from Units = true

Overtime Allowed = false

Importing Resource Data

Use this procedure to import resource data from a Microsoft® Excel (.xls) spreadsheet.

Before you perform this procedure, you must create an import template and populate

the Excel file with resource data. See Creating Import Templates (on page 410).

To import resource data:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resources tab.

4) On the Resources tab, click Import from Excel.

5) In the Import Resources dialog box, click .

6) In the Open dialog box, browse to the name of the file (.xls) you want to import and

click Open.

7) In the Import Resources dialog box, click Import.

If errors are detected during the import, click View Log in the Import Successful or

Import Failed dialog box. If you want to save the log file, click Save.

413

Resource Teams

About Resource Teams

Resource teams provide a convenient way for you to associate personnel into smaller,

more meaningful groups within an organization. Using resource teams increases

efficiency in staffing activities, tracking allocation, and communicating project progress

and performance. When working with pages and tabs that display resource data, such

as the Resources Planning, Assignments, or Analysis pages, you can choose to organize

by resource team. You can then choose to view team data, such as total units for the

team, or view individual unit values for each team member. For example, the Resource

Usage tab available from the Analysis page provides total allocation data for the team,

as well as for each team resource when the tab is grouped by Resource Team.

Global resource teams are available to all users. User resource teams are only accessible

to the user currently logged in. You can create and modify user resource teams for your

personal use. If you have the required security privilege, you can also create and modify

global resource teams.

In addition to viewing Resource Teams from the Resources section, you can view the

resources that belong to a team, including each resource's primary role and number of

active projects, by viewing the Resource Team Summary portlet on the Dashboards

page.

Creating Resource Teams

Create resource teams to reduce potentially large resource pools into smaller, more

meaningful and manageable groups.

To create a resource team:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resource Teams tab.

4) On the Resource Teams tab:

a. If you are creating a global resource team, click the Global Resource Teams row

and click Add (Insert).

If you are creating a team only for your use, click the User Resource Teams row

and click Add (Insert).

b. In the Name field, double-click and type a resource team name.

5) In the Resources detail window, click Add (Insert).

6) In the Select Resource dialog box:

a. Choose a resource and click Assign.

b. Choose any additional resources to add to the resource team and click Assign.

414

c. Click Close.

7) On the Resource Teams tab, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Assigning a Resource to a Resource Team

Use this task to assign a resource to a resource team. You can assign a resource to a

resource team from the Resource tab or the Resource Teams tab. Use this method if you

want to view all resources assigned to a particular resource team.

To assign a resource to a resource team:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resource Teams tab.

4) On the Resource Teams tab, expand either the Global Resource Teams or the User

Resource Teams category and click a resource team name.

5) In the Resources detail window, click Add (Insert).

6) In the Select Resource dialog box:

a. Choose a resource and click Assign.

b. Select additional resources, if necessary, and click Assign.

c. Click Close.

7) On the Resource Teams tab, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

To view all resource teams assigned to a particular resource, assign a resource to a

resource team from the Resources tab. See Assigning a Resource Team to a Resource

(on page 404).

415

Resource Assignments

About Resource Assignments

The Resources Assignments area enables you to view a customized list of resource or role

assignments based on the filters you assign to the view. Using this view, you can analyze

assignment unit and cost values and make any necessary modifications to the

assignment data. You can also view unit and cost values in a spreadsheet based on a

specified timescale using the Usage spreadsheet. In addition, you can extend your

customized view by displaying the Gantt chart, which is a graphical display of the start

and end dates for the resource assignments.

Working with Resource Assignments in the Gantt Chart

The Resources Assignments area enables you to view a customized list of resources

based on the filters you assign to the view. You can extend this customized view by

displaying the Gantt chart, which is a graphical display of the start and end dates for the

resource assignments.

To customize the resource assignments view in the Gantt chart, you can:

Customize the Gantt bar type, height, color, label, and position.

Set the timescale and gray scale for non-worked hours.

Modify the start and end dates for assignments.

Viewing Resource Assignments in a Gantt Chart

View the Gantt chart for a graphical display of the start and end dates for resource

assignments.

To view resource assignment activities in a Gantt chart:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click Gantt Chart. The Gantt chart displays next to the

resource table.

4) To view the start and end dates of assignments for a particular resource, double-click

the Gantt chart next to the row in the resource table that contains the resource.

5) To change the timescale on the Gantt chart, right-click the dates at the top of the

Gantt chart and choose another timescale.

Tips

To customize the list of resources displayed in the table, click the Filters menu and choose

to use an existing filter, or create a new filter.

416

Customizing the Resources Assignments Gantt Chart Bars

Customize the settings for the Gantt chart view on the Resources Assignments page. You

can set features for up to three bars per assignment.

To customize the resource assignments Gantt chart bars:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click View and choose Gantt Chart Options.

4) In the Customize Gantt Chart Options dialog box, click the Bars tab.

5) On the Bars tab:

a. Click the Type list and choose one of the following bar types:

Note: Set at least one bar to Current Bar.

Current Bar - Shows a bar that spans the early start date/actual start date to

the early finish date/actual finish date for each assignment. For a Current

bar, you can select an additional option for showing the progress of

activities.

Late Bar - Shows the late start date to the late finish date of an assignment.

A Late bar does not display if the project has not been scheduled.

Plan Bar - Shows the planned start date to the planned finish date of an

assignment. This bar is used for simulating the outcome of the project

schedule as part of project planning.

b. In the Height field, select the height in pixels of each bar.

c. In the Color options, choose to display the bar with a selected color or to set an

activity code for the bar.

Note: Your administrator sets color definitions of activity codes.

To select a bar color, click to display the Color dialog. Select the color to

display from the Swatches, HSB, or RGB tab, then click OK.

To set the bar color by activity code, click and choose an activity code

from the Select Activity Code dialog. Click OK.

d. Select the Show Necking option to apply bar necking to each of the three bars.

Bar necking refers to indentations of bars in the Gantt chart during periods of

nonwork time.

e. Set Current Bar Options:

1. Select the Show Progress option to chart progress, or actual work, along the

Current bar. The Progress bar is blue.

2. In the Label field, select a bar label.

3. In the Label Position field, select the location on the bar to position its label.

Resources

417

Note: When you display many bars at once, for greater ease in

reading the bar labels and identifying a specific bar, you might find

it helpful to vary the position of the label on each bar.

4. In the Label Font field, click and select options for the font type, size, and

color of the bar label.

f. Click OK.

Setting the Resources Detailed Assignments Gantt Chart Timescale

Set the timescale interval of the Gantt chart and apply shading for non-work time.

Note: If you only want to change the timescale, right-click the date

bar in the Gantt chart and choose another timescale.

To set the timescale interval and apply shading for non-work time:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click View and choose Gantt Chart Options.

4) In the Customize Gantt Options dialog box, click the Gantt Options tab.

5) On the Gantt Options tab:

a. Click the Timescale list and select the timescale for the Gantt chart.

Note: If the Week/Day timescale is selected, the following fields are

not applicable:

Period Actual Units

Period At Completion Units

Period Actual Cost

Period Actual Completion Cost

b. Select Show shading for non-work time to apply shading to non-work time

represented in the Gantt chart.

c. Click the Color list and select the shade of gray to apply.

d. Click OK.

Modifying Resource Assignment Dates in the Gantt Chart

Modify resource assignment dates on the Resource Assignments Gantt chart.

From the Gantt chart, you can modify:

Start and finish dates for assignments that do not have Actual Start dates

418

Finish dates for assignments that do not have Actual Finish dates

To modify resource assignment dates:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click Gantt Chart.

4) In the Gantt chart, click the bar to select it, and then click the selection handle at the

end of the bar and drag it to the preferred date.

5) On the Assignments page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

To display the Actual Start or Actual Finish columns, click Customize Columns to add

additional columns to your view.

To change the timescale on the Gantt chart, right-click the dates at the top of the

chart and choose another timescale.

Viewing Assignment Unit and Cost Spreads

Use the usage spreadsheet to view live unit and cost spreads for an activity assignment

for a resource or role.

To view the assignments usage spreadsheet:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click Usage Spreadsheet.

Note: To customize the list of resources displayed in the table, click

Customize Filter and either use an existing filter or add a new

filter.

4) To modify the usage spreadsheet settings, click View and select Usage Options.

5) In the Customize Usage Options dialog box:

a. In the Available Columns area, choose one or more columns and click Select

Items (Ctrl+Alt+RIGHT) to move the columns to the Selected Columns list.

Note: If the Week/Day timescale is selected, the following fields are

not applicable:

Period Actual Units

Period At Completion Units

Period Actual Cost

Period Actual Completion Cost

Resources

419

You can change this setting on the Gantt Chart tab of the

Customize View dialog box.

b. Choose the Start Date minus an optional amount of time and End Date plus an

optional amount of time.

c. Select Calculate average for units and costs if you are dividing the unit and cost

fields by a value, and then type a value in the Divide values by field.

d. Click OK.

Exporting Resource Assignment Data

Use this task to save customized detailed resource assignment information to a

Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet (*.xls). All data is exported as it appears in the current view.

To export resource assignment data:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page:

a. Customize the table using the customize features. The fields that are visible on the

page are the fields that are exported to the Excel spreadsheet, including the fields

that display for the Usage Spreadsheet.

Click Customize Columns to choose the columns to display in the

spreadsheet.

Click Customize Filter to filter the data by an existing filter, or create a

new filter to customize your view.

b. Click Export to Excel.

If prompted, choose whether you want to open or save the export file.

Assigning Resource Curves to Resource or Role Assignments from the Resources Assignments Page

You can assign a resource distribution curve to any resource or role assignment on

activities with a duration type of Fixed Duration and Units/Time or Fixed Duration & Units.

Resource usage and costs are distributed evenly during an activity unless you specify

nonlinear distribution using custom curves.

To assign a resource curve:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, display the Curves column if it is not visible on the table. To

display the Curves column:

a. Click Customize Columns.

4) In the Customize Columns dialog box:

420

a. Expand General and double-click Curve to move it to the Selected Columns list.

b. Click OK.

5) On the Assignments page:

a. Click the row with the resource or role.

b. Double-click the Curve field, and click .

6) In the Select Curves dialog box, choose a curve and click OK.

7) On the Assignments page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Note: You can also assign resource curves to resource or role

assignment from the Projects Activities page. See Assigning

Resource Curves to Resource or Role Assignments from the

Activities Page (on page 299).

Applying the Progress Spotlight to the Resources Assignments View

To quickly locate the activities you need to update, you can use the Progress Spotlight

feature, which highlights all activities that should have progressed during a specific time

period. This time period is defined by the smallest increment of the current timescale

starting with the current date. For example, if the current timescale is set to Month/Week,

Progress Spotlight highlights all activities that should have progressed during the week

starting with today's date.

To show or hide the Progress Spotlight:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page:

a. Click Gantt Chart, if the Gantt chart is not selected.

b. Click View and select Progress Spotlight.

Tips

In the Gantt chart, Progress Spotlight displays a yellow background, or curtain, to

indicate the time period during which progress should have occurred. You can drag

the end point of the highlighted area to extend or compress the time period.

In the table, all activities that should have progressed are highlighted. You can use

Ctrl+ the Up or Down arrow key to navigate to each highlighted activity in sequence,

recording progress in the appropriate data columns.

421

Resource Planning

About Resource Planning

The Planning page is a valuable tool to use to quickly and easily establish resource

demand on a proposed project without the need to perform time-consuming

resource-loading on a detailed project plan. This high-level allocation data can be

maintained through the life of the project and referenced when planning resources at a

more detailed level. While resources may not be assigned to specific activities at this

point, a portion of their time can be allocated towards the project, which informs project

managers of the intended commitment of the resource to the project. This helps to avoid

overallocation of resources during project planning.

Use the Resource Planning spreadsheet on the Planning page to specify, review, or

modify project-level and WBS-level allocation data for individual resources and roles

across a project lifecycle. For each resource or role assignment, you can record total

allocated units, which are calculated live and distributed across the project timescale, or

you can record individual timescale allocated values, which are summed to provide an

allocation units total. For resource assignments, you can base your allocation decisions

on the resources' current availability, which is recalculated live as you edit allocated

values.

You can view resource planning data for any project you have access to, but you can

only add, modify, and delete resource or role assignments if you have the required

project-level security privileges. Because the security privileges can be applied down to

the WBS level, it is possible for you to have the capability to assign resources and roles to

some, but not all, WBS elements within a project.

Customizing the Resource Planning Spreadsheet

For high-level future project planning, use the resource planning spreadsheet on the

Planning page to allocate resources and roles at the project and WBS levels. Assigning

roles is useful during the early planning stages of a project when resource availability is

not well known and you want to assign a temporary placeholder for a future resource

assignment.

To customize the resource planning spreadsheet:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Planning.

3) On the Planning page, click Filter and Group By.

4) In the Filter by dialog box:

a. Select a single project or filter the project display by portfolio, project, project

code, resource, resource team, resource code, role, or role team.

422

Choose Portfolio or Project Code Value to view all projects you have access

to within the portfolio or project code.

Choose Resource to view all projects the resource is assigned to and to

which you have access.

Choose Resource Teams to view all the projects that all resources on the

team are assigned to and to which you have access.

Choose Resource Codes to view all resources assigned to the selected

resource code and to which you have access.

Choose Roles to view all projects that the selected role is assigned to and to

which you have access.

Choose Role Teams to view all projects that the selected role team is

assigned to and to which you have access.

b. Click OK.

5) On the Planning page, click Customize.

6) In the Customize Spreadsheet dialog, make selections to customize your view.

a. On the General tab:

Choose the start date for the spreadsheet, and the time units and timescale

increments.

Clear the Show Availability row to improve performance and select Hide

WBS if empty to facilitate easier viewing when you want to plan allocation

only at the project level.

If you choose the Automatically summarize on leaving spreadsheet option,

make sure you have High level resource planning option enabled. This

option is available from the Projects EPS page from either the Summary Type

column or on the Summarization pane of the Project Preferences dialog

box.

Note: Summarization is a performance intensive process. Contact

your administrator before turning this option on.

If your Resource Planning spreadsheet is filtered by resource, resource team,

resource code, role, or role team, you can choose to select Show other

assignments when filtered by resources or roles.

If your Resource Planning spreadsheet is filtered by role or role team, you

can select either Show other assignments when filtered by resources or roles

or Show only unassigned role requests.

Note: If you disable the Show other assignments when filtered by

resources or roles option, the total units column and timescale

intervals columns in the the Resources Planning spreadsheet show

the summary totals only for the displayed allocated elements.

b. On the Columns tab, choose columns you want to display in the spreadsheet.

Resources

423

c. Click Save.

Tips

When you filter, an administration application setting determines the maximum

number of projects that are available in the spreadsheet. If you filter by a group that

includes more projects than the maximum defined, you will not see all projects in the

group. If you require a higher maximum, contact your administrator.

To expand the spreadsheet display to use the entire window, click Full Screen.

Assigning Projects or WBS Elements to Resources or Roles

You can assign one or more projects or WBS elements to one or more resources on the

Planning page when the Resource Planning spreadsheet is filtered by resource, resource

team, or resource code. You can also assign projects or WBS elements to roles when the

spreadsheet is filtered by role or role team.

To assign projects or WBS elements to a resource or role:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Planning.

3) On the Planning page, click Filter and Group By if you need to change your

selection.

4) In the Filter by dialog box:

a. Choose Resources, Resource Teams, or Resource Codes.

b. Click a resource, resource team, or resource code.

c. Click OK.

5) On the Planning page, right-click a resource assignment row and choose Assign

Project.

6) In the Assign Project dialog box:

To assign a project, select the project you want to assign, then click Assign.

To assign a WBS, select the project from the projects list, then click Assign WBS. On

the Assign WBS dialog box, select the WBS you want to assign, then click Assign. If

the selected project does not contain at least one WBS, a message appears

prompting you to select another project.

7) In the Assign Project dialog box, click Close.

8) On the Planning page, click Save.

424

Assigning Resources or Roles to Projects or WBS Elements

For high-level, future project planning or when a project does not require resource

assignments at the activity level, use the Resource Planning spreadsheet on the Planning

page to allocate and manage resources at the project and WBS levels. You can also use

the spreadsheet to allocate roles at the project and WBS levels; assigning roles is useful

during the early planning stages of a project when resource availability is not well known

and you want to assign a temporary placeholder for a future resource assignment.

To assign a resource or role to a project or WBS element:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Planning.

3) On the Planning page, click Filter and Group By if you need to change your

selection.

4) In the Filter by dialog box, select a portfolio, project code, or project to filter resource

planning data, and then click OK.

5) On the Planning page, double-click a project name to expand the project, and click

the project or WBS row.

6) On the Planning page, to assign a resource or a role, choose one of the following

options:

Click Assign Resource to select from a list of resources.

In the Select a Resource dialog box, choose a resource, click Assign, and

then Close.

Click Assign Resource Using Search to search for resources who meet specific

requirements. For example, you can search for resources that are assigned a

specific role or resource code.

a. In the Assign by Search dialog box, select your search criteria and click Run

Search.

b. In the Search Results dialog box, select a resource and click Assign Resource.

Note: When you assign a resource using the Assign Resource

Using Search functionality, the search criteria you specify is saved;

a Yes link appears in the Search Criteria column beside the

assignment, indicating search criteria is specified. This saved

search criteria can be useful at a later time if you ever need to

modify the resource assignment and want to reuse the same

criteria.

Click Assign Role to select from a list of roles.

In the Select Role dialog box, choose a role, click Assign, and then Close.

Notes:

Resources

425

Once a role is assigned, you can then define search criteria for

the assignment to assist with future staffing of the role. Defining

search criteria enables you to more accurately identify the type

of resource required to staff the role.

To define search criteria, click the Yes or No link in the Search

Criteria field. The Yes or No link indicates whether saved search

criteria exists for the assignment.

7) On the Planning page:

a. Clear the Committed option if the assignments are not definitely committed to the

project.

Note: When calculating resource availability, only the committed

assignments are considered.

b. Click Save.

Tips

The list of resources you can select from, the resource pool, and the list of resources

returned as search results include only the resources you have access to, based on

resource security, and current project resources. Also, you cannot assign material

resources. When searching, you have an option to filter nonlabor resources from the

results.

Modifying Resource or Role Assignment Dates

Use the Resource Planning spreadsheet to modify the assignment dates for a project.

To modify resource or role assignment dates:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Planning.

3) On the Planning page:

a. Locate the project the resource or role is assigned to, and then click the resource

or role.

Note: See Customizing the Resource Planning Spreadsheet (on

page 421) if the project you want is not in view.

b. Double-click the Start or Finish field and choose a date, or select the Life of Project

option to assign the resource or role for the full project duration.

426

Note: The timeline of a Life of Project (LOP) assignment corresponds

to the project start (Planned Start) and finish (Schedule Finish)

dates. When you select this option for an assignment, if the project

has a scheduled finish date, the total allocated units are

redistributed across the timescale based on these new dates and

the assignment start and finish dates are disabled for editing.

Spreadsheet cells that fall outside the life-of-project date range

are also disabled. If the project does not have a scheduled finish

date, the assignment dates and spread of allocated units remain

as they are.

c. Click Save.

Allocating Units or the Percentage of Available Units to Resources or Roles

Use the Resource Planning spreadsheet to allocate a number of available units to

resources or roles or a percentage of available units to resources for a project or WBS.

To allocate units:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Planning.

3) On the Planning page:

a. Locate the project the resource or role is assigned to, and then click the resource

or role.

Note: See Customizing the Resource Planning Spreadsheet (on

page 421) if the project you want is not in view.

b. Review the timescale columns for Available and Allocated units (see the Usage

column). For resources, use the values in the Available row as a guide to efficient

workforce decisions.

c. To allocate the number of units, double-click in the allocated field in the

appropriate timescale column and enter a unit.

To allocate a percentage of available units, double-click in the % Allocation field

and enter a number. As you make changes to the % Allocation field, the total units

and corresponding timescale allocated units are recalculated and displayed in

the spreadsheet.

Note: You can only allocate a percentage of time to a resource,

not a role.

Resources

427

For example, assume a resource works for 8 hours/day (specified in the resource's

calendar). If you want to allocate 50% of the resource's time for project A from Mar

12, 2006 (Start) to Mar 16, 2006 (End), you can specify 50% in the % Allocation field.

Based on this, total units would be calculated as 20 hours (4 hours/day times 5

days). The timescale allocated units would be recalculated and displayed

depending on display options set. See Customizing the Resource Planning

Spreadsheet (on page 421).

d. Click Save.

Notes:

When calculating spreadsheet Allocated values for resource

assignments, to determine total working hours for the time

period, the application uses the resource's calendar and the

hours/day setting defined in the Global Preferences; for role

assignments, the application uses the project calendar. The

application also uses the Global Preferences hours/time period

settings to convert time units for display based on the Time Units

Display option you choose.

Each time you edit the allocated total units for a resource or

role, the corresponding timescale allocated values are

recalculated and updated in the spreadsheet; for a resource,

the timescale available values are also recalculated.

When you edit a spreadsheet interval allocated value, total

allocated units for the resource or role are recalculated; a

resource's availability is also recalculated. Additionally, if the

spreadsheet interval you edit is prior to the current assignment

start date or later than the current assignment finish date, the

corresponding assignment date is adjusted to reflect the

change.

The Resource Planning spreadsheet uses summary data to

calculate availability, so it reflects values as of the last date the

summarizer was run for a project. Assignment changes within a

project after that date will not be reflected until the project is

again summarized. See Summarizing Projects (on page 222).

Synchronizing Resource Planning Dates

Use this procedure to synchronize resource planning dates. If a project is rescheduled

after you have designated Life of Project (LOP) assignments, or if you change a project's

forecast dates, assignment start and finish dates might no longer be accurate.

To synchronize resource planning dates:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Planning.

428

3) On the Planning page:

a. To ensure that assignment dates match the current project timeline, filter the

Resource Planning spreadsheet to display only the project that has been

rescheduled or that has new forecast dates.

b. Click Synchronize Resource Dates.

4) On the Synchronize Dates dialog box:

a. Select one of the following synchronization options.

If you rescheduled a project and want to match LOP assignments to current

project dates, choose Life of Project assignments to Project dates.

When you choose this option, if the project has a scheduled finish, all LOP

assignment dates are revised to match the project Planned Start and Schedule

Finish dates and are disabled for editing. For each LOP resource assignment,

the total allocated units are redistributed across the timescale based on these

new dates. Spreadsheet cells that fall outside the life-of-project date range are

disabled. For any resource that has no available worktime during the new

project timeline, total allocated units are set to zero.

If you changed a project's forecast dates and want to match all high-level

planning assignments to the new forecast dates, choose All resource

planning assignments to Forecast dates.

When you choose this option, the project start date is moved to the forecast

start date and all resource planning assignments are moved accordingly. For

example, if the forecast start date is one month later than the original project

start date, all resource planning assignments are pushed out one month. When

moving the dates of a resource planning assignment, if the new date falls on a

non-work day, the assignment is moved to the first available work day that falls

after the non-work day. For example, for a resource working on a standard

five-day calendar, if moving an assignment one month causes the assignment

to start on a Saturday (non-work day), the assignment start date is moved to

Monday (the next available work day).

b. Click OK.

Splitting a Resource or Role Assignment

You can split resource or role units allocated to a project or WBS between two resources.

For example, you might initially assign all development work on a WBS to one resource,

then decide you want to assign another resource to the WBS and split the units 50:50.

Another common use is when you are in the early planning stages of a project and are

at the point of identifying roles needed for the project, but do not necessarily need to

assign specific resources. For example, you determine that three full-time developers are

needed to complete this project. On the Planning page, you can assign one developer

role and assign the number of hours that would equal full-time work for three employees.

As employees are identified for the role, use the split resource feature to reassign the

workload.

Resources

429

To split units for a resource or role:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Planning.

3) On the Planning page:

a. Customize the spreadsheet as described in Customizing the Resource Planning

Spreadsheet (on page 421).

b. Click in the resource assignment row, then click Split resource assignment.

4) In the Select a Resource dialog box:

a. Select the resource between which you want to split the units.

b. Specify what percentage of the units you want to allocate to the selected

resource.

Note: You can also split the units across a time range without

assigning any percentage. For example, two resources might work

for a task jointly: the first resource is allocated from Jan 4, 2010

(Start) to April 16, 2010 (End), the second resource is allocated from

March 15, 2010 (Start) to April 16, 2010. The application splits the

units between the two resources across the specified time range;

the total units and timescale allocated units for both resources are

recalculated and updated in the spreadsheet.

c. If necessary, select the start date and finish date.

d. Click Assign.

Note: You can split the same assignment multiple times.

Categorizing Resource or Role Assignments using Status Codes

You can classify resource or role assignments using a set of status codes. Status codes

enable you to categorize resource or role assignments based on certain criteria that is

meaningful to you. The application comes with a set of default status code, or your

administrator can integrate a different set of status codes depending on your

organization's business needs.

For example, you might want to categorize role assignments by staffing status. In this

case, you might use status codes such as draft, filled, and submitted, then associate a

role assignment with a specific status, such as filled.

To categorize resource or role assignments:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Planning.

3) On the Planning page, double-click the Status field and click .

430

4) In the Select status dialog box, choose a code and click OK.

5) On the Planning page, click Save.

Tips

If the Status column is not visible, click Customize. Click the Columns tab, double-click

Status from Available Columns, and click OK.

Exporting the Resource Planning Spreadsheet

Use this task to save the Resource Planning spreadsheet to a Microsoft® Excel

spreadsheet (*.xls). All data is exported as it appears in the current view.

To export the Resource Planning spreadsheet:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Planning.

3) On the Planning page:

a. Customize the spreadsheet as described in Customizing the Resource Planning

Spreadsheet (on page 421).

b. Click Export Spreadsheet.

If prompted, choose whether you want to open or save the export file.

431

Resource Analysis

About Resource Analysis

The Resources Analysis section enable you to compare resource utilization between

resource teams, project resources, and department resource all from one central

location using the Role Usage, Resource Usage, and Resource Analysis tabs.

The Resource Analysis tab offers four chart options (histogram, stacked histogram, area

chart, and pie chart) to help you examine allocation data for individual resources, as

well as total values for resource teams and resource codes.

The Role Usage and Resource Usage tabs enable you to view resource allocation as a

histogram (total allocation across time) or as a spreadsheet (of resource allocation

values by project). You can view totals for an entire resource grouping (for example, role,

resource code, or resource team) or for individual resources.

You can customize the view on these tabs to view resource information specific to your

needs.

Analyzing Resource Allocations

Use this procedure to analyze resource allocations. The Resource Analysis page offers

four chart options to help you examine allocation data for individual resources, as well as

total values for resource teams and resource codes. Chart data reflects remaining plus

actual summary values.

You can customize options, along with filtering and grouping capabilities, to help you

focus on the data you want to see.

To analyze resource allocation:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) On the Analysis page, click the Resource Analysis tab.

4) On the Resource Analysis tab:

a. In the Group by list, choose to group by Resource Hierarchy, Resource Team,

Resource Codes, or Primary Role.

b. Click the resource, resource team, or resource code for which you want to

analyze allocation.

432

When you organize by resource team or resource code and select a team node

or resource code value, the selected chart displays total usage for all resources

you have access to that are associated with that team or code value. Selecting

an individual team member or resource who has the code value assigned displays

their allocation data. When you organize by resource hierarchy, selecting a parent

resource node does not roll up and display total usage for all child resources. The

hierarchy lists only those resources you have access to.

c. In the Chart Type list, select the type of chart you want to view (Histogram,

Stacked Histogram, Area Chart, or Pie Chart).

d. In the Filter by list, select the applicable filter.

Note: If you select a resource team or resource code that includes

either all material resources, or a mix of material and

labor/nonlabor resources, no chart data displays for Units. Since

these resource types use varying units of measure, for example,

time units for labor versus gallons for a material resource, total data

values for the team or code would not be meaningful.

e. Click Customize.

5) On the Customize chart dialog box, specify the information to display in the

histogram, as appropriate. You can:

Select to display unit or cost data.

Select the timescale. Choose a calendar interval (for example, Month/Week), or

choose Financial Period to display the range of financial periods if financial

periods are defined.

Note: Administrative options for summarizing resource and role

data are set in the Application Settings General page under the

Administer menu; if the options to summarize data by calendar

or financial period intervals are not selected, the corresponding

timescale options are not available. See Configuring General

Settings (on page 460).

Choose to display limit or allocation limit lines.

Choose to display the entire date range or a specific date range.

Select specific start and finish dates if you selected display a specific date range.

Select a color scheme.

Choose a chart display option (2-D or 3-D).

When you finish, click Save.

Tips

In a histogram or area chart, move the mouse over the corresponding area or bar to

display numeric allocation totals for a project or project code.

Resources

433

Assigning Resources to Unstaffed Activities

Use this procedure to assign resources to activities to fulfill staffing requests. Resources

include the personnel and equipment that perform work on activities across all projects.

Resources are generally reused between activities and/or projects.

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) On the Analysis page, click the Role Usage tab.

4) On the Role Usage tab:

a. Click the Group By list and select Role Hierarchy, and then select a role.

b. Select the Spreadsheet display option.

Note: If costs, rather than units, are displayed, click Customize. On

the Customize dialog box, choose to display Units and click Save.

c. Click the name of the project that has unstaffed units to display the project's

unstaffed activities.

5) On the Resource Staffing dialog box, select the check box next to each unstaffed

activity you want to staff with the same resource and click Assign Resource. Activities

that have specific resource requirements associated with them display Yes in the

Search Criteria column.

Note: To search for resources who meet specific requirements, click

Search. Specify new criteria required to staff the activity. To save

this new criteria, click Save as Template. Or, to search using

previously saved criteria, click Select Template. When finished

specifying search criteria, click Run Search to display available

resources.

6) In the Select Resource dialog box, select a resource. To review resource allocation

before assigning a resource, click Show Detail. This displays the selected resource's

assignments based on summarized data. If you want to assign the selected resource

to the activity, click Assign.

7) Close the Resource Staffing dialog box.

Tips

Resource usage data is based on summary data. Any changes made to assignments

within a project will not be reflected until the project is summarized. See Summarizing

Projects (on page 222).

A Global preference setting lets you choose to automatically summarize the project

after assigning resources, so that summary data always reflects current resource

usage. To choose this option, click the Administer menu and select My Preferences,

then click the Global tab if not already displayed. In the Resources section, select

Automatically summarize project after assigning resources. Click Save and Close.

434

You can view staffing requests in the Open Requests for Resources portlet; the portlet

is available for display in dashboards. See Configuring Dashboard Content (on page

132).

The list of resources you can select from is determined by your resource security

privileges and individual resource's current project association.

Viewing Role Usage

Use the Role Usage tab to view detailed role assignment information in histogram and

spreadsheet format.

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) , click the Role Usage tab.

4) On the Role Usage tab:

a. In the Group By list, choose to view roles by Role Hierarchy or Role Team.

b. Click a role name.

c. In the Display field, choose Spreadsheet or Histogram.

The spreadsheet shows staffed and unstaffed values per project. Click a role name

to see resources who can fulfill that role. Click a project name, if available, to see

the list of activities with the role assignment. See Assigning Resources to Unstaffed

Activities (on page 433) for more information.

The histogram you use to analyze the staffing requirements for any item in the role

hierarchy, whether the item you select represents one role or a group of roles. It

also enables you to easily identify staffing requirements by role and project, and

shows when a particular role is overloaded.

d. Click Customize.

5) In the Customize dialog box:

a. In the Display list, choose the display format (units or costs).

Choose units to view role use over the selected timescale interval; choose costs to

view how much money is being spent over time.

b. In the Timescale field, choose a timescale interval.

Choose a calendar interval (for example, Month/Week), or choose Financial

Period to display the range of financial periods if financial periods are defined.

Note: Administrative options for summarizing resource and role

data are set in the Application Settings General page under the

Administer menu; if the options to summarize data by calendar

or financial period intervals are not selected, the corresponding

timescale options are not available. See Configuring General

Settings (on page 460).

Resources

435

c. Choose to show or hide a Limit line. The Limit line shows maximum availability

based on the resource's calendar and Max units/time setting, along with

application settings for hours per time period.

d. Choose to show or hide the Allocation Limit line. This line shows the role's maximum

availability based on Allocated planning values specified in the Resource Planning

spreadsheet. Use this limit line to evaluate whether detailed activity assignments

are in line with what was planned.

e. Click Save.

Tip

The role usage data displayed on the Role Usage tab is based on summary data, so it

reflects values as of the last date the summarizer was run for a project. Assignment

changes within a project after that date will not be reflected until the project is again

summarized.

Viewing Resource Usage

Use the Resource Usage tab to view resource allocation as a histogram (total allocation

across time) or as a spreadsheet (of resource allocation values by project). You can view

totals for an entire resource grouping (role, resource code, or resource team) or for

individual resources.

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) , click the Resource Usage tab.

4) On the Resource Usage tab:

a. In the Group By list, choose to view resources by Resource Hierarchy, Resource

Teams, Resource Codes, or Primary Role.

b. Click a resource name, resource code, resource team, or primary role.

Note: When you select a resource code, resource team, or primary

role, data for the entire node displays. You can select a resource

name below the node to display data for a single resource or

choose a resource from the Resource Hierarchy list.

c. In the Display field, choose Spreadsheet or Histogram.

The spreadsheet shows more resource usage detail by displaying actual resource

allocation values per time period and per project. For example, you can view

each resource's work hours by project. The table indicates if and when the

individual is overallocated, and also identifies time periods where the resource is

underallocated.

436

Histograms enable you to analyze the resource allocation for the item you select,

whether the item you select represents one resource or a group of resources such

as a resource team. It also enables you to easily identify resource allocation

requirements and shows when a particular resource is overloaded.

d. Click Customize.

5) In the Customize dialog box:

a. In the Display list, choose the display format (units or costs).

Choose units to view resource use over the selected timescale interval; choose

costs to view how much money is being spent over time.

b. In the Timescale field, choose a timescale interval.

Choose a calendar interval (for example, Month/Week), or choose Financial

Period to display the range of financial periods if financial periods are defined.

Note: Administrative options for summarizing resource and role

data are set in the Application Settings General page under the

Administer menu; if the options to summarize data by calendar

or financial period intervals are not selected, the corresponding

timescale options are not available. See Configuring General

Settings (on page 460).

c. Choose to show or hide a Limit line. The Limit line shows maximum availability

based on the resource's calendar and Max units/time setting, along with

application settings for hours per time period.

d. Choose to show or hide the Allocation Limit line. This line shows the resource's

maximum availability based on Allocated planning values specified in the

Resource Planning spreadsheet. Use this limit line to evaluate whether detailed

activity assignments are in line with what was planned.

The resource usage summary data displayed in this view is based on either

detailed activity-level assignments or high-level (project, WBS) planning

assignments, depending on an option setting on the Summarization pane of the

Project Preferences dialog box accessed from the EPS page. To evaluate activity

level assignments against planned allocations, choose the summarize project

option for detailed activity resources assignments. You must have user access to

the project, appropriate module access, and required security privileges to specify

this setting.

When a project is summarized at the detail level, the date range for the timescale

is derived from activity start and finish dates. If the selected resource only has

high-level assignments outside that date range, the Allocation Limit line might not

appear. Changing to a larger timescale increment, for example from m/w to y/q,

might cause the Allocation Limit to appear.

e. Click Save.

Resources

437

Tip

The resource usage data displayed on the Resource Usage tab is based on summary

data, so it reflects values as of the last date the summarizer was run for a project.

Assignment changes within a project after that date will not be reflected until the project

is again summarized.

Exporting Resource or Role Usage Data

Use this task to save customized resource or role usage data from the Resources Analysis

section to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet (*.xls). All spreadsheet rows and the entire

visible timescale are exported.

To export resource or role usage data:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) On the Analysis page, click the Resource Usage tab or the Role Usage tab.

4) On the Resource Usage or Role Usage tab:

a. Click the Group By list and select a group type option.

The resources available depend on your selection, along with your resource

security settings. If you select an individual resource, the spreadsheet displays

allocation data for that resource. If the resource is a parent resource, you can

select the resource's children (if any); if the resource is a child resource, no other

resources are available.

If you select a resource code, resource team, or primary role on the Resource

Usage tab, the spreadsheet displays summary allocation data for the code, team,

or role; you can select an individual resource belonging to the code, team, or role.

When you select a code, team, or role, you can only view allocation data for

resources that you have access rights to view; resources you do not have access

rights to view are not listed.

b. Click a resource, role, code, or team name.

c. Click the Spreadsheet display option.

d. Click Customize.

5) In the Customize dialog box:

a. Modify the display or timescale options, or choose to show limits.

For units display, if a resource code or resource team consists only of material

resources or a mix of labor, nonlabor, and material resources, the spreadsheet

summary row displays dashes instead of totals. Summing unit values for mixed

resource types does not provide an accurate total because labor and nonlabor

resources are usually associated with time (such as hours or days), and material

resources are often expressed in non-time units of measure.

b. Click Save.

6) On the Resource Usage or Role Usage tab, click Export Spreadsheet.

438

If prompted, choose whether you want to open or save the export file.

Exporting Resource Data

Resource information, including resource unit and cost allocation data, high-level

planning information, and resource and role usage information can be saved to a

Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet (*.xls).

All data is exported as it appears in the current view. Customize the rows using the

customization options on the page, which are either a Customize link or a customize

columns button, to display only the data you want to export.

Use the following tasks to export data from the Resources section:

Exporting Resource Administration Data (on page 438)

Exporting Resource Assignment Data (on page 419)

Exporting the Resource Planning Spreadsheet (on page 430)

Exporting Resource or Role Usage Data (on page 437)

Exporting Resource Administration Data

Use this task to save customized resource or role information to a Microsoft® Excel

spreadsheet (*.xls) for a single resource or multiple resources. All data is exported as it

appears in the current view.

To export resource or role data:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click either the Resources or Roles tab.

4) On the Resources or Roles tab:

a. Click Select Columns. Choose any additional columns you would like to display

in the spreadsheet. You can also remove columns by selecting a column heading

with a check mark.

If there are children assigned to a parent resource or role, expand the resource or

role to view the information in the spreadsheet. There can be multiple child levels.

Expand until all the information you want to view is visible.

b. Click Export to Excel.

If prompted, choose whether you want to open or save the export file.

Exporting Resource Assignment Data

Use this task to save customized detailed resource assignment information to a

Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet (*.xls). All data is exported as it appears in the current view.

To export resource assignment data:

Resources

439

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page:

a. Customize the table using the customize features. The fields that are visible on the

page are the fields that are exported to the Excel spreadsheet, including the fields

that display for the Usage Spreadsheet.

Click Customize Columns to choose the columns to display in the

spreadsheet.

Click Customize Filter to filter the data by an existing filter, or create a

new filter to customize your view.

b. Click Export to Excel.

If prompted, choose whether you want to open or save the export file.

Exporting the Resource Planning Spreadsheet

Use this task to save the Resource Planning spreadsheet to a Microsoft® Excel

spreadsheet (*.xls). All data is exported as it appears in the current view.

To export the Resource Planning spreadsheet:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Planning.

3) On the Planning page:

a. Customize the spreadsheet as described in Customizing the Resource Planning

Spreadsheet (on page 421).

b. Click Export Spreadsheet.

If prompted, choose whether you want to open or save the export file.

Exporting Resource or Role Usage Data

Use this task to save customized resource or role usage data from the Resources Analysis

section to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet (*.xls). All spreadsheet rows and the entire

visible timescale are exported.

To export resource or role usage data:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) On the Analysis page, click the Resource Usage tab or the Role Usage tab.

4) On the Resource Usage or Role Usage tab:

a. Click the Group By list and select a group type option.

440

The resources available depend on your selection, along with your resource

security settings. If you select an individual resource, the spreadsheet displays

allocation data for that resource. If the resource is a parent resource, you can

select the resource's children (if any); if the resource is a child resource, no other

resources are available.

If you select a resource code, resource team, or primary role on the Resource

Usage tab, the spreadsheet displays summary allocation data for the code, team,

or role; you can select an individual resource belonging to the code, team, or role.

When you select a code, team, or role, you can only view allocation data for

resources that you have access rights to view; resources you do not have access

rights to view are not listed.

b. Click a resource, role, code, or team name.

c. Click the Spreadsheet display option.

d. Click Customize.

5) In the Customize dialog box:

a. Modify the display or timescale options, or choose to show limits.

For units display, if a resource code or resource team consists only of material

resources or a mix of labor, nonlabor, and material resources, the spreadsheet

summary row displays dashes instead of totals. Summing unit values for mixed

resource types does not provide an accurate total because labor and nonlabor

resources are usually associated with time (such as hours or days), and material

resources are often expressed in non-time units of measure.

b. Click Save.

6) On the Resource Usage or Role Usage tab, click Export Spreadsheet.

If prompted, choose whether you want to open or save the export file.

About Reports

Reports are collections of meaningful data saved in a common file format, designed

according to a particular template, and delivered to the right recipients. As permitted,

you can use the set of pre-defined BI Publisher reports or additional reports created by

your administrator. See Pre-defined BI Publisher Reports.

Note: Data for reports is accurate up to the last time the reporting

database was updated.

You can elect to run a report in one of two basic ways:

Reports

Reports

441

1) On-demand: This type of report generation has many other names, including ASAP,

instant, ad-hoc, and "on the fly". As these names imply, the application accepts

various input criteria from you in real time and then instantly generates and delivers

the selected report to an e-mail address, or prompts you to save or open the file

depending on output type.

2) Scheduled: This type of report generation requires that you first configure the options

and other details necessary to generate the report, but doesn't actually generate the

report output until the scheduled day and time. You can also generate previously

scheduled reports on-demand.

Note: Your ability to run and schedule reports comes from security

settings managed in BI Publisher. Contact your administrator for

more information.

442

Working with Reports

The reports section of the application hosts an array of reports integrated with BI

Publisher. The role assigned to you determines the extent of your permissions when using

reports in P6.

Reports

443

Reports Screen Elements

Item Description

View menu: Use the view menu to switch between the Reports view and

the Schedules view.

Reports view: The Reports view displays the list of reports you have access

to run. Run a report on-demand, or use the Schedule detail window to

schedule a report run. The remaining screen element descriptions in this

table provide more details on the Reports view.

Schedules view: The Schedules view displays the list of all reports you

have scheduled to run, organized by run frequency (Once, Daily,

Weekly, Monthly). You can suspend or activate the report run by

deseleting or selecting the Enabled option. Click on a report schedule

name and view an explanation of the report in the Description detail

window.

Reports view work area: Reports are listed by name and grouped by

folder. The report list, group names, and hierarchical structure are

defined in BI Publisher. See Pre-defined BI Publisher Reports for a list of all

reports that accompany P6. Your P6 administrator can remove

pre-defined reports and create additional reports for your use.

From this page, you can view report details including the file formats

available for each report. You can also run a report on-demand or print a

list of reports in your view.

Reports view detail windows:

Schedules detail window: This detail window lists all the scheduled report

runs for the selected report. Use this detail window to add a new

scheduled report run, suspend or activate a report run by selecting or

clearing the Enabled option, and view the history of report runs. You can

also run a scheduled report on-demand from this window.

Description detail window: This detail window provides an explanation of

the report.

Scheduling Reports

Use this task to schedule reports and configure report delivery settings.

To schedule a report:

1) Click Reports.

2) On the Reports page:

a. Click View and select Reports.

3) Select a report, and then click the Schedule detail window., click Add (Insert).

444

Note: You can also schedule a new report using an existing report

schedule. To do this, click Replicate Schedule instead of

Add (Insert), and then continue to follow the steps below.

4) In the Report Settings dialog box, click the Options tab.

5) On the Options tab:

a. In the Schedule Name field, enter a name that identifies the report schedule.

b. In the Template list, choose a template to apply to the report.

c. In the Format list, choose a file format for the delivery of the report.

d. Next to the Delivery Type field, click and enter or select e-mail addresses for

the intended report recipients.

e. In the Notification section, choose to send yourself status notification of the report

run.

f. In the Report Parameters section, enter or choose values for the parameters

specified in the Field Name column.

Caution: To avoid system performance issues, be as specific as

possible when entering values for reports. Narrow down your

choices to include only what is absolutely necessary.

6) In the Report Settings dialog box, click the Schedule tab.

7) On the Schedule tab:

a. Select a recurrence pattern from the Run list.

b. In the Schedule Options section, complete the fields shown. The screen elements

in this section are dynamically updated based on your selection in the Run list.

For example, for Daily scheduled jobs, enter the Start Date, Finish Date, Run Time,

and select one or more days for the report to run.

8) In the Report Settings dialog box, click Save.

Running Reports On-Demand

Use this task to configure report settings and immediately run a report.

To run a report on-demand:

1) Click Reports.

2) On the Report page:

a. Click View and select Reports.

b. Select a report.

c. Click Run Report.

3) In the Report Settings dialog box:

a. In the File Name field, enter a file name for the report.

Reports

445

b. In the Template list, choose a template to apply to the report.

c. In the Format list, choose a file format for the delivery of the report.

d. In the Delivery Type list, choose to have the report sent through e-mail or display

the file immediately.

If you chose E-mail, click and enter or select e-mail addresses for the

intended report recipients.

If you chose File, the report will display after you click Run.

e. If you chose E-mail, in the Notification section, choose to send yourself a status

notification of the report run.

f. In the Report Parameters section, enter or choose values for the parameters

specified in the Field Name column.

Caution: To avoid system performance issues, be as specific as

possible when entering values for reports. Narrow down your

choices to include only what is absolutely necessary.

g. Click Run.

Exporting a List of Reports

Use this task to save a customized list of available reports to a Microsoft® Excel

spreadsheet (*.xls).

All data is exported as it appears in the current view.

To export a list of reports:

1) Click Reports.

2) On the Reports page:

a. Click View and select Schedules or Reports.

b. Modify the table to view only the list of reports you want to export.

Expand or collapse group headings.

Click Columns. Choose any additional columns you would like to

display in the spreadsheet. A check mark indicates the column is selected.

You can also remove columns by clicking on a column name with a check

mark.

c. Click Export to Excel.

If prompted, choose whether you want to open or save the export file.

Viewing the Report Run History

Use this task to view the list of all runs for the selected report schedule since the last history

deletion.

446

Note: The run history is only captured for scheduled reports, or

on-demand reports delivered by e-mail.

To view the report run history:

1) Click Reports.

2) On the Reports page:

a. Click View and select Reports.

3) Select a report, and then click the Schedule detail window., select a schedule name

and click History.

4) On the History dialog box, review the recent report runs.

To clear the history, click Delete All History.

Click Save or Cancel to close the History dialog box.

447

About Administration

Administration allows you to control access to features and configure global preferences

for all application users in P6 and P6 Professional. The Administer menu presents a list with

the following choices:

Note: Many of the features described in this section require

additional settings to be configured in the P6 Administrator

application. See the P6 EPPM Administrator’s Guide.

My Preferences: Presents options for users to configure their own default application

behavior and data.

My Calendar: Appears only if you have been assigned a personal resource calendar.

Presents options for users to configure their own resource calendar.

Application Settings: Presents options to specify default administrative preferences

established by the P6 Administrator.

Enterprise Data: Presents options to configure the essential application framework your

users will need to manage all projects and is established by the P6 Administrator.

User Access: Presents options to add users, configure what features a user can access

and view as established by the P6 Administrator, assign Organizational Breakdown

Structures (OBS) to users, configure module access to P6 EPPM applications, and add

project and global security profiles to users.

User Interface Views: Presents options to configure how users see the interface view so

the user can view only the selected features established by the P6 administrator.

About My Preferences

My Preferences offers options for you to customize the data display format across all

sections of P6. The options you customize are exclusively yours. You can alter global

preferences, including formats for time units, dates, and currencies. You can also

customize view preferences if the P6 Administrator gives you access to do so. Some view

preferences you can customize include menu items and pages. Finally, you can change

your password.

Administration

448

Working with My Preferences

In My Preferences, you can adjust global, view, and password preferences. You can use

My Preferences to personalize your workspace, but the P6 Administrator can limit what

you can access or establish settings that everyone must use.

Table of My Preferences Elements

Item Description

Global tab: Enables you to adjust application-wide preferences to suit

your needs, such as currency and time and date formats. Click the

arrows for each section to adjust your global preferences.

View tab: Enables you to change what you will see as you work in P6.

Click the arrows for each section to select what menu items and pages

you can see. For example, if you do not need Application Settings on the

Administer menu, clear Application Settings.

Password tab: Enables you to change your password. The password

policy will change depending on whether it is disabled or enabled. If the

password policy is enabled, the text will change to "Password must be

between 8 and 20 characters and contain at least 1 letter and 1

number."

Administration

449

Customizing My Preferences Global Preferences

Customize global preferences to create a working environment that suits your needs. The

global preferences you select affect only your interaction with the application; other

users are not affected by your changes.

Global preferences is broken down into several sections. To see how to customize a

section, use any of the tasks listed below.

Customizing Global Currency Preferences

Customize currency preferences to determine how currency is displayed in the

application.

To customize currency preferences:

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab, expand the Currency section.

4) In the Currency section, click the Select Currency icon.

5) In the Select Currency dialog box, select a currency and click OK.

6) On the Global tab:

a. In the Currency section, mark or clear the Show decimal places and Show

currency symbol options to suit your needs.

b. Click Save and Close.

Tips

You can double-click the Currency field and type a currency name rather than search

for a currency.

Customizing Global Date Format Preferences

Customize date format preferences to determine how dates are displayed in the

application.

To customize date format preferences:

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab, expand the Date Format section.

4) In the Date Format section:

a. Expand the Date format subsection:

1. Click the Date format list, and choose a format.

450

2. Mark the Date format options for how you want the date to display.

b. Expand the Time format subsection:

1. Click the Time format list, and choose a format.

2. Mark the Show minutes option if you want minutes to display.

c. Click the Separator list, and choose a separator.

5) On the Global tab, click Save and Close.

Customizing Global General Preferences

Customize general preferences on the Global tab to enable miscellaneous options for

P6, such as sending an e-mail to resources upon adding or removing assignments.

Note: The P6 Administrator must setup an e-mail server for this

functionality to work.

To customize general preferences:

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab, expand the General section.

4) In the General section, mark or clear the options.

5) On the Global tab, click Save and Close.

Customizing Global Issues Preferences

Customize global issues preferences to determine how issues are displayed in the

application.

To customize global issues preferences:

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab, expand the Issues section.

4) In the Issues section, mark or clear options for each of the statements.

a. To have an issue emailed that has a certain priority, click the priority list and

choose a value.

b. To select an issue code, click the Select an Issue Code icon.

c. In the Select an Issue Code dialog box, select an issue code and click OK.

5) On the Global tab, click Save and Close.

Customizing Global Performance Threshold Preferences

Customize performance threshold preferences to specify parameters for Performance,

Earned Value, and Index values that appear in dashboard Project Performance portlets

and on the Portfolios Performance Status tab.

Administration

451

To customize performance threshold preferences:

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab, expand the Performance Threshold section.

4) In the Performance Threshold section:

a. Expand the Performance subsection:

1. Double-click each field and type a value.

2. Click each list and choose a value.

b. Expand the Earned Value subsection, and click each list and choose a value.

c. Expand the Index subsection, and click each list and choose a value.

5) On the Global tab, click Save and Close.

Customizing Global Project Score Preferences

You can customize your own project score preferences to determine how the project will

be scored in the application.

To customize project score preferences:

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab, expand the Project Score section.

4) In the Project Score section:

a. Mark or clear the option to Calculate Project Score based on selected Project

Codes. If you mark the option:

Click the Project Codes link.

In the Customize Project Score dialog box, use the common controls to add

or remove project code fields from the Selected Columns list and click Save.

See Configuring Columns or Values (on page 91).

b. In the High is greater than or equal to field, enter a value between 1 and 100.

c. In the Medium is greater than or equal to field, enter a value between 1 and 100

that is also less than the High is greater than or equal to field.

5) On the Global tab, click Save and Close.

Customizing Global Resources Preferences

Customize resources preferences to determine how resources will be displayed in the

application.

To customize resources preferences:

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab, expand the Resources section.

452

4) In the Resources section:

a. Expand the Resource Staffing subsection, and mark or clear the options.

b. Expand the Resource Assignments subsection, and mark one option for each of

the statements.

c. In the Number of available items to search for Roles, Resources, and Resource

Codes field, enter a value.

Note: The value specifies the number of search criteria items

allowed. The maximum valid value is 10.

5) On the Global tab, click Save and Close.

Customizing Global Row Number Preferences

Customize row number preferences to determine the maximum number of rows that can

be displayed in the application.

To customize row number preferences:

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab:

a. Double-click the Maximum number of rows displayed in each section field and

type a value.

Note: The value you place in the Maximum number of rows

displayed in each section setting will not apply to view or

dictionary grids.

b. Double-click the Maximum number of rows displayed in trees and picklists field

and type a value.

c. Click Save and Close.

Tips

If the number of items exceed the maximum you specify for Maximum number of

rows displayed in each section, a Next link appears for you to navigate to the next

page of the list.

If the number of items available to display exceeds the maximum you specify for

Maximum number of rows displayed in trees and picklists, a message appears to

inform you that you are viewing a partial list.

Customizing Global Time Units Format Preferences

Customize time units format preferences to determine how time will be displayed in the

application.

To customize time units format preferences:

Administration

453

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab, expand the Time Units Format section.

4) In the Time Units Format section:

a. Expand the Display Time Units in subsection:

1. Click the Display Time Units in list, and choose a unit.

2. Mark or clear the options.

Note: You must select the Show unit label option to mark the Show

sub units option.

3. Click the Decimal places list, and choose a number of decimal places.

b. Expand the Display Durations in subsection:

1. Click the Display Durations in list, and choose a unit.

2. Mark or clear the options.

Note: You must select the Show unit label option to mark the Show

sub units option.

3. Click the Decimal places list, and choose a number of decimal places.

c. Expand the Unit/Time Format subsection, and select one option.

5) On the Global tab, click Save and Close.

Sending E-Mail Notifications about Resource Assignments

An automatic notification feature can be configured to send e-mail to the affected

resources when you add, change, or remove a resource assignment.

To configure P6 to automatically send e-mail about resource assignments:

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab, expand the General section.

4) In the General section:

a. Select the Send e-mail to resources upon adding or removing assignments option.

b. The system automatically selects the Prompt before sending e-mail option. Clear

the option if you do not want prompts.

5) On the Global tab, click Save and Close.

454

Tips

The address and subject line for the e-mail are generated based on the specific

assignment circumstances. For example, when you first assign a resource to an

activity, the e-mail subject line tells the resource they have been assigned and

provides the activity name. In all cases, the message text includes the project name,

resource start and finish dates, planned units, and planned units/time.

When the automatic e-mail option is on, confirmation messages are sent to you,

indicating the names of the recipients.

If a resource does not have an e-mail address specified on the Resources tab of the

Administration page, no e-mail can be sent.

When a resource is replaced on an activity, an e-mail is sent to the removed resource

and to the replacement resource.

Customizing My Preferences View Preferences

Customize view preferences to specify the items that appear in the Administer,

Dashboards, Portfolios, Projects, and Resources sections. You can edit only your view

preferences if you have been assigned edit rights. If you do not have edit rights, the

options are disabled.

To customize view preferences:

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the View tab.

3) On the View tab, expand the Administer section.

4) In the Administer section, expand the Menu Items subsection and mark or clear the

options.

5) On the View tab, expand the Dashboards section.

6) In the Dashboards section:

a. Expand the Menu Items subsection and mark or clear the options.

b. Expand the Displayed Dashboards section to view the dashboards.

7) On the View tab, expand the Portfolios section.

8) In the Portfolios section:

a. Expand the Menu Items subsection, and mark or clear the options.

b. Expand the Pages subsection, and mark or clear the options.

9) On the View tab, expand the Projects section.

10) In the Projects section:

a. Expand the Menu Items subsection, and mark or clear the options.

b. Expand the Pages subsection, and mark or clear the options.

11) On the View tab, expand the Resources section.

12) In the Resources section:

a. Expand the Menu Items subsection, and mark or clear the options.

Administration

455

b. Expand the Pages subsection, and mark or clear the options.

13) On the View tab, click Save and Close.

Tips

Mark the option next to Menu Items or Pages to automatically mark all the options in

the list. Clear the option to automatically clear all the options in the list.

Click the Move Up or Move Down arrows to arrange the menus items.

Changing Your Own Password

Users can change their own password at any time.

Note: You cannot change passwords if you are running P6 EPPM in

LDAP or SSO authentication mode.

To change your own password:

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Password tab.

3) On the Password tab:

a. In the Current Password field, enter the current password.

b. In the New Password field, enter a new password.

Notes:

When the Password Policy is enabled in Application Settings,

the password must be between 8 and 20 characters and

contain at least one number and one letter.

When the Password Policy is disabled in Application Settings,

the password must be between 1 and 20 characters. P6 EPPM

does not allow blank passwords.

c. In the Confirm New Password field, enter the new password again for verification.

d. Click Save.

About My Calendar

My Calendar allows you to customize your own personal resource calendar. Use My

Calendar to add or modify work and nonwork days, or import exception time from an

existing calendar. Mark your planned vacation days and update other personal

nonwork exception days so your project manager is able to more accurately assign

activities and track your availability for current and upcoming projects.

Note: You will only see My Calendar in the Administer menu if you

have been assigned a personal resource calendar.

456

Configuring My Calendar

If you are assigned a personal resource calendar, you can perform the following tasks:

Setting Work Hours Per Time Period for My Calendar

Configure the work hours per time period settings to specify the default number of hours

in a work period for a calendar. The values you specify here are used as conversation

factors when displaying time units in increments other than hours. Any

resource-dependent activity that uses this resource calendar will use these values as

conversion factors for these activities.

To use this feature, the Use assigned calendar to specify the number of work hours for

each time period option must be selected in Application Settings. See Configuring Time

Periods Settings (on page 462).

To set the number of work hours for each time period:

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Calendar.

2) On the My Calendar page, click Edit Hours Per Period.

3) In the Set Time Periods dialog box, click and type an hour value in each field, and

then click OK.

4) Click Save.

Configuring the Standard Work Week for My Calendar

Configure the standard work week for the calendar to set the work and nonwork days

and hours.

To configure the standard work week:

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Calendar.

2) On the My Calendar page, click the Standard Work Week tab.

3) On the Standard Work Week tab, right-click on a working or nonworking timeslot and

use the menu options to adjust the workday. You can also resize the working time to

increase or decrease the work hours.

4) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Modifying Calendar Days on My Calendar

Modify calendar days to account for work or nonwork days or hours that are different

than the standard hours defined on the Standard Work Week tab. For example, you

might choose to specify vacation days by setting the standard working days to

nonworking days.

To modify work or nonwork calendar days:

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Calendar.

2) On the My Calendars page, click the Calendar tab.

Administration

457

3) On the Calendar tab, right-click a working or nonworking day and use the menu

options to adjust the workday.

4) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Importing Events to My Calendar

You can import special events into My Calendar. The imported time appears in your

calendar as nonwork exception time. For example, an organization might distribute a file

of holidays or special travel events that it wants all employees to import into their

personal calendars.

The following conditions must be met before you import the events:

The duration of the event must exceed the total standard worktime for a given day;

or, it must represent an all day event.

The events you import must be formatted in the iCalendar (.ics) file format. This means

you might have to export your appointments in another scheduling application to an

.ics file.

To import special nonwork events into My Calendar:

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Calendar.

2) On the My Calendars page, click Import.

3) In the Import Calendar Events dialog box:

a. Click to browse iCalendar files.

b. Select a file and then click Open.

c. Select the check boxes for the events you want to import. Select the check box in

the column header to import all events.

d. Click Import.

4) A message box will appear alerting you when the import is complete. Click OK.

5) On the My Calendars page:

a. Scan through the calendar to verify the exception time appears on days where it

is expected.

b. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Example: You import a calendar event for a specific day with hours

that exceed the standard work hours set for that day. The imported

event will set the entire day to nonwork exception time. Using

precise numbers, if your standard work week designates 8 hours of

work for Monday, and you import a file that has a nonwork period

of 9 hours named "Approved Comp Time," the entire day will

appear as nonwork exception time in your calendar.

458

About Application Settings

Application Settings enables your organization to define a series of application-wide

parameters and values that apply globally and to all projects in an enterprise project

structure (EPS). Use these settings to customize the application to meet specific project

management requirements and standards. The P6 Administrator can choose to hide

Application Settings from users. If users can view Application Settings, they must have the

proper security privileges to edit them.

Working with Application Settings

Use Application Settings to specify default administrative preferences established by the

P6 Administrator. The P6 Administrator must give you access to Application Settings to

view them and the "Edit Application Settings" privilege for you to adjust them.

Table of Application Settings Elements

Item Description

Data Limits: Specify the maximum number of levels for hierarchical

structures and the maximum number of codes and baselines.

Earned Value: Specify default settings for calculating earned value.

General: Specify general default options, such as the weekday on which

the calendar week begins.

ID Lengths: Specify the maximum number of characters for IDs and

codes.

Administration

459

Item Description

Timesheets: Specify default setup options when using P6 Progress

Reporter.

Time Periods: Define the default number of hours in a workday,

workweek, workmonth, and workyear, or specify that the default number

of work hours for each time period is defined per calendar.

Configuring Data Limits Settings

Data limits allows you to specify the maximum number of levels for hierarchical structures.

You can also specify the maximum number of baselines and activity codes that can be

included in a project.

To configure data limits settings:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Application Settings.

2) On the Application Settings pane, click Data Limits.

3) On the Data Limits page:

a. Click the up and down arrows for each item to set maximums.

b. Click Save and Close.

Configuring Earned Value Settings

Configure earned value settings to specify defaults for calculating earned value.

To configure earned value settings:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Application Settings.

2) On the Application Settings pane, click Earned Value.

3) On the Earned Value page:

a. In the Technique for computing performance percent complete section, mark an

option.

Note: If you mark the Custom % Complete option, use the up and

down arrows to select a percent.

b. In the Technique for computing estimate to complete (ETC) section, mark the first

option or mark one of the other four options to define a formula.

Note: If you mark the PF = option, click the field and type a value to

be equal to PF.

c. In the Earned Value Calculation section, choose an option from the list.

460

d. Click Save and Close.

Tips

You can mark only one option in each section.

Configuring General Settings

Perform the steps below to configure general application settings including calendar

and activity duration defaults, URLs for related applications, summarization time periods

(also used to store past period performance actuals), and to enable the optional

password policy setting.

To configure general settings:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Application Settings.

2) On the Application Settings pane, click General.

3) On the General page:

a. In the Starting Day of Week section, click the list and choose a day of the week.

b. In the Password Policy section, select the option to enable the policy.

Notes:

You cannot change passwords if you are running P6 EPPM in

LDAP or SSO authentication mode.

When the Password Policy is disabled in Application Settings,

the password must be between 1 and 20 characters. P6 EPPM

does not allow blank passwords.

When the Password Policy is enabled in Application Settings,

the password must be between 8 and 20 characters and

contain at least one number and one letter.

c. In the Contract Management section, click the URL field and enter the URL.

d. In the Summarization Periods section:

1. Select the By Calendar option, the By Financial Periods option, or both.

2. If you select By Calendar, select a time interval value for the WBS Level and

Resource/Role Assignment Level fields.

e. In the Activity Duration section, double-click the field and type the duration.

Note: Include the time unit in the field. For example, 5.0d for 5 days.

f. In the Code Separator section, double-click the field and type a separator.

g. In the Document Management section, click the field and type the P6 URL.

h. Click Save and Close.

Administration

461

Tips

Triple-click a field to select an entire URL.

In the Summarization Periods section, rather than spreading units and costs evenly

throughout the length of a project (when you select By Calendar), you can also view

how actual units and costs were incurred by selecting By Financial Periods. You can

then store and edit period performance for any predefined financial period.

Configuring ID Lengths Settings

Configure ID lengths settings to specify the maximum number of characters allowed for

IDs and codes.

To configure ID lengths settings:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Application Settings.

2) On the Application Settings pane, click ID Lengths.

3) On the ID Lengths page:

a. Click Increase or Decrease for each code or ID to specify maximum lengths.

b. Click Save and Close.

Tips

ID and code lengths cannot exceed 20 characters.

Configuring Timesheets Settings

Configure timesheets settings to specify default setup options for P6 Progress Reporter.

You can specify general timesheets settings and how timesheets are approved before

project data is updated.

To configure timesheets settings:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Application Settings.

2) On the Application Settings pane, click Timesheets.

3) On the Timesheets page:

a. In the General Settings section, mark or clear options.

b. In the Timesheet Approval Level section, mark an approval type.

Note: If you mark the Two approval levels option, you can also add

the stipulation that the Project Manager must approve first.

c. In the Default Resource manager field, click Select User.

d. Click Save and Close.

462

Configuring Time Periods Settings

Configure time periods settings to specify time period abbreviations and the default

number of hours in a work period. The Hours per Time Period are used as conversion

factors when users choose to display time units and durations in units other than hours. For

example, if the default Hours/Day is set to 8.0, when a user enters 1d as a duration, this

value is stored as 8h in the database.

To configure time periods settings:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Application Settings.

2) On the Application Settings pane, click Time Periods.

3) On the Time Periods page:

a. In the Hours per Time Period section, double-click each field and type a value.

Note: If you select the Use assigned calendar to specify the

number of work hours for each time period option, the Hours per

Time Period values on this tab are ignored and the module

converts units and durations using the Hours per Time Period values

defined in the activity’s or resource’s assigned calendar. Using a

task-dependent activity as an example, the module converts units

and durations for the activity using the settings defined in the

activity’s assigned calendar. You should type values for each time

period even if you mark this option since the Hours per Time Period

values on this tab are still used in the following cases:

The Planning page of the Resources section in P6.

The Planning Resources tab in the project and WBS views in P6

Professional.

In these cases the Use assigned calendar to specify the number of

work hours for each time period option will be ignored even if

selected.

b. In the Time Period Abbreviations section, enter one-letter abbreviations for each

time period.

c. Click Save and Close.

About Enterprise Data

Enterprise data is a defined series of application-wide parameters and values that apply

to all projects. Your organization can use these settings to customize your projects to

meet specific project management requirements and standards. While all users can

view these settings, a user must have the proper security privileges to edit them.

The P6 Administrator uses enterprise data to define standard categories and values you

can apply across all projects, including custom categories and category values for

projects, resources, and WBS elements.

Administration

463

Working with Enterprise Data

Use the Enterprise Data page to configure various types of data settings routinely used by

other features in the application. Your settings reflect the data recognized by your

industry or organization and help to meet your project management requirements and

standards.

Table of Enterprise Data Elements

Item Description

Global section: Click Global to customize global data, such as currencies

and financial periods.

Projects section: Click Projects to customize project-specific data, such

as baseline types and funding sources.

Activities section: Click Activities to customize activity data, such as

activity codes and cost accounts.

Resources section: Click Resources to customize resource and role data,

such as rate types and resource codes.

464

Item Description

Risks section: Click Risks to customize risk data, such as risk categories

and thresholds.

Issues section: Click Issues to customize issue data, such as issue codes

and UDFs.

Documents section: Click Documents to customize document data, such

as document categories and statuses.

About Baseline Types

Baseline types enable you to categorize and standardize baselines across projects. Types

are assigned to baselines to help categorize, or track, multiple baselines for a single

project. Examples of baseline types include: Customer Sign-Off, Initial Planning,

Management Sign-Off, Mid Project Status, and What-If Project Plan baselines. The P6

Administrator defines the available baseline types.

Creating Baseline Types

Create baseline types to label and standardize the use of baselines across all projects at

your organization.

Example: Your organization has a quality process that requires all projects to be

baselined after their initial planning phase. Create a baseline type called Initial Planning

Baseline and move it to the top of the sort order. Project users can later label the

baselines they create after planning with this type designation and use it to identify

particular baselines going forward.

To create a baseline type:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Baseline Types.

3) On the Baseline Types page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the Type field, double-click and type a unique type.

c. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

Click the Move Up or Move Down arrows to adjust the sort order. When users work with

baselines in other parts of the application, the Baseline Type field will show them in this

sequence. These buttons are available only when the list is not sorted alphabetically.

Administration

465

To change the name of a baseline type, double-click it and enter a new name. The

change applies to any projects with baselines of that particular type.

About Funding Sources

Funding sources are the agencies, businesses, or groups that provide funding for a

project. You can keep funding sources in a dictionary that categorizes and groups similar

funds in a hierarchy. The dictionary allows you to quickly assign specific funding sources

to budgets as a project develops. You can assign the same funding source multiple times

with varying amount and share contributions for different levels of the EPS. The amount

contributed by a specific funding source is called the fund share value.

Creating Funding Sources

Create funding sources to name and describe the agencies, businesses, or groups that

provide funding for a project.

To create a funding source:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Funding Sources.

3) On the Funding Sources page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. Move the funding source to the correct location in the list and hierarchical position

by clicking the Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up), Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down),

Move Left (Ctrl+Alt+Left), and Move Right (Ctrl+Alt+Right) arrows.

c. In the Name field, double-click and type a name.

d. In the Description field, double-click and click .

4) In the Description detail window, type a brief narrative about the funding source.

5) On the Funding Sources page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

About Notebook Topics

Notebook topics help multiple users apply a common theme or label to shared

information about an activity, WBS, project, or EPS element such as its purpose,

completion instructions, or other helpful notes. For example, you might place an e-mail

message, a web link, a table of observations, and a series of text notes into a notebook

topic called Budget Recommendations to capture the ongoing cost impacts of a

recurring project.

Creating Notebook Topics

Create notebook topics to provide specified instructions or a description for performing

an activity. Notebook topics can also be assigned at the EPS, project, and WBS levels.

466

To create notebook topics:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Notebook Topics.

3) On the Notebook Topics page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the Topic Name field, double-click and type a name.

c. Double-click to mark the option in the appropriate column to make the new

notebook available in EPS, Project, WBS, or Activity views.

d. Click Save (Ctrl+S)

Tips

To change the order in which notebook topics are listed, select the notebook topic you

want to move, then click the Move Up or Move Down arrows.

About Calendars

Calendars enable you to define available workdays and workhours in a day. You can

also specify national holidays, recognized holidays, project-specific work/nonworkdays,

and resource vacation days. You can establish an unlimited number of calendars to

accommodate different work patterns. There are three calendar pools: global, project,

and resource. The global calendar pool contains calendars that apply to all projects in

the database. The project calendar pool is a separate pool of calendars for each

project in the organization. The resource calendar pool is a separate pool of calendars

for each resource. You can assign multiple users a resource calendar that they can

share, but cannot edit. You can also assign a personal calendar to a resource that will

show up in My Calendars and that the resource can customize. You can assign resource

or global calendars to resources, and global or project calendars to activities.

Assign calendars to each resource and activity to determine time constraints in a uniform

way. For example, based on its calendar, a resource might not be available; or, if the

resource is available, the activity might not fit the calendar requirements.

The application uses your calendar assignments for leveling resources, scheduling, and

tracking activities.

Working with Calendars

The P6 application supports three types of calendars:

Global: Global calendars can be defined and applied to all projects and

resources in the database.

Project: Separate project calendars can be defined and applied to projects

through activity assignments.

Administration

467

Resource: Resource calendars can be defined and applied to each individual

resource.

Begin by defining one or more global calendars and then link any project or resource

calendars to them. Changes to a global calendar apply to all project and resource

calendars linked to it.

Assign global or resource calendars to resources, and global or project calendars to

activities. You can establish an unlimited number of calendars to accommodate

different work patterns. For example, if some activities require a five day workweek, while

others are performed part-time (such as Monday, Wednesday, and Friday), you can

create different calendars and assign them to the activities and resources in your

projects.

An activity’s Activity Type field value determines whether the activity uses the calendar

of an assigned resource or its project calendar.

Creating Global Calendars

Create global calendars to identify global work or nonwork days. You can use global

calendars as base calendars when creating a resource or project calendar. The

exception days in a global calendar appear in the resource or project calendar and are

identified by a (globe).

To create a global calendar:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Global Calendars.

3) On the Global Calendars page, click Add (Insert).

4) In the Select Calendar to Copy dialog box:

a. Select the Global or Resource option.

Note: This determines which list of calendars you can select.

b. Select a calendar and click OK.

5) On the Global Calendars page, click the Calendar tab.

6) On the Calendar tab, triple-click the Name field and enter a name.

Note: The application automatically assigns the name New

Calendar.

7) On the Global Calendars page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

8) To configure the global calendar, see Configuring Global Calendars (on page 467).

Configuring Global Calendars

Perform the following tasks when creating or updating a global calendar:

468

Setting Work Hours Per Time Period for Global Calendars

Configure the work hours per time period settings to specify the default number of hours

in a work period for a calendar.

To set the number of work hours for each time period:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Global Calendars.

3) On the Global Calendars page:

a. Click on the calendar you want to modify.

b. Click Edit Hours Per Period.

4) In the Set Time Periods dialog box, click and type an hour value in each field, and

then click OK.

5) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Configuring the Standard Work Week for Global Calendars

Configure the standard work week for the calendar to set the work and nonwork days

and hours for a standard work week.

To modify the standard work week:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Global Calendars.

3) On the Global Calendars page:

a. Click on the calendar you want to modify.

b. Click the Standard Work Week tab.

4) On the Standard Work Week tab, right-click on a working or nonworking timeslot and

use the menu options to adjust the workday. You can also resize the working time to

increase or decrease the work hours.

5) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Modifying Calendar Days on Global Calendars

Modify calendar days to account for work or nonwork days or hours that are different

than the standard hours defined on the Standard Work Week tab.

To modify work or nonwork calendar days:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Global Calendars.

3) On the Global Calendars page:

a. Click on the calendar you want to modify.

b. Click the Calendar tab.

4) On the Calendar tab, right-click on a working or nonworking day and use the menu

options to adjust the workday.

5) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Administration

469

Setting the Default Global Calendar

Choose a calendar to use as the default when new calendars are created.

To set the default global calendar:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Global Calendar.

3) On the Global Calendar page:

a. Click on the calendar you want to designate as the default calendar.

b. Click Set As Default Calendar.

c. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Creating Project Calendars

Create project calendars to determine work or nonwork time for a project.

To create a project calendar:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project Calendars.

3) On the Project Calendars page:

a. Click on a project.

Note: If the project you need is not open, click Select Projects.

Choose one or more projects and click OK.

b. Click Add (Insert).

4) In the Select Calendar to Copy dialog box:

a. Select the Global, Resource, or Project option.

Note: This determines which list of calendars you can select.

b. Select a calendar and click OK.

5) On the Project Calendars page, click the Calendar tab.

6) On the Calendar tab, click in the Name field and enter a name for the project

calendar.

7) On the Project Calendars page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

To configure the project calendar, see Configuring Project Calendars (on page 470).

470

Configuring Project Calendars

Perform the following tasks when creating or updating a project calendar:

Assigning a Base Calendar to a Project Calendar

Assign a base calendar to determine holidays and exceptions for the selected project

calendar.

To assign a base calendar:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project Calendars.

3) On the Project Calendars page:

a. Expand a project.

Note: If the project you need is not open, click Select Projects.

Choose one or more projects and click OK.

b. Select a calendar to assign a base calendar.

c. Click Select a Base Calendar.

4) In the Select Base Calendar dialog box, select a calendar and click OK.

5) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

The (globe) on calendar days indicates exception days marked in the base

calendar. You can modify these exceptions days and the globe will disappear. If you set

the calendar day back to standard, the exception day will reset and the globe will

reappear.

Setting Work Hours Per Period for a Project Calendar

Configure the work hours per time period settings to specify the default number of hours

in a work period for a calendar.

To set the number of work hours for each time period:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project Calendars.

3) On the Project Calendars page:

a. Expand a project.

Note: If the project you need is not open, click Select Projects.

Choose one or more projects and click OK.

b. Click on the calendar you want to modify.

Administration

471

c. Click Edit Hours Per Period.

4) In the Set Time Periods dialog box, click and type an hour value in each field, and

then click OK.

5) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Configuring the Standard Work Week for Project Calendars

Configure the standard work week for the calendar to set the work and nonwork days

and hours for a standard work week.

To configure the standard work week:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project Calendars.

3) On the Project Calendars page:

a. Expand a project.

Note: If the project you need is not open, click Select Projects.

Choose one or more projects and click OK.

b. Click on the calendar you want to modify.

c. Click the Standard Work Week tab.

4) On the Standard Work Week tab, right-click on a working or nonworking timeslot and

use the menu options to adjust the workday. You can also resize the working time to

increase or decrease the work hours.

5) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Modifying Calendar Days on Project Calendars

Modify calendar days to account for work or nonwork days or hours that are different

than the standard hours defined on the Standard Work Week tab.

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project Calendars.

3) On the Project Calendars page:

a. Expand a project.

Note: If the project you need is not open, click Select Projects.

Choose one or more projects and click OK.

b. Click on the calendar you want to modify.

c. Click the Calendar tab.

4) On the Calendar tab, right-click on a working or nonworking day and use the menu

options to adjust the workday.

5) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

472

Tips

The (globe) on calendar days indicates exception days in the base calendar. You

can modify these exceptions days and the globe will disappear. If you set the calendar

day back to standard, the Global exception day will reset and the globe will reappear.

Changing a Project Calendar to a Global Calendar

You can turn an existing project calendar into a global calendar.

To make a project calendar a global calendar:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project Calendars.

3) On the Project Calendars page:

a. Expand a project.

Note: If the project you need is not open, click Select Projects.

Choose one or more projects and click OK.

b. Click on the calendar you want to change to global.

4) On the toolbar, click Promote to Global Calendar.

5) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Creating Resource Calendars

Create a resource calendar to determine when a resource can work.

To create a resource calendar:

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Resource Calendars.

3) On the Resource Calendars page:

a. Click on Personal Calendars to create a private calendar for the resource, or click

on Shared Calendars to create a calendar for multiple resources to share that the

resources cannot edit.

b. Click Add (Insert).

4) If you are creating a Personal Calendar, in the Select Resource dialog box, select a

resource and click OK.

If you are creating a Shared Calendar, in the Select Calendar To Copy dialog box:

a. Choose Global or Resource calendar to use as the base for the new calendar.

b. Click on a global or resource calendar.

c. Click OK.

5) On the Resource Calendars page, click the Calendar tab.

Administration

473

6) On the Calendar tab, click in the Name field and enter a name for the personal or

resource calendar.

7) On the Resource Calendars page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

8) To configure the resource calendar, see Configuring Resource Calendars (on page

473).

Related Topics

About Calendars ..................................................................................................... 466

Working with Calendars ......................................................................................... 466

Creating Global Calendars ................................................................................... 467

Configuring Global Calendars .............................................................................. 467

Creating Project Calendars ................................................................................... 469

Configuring Project Calendars .............................................................................. 470

Configuring Resource Calendars .......................................................................... 473

About My Calendar ................................................................................................ 455

Creating Global Calendars ................................................................................... 467

Creating Project Calendars ................................................................................... 469

Configuring Resource Calendars

Perform the following tasks when creating or updating a resource calendar:

Assigning a Base Calendar to a Resource Calendar

Assign a base calendar to apply all the exception days (i.e. holidays and other work or

nonwork days) from the base calendar for the selected resource calendar.

To assign a base calendar:

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Resource Calendars.

3) On the Resource Calendars page, expand Shared Calendars or Personal Calendars.

a. Select a calendar to assign a base calendar.

b. Click Select a Base Calendar.

4) In the Select Base Calendar dialog box, select a calendar and click OK.

5) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

The (globe) on calendar days indicates exception days marked in the base

calendar. You can modify these exceptions days and the globe will disappear. If you

set the calendar day back to standard, the exception day will reset and the globe

will reappear.

If you are editing your personal calendar, you cannot change the base calendar.

474

Assigning a Resource to a Resource Calendar

Resources can be assigned a personal calendar or a shared calendar. A resource is

assigned to a personal calendar when creating a personal calendar. See Creating

Resource Calendars (on page 472).

To assign a resource to a shared calendar:

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Resource Calendars.

3) On the Resource Calendars page:

a. Click on a shared calendar.

Note: Click the Used By tab to view resources currently assigned to

the shared calendar.

b. Click Assign Resource.

4) In the Select Resource dialog box:

a. Choose a resource and click Assign.

b. Assign any additional resources to the shared calendar, and then click Close.

5) On the Resource Calendars page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

If you need to remove a resource from a shared calendar, navigate to the correct

resource or global calendar you want to assign to the resource, and then assign the

resource.

You can also assign a calendar to a resource from the Resources tab on the Resources

Administration page. See Assigning Calendars to Resources (on page 406).

Setting Work Hours Per Time Period for a Resource Calendar

Configure the work hours per time period settings to specify the default number of hours

in a work period for a calendar.

To use this feature, the Use assigned calendar to specify the number of work hours for

each time period option must be selected in Application Settings. See Configuring Time

Periods Settings (on page 462).

To set the number of work hours for each time period:

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Resource Calendars.

3) On the Resource Calendars page:

a. Click on the calendar you want to modify.

b. Click Edit Hours Per Period.

Administration

475

4) In the Set Time Periods dialog box, click and type an hour value in each field, and

then click OK.

5) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Configuring the Standard Work Week for Resource Calendars

Configure the standard work week for the calendar to set the work and nonwork days

and hours for a standard work week.

To configure the standard work week:

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Resource Calendars.

3) On the Resource Calendars page:

a. Click on the calendar you want to modify.

b. Click the Standard Work Week tab.

4) On the Standard Work Week tab, right-click on a working or nonworking timeslot and

use the menu options to adjust the workday. You can also resize the working time to

increase or decrease the work hours.

5) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Modifying Calendar Days

Modify calendar days to account for work or nonwork days or hours that are different

than the standard hours defined on the Standard Work Week tab. For example, if you are

using a personal calendar, you might choose to specify vacation days by setting the

standard working days to nonworking days.

To modify work or nonwork calendar days:

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Resource Calendars.

3) On the Resource Calendars page:

a. Click on the calendar you want to modify.

b. Click the Calendar tab.

4) On the Calendar tab, right-click on a working or nonworking day and use the menu

options to adjust the workday.

5) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

The (globe) on calendar days indicates exception days in the base calendar. You

can modify these exceptions days and the globe will disappear. If you set the calendar

day back to standard, the Global exception day will reset and the globe will reappear.

476

Changing the Calendar Type

You can change the type of calendar you created from a resource calendar to a global

calendar, a personal calendar to a shared calendar, or a shared calendar to a personal

calendar.

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Resource Calendars.

3) On the Resource Calendars page, click on a personal or shared calendar.

To change a calendar from a resource calendar to a global calendar:

On the Resource Calendars toolbar, click Promote to Global Calendar.

To change a personal calendar to a shared calendar, or to change a shared

calendar to a personal calendar:

Note: If you are converting a shared calendar to a personal

calendar, you must remove all but one resource before

proceeding with this step. To remove a resource from a calendar,

navigate to the correct calendar for the resource and assign the

resource to that calendar.

4) Click Convert to Personal Calendar or Convert to Shared Calendar.

About Project Codes

Project codes help you track different projects based on characteristics they share. You

can use project codes to arrange projects hierarchically when your EPS contains many

projects within many levels. If you have many projects in the hierarchy, project codes

help you group and filter potentially vast amounts of information spanning different areas

of the organization. The application supports an almost unlimited number of hierarchical

project codes and values; you can establish as many as you need to meet the filtering,

sorting, and reporting requirements of your organization.

Creating Project Codes

Create project codes to represent project evaluation criteria. These steps represent the

minimum required to create a project code.

To create a project code:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project Codes.

3) On the Project Codes page:

a. Click Add Code (Insert).

Administration

477

b. Move the project code to the correct location in the list by clicking the Move

Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down) and Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up) arrows.

c. In the Name field, double-click and type a unique code.

d. In the Maximum Length field, double-click and click the up or down arrow to

specify project code value length.

e. Click Save (Ctrl+S) .

Tips

Project codes at the same level are siblings. Subordinate project codes are children.

Creating Project Code Values

Create project code values to group, sort, and filter project data.

To create project code values:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project Codes.

3) On the Project Codes page:

a. Select a code.

b. Click Add Code Value.

Note: The code value will be added to the selected project code.

c. Move the project code value to the correct location in the list and hierarchical

position by clicking the Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up), Move Down

(Ctrl+Alt+Down), Move Left (Ctrl+Alt+Left), and Move Right (Ctrl+Alt+Right)

arrows.

d. In the Name field, double-click and type a code value.

Note: The code value cannot exceed the Maximum Length

specified by the project code.

e. In the Description field, double-click and type a brief narrative about the code

value.

f. In the Weight field, double-click and type a value. Weight defaults to 0.0 if you do

not type a value.

Note: The weight reflects the ranking of this value against other

values in the project code.

4) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

478

Tips

Project code values at the same level are siblings. Subordinate project code values are

children.

Configuring Project Codes

Configure project codes to add security, code weight, and a description to the code.

To configure a project code:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project Codes.

3) On the Project Codes page:

a. Select the code you want to configure.

b. In the Secure field, mark the option to make the code read-only for users without

the necessary security privileges to make changes.

Note: You can designate a project code as secure only if you have

the appropriate security privilege; otherwise, this option does not

display.

c. In the Weight field, double-click and type the project code weight.

Note: The weight reflects the ranking of this code against other

project codes.

d. In the Maximum Code Value Weight field, double-click and type a value.

e. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Configuring Project Code Values

Configure project code values to describe and weigh the importance of the code

value.

To configure project code values:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project Codes.

3) On the Project Codes page:

a. Select the code value you want to configure.

b. In the Description field, double-click and type a brief narrative about the code

value.

c. In the Weight field, double-click and type a value.

Administration

479

Note: The weight reflects the ranking of this value against other

values in the project code.

d. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

About User Defined Fields

User defined fields allow you to create and maintain data specific to your organization.

For example, you can track additional activity data, such as delivery dates and

purchase order numbers. You can also track additional resource data or project

cost-related data, such as profit, variances, and revised budgets. User defined fields are

global, so they can be used across all projects in your organization.

You can also create project user defined fields. Project user defined fields track

information specific to projects. For example, your organization might require a custom

field to track project profit. Project user defined fields are unique in that you can define a

formula or statement to automatically calculate field values, and identify graphical

indicators to display for a field, based on its value.

Creating Project UDFs

Create project user defined fields (UDFs) if the predefined fields do not meet your needs.

Project UDFs have formulas that automatically calculate values for the field.

To create a project UDF:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project UDFs.

3) On the Project UDFs page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the User Defined Field, double-click and type a name.

c. In the Data Type field, double-click and choose a type from the list.

d. In the UDF Type field, double-click and choose Manual or Formula from the list.

Note: Choosing Formula enables the fields in the Formula detail

window, allowing you to define a formula or statement to

calculate the value of the field. If no calculation is required,

choose Manual.

4) In the Formula detail window, define a formula or statement. See Defining Formulas

for User Defined Fields (on page 480) or Defining Statements for User Defined Fields (on

page 481).

5) In the Indicators detail window, define a graphical indicator. See Defining Indicators

for User Defined Fields (on page 480).

6) On the Project UDFs page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

480

Tips

You cannot define a formula for fields with 'Indicator' marked.

If you define an indicator, a checkmark will appear in the Indicator field.

You can edit the Indicator detail window only if you select Integer, Cost, and

Number.

Defining Formulas for User Defined Fields

Define formulas to calculate values for the user defined field.

Before defining a formula, you need to first create a project user defined field. To create

a project user defined field see Creating Project UDFs (on page 479).

To define formulas for user defined fields:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project UDFs.

3) On the Project UDFs page, select a UDF and click the Formula detail window.

Note: The UDF Type must be set to Formula to access the Formula

detail window.

4) In the Formula detail window:

a. Click the Fields list and choose a field.

Note: You can select any existing project-related field defined in

the project management database, including project codes, or

any other user defined field that exists for your organization.

b. Click Insert Field.

c. Continue to build your formula by inserting fields and using the operator buttons.

5) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

Operator buttons include: +, -, *, /, (, and ).

Defining Indicators for User Defined Fields

Define indicators for user defined fields (UDFs) that will display based on criteria set for

field values. For example, you can choose a graphical indicator to display when the

value of the field equals a certain number, or when the value of the field falls between a

certain range of dates.

Before defining an indicator, you need to first create a project user defined field. To

create a project user defined field see Creating Project UDFs (on page 479).

Administration

481

Note: You can identify graphical indicators only for fields with a

'Cost', 'Integer', or 'Number' Data Type.

To define indicators for UDFs:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project UDFs.

3) On the Project UDFs page, select a UDF and click the Indicators detail window.

Note: You can also follow these steps for the Summary Indicators

detail window

4) In the Indicators detail window repeat the following for each parameter statement:

a. Click the Select Parameter list and choose a parameter.

b. Mark the Value or Field option.

1. If you mark the Value option, double-click the field and type a value.

2. If you mark the Field option, click the list and select a field.

Note: If you select a "is within the range of" or "is not in the range of"

condition, use the Value field to specify the lower range value and

the High Value field to specify the upper range value.

c. Click each Indicator list and choose an indicator.

5) On the Project UDFs page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

Click to add another indicator statement or to remove a statement.

Defining Statements for User Defined Fields

Define statements to calculate values for the user defined field.

Before defining a statement, you need to first create a project user defined field. To

create a project user defined field see Creating Project UDFs (on page 479).

To define statements for user defined fields:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project UDFs.

3) On the Project UDFs page, select a UDF and click the Formula detail window.

Note: The UDF Type must be set to Formula to access the Formula

detail window.

482

4) In the Formula detail window:

a. Click Advanced .

b. Click IF/THEN/ELSE.

Note: The default statement 'IF (condition) THEN (expression) ELSE

(expression)' is displayed in the detail window.

c. Highlight a (condition) or (expression) entry and its parentheses.

d. Click the Fields list and choose a field.

Note: You can select any existing project-related field defined in

the project management database, including project codes, or

any other user defined field that exists for your organization.

e. Click Insert Field.

Note: The selected field will replace the highlighted (condition) or

(expression) entry.

f. Continue to replace fields and use the operator, relational operator, and

expression buttons to build your statement.

Note: Relational operators (<, >, =, <>) are only valid for the 'IF'

condition statement.

5) On the Project UDFs page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

Text values must be enclosed in quotes. For example: IF [Division]="Marketing."

Numeric values do not require quotes. For example: IF [Proposed Budget]>500000.

Only the = (equal) and <> (not equal) relational operators are valid for text values.

Date values must be enclosed in quotes and follow the dd-mm-yyyy format. For

example, IF [Start Date]>"01-APR-2007".

Operator buttons include: +, -, *, /, (, and ). Expression buttons include: AND, OR, and

IF/THEN/ELSE.

You can also replace (condition) and (expression) entries by deleting the entries and

their parentheses, placing the cursor in the appropriate location in the statement,

and following steps 4.d. through 4.f.

Creating WBS UDFs

Create WBS user defined fields (UDFs) if the predefined fields do not meet your needs.

To create a WBS UDF:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

Administration

483

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click WBS UDFs.

3) On the WBS UDFs page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the User Defined Field, double-click and type a name.

c. In the Data Type field, double-click and choose a type from the list.

d. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Creating Activity UDFs

Create activity user defined fields (UDFs) if the predefined fields do not meet your needs.

To create an activity UDF:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Activity UDFs.

3) On the Activity UDFs page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the User Defined Field, double-click and type a name.

c. In the Data Type field, double-click and choose a type from the list.

d. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Creating Expense UDFs

Create expense user defined fields (UDFs) if the predefined fields do not meet your

needs.

To create an expense UDF:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Expense UDFs.

3) On the Expense UDFs page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the User Defined Field, double-click and type a name.

c. In the Data Type field, double-click and choose a type from the list.

4) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Creating Step UDFs

Create step user defined fields (UDFs) if the predefined fields do not meet your needs.

To create a step UDF:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

484

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Step UDFs.

3) On the Step UDFs page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the User Defined Field, double-click and type a name.

c. In the Data Type field, double-click and choose a type from the list.

d. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Creating Risk UDFs

Create risk user-defined fields (UDFs) to store additional project risk data on the Projects

Risks page that is pertinent to your project or business and is not available from the

default fields. For example, you might need to include a location field to identify where

the risk might occur, or a ranking field to determine the order in which the risks will be

handled.

User-defined fields can be of many types: text, start date, finish date, cost, number,

integer, or indicator. Data from UDFs is not used in scoring calculations.

To create a risk UDF:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and click Risk UDFs.

3) On the Risk UDFs page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the User Defined Field, double-click and type a name.

c. In the Data Type field, double-click and choose a data type from the list.

d. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Creating Issue UDFs

Create issue user defined fields (UDFs) if the predefined fields do not meet your needs.

To create an issue UDF:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Issues and click Issue UDFs.

3) On the Issue UDFs page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the User Defined Field, double-click and type a name.

c. In the Data Type field, double-click and choose a type from the list.

4) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Administration

485

Creating Document UDFs

Create document user defined fields (UDFs) if the predefined fields do not meet your

needs.

To create a document UDF:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Documents and click Document UDFs.

3) On the Document UDFs page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the User Defined Field, double-click and type a name.

c. In the Data Type field, double-click and choose a type from the list.

d. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Creating Assignment UDFs

Create assignment user defined fields (UDFs) if the predefined fields do not meet your

needs.

To create an assignment UDF:

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Assignment UDFs.

3) On the Assignment UDFs page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the User Defined Field, double-click and type a name.

c. In the Data Type field, double-click and choose a type from the list.

d. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Creating Resource UDFs

Create resource user defined fields (UDFs) if the predefined fields do not meet your

needs.

To create a resource UDF:

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Resource UDFs.

3) On the Resource UDFs page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the User Defined Field, enter a name.

c. In the Data Type list, select a type.

486

d. Click Save (Ctrl+S) .

About Work Breakdown Structures (WBS)

A WBS, or work breakdown structure, is a hierarchical arrangement of work activities that

divides a project into discrete levels, phases, or layers. The WBS is structured in levels of

work detail, beginning with the deliverable and separated into identifiable work

elements.

When creating a project, the project manager typically develops the WBS first. The

manager assigns documents to each WBS element, and then defines activities to

complete that element. In addition to document and activity assignments, each WBS

element can also have specific earned value calculation settings, issue assignments,

and notebook topics.

Each project has its own WBS hierarchy with the top-level WBS element equal to that of

each enterprise project structure (EPS) node or project. Each WBS element can contain

more detailed WBS levels, activities, or both.

Creating WBS Categories

Create WBS categories to organize, filter, and report WBS information in all projects.

To create WBS categories:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click WBS Category.

3) On the WBS Category page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the Category field, double-click and type a name.

c. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

To change a category value, double-click it, then type a new name. The change

applies to all projects to which the WBS item is assigned.

If you change the WBS category, the category’s values or value assignments do not

change.

About Activity Codes

Activity codes enable you to categorize activities into logical groups based on your

organization's criteria. An activity code can be one of three types: Global, EPS, or

Project. Global activity codes organize activities across all projects in an organization.

EPS activity codes organize activities within a specific branch or node of the enterprise

project structure (EPS). Project activity codes categorize activities based on specific

features within a project.

Administration

487

Activity codes represent broad categories of information, a department or project

manager for instance. You can create multiple activity codes according to specific

categories, then assign different values for each code. For example, assume your

organization has many departments and you want to review activities within each

department. You can first create an activity code "department," then assign different

values such as quality assurance, finance, and sales. You can then associate activities

with specific departments.

A key characteristic of an activity code as opposed to an activity user defined field is

that activity codes will only allow entries from a predefined list of values. After you create

activity codes, users can assign activity code values to activities to group, sort, and filter

project data based on these values.

Creating Activity Codes

Create activity codes organizes activities into groups. Activity codes can be one of three

levels: global, EPS, or project.

To create activity codes:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Activity Codes.

3) On the Activity Codes page, click the Global, EPS, or Project tab to determine the

level for the activity code.

4) On the Global, EPS, or Project tab, click the Add Activity Code icon.

a. Move the activity code to the correct location in the list by clicking the Move

Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up) and Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down) arrows.

b. In the Name field, double-click and type a unique code.

Note: Project-level activity codes must be unique across all

projects. Enterprise-level activity codes must be unique across all

EPSs. Global activity codes must be unique across the organization.

c. In the Maximum Length field, double-click and click the up or down arrow to

specify project code value length.

d. In the Secure field, mark the option to make the code read-only for users without

the necessary security privileges to make changes.

Note: You can designate an activity code as secure only if you

have the appropriate security privilege; otherwise, this option does

not display.

e. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

Activity codes at the same level are siblings. Subordinate activity codes are children.

488

Click Move to Global to move an EPS-level or project-level activity code to a

global-level activity code. Click Move to EPS to move a project-level activity code to

an EPS-level activity code.

If you are working on the Project tab and the project you need is not visible, click

Select Projects. In the Select Projects dialog box, select a project and click OK. For

help adding projects to the Selected Projects list, see Customize Columns or Values

(see "Configuring Columns or Values" on page 91).

Creating Activity Code Values

Create activity code values to represent variations within the larger scope of the activity

code. It is these values, not the activity codes, that you will assign to projects. You can

add code values for project-level, EPS-level, and global activity codes. These steps

represent the minimum required to create an activity code value. To configure an

activity code value, see Configuring Activity Code Values (on page 489).

To create activity code values:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Activity Codes.

3) On the Activity Codes page, click the Global, EPS, or Project tab to determine the

level for the activity code value.

4) On the Global, EPS, or Project tab:

a. Select a code.

b. Click Add Activity Code Value.

Note: The code value will be assigned to the selected code.

c. Move the activity code value to the correct location in the list and hierarchical

position by clicking the Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up), Move Down

(Ctrl+Alt+Down), Move Left (Ctrl+Alt+Left), and Move Right (Ctrl+Alt+Right)

arrows.

d. In the Name field, double-click and type a code value unique to that tree level.

Note: The code value cannot exceed the Maximum Length

specified by the activity code.

e. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

Activity code values at the same level are siblings. Subordinate activity code values

are children.

Administration

489

You can also assign project-level activity code values to an open project. On the

Projects navigation bar, click Activities and click the Codes detail window. In the

Codes detail window, click Assign Activity Code Value. In the Select Code Value

dialog box, you can assign a preexisting code value or add a new code value. To

assign an existing code value, mark Global, EPS, or Project and select an activity

code value from that level. To add a new code value, select an activity code and

click Add Code Value. Type a name and description and click Create.

To select multiple projects in the Select Projects dialog box, press the Ctrl key and

click the projects to be selected.

Each time you update the list of projects on the Project tab, the application saves the

list of displayed projects.

If you are working on the Project tab and the project you need is not visible, click

Select Projects. In the Select Projects dialog box, select a project and click OK. The

dialog box only displays the projects you have access to view. For help adding

projects to the Selected Projects list, see Customize Columns or Values (see

"Configuring Columns or Values" on page 91).

Configuring Activity Code Values

Configure activity code values to reflect changing variations within the larger scope of

the activity code.

To configure activity code values:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Activity Codes.

3) On the Activity Codes page, click the Global, EPS, or Project tab that matches the

level you need to configure.

4) On the Global, EPS, or Project tab, select an activity code value.

a. In the Description field, double-click and type a brief narrative about the code

value.

b. In the Color field, double-click and click to change the color automatically

assigned to this value.

c. In the Color dialog box, select a color and click OK.

Note: In the Gantt chart and the Activity Calendar, activity status

shown by activity code will display the color you apply to the

activity code value.

5) On the Activity Codes page, click Save.

Tips

Activity code values at the same level are siblings. Subordinate activity code values

are children.

490

You can also configure activity code values from the Codes detail window on the

Activities page. In the Codes detail window, double-click the Code Value field for an

activity code and click . Select a new value from the dialog box.

If you are working on the Project tab and the project you need is not visible, click

Select Projects. In the Select Projects dialog box, select a project and click OK. For

help adding projects to the Selected Projects list, see Customize Columns or Values

(see "Configuring Columns or Values" on page 91).

Configuring EPS-Level Activity Codes

Configure enterprise project structure (EPS)-level activity codes to reflect a company's

work needs.

To configure EPS level activity codes:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Activity Codes.

3) On the Activity Codes page, click the EPS tab.

4) In the EPS tab:

a. Move activity code values to different EPS levels in the list and hierarchical position

by clicking the Move Up, Move Down, Move Left, and Move Right

arrows.

b. Click Save.

About Cost Accounts

Cost accounts enable you to monitor project expenses, activity costs, and earned value

throughout the project life cycle. Costs are attached to activities and resources so you

can track the amount of work accomplished against the amount of money spent. You

can assign default or created cost accounts to any project.

Cost accounts are established in a hierarchy. For example, if you created a cost

account for a project component such as hardware, you would create other cost

accounts beneath this component to show its parts such as coding and installation.

Creating Cost Accounts

Create cost accounts to track activity cost and earned value throughout the project life

cycle. You can associate predefined cost accounts with expenses to categorize them.

To create cost accounts:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Cost Accounts.

3) On the Cost Accounts page:

Administration

491

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. Move the cost account to the correct location in the list and hierarchical position

by clicking the Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up), Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down),

Move Left (Ctrl+Alt+Left), and Move Right (Ctrl+Alt+Right) arrows.

c. In the ID field, double-click and type a unique ID.

d. In the Name field, double-click and type a name.

e. In the Description field, double-click and click .

4) In the Description detail window, type a brief narrative about the cost account.

5) On the Cost Accounts page, click Save (Ctrl+S) .

About Expenses

Expenses are non-resource costs associated with a project and assigned to a project’s

activities. An expense is typically a one-time expenditure for non-reusable items.

Expenses are project-specific and not time-based. Some examples include facilities,

travel, consulting, and training. Each expense has an actual, remaining, and at

completion value for both cost and units that is either budgeted or planned.

Expense categories classify and standardize expenses, and organize and maintain your

expense information.

Creating Expense Categories

Create an expense category to organize and track various expense types within an

organization.

To create expense categories:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Expense Categories.

3) On the Expense Categories page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the Category field, double-click and type a name.

c. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

To change an expense category, double-click it, then type a new name. The change

applies to all projects to which the expense item is assigned.

492

About Step Templates

Step templates enable you to define a group of steps common to multiple activities, and

then assign the template to different activities. By creating templates for groups of

activity steps that are relevant in many projects, an organization can streamline data

entry and ensure that work is identified consistently throughout the organization.

Creating Step Templates

Create step templates to specify reusable sets of steps common to many activities. This

task represents the minimum steps required to create a step template. To configure a

step template, see Configuring Step Templates (on page 492).

To create step templates:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Step Templates.

3) On the Step Templates page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the Template Name field, double-click and type a name.

c. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Configuring Step Templates

Configure step templates to add, delete, or arrange the steps assigned to a template.

To configure a step template:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Step Templates.

3) On the Step Templates page, select a template.

4) In the Step Template detail window, you can add, delete, or arrange steps.

To add steps, click Add (Insert).

a. In the Step Name field, double-click and type a name.

b. In the Description field, double-click and click .

c. In the Description dialog box, type a brief narrative about the step and click OK.

d. In the Weight field, double-click and type a weight value.

To delete steps, select a step and click Delete (Delete).

To arrange steps, select a step and click the Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up) and

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down) arrows.

5) On the Step Templates page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Administration

493

About Risks

Risks are any uncertain events or conditions that, if they occur, have a positive or

negative effect on project objectives. Risks are also known as threats, warnings,

imperatives, escalation notices, or jeopardies. Positive risks are often classified as

opportunities which, if they occur, are realized as rewards. Thorough documentation and

analysis of risks over multiple projects offer lessons, and potentially cost and time savings,

for all future projects.

Working with Risks Enterprise Data

Risk Enterprise data is used to setup categories, risk scoring matrices, and thresholds that

are standard across your company. The categories and matrices that are assigned to a

project can be displayed in the risk register, which is located in the Projects section under

Risks.

Risk Categories page - Risk categories are used to categorize and organize project risks.

They are global across the enterprise and are a mechanism to group risks across multiple

projects to see risk trends across the organization as well as a single project. Technical,

Operational, External are examples of risk categories that might apply to a typical

project. The risk categories are created in the Risks Enterprise Data area and assigned on

the Risks page under Projects.

Risk Scoring Matrices page - Create a risk scoring matrix to perform qualitative risk

analysis on your project risks. When creating a risk scoring matrix, you must define the

probability, tolerance, cost, and schedule impacts. Additionally, you can add

user-defined impacts to the matrix. You must also assign a risk scoring method (Highest

Impact, Average Impact, and Average Individual Impact) to the matrix. A probability

and impact diagram is created based on the information assigned in the matrix. Click on

the Probability and Impact Diagram detail window to view the diagram.

To use the risk scoring matrix, you must add the projects you want to use the matrix to the

risk scoring matrix from the Projects detail window. You can also assign a risk scoring

matrix to a project from the EPS page from the Projects section.

Note: You can add risks to a project without a risk scoring matrix;

however, you cannot perform qualitative risk analysis and will not

be able to assign probability or impact thresholds without a risk

scoring matrix. You can add a risk scoring matrix to the project at

any time.

Risk Thresholds page - Create risk thresholds, including probability, tolerance, cost

impact, schedule impact, and any additional user-defined impacts, for use in the risk

scoring matrix.

494

Risk UDFs page - Risk UDFs are used to track additional information about the risk that is

not provided by the standard risk fields. Create Risk user-defined fields (UDFs) when it is

necessary to view additional data fields on the Risks page. A risk UDF can include a text

string, a numerical value, start date, finish date, cost, integer, or indicator.

Configuring Risk Enterprise Data

You can configure enterprise data to include risk categories and risk UDFs, and to define

the criteria for performing qualitative risk analysis using a risk scoring matrix.

To define the criteria for performing qualitative risk analysis, perform the following tasks:

1) Creating Risk Thresholds (on page 350)

2) Creating Risk Scoring Matrices (on page 357)

3) Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project (on page 358)

To configure risk categories or risk UDFs, see:

Creating Risk Categories (on page 361)

Creating Risk UDFs (on page 363)

About Risk Scoring Matrices

A risk scoring matrix is a qualitative analysis tool used to calculate the impact of a risk on

a project. A risk scoring matrix includes probability threshold values, cost and impact

threshold values, and any additional user-defined impact threshold values, which are all

used in the calculation of the risk score. The score is used to give an overall rating of a risk

depending on the probability and impact thresholds assessed in the project. The scores

are used to help determine if the risk should be addressed during the course of the

project, or if the risk does not present a significant impact to the cost or schedule of the

project.

Administration

495

Working with Risk Scoring Matrices

Use the Risk Scoring Matrices page to create a risk scoring matrix for one or more

projects. The inputs to the risk scoring matrix are the risk thresholds, which you create on

the Risk Thresholds page from the Enterprise Data section.

Table of Risk Scoring Matrices Elements

Item Description

Risk Scoring Matrices toolbar. See Enterprise Data Risk Scoring Matrices

Toolbar.

496

Item Description

Risk Scoring Matrices work area: This work area contains all the risk

scoring matrices defined for your company. The number of risk scoring

matrices you create is determined by risk analysis practices incorporated

in your business. You might have one corporate-wide risk scoring matrix

that is used for all projects, or you might have a need for separate

matrices which are used depending on different factors, such as project

size. For example, a project that is a new development might require

different cost impact and schedule impact threshold values than a

project for a new feature development on an existing product.

There might also be situations where a project is a joint-venture or is

performed by a contractor and the prime owner's matrix must be used.

However, for any project, only one matrix is assigned.

In the work area above, you can see this company has a need for

multiple risk scoring matrices, including a separate risk scoring matrix for

the Harbour Pointe Assisted Living construction project.

When creating a risk scoring matrix, you choose a matrix size based on

the number of levels assigned to your probability and impact thresholds

defined on the Risk Thresholds page. Using the Harbour Pointe Risk

Scoring Matrix as an example, the risk scoring matrix is 5 x 5. The first 5

represents the number of levels assigned to the probability threshold and

the second 5 represents the number of levels assigned to the cost and

schedule impact thresholds.

Next you choose the risk scoring method to use for risk score calculations.

For more information on risk scoring methods, see Risk Scoring Method.

Administration

497

Item Description

Risk Scoring Matrices detail windows:

Description: The area used to describe the risk scoring matrix.

Projects: The area where you assign the matrix to one or more projects.

Note that only one matrix can be assigned to a single project. If a matrix

is not assigned to a project, risks can still be entered in the risk register on

the Projects Risks page; however, the probability, cost impact, and

schedule impact threshold fields are disabled, and you cannot use the

qualitative analysis features of the application. At any time you can

create a matrix and assign it to an existing project.

Probability and Impact Diagram (PID): The PID is a graphical

representation of the selections made in the Risk Scoring Matrices work

area. The number of rows and columns is determined by the matrix size.

The rows are the probability levels and the columns are the impact levels.

The code and name fields for the impact threshold levels are

customizable when creating a threshold; therefore, the column labels for

the impacts are "Severity n." The number of severity columns reflects the

number of levels assigned to the impact thresholds.

The color coding indicates the tolerance threshold assigned to the risk

scoring matrix. These same tolerance colors are also visible in the Score

and Score (Text) fields on the risk register on the Projects Risks page when

risk values are entered.

Probability: The details of the probability threshold assigned to the matrix

needed to perform a qualitative assessment on project risks. This detail

window is read-only. To change anything related to the threshold,

navigate to the Risk Thresholds page.

Impacts: The details for the impact thresholds assigned to the matrix. A

cost and schedule impact must be defined for the matrix to perform a

qualitative assessment on project risks. An unlimited number of

user-defined impact thresholds can be assigned to the matrix. From this

detail window you can add or delete impacts to the matrix; however,

you cannot modify the threshold values. To change anything related to

the threshold, navigate to the Risk Thresholds page.

Tolerance: The details for the tolerance threshold assigned to the matrix.

This detail window is read-only. To change anything related to the

threshold, navigate to the Risk Thresholds page.

498

Creating Risk Scoring Matrices

Create a risk scoring matrix to perform qualitative analysis on project risks. Project risk is

assessed based on the thresholds defined in the risk scoring matrix.

Before creating a risk scoring matrix, you need to first define risk thresholds.

To create a risk scoring matrix:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and choose Risk Scoring Matrices.

3) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the Name field, click and type a unique name.

c. In the Matrix Size field, double-click and click .

4) In the Select Matrix Size dialog box:

a. Choose a threshold level for the Probability and Impact fields.

Note: You must have already defined thresholds with the number

of levels you are assigning to the matrix (see Creating Risk

Thresholds (on page 350)). If you do not have a threshold with the

same number of levels, you will be able to select the matrix size, but

you will not be able to add a threshold.

b. Click OK.

5) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, double-click in the Probability Threshold field and

click .

6) In the Select Probability Threshold dialog box, choose a probability and click OK.

7) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, double-click in the Impact Thresholds field and

click .

8) In the Select Impact Thresholds dialog box:

a. Select a Cost Impact and click Assign.

b. Select a Schedule Impact and click Assign.

c. Select any additional impacts and click Assign.

d. Click Close.

9) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, double-click in the Tolerance Threshold field and

click .

10) In the Select Tolerance Threshold dialog box, choose a tolerance and click OK.

11) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, double-click in the Risk Scoring Method field and

select a risk scoring method from the list. For a detailed description of each method,

see Risk Scoring Method Description.

12) In the Description detail window, type a description of the risk scoring matrix.

Administration

499

13) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project

You need to assign a scoring matrix to a project before it can be used to prioritize risks.

Once you assign a scoring matrix to a project, it is available for use from the risk register

on the Projects Risks page.

You can assign a risk scoring matrix to a project from different areas in the application,

depending on the tasks you are working on at the time.

When setting up a project, see Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the

EPS Page (see "Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the EPS Page" on

page 359).

When defining a risk scoring matrix and applying the matrix to multiple projects, see

Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the Enterprise Data Pane (on page

358).

When managing a portfolio, see Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the

Portfolios Section (on page 359).

Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the Enterprise Data Pane

You need to assign a risk scoring matrix to a project before it can be used to prioritize

risks. Once you assign a scoring matrix to a project, it is available for use from the risk

register on the Projects Risks page.

You can assign a risk scoring matrix to a project from multiple locations in the application.

Use this method when you are defining a risk scoring matrix and need to apply the matrix

to one or more projects.

To assign a risk scoring matrix to a project from the Enterprise Data pane:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and choose Risk Scoring Matrices.

3) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, click the Projects detail window.

4) In the Projects detail window, click Add (Insert).

5) In the Select Project dialog box:

a. Select a project and click Assign.

Note: If the project you selected is assigned to another risk scoring

matrix, the threshold values you previously set for the project are

removed. You will need to select values using the newly assigned

risk scoring matrix.

b. Select any additional projects and click Assign.

c. Click Close.

6) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

500

Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the EPS Page

You need to assign a risk scoring matrix to a project before it can be used to prioritize

risks. Once you assign a scoring matrix to a project, it is available for use from the risk

register on the Projects Risks page.

You can assign a risk scoring matrix to a project from multiple locations in the application.

Use this method when you are setting up a project or modifying project settings.

To assign a risk scoring matrix to a project from the EPS page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Locate the project you want to associate with a risk scoring matrix.

b. Double-click in the Risk Scoring Matrix field and click .

4) In the Select Risk Scoring Matrix dialog box, select a matrix and click OK.

Note: If the project you selected is assigned to another risk scoring

matrix, the threshold values you previously set for the project are

removed. You will need to select values using the newly assigned

risk scoring matrix.

5) On the EPS page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

If the Risk Scoring Matrix field is not visible, click View and select Columns. In the

Customize Columns dialog box, expand General and double-click Risk Scoring Matrix to

move it to the Selected Columns list. Click OK.

Assigning a Risk Scoring Matrix to a Project from the Portfolios Section

You need to assign a risk scoring matrix to a project before it can be used to prioritize

risks. Once you assign a scoring matrix to a project, it is available for use from the risk

register on the Projects Risks page.

You can assign a risk scoring matrix to a project from multiple locations in the application.

Use this method when you are creating or modifying a portfolio.

To assign a risk scoring matrix from the Portfolios section:

1) Click Portfolios.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Portfolio Analysis.

3) On the Portfolio Analysis page:

a. Click the View field and select a scorecard view from the list.

b. Select a project.

c. In the Risk Scoring Matrix field, double-click and click .

Administration

501

4) In the Select Risk Scoring Matrix dialog box, choose a risk scoring matrix and click OK.

Note: If the project you selected is assigned to another risk scoring

matrix, the threshold values you previously set for the project are

removed. You will need to select values using the newly assigned

risk scoring matrix.

5) On the Portfolio Analysis page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

If the Risk Scoring Matrix field is not visible, click Customize. In the Customize Scorecard

dialog box, click the Columns tab. On the Columns tab, expand General and

double-click Risk Scoring Matrix to move it to the Selected Columns list. Click Apply.

About Risk Thresholds

Risk thresholds are a range of values (monetary, time, quality, technical, etc.) used in

rating or assessing the impact of the risk to the project. A risk reaching or crossing over the

defined risk threshold requires attention and might require a risk response action.

These thresholds are the inputs used to create a risk scoring matrix, which is the overall

scoring mechanism used to perform qualitative risk analysis on your project risks.

Working with Risk Thresholds

From the Risk Thresholds page, you create risk thresholds for use in your risk scoring

matrices.

Risk thresholds necessary for a risk scoring matrix are:

Probability: The likelihood of a risk occurring.

Tolerance: The acceptability or manageability of a risk on a project.

Schedule: The amount of time the risk will increase or decrease the project schedule.

Cost: The cost impact if a risk occurs.

502

You can also add additional user-defined impacts necessary for the calculation of your

risk score.

Table of Risk Threshold Elements

Item Description

Risk Threshold toolbar. See Enterprise Data Risk Thresholds Toolbar.

Administration

503

Item Description

Risk Threshold work area: You define the risk threshold name, type

(Probability, Tolerance, Schedule Impact, Cost Impact, User-Defined

Impact), and number of thresholds levels in this work area. Each threshold

can have 2 - 9 levels; however, the cost impact, schedule impact, and

any user-defined impacts must have the same number of levels for a

given risk scoring matrix.

In the example above, the Cost Impact, Schedule Impact, Probability,

and Tolerance thresholds are defined for the Harbour Pointe Assisted

Living construction project. The Cost Impact and Schedule Impact

thresholds are each defined with 5 levels and the Probability threshold is

also defined with 5 levels. The risk scoring matrix that will be using these

thresholds will have a matrix size of 5 x 5.

For each risk scoring matrix, only one threshold for Probability, Tolerance,

Schedule Impact, and Cost Impact is allowed. You can add as many

user-defined impacts as necessary. You create multiple thresholds of the

same type, but with different values, when you create multiple risk

scoring matrices.

Levels detail window: The details for each level are defined in this

window. Define a name for each level and a code, which is a short

name or abbreviation for the name. Also, define the range of

acceptable values for that level; the range levels could be a percentage

value, dollar amount, number of days, or a text string depending on the

chosen threshold. You can define a color for each threshold level;

however, you should define colors for the tolerance threshold. The colors

for the threshold are used to give visual representation in the risk register.

The colors for the tolerance threshold are used in the Probability and

Impact Diagram (PID) to visually represent the threshold values. More

importantly, the colors display in the Score and Score (text) fields on the

risk register on the Projects Risks page. This enables you to easily identify

where in the risk scoring matrix this risk falls in terms of severity.

In the example above, the Tolerance threshold is defined with 3 levels

(High, Medium, and Low) and each range is assigned a color. You will

see the impact the color makes after you create a risk scoring matrix,

assign the thresholds to the matrix, and assign a risk scoring method. See

Working with Risk Scoring Matrices (on page 354).

Creating Risk Thresholds

You create risk thresholds, which you then use as inputs when creating a risk scoring

matrix. When creating risk thresholds, you must define the probability threshold, cost

impact threshold, schedule impact threshold, and tolerance threshold. You can also

define as many user-defined impacts as necessary.

504

To create risk thresholds:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) Risks and click Risk Thresholds.

3) Repeat the following for each threshold you want to create:

a. On the Risk Thresholds page:

1. Click Add (Insert).

2. In the Name field, double-click and type a threshold name.

3. In the Type field, double-click and select a type of risk from the list.

4. In the Levels field, double-click and select a level number from the list.

b. In the Levels detail window, a default value is assigned for the Code, Name, and

Range values. You can use the default values provided, or double-click any field

to customize that field.

You can define a color for each threshold level to visually represent the values

when working the risk register on the Project Risks page. However, you should

define colors for the tolerance threshold. The colors for the tolerance threshold are

used to color the Score field on the risk register on the Projects Risks page. This

enables you to easily identify where in the risk scoring matrix this risk falls in terms of

severity.

4) On the Risk Thresholds page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

Modifying Risk Thresholds

If you are going to change the type or level of a threshold that is currently assigned to a

scoring matrix, you must first remove the threshold from the risk scoring matrix and assign

a new threshold.

To delete a threshold from a risk scoring matrix:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and click Risk Scoring Matrices.

3) Repeat the following for each risk scoring matrix that includes the threshold you are

modifying.

a. On the Risk Scoring Matrices page:

1. Locate the risk scoring matrix that includes the threshold you are modifying.

2. Double-click in the appropriate threshold field.

b. In the Select Threshold dialog box, choose a different threshold and click Assign,

and then click Close.

4) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

To modify a risk threshold:

Administration

505

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and click Risk Thresholds.

3) On the Risk Thresholds page:

a. Locate the threshold you are modifying.

b. Double-click in the field you are modifying and update the value.

Note: If you are modifying the number of levels assigned to a

threshold, all data for existing levels are overwritten and replaced

with the default values for that level.

c. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

About Risk Categories

Risk categories are a classification of risk types customized to your specific project or

business that are used to categorize and organize project risks. Categorizing risks enables

you to analyze the types of risks occurring and see trends within the project or across

multiple projects. This visibility will enable you to more effectively manage risks over the

long term.

Creating Risk Categories

Create a risk category to categorize and organize project risks.

To create a risk category:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and click Risk Categories.

3) On the Risk Categories page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the Category field, double-click and type a unique name.

c. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

To display the Category field on the Projects Risks page, click Select Columns on the Risks

toolbar and select Category.

506

About Issues

Issues are perceived problems within a schedule that require attention or corrective

action. When you create them in the Activities section, you can associate them with a

single project or workgroup and assign them to a responsible manager in the OBS for

follow-up based on priority. You can also associate issues with a single activity. When

adding new issues to a project or workgroup, you can control the information you

capture for each new issue. You can choose to receive e-mail notifications when new

issues of a certain priority are added, when existing issues are modified, or when issues

are assigned a specific issue code.

You can also think of issues as impediments, action items, open items, punch lists, logs, or

concerns. Over time, if you do not resolve or close open issues or issues placed on hold,

they can become risks.

Issue codes enable you to organize and categorize issues in a way that is meaningful to

you. For example, you can create an issue code titled Severity, and subsequently create

issue code values: High, Medium, and Low. You can assign each of these code values to

issues across multiple projects, enabling you to categorize each issue according to how

severe it is. Similarly, you can create codes to categorize issues by responsibility,

subproject, or any other classification you require to organize issues. Assigning issue

codes enables you to quickly search for and view issues according to specific criteria.

Creating Issue Codes

Create issue codes to organize project issues in a way that is meaningful to your

organization.

To create an issue code:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Issues and click Issue Codes.

3) On the Issue Codes page:

a. Click Add Code.

b. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the issue code.

c. Mark the Secure option to make the code read-only for users without the

necessary security privileges to make changes.

d. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

You can designate an issue code as secure only if you have the appropriate security

privilege; otherwise, this option does not appear.

Administration

507

Creating Issue Code Values

Create issue code values to represent variations within the larger scope of the issue

code.

To create an issue code value:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Issues and click Issue Codes.

3) On the Issue Codes page:

a. Select a code.

b. Click Add Code Value.

Note: The code value will be added to the selected issue code.

c. Move the issue code value to the correct location in the list and hierarchical

position by clicking the Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up), and Move Down

(Ctrl+Alt+Down) arrows.

d. In the Name field, double-click and type a unique code value.

e. In the Description field, double-click and type a brief narrative about the issue

code value.

4) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

Issue code values at the same level are siblings. Subordinate issue code values are

children.

About Document Categories and Statuses

Document category and status designations can help you track project work products

and documents. For example, document category designations can identify documents

that are project standards or project deliverables. Document status designations can

identify which documents are in review or completed.

Creating Document Categories

Create document categories to organize documents. Each category serves as a folder

for easy retrieval of the document.

To create document categories:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Documents and click Document Categories.

3) On the Document Categories page:

508

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the Name field, enter a name.

c. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

To change a name of a category, double-click the selected name and enter a new

name. If you change a document category's name, the change is applied to all

document assignments.

To change the order in which a document category is displayed, select it, then click

the Move Up or Move Down arrows.

Creating Document Statuses

Create document statuses to identify the current status of work products and documents

within a project.

To create a document status:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Documents and click Document Statuses.

3) On the Document Statuses page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the Name field, double-click and type a name.

c. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

To change a status type, double-click it, then type a new name. The change applies to

all projects to which the document is assigned.

About Currencies

Currencies are the monetary units used to store costs for all projects in the database.

Monetary units are stored in the database with a base currency that you select. The base

currency is used to display costs in windows and dialog boxes. If you select a different

currency than the base currency to view costs, the exchange rate for the base currency

is always 1.0. The base currency value is multiplied by the current exchange rate for the

view currency to calculate the values displayed in cost fields. For example, if the base

currency is U.S. Dollars, the view currency is Euros, and the exchange rate for Euros is .75,

a value of 10 dollars is displayed as 7.5 Euros in cost fields for windows and dialog boxes.

Similarly, if you enter 7.5 Euros in a cost field, it is stored in the database as 10 dollars.

Admin Superusers and users with the 'Edit Currency' privilege can change the base

currency and define additional view currency types. When you enter values in cost and

price fields, they are always displayed in the user's view currency.

Administration

509

Adding a Currency

To add a currency:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Currencies.

3) On the Currencies page:

a. Right-click on a row and choose Add (Insert).

b. In the new row added at the bottom of the list, specify the appropriate values for

the new currency.

c. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Defining a Base Currency

The base currency is U.S. dollars by default. The exchange rate for the base currency is

always one.

To define a different currency as the base:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Currencies.

3) On the Currencies page:

a. Select the row that has BASE RATE in the Exchange Rate field.

b. Double-click in the ID, Name, and Currency Symbol fields and enter the base

currency's information.

For example, if you want the pound to be the new base currency, you can type in

U.K. for the ID, British Pound for the name, and £ for the currency symbol.

c. Display other fields, such as decimal digits and positive format, and edit as

needed.

4) Click Save (Ctrl+S)

About Financial Periods

Financial periods are predefined time periods you can apply to financial or scheduling

data throughout the application to consistently measure and compare that data.

Customized financial periods provide more accurate display and reporting of actual

costs and units according to time increments recognized by your finance and

accounting staff. Users can focus on a financial period and pinpoint how actual costs

were incurred during that time.

A calendar year with 355 days, a fiscal quarter ending July 15, and a week from Sunday

to Saturday are all examples of financial periods.

510

You must have the Add/Edit/Delete Financial Period Dates global privilege to create,

modify, or remove data in the Financial Periods dialog box. To store past period actuals

for a project’s defined financial periods, you must have the Store Period Performance

and Add/Edit Activities Except Relationships project privileges. To edit past period actual

data in P6 Professional after storing period performance, users must have the Edit Period

Performance project privilege.

Creating Financial Periods

Create financial periods to measure and compare financial data. You can create

annual, monthly, or weekly periods.

To create a financial period:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Financial Periods.

3) On the Financial Periods page:

a. Click the Add icon.

b. To change the default name for the new financial period, click the Name field,

and enter a name.

c. To change the Start Date field, directly enter a new date, or select a date from the

common calendar tool.

d. To change the Finish Date field, directly enter a new date, or select a date from

the common calendar tool.

4) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

To save time, consider generating financial periods in a batch rather than

individually. To create a financial period batch see Creating a Financial Period Batch

(on page 511).

Although the application will alert you in each case, be aware of the following

constraints when creating or configuring financial periods:

You cannot introduce gaps in a series of financial periods. Any new periods you

create must start or end flush with any existing entries. For example, if October 7-13

and October 14-20 are existing financial periods, you can create a new one that

either ends on October 6 or starts on October 21.

You cannot overlap financial periods. In order to serve their purpose, financial periods

must represent unique slices of time.

You can create financial periods with a duration of fewer than seven days (one

week); however, you cannot view them in timescales in P6. Use P6 Professional if you

need to view data by financial periods spanning increments of fewer than seven

days (one week).

Administration

511

Creating a Financial Period Batch

You can create annual or quarterly periods one at a time; however, to speed the time

required to add monthly or weekly periods, consider using the Generate Financial Period

Batch feature.

To create a financial period batch:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Financial Periods.

3) On the Financial Periods page, click Add Batch.

4) In the Generate Financial Periods dialog box:

a. In the Batch Start Date field, click Select Batch Start Date and select a date from

the calendar or type a start date.

Note: For example, the 31st of January 2010 would be 31-Jan-10.

b. In the Batch Finish Date field, click Select Batch Finish Date and select a date

from the calendar or type a start date in day-month-year format.

c. Select a Period Cycle and use the up and down arrows to specify a number of

weeks or months.

d. Click Create.

5) In the Primavera P6 alert dialog box, click OK to acknowledge that one new financial

period has been created.

6) On the Financial Periods page:

a. In the Name field, double-click and type a name.

b. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

Although you are alerted in each case, be aware of the following constraints when

creating or configuring financial periods:

You cannot introduce gaps in a series of financial periods. Any new periods you

create must start or end flush with any existing entries. For example, if October 7-13

and October 14-20 are existing financial periods, you can create a new one that

either ends on October 6 or starts on October 21.

You cannot overlap financial periods. In order to serve their purpose, financial periods

must represent unique slices of time.

You can create financial periods with a duration of fewer than seven days (one

week); however, you cannot view them in timescales in P6. Use P6 Professional if you

need to view data by financial periods spanning increments of fewer than seven

days (one week).

512

About Overhead Codes

Overhead codes provide P6 Progress Reporter users with a way to categorize their time.

When applied on their timesheets, the codes help users log hours that are not associated

with project activities. For example, users can enter time for vacations, holidays, sick time,

or general administrative work.

Creating Overhead Codes

Create overhead codes for P6 Progress Reporter users to add overhead activities to their

timesheets to log timesheet hours that are not associated with the project.

To create an overhead code:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Overhead Codes.

3) On the Overhead Codes page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the Name field, double-click and type a unique code.

c. In the Description field, double-click and type a unique name.

d. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Tips

When you specify that two approval levels are required to approve timesheets,

timesheets that contain only overhead activities bypass project manager approval and

are sent directly to the resource/cost manager for approval. For timesheets containing a

mix of regular and overhead activities, project managers can view, but not approve, the

overhead activities.

About Timesheet Periods

The timesheet period is the amount of time a timesheet covers. The administrator defines

the time covered by timesheet periods; for example, every two weeks, every four weeks,

or every month. The administrator must create timesheet periods before the user can

view and enter time on their timesheets.

Creating Timesheet Periods

Use timesheet periods to create ranges for your timesheets.

To create a timesheet period:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Timesheet Periods.

3) On the Timesheet Periods page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

Administration

513

b. In the Start Date field, double-click, click the down arrow, and select a date.

c. In the End Date field, double-click, click the down arrow, and select a date.

d. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

About Resource and Role Rate Types

The rate type determines the price per unit used to calculate costs for the assignment. In

today's global economy, different resources and roles command varying levels of pay.

Moreover, those rates can change over time. The price per unit, or rate, applied to a

resource or role assignment for an activity is determined by that assignment's specific

Rate Type or Rate Source field values.

A rate type is a user-defined title for a specific price-per-unit of work. Up to five global

user-defined rate types can be defined as part of your enterprise data settings. Examples

of rate types include Standard, Internal, External, Hourly, Weekly, and Special. To illustrate

how they are used, a resource might be assigned at an Hourly rate of $175 per hour but

for other assignments the same resource might be assigned at a Weekly rate of $5,000

per week or $125 per hour.

Configuring Resource and Role Rate Types

Configure resource and role rate type titles to determine what is displayed whenever the

rate types are displayed in a list or column.

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Rate Types.

3) On the Resource and Role Rate Types page:

a. Double-click a User Defined Title field and type a rate type title.

Note: For example, you might want to define two rate types as

Commercial Rate and Government Rate.

b. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

About Resource Codes

Resource codes provide another way to categorize project resources. Grouping by

resource codes enables you to quickly see activities assigned to an area of responsibility

and activities being performed by a specific group in your organization.

Creating Resource Codes

Create resource codes to group and arrange resources.

To create resource codes:

514

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Resource Codes.

3) On the Resource Codes page:

a. Click Add Code (Insert).

b. Move the code to the correct location in the list by clicking the Move Up

(Ctrl+Alt+Up) and Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down) arrows.

c. In the Name field, click and type a code.

d. In the Maximum Length field, double-click and click the up and down arrows to

specify a maximum code value length.

e. In the Secure field, double-click to mark the option to make the code read-only for

users without the necessary security privileges to make changes.

Note: You can designate a resource code as secure only if you

have the appropriate security privilege; otherwise, this option does

not display.

f. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

Creating Resource Code Values

Create resource code values to represent variations within the larger scope of the

resource code.

To create resource code values:

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Resource Codes.

3) On the Resource Codes page:

a. Select a code.

b. Click Add Code Value.

Note: The code value will be added to the selected resource

code.

c. Move the code value to the correct location and hierarchical position by clicking

the Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up), Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down), Move Left

(Ctrl+Alt+Left), and Move Right (Ctrl+Alt+Right) arrows.

d. In the Name field, double-click and type a code value.

Note: The code value cannot be longer than the maximum length

specified by the resource code.

Administration

515

e. In the Description field, double-click and type a brief narrative about the code

value.

f. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

About Resource Curves

Resource curves allow the user to specify the allocation of resources and costs over the

duration of an activity. Resource units and costs are distributed evenly throughout an

activity unless you specify nonlinear distribution using resource curves.

Defining Resource Curves

Define resource curves to specify how you want resource units or costs spread over the

duration of an activity. There are twelve default resource curves defined in the

application. You can add a new curve, which is based on the default linear curve, or

copy and modify one of the default resource curves or an existing Global curve to

create a custom global resource curve.

To define a custom resource curve:

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Resource Curves.

3) On the Resource Curves page, you can copy an existing curve to use as a base for

defining a new curve or add a new curve. The new curve defaults to a linear curve.

To copy an existing curve:

1. In the Name field, expand the Default group, or the Global group if you have

an existing resource curve to use, and select an existing curve to copy the

curve value percentages.

2. Click Copy (Ctrl+C).

3. Click the Global field and click Paste (Ctrl+V).

To add a new curve, click Add (Insert).

4) On the Resource Curves page, in the Name field under the Global group,

double-click and type a name for the resource curve.

5) On the Curves detail window:

a. Edit the curve value percentages to create a curve that indicates how your

costs/units should distribute over time. Curves are defined by 21 points (at 5%

intervals from 0 to 100).

b. Click Prorate to make the total of the distribution values equal to 100% while

maintaining the shape you specified.

6) On the Resource Curves page, click Save (Ctrl+S).

516

About Units of Measure

A unit of measure is a standardized way to define a unit of time or material. You can

change units of measure in a project to alter how materials such as graphs and

spreadsheets are depicted. You can also modify the list of unit of measure abbreviations

that the application refers to for conversions.

Creating Units of Measure

Create units of measure labels to assign to material resources.

To create units of measure:

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Units of Measure.

3) On the Units of Measure page:

a. Click Add (Insert).

b. In the Unit Abbreviation field, double-click and type an abbreviation.

c. In the Unit Name field, double-click and type a name for the unit.

d. Move the unit of measure to a different location in the list by clicking the Move

Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up) and Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down) arrows.

e. Click Save (Ctrl+S).

About User Access

User access helps you create user accounts, assign access, manage the organizational

breakdown structure (OBS) and configure profiles. The User Access page presents a list of

tabs:

Users: Presents options to modify security attributes and project and module access for

all users of P6 EPPM modules.

OBS: Presents options to configure the OBS hierarchy.

Global Security Profiles: Presents options to assign or omit global privileges to profiles.

Project Security Profiles: Presents options to assign or omit project privileges to profiles.

Administration

517

About Users

The Users page allows you to add and remove users, assign global and project profiles to

users, access resources, and assign or remove access to projects and P6 EPPM products.

For example, you can make users an Admin Superuser, giving them read/write privileges

for application-wide information and features, or you can assign a user no global

privileges. You can assign module access and allow the users to access only the modules

you want them to access, and you can use the project access tab to assign responsible

managers and give them security profiles, such as Administrator.

The Default Admin Superuser

For security reasons, Oracle strongly recommends that you replace the default

Admin Superuser (admin) in P6 immediately after a manual database installation or an

upgrade from P6 version 7.0 and earlier. Since P6 requires that at least one Admin

Superuser exists at all times, execute the procedures below in the order specified.

Follow the steps in Creating Users (see "Creating User Accounts for P6 EPPM" on page

517) to create a new user.

Follow the steps in Assigning Global Security Profiles (on page 520) to assign "Admin

Superuser" as the global profile for the new user.

Follow the steps in Assigning Module Access (on page 520) to assign at least one of

the following module access rights: Portfolios, Projects, or Resource.

Delete the original Admin Superuser, "Admin" by default.

Creating User Accounts for P6 EPPM

Follow these steps to create new user accounts for applications in P6 EPPM including P6,

P6 Professional, and P6 Progress Reporter. These steps represent the minimum you must

do to create a user account. To configure a user account, see Configuring User Access

(on page 519).

To create a new user account:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Users.

3) On the Users page, click the Add icon.

4) What appears next depends on your security configuration:

a. If P6 is running in native authentication mode, the Add User dialog box will appear:

1. Fill in the Login Name, Personal name, Password, and Confirm Password fields.

2. Click Add.

3. If the ability to edit a personal resource calendar or access to P6 Progress

Reporter is required, you can select an Associated Resource in the Users table

at this time, or you can create the link when you add resources.

518

4. In the Users table, add the columns for e-mail address and telephone number

(if not already present), and enter the appropriate data.

5. Click Save.

Notes:

Your user name can be a maximum of 30 characters.

The assigned Global Security Profile will determine the location

of the user in the Users tab hierarchy.

When the Password Policy is disabled in Application Settings,

the password must be between 1 and 20 characters. P6 EPPM

does not allow blank passwords.

When the Password Policy is enabled in Application Settings,

the password must be between 8 and 20 characters and

contain at least one number and one letter.

b. If P6 is running in SSO or LDAP authentication mode, the Add Users from LDAP

dialog box appears for you to provision users from the LDAP repository:

Note: You must have the Add/Edit/Delete Users privilege and the

Provision Users from LDAP privilege to search the LDAP directory.

You do not need the Provision Users from LDAP privilege to import

users from an LDIF file.

1. Either click the Load LDIF button, or enter an LDAP query (for example, uid=*)

under Search users. If a search was previously performed by a user with the

privilege to search the LDAP directory, the last query entered by that user will

appear.

2. If you clicked the Load LDIF button, browse to the location of the LDIF file, and

click Open. If you entered an LDAP query, click Search.

Note: Depending on your P6 administrative configuration settings,

you might be prompted to log into the LDAP server.

3. A list of users will appear, grouped by status. For example, LDAP repository users

that do not exactly match P6 EPPM users will be grouped together. If users exist

in the LDAP repository, the User Name, Actual Name, E-mail, and Phone fields

are populated (if you previously mapped those fields through the P6

Administrator application settings).

Note: The User Name field is equivalent to the Login Name field in

P6. The Actual Name field is equivalent to the Personal Name field.

4. Select the option next to each user account that you wish to import, or select

the option in the fields bar to select all users. New and modified users are

automatically selected.

Administration

519

5. Click Import.

Note: The new users will be assigned the default global profile.

Tips

Give each user a unique name with up to 30 alpha-numeric characters.

Oracle recommends the use of strong passwords. Strong passwords in P6 EPPM

are defined as passwords containing between 8 and 20 characters and at least one

numeric and one alpha character. To further strengthen the password, use a mixture

of upper and lower case letters.

For security reasons, Oracle strongly recommends that you replace the default

Admin Superuser (admin) immediately after a manual database installation or an

upgrade from P6 version 7.0 and earlier. For guidelines on this process, see The Default

Admin Superuser (on page 517).

Configuring User Access

For security purposes, configure user access controls to grant or deny user's access to

data.

To configure user access, select the appropriate link:

Assigning Associated Resources (on page 519)

Assigning Global Security Profiles (on page 520)

Assigning Module Access (on page 520)

Assigning Project Access (see "Assigning OBS Elements to Users" on page 521)

Assigning Resource Access (on page 521)

Tips

The Users page holds many more additional options you can use to configure user

access. For help viewing hidden columns, see Showing and Hiding Columns in a Table

(see "Showing or Hiding Columns in a Table" on page 91).

Assigning Associated Resources

Assign an associated resource to the user profile to connect the user with a resource in

the application. Each user can have only one resource assigned, and a resource cannot

be assigned to more than one user at the same time. Not all users require an associated

resource, but users must have a resource assigned to enable them to edit their personal

resource calendars and use P6 Progress Reporter. Also, by associating a resource with a

user, the user will be able to see all projects to which the resource is assigned via activities

if the user has Team Member access.

To assign an associated resource:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Users.

520

3) On the Users page:

a. Select a user.

b. In the Associated Resource field, double-click and click .

4) In the Select Resource dialog box, select a resource and click Assign.

5) On the Users page, click Save.

Assigning Global Security Profiles

Every user is assigned a global security profile by default. You can change a global

security profile for every user to control user access to application-wide information.

To change the user's global security profile:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Users.

3) On the Users page:

a. Select a user.

b. In the Global Security Profile field, double-click and choose a profile from the list.

Note: The assigned Global Security Profile will determine the

location of the user in the Users tab hierarchy if they are grouped

by the global profile.

c. Click Save.

Tips

You must have the appropriate privileges to assign security attributes.

An Admin Superuser is a global security profile that gives a user read/write privileges

for application-wide information and features. The Admin Superuser always has

access to all resources. If resource security is enabled, resource access settings are

not applicable. To make global information read-only for a user, choose No Global

Privileges. The No Global Privileges profile provides read-only access to all global

data except costs and secure codes.

Assigning Module Access

Assign user module access to allow or deny the user access to different parts of the

application.

To assign user module access:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Users.

3) On the Users page:

a. Select a user.

b. In the Module Access field, double-click and click .

Administration

521

4) In the Module Access detail window, select options to grant access to each module

or feature set.

5) On the Users page, click Save.

Assigning OBS Elements to Users

Assign OBS elements to a user to control their access to the EPS and projects.

Caution: Users assigned to an OBS that is assigned to the root EPS

have access to all projects at all levels.

To assign OBS elements to a user:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Users.

3) On the Users page, select a user.

4) In the Project Access detail window:

a. Click Add OBS.

b. In the Select Responsible Manager dialog box, select an OBS element from the list

and click Assign.

Note: The default project security profile will automatically be

assigned when the Responsible Manager is selected.

c. In the Project Access detail window, select a different project security profile, if

needed.

5) On the Users page, click Save.

Tips

You can also assign users to OBS elements using the Users Detail Window of the OBS

Page.

Project access settings are not applicable to users with the special Admin Superuser

global security profile. The Admin Superuser profile always has access to all projects.

To remove an OBS assignment, select an element in the Project Access detail window

and click Delete.

Assigning Resource Access

You can control which resources a user can access.

To control resource access:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Users.

3) On the Users page:

522

a. Select a user.

b. In the Resource Access field, double-click .

4) In the Specify Resource Access dialog box, select one of the following and click

Assign:

No Resources: to deny the user access to resources. This is the default resource

access setting for new users.

All Resources: to grant the user access to all resources.

Select Resources: to grant the user access to the selected resource node and its

children.

Note: You can assign only one node to a user.

5) On the Users page, click Save.

Tips

Resource access settings are not applicable to Admin Superusers. Superusers always

have access to all resources.

Resource access changes go into effect almost immediately for P6 users. P6

Professional users should exit the application and log in again for the changes to take

effect.

If a resource is deleted from the resource hierarchy, users that previously had been

assigned to the deleted resource will automatically be assigned to the No Resources

Access option.

Assigning User Interface Views

Assign user interface views to users to give users a view that is optimized for their role. User

interface views permit visibility to features essential for a user's role while hiding

functionality that is not applicable. You can assign user interface views only if you have

the necessary privileges.

To assign a user interface view:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Users.

a. Select a user.

b. In the User Interface View field, double-click and click .

3) In the Select User Interface View dialog box, select a user interface view and click

Assign.

4) On the Users page, click Save.

Changing Passwords

Administrators can change a user's password and users can change their own

passwords.

Administration

523

Administrators: See Changing User Passwords (on page 523).

Users: See Changing Your Own Password (on page 455).

Changing User Passwords

Administrators can change users' passwords.

To change a user password:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click the Users tab.

3) On the Users tab:

a. Select a user.

b. Click Change Password.

4) In the Change Password dialog box:

a. In the New Password field, enter a new password.

Notes:

When the Password Policy is enabled in Application Settings,

the password must be between 8 and 20 characters and

contain at least one number and one letter.

When the Password Policy is disabled in Application Settings,

the password must be between 1 and 20 characters. P6 EPPM

does not allow blank passwords.

b. In the Confirm New Password field, enter the new password again for verification

and click OK.

5) On the Users tab, click Save.

Tips

You cannot change passwords if you are running P6 EPPM in LDAP or SSO authentication

mode.

Counting Users

As an aid in determining whether you have reached licensing limitations, use the Count

feature to view the number of users assigned access to each P6 EPPM module:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Users.

3) In the Users tab, click Count.

4) In the Count dialog box, view the user count by module.

a. If needed, click Export to Excel or Print to create an output of the results.

524

About the OBS

The organizational breakdown structure (OBS) is a hierarchical way to represent the

managers responsible for the projects in your enterprise. You can associate the

responsible managers with their areas of the enterprise project structure (EPS) with either

an EPS node or a project. When you associate a responsible manager with an EPS node,

any projects you add to that branch of the EPS are assigned that manager element by

default. An OBS supports large projects that involve several project managers with

different areas of responsibility.

To access a project, a user must have access permissions for an OBS element within the

project. You can then assign users to OBS elements. When you assign users to OBS

elements, users get access privileges to projects and EPS nodes where they have OBS

access. The type of access granted to a user is determined by the project security profile

assigned to the user.

Creating an OBS

Create an organizational breakdown structure (OBS) to hierarchically represent the

managers responsible for your projects. You must have the appropriate privileges to

create an OBS.

To create a new OBS:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click OBS.

3) On the OBS page:

a. Click Add.

Note: The OBS is automatically added as a child of another OBS.

b. Move the OBS to the correct location in the list and hierarchical position by

clicking the Move Up, Move Down, Move Left, or Move Right arrows.

c. In the OBS Name field, double-click and type a unique name.

d. Click the Users detail window.

4) In the Users detail window, remove or assign users to the OBS.

To remove a user from the OBS, select a user and click the Delete icon.

To assign a user to the OBS, click the Add icon.

5) In the Select Users dialog box, select a user and click OK.

6) On the OBS page, click Save.

Tips

When you set up enterprise project structure (EPS) nodes, a root OBS is automatically

assigned to the root EPS.

Administration

525

A root OBS is automatically created when you create a new project so that an OBS

element is available for each work breakdown structure (WBS) element added to the

project.

Assigning Users to an OBS

A user must have permission to access an organizational breakdown structure (OBS) to

access a project assigned to that OBS. If you have appropriate privileges, you can assign

users to OBS elements using their login names.

Caution: Users assigned to an OBS that is assigned to the root EPS

have access to all nodes beneath the root.

To assign users to an OBS:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click OBS.

3) On the OBS page, select an OBS and click the Users detail window.

4) In the Users detail window, click Add.

5) In the Select Users dialog box:

a. Select a user and click Assign.

b. Select any additional users and click Assign.

c. Click Close when finished.

Note: The default project security profile will automatically be

assigned when the User is selected.

6) In the Users detail window, select a different project security profile for each user, if

needed.

7) On the OBS page, click Save.

526

About Security Profiles

A security profile is a collection of security permissions. There are two types of security

profiles: global security profiles and project security profiles. A global security profile

determines the user's access to application-wide information. The global security profile

provides read-only access to all global data except cost and resource data. Privileges

can be added to global security profiles to allow users to add, edit, and delete global

data, and view global cost data. A project security profile determines the user's level of

access to each project within the enterprise project structure. When you assign a project

security profile to a user, you also associate the project security profile with an

organizational breakdown structure (OBS) element/responsible manager. When an OBS

node is assigned to a user, the default project security profile is automatically assigned.

The user's access privileges, as defined in the project security profile, will then apply only

to those elements of the enterprise project structure (EPS) that are assigned to the OBS

element/responsible manager you selected.

P6 Professional and P6 require that all users have a global security profile. As an

administrator, you create global security profiles and assign individual access privileges

associated with them. To control access to global information, you create global security

profiles, and then assign them to individual users. If you want to give users access to all

global information, create a global security profile with all privileges.

You can also choose to assign the Admin Superuser global security profile. Admin

Superuser is an application-generated global security profile. You cannot edit the Admin

Superuser profile. One user must have the Admin Superuser profile, and you can assign

Admin Superuser profiles to as many people as you want, though you should limit the

number of users you assign to it. An Admin Superuser can add, edit, and delete

information by default, where all other users will have to be assigned the proper

privileges to do so.

To allow users to only see certain project information, you can create project security

profiles. A project security profile defines a set of privileges for access to project

information. You create project security profiles, then assign these profiles and specific

OBS elements to users. The assigned OBS element determines the EPS and work

breakdown structure (WBS) elements where the user can access project information. The

assigned project security profile determines the type of access privileges the user has to

that project information.

Administration

527

The application requires that all WBS elements have an assigned responsible OBS. If a

user's project security profile assignment includes a WBS element's responsible OBS, then

the user can access all activities, risks, and issues related to that WBS element. Similarly,

project issues also have an assigned responsible OBS. If a user's project security profile

assignment includes an issue's responsible OBS, then the user can access that issue. You

can assign a project security profile called Project Superuser, if you want to give a user

access to all information belonging to a project. You can assign Project Superuser profiles

to as many people as you want. Project Superuser is an application-generated project

security profile. You cannot edit the Project Superuser profile. A Project Superuser can

add, edit, and delete information by default, where all other users will have to be

assigned the proper privileges to do so.

Working with Security Profiles

Global Security Profiles:

A global security profile determines a user’s access to application-wide information and

settings, such as resources, global codes, and the OBS. P6 requires that you assign a

global security profile to each user.

You can define an unlimited number of global security profiles in P6. In addition, P6

provides two predefined global security profiles: Admin Superuser and No Global

Privileges.

The Admin Superuser profile allows complete access to all global information and all

projects. It also shows the full Administer menu, even when the currently assigned user

interface view settings do not. For the pages and menus of the other sections, even

for users with the Admin Superuser profile, the current user interface view settings still

apply. The Admin Superuser profile is assigned to the application (administrative) user

created during the P6 EPPM database installation.

For security reasons, Oracle strongly recommends that you replace the default

Admin Superuser (admin) immediately after a manual database installation or an

upgrade from P6 version 7.0 and earlier. Also, limit the Admin Superuser assignment to

only those individuals who require access to all data. At least one user must be

assigned to the Admin Superuser profile. If only one user is assigned to this profile, P6

will not allow that user to be deleted.

The No Global Privileges profile restricts access to global data. Assign this profile to

anyone who is strictly a P6 Progress Reporter user and does not require access to P6

Professional or P6. If a user with rights to P6 Professional or P6 is assigned this profile, the

user can log in to these applications but will not have access to project data and will

have read-only access to global data. If a user is assigned this profile and is also

assigned to an OBS element, the user will have access to project data as defined for

the OBS element, but access to other global data is restricted.

528

The Admin Superuser can designate that users have the ability to add/delete, edit,

assign, or view secure codes. Secure codes enable privileged users to hide Project,

Activity, Resource, and Issue codes from users that do not have security privileges to view

them. Also, users with privileges to Edit Security Profiles can restrict other users to edit,

assign, and view privileges. For example, management could track project approval

processes through secure codes that others cannot edit or, in some cases, view.

Tip

When defining each global security profile, some privileges are structured hierarchically.

In other words, if a user is granted add or delete privileges, that user automatically has

edit, assign, and view privileges. If a user is granted edit privileges, that user is

automatically granted assign and view privileges. If a user is granted assign privileges,

that user is automatically assigned view privileges.

Project Security Profiles:

A project profile is a role-based profile that limits privileges to specific project data, such

as baselines, the WBS, and expenses. P6 does not require that each user be assigned a

project profile; however, users cannot access projects unless they are assigned a project

profile or the global profile, Admin Superuser.

You can create an unlimited number of project profiles in P6. In addition, P6 provides a

predefined project profile called Project Superuser. The Project Superuser profile allows

complete access to elements within a project. For security reasons, limit the Project

Superuser assignment to only those individuals who require access to all project data.

Project profiles are applied to users via OBS assignments. P6 requires that all EPS and WBS

elements, and projects, are assigned a responsible OBS. The combination of the project

profile/user assignment to an OBS assignment, and the OBS assignment to the EPS/WBS,

determines which projects and data the user can access. The default profile is

automatically assigned when an OBS is assigned to a user.

Tip

When defining each project profile, some privileges are structured hierarchically. In other

words, if a user is granted add or delete privileges, that user automatically has edit,

assign, and view privileges. If a user is granted edit privileges, that user is automatically

granted assign and view privileges. If a user is granted assign privileges, that user is

automatically assigned view privileges.

Creating Global Security Profiles

Create a global security profile to determine user access to application-wide

information.

To create a global security profile:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Global Security Profiles.

Administration

529

3) On the Global Security Profiles page:

a. Click Add.

b. In the Profile Name field, double-click and type a unique name.

c. In the Description field, double-click and type a description.

d. In the Default field, select the option if you want this profile to be the new default.

e. Click each detail window and select options to assign privileges to the profile.

Note: Select the Privilege option in the detail window's header to

assign all privileges in the window. Clear the Privilege option to

disable all privileges in the window.

4) On the Global Security Profiles page, click Save (Ctrl+S) .

Tips

Provide clear profile names and descriptions to help you manage profiles.

Create a default global profile with few or no privileges.

To save time, consider copying, pasting, and then modifying a profile: select the

closest matching profile and click Copy. All privilege options are also copied. Click

Paste. The new profile will appear with a unique name based on the original. For

example, if you copied PM Set, the copy is named PM Set-1.

Creating Project Security Profiles

Create a project security profile to determine a user's level of access to each project

within the enterprise project structure. A user can only access projects they have been

assigned.

To create a project security profile:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Project Security Profiles.

3) On the Project Security Profiles page:

a. Click Add.

b. In the Profile Name field, double-click and type a unique name.

c. In the Description field, double-click and type a description.

d. In the Default field, select the option if you want this profile to be the new default.

e. Click each detail window and select options to assign privileges to the profile.

Note: Select the Privilege option in the detail window's header to

assign all privileges in the window. Clear the Privilege option to

disable all privileges in the window.

4) Click Save (Ctrl+S).

530

Tips

Provide clear profile names and descriptions to help you manage profiles.

Create a default project profile with few or no privileges.

To save time, consider copying, pasting, and modifying an existing profile: select the

closest matching profile and click Copy. All privilege options are also copied. Click in

the list and click Paste. The new profile will appear with a unique name based on the

original. For example, if you copied PM Set, the copy is named PM Set-1.

About User Interface Views

A user interface view is a pre-configured set of options you assign to users so their view of

Dashboards, Portfolios, Projects, Resources, and Administration is optimized for their role.

User interface views permit visibility to features essential for a user's role while hiding

functionality that is not applicable.

When creating a user interface view, you can choose to create a new user interface

view and configure the view from scratch, or you can choose to use an existing view as a

template and make any necessary adjustments. For each user interface view, you can

choose the pages and menu items you want to display, and the order in which they

appear in each section. Users with the same or similar roles would likely be assigned

parallel views.

To further enhance a role-specific configuration, you can assign global dashboards and

multi-user dashboards created by you to a user interface view. If you assign a multi-user

dashboard to a user interface view, only users who have access to the dashboard as

specified on the Access tab of the Create Dashboard page can view the dashboard.

Users who have access to Manage Dashboards (in the Dashboards menu) enabled in

their view can use the Manage Dashboards page to create dashboards and choose

which dashboards are displayed on their dashboards home page.

After creating user interface views that correspond to the roles in your organization, you

can assign users to the views. When assigning users to each user interface view, you can

allow users to edit the options you defined. Users who have the right to edit user interface

views can modify their views to suit their needs. Once you assign users to views, users can

view their settings on the View Preferences tab. The View Preferences tab is not available

to users with Team Member access. You can also select a default view for all new users

who are not yet assigned a view.

Access that an administrator grants a user always takes precedence over settings

specified in the user's assigned interface view. For example, if a user’s assigned view

provides access to items in the Resources section but the user does not have module

access to the Resources section, the user will not be able to access this section.

Working with User Interface Views

Administrators:

Administration

531

When creating a User Interface View, you can choose to configure the view from

scratch, or you can use an existing view as a template and adjust it as necessary. For

each user interface view, you choose the pages and menu items you want to display

and the order in which they appear in each section.

You can assign global and multi-user dashboards to a user interface view. Users can

customize their own views, within bounds set by their administrators, and can use the

Manage Dashboards page to create custom dashboards displayed on the Dashboards

home page.

After creating user interface views that correspond to the roles in your organization, you

can assign users to the views. When assigning users to each user interface view, you can

designate that users can edit the options you define for a user interface view. You can

also select a default view for all new users who are not yet assigned a view. Existing users

who are not yet assigned a view can access all functionality.

Once you assign users to views, users can view their view settings on the View

Preferences tab.

Users:

Your P6 administrator can select the pages and menu items available to you, and the

order in which the items appear in each section. For example, if you are a Resource

Manager with module access rights to all sections of the application, but your role is

limited to planning resource allocation and assigning resources to activities, your

administrator can create a user interface view that:

In the Projects section, provides access to the Workspace, Team Usage, and Activities

pages; hides all menu items and all other pages.

In the Resources section, provides full access to tabs and menu items.

In the Portfolios section, provides access to only the Capacity Planning page.

In the Dashboards section, provides access to all menu items (except for the Approve

Timesheets menu item because your organization does not use timesheets), as well as

some global dashboards and multi-user dashboards configured by your

administrator.

Note: For additional information on User Interface Views see the P6

EPPM Administrator's Guide.

Creating User Interface Views

Create a user interface view to optimize user to module interaction. The user interface

view permits visibility to features essential for a role while hiding functionality that is not

applicable. You can choose to create a brand new user interface view or modify an

existing view.

To create a user interface view:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Interface Views.

532

2) On the User Interface Views page, click Create User Interface View.

3) On the Copy from Existing User Interface View dialog box:

a. Choose New User Interface View to create a new user interface view, or select an

existing user interface view to use as a starting point.

b. Click OK.

4) On the Create User Interface View page, click the Content tab:

a. Enter a unique name for the new user interface view.

b. Expand each section and select options for menu items and pages you want to

include in the view.

If you select the option next to Menu Items or Pages, all items will be

included in the view. Conversely, if you clear the option, none of those items

will be displayed in the view.

Click the Move Down or Move Up to configure the sequence of

items. The first item listed in each section is designated as the first page for

that section. For example, if Activities is the first item listed for Projects Tab

Icons, when a user opens a project, the Activities page will be displayed

automatically.

5) On the Create User Interface View page:

a. Click the Activity Editing tab.

b. Expand each section and select the option in the Edit field to allow the user to edit

that section.

If you select the option next to the name of the section, all items in that

section will be editable. Global Activity Codes, EPS Activity Codes, Project

Activity Codes, and User Defined do not have the select all option; you must

select each code individually.

6) On the Create User Interface View page, click the Users tab:

a. Select a user from the Available Users window to assign the user to that view.

Click Select to move the user to the Selected Users column.

Select the Allow Editing option to enable the user to edit the contents of

their interface view.

b. Select a user from the Selected Users window to remove the user from that view.

Click De-select to remove the user.

7) Click Save and Close.

Tips

Users can view their interface view settings on the My Preferences page View tab.

Continue to configure views over time in line with changing roles, capabilities,

features, and organizational needs.

You can quickly add users to a user interface view by double-clicking their name in

the Available Users column. Likewise, you can remove users from a view by

double-clicking their name in the Selected Users window.

Administration

533

You can also assign user interface views on the Users page. See Assigning User

Interface Views (on page 522).

Configuring User Interface Views

Configure user interface views over time in line with changing roles, capabilities, and

organizational needs. The changes you make will affect all users assigned to the view.

To configure a user interface view:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Interface Views.

2) On the User Interface Views page, select a view from the User Interface View for new

users list to designate it as the default user interface view. It will automatically be

assigned to new user accounts.

3) On the User Interface Views page, in the View Name column, select the view you

want to configure.

4) On the User Interface View Details page, click the Content tab.

5) On the Content tab:

a. In the User Interface View Name field modify the name if necessary.

b. Expand each section and mark options for the menu items and pages you want to

include in the view. Select the options labeled Menu Items or Pages to include all

its options in the view. Conversely, clear the options to deselect all of its options.

c. Click Save.

6) On the User Interface View Details page, click the Activity Editing tab.

7) On the Activity Editing tab, expand each category under the Available Columns list

and mark the Edit option to allow the user to edit the fields in that category. If

available, mark the option next to the category name to make all fields editable.

Clear the option to make all fields read-only. Click Save.

8) On the User Interface View Details page, click the Users tab.

9) On the Users tab:

a. Select a user from the Available Users list to assign to the currently selected view.

Click Select to move the user to the Selected Users list.

Mark the Allow Editing option to allow the user to set their own personal

preferences for the contents of their interface view.

b. Select a user from the Selected Users window to remove the user from that view.

Click De-select to remove the user.

10) Click Save and Close.

Tips

You must have at least one page option selected in the Projects, Resources, and

Portfolios sections on the Content tab.

534

To assign multiple users to the view on the User Interface View Details page Users tab,

press the Ctrl key as you click multiple users. You can also double-click each user

name in the Available Users list. You can quickly remove users from a view by

double-clicking their names in the Selected Users window.

Click Move Down or Move Up to configure the sequence of pages or

dashboards. The first item listed in each section is designated as the first page for that

section. For example, if Activities is the first page listed and its check box is selected

under the Projects section, when a user with this view opens a project, the Activities

page will appear automatically.

535

Access Tab of the Create Filter Dialog Box of the Assignments Page

Overview

Use this tab to configure user access for the filter.

Screen Elements

This filter is available to options

The value indicating who can access the filter.

Current User: Enables you to access the filter.

All Users: Enables all users to access the filter.

List of Users: Enables only the users you specify to access the filter.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click Filters menu on the view toolbar or view menu

and select Add New Filter.

4) In the Create Filter dialog box, click the Access tab.

Access Tab of the Create or Modify Filter Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to configure user access for filters on the Activities or EPS pages.

Screen Elements

This filter is available to options

The value indicating who can access the filter.

Current User: Enables you to access the filter.

All Users: Enables all users to access the filter.

List of Users: Enables only the users you specify to access the filter.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

536

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities or EPS.

3) On the Activities or EPS page:

a. Select a view from the Activity View or EPS View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View or Customize Project View dialog box, click the Filters

tab.

5) On the Filters tab, click Add New Filter or select a filter and click Modify Filter.

6) In the Create Filter or Modify Filter dialog box, click the Access tab.

Access Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to provide view access to the current user, all users, or a selected list of users.

Screen Elements

This view is available to options

The value indicating who can access the view.

Current User: Enables you to access the view.

All Users: Enables all users to access the view.

List of Users: Enables only the users you specify to access the view.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select a view from the Activity View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View dialog box, click the Access tab.

Access Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page

Overview

Use this tab to set user access to the current dashboard.

Screen Elements

This dashboard is available to options

Determines which user accounts can access the current dashboard:

Current User: Limits access to only the current user.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

537

All Users: Provides access to all users.

List of Users: Limits access to a specified list of users. Select the users from a

common set of controls.

Tips

You must have the appropriate security privilege to specify All Users access. You cannot

change the access setting for a multi-user dashboard created by another user.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, click Customize.

4) On the Dashboard Details page, click the Access tab.

Access Tab of the Customize Project View Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to provide access to the current user, all users, or selected users.

Screen Elements

This view is available to options

The value indicating who can access the view.

Current User: Enables you to access the view.

All Users: Enables all users to access the view.

List of Users: Enables only the users you specify to access the view.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a view from the EPS View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Project View dialog box, click the Access tab.

Access Tab of the Customize Resources Assignments View Dialog Box of the Assignments

Page

Overview

Use this tab to provide access to the current user, all users, or a selected list of users.

538

Screen Elements

This view is available to options

The value indicating who can access the view.

Current User: Enables you to access the view.

All Users: Enables all users to access the view.

List of Users: Enables only the users you specify to access the view.

List of Users options:

Search field

The name of a user to find.

Available Users

The list of users who are available to access the view. Select a user or press Ctrl or Shift

and click multiple users to have access to the view. Click the arrows to move users

between the Available Users and Selected Users fields.

Selected Users

The names of users who will have access to the view after you click OK.

Customize Columns

See Customize Columns or Values.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click View and select Customize View.

4) In the Customize Resource Assignments View dialog box, click the Access tab.

Access Tab of the Issue Forms Page

Overview

Use this tab to configure the form name and assign projects to the selected issue form.

Screen Elements

Form Name field

The name of the selected issue form.

Projects section

The projects assigned to the selected issue form.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

539

Assign Projects link

Click to assign projects to the issue form.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, click Issue Forms.

4) On the Issue Forms page, click the Access tab.

Action Required Tab of the Document Reviews Portlet

Overview

Use this tab to view and approve or reject documents you have been assigned to

review.

Screen Elements

Action Required Tab toolbar

See Action Required Tab Toolbar (see "Action Required for Document Reviews

Toolbar" on page 1175).

Name field

The name of the document. For example, document category designations can

identify documents that are project standards or project deliverables.

Initiator field

The name of the user who started the review.

Date Initiated field

The date the review began.

Due Date field

The date all reviewers need to complete the review. If no due date is specified for the

review, then this field appears blank.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Document Reviews portlet and click the Action

Required tab.

540

Action Required Tab of the Workflows Portlet

Overview

Use this tab to view any workflow tasks that are waiting for you to take action or provide

input. The number in parentheses shown on the tab indicates how many tasks require

your attention. For example, if the tab displayed Action Required (3) three tasks are

awaiting input. The tasks are either assigned to you specifically, or to a group or role

defined in BPM to which you currently belong.

Note: Because two editions of BPM are supported, the actual fields

and values you see may vary from the ones described in this

documentation.

Screen Elements

Action Required for Workflows toolbar

See Action Required for Workflows Toolbar (on page 1175).

Added By field

The Personal Name of the user who created the task. For example, the initiator of the

workflow will also be listed here as the user who added tasks by way of simply starting

the workflow. This field displays the value External to P6 if the task was initiated in

another application, and not in P6.

Added Date field

The date the task was created.

Approvers field

The names of the workflow reviewers who have approved the task.

Assigned Date field

The date the task was assigned to you, your group, or your role.

Claimed By field

The Personal Name of the user currently handling a task that had previously been

broadly assigned to a group, role, or more than one user. If the user has no P6

personal name, for example, if the user only had an account in BPM, this field will

show their user ID instead.

Due Date field

The deadline for the activity prescribed by each task within a workflow.

Expired Date field

The date the task was determined to have expired.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

541

Finish Date field

The date the activity prescribed by the human task was completed.

ID field

The unique numeric identifier for each human task within each workflow instance.

Initiator field

The Personal Name of the user who initiated this instance of the current workflow

including all its tasks. This field displays the value External to P6 if the workflow was

initiated by another application or event, and not in P6.

Last Modified By field

The Personal Name of the user associated with the most recent changes to any of the

tasks within the workflow or to the workflow itself. This includes workflow initiation, and

task claiming, reassigning, approving, escalating, and other actions. This field displays

the value Workflowsystem if the change was made by another application or system

event.

Last Modified Date field

The date the human task was last changed. This includes claiming, reassigning,

approving, escalating, and other actions.

Name of Workflow Instance field

The unique name for the specific instance of a workflow. For example, Project

Request for 2014 Expansion or Green Team Project Initiation.

Task Name field

The unique name for the human task. For example, Review Documents or Gather

Committee Feedback.

Original Assignee field

The user originally assigned to the task when this workflow was initiated. As a workflow

advances to its next stages, the task might be reassigned, claimed, or modifed by

other users; however, this field will continue to display the first assigned user.

Owner field

The assigned key members of the workflow instance. Arranged in a

comma-separated list, these values include all users, groups, and roles designated as

owners.

Priority field

An indication of the importance of each task relative to other tasks in the workflow.

Depending on your edition of BPM, you may see numbers or text values. The numbers

used range from 1 (highest priority) to 5 (lowest priority). Text values include lowest,

low, normal, high, and highest. The default setting is 3 or normal.

542

Category or Process field

The name of the original workflow type or template from which this instance of the

workflow is derived. When multiple tasks share the same or similar names, refer to this

field to view the originating or parent workflow.

Reviewers field

The members assigned to the human task. Arranged in a comma-separated list, these

values include all users, groups, and roles that were previously assigned, are currently

assigned, or will be assigned to the task.

Stage field

The name of the current workflow phase. The stage also provides an indication of the

workflow's current progress within the total sequence of all its defined phases. For

example, Stage 1: Just Initiated vs. Stage 5: Final Review.

Start Date field

The date the activity prescribed by the human task was started.

Status field

The current state of the workflow task. Values include:

Alerted: The task has alerted its assigned user, group, or role.

Assigned: The task has been claimed or assigned to a user, group, or role.

Completed: The task has been finished.

Errored: The task cannot advance because of an error.

Expired: The task has exceeded its deadline and is still not complete.

Information Requested: The task is the subject of a separate request by

another user for additional information to assist with the current activity it is

prescribing.

Suspended: The task has been placed on hold.

Withdrawn: The task has been identified as obsolete or no longer applicable to the workflow.Tips

If you are not associated with any project workflows or have not set your filter options to

display them, the "No information is available" message appears.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Workflows portlet.

4) In the Workflows portlet, click the Action Required tab.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

543

Activities Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign activity privileges to the selected project security profile.

Screen Elements

Privilege field

The name of the security permission that is assigned (option selected) or denied

(option cleared) to users of the currently selected profile.

Privilege option

The option in the column header that determines whether the privileges are all

assigned (selected), all denied (clear), or individually configured (indicated with a

dash or - sign).

Add/Edit Activities Except Relationships option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create and modify all activity

information in projects, except activity relationships. Users assigned a profile with this

privilege can also designate another user as an activity owner. To modify activity IDs,

users must also have the 'Edit Activity ID' project privilege assigned to their profile. To

use the Recalculate Assignment Costs feature, users must also have the 'View Project

Costs/Financials' project privilege assigned to their profile.

Delete Activities option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to remove activities from projects.

Add/Edit/Delete Activity Relationships option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

activity relationships assigned to projects.

Edit Activity ID option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to modify activity IDs. To modify

activity IDs, users must also have the 'Add/Edit Activities Except Relationships' project

privilege assigned to their profile.

Add/Edit/Delete Expenses option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

expenses assigned to projects.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Project Security Profiles.

3) On the Project Security Profiles page, click the Activities detail window.

544

Activities Detail Window of the Risks Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign and view activities that are impacted by the risk.

Screen Elements

Activities Detail Window toolbar

See Risk Activities Toolbar (on page 1333).

Activity ID field

The unique identifying code for the activity.

Activity Name field

The name of the activity. The activity name does not have to be unique.

Activity Type field

The type of activity.

Task Dependent: Activities are scheduled using the activity's calendar rather than

the calendars of the assigned resources. Choose task dependent when you want

to control the duration of the activity yourself (that is, no resources are assigned),

or when one or more resources assigned to the same activity can work according

to the same calendar. The activity is scheduled according to the activity’s

calendar, not the resource calendars. For example, you might have an activity to

cure concrete; you know how long the task takes and the addition of resources

won’t complete the task any earlier. You would designate this activity as task

dependent.

Resource Dependent: Activities are scheduled using the calendars of the assigned

resources. This type is used when several resources are assigned to the activity, but

they might work separately. Choose resource dependent when you want to

schedule each resource according to his/her own time schedule, or resource

calendar, not the activity calendar. The assigned resource availability determines

the start and finish dates of the activity. Typically, you use this type when multiple

resources assigned to the same activity can work independently, or when

availability can affect the activity’s duration. For example, an activity that requires

an Inspector might be delayed if that resource is assigned to multiple projects or is

on vacation.

Start or Finish Milestone: Milestone activities are zero-duration without resources,

marking a significant project event. Choose start milestone or finish milestone to

indicate that the activity marks the beginning or end of a major stage in the

project. Milestones have zero duration. They can have expenses assigned to

them, but not resources. In an office building addition project, examples of

milestones might include Project Definition Complete, Structure Complete, or End

Bidding Process.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

545

Level of Effort: Activities have a duration that is determined by its dependent

activities and are typically administration type. Choose level of effort to indicate

that the activity’s duration depends on its predecessor and/or successor activities.

A level of effort activity is usually one that is ongoing, such as clerical work,

change management, or project management tasks. For example, site cleanup

could be considered a level of effort activity; it occurs repeatedly and is

dependent on the completion of a phase.

WBS Summary: Activities that are used to roll up date, duration, and percent

complete values for a group of activities that share a common WBS code level.

Choose WBS Summary to indicate that the activity is a summary-level WBS activity.

A WBS Summary activity represents a group of activities that share a common WBS

level. The summary-level WBS activity enables roll-ups of dates for the activity

group. The duration of a WBS Summary activity extends from the start of the

earliest activity in a group to the finish of the latest activity. WBS codes control

which activities are part of a WBS Summary activity; P6 incorporates any activities

that share a component of the WBS Summary activity's WBS code into the WBS

Summary activity. For example, all activities whose WBS codes begin with A (A.1,

A.1.1, A.1.2, etc.) can be part of one WBS Summary activity whose WBS code is A.

At a lower level, all activities whose WBS codes start with A.1 (A.1.1, A.1.2, etc.)

can be part of a WBS Summary activity whose WBS code is A.1.

Actual Duration field

The total working time from the activity actual start date to the actual finish date for

completed activities, or the current data date for in-progress activities.

The actual working time is computed using the activity's calendar.

ctual Finish field

The date on which the activity is actually finished.

Actual Start field

The date on which the activity is actually started.

Actual Total Cost field

The sum of the actual labor cost, the actual nonlabor cost and the actual expense

cost.

Calculated as Actual Labor Cost plus Actual Nonlabor Cost plus Actual Expense Cost

as of the project data date.

At Completion Total Cost field

The total cost at completion for the activity including labor resources, nonlabor

resources, material resources and project expenses.

Early Finish field

The earliest possible date the activity can finish.

546

The date is calculated based on network logic, schedule constraints, and resource

availability. Early finish dates can change as the project progresses and changes are

made to the project management plan.

Early Start field

The earliest possible date the remaining work for the activity can begin.

The date is calculated based on network logic, schedule constraints, and resource

availability. Early start dates can change as the project progresses and as changes

are made to the project management plan.

Finish Date field

For completed activities, the actual finish date. For not started and in-progress

activities, set to the planned finish date if the project has not been scheduled. When

scheduled, set to the remaining early finish date.

Planned Duration field

The total working time from the activity planned start date to the planned finish date.

The planned working time is calculated using the activity's calendar.

Planned Finish field

The date the activity is scheduled to finish.

This date is calculated by the project scheduler but can be updated manually by the

project manager. This date is not changed by the project scheduler after the activity

has started.

Planned Start field

The proposed start date of the project.

This date the activity is scheduled to begin is calculated by the project scheduler but

can be updated manually by the project manager. This date is not changed by the

project scheduler after the activity has been started.

Planned Total Cost field

The planned total cost for the activity, including labor resources, nonlabor resources,

material resources, and project expenses.

Calculated as Planned Labor Cost plus Planned Nonlabor Cost plus Planned Material

Cost plus Planned Expense Cost.

Project ID field

The unique identifier of the project.

Project Name field

The name of the associated project.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

547

Remaining Duration field

The total working time from the activity remaining start date to the remaining finish

date.

The remaining working time is calculated using the activity's calendar. Before the

activity is started, the remaining duration is the same as the planned duration. After

the activity is completed the remaining duration is zero.

Remaining Total Cost field

The remaining total cost for the activity, including labor resources, nonlabor

resources, material resources, and project expenses.

Calculated as Remaining Labor Costs plus Remaining Nonlabor Costs plus Remaining

Material Costs plus Remaining Expense Costs.

Start Date field

For started activities, the actual start date. For not started activities, set to the planned

start date until the project is scheduled. When scheduled, set to the remaining early

start date.

Total Float field

The amount of time the activity can be delayed before delaying the project finish

date.

Calculated as Late Start minus Early Start or as Late Finish minus Early Finish.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Risks.

3) On the Risks page, click the Activities detail window.

Activities Page

Overview

Use this page as your central project management tool for all project activities and their

associated details. This includes all WBS elements, activities, steps, issues, notebooks,

resource assignments, risks, and other details. The Activities page can display schedules

for any single project or group of projects you choose. Tabbed navigation, inline editing,

and graphical drag and drop features help you quickly update project activities and run

important operations including Schedule, Apply Actuals, and Level Resources.

Initially, this page displays a table with a Gantt chart, but you can customize this

presentation of live project data, creating and saving multiple activity views, or data

layouts, to meet your needs. The convenient Activity View list enables you to quickly

switch between views, and you can manage multiple detail windows in tabs that you

can reposition.

548

Screen Elements

Activities toolbar

The activities toolbar is made up of three separate toolbars with matching menus:

Actions (see "Actions Menu on Activities Page" on page 1178), Edit (see "Edit Menu on

Activities Page" on page 1253), and View (see "View Menu on Activities Page" on

page 1365). The Activity View toolbar, also located on the Activities page, is a fixed

toolbar used to select activity views, and to show or hide alternative formats such as

the Activity Network or the Gantt chart. See Activities Toolbar (on page 1182).

Activities work area

The main work area for viewing project data in your choice of the following

customizable formats:

Table (see "Table Format of the Activities Page" on page 1115)

Gantt chart (see "Gantt Chart Format of the Activities Page" on page 776)

Activity Network (see "Activity Network Format of the Activities Page" on page 560)

Calendar (see "Calendar View Format of the Activities Page" on page 612)

Activity Table columns:

The default fields that appear as columns in the Activity Table are described below.

For descriptions of all possible fields, see Available Columns of the Activities Page (on

page 1189).

Start field

The planned start date for an activity not yet started or the actual start date for an

activity that has already started.

Finish field

The planned finish date for an activity not yet finished or the actual finish date for an

activity that has already finished.

Remaining Duration field

The total working time from the activity remaining start date to the remaining finish

date.

The remaining working time is calculated using the activity's calendar. Before the

activity is started, the remaining duration is the same as the planned duration. After

the activity is completed the remaining duration is zero.

Activity % Complete field

The percent of the activity that has been completed.

Calculated as (Original or Planned Duration minus Remaining Duration) divided by

Original or Planned Duration.

If the activity's percent complete type is set to Physical, the application will not

calculate a value for the Activity % Complete field.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

549

Units % Complete equals (Actual Labor Units plus Actual Non-labor Units) divided by

(Actual Labor Units plus Actual Non-labor Units plus Remaining Labor Units plus

Remaining Non-labor Units).

Primary Resource field

The person primarily responsible for performing or overseeing work related to a

specific activity. The first resource you assign to an activity is automatically identified

as the activity's primary resource.

WBS-level detail windows:

WBS Budget Log Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 1156)

WBS Documents Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 1157)

WBS Earned Value Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 1158)

WBS General Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 1160)

WBS Issues Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 1162)

WBS Milestones Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 1164)

WBS Notebooks Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 1164)

Activity-level detail windows:

Assignments Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 586)

Codes Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 620)

Documents Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 721)

Expenses Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 763)

Feedback Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 767)

General Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 785)

Issues Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 852)

Notebooks Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 904)

Predecessors Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 944)

Risks Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 1049)

Steps Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 1099)

Successors Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 1110)

Trace Logic Detail Window of the Activities Page (on page 1130)

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

550

Activities Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page

Overview

Use this portlet to view, assign, and remove activities and milestones associated with the

Workgroup.

Your ability to assign and remove activities in the Activities portlet is dependent on your

access rights to project data. If you have OBS access to the project, you can assign and

remove any project activities. If you are a team member, you can only assign and

remove activities to which you are assigned as a resource. If you are the project owner,

you can assign and remove activities, provided you have OBS access to the project.

Screen Elements

Assign link

Assigns activities to the Workgroup. The Select an Activity dialog displays all activities

you have access rights to view and assign, organized by WBS.

When you assign an activity to a Workgroup, any issues and documents associated

with the activity are automatically assigned to their respective portlets in the

Workgroup.

Remove link

Removes an activity from the portlet. When you remove an activity, any associated

issues and documents are automatically removed from their respective portlets. You

can only remove activities that you have access rights to remove.

Note: Removing an activity from this portlet does not delete the activity or its

associated items from the project.

Activity Name field

The name of the activity. The activity name does not have to be unique.

Start Date field

For started activities, the actual start date. For not started activities, set to the planned

start date until the project is scheduled. When scheduled, set to the remaining early

start date.

Finish Date field

For completed activities, the actual finish date. For not started and in-progress

activities, set to the planned finish date if the project has not been scheduled. When

scheduled, set to the remaining early finish date.

Primary Resource Name field

The name of the resource.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

551

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Workgroups portlet and select a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, expand the Activities portlet.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Workgroups portlet and select a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, expand the Activities portlet.

Activities Work Area of the Timesheet Approval Page

Overview

Use this work area to review the activities assigned to a resource and reflected on a

particular timesheet. The activity data provided is designed to assist you in evaluating

whether you should approve or reject the resource's timesheet.

Screen Elements

Activity ID field

The unique identifier of the activity to which the resource is assigned.

Actual Overtime Units field

The actual overtime units worked by the resource on this activity.

This value is calculated from timesheets when project actuals are applied or can be

entered directly by the project manager.

Actual Regular Units field

The actual non-overtime units worked by the resource on this activity.

This value is calculated from timesheets when project actuals are applied or can be

entered directly by the project manager.

Activity Status field

The current status of the activity.

Auto Compute Actuals option

Determines whether the activity actual and remaining units, and start and finish dates

for the resource are calculated automatically using the planned dates, planned

units, and the activity's schedule percent complete.

552

If this option is selected, the actual/remaining units and actual dates are

automatically updated when project actuals are applied. This assumes that all work

by the resource proceeds according to plan.

This option is not available if the Uses Timesheets option is selected.

E-mail Address field

The e-mail address for the resource.

Employee ID field

The resource identifier within the organization, typically the employee number or

social security number.

Pend Remaining Units field

The estimate of the resource's remaining units on this activity.

The pending remaining units is entered by each resource using timesheets. This value

is copied to the resource's remaining units for the activity when project actuals are

applied. The project manager specifies whether resources update their percent

complete or remaining units for each project.

Pending % Complete field

The estimate of the percentage of the resource's units of work completed on this

activity.

The pending percent complete is entered by each resource using timesheets. This

value is used to compute the resource's remaining units for the activity when project

actuals are applied. The project manager specifies whether resources update their

percent complete or remaining units for each project.

Price/Unit field

The non-overtime price per time for the resource.

This price is used to compute costs for any activities the resource is assigned to.

Calculated as Units multiplied by Price Per Time.

Project ID field

The unique identifier of the project.

Project Name field

The name of the project.

Office Phone field

The office phone number for the resource.

Other Phone field

The alternate phone numbers for the resource.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

553

Overtime Factor field

The overtime factor used to compute the overtime price for the resource. The default

is 1.5.

Used in overtime calculations where the rate is multiplied by the overtime factor to

figure the total overtime price.

Rate Source field

The value that indicates which price/unit will be used to calculate costs for the

assignment, such as Resource, Role, and Override.

When a resource and only a resource is assigned to an activity, the rate source will

automatically equal Resource. When a role and only a role is assigned to an activity,

the rate source will automatically equal Role. When both a resource and role are

assigned to the activity, the rate source can be either Resource or Role determined

by the Rate Source Preference. In any case, the Override value allows you to specify

any other price/unit.

Rate Type field

Determines which of the five user-defined resource and role rate types will be used to

calculate the cost for the resource assignment.

Remaining Units field

The remaining units of work to be performed by this resource on this activity.

Before the activity is started, the remaining units are the same as the planned units.

After the activity is completed, the remaining units are zero.

Resource ID field

The unique identifier of the resource.

Resource ID Name field

The identifying code and name of the resource.

Resource Name field

The name of the resource.

Role ID field

The unique identifier for the role the resource is performing on this activity.

You can assign a resource to the same activity more than once, performing different

roles. The project manager controls whether the same resource can be assigned to

an activity more than once.

Role ID Name field

The identifying code and name of the role.

554

Role Name field

The name of the role assigned to the resource for the selected activity.

Status field

The current state of the timesheet. Timesheets can have a status of Not Started, Not

Submitted, Submitted, Resubmitted, Approved, PM Approved, RM Approved, or

Rejected. The Action Required status displays all timesheets that currently require your

review.

WBS Code field

The unique identifier of the WBS for the associated activity.

WBS Name field

The name of the WBS element.

Getting Here

Click the Dashboards and select Approve Timesheets.

Activity Codes Details Page of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this page to assign resource codes to the selected resource.

Screen Elements

Code Assignment field

The name of the activity code that is assigned to the selected activity.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Codes section and select an activity code.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Codes section and select an activity code.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

555

Activity Codes Page

Overview

Use this page to configure activity codes.

Screen Elements

Global tab

Click this tab to view or add a Global activity code. For information about the fields

on this page, see Global Tab of the Activity Codes Page (on page 817).

EPS tab

Click this tab to view or add an EPS activity code. For information about the fields on

this page, see EPS Tab of the Activity Codes Page (on page 757).

Project tab

Click this tab to view or add a Project activity code. For information about the fields

on this page, see Project Tab of the Activity Codes Page (on page 973).

Tips

To assign code values to activities on the Activities page, customize your activity view

to display project activity codes as columns in the table. From these columns, you

can assign activity code values to activities.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Activity Codes.

Activity Details Dialog Box of the Resource Staffing Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to configure the resources, steps, and notebooks for the selected

activity.

Screen Elements

Resources section

See Resources Section of the Activity Details Dialog Box (on page 1026).

Steps section

See Steps Section of the Activity Details Dialog Box (on page 1106).

556

Notebooks section

See Notebook Section of the Activity Details Dialog Box (on page 901).

Return link

Navigates to the previous screen.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) On the Analysis page, click the Role Usage tab.

4) On the Role Usage tab, select a role and select to display the Spreadsheet.

5) In the Spreadsheet, click a project name.

6) In the Resource Staffing dialog box, click an activity name.

Activity Details of the Resources Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to view and define detailed information associated with the selected

activity.

Screen Elements

Resources section

See Resources Section of Activity Details of the Resources Dialog Box (on page 1024).

Steps section

See Steps Section of Activity Details of the Resources Dialog Box (on page 1104).

Notebooks section

See Notebook Section of Activity Details of the Resources Dialog Box (on page 900).

Return link

Navigates to the previous screen.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Team Usage.

3) On the Team Usage page:

a. Select a project from the Select Project list.

b. Click the Organized By list and select Roles.

1. Expand a project and select a role in the left pane.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

557

2. Select the Spreadsheet option and click a project in the right pane.

4) In the Resources dialog box, select the Unstaffed and Staffed option and click an

activity name.

Activity Editing Tab of the User Interface View Details Page

Overview

Use this tab to configure the columns a user can edit in activities or resource assignments.

Screen Elements

Available Columns

Displays all available columns.

Edit option

Determines whether users assigned to the current user interface view are permitted to

edit the selected available field or column.

Tips

For all categories except for Activity Code and User Defined Field options, marking

the check box at the category level selects all options under the category. For

example, you can mark the check box of the Dates category to select all options

under Dates, then selectively clear check boxes of options that you do not want to

select.

Getting Here

To modify an existing user interface view:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Interface Views.

2) On the User Interface Views page, click a View.

3) On the Details of page, click the Activity Editing tab.

To modify an new user interface view:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Interface Views.

2) On the User Interface Views page, click Create User Interface View.

3) In the Copy from Existing User Interface View dialog box, click New User Interface

View or an existing view and click OK.

4) On the Create User Interface View page, click the Activity Editing tab.

558

Activity Form Page

Overview

On this page you can view and edit information and attributes of an activity such as

predecessor and successor relationships between activities, completion status, weighted

milestones, notebooks and documents related to the activity, and other information.

Screen Elements

Return link

Navigates to the Workspace page.

Delete Activity link

Deletes the currently selected activity.

General section

See General Section of the Activity Form Page (on page 795).

Resources section

See Resources Section of the Activity Form Page (on page 1028).

Steps section

See Steps Section of the Activity Form Page (on page 1107).

Notebook section

See Notebook Section of the Activity Form Page (on page 902).

User Defined section

See User Defined Section of the Activity Form Page (on page 1137).

Relationships section

See Relationships Section of the Activity Form Page (on page 989).

Codes section

See Codes Section of the Activity Form Page (on page 626).

Status section

See Status Section of the Activity Form Page (on page 1094).

Expenses section

See Expenses Section of the Activity Form Page (on page 765).

Documents section

See Documents Section of the Activity Form Page (on page 726).

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

559

Tips

To edit or delete details in the General or Status section, click the appropriate Edit link.

To edit or delete an item in any other section, click the item name. For example, in the

Steps section click a step or in the Documents section click a document title.

Getting Here

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

Activity List for WBS Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to view activities by WBS from within a portfolio scorecard.

Screen Elements

Customize button

Configures the columns that appear in the list.

Activity Name field

The name of the activity. The activity name does not have to be unique.

Actual Start field

The date on which the activity is actually started.

ctual Finish field

The date on which the activity is actually finished.

Activity Percent Complete field

The activity percent complete.

560

This value is tied to the activity duration percent complete, units percent complete, or

physical percent complete, depending on the setting for the activity's percent

complete type, which is either duration, units, or physical. Always in the range 0 to

100.

Tips

Click More and then click Customize to include the Activities column in the

scorecard.

Getting Here

1) Open a portfolio in the Portfolios section using one of the following methods:

Click Portfolios to open the last portfolio you were working with.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose one of the most-recently used

portfolios.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose Open Portfolio to select a group of

projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Portfolio Analysis.

3) On the Portfolio Analysis page, select a scorecard from the View field.

4) In the scorecard, select a WBS.

5) In the Activities column, click the View link.

Activity Network Format of the Activities Page

Overview

Use the Activity Network format to view activities and their relationships across multiple

projects. You can also print a network diagram for multiple projects.

Screen Elements

Title bar

The Group By field name.

Activity ID

The activity identifier that is unique within the project.

Activity Name field

The name of the activity.

Start

The current start date of the activity. For a non-started activity, this is the planned start

date. For a started activity, this is the actual start date.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

561

Finish

The current finish date of the activity. For a not-started activity, this is the planned

finish date. For an in-progress activity, this is the remaining finish date. Once the

activity is completed, this is the actual finish date.

Activity Status field

The current status of the activity.

Icon Indicators

Boxes represent the project's activities, WBS, and other activity grouping structures.

Icons indicate the type of boxes:

Group: can be expanded to display activities by double-clicking within the box

WBS: can be expanded to display activities by double-clicking within the box

Milestone: has no lower levels

Activity boxes have status icons:

: not yet started

: in progress

: completed

: critical

Tips

These screen elements are the default settings for Activity Network activity boxes.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the View menu and select Activity Network.

Activity Network Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to select options for displaying activity boxes in the Activity Network.

Screen Elements

Activity Box section:

Split Row option

Determines whether to display two fields for the row in the activity box. Selecting the

option causes the Second field lists to become active.

562

Each activity box contains four rows by default. Each row can be divided into two

sections, allowing for up to eight fields to be displayed per activity box. Click the lists

to select the content to be displayed.

Field lists

Determines what will display in the first four rows of the activity box.

Second field lists

The options to be used as the four possible secondary fields that display in an activity

box when the Split Row option is selected for a row.

Preview section

The beforehand look at the composition of the activity box. The options and list values

you select in the Activity Box section affect what is displayed in this section.

Options section

Expand Grouping Bands to Level list

The value to expand up to 20 or all grouping bands.

Show Only Driving Relationships option

Determines whether to show only driving relationships between activities in the

Activity Network. When this option is not selected, the application will display all

relationships between activities in the Activity Network.

Show Progress option

Determines whether to display progress by marking an X on completed activities or

projects and a slash (\) on those in progress.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select a view from the Activity View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View dialog box, click the Activity Network tab.

Activity Tab of the Modify Template Dialog Box of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to configure activity import and export options.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

563

Screen Elements

Import section:

Import milestones with resource assignments as options

Start milestones with expenses: Imports milestones as start milestone activities with

related expenses. If selected, the Import Microsoft Project's fixed costs as expenses

should be selected to ensure that expenses related to milestones are imported.

Activities with resource assignments: Imports task dependent activities with

associated resource assignments.

Import Microsoft Project's Task ID field to options

Activity ID: Imports the Task ID field to the Activity ID of P6.

User defined text field: Imports the Task ID field to a user defined text field.

Import Microsoft Project's fixed costs as expenses option

Determines whether to import Microsoft Project fixed costs to P6 expenses.

This option causes expenses related to milestones to be imported if the option Start

Milestones with Expenses was previously selected.

Export section:

Export Activity ID to Microsoft Projects task field option

Determines whether to export a P6 activity ID to a Microsoft Project task field.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export XML Project

Import/Export....

4) In the Import/Export Project dialog box, click the Import or Export tab.

5) On the Import or Export tab:

a. Select Microsoft Project XML (2007) from the Import or Export Type list.

b. Click MSP Export Template Options or MSP Import Template Options.

6) In the Modify Template dialog box, click the Activity tab.

Activity UDFs Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure user defined fields for activities.

564

Screen Elements

User Defined Fields Toolbar

See User Defined Fields Toolbar (on page 1361).

User Defined Field field

The name of the user-defined field.

Data Type field

The name of the type of data that corresponds to each user-defined field. The data

type you select determines the type of data you can specify in a field. The following

data types are available:

Text: Allows you to use text or a combination of text and numbers.

Start Date: Allows you to enter Start Date information only.

Finish Date: Allows you to enter Finish Date information only.

Cost: Allows you to enter currency values.

Number: Allows you to use numerals with two decimal places.

Integer: Allows you to use numeric data, but not a number related to money.

Indicator: Allows you to use an indicator field that you can use to enter

color-coded icon values in columns and display color-coded text in reports.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Activity UDFs.

Add Activity Expenses Page of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this page to create activity expense items.

Screen Elements

Name field

The name for the expense that is unique in the activity.

Expense Category field

The classification code or name for the expense category.

Expense categories are useful for organizing and tracking various expense types

within an organization.

Planned Cost field

The planned cost for the project expense.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

565

Calculated as Planned Units multiplied by Price Per Unit.

Cost Account field

The default cost account associated with the resource, role, or expense.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Expenses section and click Add Activity

Expenses.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Expenses section and click Add Activity

Expenses.

Add Document Page (without Content Repository)

Overview

Use this page to add new documents to the selected project. This topic applies to

deployments in which the optional content repository is not configured for use with P6.

Screen Elements

Files (Public Location) field

The selected work product or document's publicly-accessible file location.

Add: Enables you to select files to add to the project.

Delete: Deletes the currently selected file.

Title field

The identifying name of the document.

File Path field

The file location.

566

Format field

The file type associated with the document.

If the file type is not a supported document format, or you want to change the file

format, use the list to select a file type. If a file format is not selected, the file is

assigned a 'C file' file type format.

Author field

The person who authored or created the document.

Version field

The version of the document on which the activity was performed.

Revision Date field

The date of the document's last update.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

Tips

When you click on a file in the Files field, the Title, File Path, Format, and Description fields

display information corresponding to that particular file.

Getting Here

From the Documents page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page:

a. Click Modify.

b. Click Add Document.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Documents portlet.

4) In the Project Documents portlet, click Add Document.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

567

Add Folder Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to add a document folder to the repository and set its security policy.

Screen Elements

Folder Name field

The unique name to identify the folder.

This is a required field.

Security Policy list

The security policy for the selected document or folder:

Personal: Can be viewed, modified, or deleted only by the user who added it to

the project.

Read-Only: Can be viewed by any project team member, but team members

cannot modify or delete it.

Shared: Can be viewed, modified, or deleted by any project team member.

Getting Here

From the Documents page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Projects tab.

4) On the Projects tab, select a document and click Add Options Add Folder.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Documents portlet.

4) In the Project Documents portlet, select a document and click Add Options

Add Folder.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Documents portlet.

4) In the My Documents portlet, select a document and click Add Options Add

Folder.

568

Add Issue Page

Overview

Use this page to create a new issue you want to track for an activity in the currently open

projects.

Screen Elements

Select the project to associate with this issue field

The project associated with the selected issue.

This field displays on the Add Issue page. In this case, the list of available projects

includes only those in the currently selected project group for which you have the

security privilege required to add issues.

Issue Name field

The name or description of the issue.

Applies to field

The activity, project, or WBS with which the issue is associated.

Date Identified field

The date on which the issue was identified. By default, this field displays today's date.

Identified By field

The name of the person who identified the issue. By default, this field displays your user

name.

Owner field

The list of available resources you can select from depends upon your resource

access security privileges.

Priority field

The level of importance assigned to the issue.

Resolution Date field

The planned (open issue) or actual (closed issue) resolution date for the issue.

Responsible Manager field

The name of the person responsible for the issue.

If you have edit privileges, you can select a different Responsible Manager. The list of

available resources depends upon your resource access security privileges.

Status field

The current status of the issue: Open, On Hold, Closed.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

569

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

Getting Here

From the Issues page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, click Add an Issue.

4) In the Select an Issue Form dialog box, select a form and click OK.

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Workgroups portlet and click a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, expand the Issues portlet and click Add Issue.

5) In the Select an Issue Form dialog box, select a form and click OK.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Issues portlet and click Add.

4) In the Select an Issue Form dialog box, select a form and click OK.

Add Steps Page of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this page to save new step information for an activity.

Details

Step Name field

The name of the step, which is unique to the activity.

Step Weight field

The weight that is assigned to the step.

This user-defined field is used to calculate the physical percent complete when the

project option is set.

570

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Steps section and select Add Steps.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Steps section and select Add Steps.

Add User Dialog Box

Overview

If the password policy is enabled, you will use the Add User dialog box to add a user.

Screen Elements

Login Name field

Allows you to enter the login name for the user. Your user name can be a maximum of

30 characters.

Personal Name field

Allows you to enter the login name for the user.

Password field

When the Password Policy is enabled in Application Settings, the password must

be between 8 and 20 characters and contain at least one number and one letter.

When the Password Policy is disabled in Application Settings, the password must be

between 1 and 20 characters. P6 EPPM does not allow blank passwords.

Confirm Password field

To confirm the password, enter the password.

When the Password Policy is enabled in Application Settings, the password must

be between 8 and 20 characters and contain at least one number and one letter.

When the Password Policy is disabled in Application Settings, the password must be

between 1 and 20 characters. P6 EPPM does not allow blank passwords.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

571

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Users.

3) On the Users tab, click Add.

Add Users from LDAP Dialog Box of the Users Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to search for and import users into P6 from your LDAP repository. You

can add users from the LDAP repository when your global profile has the privilege

Provision Users From LDAP. The dialog box allows you to import multiple users at once.

Periodically, you can check back to view any user accounts that were modified within

the LDAP repository and re-import those users to keep P6 up to date.

Screen Elements

Search users field

The search criteria you want to use to find specific users in the LDAP repository. By

default, your most recent search criteria appears.

Search button

Activates the search based on your search criteria.

User Name field

The system-compliant user login name.

Actual Name field

The full name of the user.

E-mail field

Displays the user's e-mail.

Phone field

Displays the user's telephone number.

User Status field

An indication of the relative state of the user account in both the LDAP repository and

P6. By default, the user accounts shown in your search results on this dialog box are

grouped hierarchically by the following status types:

User does not exist in the database: Shows users who exist in the LDAP repository

but not in the P6 database. When you select these accounts and click Import,

they are imported as new records in P6 .

572

User modified: Shows user accounts that have similar information in both P6 and

the LDAP repository, but that also have been modified in the P6 EPPM database or

LDAP repository. When you select these accounts and click Import, the two

account records are synchronized.

User records match: Shows users who have the same information in both P6 and

the LDAP repository.

Load LDIF button

Opens a dialog box where you can select an .ldif file pre-populated with the LDAP

users you want to import into P6. Use this method to import new P6 user accounts in

batches.

Import button

Imports selected users into your database.

Cancel button

Cancels the current command or operation. Reverts any information you changed

back to its previous state and closes the current page or dialog box.

Tips

You must be an LDAP user to add another LDAP user to the application.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Users.

3) On the Users tab, click Add

Administration Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign administration privileges to the selected global security

profile.

Screen Elements

Privilege field

The name of the security permission that is assigned (option selected) or denied

(option cleared) to users of the currently selected profile.

Privilege option

The option in the column header that determines whether the privileges are all

assigned (selected), all denied (clear), or individually configured (indicated with a

dash or - sign).

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

573

Add/Edit/Delete OBS option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

hierarchical data for the global Organizational Breakdown Structure.

Add/Edit/Delete Security Profiles option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

global and project security profiles, which grant access to application-wide and

project-specific information.

Add/Edit/Delete Users option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove P6

EPPM user data. To search the LDAP directory when provisioning, users must also have

the Provision Users from LDAP global privilege.

Add/Edit/Delete User Interface Views option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove User

Interface Views configurations, which control the functionality users can access in P6.

Edit Application Settings option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to modify application settings, which

set global preferences for P6 EPPM.

Provision Users from LDAP option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to search the LDAP directory when

provisioning. For users who do not have this privilege assigned to their profile, the

option to load an LDIF file to provision users will still be enabled. To search the LDAP

directory, users also must also have the 'Add/Edit/Delete Users' global privilege.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Global Security Profiles.

3) On the Global Security Profiles page, click the Administration detail window.

Administration Page

Overview

Use this page to create, modify, and delete resources, resource teams, roles, and role

teams.

Screen Elements

Administration Page tabs:

Resources Tab of the Administration Page (on page 1033)

Resource Teams Tab of the Administration Page (on page 1016)

574

Roles Tab of the Administration Page (on page 1057)

Role Teams Tab of the Administration Page (on page 1054)

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

Advanced Tab of the Add Project Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to choose the project, WBS, activity, and baseline data you want to copy

from an existing project to use as a basis for a new project.

Screen Elements

Project & WBS Data options:

Documents option

Determines whether or not to copy document data to the project.

Funding Sources option

Determines whether to copy funding source data to the project or template.

Issues option

Determines whether or not to copy issue data to the project.

Risks option

Determines whether or not to copy risk data to the project or template.

Activities option

Determines whether to copy activity data to the project or template.

Notebooks option

Determines whether to copy project notebook data to the project or template.

WBS Milestones option

Determines whether to copy WBS milestone data to the project or template.

High Level Resource Planning Assignments option

Determines whether to copy high-level resource planning assignment data to the

project.

Reports option

Determines whether to copy report data to the project.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

575

Summary Data option

Determines whether to copy summary data to the project.

Activity Data options:

Activity Codes option

Determines whether or not to copy activity code data to the project or template.

Expenses option

Determines whether to copy expense data to the project or template.

Notebooks option

Determines whether to copy activity notebook data to the project or template.

Relationships option

Determines whether to copy relationship data to the project or template.

Resource and Role Assignments option

Determines whether or not to copy resources and role assignment data to the project

or template.

Steps option

Determines whether to copy step data to the project or template.

Financial Period Data option

Determines whether to copy financial period data to the project.

Baselines options:

Select the Include option for each baseline with data that you want to copy to the

project.

Tips

To enable the Advanced tab, you must select a project in the Copy from existing project

or template field on the General tab.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, expand an EPS element.

4) Within the EPS element, right-click the EPS element or any project and select

Add Project.

5) In the Add Project dialog box:

a. Complete the required fields.

576

b. Click Select Project or Template to Copy and select a project (not a template)

from the dialog box.

c. Click the Advanced tab.

Related Topics

General Tab of the Add Project Dialog Box ....................................................... 802

Advanced Tab of the Add Project Template Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to select project, WBS, and activity data that you want to copy from an

existing project or template to use as a basis for a new project template.

Screen Elements

Project & WBS Data options:

Funding Sources option

Determines whether to copy funding source data to the project or template.

Risks option

Determines whether or not to copy risk data to the project or template.

Activities option

Determines whether to copy activity data to the project or template.

Notebooks option

Determines whether to copy project notebook data to the project or template.

WBS Milestones option

Determines whether to copy WBS milestone data to the project or template.

Activity Data options:

Activity Codes option

Determines whether or not to copy activity code data to the project or template.

Expenses option

Determines whether to copy expense data to the project or template.

Notebooks option

Determines whether to copy activity notebook data to the project or template.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

577

Relationships option

Determines whether to copy relationship data to the project or template.

Resource and Role Assignments option

Determines whether or not to copy resources and role assignment data to the project

or template.

Steps option

Determines whether to copy step data to the project or template.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, expand an EPS element.

4) Within the EPS element, right-click the EPS element or any project and select

Add Project Template.

5) In the Add Project Template dialog box on the General tab:

a. Complete the required fields.

b. Click Select Project or Template to Copy and select a project or template from

the dialog box.

c. Click the Advanced tab.

Related Topics

General Tab of the Add Project Template Dialog Box ..................................... 803

Advanced Tab of the Scheduling Options Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to specify whether you want to calculate multiple critical float paths.

Calculating multiple critical float paths enables you to determine the most critical path,

along with the sub-critical paths that affect completion.

Screen Elements

Calculate multiple float paths option

Determines whether to calculate multiple critical float paths (sequences of activities)

in the project schedule. You can specify the number of critical float paths to identify

in the Specify the number of paths to calculate field. If you do not select this option,

you cannot edit the remaining fields.

578

Calculate multiple paths using options

Determines whether to calculate multiple paths using Total Float or Free Float.

Total Float: Based on the activity you want the paths to end on, P6 determines

which predecessor activity has the most critical Relationship Total Float on the

backward pass. This process repeats until an activity is reached that has no

relationship. P6 begins the forward pass from this activity and determines which

successor activity has the most critical Relationship Successor Total Float. These

activities represent the most critical float path. The process begins again until the

remaining sub-critical paths are calculated.

Free Float: Defines critical float paths based on longest path. The most critical path

will be identical to the critical path that is derived when you select Define critical

activities as: Longest Path on the General tab. In a multi-calendar project, the

longest path is calculated by identifying the activities that have an early finish

equal to the latest calculated early finish for the project and tracing all driving

relationships for those activities back to the project start date. After the most

critical path is identified, P6 will calculate the remaining sub-critical paths.

Display multiple float paths ending with activity field

The activity in the WBS to represent the end of the float paths.

Typically, this is a milestone activity or some other significant activity that has a start

date or end date that cannot change.

Specify the number of paths to calculate field

The number of critical float paths to calculate.

If you specify 5, P6 will calculate the five most critical float paths ending with the

activity you selected. Each float path is ranked from most critical to least critical and

stores the value for each activity in the Float Path field.

For example, if you calculate five float paths, a value of 1 is stored in the Float Path

field for each activity in the most critical float path; a value of 5 is stored for each

activity in the least critical float path.

To view the critical float paths after you schedule the project, on the Activities page,

create a view that groups activities by Float Path and sort them by Float Path Order. A

Float Path value of 1 indicates that those activities are part of the most critical float

path. The Float Path Order value indicates the order in which the activities were

processed.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Scheduler...

(F9).

4) In the Schedule Project dialog box, click Options.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

579

5) In the Scheduling Options dialog box, click the Advanced tab.

Analysis Page

Overview

Use this page to compare resource utilization between resource teams, project

resources, and department resource, all from one central location.

The Resource Analysis tab offers four chart options (histogram, stacked histogram, area

chart, and pie chart) to help you examine allocation data for individual resources, as

well as total values for resource teams and resource codes.

The Role Usage and Resource Usage tabs enable you to view resource allocation as a

histogram (total allocation across time) or as a spreadsheet (of resource allocation

values by project). You can view totals for an entire resource grouping (for example, role,

resource code, or resource team) or for individual resources.

Screen Elements

Analysis Page tabs:

Role Usage Tab of the Analysis Page (on page 1054)

Resource Usage Tab of the Analysis Page (on page 1018)

Resource Analysis Tab of the Analysis Page (on page 997)

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

Application Settings Pane

Overview

Use this pane to select pages where you configure application settings.

Screen Elements

Data Limits page

See Data Limits Page (on page 702).

Earned Value page

See Earned Value Page (on page 727).

General page

See General Page (on page 793).

580

ID Lengths page

See ID Lengths Page (on page 833).

Timesheets page

See Timesheets Page (on page 1125).

Time Periods page

See Time Periods Page (on page 1119).

Getting Here

Click the Administer menu and choose Application Settings.

Apply Actuals Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to select which currently open projects the Apply Actuals service

should update. You can also specify a new data date, change the Remaining Duration

Calculation, and view the most recent date the service was run.

Screen Elements

Apply Actuals option

Determines which projects are included when the Apply Actuals command runs. Only

selected projects are included.

Project Name field

The name of each project. Can be arranged in an ascending or descending order.

Data Date field

The date used as the starting point to calculated the schedule.

The project status is up to date as of the data date. The data date is modified when

project actuals are applied.

New Data Date field

The new date that is set for project data. This date affects the outcome of applying

actuals.

Project Planned Start field

The date the project is planned to begin.

Remaining Duration Calculation list

The designated method for calculating remaining activity durations. This field is only

used for calculations where you have elected to use P6 Progress Reporter timesheets

as the basis for applying actuals.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

581

When this field is set to Always Recalculate, its default value, all activities are treated

as fixed units and fixed units/time. When set to Based on Duration Type, the remaining

duration is based on the activity duration type.

Last Apply Actuals Date field

The most recent date the apply actuals were run. This date is used to determine if

new, approved timesheet data exists when P6 data is sent to the ERP system.

Tips

View the status of the Apply Actuals service in the Service Status dialog box.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Apply Actuals.

Approve Document Review Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to approve a document in review. You also have the option of

making comments or attaching another document. For example, you might attach an

electronic copy of a signed document with your approval comments.

Screen Elements

Name field

The name of the review.

Description field

The details of the review as defined in the Start Review dialog box. If no description is

specified for the review, then this field appears blank.

Initiator field

The name of the user who started the review.

Due Date field

The date all reviewers need to complete the review. If no due date is specified for the

review, then this field appears blank.

Comments field

The comments about the document review. You can type any comments or

responses you have for the review.

582

Attachments field

The documents attached to the document. The browse button allows you to attach a

single file to the review document.

Approve button

Approves the document review and stores any accompanying comments or

attached files.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Document Reviews portlet and click the Action

Required tab.

4) On the Action Required tab, select a document and click Approve Document.

Assign by Search Dialog Box of the Planning Page

Overview

Use the Assign by Search dialog box of the Planning page to search for and assign a

resource using new search criteria or from a pre-existing template. You can also create a

new search template. If this dialog box is used to assign a resource, a "Yes" will appear in

the Search Criteria field on the Planning page; click Yes to display this search criteria

used to find the assigned resource.

Screen Elements

Run Search link

Displays a list of available resource who meet the specified criteria.

Select Template link

Displays a list of preexisting search criteria from which you can select to search by.

Save as Template link

Saves the current search criteria as a template to use again.

Start field

The date you need the resource or role to begin working on the selected project.

Finish field

The date the resource or role is expected to finish working on the selected project.

Requested Units field

The number of resource/role units to assign to the project.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

583

The time unit increment reflects the current settings of your global preferences, not

the time unit display setting of the Planning page.

Show Results Matching field

Determines what criteria is used in your search.

All search criteria: Finds a resource based on all selections of search criteria that you

select from or enter in the fields of the dialog box.

Any search criteria: Finds a resource based on a random criteria search.

Roles field

The name of the roles to use in the search. Unless you specify only one resource and

no other criteria, you must specify a primary role. When a single resource is selected

with no other criteria, the search criteria will include the primary role of the resource

you specify. If that resource does not have a primary role, a message displays to ask

you to select a primary role.

Proficiency field

The resource's proficiency at performing this role.

The values are 1 - Master, 2 - Expert, 3 - Skilled, 4 - Proficient, and 5 - Inexperienced. If

you do not have the proper privilege, you cannot access this field.

Resources field

The names of specific resources to use in the search.

The displayed hierarchy includes only those resources that belong to your access

node, based on resource security, and current project resources. If you chose the

option to show results that match all criteria, you can specify only one resource.

Resource Codes field

The specific codes to use in the search. If you chose the option to show results that

match all criteria, you can specify only one code value for each resource code you

select.

Sort results by availability option

Determines whether to sort the results by resource availability.

Do not show overallocated resources option

Determines whether to show overallocated resources.

Show only labor resources option

Determines whether to show only labor resources. This option filters out nonlabor and

material resources, which cannot be assigned on the Planning page.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

584

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Planning.

3) On the Planning page, select a project name then click Assign Resource Using

Search.

Assign Project Manager Delegate Dialog Box of the Timesheet Approval Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to assign and activate a project manager delegate. After selecting a

delegate, you can activate and deactivate the delegate's approval rights at any time.

Screen Elements

Search field

The means to find a project.

Clear Results button

Clears the for field and removes the options based on your entered criteria to display

all possible codes.

Selector option

Determines the delegates to be Resource or Project Manager. Selecting the option

and clicking OK enables delegate rights; clearing the option removes delegate rights.

Project ID field

The unique identifier of the project.

Project Name field

The name of the associated project.

Delegate field

The delegate user's login name.

Getting Here

1) Click the Dashboards menu and select Approve Timesheets.

2) On the Timesheet Approval page, select Project Manager from the Approving as list

and click Assign Delegate.

Assign Resource Manager Delegate Dialog Box of the Timesheet Approval Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to assign and activate rights for a resource manager delegate. After

selecting a delegate, you can activate or deactivate the delegate's approval rights at

any time.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

585

Screen Elements

Selector option

Determines the delegates to be Resource or Project Manager. Selecting the option

and clicking OK enables delegate rights; clearing the option removes delegate rights.

Delegate field

The delegate user's login name.

Getting Here

1) Click the Dashboards menu and select Approve Timesheets.

2) On the Timesheet Approval page, select Resource Manager from the Approving as

list and click Assign Delegate.

Assignment UDFs Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure user defined fields for assignments.

Screen Elements

User Defined Fields toolbar

See User Defined Fields Toolbar (on page 1361).

User Defined Field field

The name of the user-defined field.

Data Type field

The name of the type of data that corresponds to each user-defined field. The data

type you select determines the type of data you can specify in a field. The following

data types are available:

Text: Allows you to use text or a combination of text and numbers.

Start Date: Allows you to enter Start Date information only.

Finish Date: Allows you to enter Finish Date information only.

Cost: Allows you to enter currency values.

Number: Allows you to use numerals with two decimal places.

Integer: Allows you to use numeric data, but not a number related to money.

Indicator: Allows you to use an indicator field that you can use to enter

color-coded icon values in columns and display color-coded text in reports.

Getting Here

To access enterprise data:

586

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Assignment UDFs.

To access enterprise resource data:

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, select Assignment UDFs.

Assignments Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign resources or roles to the selected activity. You can also

submit resource requests to a resource manager, revise an assignment, specify details

(such as units, costs, and rate), remove an assigned resource, and send e-mail to all

assigned resources and roles.

Note: All fields described here are available when you click a

resource or role name to edit assignment details. However, unless

you customize the detail window to include them, some of these

fields do not appear.

Screen Elements

Assignments toolbar

See Assignments Toolbar of the Activities Page (on page 1187).

Actual Cost field

The actual non-overtime plus overtime cost for the resource assignment on the

activity.

Calculated as Actual Regular Cost plus Actual Overtime Cost.

Actual Duration field

The total working time from the activity actual start date to the actual finish date for

completed activities, or the current data date for in-progress activities.

The actual working time is computed using the activity's calendar.

Actual Units field

The number of work units the resource has spent working on the selected activity. It is

the sum of the actual labor units and the actual nonlabor units.

Calculated as Actual Labor Units plus Actual Nonlabor Units.

At Completion Cost field

The sum of the actual costs plus remaining costs for the resource assignment on the

activity.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

587

Calculated as Actual Costs plus Remaining Costs.

At Completion Units field

The sum of the actual units and remaining units for the resource assignment on the

activity.

Calculated as Actual Units plus Remaining Units.

Calculate Costs from Units option

Determines whether to override the cost calculation setting specified for the assigned

resource or role. To have cost for this assignment calculated (Cost equals Units

multiplied by Price/Unit), select this option. To manually record resource or role costs

for this activity, clear this option. If you elect not to calculate costs from units, the

resource or role costs for the assignment will not be updated when units or rates

change.

If you select this option, the costs for the assignment will be recalculated based on

current units and rates.

Cost Account field

The cost account associated with the resource assignment.

Curve field

The resource's units and costs distributed over the duration of an activity.

A curve can only be assigned to activities that have a duration type of Fixed Duration

and Units or Fixed Duration and Units/Time.

A manual curve type indicates that the assignment's future period resource

distribution was manually entered in the Resource Usage Spreadsheet of P6

Professional. If you select a different curve type, the manually-entered distribution is

deleted, and the units and costs for the assignment are redistributed according to the

curve you select. Be sure this is the appropriate course of action before replacing a

manual curve with another curve.

Drive Activity Dates option

Determines whether new resource/role assignments drive activity dates by default.

Planned Cost field

The planned cost for the resource assignment on the activity.

Calculated as Planned Units multiplied by Price Per Time.

Planned Duration field

The planned working time for the resource assignment on the activity, from the

resource's planned start date to the planned finish date.

Planned Units field

The planned units for all labor resources assigned to the activity.

588

Planned Units/Time field

The budgeted or planned units per time at which the resource is expected to work on

this activity.

For example, a person assigned full time would work for 8 hours per day (8h/d).

Price/Unit field

The non-overtime price per unit of time for the resource or role.

When the option to Calculate Costs from Units is selected, this price is used to

compute cost for the activity assignment, using the formula: Cost equals Units

multiplied by Price divided by Unit.

For resources and roles that have specified rates, Price/Unit corresponds to the Rate

Source and Rate Type applied to the activity and is not editable. If an assigned

resource or role does not have specified rates, the project default price/unit is used

and cannot be edited on this tab. To manually enter a Price/Unit for the activity

assignment, you must select Override as the Rate Source.

If the project default price/unit is applied to the activity, a caret symbol (^) appears

beside the value.

An asterisk symbol (*) beside the value indicates that multiple, time-varying, resource

rates or shift calendars will be applied during the duration of the activity. An asterisk

and caret symbol (*^) beside the price/unit value indicate that the project default

price/unit is in effect at the start of the activity and a time-varying rate is also in effect

within the activity assignment duration.

Primary Resource option

Determines whether the corresponding resource is the activity's primary resource.

Typically, the primary resource is the person responsible for the overall work on the

activity and for updating activity status.

Proficiency field

The skill level of the resource: Master, Expert, Skilled, Proficient, or Inexperienced.

Rate Source field

The value that indicates which price/unit will be used to calculate costs for the

assignment, such as Resource, Role, and Override.

When a resource and only a resource is assigned to an activity, the rate source will

automatically equal Resource. When a role and only a role is assigned to an activity,

the rate source will automatically equal Role. When both a resource and role are

assigned to the activity, the rate source can be either Resource or Role determined

by the Rate Source Preference. In any case, the Override value allows you to specify

any other price/unit.

Rate Type field

The price/unit used to calculate costs for the resource or role assignment.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

589

Resources and Roles can have up to five rate types, with each rate type reflecting a

different price/unit. Rate types are defined in P6. When you add a new assignment,

the rate type defaults to the setting specified for the project. When you edit a rate

type and click Save, the Price/Unit is updated to reflect your change, and if the Calc

Cost from Units option is selected, costs are recalculated.

Remaining Cost field

The remaining cost for the resource assignment on the activity.

Calculated as Remaining Units multiplied by Cost/Time.

Remaining Duration field

The total working time from the activity remaining start date to the remaining finish

date.

The remaining working time is calculated using the activity's calendar. Before the

activity is started, the remaining duration is the same as the planned duration. After

the activity is completed the remaining duration is zero.

Remaining Units field

The remaining units of work to be performed by this resource on this activity.

Calculated as Budgeted or Planned Units minus Actual Units.

Remaining Units/Time field

The units/time at which the resource is expected to perform the remaining work on

the activity.

Resource ID Name field

The identifying code and name of the resource.

Resource Name field

The name of the resource assigned to the activity.

Resource Type field

The resource type. Valid values are:

Labor: Indicates that the selected resource performs labor, measured in units of time.

Nonlabor: Indicates that the resource is a nonlabor resource, such as equipment,

measured in units of time.

Material: Indicates that the resource has a unit of measure other than time. You can

select a unit of measure for the material resource.

Role ID Name field

The identifying code and name of the role.

Role Name field

The name of the role assigned to the resource for the selected activity.

590

Search Criteria field

The resource request used as a search template to search for a qualified resource.

User Defined fields

The fields specific to your company's use of the application.

Information that needs to be captured for all resource assignments can be stored in a

user-defined field. User-defined fields are created by the system administrator.

Tips

If you have more than one activity selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Assignments detail window.

Assignments Page

Overview

Use this page to view and modify resource assignment data using filters, which enables

you to view resource assignment data for only the resources or projects that you need to

view.

From this page you can also view a Gantt chart of your current start and finish dates for

an assignment and view a spreadsheet that shows spreads by days, weeks, months,

quarters, years, and financial periods.

Screen Elements

Assignments toolbar

See Assignments Toolbar (on page 1185).

Resource Assignments Table columns

The default fields that appear as columns in Resource Assignments table are

described below. For descriptions of all possible fields, see Available Columns of the

Assignments Page (on page 1213).

Activity ID field

The unique identifier of the activity assigned to the resource or role.

Activity Name field

The name of the activity assigned to the resource or role.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

591

Resource field

The name of the resource.

Role field

The name of the role.

Planned Units field

The planned units of work for the resource assignment on the activity.

Actual Units field

The sum of the actual non-overtime and the overtime units worked by the resource on

this activity.

This value is calculated from timesheets when project actuals are applied or can be

entered directly by the project manager.

Calculated as Actual Regular Units plus Actual Overtime Units.

Remaining Units field

The remaining units of work to be performed by this resource on this activity.

Before the activity is started, the remaining units are the same as the planned units.

After the activity is completed, the remaining units are zero.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

Bars Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to customize options for Calendar View and Gantt chart bars.

Screen Elements

First/Second/Third Bar sections:

The options to modify each bar's size, height, and color. Use the Type list to determine

whether the Height and Color fields become available. If <none> is selected, other

options will not be available for modification and those bars will not be displayed.

Type list

Determines the type of bar. See About Bars.

Height list

Determines the height of the bar in pixels.

592

Color options

The options for selecting the color of the bar or for setting the bar to represent an

activity code.

Show Necking option

Determines whether the thickness of Gantt chart bars should be reduced to show

periods of non-work time. When bar necking is enabled, the horizontal bars

representing activities "neck down" during periods of inactivity.

Example: Joan starts a 5-day activity before leaving on vacation for 3 weeks and

then finishes it when she returns. Without bar necking, this simple one week activity

might look as though it took four weeks to complete because Joan was on vacation

for three weeks. With this feature, the bar appears narrow over the vacation period

while her actual progress before and after the non-work time appear in the usual

thickness.

Current Bar Options section:

Show Progress option

Determines whether to display activity or project progress. Progress is displayed as a

blue bar inside the other bars in the Gantt chart.

Show Critical option

Determines how to show critical activities in the Gantt chart. Select the option to

represent critical activities with a red bar instead of the color you selected for the

Current bar.

Label list

The type of label to display for the activity or project bars in the Gantt chart.

Label position list

The position of the label above its related activity or project bar in the Gantt chart.

Label font field

The configurable options for the font.

Necking section:

Use calendar non-work time option

Determines whether to show calendar non-work time, such as holidays and

weekends. Select the option to use necking to show non-work time.

Note: To enable necking, select both the Show necking option for the bar to which

you want to apply necking and the Use calendar non-work time option. If necking

does not display, you might need to schedule the project. See Scheduling Projects for

more information.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

593

Use activity non-work time option

Determines whether to display activity non-work time. For example, the suspension of

an activity through the use of suspend/resume dates or the non-work time of an

activity that started out of sequence.

Note: To enable necking, select both the Show necking option for the bar to which

you want to apply necking and the Use activity non-work time option. If necking does

not display, you might need to schedule the project. See Scheduling Projects for more

information.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select a view from the Activity View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View dialog box, click the Bars tab.

Bars Tab of the Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this tab to configure properties, options, and necking of up to three bar types on the

Gantt chart of the Activities page.

Screen Elements

First/Second/Third Bar sections:

The options to modify each bar's size, height, and color. Use the Type list to determine

whether the Height and Color fields become available. If <none> is selected, other

options will not be available for modification and those bars will not be displayed.

Type list

Determines what type of bar is displayed. See About Bars.

Height list

Determines the height of the bar in pixels.

Color options

The options for selecting the color of the bar or for setting the bar to represent an

activity code.

594

Show Necking option

Determines whether the thickness of Gantt chart bars should be reduced to show

periods of non-work time. When bar necking is enabled, the horizontal bars

representing activities "neck down" during periods of inactivity.

Example: Joan starts a 5-day activity before leaving on vacation for 3 weeks and

then finishes it when she returns. Without bar necking, this simple one week activity

might look as though it took four weeks to complete because Joan was on vacation

for three weeks. With this feature, the bar appears narrow over the vacation period

while her actual progress before and after the non-work time appear in the usual

thickness.

Current Bar Options section:

Use the following options to modify the label for the current bar selection.

Show Progress option

Determines whether to display activity or project progress. Progress is displayed as a

blue bar inside the other bars in the Gantt chart.

Show Critical option

Determines how to show critical activities in the Gantt chart. Select the option to

represent critical activities with a red bar instead of the color you selected for the

Current bar.

Label list

The type of label to display for the activity or project bars in the Gantt chart.

Label position list

The position of the label above its related activity or project bar in the Gantt chart.

Label font field

The configurable options for the font.

Necking section:

Use the following options to modify necking options.

Use calendar non-work time option

Determines whether to show calendar non-work time, such as holidays and

weekends. Select the option to use necking to show non-work time.

Note: To enable necking, select both the Show necking option for the bar to which

you want to apply necking and the Use calendar non-work time option. If necking

does not display, you might need to schedule the project. See Scheduling Projects for

more information.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

595

Use activity non-work time option

Determines whether to display activity non-work time. For example, the suspension of

an activity through the use of suspend/resume dates or the non-work time of an

activity that started out of sequence.

Note: To enable necking, select both the Show necking option for the bar to which

you want to apply necking and the Use activity non-work time option. If necking does

not display, you might need to schedule the project. See Scheduling Projects for more

information.

Tips

You must be in the Gantt chart view for the Gantt Chart Options option to be enabled.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select a view from the Activity View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Gantt Chart Options.

4) In the Customize Gantt Chart Options dialog box, click the Bars tab.

Bars Tab of the Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the Assignments Page

Overview

Use the Bars tab of the Customize Gantt Chart Options dialog box to modify the type,

height, color, and necking options of up to three bars, and additional font and progress

options for the current bar.

Screen Elements

First/Second/Third Bar areas:

Use the following options to modify each bar's type, height, color, and necking

options. Use the type list to determine whether the height and color fields become

available. If <none> is selected, other options will not be available for modification

and those bars will not be displayed.

Type list

Determines what type of bar is displayed. See About Bars.

Height list

Determines the height of the bar in pixels.

596

Color options

The options for selecting the color of the bar or for setting the bar to represent an

activity code.

Show Necking option

Determines whether the thickness of Gantt chart bars should be reduced to show

periods of non-work time. When bar necking is enabled, the horizontal bars

representing activities "neck down" during periods of inactivity.

Example: Joan starts a 5-day activity before leaving on vacation for 3 weeks and

then finishes it when she returns. Without bar necking, this simple one week activity

might look as though it took four weeks to complete because Joan was on vacation

for three weeks. With this feature, the bar appears narrow over the vacation period

while her actual progress before and after the non-work time appear in the usual

thickness.

Non-work time for resource assignment bars are based on the calendar non-work

time and activity type.

If activity type is Task Dependent then the activity’s calendar will be used for

displaying non-work time.

If activity type is Resource Dependent then the resource’s calendar will be used

for displaying non-work time.

Current Bar Options area:

Use the following options to modify the label for the current bar selection.

Show Progress option

Determines whether to indicate progress by displaying a blue bar for actuals.

Label list

The type of label to display above the assignment line in the Gantt chart.

Label position list

The position of where the label will display above its related assignments line in the

Gantt chart.

Label font field

The configurable options for the font.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click the View menu and select Gantt Chart Options.

4) In the Customize Gantt Chart Options dialog box, click the Bars tab.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

597

Bars Tab of the Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the EPS Page

Overview

Use this tab to configure properties and options of up to three bar types in the Gantt

chart.

Screen Elements

First/Second/Third Bar sections:

The options to modify each bar's size, height, and color. Use the Type list to determine

whether the Height and Color fields become available. If <none> is selected, other

options will not be available for modification and those bars will not be displayed.

Type list

Determines what type of bar is displayed. See About Bars.

Height list

Determines the height of the bar in pixels.

Color option

The color applied to the bar.

Current Bar Options section:

Show Progress option

Determines whether to display activity or project progress. Progress is displayed as a

blue bar inside the other bars in the Gantt chart.

Label list

The type of label to display for the activity or project bars in the Gantt chart.

Label position list

The position of the label above its related activity or project bar in the Gantt chart.

Label font field

The configurable options for the font.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a view from the EPS View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Gantt Chart Options.

598

4) In the Customize Gantt Chart Options dialog box, click the Bars tab.

Bars Tab of the Customize Project View Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to customize options for Gantt chart bars.

Screen Elements

First/Second/Third Bar sections:

The options to modify each bar's size, height, and color. Use the Type list to determine

whether the Height and Color fields become available. If <none> is selected, other

options will not be available for modification and those bars will not be displayed.

Type list

Determines what type of bar is displayed. See About Bars.

Height list

Determines the height of the bar in pixels.

Color option

The color applied to the bar.

Current Bar Options section:

Show Progress option

Determines whether to display activity or project progress. Progress is displayed as a

blue bar inside the other bars in the Gantt chart.

Label list

The type of label to display for the activity or project bars in the Gantt chart.

Label position list

The position of the label above its related activity or project bar in the Gantt chart.

Label font field

The configurable options for the font.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a view from the EPS View list.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

599

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Project View dialog box, click the Bars tab.

Bars Tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the Assignments Page

Overview

Use the Bars tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View to modify the type, height,

color, and necking options of up to three bars.

Screen Elements

First/Second/Third Bar areas:

Use the following options to modify each bar's type, height, and color. Use the type list

to determine whether the height and color fields become available. If <none> is

selected, other options will not be available for modification and those bars will not

be displayed.

Type list

Determines what type of bar is displayed. See About Bars.

Height list

Determines the height of the bar in pixels.

Color options

The options for selecting the color of the bar or for setting the bar to represent an

activity code.

Show Necking option

Determines whether the thickness of Gantt chart bars should be reduced to show

periods of non-work time. When bar necking is enabled, the horizontal bars

representing activities "neck down" during periods of inactivity.

Example: Joan starts a 5-day activity before leaving on vacation for 3 weeks and

then finishes it when she returns. Without bar necking, this simple one week activity

might look as though it took four weeks to complete because Joan was on vacation

for three weeks. With this feature, the bar appears narrow over the vacation period

while her actual progress before and after the non-work time appear in the usual

thickness.

Non-work time for resource assignment bars are based on the calendar non-work

time and activity type.

If activity type is Task Dependent then the activity’s calendar will be used for

displaying non-work time.

If activity type is Resource Dependent then the resource’s calendar will be used

for displaying non-work time.

600

Current Bar Options area:

Use the following options to modify the label for the current bar selection.

Show Progress option

Determines whether to indicate progress by displaying a blue bar for actuals.

Label list

The type of label to display above the assignment line in the Gantt chart.

Label position list

The position of where the label will display above its related assignments line in the

Gantt chart.

Label font field

The configurable options for the font.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click the View and select Customize View.

4) In the Customize Resource Assignments View dialog box, click the Bars tab.

Baseline Types Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure baseline types for projects.

Screen Elements

Baseline Types toolbar

See Enterprise Data Baseline Types Toolbar (on page 1257).

Type field

This field displays the baseline type names. You can use the baseline type name to

categorize your baselines by purpose; for example, customer sign-off, initial planning,

management sign-off, mid-project status, and what-if baselines. To edit, double-click

on a selected name. Right-click to display the Add, Delete, Find, and Find Next

options in addition to the toolbar icons.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Baseline Types.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

601

Baselines Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to add, select, delete, convert, or restore project baselines.

Screen Elements

Baselines Dialog Box toolbar

See Baselines Dialog Box Toolbar (on page 1243).

Baseline Name field

The name of the selected baseline. You can enter a name for a new baseline in this

field.

Baseline Type field

The baseline type; this can be used to categorize the baseline's purpose.

Data Date field

The current data date for the project.

The project status is up-to-date as of the data date. The data date is modified when

project actuals are applied.

Project Baseline field

The project baseline for the selected project.

User's Primary Baseline field

The user's primary baseline for the selected project.

Getting Here

From the Activities page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Define Baselines....

From the EPS page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Define Baselines....

602

BEI - Activities with No Project Baseline Finish Date Section of the Schedule Check Report

Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to view the data on activities that matched the requirements for the

Baseline Execution Index (BEI) check. This check measures the number of activities that

have been completed as a ratio to those activities that should have been completed

according to the baseline.

Only a subset of the activities in the open projects are checked to see if they are

complete or should have been completed. WBS summary activities, activities with no

actual finish date, milestones, and Level of Effort activities are removed from the subset

to create the list of completed activities. WBS summary activities, milestones, Level of

Effort activities, and activities with a baseline finish later than the data date are removed

to create the list of activities that should have been completed. The number of

completed activities is then divided by the number of activities that should have been

completed to find the BEI ratio.

Note: If an activity does not have a Baseline Finish, then the

application assumes that the baseline is greater than the data

date. If one or more activities have no Baseline Finish, then a

section is added to the BEI section to report these activities.

Screen Elements

Project ID field

The unique identifying code of the project containing the activity which failed the

check.

Activity ID field

The unique identifying code of the activity which failed the check.

Activity Description field

The brief description of the listed activity.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box:

a. Select the BEI - Baseline Execution Index option.

b. Click Check Schedule.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

603

5) In the Schedule Check Report dialog box, expand the BEI - Activities with no project

baseline finish date section.

Budget Log Detail Window of the EPS Page

Overview

Use this detail window to create, delete, or modify the budget log for a selected project.

A budget log specifies details about a line item, including who has signature approval,

the approval status, the reason why the expense was required, and so on.

Screen Elements

Budget Log toolbar

See Budget Log Toolbar (on page 1245).

Date field

The date of the budgeted line item.

Amount field

The amount of the budgeted line item.

Responsible field

The name of the person with signature approval for the line item.

Status field

The approval status of the line item.

Reason field

The reason why the expense was required.

Change Number field

The quantity purchased.

Tips

If you have more than one project selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, select a project and click the Budget Log detail window.

604

Calculations Page of the Project Preferences Dialog Box

Overview

Use this page to set options that determine how the application will handle project

calculations for activities, earned value, and units and costs.

Screen Elements

Activity Progress Removed options

Reset planned duration and units to remaining: Determines whether the application

will respread planned values to match the remaining units.

Reset remaining duration and units to planned: Determines whether the application

will respread remaining values to match the planned units.

Activity % Complete from Steps option

Determines whether to use the steps for each activity to calculate its Activity %

Complete field value.

For example, if 3 of 4 steps were selected, the Activity % Complete would be 75%.

Link Planned and At Completion option

Determines whether to recalculate all of the planned unit and cost values using the

remaining costs and units for activities that have not started.

When updating units or costs options

Add actual to remaining: Determines whether P6 Professional will calculate a new

at completion value when the remaining units or actual units change. At

Completion Units equal Remaining Units plus Actual Units.

Subtract actual from at completion: Determines whether P6 Professional will

calculate a new remaining units value when the at completion or actual units

change. Remaining Units equal At Completion Units minus Actual Units.

Link Percent Complete with Actuals option

Determines whether the actual units and cost values are recalculated when duration

percent complete is updated.

Link Actual and Period Actual Units and Cost option

Determines whether to recalculate all actual and period actual unit and cost values

using the actual values to date based on the financial period values.

Baseline to be used for earned value calculations options

Determines whether the Project Baseline or User's Primary Baseline will act as the

baseline for earned value calculations.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

605

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Set Project Preferences....

4) In the Project Preferences dialog box, click Calculations in the Project Preferences

pane.

Calendar Tab of the Global Calendars Page

Overview

Use this tab to view and specify work hours for the global calendar.

Screen Elements

Name field

The name for the new calendar.

Show Exceptions Only menu

This menu allows you to change what you see on your calendar. You can choose to

Show Exceptions Only or Show All Work Time to display specific work hours.

Month button

Displays a single month view. The left arrow displays the previous month, the right

arrow displays the following month.

Year button

Displays a 12 month view for the currently selected year. The left arrow displays the

previous year, the right arrow displays the following year.

Previous Month

Displays the previous month. Moves back one month per click.

Next Month

Displays the next month. Moves forward one month per click.

Day fields

The boxes that represent a single day. You can right-click to display Edit Calendar Day

and Set as Nonwork to edit each day to your preferences.

Standard

The application displays the day with a white background if the day consists of

standard work hours.

606

Exception

The application displays the day with a light blue background if the day consists of

hours worked but not the standard hours.

Exception Nonwork

The application displays the day with a dark blue background if there are no worked

hours and the day is not a typical Nonwork day.

Nonwork

The application displays the day with a light gray background if the day is a Standard

Nonwork day.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Global Calendars.

3) On the Global Calendars page, click the Calendar tab.

Calendar Tab of the Project Calendars Page

Overview

Use this tab to view and specify work hours for the project calendar.

Screen Elements

Name field

The name for the new calendar.

Base Calendar field

The available calendars that you can use to determine exemption dates in the

current calendar.

Show Exceptions Only menu

This menu allows you to change what you see on your calendar. You can choose to

Show Exceptions Only or Show All Work Time to display specific work hours.

Month button

Displays a single month view. The left arrow displays the previous month, the right

arrow displays the following month.

Year button

Displays a 12 month view for the currently selected year. The left arrow displays the

previous year, the right arrow displays the following year.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

607

Previous Month

Displays the previous month. Moves back one month per click.

Next Month

Displays the next month. Moves forward one month per click.

Day fields

The boxes that represent a single day. You can right-click to display Edit Calendar Day

and Set as Nonwork to edit each day to your preferences.

Standard

The application displays the day with a white background if the day consists of

standard work hours.

Exception

The application displays the day with a light blue background if the day consists of

hours worked but not the standard hours.

Exception Nonwork

The application displays the day with a dark blue background if there are no worked

hours and the day is not a typical Nonwork day.

Nonwork

The application displays the day with a light gray background if the day is a Standard

Nonwork day.

Global Exception indicator

Indicates an exception of standard work hours in the Project and/or Resource

Calendar View. Exceptions, created from the base exception calendar, include any

difference in work periods from the standard work week; these hours can be less than,

more than, or equal but different to the typical workday hours.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project Calendars.

3) On the Project Calendars page, click the Calendar tab.

Calendar Tab of the Resource Calendars Page

Overview

Use this tab to view and specify work hours for the resource calendar.

608

Screen Elements

Name field

The name for the new calendar.

Base Calendar field

The available calendars that you can use to determine exemption dates in the

current calendar.

Show Exceptions Only menu

This menu allows you to change what you see on your calendar. You can choose to

Show Exceptions Only or Show All Work Time to display specific work hours.

Month button

Displays a single month view. The left arrow displays the previous month, the right

arrow displays the following month.

Year button

Displays a 12 month view for the currently selected year. The left arrow displays the

previous year, the right arrow displays the following year.

Previous Month

Displays the previous month. Moves back one month per click.

Next Month

Displays the next month. Moves forward one month per click.

Day fields

The boxes that represent a single day. You can right-click to display Edit Calendar Day

and Set as Nonwork to edit each day to your preferences.

Standard

The application displays the day with a white background if the day consists of

standard work hours.

Exception

The application displays the day with a light blue background if the day consists of

hours worked but not the standard hours.

Exception Nonwork

The application displays the day with a dark blue background if there are no worked

hours and the day is not a typical Nonwork day.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

609

Nonwork

The application displays the day with a light gray background if the day is a Standard

Nonwork day.

Global Exception indicator

Indicates an exception of standard work hours in the Project and/or Resource

Calendar View. Exceptions, created from the base exception calendar, include any

difference in work periods from the standard work week; these hours can be less than,

more than, or equal but different to the typical workday hours.

Getting Here

To access enterprise data:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Resource Calendars.

3) On the Resource Calendars page, click the Calendar tab.

To access enterprise resource data:

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, click Resource Calendars.

3) On the Resource Calendars page, click the Calendar tab.

Calendar Tab of the View Calendar Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to view work hours for the calendar.

Screen Elements

Base Calendar field

The calendar that is used as the basis of the current calendar.

Show Exceptions Only menu

Determines whether to display exceptions only or to show all work time.

Month button

Displays a single month view. The left arrow displays the previous month, the right

arrow displays the following month.

Year button

Displays a 12 month view for the currently selected year. The left arrow displays the

previous year, the right arrow displays the following year.

610

Next Month button

Scrolls to the next month. Move forward one month per click.

Previous Month button

Scrolls to the previous month. Move backward one month per click.

Day fields

The boxes that represent a single day.

Standard

The application displays the day with a white background if the day consists of

standard work hours.

Exception

The application displays the day with a light blue background if the day consists of

hours worked but not the standard hours.

Exception Nonwork

The application displays the day with a dark blue background if there are no worked

hours and the day is not a typical Nonwork day.

Nonwork

The application displays the day with a light gray background if the day is a Standard

Nonwork day.

Getting Here

From the Activities page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select an activity.

b. Click the Actions menu and select View Calendar.

4) In the View Calendar dialog box, click the Calendar tab.

From the EPS page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Expand an EPS node and select a project or template.

b. Click the Actions menu and select View Calendar.

4) In the View Calendar dialog box, click the Calendar tab.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

611

Calendar Tab of the View Calendar Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to view work hours for the calendar.

Screen Elements

Base Calendar field

The available calendars that you can use to determine exemption dates in the

current calendar.

Show Exceptions Only menu

This menu allows you to change what you see on your calendar. You can choose to

Show Exceptions Only or Show All Work Time to display specific work hours.

Month button

Displays a single month view. The left arrow displays the previous month, the right

arrow displays the following month.

Year button

Displays a 12 month view for the currently selected year. The left arrow displays the

previous year, the right arrow displays the following year.

Previous Month

Displays the previous month. Moves back one month per click.

Next Month

Displays the next month. Moves forward one month per click.

Day fields

The boxes that represent a single day. You can right-click to display Edit Calendar Day

and Set as Nonwork to edit each day to your preferences.

Standard

The application displays the day with a white background if the day consists of

standard work hours.

Exception

The application displays the day with a light blue background if the day consists of

hours worked but not the standard hours.

Exception Nonwork

The application displays the day with a dark blue background if there are no worked

hours and the day is not a typical Nonwork day.

612

Nonwork

The application displays the day with a light gray background if the day is a Standard

Nonwork day.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page:

a. Click on a resource name.

b. Click Actions and select View Calendar.

4) In the View Calendar dialog box, click the Calendar tab.

Calendar View Format of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this alternative viewing format for the Activities page to display and edit your

project's activities in a familiar monthly calendar.

Screen Elements

Activities toolbar

In the Calendar View, the Edit toolbar is not displayed. See Activities Toolbar (on page

1182).

Next Month

Scrolls forward to the next month in a Calendar View.

Previous Month

Scrolls backward to the previous month in a Calendar View.

Today link

Returns to the current day.

Day View detail window

See Day View Detail Window of the Calendar View of the Activities Page (on page

703).

Hovering over an activity bar will display:

Project ID

The unique identifier assigned to the project.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

613

Project Name

The name of the project.

Activity ID

The activity identifier that is unique within the project.

Activity Name field

The name of the activity.

Tips

When more activities are scheduled on a day than can be displayed in a day of the

Calendar View, an ellipsis is displayed within the day.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select a project, WBS element, or activity, click the View

menu and select Calendar View.

Cause Detail Window of the Risks Page

Overview

Use this detail window to write a description of the cause of the selected risk.

Screen Elements

Text Editor toolbar

See Text Editor Toolbar (on page 1352).

Work area

Use this area to enter text and modify it using the Text Editor Toolbar.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Risks.

3) On the Risks page, click the Cause detail window.

Change Password Dialog Box of the Users Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to change the password for the selected user.

614

Screen Elements

New Password field

When the Password Policy is disabled in Application Settings, the password must be

between 1 and 20 characters. P6 EPPM does not allow blank passwords.

When the Password Policy is enabled in Application Settings, the password must

be between 8 and 20 characters and contain at least one number and one letter.

Confirm New Password field

To confirm the change, enter the new password.

When the Password Policy is disabled in Application Settings, the password must be

between 1 and 20 characters. P6 EPPM does not allow blank passwords.

When the Password Policy is enabled in Application Settings, the password must

be between 8 and 20 characters and contain at least one number and one letter.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Users.

3) On the Users page, right-click a Login Name and click Change Password

(Ctrl+Shift+F9).

Chart Tab of the Customize Project Issues Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to select a chart type and color theme in addition to displaying what group

by and filter criteria the chart is based on. This tab applies only when you select to display

issues in Chart format.

Additional information in the Chart group by and Chart filter by sections lets you know

what group and filter criteria the issue count data in the chart is based on. You can

change these grouping and filtering selections on the Group and Filter tabs. Note that

the Chart tab applies only when you select to display issues in Chart format.

Screen Elements

Select the chart format area

Chart Type list

The formats in which to display your issues. Select from:

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

615

Histogram: A bar chart that displays issue count information based on your Level 1

and Level 2 grouping selections on the Group tab. For example, if your Level 1 Group

by selection is Status, and your Level 2 Group by selection is Priority, the histogram

chart displays the number of issues for each Status field value: Open, Closed, or On

Hold. It also displays the number of issues for each Priority field value: Top, High,

Normal, Low, Lowest. If you do not have a Level 2 Group by selection, the chart

displays information based only on your Level 1 Group by selection.

The sort order you specify for the Level 2 Group by selection on the Group tab

determines the order in which the columns appear, left to right, on the chart; an

ascending sort order lists values from lowest to highest, and a descending sort order

lists values from highest to lowest. If you do not have a Level 2 Group by selection, the

chart displays the sort order you specify for the Level 1 Group by selection.

Stacked Histogram: A stacked bar chart that displays issue count information based

on your Level 1 and Level 2 grouping selections on the Group tab. For example, if your

Level 1 Group by selection is Status, and your Level 2 Group by selection is Priority, the

histogram chart displays the number of issues for each Status field value: Open,

Closed, or On Hold. It also displays the number of issues for each Priority field value:

Top, High, Normal, Low, Lowest. Note that you must have both Level 1 and Level 2

grouping selections to display this type of chart.

The sort order you specify for the Level 2 Group by selection on the Group tab

determines the order in which the columns appear, left to right, on the chart; an

ascending sort order lists values from lowest to highest, and a descending sort order

lists values from highest to lowest.

Pie Chart: Displays issue count information based on your Level 1 grouping selection

on the Group tab. Each slice of the pie chart displays the number of issues assigned to

each Level 1 Group by selection field value. For example, if your Level 1 Group by

selection is Status, the pie chart represents the number of issues for each Status field

value: Open, Closed, or On Hold.

The sort order you specify for the Level 1 Group by selection on the Group tab

determines the order in which the slices appear, clockwise, in the chart; an

ascending sort order lists values from lowest to highest, and a descending sort by

order lists values from highest to lowest.

You can select to display the chart in either Primary Colors or Pastel Colors from the

Color Theme list.

Color Theme list

Determines whether to display the color theme in pastel or primary colors.

Chart Group by area

The area on the Chart tab where you can see grouping information.

Field field

The field chosen on the Group tab.

616

Sort Order field

The order in which the information is sorted; chosen on the Group tab.

To change the chart Group by settings, click the Group tab. link

Redirects the page to the Group tab in the Customize Project Issues dialog box.

Chart Filter area

The issue information presented in the chart will be filtered based on the criteria set on

the Filter tab.

To change the chart Filter settings, click the Filter tab. link

Redirects the page to the Filters tab of the Customize Project Issues dialog box.

Getting Here

From the Issues page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, click the Customize link.

4) In the Customize Project Issues dialog box, click the Chart tab.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Issues portlet and click Customize.

4) In the Customize Project Issues dialog box, click the Chart tab.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Issues portlet and click Customize.

4) In the Customize My Issues dialog box, click the Chart tab.

Check Schedule Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to define and select criteria on which to run a report and check the

health of the schedule.

Screen Elements

Logic option

Determines whether this information will be used as criteria on which to run the report.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

617

This check identifies activities that do not have a predecessor and successor. This

helps to identify how well the schedule is linked together. The default target is less

than 5 percent.

Negative Lags option

Determines whether this information will be used as criteria on which to run the report.

This check identifies negative lag relationships between activities. This helps to avoid

critical path and total float distortion in the schedule. The default target is less than 1

percent.

Lags option

Determines whether this information will be used as criteria on which to run the report.

This check identifies positive lag relationships between activities, showing the

relationships that might constrain a schedule. The default target is less than 5 percent.

Long Lags option

Determines whether this information will be used as criteria on which to run the report.

The value in the field should have a number and a time abbreviation. This value is

stored in hours. The default value is 352h (44 days at 8 hours per day).

This check identifies lags that are longer than the value you specify. The default target

is less than 5 percent.

Relationship Types option

Determines whether this information will be used as criteria on which to run the report.

This check identifies Finish to Start relationships. The default target is greater than 90

percent.

Hard Constraints option

Determines whether this information will be used as criteria on which to run the report.

This check identifies the constraints that prevent activities from being moved because

of schedule logic. The default target is less than 1 percent.

Soft Constraints option

Determines whether this information will be used as criteria on which to run the report.

This check identifies the constraints that do not prevent an activity from being moved

because of schedule logic. The default target is less than 5 percent.

Large Float option

Determines whether this information will be used as criteria on which to run the report.

The value in the field should have a number and a time abbreviation. The default

value is 352h (44 days at 8 hours per day).

618

This check identifies activities with a total float longer than the value you specify.

Activities with a large float might be missing predecessors or successors. A high

number of large floats might indicate that the network is unstable and not logic

driven. The default target is less than 1 percent.

Negative Float option

Determines whether this information will be used as criteria on which to run the report.

This check identifies activities with a total float less than 0. Activities with a negative

float need to be justified. Negative float might indicate that the schedule needs to be

corrected. The default target is less than 1 percent.

Large Durations option

Determines whether this information will be used as criteria on which to run the report.

The value in the field should have a number and a time abbreviation. The default

value is 352h (44 days at 8 hours per day).

This check identifies activities with a remaining duration greater than the value you

specify. Large duration activities could potentially be broken down into more discrete

activities that provide better insight into cost and schedule. The default target is less

than 5 percent.

Invalid Progress Dates option

Determines whether this information will be used as criteria on which to run the report.

This check identifies actual dates that occur after the data date or incomplete

activity dates scheduled before the data date. This helps to identify activities with

invalid dates. The default target is less than 1 percent.

Resource/Cost option

Determines whether this information will be used as criteria on which to run the report.

This check identifies the resources/costs assigned to each activity. A plan without

resources and costs is not as meaningful. The default target is less than 1 percent.

Late Activities option

Determines whether this information will be used as criteria on which to run the report.

This check identifies activities that are planned to finish later than their baseline finish.

This indicates how well the project is performing against the currently selected

baseline. The default target is less than 5 percent.

BEI option

Determines whether the Baseline Execution Index (BEI) will be used as criteria on

which to run the report.

This check measures the number of activities that have been completed as a ratio to

those activities that should have been completed according to the baseline. The

default target is a BEI of 0.95 or greater.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

619

Target selector

Determines the value associated with the option. If the value follows a < symbol, the

target is to have the option item be less than the listed value. If the value follows a >

symbol, the target is to have the option item be greater than the listed value. The

value is a percentage for all checks except BEI which is a ratio.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

Check Summary Section of the Schedule Check Report Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to view a summary of project health based on the checks in the report.

Screen Elements

Check field

The type of check.

Description field

The brief summary of the check.

Target field

The target value. You select this value using the Target selector in the Check Schedule

dialog box.

Actual field

The percentage of the items found that match the check divided by the total

number of items checked. The Actual field for the BEI check displays a ratio. The cell is

green if you hit your target, red if the target was missed.

Found field

The number of items found that match the check criteria.

Total field

The total number of items that were checked when the report ran.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

620

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box, click Check Schedule.

5) In the Schedule Check Report dialog box, expand the Check Summary section.

Codes Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign codes to activities, edit a code value assignment, or

remove a code assignment.

Screen Elements

Codes toolbar

See Codes Toolbar of the Activities Page (on page 1248).

Activity Code field

The code that uniquely identifies the activity within the project.

Code Value field

The alphanumeric or descriptive value of the activity code.

Code Description field

The description provided for the activity code when it was created.

Tips

If you have more than one activity selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Activity Codes detail window.

Codes Detail Window of the EPS Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign codes to projects, edit a code value assignment, or

remove a code assignment.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

621

Screen Elements

Codes toolbar

See Codes Toolbar of the EPS Page (on page 1249).

Name field

The name assigned to the selected project code.

Value field

The value assigned to the selected project code.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

Tips

If you have more than one project selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, select a project and click the Codes detail window.

Codes Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign codes privileges to the selected global security profile.

Screen Elements

Privilege field

The name of the security permission that is assigned (option selected) or denied

(option cleared) to users of the currently selected profile.

Privilege option

The option in the column header that determines whether the privileges are all

assigned (selected), all denied (clear), or individually configured (indicated with a

dash or - sign).

622

Add Global Activity Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create global activity codes and

code values data. This privilege also selects the 'Edit Global Activity Codes' global

privilege.

Edit Global Activity Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to modify global activity codes data.

This privilege also enables users to create, modify, and remove global activity code

values.

Delete Global Activity Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to remove global activity codes and

code values data. This privilege also selects the 'Add Global Activity Codes' and 'Edit

Global Activity Codes' global privileges.

Add Global Issue Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create global issue codes and

code values data. This privilege also selects the 'Edit Global Issue Codes' global

privilege.

Edit Global Issue Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to modify global issue codes data.

This privilege also enables users to create, modify, and remove global issue code

values.

Delete Global Issue Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to remove global issue codes and

code values data. This privilege also selects the 'Add Global Issue Codes' and 'Edit

Global Issue Codes' global privileges.

Add Project Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create project codes and code

values data. This privilege also selects the 'Edit Project Codes' global privilege.

Edit Project Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to modify project codes data. This

privilege also enables users to create, modify, and remove project code values.

Delete Project Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to remove project codes and code

values data. This privilege also selects the 'Add Project Codes' and 'Edit Project

Codes' global privileges.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

623

Add Resource Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create resource codes and code

values data. This privilege also selects the 'Edit Resource Codes' global privilege.

Edit Resource Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to modify resource codes data. This

privilege also enables users to create, modify, and remove resource code values.

Delete Resource Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to remove resource codes and code

values data. This privilege also selects the 'Add Resource Codes' and 'Edit Resource

Codes' global privileges.

Add/Delete Secure Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create and remove all secure

project codes, global and EPS-level activity codes, and resource codes and code

values data, as well as all secure issue codes and code values data. This privilege also

selects the 'Edit Secure Codes,' 'Assign Secure Codes,' and 'View Secure Codes'

global privileges.

Edit Secure Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to modify all secure project codes,

global and EPS-level activity codes, and resource codes and code values data, as

well as all secure issue codes and code values data. This privilege also selects the

'Assign Secure Codes' and 'View Secure Codes' global privileges.

Assign Secure Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to assign all secure project codes,

global and EPS-level activity codes, and resource codes and code values data, as

well as all secure issue codes and code values data. This privilege also selects the

'View Secure Codes' global privilege.

View Secure Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to display all secure project codes,

global and EPS-level activity codes, and resource codes and code values data, as

well as all secure issue codes and code values data.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Global Security Profiles.

3) On the Global Security Profiles page, click the Codes detail window.

624

Codes Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign codes privileges to the selected project security profile.

Screen Elements

Privilege field

The name of the security permission that is assigned (option selected) or denied

(option cleared) to users of the currently selected profile.

Privilege option

The option in the column header that determines whether the privileges are all

assigned (selected), all denied (clear), or individually configured (indicated with a

dash or - sign).

Add Project Activity Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create project activity codes and

code values data. This privilege also selects the 'Edit Project Activity Codes' project

privilege.

Edit Project Activity Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to modify project activity codes

data. This privilege also enables users to create, modify, and remove project activity

code values.

Delete Project Activity Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to remove project activity codes and

code values data. This privilege also selects the 'Add Project Activity Codes' and 'Edit

Project Activity Codes' project privileges.

Add EPS Activity Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create EPS-level activity codes

and code values. This privilege also selects the 'Edit EPS Activity Codes' project

privilege.

Edit EPS Activity Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to modify the name of EPS-level

activity codes. This privilege also enables users to create, modify, and remove

EPS-level activity code values.

Delete EPS Activity Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to remove EPS-level activity codes

and code values data. This privilege also selects the 'Add EPS Activity Codes' and 'Edit

EPS Activity Codes' project privileges.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

625

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Project Security Profiles.

3) On the Project Security Profiles page, click the Codes detail window.

Codes Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page

Overview

Use this detail window to view and assign resource codes to the selected resource.

Screen Elements

Add (Insert)

Assigns a resource code to the resource.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Resource selector (Ctrl+Up Arrow) or (Ctrl+Down Arrow)

Cycles through the available resources and determines which data display in the

detail window. Click (Ctrl+Up Arrow) to move to the previous resource, or click

(Ctrl+Down Arrow) to move to the next resource. The content in the detail window is

refreshed with the data for the selected resource.

Name field

The name of the assigned resource code.

Value field

The resource code value assigned to the selected resource.

Description field

The description of the associated resource code.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resources tab.

4) On the Resources tab, click the Codes detail window.

626

Codes Section of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this section to assign activity codes and edit and remove code assignments.

Screen Elements

Assign Activity Codes link

Opens a dialog box in which you can search for and select an activity code to assign.

See Working with 'Select a Value' Dialog Boxes for further details on how to use the

dialog box.

Activity Code field

The code that uniquely identifies the activity within the project. Click an activity code

to display the Details page for the activity code. See Activity Codes Details Page of

the Activity Form Page (on page 554).

Code Value field

The value of the assigned code.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Codes section.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Codes section.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

627

Columns Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to modify the the columns of your activity view.

Screen Elements

Available Columns list

The list of columns available for display. Double-clicking a column in the Available

Columns list moves it to the Selected Columns list.

Selected Columns list

The columns you selected from the Available Columns list. Double-clicking a column

in the Selected Columns list removes it from the list. See Configuring Columns or

Values, for help configuring the list of selected columns.

Columns Options section:

Sort by list

The element used to sort items in the table and Gantt chart.

Sort Order list

Determines whether the application sorts values in ascending or descending order.

Show first column as list

The list of fields names to use as the first or first and second columns in the view.

Font field

The font, size, and style from the Table Font dialog box. These configurable options will

be applied to the columns.

Tips

For a full list of available columns, see Available Columns of the Activities Page (on page

1189).

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select a view from the Activity View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View dialog box, click the Columns tab.

628

Columns Tab of the Customize Cost Worksheet Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to modify options for displaying columns.

Screen Elements

Customize Columns area

Use this area to configure which columns display. See Configuring Columns or Values

for further details.

Sort by list

Determines the column sort criteria.

Sort Order list

Determines whether the application sorts values in ascending or descending order.

Default button

Changes all fields to default settings.

Getting Here

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Cost Worksheet portlet.

4) In the Cost Worksheet portlet, click Customize.

5) In the Customize Project Cost Worksheet dialog box, click the Columns tab.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the selected dashboard, expand the Cost Worksheet portlet.

4) In the Cost Worksheet portlet, click Customize.

5) In the Customize Dashboard Cost Worksheet dialog box, click the Columns tab.

Columns Tab of the Customize Project Issues Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to configure options for modifying displayed columns.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

629

Screen Elements

Select the custom columns to display area

The area where you can configure which columns display. See Configuring Columns

or Values.

Sort by list

Determines the column sort criteria.

Sort Order list

Determines how columns are sorted.

Default button

Changes all fields to default settings.

Getting Here

From the Issues page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, click Customize.

4) In the Customize Project Issues dialog box, click the Columns tab.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Issues portlet and click Customize.

4) In the Customize Project Issues dialog box, click the Columns tab.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Issues portlet and click Customize.

4) In the Customize My Issues dialog box, click the Columns tab.

Columns Tab of the Customize Project Statistics Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to configure columns for the Project Statistics portlet.

Screen Elements

See Common Screen Elements for Customizing Columns or Values (on page 634).

630

Sort by list

Determines the column sort criteria.

Sort Order list

Determines how columns are sorted.

Getting Here

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, click Customize.

4) On the Customize page, click the Content tab and expand the Project Performance

section.

5) In the Project Performance section, expand Project Statistics and click Customize

Columns.

6) In the Customize Project Statistics dialog box, click the Columns tab.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, click Customize.

4) On the Dashboard Details page, click the Content tab and expand the Project

Performance section.

5) In the Project Performance section, expand Project Statistics and click Customize.

6) In the Customize Project Statistics dialog box, click the Columns tab.

Columns Tab of the Customize Project View Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to modify the the columns of your project view.

Screen Elements

Available Columns list

The list of columns available for display. Double-clicking a column in the Available

Columns list moves it to the Selected Columns list.

Selected Columns list

The columns you selected from the Available Columns list. Double-clicking a column

in the Selected Columns list removes it from the list. See Configuring Columns or

Values, for help configuring the list of selected columns.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

631

Column Options section:

Sort by list

The element used to sort items in the table and Gantt chart.

Sort Order list

Determines whether the application sorts values in ascending or descending order.

Show first column as list

The list of fields names to use as the first or first and second columns in the view.

Font field

The font, size, and style from the Table Font dialog box. These configurable options will

be applied to the columns.

Tips

For a full list of available columns, see Available Columns of the EPS Page (on page 1223).

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a view from the EPS View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Project View dialog box, click the Columns tab.

Columns Tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the Assignments

Page

Overview

Use this tab to modify the columns available in the assignments view.

Screen Elements

Available Columns list

The list of columns available for display. Double-clicking a column in the Available

Columns list moves it to the Selected Columns list.

Selected Columns list

The columns you selected from the Available Columns list. Double-clicking a column

in the Selected Columns list removes it from the list. See Configuring Columns or

Values, for help configuring the list of selected columns.

632

Customizing Columns

See Customize Columns or Values.

Column Options area

Provides options that affect the display of columns and the content you choose to

present.

Sort by list

The element used to sort items in the table and Gantt chart.

Sort Order list

Determines whether the application sorts values in ascending or descending order.

Show first column as list

The list of fields names to use as the first or first and second columns in the view.

Font field

The font, size, and style from the Table Font dialog box. These configurable options will

be applied to the columns.

Tips

For a full list of available columns, see Available Columns of the Assignments Page (on

page 1213).

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click View and select Customize View.

4) In the Customize Resource Assignments View dialog box, click the Columns tab.

Columns Tab of the Customize Risks Portlet Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to configure the columns in the My Risks portlet on a dashboard or the

Project Risks portlet on a project workspace.

Screen Elements

Customize Columns area

See Configuring Columns or Values.

Getting Here

From the Dashboards page:

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

633

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the My Risks portlet and click Customize.

4) In the Customize Risks dialog box, click the Columns tab.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Risks portlet and click Customize.

4) In the Customize Risks dialog box, click the Columns tab.

Columns Tab of the Customize Scorecards Dialog Box of the Portfolio Views Section of the

Customize Dashboard Page

Overview

Use this tab to configure the display of columns in a scorecard portfolio view.

Screen Elements

Select the custom columns to display area

Configure the columns to display in the scorecard. See Configuring Columns or

Values.

Sort by list

Determines the column sort criteria.

Sort Order list

Determines whether the application sorts values in ascending or descending order.

Show Project Requests option

Determines whether to analyze potential projects along with approved projects in the

scorecard. If you select this option, only a limited number of columns will display

values for the requested projects. If you choose to show requested projects, they will

not be included in a scorecard if the page on which you are viewing the scorecard is

filtered by a portfolio. Filter by code or EPS element instead to view project requests.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, click Customize.

4) On the Dashboard Details page, click the Content tab.

5) On the Content tab, expand the Portfolio Views section and expand a view.

634

6) In the view section, select Scorecard from the Type list and click Customize.

7) In the Customize Scorecard dialog box, click the Columns tab.

Columns Tab of the Customize Spreadsheet Dialog Box of the Planning Page

Overview

Use the Columns tab of the Customize Spreadsheet dialog box to modify which columns

are viewed in the Planning spreadsheet. See Customize Columns or Values for further

details.

Screen Elements

Available Columns list

The list of columns available for display. Double-clicking a column in the Available

Columns list moves it to the Selected Columns list.

Selected Columns list

The columns you selected from the Available Columns list. Double-clicking a column

in the Selected Columns list removes it from the list. See Configuring Columns or

Values, for help configuring the list of selected columns.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Planning.

3) On the Planning page, click the Customize link.

4) In the Customize Spreadsheet dialog box, click the Columns tab.

Common Screen Elements for Customizing Columns or Values

Overview

When the list of available fields or columns for a table is relatively long, use the set of

screen elements described below to customize them. Essentially, you move the items you

want from the available side to the selected side.

This common set of controls appears throughout the application and offers similar

functionality for customizing the fields, columns, or values you want to add or remove

from a list, table, view, scorecard, or other entity.

Screen Elements

Available columns or values

The list of all the available fields or values for the item you are configuring. If arranged

in a hierarchy, click to expand a group and view its sub-items.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

635

Selected columns or values

The list of selected fields or values you want to appear in your customized list, table,

view, scorecard, or other entity. The order of the items in the list from top to bottom

corresponds to their order in the table from left to right.

Select Items (Ctrl+Alt+Right Arrow)

Adds the selected item or items from the available list to the selected list.

Deselect Items (Ctrl+Alt+Left Arrow)

Removes the selected item or items from the selected list.

Move Item Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up Arrow)

Advances the selected item up in the sequence (moves a table column to the left).

Move Item Up (Ctrl+Alt+Down Arrow)

Advances the selected item down in sequence (moves a table column to the right).

Communication Center Portlet of the Dashboards Page

Overview

Use this portlet to communicate with other users who are associated with a project. All of

your associated projects are listed in the portlet. You can communicate with all or only

select project team members.

Screen Elements

Name field

The project name. The arrow displays the associated user name or resource name for

project team members.

Office Phone field

The office phone number for the resource.

Project association field

The team member's association with the project.

E-Mail tab

Displays the Send an e-mail link.

Send an e-mail link

Sends an e-mail to the resource team.

The link displays a dialog box that displays the e-mail address(es) of the selected

team members and allows for you to enter alternate e-mail addresses in the Cc field.

636

Tips

The "No information is available" message displays in this portlet if no project teams or

team members meet the filtering criteria specified for a dashboard or Project

Workspace.

Click a project name link to open its activities page.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Communication Center portlet.

Communication Center Portlet of the Workspace Page

Overview

Use this portlet to share data and communicate with other P6 users who are associated

with a project, including the project owner. All projects you are associated with are listed

in the portlet; you can select to communicate with all of a project's team members or

with members you select.

Screen Elements

Name field

The project name and the user's Personal Name or Resource Name for Project Team

Members.

Office Phone field

The office phone number for the resource.

Project association field

The team member's association with the project.

Send an e-mail link

Sends an e-mail to the resource team.

The link displays a dialog box that displays the e-mail address(es) of the selected

team members and allows for you to enter alternate e-mail addresses in the Cc field.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Communication Center portlet.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

637

Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page

Overview

Use this tab to configure which portlets display on the dashboard. What information the

portlets contain is also defined on this tab.

Screen Elements

Click one of the links below for detailed screen definitions.

General Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page (on page

798)

Portfolio Views Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page

Project Performance Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard

Page

Workflow Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page (on page

1166)

Resources Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page (on page

1029)

Personal Information Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page

(on page 1299)

Custom Portlets Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page (on

page 661)

Contract Management Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard

Page (on page 645)

Tips

You cannot customize a multi-user dashboard created by another user.

The options that display in the General section of the Content tab are dependent on

the user access settings you specify on the Access tab; therefore, if you need to

change settings on both the Content and Access tabs, you should change the

Access tab first.

By default, you can select up to 12 portlets on a single dashboard.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, click Customize.

4) On the Dashboard Details page, click the Content tab.

638

Content Tab of the Customize Workgroup Workspace Page

Overview

Use this tab to customize the content that is available on the Workgroup Workspace

page.

Screen Elements

Issues option

Determines whether associated issues of the selected workgroup are displayed. See

Customize Project Issues Dialog Box (on page 686) for further details.

Activities option

Determines whether activities associated with the selected workgroup are displayed.

Workgroup Name field

The name of the selected workgroup. Click a name to open the Workgroup

Workspace for that workgroup.

Maximum number of rows displayed in Workgroup lists field

The maximum number of rows displayed in a workgroup list. If the number of rows in a

portlet exceeds the number specified in the 'Maximum number of rows displayed in

Workgroup lists' field, Prev and Next links appear.

Last modified by < > on < > field

The name of the user who last modified the information on the Content tab and the

date and time of modification.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Workgroups portlet and select a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, click Customize.

5) On the Customize page, click the Content tab.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Workgroups portlet and select a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, click Customize.

5) On the Customize page, click the Content tab.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

639

Content Tab of the User Interface View Details Page

Overview

Use this tab to configure the menu items, pages, and dashboards users of the current

user interface view are permitted to view.

Screen Elements

User Interface View Name field

The unique name for the User Interface View. The naming scheme you choose for user

interface views might reflect the roles or permissions of their intended users. For

example, Intern, Associate, Project Staff, Manager, and Executive are all possible user

interface view names in a series offering distinct but sometimes overlapping access to

menus and pages.

Administer section

Enables you to customize which administrative functions you can access from the

Administer menu.

Menu Items options

Determines which Administer menu items you can access. By selecting the Menu

Items option itself, you can access all menu items.

Application Settings: Enables your organization to define a series of

application-wide parameters and values that apply globally and to set defaults

and settings that affect how the application behaves. For example, configure

general application settings including calendar and activity duration defaults,

URLs for related applications, summarization time periods (also used to store past

period performance actuals), and also enable the optional password policy

setting.

Enterprise Data: Enables you to define series of application-wide data that apply

to all projects. For example, you can set global data, such as currencies and

financial periods; project data, such as baseline types and funding sources;

activity data, such as activity codes and step templates; resource data, such as

rate types and units of measure; risk data, such as risk categories and scoring

matrices; issue data, such as issue codes and UDFs; and document data, such as

document categories and statuses.

User Access: Enables you to create user accounts, assign access, manage the

organizational breakdown structure (OBS) and configure profiles.

User Interface Views: Enables you to create pre-configured sets of options you

assign to users so their view of Dashboards, Portfolios, Projects, Resources, and

Administration is optimized for their role. User interface views permit visibility to

features essential for a user's role while hiding functionality that is not applicable.

640

Dashboards section

Enables you to customize which functions you can access from the Dashboards

menu.

Menu Items options

Determines which functions you can access under the Dashboards menu. By

selecting the Menu Items option itself, you can acccess all menu items.

Manage Dashboards: Enables you to access Dashboards, which are customizable

pages consisting of the data you need to perform your role. Dashboard data

appears in one or more smaller regions called portlets.

Approve Timesheets: Enables you to approve timesheets submitted through P6

Progress Reporter. Timesheets allow users to record hours for assigned activities.

Displayed Dashboards option

Lists the dashboards you can access, based on what your P6 administrator assigned

to you.

Assign link

Allows the administrator to assign Global or Multiple User dashboards to the user

interface view.

Remove link

Allows the administrator to remove dashboards from the user's view.

Move Down

Moves the selected item one level down in the sort order.

Move Up

Moves the selected item one level up in the sort order.

Portfolios section

Enables you to customize which functions you can access from the Portfolios

menu and which pages you can access within the Portfolios section.

Menu Items option

Determines which functions you can access from the Portfolios menu. By

selecting the Menu Items option itself, you can acccess all menu items.

Manage Portfolio Views: Enables you to create, modify, and delete portfolio views.

A portfolio view is a scorecard or chart providing high-level information spanning

an entire group of projects.

Manage Scenarios: Enables you to create, modify, or delete scenarios, and

determine who can access them. A scenario is a snapshot of historical project

data; you can use it to compare against the latest summarized data, or to

compare to other scenarios.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

641

Open Portfolio: Enables you to open a group of projects by EPS, code, or portfolio.

Manage Portfolios: Enables you to review the list of projects in each portfolio, and

to create, modify, and delete portfolios.

Pages option

Determines which pages you can access. If you select the Pages option itself, you

can access all pages.

Portfolio Analysis: Use this page to analyze portfolio data, conduct side-by-side

comparisons of two project groups, and apply what-if scenarios and waterline

analysis techniques to assist with executive-level critical decision making.

Capacity Planning: Use this page to analyze role allocation and cost over time.

Performance Status: Use this page to display summarized schedule and cost or

labor unit data based on the performance metric you select.

Gantt Chart: Use this page to display timescaled performance or earned value

schedule information at the WBS level, along with unit or cost data, in a

spreadsheet or histogram.

ROI: Use this page to display cost/benefit information based on live data for the

open project group.

Details: Use this page to modify a group of projects, called a portfolio.

Projects section

Enables you to customize which functions you can access from the Projects

menu and which pages you can access within the Projects section.

Menu Items option

Determines which functions you can access from the Projects menu. By

selecting the Menu Items option itself, you can acccess all menu items.

Open Projects: Enables you to open projects by EPS, project code, or portfolio.

Enterprise Project Data: Enables you to configure project-related enterprise

project for your entire organization.

Scheduled Services: Enables you to schedule, verify status, modify, and delete

routine recurring project management jobs, called services.

Pages option

Determines which pages you can access. If you select the Pages option itself, you

can access all pages.

EPS: Use this page to manage the Enterprise Project Structure (EPS) and its projects.

The EPS page displays schedules for any single project or group of projects you

choose with detail windows, a Gantt chart, and a table.

Activities: Use this page as your central project management tool for all project

activities and their associated details. This includes all WBS elements, activities,

steps, issues, notebooks, resource assignments, risks, and other details.

642

Workspace: Use this page to view information specific to each project, including

project management and project performance information.

Team Usage: Use this page to view cost or usage data at the team level and for

individual roles and resources assigned to the project you are working with.

Issues: Use this page to view a list or chart of all the issues for the currently open

projects or portfolios.

Documents:

With a content repository enabled: Use this page to view, check in, check

out, and download selected documents from one or more projects,

associate additional items with a selected document, and compare

documents across projects.

Without a content repository enabled: Use this page to view document

details and send e-mail about a document.

Risks: Use this page to add, modify, or delete project risks.

Resources section

Enables you to customize which functions you can access from the Resources

menu and which pages you can access within the Resources section.

Menu Items option

Determines whether to display the Resources menu, which provides the option to

view the Enterprise Resource Data page.

Pages option

Determines which pages you can access. If you select the Pages option itself, you

can access all pages.

Administration: Use this page to create, modify, and delete resources, resource

teams, roles, and role teams.

Planning: Use the Resource Planning spreadsheet on the Planning page to specify,

review, or modify project-level and WBS-level allocation data for individual

resources and roles across a project lifecycle.

Assignments: Use this page to view and modify resource assignment data using

filters, which enables you to view resource assignment data for only the resources

or projects that you need to view.

Analysis: Use this page to compare resource utilization between resource teams,

project resources, and department resource, all from one central location.

Getting Here

To modify an existing user interface view:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Interface Views.

2) On the User Interface Views page, click a View.

3) On the Details of page, click the Content tab.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

643

To modify a new user interface view:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Interface Views.

2) On the User Interface Views page, click Create User Interface View.

3) In the Copy from Existing User Interface View dialog box, click New User Interface

View or an existing view and click OK.

4) On the Create User Interface View page, click the Content tab.

Content Tab of the Workspace Details Page

Overview

Use this tab to customize the content that is available on the Workspace page.

Screen Elements

Project section

See Project Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Workspace Page (on page

967).

Contract Management section

See Contract Management Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Workspace

Page (on page 646).

Custom Portlets section

See Custom Portlet Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Workspace Page (see

"Custom Portlet Section of the Content Tab of the Workspace Page" on page 661).

Performance Threshold section

See Performance Threshold Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Workspace

Page (see "Performance Threshold Section of the Content Tab of the Workspace Page"

on page 918).

Project Collaboration section

See Project Collaboration Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Workspace

Page (see "Project Collaboration Section of the Content Tab of the Workspace Details

Page" on page 954).

Project Performance section

See Project Performance Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Workspace

Page.

Maximum number of rows displayed in project workspace lists field

The maximum number of rows you want to appear in Project Workspace portlet lists.

When a list contains more rows than the number specified, Prev and Next links will

appear. The default setting is 10 rows.

644

Note: Some portlets do not adhere to this setting and instead use scroll bars to include

more data than will fit in an alloted space.

Last modified by < > on < > field

The name of the user who last modified the information on the Content tab and the

date and time of modification.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, click Customize.

4) On the Customize page, click the Content tab.

Contract Documents Portlet of the Workspace Page

Overview

Available only in environments integrating P6 with Contract Management, this portlet

displays document types, such as change orders or contracts, from Contract

Management. Select a document type and log in to access the document or create a

new document.

Screen Elements

Contract Documents portlet

Click the document name to open the document in Contract Management, which

will open in a new browser. This information can be accessed with a valid user name

and password.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Contract Documents portlet.

Contract Issues Portlet of the Workspace Page

Overview

The Contract Issues portlet displays the number of issues based on status that exist for the

project in Contract Management. If you have a valid user name and password, you can

additionally access Contract Management from this portlet to view detailed information

about issues for a specific status.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

645

Screen Elements

Contract Issues portlet

The Contract Issues portlet displays current issues, including the number of new and

closed issues. Place the cursor over a section of the chart to display the number of

issues for that type.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Contract Issues portlet.

Contract Management Page of the Project Preferences Dialog Box

Overview

Use this page to link the selected project to a Contract Management project.

Screen Elements

Group Name: Project Name field

The name of the Contract Management project.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Set Project Preferences....

4) In the Project Preferences dialog box, click Contract Management in the Project

Preferences pane.

Contract Management Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page

Overview

Use this section to enable and configure the Cost Worksheet portlet in the currently

selected dashboard.

Screen Elements

Cost Worksheet option

Determines whether to display the Cost Worksheet portlet. Use the following

configurable options to modify this portlet:

Customize link: Displays a dialog box with configurable options for modifying the

spreadsheet columns and grouping displayed in the Cost Worksheet portlet.

646

Allow Team Members to view this section option: Determines whether to allow

users with a Team Member module access setting to view this section.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, click the Customize link.

4) On the Customize Dashboard page, expand the Contract Management section.

Contract Management Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Workspace Page

Overview

Use this section to customize which portlets relating to Contract Management will

appear on the Workspace page.

Screen Elements

Contract Issues option

Determines whether to display the Contract Issues portlet. Use the following

configurable options to modify this portlet:

Customize link: Displays a dialog box with configurable options for modifying the

Issues chart displayed in the Contract Issues portlet.

Allow Team Members to view this section option: Determines whether to allow

users with a Team Member module access setting to view this section.

Contract Documents option

Determines whether to display the Contract Documents portlet. Use the following

configurable options to modify this portlet:

Customize link: Displays a dialog box with configurable options for selecting

documents displayed in the Contract Documents portlet.

Allow Team Members to view this section option: Determines whether to allow

users with a Team Member module access setting to view this section.

Contract Reports option

Determines whether to display the Contract Reports portlet. Use the following

configurable options to modify this portlet:

Customize link: Displays a dialog box with configurable options for selecting

reports displayed in the Contract Reports portlet.

Allow Team Members to view this section option: Determines whether to allow

users with a Team Member module access setting to view this section.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

647

Cost Worksheet option

Determines whether to display the Cost Worksheet portlet. Use the following

configurable options to modify this portlet:

Customize link: Displays a dialog box with configurable options for modifying the

spreadsheet columns and grouping displayed in the Cost Worksheet portlet.

Allow Team Members to view this section option: Determines whether to allow

users with a Team Member module access setting to view this section.

Request for Information (RFI) option

Determines whether to display the Request for Information (RFI) portlet. Use the

following configurable options to modify this portlet:

Customize link: Displays a dialog box with configurable options for modifying the

Request for Information chart displayed in the portlet.

Allow Team Members to view this section option: Determines whether to allow

users with a Team Member module access setting to view this section.

RFI Turnaround Time option

Determines whether to display the RFI Turnaround Time portlet. Use the following

configurable options to modify this portlet:

Customize link: Displays a dialog box with configurable options for modifying the

RFI Turnaround Time chart displayed in the portlet.

Allow Team Members to view this section option: Determines whether to allow

users with a Team Member module access setting to view this section.

Safety option

Determines whether to display the Safety portlet. Use the following configurable

options to modify this portlet:

Customize: Displays a dialog box with configurable options for modifying the

Safety chart displayed in the portlet.

Allow Team Members to view this section: Determines whether to allow users with a

Team Member module access setting to view this section.

Submittals option

Determines whether to display the Submittals portlet. Use the following configurable

options to modify this portlet:

Customize link: Displays a dialog box with configurable options for modifying the

Submittals chart displayed in the portlet.

Allow Team Members to view this section option: Determines whether to allow

users with a Team Member module access setting to view this section.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

648

3) On the Workspace page, click Customize.

4) On the Customize Workspace page, click the Content tab and expand the Contract

Management area.

Contract Reports Portlet of the Workspace Page

Overview

Use this portlet to view reports from Contract Management. Available only in

environments integrating P6 with Contract Management, this portlet displays reports from

Contract Management. If you have a valid user name and password for the Contract

Management, click any one of these reports to open it directly from the workspace.

Screen Elements

Contract Reports portlet

Click a report name to open the report in Contract Management which will display in

a new browser. This information can only be accessed if you have a valid user name

and password.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Contract Reports portlet.

Copy Project Options Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to select the project data that will be copied along with the project.

Screen Elements

Project & WBS Data options:

Documents option

Determines whether or not to copy document data to the project.

Funding Sources option

Determines whether to copy funding source data to the project or template.

Issues option

Determines whether or not to copy issue data to the project.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

649

Risks option

Determines whether or not to copy risk data to the project or template.

Activities option

Determines whether to copy activity data to the project or template.

Notebooks option

Determines whether to copy project notebook data to the project or template.

WBS Milestones option

Determines whether to copy WBS milestone data to the project or template.

High Level Resource Planning Assignments option

Determines whether to copy high-level resource planning assignment data to the

project.

Reports option

Determines whether to copy report data to the project.

Summary Data option

Determines whether to copy summary data to the project.

Activity Data options:

Activity Codes option

Determines whether or not to copy activity code data to the project or template.

Expenses option

Determines whether to copy expense data to the project or template.

Activity Notebooks option

Determines whether to copy activity notebook data to the project or template.

Relationships option

Determines whether to copy relationship data to the project or template.

Resource and Role Assignments option

Determines whether or not to copy resources and role assignment data to the project

or template.

Steps option

Determines whether to copy step data to the project or template.

Financial Period Data option

Determines whether to copy financial period data to the project.

650

Baselines options:

Select the Include option for each baseline with data that you want to copy to the

project.

Tips

You can also select the Copy option from the Edit menu. The same is true when

pasting the project.

You can only copy and paste one project at a time. Once you have pasted a

project, Paste is disabled. To paste the project again, you must copy the project

again.

The project will be pasted wherever you right-click and select Paste.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Right-click a project to copy and select Copy (Ctrl+C).

b. Right-click and select Paste (Ctrl+V).

Cost Accounts Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure cost accounts.

Screen Elements

Cost Accounts toolbar

See Enterprise Data Cost Accounts Toolbar (on page 1260).

ID field

The ID you assign to the cost account.

Name field

The name you assign to the cost account. Cost accounts are established in a

hierarchy. For example, if you created a cost account for a project component such

as hardware, you would create other cost accounts beneath this component to

show its parts such as coding and installation.

Description field

The description of each corresponding cost account.

Description detail Window

See Description Detail Window of the Cost Accounts Page (on page 709).

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

651

Tips

By clicking ID, Name, or Description, the fields can be arranged in an ascending,

descending, or the standard order of creation for each.

Right-click in any field to display the options to Add, Add Child, Delete, Cut, Copy,

Paste, Find, and Find Next.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Cost Accounts.

Cost Worksheet Portlet

Overview

Use this portlet to view cost data for all linked projects. Available only in environments

integrating P6 with Contract Management. This enables you to have a more complete

view of projects and their contract status.

Screen Elements

Cost Worksheet

The central location where costing information can be collected and tracked in

addition to quickly reviewing the financial status of the project.

The Cost Worksheet tracks costs distributed from contracts, Purchase Orders,

requisitions, Proposals, Change Orders, and trends. Use the Cost Worksheet to closely

track budgeted costs, committed costs, actual expenditures, and budget revisions

caused by changes in Contract Management.

Customize link

Displays a dialog box or page that allows you to configure the current page, tab,

dialog box, or portlet. See Customize Cost Worksheet Dialog Box (on page 674).

Tips

If you have the required privilege, you can customize the Cost Worksheet portlet to

specify up to twenty columns to appear in the portlet. These are in addition to the

default Cost Code column.

Getting Here

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

652

3) On the Workspace page, select a project from the Select Project list and expand the

Cost Worksheet portlet.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the Cost Worksheet portlet.

Count Dialog Box of the Users Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to view the number of users assigned to each module.

Screen Elements

Export to Excel

Exports all data as it appears in the current view to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet

(.xls) file. Customize the rows to display only the data you want to export.

Print

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Module field

The name of each module. This field is read-only.

User Count field

The User Count for each module. This field is read-only. You can also use the Users

dialog box to quickly display the number of users assigned to access each P6 EPPM

module. This will be help track how many licenses are assigned to P6 EPPM since the

removal of the license file constraint.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Users.

3) On the Users tab, click Count.

Create Filter Dialog Box of the Assignments Page

Overview

Use the Create Filter dialog box of the Assignments page to define criteria and user

access for a new filter.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

653

Screen Elements

Name field

The name of the new or selected filter.

Create Filter dialog box tabs:

Definition Tab of the Create Filter Dialog Box of the Assignments Page (on page 706)

Access Tab of the Create Filter Dialog Box of the Assignments Page (on page 535)

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click Filters menu on the view toolbar or view menu

and select Add New Filter.

Create or Modify Filter Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to define the criteria and user access for a new filter.

Screen Elements

Name field

The name of the new or selected filter.

Definition tab

See Definition Tab of the Create or Modify Filter Dialog Box of the Activities Page (see

"Definition Tab of the Create or Modify Filter Dialog Box" on page 707).

Access tab

See Access Tab of the Create or Modify Filter Dialog Box of the Activities Page (see

"Access Tab of the Create or Modify Filter Dialog Box" on page 535).

Getting Here

To access the Create Filter dialog box:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select a view from the Activity View list.

b. Click View the menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View dialog box, click the Filters tab.

654

5) On the Filters tab, click Add New Filter.

To access the Modify Filter dialog box:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select a view from the Activity View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View dialog box, click the Filters tab.

5) On the Filters tab, select a filter and click Modify Filter.

Create Portfolio Page

Overview

Use this page to create and configure a group of projects, called a portfolio. Use

portfolios to group multiple projects spanning EPS and project code boundaries that are

most relevant to you so you can review and analyze data at a summary level. You can

even create portfolios of other portfolios.

Screen Elements

Portfolio Name field

The unique name of the project portfolio according to its access type, user specific or

global.

For example, two users could have a portfolio with the same name, but no two global

portfolios can have the same name.

Manage this portfolio options

Manually option

By Filter option

This portfolio is available to options

Choose a user access option for the portfolio.

Current User: Only you, the currently logged in user, will be able to view this

portfolio.

All Users: Every user will be able to view this global portfolio.

Another User: Only the user you select will be able to view this portfolio.

Project Selection area

For manually managed portfolios, use this area to configure the projects in your

portfolio. Move projects from the Available Projects side to the Selected Projects side.

See Customize Columns or Values.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

655

If By Filter option is chosen under the Manage this Portfolio field, the following options

appear:

Select Filter Criteria

Select from one of the following options:

All of the following: Only projects meeting all the filter criteria will be included in the

portfolio.

Any of the following: Projects meeting any one of the filter criteria will be included

in the portfolio.

Parameter field

A field from one of the following options:

General

User Defined Fields

Project Codes

Is field

Select from one of the following options:

equals

is not equal to

Getting Here

1) Click the Portfolios menu and choose Manage Portfolios.

2) On the Manage Portfolios page, click the Create Project Portfolio link.

Critical Activities Behind Schedule Portlet of the Workspace Page

Overview

Use this portlet to view all project activities identified as critical. This means they have zero

or negative float, a zero or negative finish date variance, and are behind schedule for

the project.

Screen Elements

Activity indicator

A visual indicator of the activity type and its current status within the WBS or project.

Possible indicators include:

The activity has not yet started.

The activity has started and is in progress.

The activity has finished.

The activity has been identified as critical.

The activity is a milestone.

656

Activity field

The name of the activity.

Days Late field

The number of workperiods that an activity has been delayed.

Total Float field

The number of workperiods that an activity can be delayed without affecting the

project finish date.

Tips

When you schedule the project, critical activities are identified according to the

scheduling options you select. You can identify critical activities using a total float

threshold, the longest path of activities in the schedule, or multiple critical float paths.

A "No information is available" message appears when a project baseline has not

been specified, the current project is set as the project baseline, or there are no

critical activities behind schedule.

Click an activity name to views its details.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Critical Activities behind Schedule portlet.

Currencies Page

Overview

Use this page to configure the monetary unit or base currency used to store cost data for

all projects in the database. You can also add and configure monetary units on this

page.

Screen Elements

Currencies toolbar

See Currencies Toolbar (see "Enterprise Data Currencies Toolbar" on page 1261).

Base Exchange Rate field

Displays the exchange rate between the selected currency and the base currency.

The exchange rate for the base currency is always 1.0. When a user selects a different

currency than the base currency to view cost data, the base currency value is

multiplied times the current exchange rate for the view currency to calculate the

values displayed in cost and price fields.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

657

For example, if the base currency is U.S. Dollars, the view currency is Euros, and the

exchange rate for Euros is .75, a value of $10 stored in the database is displayed as 7.5

Euros in cost and price fields. Similarly, if you enter 7.5 Euros in a cost or price field, it is

stored in the database as $10.

Currency Symbol field

The symbol used to define the currency. Double-click to edit. Allows one to three

non-numeric characters or symbols.

Decimal Digits field

The number of decimal places the currency will show. Double-click to edit.

Decimal Symbol field

The symbol used for decimal places. Click the arrow to choose period or comma.

Digit Grouping System field

The available options to group digits. Click the arrow to choose period or comma.

ID field

The abbreviation (ID) for the currency. Double-click to edit. This field allows one to six

alpha-numeric characters or symbols. The characters must be in uppercase.

Name field

The name chosen for the currency. Double-click to edit. This field allows 1-80

alpha-numeric characters or symbols.

Negative Format field

The format used to show the currency value as negative. Click the arrow to choose a

negative format.

Positive Format field

The format used to show the currency value as positive. Click the arrow to choose a

positive format.

Tips

The base currency is the monetary unit used to store cost data for all projects in the

database and is controlled by a global administrative setting in P6. The default base

currency for P6 EPPM is US dollars ($). The view currency is the monetary unit used to

display cost data in P6 EPPM and is controlled by a user preference.

The exchange rate for the base currency is always 1.0. When a user selects a different

currency than the base currency to view cost data, the base currency value is multiplied

times the current exchange rate for the view currency to calculate the values displayed

in cost and price fields.

658

For example, if the base currency is U.S. Dollars, the view currency is Euros, and the

exchange rate for Euros is .75, a value of $10 stored in the database is displayed as 7.5

Euros in cost and price fields. Similarly, if you enter 7.5 Euros in a cost or price field, it is

stored in the database as $10.

When data is displayed in a view currency that is different than the base currency, some

cost and price values can vary slightly (e.g., due to rounding). As long as the correct

base currency is selected during database installation, a user can view completely

accurate cost and price data by changing the view currency to match the base

currency.

For information on adding view currencies, refer to Adding a Currency.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Currencies.

Currency Section of Global Tab of the My Preferences Page

Overview

Use this section to specify a currency type, symbol, and number of decimal places to be

used throughout the application.

Screen Elements

Currency field

The preferred currency for viewing cost data.

Show decimal places option

Determines whether to display decimal places.

Show currency symbol option

Determines whether to display the chosen currency symbol.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab, expand the Currency section.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

659

Curve Definition Detail Window of the Resource Curves Page

Overview

Use this detail window to view and configure the graphical representation of the

selected resource curve. Resource curves allow the user to specify the allocation of

resources and costs over the duration of an activity. Resource units and costs are

distributed evenly throughout an activity unless you specify nonlinear distribution using

resource curves. You can add a new curve, which is based on the default linear curve, or

copy and modify one of the default resource curves or an existing Global curve to

create a custom global resource curve.

Screen Elements

Prorate

Prorate allows you to adjust values in the curve window proportionally to retain the

curve's shape while making the bars equal to 100%. If the curve does not equal 100%,

the curve will automatically prorate when you click save.

Getting Here

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Resource Curves.

3) On the Resource Curves page, click the Curves Definition detail window.

Custom Field Mapping Tab of the Modify Template Dialog Box of the Import/Export Project

Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to customize field mappings for imports and exports.

Screen Elements

Select Subject Area list

Determines the area of the product for which you want to define custom field

mappings.

Project Management field list

The user defined field to map to the Microsoft Project field.

Microsoft Project field list

The field from Microsoft Project for which you can map to a user defined field in P6.

(This field is read-only.)

660

Tips

The Import or Export Type must be set as Microsoft Project XML (2007) to enable the

options icons.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export XML Project

Import/Export.

4) In the Import/Export Project dialog box, click the Import or Export tab.

5) On the Import or Export tab:

a. Select Microsoft Project XML (2007) from the Import or Export Type list.

b. Click MSP Export Template Options or MSP Import Template Options.

6) In the Modify Template dialog box, click the Custom Field Mapping tab.

Custom Portlet

Overview

Use this portlet as a convenient access point to frequently used web sites, intranets, and

other online data.

Screen Elements

Title field

The name you assign to a custom portlet when it is configured. This title appears on

the dashboard or workspace to identify the portlet.

URL content

The content associated with the URL you specified for this custom portlet.

Getting Here

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Custom portlet.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Custom portlet.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

661

Custom Portlet Section of the Content Tab of the Workspace Page

Overview

Use this area to create custom portlets in the workspace.

Screen Elements

Add link

Adds a new portlet ready for customization.

Custom Portlet option

Determines whether to display a specific title and URL as the content of a custom

portlet in a dashboard.

Title field: The name that displays in the title bar of the custom portlet.

URL field: The URL of the interface for the custom portlet.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, click Customize.

4) On the Customize page, click the Content tab.

5) On the Content tab, expand the Custom Portlets area.

Custom Portlets Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page

Overview

Use this section to create and modify portlets that link out to URLs that you specify.

Screen Elements

Add link

Adds a new portlet ready for customization.

Custom Portlet option

Determines whether to display a specific title and URL as the content of a custom

portlet in a dashboard.

Title field: The name that displays in the title bar of the custom portlet.

URL field: The URL of the interface for the custom portlet.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

662

3) On the dashboard, click the Customize link.

4) On the Dashboard Details page, click the Content tab.

5) On the Content tab, expand the Custom Portlets section.

Customize Activity List for WBS Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to configure the columns you want to view on the Activities for WBS

dialog box from within a portfolio view of type scorecard.

Screen Elements

Available Columns

A list of the fields or columns available for you to select for the view or list you are

customizing.

Selected Columns

The fields or columns you have selected in order of importance.

Getting Here

1) Open a portfolio in the Portfolios section using one of the following methods:

Click Portfolios to open the last portfolio you were working with.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose one of the most-recently used

portfolios.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose Open Portfolio to select a group of

projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Portfolio Analysis.

3) On the Portfolio Analysis page, select a scorecard from the View field.

4) In the scorecard, select a WBS.

5) In the Activities column, click the View link.

6) On the Activity List for WBS dialog box, click Customize.

Customize Activity Network Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to configure the displayed information on the Activity Network page.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

663

Screen Elements

Activity Box section:

Split Row option

Determines whether to display two fields for the row in the activity box. Selecting the

option causes the Second field lists to become active.

Each activity box contains four rows by default. Each row can be divided into two

sections, allowing for up to eight fields to be displayed per activity box. Click the lists

to select the content to be displayed.

Field lists

Determines what will display in the first four rows of the activity box.

Second field lists

The options to be used as the four possible secondary fields that display in an activity

box when the Split Row option is selected for a row.

Preview section

The beforehand look at the composition of the activity box. The options and list values

you select in the Activity Box section affect what is displayed in this section.

Options section:

Expand Grouping Bands to Level list

The value to expand up to 20 or all grouping bands.

Show Only Driving Relationships option

Determines whether to show only driving relationships between activities in the

Activity Network. When this option is not selected, the application will display all

relationships between activities in the Activity Network.

Show Progress option

Determines whether to display progress by marking an X on completed activities or

projects and a slash (\) on those in progress.

Tips

You must be in the Activity Network view for the Activity Network Options option to be

enabled.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

664

a. Select a view from the Activity View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Activity Network Options....

Customize Activity View Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to customize Activity View settings including columns, grouping, filters,

bars, Gantt chart, Activity Network, and access for a new or existing view.

Screen Elements

View Name field

The name of the selected view.

The view is determined by your selection in the View list.

Columns tab

See Columns Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box (on page 627).

Grouping tab

See Grouping Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box (on page 824).

Filters tab

See Filters Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box (on page 771).

Bars tab

See Bars Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box (on page 591).

Gantt Chart tab

See Gantt Chart Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box (on page 779).

Activity Network tab

See Activity Network Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box (on page 561).

Access tab

See Access Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box (on page 536).

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select a view from the Activity View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

665

Customize Capacity Planning Chart Tab

Overview

Use this tab to set options for the Gantt chart and Capacity Planning chart. In the

Timescale section, choose the timescale interval you want to display in both charts.

Screen Elements

Display list

Determines whether the chart will be displayed by Costs or Units.

Display usage across options

Select from one of the following options in which to display usage across:

selected projects option

all projects (excluding what-if projects) option

Show Limit option

Determines whether to show the limit.

Show Allocation Limit option

Determines whether to show the allocation limit.

Show 3-D option

Determines whether to display the chart in 3-D.

Color Theme list

Determines whether the chart will display with a pastel or primary color theme.

Timescale list

Determines the timescale. Select from the following intervals:

Year/Month

Year/Quarter

Quarter/Month

Month/Week

Financial Period

The available timescale options are determined by the selected summarization

option on the General tab of the Application Settings page. The calendar timescale

options are only available if the By Calendar option is selected. The Financial Period

option is only available if the By Financial Periods option is selected. If both options are

selected, you can select from a calendar or financial period timescale.

666

Tips

You can also customize the page to display allocation in the Capacity Planning chart

for all projects in the database, rather than for the projects you select in the

scorecard.

Getting Here

1) Open a portfolio in the Portfolios section using one of the following methods:

Click Portfolios to open the last portfolio you were working with.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose one of the most-recently used

portfolios.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose Open Portfolio to select a group of

projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Capacity Planning.

3) On the Capacity Planning page, click the Customize link.

4) In the Customize Capacity Planning dialog box, click the Chart tab.

Customize Capacity Planning Columns Tab

Overview

Use this tab to configure the columns you want to appear in the scorecard portion of the

Capacity Planning page.

Screen Elements

Column selector

Standard tool for configuring the columns you want to display.

SeeCustomize Columns or Values.

Sort by field

Determines the category to sort your information by.

Select a field from one of the following field types:

Baseline

Budget

Cost

Dates

Durations

Earned Value

General

Number of Activities

Percent Complete

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

667

Project Codes

Summary

Units

User Defined

Sort Order list

Determines whether to sort information in an ascending or descending order.

Getting Here

1) Click Portfolios.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Capacity Planning.

3) On the Capacity Planning page, click the Customize link.

4) In the Customize Capacity Planning dialog box, click the Columns tab.

Customize Capacity Planning Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to customize the Capacity Planning page. The General, Group, and

Waterline tabs apply only to the scorecard. On the General tab, choose the columns

you want to display; on the Group tab, select group and sort options; on the Waterline

tab, specify options for sorting projects into two separate groups based on the selected

criteria.

Screen Elements

Columns tab

Presents column (or field) and sort options. See Customize Capacity Planning

Columns Tab (on page 666).

Grouping tab

See Customize Capacity Planning Grouping Tab (on page 668).

Waterline tab

See Customize Capacity Planning Waterline Tab (on page 669).

Chart tab

See Customize Capacity Planning Chart Tab (on page 665).

Work Area

Displays the data and controls for each tab.

668

Apply button

Applies your settings to the item you are customizing without closing the current page

or dialog box. This allows you to view the results of your changes and to continue

adjusting other settings.

Default

Resets the options on the current tab to their original values. Only available when the

Columns tab is active.

Tips

On the Customize page, you can specify the columns of information you want to

display in the scorecard. For example, you can display project dates, project costs, or

project score information. Customize options also let you identify additional group by

levels, sorting, and waterline options.

Getting Here

1) Click Portfolios.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Capacity Planning.

3) On the Capacity Planning page, click the Customize link.

Customize Capacity Planning Grouping Tab

Overview

The Group Tab displays configurable options for modifying grouping options in capacity

planning.

Screen Elements

Levels fields

Select one of the following fields for each level preferred to 10 to determine how data

is grouped:

Budget

Costs

Dates

Durations

Earned Value

General

Project Codes

Summary

Units

User Defined

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

669

To Level field

Select a number from 1 to 10 to determine the number of fields displaying the

information chosen in the level. This option is only available when a field from Project

Codes is selected.

Background Color field

The color to be displayed as a background for each level of chosen data displayed.

Text Color field

Select a color to be displayed for text for each level of chosen data displayed.

Sort Order field

Determines whether to display data in an ascending or descending order.

Show field title in band option

Determines whether to display the field title in band.

Show field rollups in band option

Determines whether to display the field rollups in band.

Getting Here

1) Click Portfolios.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Capacity Planning.

3) On the Capacity Planning page, click the Customize link.

4) In the Customize Capacity Planning dialog box, click the Grouping tab.

Customize Capacity Planning Waterline Tab

Overview

This tab applies only to portfolio views of type scorecard.

You can display a waterline to help analyze a project group and model your strategy. A

waterline sorts projects in the scorecard into two separate groups based on your defined

constraint limit. Projects above the waterline, displayed with a white background, are

those that collectively meet the constraint limit value; all other projects, displayed with a

light blue background, appear below the waterline.

Screen Elements

Waterline area

See Customize Scorecard Waterline Tab (on page 695).

Getting Here

1) Open a portfolio in the Portfolios section using one of the following methods:

670

Click Portfolios to open the last portfolio you were working with.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose one of the most-recently used

portfolios.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose Open Portfolio to select a group of

projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Capacity Planning.

3) On the Capacity Planning page, click the Customize link.

4) In the Customize Capacity Planning dialog box, click the Waterline tab.

Customize Chart Dialog Box of the Resource Analysis Chart Portlet

Overview

Use this dialog box to configure how the chart will display in the portlet.

Screen Elements

Chart Type list

Determines the type of chart to be displayed.

Display list

Determines whether the chart will be displayed by Costs or Units.

Show Limit option

Determines whether to show the limit.

Show Allocation Limit option

Determines whether to show the allocation limit.

Display resource allocation fields

The specified number of weeks for which to display the resource allocation. Enter

values for how many weeks prior and after the current date.

Color Theme list

Determines whether to display the color theme in pastel or primary colors.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Resource Analysis Chart portlet and click Customize.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

671

Customize Chart Dialog Box of the Resource Analysis Tab of the Analysis Page

Overview

Use the Customize Chart dialog box of the Resource Analysis tab to select a timescale

increment, unit or cost data, and the limit line type. You can also select a color scheme

and decide whether to show the chart in 3-D. The options available in this dialog box

depend on the type of chart selected.

Screen Elements

Display list

Determines whether the chart will be displayed by Costs or Units.

Timescale list

Determines the timescale. Select from the following intervals:

Year/Month

Year/Quarter

Quarter/Month

Month/Week

Financial Period

The available timescale options are determined by the selected summarization

option on the General tab of the Application Settings page. The calendar timescale

options are only available if the By Calendar option is selected. The Financial Period

option is only available if the By Financial Periods option is selected. If both options are

selected, you can select from a calendar or financial period timescale.

Show Limit option

Determines whether to show the limit.

Show Allocation Limit option

Determines whether to show the allocation limit.

Display entire date range/Display a specific date range options

Determines whether to display the date range or a specified date range.

Start field

The start date for the specific date range.

Finish field

The finish date for the specific date range.

Color Theme list

Determines whether the chart will display with a pastel or primary color theme.

672

Show 3-D option

Determines whether to display the chart in 3-D.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) On the Analysis page, click the Resource Analysis tab.

4) On the Resource Analysis tab, select a resource and click Customize.

Customize Columns Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to configure columns for the table or the Gantt chart on the Activities

page.

Screen Elements

Available Columns list

The list of columns available for display. Double-clicking a column in the Available

Columns list moves it to the Selected Columns list.

Selected Columns list

The columns you selected from the Available Columns list. Double-clicking a column

in the Selected Columns list removes it from the list. See Configuring Columns or

Values, for help configuring the list of selected columns.

Column Options section:

Sort by list

The element used to sort items in the table and Gantt chart.

Sort Order list

Determines whether the application sorts values in ascending or descending order.

Show first column as list

The list of fields names to use as the first or first and second columns in the view.

Font field

The font, size, and style from the Table Font dialog box. These configurable options will

be applied to the columns.

Tips

For a full list of available columns, see Available Columns of the Activities Page (on

page 1189).

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

673

You must be in the table or Gantt chart view for the Columns option to be enabled.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select a view from the Activity View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Columns.

Customize Columns Dialog Box of the EPS Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to configure columns for the table or Gantt chart.

Screen Elements

Available Columns list

The list of columns available for display. Double-clicking a column in the Available

Columns list moves it to the Selected Columns list.

Selected Columns list

The columns you selected from the Available Columns list. Double-clicking a column

in the Selected Columns list removes it from the list. See Configuring Columns or

Values, for help configuring the list of selected columns.

Column Options section:

Sort by list

Determines the column sort criteria.

Sort Order list

Determines whether to sort information in an ascending or descending order.

Show first column as list

Determines whether Project Name or Project ID is shown as the first column.

Font field

The font, size, and style from the Table Font dialog box. These configurable options will

be applied to the columns.

Tips

For a full list of available columns, see Available Columns of the EPS Page (on page 1223).

674

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a view from the EPS View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Columns.

Customize Cost Worksheet Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to modify columns and grouping.

Screen Elements

Columns tab

See Columns Tab of the Customize Cost Worksheet Dialog Box (on page 628).

Group tab

See Group Tab of the Customize Cost Worksheet Dialog Box (on page 819).

Getting Here

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Cost Worksheet portlet.

4) In the Cost Worksheet portlet, click Customize.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the selected dashboard, expand the Cost Worksheet portlet.

4) In the Cost Worksheet portlet, click Customize.

Customize Dashboard Page

Overview

Use this page to create a new dashboard, customize the selected dashboard for the

current user, or to configure the selected shared dashboard for other users. This includes

any of the following:

Showing or hiding a portlet

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

675

Setting a dashboard filter

Designing the layout of portals

Restoring default settings

Screen Elements

Content tab

See Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page (on page 637).

Layout tab

See Layout Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page (on page 864).

Access tab

See Access Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page (on page 536).

Getting Here

From the Manage Dashboards page:

1) Click the Dashboards menu and select Manage Dashboards.

2) On the Manage Dashboards page, expand Displayed Dashboards or Available

Dashboards and select a dashboard.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, click Customize.

Customize Detail Windows Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to determine which detail windows for activities or WBSs will display on

the Activities page.

Screen Elements

Area section

Determines which set of detail windows will be available.

Detail Window option

Determines which detail windows are displayed. Select the option next to the Detail

Window title to select all the detail windows.

Reset to Defaults button

Restores all options to default settings.

676

Tips

You can also right-click a detail window on the Activities page and select

Customize... to open the Customize Detail Windows dialog box.

Detail window customization is saved per view.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the View menu and select Customize Detail

Windows....

Customize Detail Windows Dialog Box of the EPS Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to determine which detail windows for EPS nodes or projects will

display on the EPS page.

Screen Elements

Area section

Determines which set of detail windows will be available.

Detail Window option

Determines which detail windows are displayed. Select the option next to the Detail

Window title to select all the detail windows.

Tips

You can also right-click a detail window on the Activities page and select

Customize... to open the Customize Detail Windows dialog box.

Detail window customization is saved per view.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the View menu and select Customize Detail Windows....

Customize Dialog Box of the Portfolio View Portlet

Overview

Use this dialog box to customize bubble chart, pie chart, histogram, stacked histogram,

and side-by-side histogram portlets.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

677

Note: Not all the fields listed below will apply. The type of chart you

select automatically refreshes the applicable fields.

Screen Elements

Title field

The name of the view and the title that appears in the title bar of the portlet. The title

can contain up to 255 characters, and it does not have to be unique. (This is a

required field.)

Type list

Determines the type of chart to be displayed.

Note: If you change the type to Scorecard, the information on the page changes to

accommodate scorecard details.

X-Axis list

The data field represented on the X-axis of the chart. This field is not displayed for a

pie chart.

Y-Axis list

The data field represented on the Y-axis of the chart. This field is not displayed for a

pie chart.

Group By list

The data field used to group projects in the chart. Grouping gathers, or groups, all of

the projects together that contain the same value for the selected data field. This

field is not displayed for a histogram.

Bubble Size list

Determines the size of the bubbles that display in a bubble chart.

Color Theme list

The option to view chart elements in pastel or primary colors.

Show 3-D option

Determines whether to display the chart in 3-D format. Clearing this option displays

the chart in 2-D format.

Show horizontal gridlines option

Determines whether to display horizontal gridlines in the chart. This field is not

displayed for a pie chart.

678

Show vertical gridlines option

Determines whether vertical gridlines are displayed in the chart. This field is not

displayed for a pie chart.

Show all values on axis, not just assigned values option

Determines whether to display all values on the X axis and Y axis, even if there is no

assigned value.

For example, if you choose to display Project Status on the X axis, the X axis displays all

types of Project Status (Active, Inactive, What-If), even if no projects are assigned to a

status type. This option only applies when you choose to display project code, project

status, or risk level on the X or Y axis. This option is not displayed for a pie chart.

Data list

The data field represented in a pie chart.

Show pie data label option

Determines whether to display the value for the customize option you select in the

Data field. For example, if you choose to display Actual Cost data in the pie chart, the

chart displays the Actual Cost value next to each section of the pie chart.

Show group by label option

Determines whether to display the value for the customize option you select in the

Group By field. For example, if you choose to group the chart by project, the chart

displays the project name next to each section of the pie chart.

Show percentage option

Determines whether to display the percentage of each slice of the pie chart.

Tips

If you select a Portfolio View portlet that has Scorecard listed in the Type list, you will see

the Customize Scorecard dialog box in place of the Customize dialog box.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand a Portfolio View portlet. (For example, a bubble chart

portlet.)

4) In the Portfolio View portlet, click Customize.

Customize Dialog Box of the Team Usage Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to configure spreadsheet or histogram display and timescale.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

679

Screen Elements

Display list

The cost viewing options: Units or Cost. The capability to view costs is dependent on

your security privileges. If you do not have access to costs data and you select the

Costs option, no data appears.

By default, actual units and costs are spread evenly across the time period from the

Actual Start to the Data Date, or Actual Finish if there is one. A Global Preference

setting lets you choose to view actuals values based on data stored for custom

financial periods (past period actuals). When you choose this option, actual units and

costs are spread evenly across the dates defined for each financial period. When this

option is turned on, under/over allocated values are also calculated based on the

stored period data for actual units. Additionally, the histogram legend indicates that

Period Actual Units or Costs are being displayed.

However, if projects are summarized by financial period (which is controlled on the

General tab of the Application Settings page), this global preference setting for

displaying past period actuals is ignored. In this case, when you display a Financial

Period timescale, the page displays past period actual values if performance has

been stored for a financial period; for financial periods that do not have stored

performance, the page displays all unit and cost values in financial period intervals.

Timescale list

Determines the timescale. Select from the following intervals:

Year/Month

Year/Quarter

Quarter/Month

Month/Week

Financial Period

The available timescale options are determined by the selected summarization

option on the General tab of the Application Settings page. The calendar timescale

options are only available if the By Calendar option is selected. The Financial Period

option is only available if the By Financial Periods option is selected. If both options are

selected, you can select from a calendar or financial period timescale.

Show option

Determines whether to view resource data for the Current Project Only or for All

Projects to which the resource is assigned.

Choose to display resources' maximum availability based on their designated

calendars and units/time values (Limit) or based on allocated values (Allocation Limit)

specified by Resource Managers during high-level planning.

680

Limit option

Determines whether to display maximum availability based on the resource's

calendar and maximum units/time setting and the application settings for hours per

time period.

This option is based on live data to help you evaluate usage against the benchmark.

Allocation Limit option

Determines whether the resource's maximum availability is based on Allocated

planning values specified by a resource manager. These values, which are recorded

at the project or WBS level, can be entered by users with appropriate module access

in the Resource Planning spreadsheet (Planning page).

Use this limit line to evaluate whether your detailed activity assignments are in line with

what the resource manager has planned.The resource usage summary data

displayed in the Allocation Limit view is based on either activity-level assignments or

high-level (project, WBS) planning assignments, depending on an option setting on

the Project Details Settings page. To evaluate activity level assignments against

planned allocations, choose the summarize project option for detailed activity

resource assignments. This option is based on live data to help you evaluate usage

against the benchmark.

Because resource usage data is based on summary data, it reflects values as of the

last date the summarizer was run for a project. Assignment changes within a project

after that date will not be reflected until the project is again summarized from the

Activities or EPS pages. For more detail about summarized resource data, see

Resource Data and Summarization.

Note: When summarizing at the detail level, the date range for the timescale is

derived from activity start and finish dates. If the selected resource only has high-level

assignments outside that date range, the Allocation Limit line might not appear.

Changing to a larger timescale increment, for example from Month/Week to

Year/Quarter might cause the Allocation Limit to appear.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Team Usage.

3) On the Team Usage page, click the Customize link.

Customize Filters Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to configure and apply one or more filters to the current activity view.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

681

Screen Elements

Customize Filters dialog box

The Customize Filters dialog box contains the same screen elements as the Filters tab

on the Customize Activity View dialog box. See Filters Tab of the Customize Activity

View Dialog Box (on page 771) for information.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select a view from the Activity View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Filters Filters.

Customize Filters Dialog Box of the Assignments Page

Overview

Use the Customize Filters dialog box of the Assignments page to configure and apply one

or more filters to the current view to constrain or reduce the quantity of resources shown.

Screen Elements

Customize Filters Dialog Box Toolbar

See Filters Dialog Box Toolbar (on page 1288).

Name field

The names of existing, predefined filters that are grouped by type:

Standard Filters: Predefined filters that are already in the application.

Global Filters: Filters that are available to all users.

Multiple User Filters: User-defined filters available to more than one person.

User-Defined Filters: Filters that you created.

Apply to View option

Determines which filters, if any, will be applied to the current view.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click Filters menu on the view toolbar or view menu

and click Filters.

682

Customize Filters Dialog Box of the EPS Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to configure and apply one or more filters to the current view to

constrain or reduce the quantity of projects shown on the EPS page.

Screen Elements

This dialog box contains the same elements as the Filters tab of the Customize Project View dialog box.

See Filters Tab of the Customize Project View Dialog Box (on page 771) for more

details.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a view from the EPS View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Filters Filters.

Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to configure the appearance and properties of Gantt chart bars,

lines, and timescales on the Activities page.

Screen Elements

Bars tab

Displays bar type, height, color, and label options. See Bars Tab of the Customize

Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the Activities Page (on page 593).

Gantt Chart tab

Displays Gantt chart timescale and non-work time color shading options. See Gantt

Chart Tab of the Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the Activities Page (on

page 780).

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select a view from the Activity View list.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

683

b. Click the View menu and select Gantt Chart Options.

Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the Assignments Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to set the type, height, and color of Gantt chart bars and to set

timescale options.

Screen Elements

Bars tab

Displays bar type, height, color, and label options. See Bars Tab of the Customize

Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the Assignments Page (on page 595).

Gantt Chart tab

Displays Gantt chart timescale and non-work time color shading options. See Gantt

Chart Tab of the Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the Assignments Page

(on page 782).

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click View and select Gantt Chart Options.

Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the EPS Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to configure the appearance and properties of bars and the lines

and timescales of the Gantt chart on the EPS page.

Screen Elements

Bars tab

Displays bar type, height, color, and label options. See Bars Tab of the Customize

Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the EPS Page (on page 597).

Gantt Chart tab

Displays EPS Gantt chart timescale and non-work time color shading options. See

Gantt Chart Tab of the Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the EPS Page (on

page 782).

684

Apply button

Applies your settings to the item you are customizing without closing the current page

or dialog box. This allows you to view the results of your changes and to continue

adjusting other settings.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a view from the EPS View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Gantt Chart Options.

Customize Groupings Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to organize data in categories that share a common attribute, such

as WBS, code value, or resource on the Activities page. Group by simple, one-level lists of

information or by multiple data items; group criteria can also be arranged in hierarchies

of data at multiple level up to 20. If you limit the number of levels, you can group

additional data items.

Screen Elements

Customize Groupings dialog box

The Customize Groupings dialog box contains configurable options identical to those

on the Grouping tab of the Customize Activity View dialog box. See Grouping Tab of

the Customize Activity View Dialog Box (on page 824) for further details.

Tips

Grouping bands are displayed by default when you group by a project code or EPS

even if the bands are empty. Select the Hide if empty option in the Customize View or

Customize Groupings dialog boxes to remove these bands from view.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select a view from the Activity View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Group....

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

685

Customize Groupings Dialog Box of the EPS Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to organize data into categories that share a common attribute, such

as WBS, code value, or resource in the table on the EPS page. Group by simple, one-level

lists of information or by multiple data items; group criteria can also be arranged in

hierarchies of data at multiple levels. If you limit the number of levels, you can group

additional data items.

Screen Elements

Field list

The field you want to use to arrange the data into smaller more manageable groups.

Data rows with similar field values can be arranged into expandable hierarchies with

up to 10 or 20 levels and sorted by group to reduce visual complexity and speed user

access to specific data.

To Level list

The level to which values of a hierarchy are shown, or, if a date is selected, the way

dates are broken up for the group bands.

Band Color list

The color to display for each hierarchical level.

Text Color list

The color for the text to be displayed within each grouping band.

Sort Order list

Determines whether columns are sorted in ascending or descending order, or by

hierarchy.

Band Options section:

Show field title option

Determines whether to show the title of the title of the field in the table or Gantt chart.

Show field rollups option

Determines whether to display summarized values, such as the dates of the table or

Gantt chart.

Clear the option to prevent this information from displaying.

Show field rollups option

Determines whether to display summarized values, such as the dates of the Gantt

chart or table.

686

Hide if empty option

Determines whether to hide grouping bands that do not contain any projects (if on

the EPS page) or activities (if on the Activities page).

Display text in bands using section:

ID/Code option

The short name or ID/Code within the grouping band.

If you select this option and EPS is selected in the field list, you can edit the EPS code in

the first column on the EPS page.

Name/Description option

The long name or name/description within the grouping band.

If you select this option and EPS is selected in the field list, you can edit the EPS

description in the first column on the EPS page.

ID/Code and Name/ Description option

The short and long name within the grouping band.

If you select this option and EPS is selected in the field list, you can edit the EPS code in

the first column on the EPS page.

Tips

Grouping bands are displayed by default when you group by a project code or EPS

even if the bands are empty. Select the Hide if empty option in the Customize View or

Customize Groupings dialog boxes to remove these bands from view.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a view from the EPS View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Group.

Customize Project Issues Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to configure options for columns, filters, groups, and charts.

Screen Elements

Columns tab

See Columns Tab of the Customize Project Issues Dialog Box (on page 628).

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

687

Filter tab

See Filter Tab of the Customize Project Issues Page (see "Filter Tab of the Customize

Project Issues Dialog Box" on page 768).

Group tab

See Group Tab of the Customize Project Issues Dialog Box (on page 820).

Chart tab

See Chart Tab of the Customize Project Issues Dialog Box (on page 614).

Tips

The customize options you select apply only to you.

If you select to filter by the Owner field, the list of available resources from which you

can select depends upon your resource access privileges.

When you modify an existing Sort by selection, grouping level, or filter criteria

statement, the text <secure field> might display. This indicates that you do not have

the required privilege to view this field or value; however, you can select a different

field or value from the list.

Getting Here

From the Issues page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, click Customize.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Issues portlet and click Customize.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Issues portlet and click Customize.

Customize Project Score Dialog Box of the Project Score Section of the Global Tab of the My

Preferences Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to customize the project score columns.

688

Screen Elements

Customize Columns

See Configuring Columns or Values.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab, expand the Project Score section.

4) Under the Project Score section, click the Project Codes link.

Customize Project Statistics Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to configure which columns are displayed on the Project Statistics

portlet and Project Statistics page.

Screen Elements

Select the custom columns to display for Project Statistics section

See Common Screen Elements for Customizing Columns or Values (on page 634).

Default button

Changes all fields to default settings.

Getting Here

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Statistics portlet and click Customize.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, expand the Project Statistics portlet and click Customize.

Customize Project View Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to customize Project View settings including columns, grouping, filters,

bars, Gantt chart, and access for a new or existing view.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

689

Screen Elements

View Name field

The name of the selected view.

The view is determined by your selection in the View list.

Columns tab

See Columns Tab of the Customize Project View Dialog Box (on page 630).

Grouping tab

See Grouping Tab of the Customize Project View Dialog Box (on page 826).

Filters tab

See Filters Tab of the Customize Project View Dialog Box (on page 771).

Bars tab

See Bars Tab of the Customize Project View Dialog Box (on page 598).

Gantt Options tab

See Gantt Chart Tab of the Customize Project View Dialog Box (on page 783).

Access tab

See Access Tab of the Customize Project View Dialog Box (on page 537).

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a view from the EPS View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the Assignments Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to customize settings of all parts of the Resource Assignments view,

including the Gantt chart, the usage spreadsheet, layout of elements opened within the

assignments view, filters, and access privileges.

Screen Elements

View Name field

The name of the selected view.

The view is determined by your selection in the View list.

690

Customize Resource Assignments View dialog box tabs:

Columns Tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the

Assignments Page (on page 631)

Grouping Tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the

Assignments Page (on page 828)

Filters Tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the Assignments

Page (on page 772)

Bars Tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the Assignments

Page (on page 599)

Gantt Chart Tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the

Assignments Page (on page 784)

Usage Tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the

Assignments Page (on page 1134)

Access Tab of the Customize Resources Assignments View Dialog Box of the

Assignments Page (on page 537)

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click View and select Customize View.

Customize Risks Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to customize the columns and filters applied to the My Risks or Project

Risks portlets.

Screen Elements

Columns tab

See Columns Tab of the Customize Risks Dialog Box (see "Columns Tab of the

Customize Risks Portlet Dialog Box" on page 632).

Filter tab

See Filter Tab of the Customize Risks Dialog Box (on page 770).

Tips

You can customize the My Risks portlet for any dashboard you create.

You cannot customize the portlet for multi-user dashboards created by another user,

even if you have access to view the dashboard.

For global dashboards, you must have the required security privileges to edit global

dashboards to customize the portlet.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

691

Getting Here

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the My Risks portlet and click Customize.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Risks portlet and click Customize.

Customize Scorecard Columns Tab

Overview

The Columns Tab displays configurable options for modifying displayed columns in the

scorecard view.

Screen Elements

Select the custom columns to display area

Configure the columns to display in the scorecard. See Customize Columns or Values.

Sort by field

Select one of the following fields to determine your preferred option to sort your data:

Baseline

Budget

Cost

Dates

Durations

Earned Value

General

Number of Activities

Percent Complete

Project Codes

Summary

Units

User Defined

Sort Order field

Determines whether to display data in an ascending or descending order.

692

Show Project Requests option

Determines whether to display project requests.

Default button

Changes all fields to default settings.

Getting Here

1) Click Portfolios.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Portfolio Analysis.

3) On the Portfolio Analysis Settings area, select a scorecard in the View field.

4) On the Portfolio Analysis , click More to access the Scorecard Settings area.

5) On the Scorecard Settings area, click the Customize link.

6) In the Customize Scorecard dialog box,Settings area select the Columns tab.

Customize Scorecard Dialog Box

Overview

The Customize Scorecard Dialog Box displays configurable options for viewing portfolio

data in a scorecard. Use the following fields to modify your scorecard view.

Screen Elements

Columns Tab

See Customize Scorecard Columns Tab (on page 691).

Group Tab

See Customize Scorecard Group Tab (on page 693).

Waterline Tab

See Customize Scorecard Waterline Tab (on page 695).

Getting Here

1) Click Portfolios.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Portfolio Analysis.

3) On the Portfolio Analysis Settings area, select a scorecard in the View field.

4) On the Portfolio Analysis Settings area, click More to access the Scorecard Settings

area.

5) On the Scorecard Settings area, click the Customize link.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

693

Customize Scorecard Dialog Box of the Portfolio Views Section of the Customize Dashboard

Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to configure scorecard viewing options.

Screen Elements

Columns tab

See Columns Tab of the Customize Scorecard Dialog Box of the Portfolio Views Section

of the Customize Dashboard Page (see "Columns Tab of the Customize Scorecards

Dialog Box of the Portfolio Views Section of the Customize Dashboard Page" on page

633).

Group tab

See Group Tab of the Customize Scorecard Dialog Box of the Portfolio Views Section of

the Customize Dashboard Page (on page 823).

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, click Customize.

4) On the Dashboard Details page, click the Content tab.

5) On the Content tab, expand Portfolio Views and expand a view.

6) In the view section, select Scorecard from the Type list and click Customize.

Customize Scorecard Group Tab

Overview

The Group Tab displays configurable options for modifying grouping options in the

scorecard view.

Screen Elements

Levels fields

Select one of the following fields for each level preferred to 10 to determine how data

is grouped:

Budget

Costs

Dates

Durations

Earned Value

694

General

Project Codes

Summary

Units

User Defined

To Level field

Select a number from 1 to 10 to determine the number of fields displaying the

information chosen in the level. This option is only available when a field from Project

Codes is selected.

Background Color field

Select a color to be displayed as a background for each level of chosen data

displayed.

Text Color field

The color to be displayed for text for each level of chosen data displayed.

Sort Order field

Determines whether to display data in an ascending or descending order.

Show field title in band option

Determines whether to display the field title in band.

Show field rollups in band option

Determines whether to display the field rollups in band.

Getting Here

1) Click Portfolios .

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Portfolio Analysis.

3) On the Portfolio Analysis Settings area, select a scorecard in the View field.

4) On the Portfolio Analysis Settings area, click More to access the Scorecard Settings

area.

5) On the Scorecard Settings area, click the Customize link.

6) In the Customize Scorecard dialog box, select the Group tab.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

695

Customize Scorecard Waterline Tab

Overview

You can display a waterline to help analyze a project group and model your strategy. A

waterline sorts projects in the scorecard into two separate groups based on your defined

constraint limit. Projects above the waterline, displayed with a white background, are

those that collectively meet the constraint limit value; all other projects, displayed with a

light blue background, appear below the waterline.

Screen Elements

Display waterline on scorecard option

Determines whether to display the waterline on scorecard. By choosing this option,

any groupings and sorts defined elsewhere will be lost.

Parameter field

Select a field from one of the following categories to set the waterline level limit. The

available list of fields are pre-filtered to include only numeric project-level fields.

Budget

Cost

Durations

Earned Value

General

Number of Activities

Percent Complete

Units

User Defined

Is field

Select from one of the following options to determine the logical constraint between

the parameter and an entered value.

Is less than

Is less than or equals

Is greater than

Is greater than or equals

Value field

Enter a value for the field to complete the waterline level limit. For example, enter 100

to complete a limit where the Parameter field is Total Activities and the Is field is set to

Is less than.

696

First rank by field

Select a field from one of the following categories to sort the scorecard:

Baseline

Budget

Cost

Dates

Durations

Earned Value

General

Number of Activities

Percent Complete

Project Codes

Summary

Units

User Defined

Sort Order field

Select an Ascending (A to Z; 1 up to high value) or Descending (Z to A; high value

down to 1) sort order for data rows sorted by the First rank by field.

Then rank by field

Select a field from one of the following categories to sort the scorecard a second

time. For example, if multiple rows share the same Parent EPS, they will all appear

when sorted by this field. Choose a second field to further sort the data.

Baseline

Budget

Cost

Dates

Durations

Earned Value

General

Number of Activities

Percent Complete

Project Codes

Summary

Units

User Defined

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

697

Sort Order field

Select an Ascending (A to Z; 1 up to highest value) or Descending (Z to A; highest

value down to 1) sort order for data rows sorted by the First rank by field.

Getting Here

1) Open a portfolio in the Portfolios section using one of the following methods:

Click Portfolios to open the last portfolio you were working with.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose one of the most-recently used

portfolios.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose Open Portfolio to select a group of

projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Portfolio Analysis.

3) On the Portfolio Analysis Settings area, select a scorecard in the View field.

4) On the Portfolio Analysis Settings area, click More to access the Scorecard Settings

area.

5) On the Scorecard Settings area, click the Customize link.

6) In the Customize Scorecard dialog box, select the Waterline tab.

Customize Spreadsheet Dialog Box of the Planning Page

Overview

Use the Customize Spreadsheet dialog box of the Planning page to modify the currently

selected spreadsheet.

Screen Elements

Customize Spreadsheet tabs:

General Tab of the Customize Spreadsheet Dialog Box of the Planning Page (on page

804)

Columns Tab of the Customize Spreadsheet Dialog Box of the Planning Page (on page

634)

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Planning.

3) On the Planning page, click the Customize link.

Customize Spreadsheet or Histogram Dialog Box of the Analysis Page

Overview

Use this dialog to customize the display options for the spreadsheet or histogram.

698

Screen Elements

Display list

Determines whether the chart will be displayed by Costs or Units.

Timescale list

Determines the timescale. Select from the following intervals:

Year/Month

Year/Quarter

Quarter/Month

Month/Week

Financial Period

The available timescale options are determined by the selected summarization

option on the General tab of the Application Settings page. The calendar timescale

options are only available if the By Calendar option is selected. The Financial Period

option is only available if the By Financial Periods option is selected. If both options are

selected, you can select from a calendar or financial period timescale.

Show Limit option

Determines whether to show the limit. The limit shows the maximum availability based

on the resource's calendar and Max units/time setting, along with application settings

for hours per time period.

Show Allocation Limit option

Determines whether to show the allocation limit. This line shows the role's maximum

availability based on Allocated planning values specified in the Resource Planning

spreadsheet. Use this limit indicator to evaluate whether detailed activity assignments

are in line with what was planned.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) On the Analysis page, click the Role Usage tab or the Resource Usage tab.

4) On the Role Usage tab or the Resource Usage tab:

a. Select a role or resource.

b. Click the Customize link above the spreadsheet or histogram.

Customize Toolbar Items Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to determine which icons from the Actions, Edit, and View menus will

display on the corresponding toolbars.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

699

Screen Elements

Toolbar section

Determines which toolbar items will be available to customize.

Actions: Will display options for toolbuttons associated with the Actions menu.

Edit: Will display options for toolbuttons associated with the Edit menu.

View: Will display options for toolbuttons associated with the View menu.

Toolbar Item option

The available icons for each corresponding toolbar. For example, when the Actions

toolbar is selected, all icons available for the Actions toolbar are displayed. Select the

option next to the Toolbar Item title to select all icons to be displayed for the specified

toolbar.

Reset to Defaults button

Restores all options to default settings.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities or EPS.

3) On the Activities or EPS page, click the View menu and select Toolbars

Customize Toolbars....

Customize Toolbar Items Dialog Box of the Assignments Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to determine which icons from the Actions, Edit, and View menus will

be displayed on the corresponding toolbars.

Screen Elements

Toolbar section

Determines which toolbar items will be available to customize.

Actions: Will display options for toolbuttons associated with the Actions menu.

Edit: Will display options for toolbuttons associated with the Edit menu.

View: Will display options for toolbuttons associated with the View menu.

Toolbar Item option

The available icons for each corresponding toolbar. For example, when the Actions

toolbar is selected, all icons available for the Actions toolbar are displayed. Select the

option next to the Toolbar Item title to select all icons to be displayed for the specified

toolbar.

700

Reset to Defaults button

Restores all options to default settings.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click the View menu and select Toolbars .

4) On the Toolbars menu, select Customize Toolbars....

Customize Usage Options Dialog Box of the Assignments Page

Overview

The Customize Usage Options Dialog Box contains identical elements regarding the

customization of columns and options as the Usage tab of the Customize Resource

Assignments View dialog box. See Usage Tab of the Customize Resource Assignments

View Dialog Box of the Assignments Page (on page 1134) for further details.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click View and select Usage Options.

Dashboards Page

Overview

Use this page to view and work with dashboards where you can arrange portlets

containing information about the portfolios, projects, resources, and activities specific to

your needs. The information in dashboards is controlled by your module access, security

settings, administrator configuration, user interface view settings, activity and project

assignments, filtering criteria, and how you customize your content and layout.

Note: The Dashboards page displays dashboards available to you

as defined in your user interface view. If you have no user interface

view, the default Personal Workspace dashboard will appear

when you first log into the application.

You can customize the Dashboards page to display user-defined (private), multi-user,

and global dashboards. Each dashboard appears as a named tab on the Dashboards

page.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

701

Screen Elements

Expand All link

Expands all portlets (when portlets are collapsed).

Collapse All link

Collapses all portlets to display only their title bars (when portlets are expanded).

Customize link

Click to customize the content, layout, and access of dashboards if you have the

required security privilege. See Customize Dashboard Page (on page 674).

Filter by field

The portfolio, project code, or project that the application uses to filter the

dashboard. The portlets only display information that meet the selected filtering

criteria.

You can change the Filter by option for a private (user-defined) dashboard, and for

any multi-user or global dashboard you create.

All data displayed on a dashboard is filtered by the portfolio, project code value, or

project. For example, the Project Health portlet only displays performance and

schedule information for projects that meet the selected filtering criteria.

You can change the Filter by option for a private (user-defined) dashboard, and for

any multi-user or global dashboard you create. For multi-user and global dashboards

you have access rights to view, you can change the Filter by option only if the Restrict

users from changing dashboard filter option is not selected on the Customize

Dashboard page.

Notes:

When you organize the Filter by dialog box by project code,

you cannot select a project code; you must expand the

project codes to display and select a project code value.

Similarly, when you organize the Filter by dialog by project, you

cannot select an EPS; you must expand the EPS nodes to

display and select a project.

You can only choose one portfolio, project code value, or

project as the dashboard filter.

Tips

You can display multiple dashboards on the Dashboards page. If there is not enough

room to display all tabs on the page, a black triangular arrow appears after the last

tab. Click it to view a list of dashboards and select one.

You cannot modify multi-user dashboards created by another user, even if you have

access rights to view the dashboard.

702

Getting Here

Click Dashboards.

Data Limits Page

Overview

Use this page to specify maximum levels for hierarchical structures. You can also specify

baseline and activity code maximums.

Screen Elements

Maximum Tree Levels

Enter values for the following:

EPS/WBS tree maximum levels: Enter a value of 1-50.

OBS tree maximum levels: Enter a value of 1-25.

Resources tree maximum levels: Enter a value of 1-25.

Role tree maximum levels: Enter a value of 1-25.

Cost Account tree maximum levels: Enter a value of 1-25.

Activity Code tree maximum levels: Enter a value of 1-25.

Resource Code tree maximum levels: Enter a value of 1-25.

Project Code Tree maximum levels: Enter a value of 1-25.

Maximum Codes and Baselines

Enter values for the following:

Maximum activity codes per project: Enter a value of 0-500.

Maximum baselines per project: Enter a value of at least 1.

Maximum baselines copied with project: Enter a value of 1-21.

Tips

If you change maximum hierarchy level settings, the new settings apply only when

you add new elements or edit existing elements.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select Application Settings.

2) On the Application Settings pane, click Data Limits.

Date Format Section of the Global Tab of the My Preferences Page

Overview

Use this section to specify the format of date and time fields throughout the application.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

703

Screen Elements

Date format list

Select how the date is displayed. (e.g., Day, Month, Year)

Four Digit year option: Determines whether the four digit year is displayed.

Month name option: Determines whether the month name is displayed.

Leading zeros option: Determines whether leading zeros are displayed.

Time format list

Select if you want the time displayed in 12 hour, 24 hour, or not at all.

Show minutes option: Determines whether the minutes are shown.

Separator list: Select one of the following to use for separating the day, month,

and year: /, -, or .

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab, expand the Date Format section.

Day View Detail Window of the Calendar View of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to view the complete list of activities scheduled that day and the

start and finish hour of activities that occur completely within that day.

Screen Elements

Activities list

The activities for the specified month.

Hours section

The start and finish hour of activities that occur completely within the selected day.

Hovering over an activity bar will display:

Project Name

The name of the project.

Project ID

The unique identifier assigned to the project.

Activity ID

The activity identifier that is unique within the project.

704

Activity Name field

The name of the activity.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the View menu and select Calendar View.

4) On the Calendar View page, double-click an activity bar.

Defaults Page of the Project Preferences Dialog Box

Overview

Use this page to configure default settings for new activities and assignments.

Screen Elements

Duration Type list

Determines whether the schedule, resource availability, or costs are most important

when updating activities. The duration type applies only when you have resources

assigned to the activity. Choose a duration type based on which factor is most

important (least flexible) in planning your project.

Percent Complete Type list

Determines the way in which the application calculates the percent complete for the

activity.

This default activity percent complete type will be applied to all new activities added

to a project. If you change this setting for an existing project that has activities, the

percent complete type of those existing activities will not be changed.

Activity Type list

Determines how duration and schedule dates are calculated for an activity:

Task Dependent: If resources should be scheduled based on the activity's

calendar.

Resource Dependent: If resources should be scheduled based on their assigned

calendars.

Level of Effort: For an ongoing activity whose duration depends on other activities.

The duration of a Level of Effort activity is calculated based on the schedule dates

from its predecessors and successors.

Start or Finish Milestone: If an activity marks the beginning or end of a major

project phase.

WBS Summary: For an activity with a particular WBS code.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

705

Calendar field

The default calendar for new activities.

Cost Account field

The default cost account associated with the resource, role, or expense.

Price/Unit field

The default price/unit used to calculate the cost for activities that have

labor/non-labor units but no assigned resources and for activities that have assigned

resources or roles that do not have a specified price/unit.

To change the price/unit, type a new amount followed by a forward slash (/) and

time unit designation, for example, $20/h.

Activity ID Prefix field

The single or combination of letters and/or numbers to act as the Activity ID Prefix. This

field can contain 1 to 20 characters.

Activity ID Suffix field

The single or combination of letters and/or numbers to set as the Activity ID Suffix. The

value must be a number between 1 and 999,999.

Increment field

The number to act as the increment. The number must be a value between 1 and

99,999.

Rate Type list

The rate type that corresponds to a specific price/unit value defined for a resource or

role. A resource or role can have up to five rate types and corresponding price/unit

values.

The default rate type setting determines which of a resource's or role's price/unit

values is initially applied to new assignments within a project. The rate type on the

assignment can be edited to change the price/unit.

If the Default Rate Type setting for a project that has existing assignments is changed,

the rate type of those existing assignments will not be changed.

Drive activity dates by default option

Determines whether to set drive activity dates by default.

Resources can be assigned to the same activity more than once option

Determines whether resources can work on the same activity multiple times.

Tips

Changes to the defaults will only be applied to activities new to the project. Existing

activities will not be affected.

706

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Set Project Preferences....

4) In the Project Preferences pane, click Defaults.

Definition Tab of the Create Filter Dialog Box of the Assignments Page

Overview

Use this tab to define the logical constraints and data criteria for the filter.

Screen Elements

Match any/all of the following rules list

Determines whether the filter should match any or all rules.

Field Name field

The name of the parameter used to filter data in the Assignments view. Parameters

are grouped in the following categories:

General: Displays fields that provide typical project information. Examples include

Activity ID and Activity Status.

Dates: Displays fields that provide important dates used during the project

lifecycle. Examples include Actual Finish and Planned Start.

Durations: Displays fields that provide data on the length of time needed to

complete an assignment and the lag time built in between assignments. Examples

include Actual Duration and Planned Lag.

Costs: Displays fields that provide cost information from different aspects of the

project. Examples include Actual Cost and Remaining Cost.

Units: Displays fields that provide resource work unit data. Examples include Actual

Regular Units and Planned Units.

Resource: Displays fields that provide resource data and settings. Examples

include Resource ID and Default Units/Time.

Percent Complete: Displays fields that provide the amount of time completed or

remaining on the resource assignments.

User Defined: Displays additional resource assignment fields created to capture

important information that is not available from the standard fields.

Resource User Defined: Displays additional resource fields created to capture

important information that is not available from the standard fields.

Global Activity Codes: Displays the global activity code fields defined in the

system.

Resource Codes: Displays the global resource code fields defined in the system.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

707

Project Codes: Displays the global project code fields defined in the system.

Note: This field appears without a label in the user interface. It is

always the field furthest to the left in a row of three (3) data criteria

fields.

Constraint field

The list of available constraints. This field appears without a label in the user interface.

It is always the field in the center of the row of three (3) data criteria fields.

Value field

The value on which to filter.

Note: This field appears without a label in the user interface. It is

always the field furthest to the right in a row of three (3) data

criteria fields.

Remove a Row button

Subtracts a row of filter criteria.

Add a Row button

Adds a row of filter criteria.

Add Filter Criteria button

Adds a sub-row of filter criteria. This filter criteria is combined with its parent criteria to

create a very specific criteria statement.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click Filters menu on the view toolbar or view menu

and select Add New Filter.

4) In the Create Filter dialog box, click the Definition tab.

Definition Tab of the Create or Modify Filter Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to define the logical constraints and data criteria for the filter.

Screen Elements

Match any/all of the following rules list

Determines whether the filter should match any or all rules.

708

Field Name field

The name of the field used for the filtering parameter. Select from one of the following

categories:

General: Displays fields concerned with basic information. Examples include

Activity ID or Owner.

Costs: Displays fields concerned with cost. Examples include Actual Expense Cost

or Original Budget.

Dates: Displays fields concerned with dates. Examples include Actual Finish or

Planned Start.

Durations: Displays fields concerned with durations. Examples include Free Float or

Remaining Duration.

Units: Displays fields concerned with units. Examples include Actual Labor Units or

Planned Labor Units.

Multiple Float Paths: Displays fields concerned with multiple float paths. Examples

include Float Path or Float Path Order.

Percent Complete: Displays fields concerned with percent complete. An example

is Percent Complete Type.

Timesheet Feedback: Displays fields concerned with timesheet feedback.

Examples include New Feedback and Review Status.

Project Codes: Displays fields concerned with project codes. Examples include

Current Phase and Location.

Summary: Displays fields concerned with summary information. Examples include

Contains Summary Data and Enable Summarization.

User Defined: Displays fields concerned with items the user creates and defines.

Global Activity Codes: Displays fields concerned with global activity codes.

Examples include Phase or Project ID.

Project Activity Codes: Displays fields concerned with project activity codes.

Examples include Contracts and Phase.

Notes:

This field appears without a label in the user interface. It is

always the field furthest to the left in a row of three (3) data

criteria fields.

The categories available depend on whether you open the

Create or Modify Filter dialog box from the Activities or EPS

page.

Constraint field

The list of available constraints. This field appears without a label in the user interface.

It is always the field in the center of the row of three (3) data criteria fields.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

709

Value field

The value on which to filter.

Note: This field appears without a label in the user interface. It is always the field

furthest to the right in a row of three (3) data criteria fields.

Remove a Row button

Subtracts a row of filter criteria.

Add a Row button

Adds a row of filter criteria.

Add Filter Criteria button

Adds a sub-row of filter criteria. This filter criteria is combined with its parent criteria to

create a very specific criteria statement.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities or EPS.

3) On the Activities or EPS page:

a. Select a view from the Activity View or EPS View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View or Customize Project View dialog box, click the Filters

tab.

5) On the Filters tab, click Add New Filter or select a filter and click Modify Filter.

6) In the Create Filter or Modify Filter dialog box, click the Definition tab.

Description Detail Window of the Cost Accounts Page

Overview

Use this detail window to write a description of the selected cost account.

Screen Elements

Text Editor toolbar

See Text Editor Toolbar (on page 1352).

Work area

Use this area to enter text and modify it using the Text Editor Toolbar.

710

Tips

Right-click to display more options. In addition to the toolbar options, Cut, Copy,

Paste, Font Options, Page Properties, Paragraph Properties, and Insert Table are all

offered.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Cost Accounts.

3) On the Cost Accounts page, click the Description detail window.

Description Detail Window of the EPS Page

Overview

Use this detail window to enter a description of the selected project.

Screen Elements

Text field

Enter a description of the selected project in this field.

Tips

If you have more than one project selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, select a project and click the Description detail window.

Description Detail Window of the Funding Sources Page

Overview

Use this detail window to write a description of the selected funding source.

Screen Elements

Text Editor Toolbar

See Text Editor Toolbar (on page 1352).

Work Area

Use this area to enter a description about the funding source and modify it using the

Text Editor Toolbar.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

711

Tips

Right-click to display more options. In addition to the toolbar options, Cut, Copy,

Paste, Font Options, Page Properties, Paragraph Properties, and Insert Table are all

offered.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Funding Sources.

3) On the Funding Sources page, click the Description detail window.

Description Detail Window of the OBS Page

Overview

Use this detail window to write a description of the selected organizational breakdown

structure (OBS).

Screen Elements

Text Editor toolbar

See Text Editor Toolbar (on page 1352).

Work area

Use this area to enter text and modify it using the Text Editor Toolbar.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click OBS.

3) On the OBS page, click the Description detail window.

Description Detail Window of the Reports Page

Overview

This detail window provides a read-only description for the currently selected report.

Screen Elements

Description field

The unique descriptive summary for this report. The report description is useful in

distinguishing among reports with similar titles or to help users better understand the

utility of the report within your organization.

712

Getting Here

1) Click Reports.

2) On the Reports page:

a. Click View and select Reports.

b. Select a report and click the Description detail window.

Or

a. Click View and select Schedules.

b. Click a report name.

Description Detail Window of the Risk Scoring Matrices Page

Overview

Use this detail window to write a description of the selected risk scoring matrix.

Screen Elements

Text Editor Toolbar

See Text Editor Toolbar (on page 1352).

Work area

Use this area to enter text and modify it using the Text Editor Toolbar.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and click Risk Scoring Matrices.

3) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, click the Description detail window.

Description Detail Window of the Risks Page

Overview

Use this detail window to write a description of the selected risk.

Screen Elements

Text Editor toolbar

See Text Editor Toolbar (on page 1352).

Work area

Use this area to enter text and modify it using the Text Editor Toolbar.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

713

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Risks.

3) On the Risks page, click the Description detail window.

Description Detail Window of the Roles Tab of the Administration Page

Overview

Use the Description detail window to add or edit a description for a role.

Screen Elements

Text Editor toolbar

See Text Editor Toolbar (on page 1352).

Work area

The area where you can enter a description for a role. Use the Text Editor Toolbar (on

page 1352) to modify entered text.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Roles tab.

4) On the Roles tab, click the Description detail window.

Description Section of the Documents Details Page (without content repository)

Overview

Use this tab to enter and format notes about the document.

Screen Elements

Text Editor toolbar

See Text Editor Toolbar (on page 1352).

Work area

The area where you can enter a description. Use the Text Editor Toolbar (on page

1352) to modify text.

Getting Here

From the Documents page:

1) Click Projects.

714

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page:

a. Select a project from the Select Project list if applicable.

b. Select a document from the left pane.

4) On the Document Details page, expand the Description section.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page:

a. Select a project from the Select Project list if applicable.

b. Expand the Project Documents portlet.

4) In the Project Documents portlet, expand the project and select a document.

5) On the Document Details page, expand the Description section.

Description Tab of the Document Details Section (with content repository)

Overview

Use this tab to enter and format notes about the document.

Screen Elements

Text Editor toolbar

See Text Editor Toolbar (on page 1352).

Work area

The area where you can enter a description. Use the Text Editor Toolbar (on page

1352) to modify text.

Tips

The document you select and where you access it might change which tabs are visible.

Getting Here

From the Documents page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab, select a document and click the Description tab.

From the Workspace page:

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

715

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Documents portlet and click the Project

tab.

4) On the Project tab, select a document and click Edit Details.

5) In the Document Details dialog box, click the Description tab.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Documents portlet and click the Private

Documents tab.

4) On the Private Documents tab, select a document and click Edit Details.

5) In the Document Details dialog box, click the Description tab.

Document Categories Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure document categories.

Screen Elements

Document Categories Toolbar

See Categories Toolbar (see "Enterprise Data Categories Toolbar" on page 1258).

Name field

The name of the document. For example, document category designations can

identify documents that are project standards or project deliverables.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Documents and click Document Categories.

Document Details Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to view the details for a document if you have the content repository

configured. With the appropriate access, based on a document's security policy, you

can edit a document's details.

716

Screen Elements

General tab

See General Tab of the Document Details Dialog Box of the Documents Portlet.

Description tab

See Description Tab of the Document Details Dialog Box of the Documents Portlet. This

tab is available when you are viewing a document on the Project Tab of the

Documents Portlet.

Related Items tab

See Related Items Tab of the Document Details Dialog Box of the Documents Portlet.

This tab is available when you are viewing a document on the Project Tab of the

Documents Portlet.

Version tab

See Version Tab of the Document Details Dialog Box of the Documents Portlet.

History tab

See History Tab of the Document Details Dialog Box of the Documents Portlet.

Getting Here

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Documents portlet and click the Project

tab.

4) On the Project tab, select a document and click Edit Details.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Documents portlet and click the Private

Documents tab.

4) On the Private Documents tab, select a document and click Edit Details.

Document Details Page of the Documents Page (without content repository)

Overview

Use this section to view document details. With appropriate privileges, you can edit the

document's details.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

717

Screen Elements

E-mail link

Enables you to configure and send an e-mail about a document. The Subject field

contains the title of the document. The application automatically populates the

message with specific information such as the associated project name, document

name, author, and version number. You can add additional information as

necessary.

General section

See General Section of the Documents Details Page (without content repository) (on

page 799).

Description section

See Description Section of the Documents Details Page (without content repository)

(on page 713).

Related Items section

See Related Items Section of the Document Details Page (without content repository)

(on page 984).

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page:

a. Select a project from the Select Project list if applicable.

b. Select a document from the left pane.

Document Details Section of the Documents Page (with content repository)

Overview

Use this section to view a project document's details. Also, with the appropriate access,

based on a document's security policy, you can edit a document's details.

Screen Elements

General tab

See General Tab of the Document Details Section (on page 805).

Description tab

See Description Tab of the Document Details Section (with content repository) (on

page 714).

718

Related Items tab

See Related Items Tab of the Document Details Section (with content repository) (on

page 985).

Version tab

See Version Tab of the Document Details Section (with content repository) (on page

1145).

History tab

See History Tab of the Document Details Section (with content repository) (on page

832).

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab and select a document.

Document Review Details Dialog Box of the Project Tab

Overview

Use this dialog box to view detailed information for a selected document that is under

review or that has already been reviewed.

Screen Elements

Name field

The name of the review.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

Initiator field

The name of the user who started the review.

Due Date field

The date all reviewers need to complete the review. If no due date is specified for the

review, then this field appears blank.

Review Type list

Determines the type of review:

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

719

Anyone May Review: Enables any one of the listed reviewers to approve or reject

the document version. Once one reviewer approves it, the review status changes

to Review Approved; once one reviewer rejects it, the review status changes to

Review Rejected.

Everyone Must Review: Requires each listed reviewer to respond to the document

review to complete it. To change the review status to Review Approved, all

reviewers must approve the document. To change the review status to Review

Rejected, only one reviewer needs to reject the document.

Everyone Must Review in Sequence: Requires each listed reviewer to respond to

the document review in a designated sequence to complete it. To change the

review status to Review Approved, all reviewers must approve the document. To

change the review status to Review Rejected, only one reviewer needs to reject

the document. Once one reviewer rejects the document, the review is complete.

Pending Reviewers field

The names of the users who are assigned to the review and have not yet responded.

Getting Here

From the Documents page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab, select a document and click the Version tab.

5) On the Version tab, click Review Status for a version.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Documents portlet.

4) On the Project Documents portlet, click the Project tab.

5) On the Project tab, select a document and click Edit Details.

6) In the Document Details dialog box, click the Version tab.

7) On the Version tab, click Review Status for a version.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, expand the My Documents portlet and click the Recent

Documents tab.

3) On the Recent Documents tab, select a project and click Edit Details.

4) In the Document Details dialog box, click the Version tab.

5) On the Version tab, click Review Status for a version.

720

Document Reviews Portlet

Overview

Use this portlet to view document reviews that either you have initiated or that require

action from you. The data displayed in this portlet is independent of the portfolio, project,

and project code filtering specified in the dashboard's Filter by field.

The Document Reviews portlet is unavailable if the content repository is not installed in

your P6 environment. For information about the status of the content or workflow

repositories, contact your P6 administrator.

Screen Elements

Action Required tab

See Action Required Tab of the Document Reviews Portlet (on page 539).

My Reviews tab

See My Reviews Tab of the Document Reviews Portlet (on page 892).

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Document Reviews portlet.

Document Statuses Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure document statuses.

Screen Elements

Document Statuses toolbar

See Enterprise Data Document Statuses Toolbar (on page 1263).

Name field

The name of the status. For example, document status designations can identify

which documents are in review or completed.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Documents and click Document Statuses.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

721

Document UDFs Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure user defined fields for documents.

Screen Elements

User Defined Fields toolbar

See User Defined Fields Toolbar (on page 1361).

User Defined Field field

The name of the user-defined field.

Data Type field

The name of the type of data that corresponds to each user-defined field. The data

type you select determines the type of data you can specify in a field. The following

data types are available:

Text: Allows you to use text or a combination of text and numbers.

Start Date: Allows you to enter Start Date information only.

Finish Date: Allows you to enter Finish Date information only.

Cost: Allows you to enter currency values.

Number: Allows you to use numerals with two decimal places.

Integer: Allows you to use numeric data, but not a number related to money.

Indicator: Allows you to use an indicator field that you can use to enter

color-coded icon values in columns and display color-coded text in reports.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Documents and click Document UDFs.

Documents Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to relate or remove documents from an activity or to view a

related document.

Note: Your ability to manage document relationships depends on

two factors: your application security privileges and the security

policy of an individual document (if the document was added

from the content repository).

722

Screen Elements

Documents toolbar

See Documents Toolbar of the Activities Page (on page 1251).

Title field

The title of a document assigned to the activity.

Document Category list

The classification label used to organize documents.

Note: This field only contains data for WP&Doc documents, or documents that were

not added from the content repository. This field is blank for documents that were

added from the content repository.

Status field

The status of the document.

Document status designations are created in the Admin Categories dialog box in P6.

Public Location field

The selected document's publicly-accessible file location. All project participants can

view this file.

Note: This field only contains data for WP&Doc documents, or documents that were

not added from the content repository. This field is blank for documents that were

added from the content repository.

Tips

If you have more than one activity selected, the detail window will not be visible.

If you have a project template open, the icons in the detail window will be disabled.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Documents detail window.

Documents Details Page of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this page to review the details of a selected document.

Screen Elements

Document field

The name of the document. This field can be modified.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

723

Remove Assignment link

Removes the document assignment.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Documents section and click a document

title.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Documents section and click a document

title.

Documents Page (with content repository)

Overview

Use this page to view, check in, check out, and download selected documents from one

or more projects, associate additional items with a selected document, and compare

documents across projects. With appropriate privileges, you can edit document

information or use a selected document as a template for creating new documents of

the same type for multiple projects.

Screen Elements

Project tab

See Project Tab of the Documents Page (with content repository) (on page 974).

WP & Docs tab

See WP & Docs Tab of the Documents Page (with content repository) (on page 1173).

Document Details section

See Document Details Section of the Documents Page (with content repository) (on

page 717).

724

Tips

The actions that are available for a document depend on the document security

policy.

The ability to start a review is only available with an installed and configured content

repository. See your P6 administrator.

Depending on the configuration of your content repository, the ability to search by

author might not be available. For information about P6 features supported by your

content repository, see your P6 administrator.

If P6 is used with the Oracle Universal Content Management content repository, your

workgroup documents display in the search results from the My Documents portlet.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

Documents Page (without content repository)

Overview

Use this page to view document details and send e-mail about a document. This page

also enables you to associate additional items with the document and, with appropriate

privileges, edit document information.

Screen Elements

Select Project field

The list of open projects. You can select only one project at atime. Any changes you

make apply only to the currently selected project.

Refresh

Refreshes the current screen with any new, updated, or removed data.

Modify

Displays the following options to modify the issue forms page:

Close Modify: Closes the Modify options.

Add Form: Enables you to select a form to add.

Delete: Deletes the currently selected issue forms.

Search list

The criteria with which to search.

for field

Enter information to search with the corresponding Search list choice.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

725

Search button

Displays options based on your entered criteria.

Clear Results button

Clears the for field and removes the options based on your entered criteria to display

all possible codes.

Organized By list

The criteria by which to organize search results. Select from Document Category,

Document Hierarchy, or Document Status.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

Documents Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page

Overview

Use this portlet to view and access all documents that belong to the workgroup. You can

view project documents that are related to activities assigned to the workgroup, as well

as create and manage documents that only members of the workgroup can access

and share.

When a content repository is installed, the Documents portlet contains two tabs: Project

and Workgroup.

Screen Elements

Project tab

See Project Tab of the Documents Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page (on page

974).

Workgroup tab

See Workgroup Tab of the Documents Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page (on

page 1167).

Tips

A appears beside a document if it is checked out.

Your ability to modify or perform actions on a project document associated with a

workgroup activity depends on the document's security policy. Security policies do

not apply to workgroup documents.

Getting Here

From the Workspace page:

726

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Workgroups portlet and select a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, expand the Documents portlet.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Workgroups portlet and select a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, expand the Documents portlet.

Documents Section of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this section to assign documents to activities and view the details of these

documents.

Screen Elements

Assign Documents link

Opens a dialog box with all possible documents that can be assigned to the activity.

Title field

The title of a document assigned to the activity.

Document Category list

The classification label used to organize documents.

Note: This field only contains data for WP&Doc documents, or documents that were

not added from the content repository. This field is blank for documents that were

added from the content repository.

Status field

The status of the document.

Document status designations are created in the Admin Categories dialog box in P6.

Public Location field

The selected document's publicly-accessible file location. All project participants can

view this file.

Note: This field only contains data for WP&Doc documents, or documents that were

not added from the content repository. This field is blank for documents that were

added from the content repository.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

727

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Documents section.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Documents section.

Earned Value Page

Overview

Use this page to specify default settings for calculating earned value. You can change

the settings for specific WBS elements in the Earned Value detail window in Activities

page.

Screen Elements

Technique for computing performance percent complete

In this section, choose one of the following for computing performance percent

complete:

Activity % Complete: Select to calculate the earned value according to activity

completion percentages.

0/100 % Complete: Select to calculate the earned value as 100 percent after the

activity ends.

Use WBS Milestones: Select to calculate the earned value by defining milestones

at the WBS level and assigning a weight to each of them.

50/50 % Complete: Select to calculate the earned value as 50 percent after the

activity starts and until it ends. After the activity ends, the activity's earned value is

100 percent.

Custom % Complete: Enter a percent to calculate earned value after the activity

starts and until the activity ends. After the activity ends, the activity's earned value

is 100 percent.

728

Technique for computing estimate to complete (ETC)

In this section, choose a performance factor (PF) or remaining cost for computing

earned-value estimate-to-complete (ETC):

ETC = remaining cost for activity

or

ETC equals PF multiplied by (Budget at Completion minus Earned Value), where:

PF=1

PF=1/Cost Performance Index

PF=1/(Cost Performance Index*Schedule Performance Index)

PF=Enter Value

Earned Value Calculation

In this section, choose how to calculate the earned value:

When calculating earned value from a baseline use Choose 'At completion with

current dates,' 'Budgeted values with planned dates,' or 'Budgeted values with

current dates.'

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select Application Settings.

2) On the Application Settings pane, click Earned Value.

Earned Value Performance Portlet of the Dashboards Page

Overview

Use this portlet to view both current and forecast earned value schedule variance (SV),

cost variance (CV), or labor unit variance calculations. Data is calculated and displayed

in either costs or labor units, depending on your preference. Negative values indicate

unfavorable performance. Status indicators help you gauge whether a variance is within

an acceptable range or whether you will need to take corrective action, based on the

thresholds you define.

Screen Elements

To Date - Schedule (SV) field

For costs, calculated as: Earned Value Cost minus Planned Value Cost.

For labor units, calculated as: Earned Value Labor Units minus Planned Value Labor

Units.

To Date - Cost (CV) field

Calculated as: Earned Value Cost minus Actual Cost.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

729

To Date - Labor Units (CV) field

Calculated as: Earned Value Labor Units minus Actual Labor Units

Forecast at Completion - Schedule field

For costs, calculated as: Budget at Completion multiplied by Schedule Variance

Index (SVI), where SVI equals SV divided by Planned Value Cost.

For labor units, calculated as: Baseline (BL) Labor Units multiplied by SVI Labor Units,

where SVI equals SV divided by Planned Value Labor Units.

Forecast at Completion - Cost field

Calculated as: Budget at Completion multiplied by Cost Variance Index (CVI), where

CVI equals CV divided by Earned Value Cost.

Forecast at Completion - Labor Units field

Calculated as: Baseline (BL) Labor Units multiplied by Cost Variance Index (CVI) Labor

Units, where CVI equals CV divided by Earned Value Labor Units.

Tips

The Earned Value Performance portlet calculates and displays data in cost or labor

units based on the option selected on the Global tab in My Preferences.

If a dashboard's Filter by option is set to a portfolio or project code, the portlet lists

each project included in the portfolio or project code filter and displays each

project's earned value performance data.

You can click a project name in the portlet to display the Performance Status page or

the associated Project Workspace; the page displayed depends on your module

access.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Earned Value Performance portlet.

Earned Value Performance Portlet of the Workspace Page

Overview

The Earned Value Performance portlet displays both current and forecast earned value

schedule variance (SV), cost variance (CV), and labor unit variance calculations.

Negative values indicate unfavorable performance. Status indicators help you gauge

whether a variance is within an acceptable range or whether you will need to take

corrective action, based on the thresholds you define.

730

Screen Elements

Legend

Key to performance threshold indicators. Use these visual indicators to quickly scan

values based on thresholds you define:

Critical: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio requires significant corrective

action.

Warning: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio needs attention and is

performing below expectations.

Acceptable: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio is performing within an

expected range.

Exceptional: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio is exceeding

expectations.

To Date area:

Schedule field

Calculated as: Earned Value Labor Units minus Planned Value Labor Units

The variance percentage is calculated as: (Earned Value Labor Units minus Planned

Value Labor Units) divided by Planned Value Labor Units.

Labor Units field

Calculated as: Earned Value Labor Units minus Actual Labor Units

The variance percentage is calculated as: (Earned Value Labor Units minus Actual

Labor Units) divided by Earned Value Labor Units.

Forecast at Completion area:

Schedule field

Calculated as: Budget At Completion multiplied by Schedule Variance Index

Where: Schedule Variance Index equals Schedule Variance divided by Planned

Value Labor Units

The variance percentage is calculated as: (Budget At Completion multiplied by

Schedule Variance Index) divided by Budget At Completion.

Labor Units field

Calculated as: BAC Labor Units multiplied by Cost Variance Index

Where: CVI equals CV divided by Earned Value Labor Units

The variance percentage is calculated as: (BAC Labor Units multiplied by CVI)

divided by BAC Labor Units.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

731

Tips

In the Project Workspace, the Earned Value Performance portlet calculates and

displays data in cost or labor units based on the option selected in the Project

Performance section of the Customize Workspace page.

Project Workspace portlets display data for the selected project only. When multiple

projects are open, you must select the project you want to work with from the Select

Project box at the top right of the Workspace page. When a single project is open,

the Select Project box does not appear.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Earned Value Performance portlet.

Edit Dates and Constraints Page of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this page to edit dates and constraints for the activity.

Screen Elements

Start Date option

Determines whether the activity has started.

Start Date field

For started activities, the actual start date. For not started activities, set to the planned

start date until the project is scheduled. When scheduled, set to the remaining early

start date.

Finish Date option

Determines whether the activity has finished.

Finish Date field

For completed activities, the actual finish date. For not started and in-progress

activities, set to the planned finish date if the project has not been scheduled. When

scheduled, set to the remaining early finish date.

Suspend Date field

The date work has stopped on a given activity for an unknown, but temporary, period

of time. For example, an event might force an activity to be interrupted or resource

constraints might put an activity on hold.

732

The suspend date must be later than the actual start date, which the activity must

have. The progress of the activity can be resumed by setting the resume date. The

suspend/resume period behaves like a non-work time on the activity calendar or

resource calendar for task and resource dependent activities.

Resume Date field

The date when a suspended task or resource dependent activity is resumed. The

resume date must be later than the suspend date and earlier than the actual finish

date.

The suspend/resume period behaves like a non-work time on the activity calendar or

resource calendar for task and resource dependent activities.

Duration Percent Complete field

The percent complete of the activity duration. The type of percent you see depends

on the percent complete type you select for the activity in the General section of the

Activity Form page.

The planned duration is taken from the current plan, not from the baseline.

Calculated as (Planned Duration minus Remaining Duration) divided by Planned

Duration multiplied by 100. Always in the range 0 to 100.

Primary Constraint list

Determines the primary constraint on the activity. Choose from one of the following

options:

Start On: Imposes the specific start date you choose. The Start On constraint can

delay an activity's early start or move forward an activity's late start to satisfy the

constraint date.

Start On or Before: Defines the latest date an activity can start. This constraint only

affects late dates and might decrease total float. When calculating a schedule,

P6 imposes the start on or before constraint in the backward pass only if the

calculated late start date will be later than the imposed date

Start On or After: Defines the earliest date an activity can begin. This constraint

affects only early dates. When calculating a schedule, P6 imposes the start on or

after constraint in the forward pass only if the calculated early start date will be

earlier than the imposed date.

Finish On: Imposes the specific finish date you choose. The Finish On constraint can

delay an activity's early finish or move forward an activity's late finish to satisfy the

constraint date

Finish On or Before: Defines the latest time an activity can finish. The finish on or

before constraint affects only late dates.

Finish On or After: Defines the earliest date an activity can finish. The finish on or

after constraint reduces float to coordinate parallel activities, ensuring that the

finish of an activity is not scheduled before the specified date. It is usually applied

to activities with few predecessors that must finish before the next phase of a

project.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

733

As Late As Possible: Imposes a restriction on an activity with positive float to allow it

to start as late as possible without delaying its successors. When calculating a

schedule, P6 sets the activity's early dates as late as possible without affecting

successor activities.

Mandatory Start: Imposes the early and late start dates you choose. P6 uses the

mandatory early start date regardless of its effect on network logic. A mandatory

early start date could affect the late dates for all activities that lead to the

constrained activity and all early dates for the activities that lead from the

constrained activity.

Mandatory Finish: Imposes the early and late finish dates you choose. P6 uses the

mandatory finish date regardless of its effect on network logic. This constraint

affects the late dates for all activities that lead to the constrained activity and all

early dates for the activities that lead from the constrained activity.

Primary Constraint Date field

The date associated with the primary constraint, if the activity has a primary

constraint assigned.

Secondary Constraint list

Determines the secondary constraint on the activity. Available only when the Primary

Constraint is not Start On, Finish On, Mandatory Start, or Mandatory Finish. Choose

from one of the following options:

Start On or After: Defines the earliest date an activity can begin. This constraint

affects only early dates. When calculating a schedule, P6 imposes the start on or

after constraint in the forward pass only if the calculated early start date will be

earlier than the imposed date.

Finish On or After: Defines the earliest date an activity can finish. The finish on or

after constraint reduces float to coordinate parallel activities, ensuring that the

finish of an activity is not scheduled before the specified date. It is usually applied

to activities with few predecessors that must finish before the next phase of a

project.

Secondary Constraint Date field

The date associated with the secondary constraint, if the activity has a secondary

constraint assigned.

This field is only available if a primary constraint is already entered.

Expected Finish field

The date the activity's primary resource expects the activity to end.

Only the primary resource can edit this field if the activity has started.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

734

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Status section and click Edit dates and

constraint.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Status section and click Edit dates and

constraint.

Edit Day Dialog Box of Calendars

Overview

Use this dialog box to edit the work time for the selected day.

Screen Elements

Set day as field

This setting indicates whether the application will treat this day as Work or Nonwork

day.

Total work hours option

If you select this option, you can manually enter the total work hours for the day.

Total work hours field

The total work hours for the day. For example, 8.5.

Detail work hours option

If you select this option, you can manually enter a series of work hour ranges for the

day.

From: fields

The starting times for each detailed work hour range.

To: fields

The ending times for each detailed work hour range.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

735

Create work time button

Adds a new work hour range to the series.

Remove work period button

Removes a work hour range from the series.

Set to Standard button

Sets the selected calendar day work or nonwork hours to the standard work time.

Getting Here

To access enterprise project data:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data.

2) In the Enterprise Project Data dialog box, expand Projects and click Project

Calendars.

3) On the Project Calendars page, select a calendar and click the Calendar tab or

Standard Work Week tab.

4) On the Calendar tab or Standard Work Week tab, right-click a day and choose Edit

Calendar Day.

To access enterprise resource data:

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, click Resource Calendars.

3) On the Resource Calendars page, select a calendar and click the Calendar tab or

Standard Work Week tab.

4) On the Calendar tab or Standard Work Week tab, right-click a day and choose Edit

Calendar Day.

To access enterprise data:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, perform one of the following steps:

expand Global and click Global Calendars.

expand Projects and click Project Calendars.

expand Resources and click Resource Calendars.

3) On the Global, Project, or Resource Calendars page, select a calendar and click the

Calendar tab or Standard Work Week tab.

4) On the Calendar tab or Standard Work Week tab, right-click a day and choose Edit

Calendar Day.

736

Edit Duration and Units Page of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this page to edit the duration and units for the activity.

Screen Elements

Planned Duration field

The total working time from the activity planned start date to the planned finish date.

The planned working time is calculated using the activity's calendar.

Actual Duration field

The total working time from the activity actual start date to the actual finish date for

completed activities, or the current data date for in-progress activities.

The actual working time is computed using the activity's calendar.

Remaining Duration field

The total working time from the activity remaining start date to the remaining finish

date.

The remaining working time is calculated using the activity's calendar. Before the

activity is started, the remaining duration is the same as the planned duration. After

the activity is completed the remaining duration is zero.

Planned Labor Units field

The expected number of units or the expected total cost required to complete the

activity.

Actual Labor Units field

The expected number of units that have been expended or the total cost that has

been incurred for the selected activity.

Remaining Labor Units field

The remaining units for all labor resources assigned to the activity.

The remaining units reflects the work remaining to be done for the activity. Before the

activity is started, the remaining units are the same as the planned units. After the

activity is completed, the remaining units are zero.

Planned Non-Labor Units field

The expected number of units or the expected total cost required to complete the

activity.

Actual Non-Labor Units field

The number of units that have been expended or the total cost that has been

incurred for the selected activity.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

737

Remaining Non-Labor Units field

The remaining units for all non-labor resources assigned to the activity.

The remaining units reflects the work remaining to be done for the activity. Before the

activity is started, the remaining units are the same as the planned units. After the

activity is completed, the remaining units are zero.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Status section and click Edit duration and

units.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Status section and click Edit duration and

units.

Edit Relationship Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to edit the lag and type of relationship that exists between two

activities. In order to edit a relationship, the Show Relationship Lines option in the View

menu must be enabled.

Screen Elements

Predecessor field

The name of the selected activity's predecessor in a read-only field.

Successor field

The name of the selected activity's successor in a read-only format.

Relationship Type field

The relationship between two activities. Select from the following types:

Finish to Start: A relationship in which the start of a successor activity depends on

the completion of its predecessor activity. This is the default activity relationship.

738

Finish to Finish: A relationship in which the finish of a successor activity depends on

the finish of its predecessor activity.

Start to Start: A relationship between activities in which the start of a successor

activity depends on the start of its predecessor.

Start to Finish: A relationship between activities in which a successor activity

cannot complete until its predecessor activity starts.

Lag field

The amount of time the predecessor activity was delayed, affecting the ability of its

successor activity to start or finish.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the View menu and select Gantt Chart.

4) In the Gantt chart, right-click on an activity relationship line and select Edit

Relationship.

Edit Resource Assignment Dialog Box

Overview

Use Activity Resource Details to assign resources and specify details for the resources

such as units, costs, and rate.

Screen Elements

General area

Enter information in the following fields to display in the Resources section:

Resource field

The name of the resource.

Role field

The name of the role.

Primary Resource option

Determines whether the corresponding resource is the activity's primary resource.

Typically, the primary resource is the person responsible for the overall work on the

activity and for updating activity status.

Units area

Enter information in the following fields to display in the Resources section:

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

739

Planned field

The expected number of units required to complete the activity.

Actual field

The exact number of units that have been expended or the total cost that has been

incurred for the selected activity.

Remaining field

The number of units required to complete the activity.

Remaining Units/Time field

The units per time required to complete the activity.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) On the Analysis page, click the Role Usage tab.

4) On the Role Usage tab, select a role and select to display the Spreadsheet.

5) On the Spreadsheet, click a project name.

6) In the Resource Staffing dialog box, click an activity name.

7) In the Activity Details dialog box, expand the Resources section and click a Role

Name.

Edit Resource Assignment Section of Activity Details of the Resources Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to assign resources and specify details for the resources such as units,

costs, and rate.

Screen Elements

Resource field

The name for the resource. Click the name of a resource to view their usage in a

spreadsheet or histogram format.

Role field

The name of the role.

Primary Resource option

Determines whether the corresponding resource is the activity's primary resource.

Typically, the primary resource is the person responsible for the overall work on the

activity and for updating activity status.

740

Units area

The information to display in the Resources section:

Planned field

The expected number of units required to complete the activity.

Actual field

The exact number of units that have been expended or the total cost that has been

incurred for the selected activity.

Remaining field

The number of units required to complete the activity.

Remaining Units/Time field

The units per time required to complete the activity.

Delete Assignment link

Deletes the current assignment.

Getting Here

From the Team Usage page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Team Usage.

3) On the Team Usage page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Project list.

b. Click the Organized By list and select Roles.

c. Expand a project and select a role in the left pane.

d. Select the Spreadsheet option and click a project in the right pane.

4) In the Resources dialog box:

a. Click the Unstaffed and Staffed option to show all activities.

b. Select an activity.

5) On the Activity Details page, expand the Resources section and click a resource or

role.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, expand the Open Requests for Resources portlet and

select a project or role name, depending on your customization options.

3) On the Resource Staffing Details page:

a. Click the Unstaffed and Staffed option to show all activities.

b. Select an activity.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

741

4) On the Activity Details page, expand the Resources section and click a resource or

role.

Edit Resource or Role Details Page of the Open Requests for Resources Portlet

Overview

Use this page to configure an activity's resource, role, or units.

Screen Elements

Resource field

The name for the resource. Click the name of a resource to view their usage in a

spreadsheet or histogram format.

Role field

The name of the role.

Primary Resource option

Determines whether this resource is the main resource for the activity.

Units area

Enter information in the following fields to display in the Resources section:

Planned field

The expected number of units required to complete the activity.

Actual field

The exact number of units that have been expended or the total cost that has been

incurred for the selected activity.

Remaining field

The number of units required to complete the activity.

Remaining Units/Time field

The units per time required to complete the activity.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Open Requests for Resources portlet.

4) In the Open Requests for Resources portlet, select a project or a role name.

5) On the Resource Staffing page, select an activity.

6) On the Activity Details page, expand the Resources section and select a resource or

role.

742

Add or Edit Service Dialog Box of the Scheduled Services Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to create or modify the type, time, frequency, and projects for a

service.

Screen Elements

Service Name field

The name of the selected service.

Service Type list

Determines which type of service will run.

Enable Service option

Determines whether the scheduled service you are creating or editing should be

enabled.

Run Service lists

Determines how often the service will run.

Start Time selector

Determines the time the service will run.

Select Projects table

The projects to which the application will apply the scheduled services.

Add

Enables you to select a project, group of projects, or EPS to add to the Select Projects

table. You can select from any project to which you have OBS access. The Assign

button is disabled if you do not have the appropriate security for a project, the

project or EPS is already assigned to the service, or the parent of the selected EPS

node is already in the Select Projects table.

Delete

Deletes the selected item or items permanently.

Use this project's settings field

Enables you to select the project which will determine the schedule or resource

leveling settings to apply to the service when it is run. This field is only available for

schedule or level services.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

743

Tips

You cannot modify the Service Type if projects are assigned to the service. If there are no

projects assigned, the list is enabled.

Getting Here

The Add Service dialog box:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Scheduled Services.

2) On the Scheduled Services page, click Add.

The Edit Service dialog box:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Scheduled Services.

2) On the Scheduled Services page, select a service and click Edit.

Edit Spending and Benefit Plans of Project Page

Overview

Use this page to edit spending and benefit plans for each time period in which your

organization wants to track ROI for a specific project. You can also use the page to

specify the annual discount rate and period.

Screen Elements

Date field

The month, quarter, or year in which you want to track ROI for this project. The dates

listed correspond to the choice you made in the Specify the timescale for entering

ROI spending and benefit plans list on the previous page. You will see one of the

following series of dates for editing your spending and benefit plans depending on

the timescale selected:

Twelve (12) months within a single year

Eight (8) quarters spanning two (2) years

Ten (10) years

Spending Plan field

The anticipated or actual project spending for the corresponding time period.

Benefit Plan field

The anticipated or actual profit or benefit portion for each time period. Typically, the

benefit plan begins after the project has completed.

744

Note: The plan values you enter should not be discounted and can

represent positive or negative amounts. Regardless of the

timescale selected for display, spending and benefit plan values

are stored in the database by month. Quarterly and decade totals

are computed by totaling the respective 3-month or 12-month

periods. When you edit a value on a year/quarter timescale, the

new value is stored into the database in the first month of the

quarter; the remaining two months store a value of zero. Likewise,

when you edit a value on a decade/year timescale, the new

value is stored into the database in the first month of the year; the

remaining eleven months store a value of zero.

Annual Discount Rate field

The interest rate associated with the cost of an investment from your commercial

bank or another funding source. Valid values are 0 to 100. This rate is used to

calculate Total Spending Plan Present Value and Total Benefit Plan Present Value.

For example, an annual growth rate of an investment such as 4.75% can be used as

an annual discount rate. This rate is used when a future value is assumed and you are

trying to find the required net present value.

Discount Application Period list

The time interval (month, quarter, or year) used to determine how the discount rate is

applied in calculating the present value of the spending and benefit plans. When you

change this field value, the application recalculates the discounted TPV of both the

spending and benefit plans as well as the NPV, ROI, and Payback Period for the

project.

Getting Here

1) Click Portfolios.

2) On the Portfolio navigation bar, click ROI.

3) On the Portfolio ROI page, click the Details link for a project.

4) On the Return on Investment of Project page, click Edit Spending and Benefit Plans.

Effect Detail Window of the Risks Page

Overview

Use this detail window to write a description of the effect of the selected risk.

Screen Elements

Text Editor toolbar

See Text Editor Toolbar (on page 1352).

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

745

Work area

Use this area to enter text and modify it using the Text Editor Toolbar.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Risks.

3) On the Risks page, click the Effect detail window.

Enterprise Data Page

Overview

Use this page to configure the enterprise data for your entire organization.

Screen Elements

Enterprise Data Category list

A list of all the enterprise data types grouped by category. Select an entry in the list to

open its enterprise data settings.

Global category

Currencies: Enables you to define the monetary units used to store costs for all

projects in the database.

Financial Periods: Enables you to define predefined time periods you can apply to

financial or scheduling data to consistently measure and compare data.

Global Calendars: Enables you to define available workdays, workhours, holidays,

and so on that apply to all projects in the database.

Overhead Codes: Enables you to categorize users' non-project-related time,

which they use with timesheets, for example, sick time, vacation, and so on.

Timesheet Periods: Enables you to define the amount of time timesheets cover, for

example, every two weeks or every month.

Projects category

Baseline Types: Enables you to categorize and standardize baselines across

projects.

Funding Sources: Enables you to define the agencies, businesses, or groups that

provide funding for projects.

Notebook Topics: Enables you to define types of notebook topics and allows

multiple users to apply a common theme or label to shared information.

Project Calendars: Enables you to define standard work weeks for projects.

Project Codes: Enables you to track different projects based on characteristics

they share.

Project UDFs: Enables you to define organization-specific data related to projects.

746

WBS Categories: Enables you to clasify work breakdown structures (WBSs), to help

you organize, filter, report, and maintain WBS information.

WBS UDFs: Enables you to define organization-specific data related to work

breakdown structures.

Activities category

Enables you to create, modify, and delete various activity-related data.

Activity Codes: Enables you to categorize activities into logical groups based on

your organization's criteria.

Activity UDF: Enables you to define organization-specific data related to activities.

Cost Accounts: Enables you to monitor project expenses, activity costs, and

earned value throughout the project life cycle.

Expense Categories: Enables you to classify and standardize expenses, and

organize and maintain your expense information.

Expense UDFs: Enables you to define organization-specific data related to

expenses.

Step Templates: Enables you to define a group of steps common to multiple

activities, and then assign the template to different activities.

Step UDFs: Enables you to define organization-specific data related to steps.

Resources category

Enables you to create, modify, and delete various resource-related data.

Assignment UDFs: Enables you to define organization-specific data related to

resource assignments.

Rate Types: Enables you to define price/units used to calculate costs for resource

assignments.

Resource Calendars: Enables you to define resource-specific workdays and

workhours in a day.

Resource Codes: Enables you to categorize resources into logical groups based

on your organization's criteria.

Resource Curves: Enables you to define custom resource curves, which specify the

allocation of resources and costs over the duration of an activity. Resource units

and costs are distributed evenly throughout an activity unless you specify

nonlinear distribution using resource curves.

Resource UDFs: Enables you to define organization-specific data related to

resources.

Units of Measure: Enables you to define standardized ways to define units of time

or materials.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

747

Risks category

Risk Categories: Enables you to clasify risk types for your specific project or business

that are used to categorize and organize project risks. Categorizing risks enables

you to analyze the types of risks occurring and see trends within the project or

across multiple projects.

Risk Thresholds: Enables you to define ranges of values (for example, ontetary,

time, quality, technical, etc.) to use in rating or assessing the impact of a risk to a

project.

Risk Scoring Matrix: Enables you to calculate the impact of risk on a project, to

help you determine if the risk should be addressed during the course of the

project, or if the risk does not present a significant impact to the cost or schedule

of the project.

Risk UDFs: Enables you to define organization-specific data-User Defined Fields

(UDFs)-related to risks.

Issues category

Issue Codes: Enables you to categorize issues into logical groups based on your

organization's criteria.

Issue UDFs: Enables you to define organization-specific data related to issues.

Documents category

Enables you to create, modify, and delete various documents-related data.

Document Categories: Enables you to classify documents into

organization-specific categories, such as project standards or project

deliverables.

Document Statuses: Enables you to define organization-specific statuses for

documents, such as in review, approved, or completed.

Document UDFs: Enables you to define organization-specific data related to

documents.

Getting Here

Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the Administer

menu and select Enterprise Data.

Enterprise Project Data Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to configure the enterprise project data for your entire organization.

Note: This dialog box presents only a subset of enterprise data for

projects and activities. To view all enterprise data, see the

alternate steps under Getting Here at the bottom of the page.

748

Screen Elements

Enterprise Project Data Category list

The list of all the enterprise project data categories and types.

Projects category

Baseline Types: Enables you to categorize and standardize baselines across

projects.

Funding Sources: Enables you to define the agencies, businesses, or groups that

provide funding for projects.

Notebook Topics: Enables you to define types of notebook topics and allows

multiple users to apply a common theme or label to shared information.

Project Calendars: Enables you to define standard work weeks for projects.

Project Codes: Enables you to track different projects based on characteristics

they share.

Project UDFs: Enables you to define organization-specific data related to projects.

WBS Categories: Enables you to clasify work breakdown structures (WBSs), to help

you organize, filter, report, and maintain WBS information.

WBS UDFs: Enables you to define organization-specific data related to work

breakdown structures.

Activities category

Enables you to create, modify, and delete various activity-related data.

Activity Codes: Enables you to categorize activities into logical groups based on

your organization's criteria.

Activity UDF: Enables you to define organization-specific data related to activities.

Cost Accounts: Enables you to monitor project expenses, activity costs, and

earned value throughout the project life cycle.

Expense Categories: Enables you to classify and standardize expenses, and

organize and maintain your expense information.

Expense UDFs: Enables you to define organization-specific data related to

expenses.

Step Templates: Enables you to define a group of steps common to multiple

activities, and then assign the template to different activities.

Step UDFs: Enables you to define organization-specific data related to steps.

Risks category

Risk Categories: Enables you to clasify risk types for your specific project or business

that are used to categorize and organize project risks. Categorizing risks enables

you to analyze the types of risks occurring and see trends within the project or

across multiple projects.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

749

Risk Thresholds: Enables you to define ranges of values (for example, ontetary,

time, quality, technical, etc.) to use in rating or assessing the impact of a risk to a

project.

Risk Scoring Matrix: Enables you to calculate the impact of risk on a project, to

help you determine if the risk should be addressed during the course of the

project, or if the risk does not present a significant impact to the cost or schedule

of the project.

Risk UDFs: Enables you to define organization-specific data-User Defined Fields

(UDFs)-related to risks.

Issues category

Issue Codes: Enables you to categorize issues into logical groups based on your

organization's criteria.

Issue UDFs: Enables you to define organization-specific data related to issues.

Documents category

Enables you to create, modify, and delete various documents-related data.

Document Categories: Enables you to classify documents into

organization-specific categories, such as project standards or project

deliverables.

Document Statuses: Enables you to define organization-specific statuses for

documents, such as in review, approved, or completed.

Document UDFs: Enables you to define organization-specific data related to

documents.

Getting Here

To navigate to project enterprise data:

Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data.

To navigate to all enterprise data:

Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

Enterprise Resource Data Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to configure the enterprise resource data for your entire organization.

Select a type of enterprise resource data to open its own individual page where you can

create, modify, and delete entries.

Note: This dialog box presents only the subset of enterprise data for

resources. To view all enterprise data, see the alternate steps under

Getting Here below.

750

Screen Elements

Enterprise Resource Data pane

Resources category

Enables you to create, modify, and delete various resource-related data.

Assignment UDFs: Enables you to define organization-specific data related to

resource assignments.

Rate Types: Enables you to define price/units used to calculate costs for resource

assignments.

Resource Calendars: Enables you to define resource-specific workdays and

workhours in a day.

Resource Codes: Enables you to categorize resources into logical groups based

on your organization's criteria.

Resource Curves: Enables you to define custom resource curves, which specify the

allocation of resources and costs over the duration of an activity. Resource units

and costs are distributed evenly throughout an activity unless you specify

nonlinear distribution using resource curves.

Resource UDFs: Enables you to define organization-specific data related to

resources.

Units of Measure: Enables you to define standardized ways to define units of time

or materials.

Getting Here

To access enterprise resource data:

Click the Resources menu and choose Enterprise Resource Data.

To access enterprise data:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand an entry in the Enterprise Data pane.

EPS and Projects Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign EPS and projects privileges to the selected project

security profile.

Screen Elements

Privilege field

The name of the security permission that is assigned (option selected) or denied

(option cleared) to users of the currently selected profile.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

751

Privilege option

The option in the column header that determines whether the privileges are all

assigned (selected), all denied (clear), or individually configured (indicated with a

dash or - sign).

Add/Edit/Delete EPS Except Costs/Financials option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove EPS

hierarchy nodes, edit EPS notebook, and edit all EPS-related data except financial

information.

Edit EPS Costs/Financials option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to modify EPS budget logs, funding

sources, and spending plans.

Add Projects option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, copy, and paste projects

within the EPS node. To create project templates, users must also have the

'Add/Edit/Delete Project Templates' global privilege assigned to their profile.

Delete Projects option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to delete, cut, and paste projects

within the EPS node. To delete project templates, users must also have the

'Add/Edit/Delete Project Templates' global privilege assigned to their profile.

Edit Project Details Except Costs/Financials option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to edit fields in General, Defaults,

Resources, and Settings tabs in Project preferences. This privilege also enables users to

assign or remove a risk scoring matrix to a project in the Risk Scoring Matrices page in

Enterprise Data. To assign a project baselines, users must also have the 'Assign Project

Baselines' project privilege assigned to their profile.

Add/Edit/Delete WBS Except Costs/Financials option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove WBS

hierarchy nodes, notebook entries, earned value settings, milestones (steps), work

products and documents, and dates.

Edit WBS Costs/Financials option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to modify WBS budget logs, funding

sources, spending plan, and financial data at the project level. This privilege also

enables users to edit cost data at the activity level, including resource assignments.

This privilege also selects the 'View Project Costs/Financials' project privilege.

752

View Project Costs/Financials option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to display all monetary values for

projects. For users who do not have this privilege assigned to their profile, all areas that

display monetary values will display dashes and cannot be edited. To use the

Recalculate Assignment Costs feature, users must also have the 'Add/Edit Activities

Except Relationships' project privilege assigned to their profile. To display the resource

price/unit, users must have the 'View Resource and Role Costs/Financials' global

privilege assigned to their profile.

Delete Project Data with Timesheet Actuals option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to delete activities and resource

assignments for projects that have timesheet actuals. To delete project data at all

different levels (activity, WBS, project, and EPS), users must also have the appropriate

privileges assigned to their profile. For example, to delete activities with timesheet

actuals, users must also have the 'Delete Activities' project privilege assigned to their

profile. To delete activities and WBS nodes with timesheet actuals, users must

additionally have the 'Add/Edit/Delete WBS Except Costs/Financials' project privilege

assigned to their profile.

Tips

To modify templates, you must have the same project privileges that are required to

modify projects.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Project Security Profiles.

3) On the Project Security Profiles page, click the EPS and Projects detail window.

EPS Budget Log Detail Window of the EPS Page

Overview

Use this detail window to create, delete, or modify an EPS node budget log. A budget

log specifies details about a line item, including who has signature approval, the

approval status, the reason why the expense was required, and so on.

Screen Elements

Budget Log toolbar

See Budget Log Toolbar (on page 1245).

Amount field

The amount of the budgeted line item.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

753

Change Number field

The quantity purchased.

Date field

The date of the budgeted line item.

Reason field

The reason why the expense was required.

Responsible field

The name of the person with signature approval for the line item.

Status field

The approval status of the line item.

Tips

If you have more than one EPS selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, select an EPS node and click the Budget Log detail window.

EPS Funding Detail Window of the EPS Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign, configure, or remove funding sources from an EPS node.

Screen Elements

Funding toolbar

See Funding Toolbar (on page 1290).

Amount field

The amount of the budgeted line item.

Fund Share field

The percentage of the total fund that is allocated to the current project or EPS.

Funding Source field

The name of a funding source assigned to the current project or EPS.

754

Tips

If you have more than one EPS selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, select an EPS node and click the Funding detail window.

EPS General Detail Window of the EPS Page

Overview

Use this detail window to add or modify information about the selected EPS node.

Screen Elements

EPS selector

Cycles through the available EPSs and determines which data display in the detail

window. Click or to change which EPS and its corresponding data are

displayed.

Details section:

EPS ID field

An identifier that is unique to the EPS node.

EPS Name field

The name of the EPS.

Responsible Manager field

The name of the manager responsible for the completion of the EPS tasks.

Planned Dates section:

Anticipated Start field

The date the project is expected to start.

Anticipated Finish field

The date the project is expected to finish.

Tips

If you have more than one EPS selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

755

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, select an EPS node and click the General detail window.

EPS Notebooks Detail Window of the EPS Page

Overview

Use this detail window to configure notebook topics and descriptions for the selected EPS

node.

Screen Elements

Notebooks toolbar

See Notebooks Toolbar (on page 1295).

Tips

If you have more than one EPS selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, select an EPS node and click the Notebooks detail window.

EPS Page

Overview

Use this page to manage the Enterprise Project Structure (EPS) and its projects. The EPS

page displays schedules for any single project or group of projects you choose with

detail windows, a Gantt chart, and a table. Use the EPS page to quickly update project

details and run important operations including summarizing, creating templates, and

importing or exporting project data.

Initially, this page displays a table with a Gantt chart, but you can customize this

presentation of project data, creating and saving multiple EPS views, or data layouts, to

meet your needs. The convenient EPS View list enables you to quickly switch between

views, and you can manage multiple detail windows in tabs that you can reposition.

Note: If you do not have EPS/OBS access to an EPS element, but

you do have access to a project in an EPS, you will still be able to

view the project on this page.

756

Screen Elements

EPS toolbar

The EPS toolbar is made up of three separate toolbars with matching menus: Actions

(see "Actions Menu on EPS Page" on page 1180), Edit (see "Edit Menu on EPS Page" on

page 1254), and View (see "View Menu on EPS Page" on page 1368). The EPS View

toolbar, also located on the EPS page, is a fixed toolbar used to move between EPS

views like the table and the Gantt chart. See EPS Toolbar (on page 1286).

EPS work area

The main work area for viewing project data in your choice of the following

customizable formats:

Gantt chart (see "Gantt Chart Format of the EPS Page" on page 778)

Table (see "Table Format of the EPS Page" on page 1115)

EPS Table columns

The default fields that appear as columns in the EPS table are described below. For

descriptions of all possible fields, see Available Columns of the EPS Page (on page

1223).

Project ID field

The unique identifier of the project.

Project Name field

The name of each project. Can be arranged in an ascending or descending order.

Risk Level field

The risk level for each project. Double-click to display the list and choose from Very

High, High, Medium, Low, or Very Low.

Strategic Priority field

The project’s priority in the strategic plan.

This number ranges from 1 to 10,000 with a default of 500. Use of the priority value,

such as whether to place higher priority at the lower end of the scale, toward the

endpoint 1, or at the higher end, toward 10,000, is at the discretion of the user.

Total Activities field

The number of activities in the project.

EPS Node-level detail windows:

EPS Budget Log Detail Window of the EPS Page (on page 752)

EPS Funding Detail Window of the EPS Page (on page 753)

EPS General Detail Window of the EPS Page (on page 754)

EPS Notebooks Detail Window of the EPS Page (on page 755)

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

757

Project-level detail windows:

Budget Log Detail Window of the EPS Page (on page 603)

Codes Detail Window of the EPS Page (on page 620)

Description Detail Window of the EPS Page (on page 710)

Funding Detail Window of the EPS Page (on page 775)

General Detail Window of the EPS Page (on page 789)

Issues Detail Window of the EPS Page (on page 853)

Notebooks Detail Window of the EPS Page (on page 905)

Risks Detail Window of the EPS Page (see "Risks Detail Window" on page 1047)

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

EPS Tab of the Activity Codes Page

Overview

Use this tab to configure all existing enterprise project structure (EPS)-level activity codes

and values for your organization.

Screen Elements

Toolbar

See Activity Codes Toolbar (see "Enterprise Data Activity Codes Toolbar" on page

1255).

Name field

This field displays the name of an activity code or value. Activity codes enable you to

categorize activities into logical groups based on your organization's criteria. You can

define unlimited hierarchical activity codes to fulfill the filtering, sorting, and reporting

requirements for your activities, and arrange them hierarchically for easier

management and assignment. EPS activity codes organize activities within a specific

branch or node of the enterprise project structure (EPS).

Description field

This field shows the description you entered for the activity code or value.

Maximum Length field

Indicates the maximum length for an activity code or value. The value cannot

exceed the maximum character length specified for the activity code.

758

Color field

The color for the activity code value.

Secure option

Secure codes enable privileged users to hide Project, Activity, Issue and Resource

codes from users that do not have security privileges to view them. Secure codes are

structured hierarchically. In other words, if a user is granted add/delete privileges, that

user automatically has edit, assign, and view privileges. If a user is granted edit

privileges, that user is automatically granted assign and view privileges. If a user is

granted assign privileges, that user is automatically assigned view privileges.

Tips

You can specify the maximum number of EPS-level activity codes that can be

defined for an EPS and maximum Activity Code tree levels on the Data Limits tab of

Admin Preferences in P6.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Activity Codes.

3) On the Activity Codes page, click the EPS tab.

Exceptions Section of the Leveling Report Log

Overview

Use this section to view the number of critical activities, activities with unsatisfied

constraints, activities with unsatisfied relationships, and activities with external dates.

Screen Elements

Critical Activities field

The number of critical activities in the selected project.

Activities with unsatisfied constraints field

The number of activities with constraints that have not been addressed.

Activities with unsatisfied relationships field

The number of activities with relationships that have not been addressed.

Activities with external dates field

The number of activities with external dates.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

759

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Leveler...

(Shift+F9).

4) In the Level Resources dialog box, click the Options tab.

5) On the Options tab, select the Display leveling log upon completion and click Level.

6) In the Leveling Report Log, expand the Exceptions section.

Exceptions Section of the Scheduling Report Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this section to view the number of critical activities, activities with unsatisfied

constraints, activities with unsatisfied relationships, and activities with external dates.

Screen Elements

Critical Activities field

The number of critical activities in the selected project.

Activities with unsatisfied constraints field

The number of activities with constraints that have not been addressed.

Activities with unsatisfied relationships field

The number of activities with relationships that have not been addressed.

Activities with external dates field

The number of activities with external dates.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Scheduler...

(F9).

4) In the Schedule Project dialog box:

a. Configure the options and select the Display scheduling log upon completion

option.

b. Click Schedule.

5) In the Scheduling Reports dialog box, expand the Exceptions section.

760

Expense Categories Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure expense categories.

Screen Elements

Expense Categories toolbar

See Categories Toolbar (see "Enterprise Data Categories Toolbar" on page 1258).

Category field

The name you assign to each category. Use expense categories to organize and

track various expense types within an organization.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Expense Categories.

Expense Details Page of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this page to edit the general, unit, and cost details for the selected expense of the

current activity.

Screen Elements

Expense Item field

The name for the expense that is unique for the activity.

The same name can be used for expenses associated with other activities.

Activity field

The name of the activity.

Expense Category field

The classification code or name for the expense category.

Expense categories are useful for organizing and tracking various expense types

within an organization. Expense categories are created in P6, typically by an

administrator.

Vendor field

The name of the vendor providing the product or service associated with the

expense.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

761

Accrual Type field

The accrual type for the project expense.

Start of Activity: Indicates the entire expense costs are accrued at the start date of

the activity.

End of Activity: Indicates entire expense costs are accrued at the finish date of the

activity.

Uniform Over Activity: Indicates the expense costs are accrued uniformly over the

duration of the activity.

Document Number field

The document number for the expense.

Use this for the purchase order number, invoice number, requisition number, or similar,

as needed.

Cost Account field

The default cost account associated with the resource, role, or expense.

Auto Compute Actuals option

Determines whether to calculate the expense actual and remaining units based on

the budgeted or planned cost and the activity's percent complete.

Planned Units field

The sum of planned labor units and planned nonlabor units.

Actual Units field

The number of work units the resource has spent working on the selected activity. It is

the sum of the actual labor units and the actual nonlabor units.

Calculated as Actual Labor Units plus Actual Nonlabor Units.

Remaining Units field

The remaining units of work to be performed by this resource on this activity.

Calculated as Budgeted or Planned Units minus Actual Units.

Unit Of Measure field

The unit of measure for the project expense.

Planned Cost field

The planned total cost for the activity, including labor resources, nonlabor resources,

and project expenses.

Calculated as Planned Labor Cost plus Planned Nonlabor Cost plus Planned Expense

Cost.

762

Actual Cost field

The actual total cost for the activity, including labor resources, nonlabor resources,

and project expenses.

Calculated as Actual Labor Costs plus Actual Nonlabor Costs plus Actual Expense

Costs.

Remaining Cost field

The remaining total cost for the activity, including labor resources, nonlabor

resources, and project expenses.

Calculated as Remaining Labor Costs plus Remaining Nonlabor Costs plus Remaining

Expense Costs.

Price/Unit field

The planned price per unit for the project expense.

This number is multiplied by the planned number of units to compute the planned

cost.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Expenses section and click an expense item.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Expenses section and click an expense item.

Expense UDFs Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure user defined fields for expenses.

Screen Elements

Expense User Defined Field toolbar

See User Defined Fields Toolbar (on page 1361).

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

763

User Defined Field field

The name of the user-defined field.

Data Type field

The name of the type of data that corresponds to each user-defined field. The data

type you select determines the type of data you can specify in a field. The following

data types are available:

Text: Allows you to use text or a combination of text and numbers.

Start Date: Allows you to enter Start Date information only.

Finish Date: Allows you to enter Finish Date information only.

Cost: Allows you to enter currency values.

Number: Allows you to use numerals with two decimal places.

Integer: Allows you to use numeric data, but not a number related to money.

Indicator: Allows you to use an indicator field that you can use to enter

color-coded icon values in columns and display color-coded text in reports.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Expense UDFs.

Expenses Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to add, revise, or delete activity expenses.

Screen Elements

Expenses toolbar

See Expenses Toolbar of the Activities Page (on page 1287).

Expense Item field

The name for the expense that is unique for the activity.

The same name can be used for expenses associated with other activities.

Expense Category field

The classification code or name for the expense category.

Expense categories are useful for organizing and tracking various expense types

within an organization. Expense categories are created in P6, typically by an

administrator.

764

Planned Cost field

The planned cost for the project expense.

Calculated as Planned Units multiplied by Price Per Unit.

Actual Cost field

The actual cost for the project expense.

Remaining Cost field

The remaining cost for the project expense. Before actual expenses are made,

remaining cost should be the same as planned cost.

While the activity is in progress, the remaining cost should be updated to reflect the

estimated remaining cost required for the expense. After the expense is completed,

the remaining cost should be zero.

Planned Units field

The planned units for all labor resources assigned to the activity.

Actual Units field

The actual units used to complete the assignment.

Calculated as Budgeted Units multiplied by Duration percent complete.

Remaining Units field

The remaining Units for completing the assignment.

Calculated as Remaining Duration multiplied by Remaining Units per Time.

At Completion Units field

The sum of the actual units and remaining units for the resource assignment on the

activity.

Calculated as Actual Units plus Remaining Units.

Vendor field

The name of the vendor providing the product or service associated with the

expense.

Accrual Type field

The accrual type for the project expense.

Start of Activity: Indicates the entire expense costs are accrued at the start date of

the activity.

End of Activity: Indicates entire expense costs are accrued at the finish date of the

activity.

Uniform Over Activity: Indicates the expense costs are accrued uniformly over the

duration of the activity.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

765

Document Number field

The document number for the expense.

Use this for the purchase order number, invoice number, requisition number, or similar,

as needed.

Auto Compute Actuals option

Determines whether to calculate the expense actual and remaining units based on

the budgeted or planned cost and the activity's percent complete.

Unit Of Measure field

The unit of measure for the project expense.

Price/Unit field

The price per unit for the expense.

Cost Account field

The default cost account associated with the resource, role, or expense.

User Defined fields

The fields specific to your company's use of the application.

Information that needs to be captured for all expenses can be stored in a

user-defined field. User-defined fields are created by the system administrator.

Tips

Use the Auto Compute Actuals option when you want to assume that all work for the

activity is proceeding on schedule.

If you have more than one activity selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Expenses detail window.

Expenses Section of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this section to add, revise, and/or delete activity expenses.

Screen Elements

Add Activity Expenses link

Enables you to add expenses to the activity. See Add Activity Expenses Page of the

Activity Form Page (on page 564).

766

Expense Item field

The name for the expense that is unique for the activity.

The same name can be used for expenses associated with other activities.

Expense Category field

The classification code or name for the expense category.

Expense categories are useful for organizing and tracking various expense types

within an organization. Expense categories are created in P6, typically by an

administrator.

Planned Cost field

The planned total cost for the activity, including labor resources, nonlabor resources,

and project expenses.

Calculated as Planned Labor Cost plus Planned Nonlabor Cost plus Planned Expense

Cost.

Actual Cost field

The actual total cost for the activity, including labor resources, nonlabor resources,

and project expenses.

Calculated as Actual Labor Costs plus Actual Nonlabor Costs plus Actual Expense

Costs.

Remaining Cost field

The remaining total cost for the activity, including labor resources, nonlabor

resources, and project expenses.

Calculated as Remaining Labor Costs plus Remaining Nonlabor Costs plus Remaining

Expense Costs.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Expenses section.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Expenses section.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

767

Export Tab of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to configure export type, project template, and project.

Screen Elements

Export Type list

Select Primavera XML or Microsoft Project XML from the menu to act as the export

type.

Microsoft Project Template list

The template to use for importing or exporting a project. To enable this list, you must

select Microsoft Project XML from the Import Type or Export Type list.

Export Project field

The project selected to export.

Export button

Exports the project with your selected options.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export XML Project

Import/Export.

4) In the Import/Export Project dialog box, click the Export tab.

Feedback Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to collaborate with members of your team by writing and

exchanging notes. The Feedback detail window tracks the note history.

Note: When writing your correspondence, please be aware of rules

of etiquette, as all team members with appropriate privileges can

view your note. Once posted, activity feedback notes cannot be

removed. You can set the format of time stamps for notes in My

Preferences.

768

Screen Elements

Activity selector

Cycles through the available activities and determines which data display in the

detail window. Click or to change which activity and its corresponding data

are displayed.

Feedback from Resource field

The notes received from the resource.

Notes To Resources field

The notes directed to the resource.

Add button

Submits your feedback for display in the Notes From Resource and Notes To Resource

sections.

Tips

If you have more than one activity selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Feedback detail window.

Filter Tab of the Customize Project Issues Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to define filters for project issues.

Screen Elements

Select the fields to filter by area

Determines whether all issues are displayed or only the ones that make it through the

filter you specify.

All Issues option

Determines whether to include all issues. If you select the Custom Filter option instead,

you can then create filters to narrow the available issues.

Custom Filter option

Select to enable fields you can then use to create filter statements.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

769

Filter Description field

The brief summary of the filter.

Select Filter Criteria field

Determines how much of the filter criteria is used: All of the Following or Any of the

Following.

Parameter list

Determines what parameter will act as a variable in the filter statement.

Is list

Select an option to set a relationship between the Parameter and Value fields.

Value field

Enter a value that either equals or is not equal to the parameter, chosen with the

correct parameter and is fields.

Tips

If you select to create a custom filter, type a description for the filter in the Description

field. The description appears at the top of the issues list. It is a required field, and you

can type up to a maximum of 100 characters. In the Select Filter Criteria list, select to

display issues that meet all or any of the filtering criteria you specify. If you select Any

of the following, any issue that meets at least one of the specified filtering conditions

displays in the issues list.

To create a filter criteria statement, in the Parameter list, select a field. Next, select an

operator from the Is list. In the Value field, type or select a value to complete the

filtering criteria statement.

You can create up to three criteria statements for a custom filter.

Getting Here

From the Issues page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, click the Customize link.

4) In the Customize Project Issues dialog box, click the Filter tab.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Issues portlet and click Customize.

4) In the Customize Project Issues dialog box, click the Filter tab.

From the Dashboards page:

770

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Issues portlet and click Customize.

4) In the Customize My Issues dialog box, click the Filter tab.

Filter Tab of the Customize Risks Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to configure what risks will display in the risks portlet.

Screen Elements

Display Risks list

Determines how to display risks.

Show Risks where I have access rights option

Determines whether to display Risks where you have access rights.

Show Risks where I am the Project Owner option

Determines whether to display Risks where you are the Project Owner.

Show Risks where I am the Risk Owner option

Determines whether to display Risks where you are the Risk Owner.

Show Risks where I am assigned as a resource option

Determines whether to display Risks where you are an assigned as a resource.

Getting Here

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the My Risks portlet and click Customize.

4) In the Customize Risks dialog box, click the Filter tab.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Risks portlet and click Customize.

4) In the Customize Risks dialog box, click the Filter tab.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

771

Filters Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to configure and apply one or more filters to the current activity view to

constrain or reduce the quantity of activities shown on the Activities page.

Screen Elements

Filters Tab toolbar

See Filters Tab Toolbar (on page 1289).

Name field

The names of existing, predefined filters that are grouped by type:

Standard Filters: Predefined filters that are already in the application.

Global Filters: Filters that are available to all users.

Multiple User Filters: User-defined filters available to more than one person.

User-Defined Filters: Filters that you created.

Apply to View option

Determines which filters, if any, will be applied to the current view.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select a view from the Activity View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View dialog box, click the Filters tab.

Filters Tab of the Customize Project View Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to configure and apply one or more filters to the current project view to

constrain or reduce the quantity of project shown on the EPS page.

Screen Elements

Filters Tab toolbar

See Filters Tab Toolbar (on page 1289).

Name field

The names of existing, predefined filters that are grouped by type:

772

Standard Filters: Predefined filters that are already in the application.

Global Filters: Filters that are available to all users.

Multiple User Filters: User-defined filters available to more than one person.

User-Defined Filters: Filters that you created.

Apply to View option

Determines which filters, if any, will be applied to the current view.

Clear button

Clears all fields.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a view from the EPS View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Project View dialog box, click the Filters tab.

Filters Tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the Assignments Page

Overview

Use this tab to configure and apply one or more filters to the current view to constrain or

reduce the quantity of resources displayed on the Assignments page.

Screen Elements

Filters Toolbar

See Filters Dialog Box Toolbar (on page 1288).

Name field

The names of existing, predefined filters that are grouped by type:

Standard Filters: Predefined filters that are already in the application.

Global Filters: Filters that are available to all users.

Multiple User Filters: User-defined filters available to more than one person.

User-Defined Filters: Filters that you created.

Apply to View option

Determines which filters, if any, will be applied to the current view.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

773

Clear button

Clears all fields.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click View and select Customize View.

4) In the Customize Resource Assignments View dialog box, click the Filters tab.

Financial Periods Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure customized financial periods to provide more

accurate reporting of actual units and costs. Users can use the Store Period Performance

dialog box on the Activities page to store period performance in a specified financial

period.

Screen Elements

Financial Periods toolbar

See Financial Periods Toolbar (see "Enterprise Data Financial Periods Toolbar" on page

1264).

Financial Period (batch) dialog box

See Generate Financial Periods Dialog Box of the Financial Periods Page (on page

811).

Name field

The name chosen for the Financial Period. This field can be modified by

double-clicking a selected name.

Start Date field

The date that the Financial Period began.

Finish Date field

The date that the Financial Period ended.

Tips

Right-click in any field to display the options to Add, Delete, Find, and Find Next.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Financial Periods.

774

Formula Detail Window of the Project UDFs Page

Overview

Use this detail window to define formulas for the selected project user defined field.

Screen Elements

Fields list

Choose from one of the following fields:

Budget

Cost

Dates

Durations

Earned Value

General

Number of Activities

Percent Complete

Project Codes

Units

User Defined

Insert Field button

Inserts the selected field into the formula.

Formula buttons

Use this section to define a formula or if/then/else statement to calculate field values.

You can define a formula or if/then/else statement only if the field has a Formula

calculation type. Click Advanced to display the logical operation buttons and

click Basic to hide them.

Arithmetic operation buttons:

+

-

*

/

(

)

Logical operation buttons:

<

>

=

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

775

< >

AND

OR

IF/THEN/ELSE

Formula Editor

Displays the formula you have created with the fields list and formula buttons.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project UDFs.

3) On the Project UDFs page, select a user-defined field and click the Formula detail

window.

Funding Detail Window of the EPS Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign, configure, or remove funding sources from a project.

Screen Elements

Funding toolbar

See Funding Toolbar (on page 1290).

Amount field

The amount of the budgeted line item.

Fund Share field

The percentage of the total fund that is allocated to the current project or EPS.

Funding Source field

The name of a funding source assigned to the current project or EPS.

Tips

If you have more than one project selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

776

3) On the EPS page, select a project and click the Funding detail window.

Funding Sources Page

Overview

Use this page to configure project funding sources and their hierarchy.

Screen Elements

Funding Sources toolbar

See Enterprise Data Funding Sources Toolbar (on page 1265).

Funding Source field

Funding sources are the agencies, businesses, or groups that provide funding for a

project. You can keep funding sources in a dictionary that categorizes and groups

similar funds in a hierarchy. The dictionary allows you to quickly assign specific funding

sources to budgets as a project develops. You can assign the same funding source

multiple times with varying amount and share contributions for different levels of the

EPS. The amount contributed by a specific funding source is called the fund share

value.

Description field

This field displays a description that corresponds to the Funding Source name.

Description detail window

See Description Detail Window of the Funding Sources Page (on page 710).

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Funding Sources.

Gantt Chart Format of the Activities Page

Overview

Use the Gantt chart format to view the dates, progress, and relationships of activities in a

project.

Screen Elements

Relationship Lines

The depiction of a relationship between different activities. Whether the relationship

line is touching the beginning or end of each Gantt bar determines the type of

relationship.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

777

Timescale list

The Gantt chart time interval options. Select from one of the following intervals:

Year/Quarter

Year/Month

Quarter/Month

Month/Week

Week/Day

Financial Period

The Financial Period option is available if financial periods exist in Enterprise Data and

are configured properly.

Hovering over an activity bar will display:

Bar Type field

The type of bar. For more information, see About Bars.

ID field

The activity identifier that is unique within the project.

Name field

The name of the activity.

Start Date field

For started activities, the actual start date. For not started activities, set to the planned

start date until the project is scheduled. When scheduled, set to the remaining early

start date.

Finish Date field

For completed activities, the actual finish date. For not started and in-progress

activities, set to the planned finish date if the project has not been scheduled. When

scheduled, set to the remaining early finish date.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the View menu and select Gantt Chart.

Related Topics

Working with the Activity Gantt Chart ................................................................. 216

778

Gantt Chart Format of the EPS Page

Overview

Use the Gantt chart format to view project duration, dates, and progress in an EPS node.

Screen Elements

Timescale list

The Gantt chart time interval options. Select from one of the following intervals:

Year/Quarter

Year/Month

Quarter/Month

Month/Week

Week/Day

Financial Period

The Financial Period option is available if financial periods exist in Enterprise Data and

are configured properly.

Hovering over a project bar will display:

Bar Type field

The type of bar. For more information, see About Bars.

ID field

The project identifier that is unique within the EPS node.

Name field

The name of the project, portfolio, project code, or WBS.

Start Date field

The current start date of the project. For a not started project, the date field is the

project's planned start date. For an project that has started or is complete, this date

field is the project's actual start date.

Finish Date field

The current finish date of the project. For a not-started project, this is the planned finish

date. For an in-progress project, this is the remaining finish date. Once the project is

completed, this is the actual finish date.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

779

3) On the EPS page, click the View menu and select Gantt Chart.

Gantt Chart Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to modify how the Gantt chart appears.

Screen Elements

Progress Line section:

Show Progress Line option

Determines whether to show a progress line on the Gantt chart.

Note: A progress line provides a visual representation of the variance between

selected criteria such as the start or finish dates of an activity and its baseline, or the

progress of an activity based on its remaining duration or percent of completion.

Style list

Determines whether the progress line is solid, dashed, or of another style.

Color field

The colors available to display the progress line.

Size list

The thickness of the progress line, between 1 and 10 points.

Draw Progress Line section:

Based on the difference between the current and baseline activity's option

Determines whether the progress line is based on the activity's Start Dates or Finish

Dates.

By connecting progress points based on activity's option

Determines whether to base the connecting progress points on Select Remaining

Duration or Percent Complete.

Baseline to use for calculating Progress Line list

Determines whether the Project Baseline or User's Primary Baseline is used for

calculating the Progress Line.

Timescale section:

Timescale list

The Gantt chart time interval options. Select from one of the following intervals:

Year/Quarter

780

Year/Month

Quarter/Month

Month/Week

Week/Day

Financial Period

The Financial Period option is available if financial periods exist in Enterprise Data and

are configured properly.

Show shading for non-worktime option

Determines whether to apply a shade of gray to calendar non-worktime in the Gantt

chart.

Select a shade of gray from the Color menu.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select a view from the Activity View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity View dialog box, click the Gantt Chart tab.

Gantt Chart Tab of the Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this tab to configure progress lines and timescale for the Gantt chart on the Activities

page.

Screen Elements

Progress Line section:

Style list

Determines whether the progress line is solid, dashed, or of another style.

Color field

The colors available to display the progress line.

Size list

The thickness of the progress line, between 1 and 10 points.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

781

Draw Progress Line section:

Based on the difference between the current and baseline activity's option

Determines whether the progress line is based on the activity's Start Dates or Finish

Dates.

By connecting progress points based on activity's option

Determines whether to base the connecting progress points on Select Remaining

Duration or Percent Complete.

Baseline to use for calculating Progress Line list

Determines whether the Project Baseline or User's Primary Baseline is used for

calculating the Progress Line.

Timescale section:

Timescale list

The Gantt chart time interval options. Select from one of the following intervals:

Year/Quarter

Year/Month

Quarter/Month

Month/Week

Week/Day

Financial Period

The Financial Period option is available if financial periods exist in Enterprise Data and

are configured properly.

Show shading for non-work time option

Determines whether to apply a shade of gray to calendar non-work time in the Gantt

chart. Select the shade of gray from the Color list.

Color list

The shades of gray available to represent the shading for non-work.

This list is disabled if the Show shading for non-work time option is cleared.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select a view from the Activity View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Gantt Chart Options.

4) In the Customize Gantt Chart Options dialog box, click the Gantt Chart tab.

782

Gantt Chart Tab of the Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the Assignments Page

Overview

Use the Gantt Chart tab of the Customize Gantt Chart Options dialog box to modify the

date format for the timescale.

Screen Elements

Timescale list

The Gantt chart time interval options. Select from one of the following intervals:

Year/Quarter

Year/Month

Quarter/Month

Month/Week

Week/Day

Financial Period

The Financial Period option is available if financial periods exist in Enterprise Data and

are configured properly.

Show shading for non-work time option

Determines whether to apply a shade of gray to calendar non-work time in the Gantt

chart. Select the shade of gray from the Color list.

Color list

The shades of gray available to represent the shading for non-work.

This list is disabled if the Show shading for non-work time option is cleared.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click the View menu and select Gantt Chart

Options.

4) In the Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box, click the Gantt Chart tab.

Gantt Chart Tab of the Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the EPS Page

Overview

Use this tab to configure the timescale for the Gantt chart.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

783

Screen Elements

Timescale list

The Gantt chart time interval options. Select from one of the following intervals:

Year/Quarter

Year/Month

Quarter/Month

Month/Week

Week/Day

Financial Period

The Financial Period option is available if financial periods exist in Enterprise Data and

are configured properly.

Show shading for non-work time option

Determines whether to apply a shade of gray to calendar non-work time in the Gantt

chart. Select the shade of gray from the Color list.

Color list

The shades of gray available to represent the shading for non-work.

This list is disabled if the Show shading for non-work time option is cleared.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a view from the EPS View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Gantt Chart Options.

4) In the Customize Gantt Chart Options dialog box, click the Gantt Chart tab.

Gantt Chart Tab of the Customize Project View Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to modify how the Gantt chart appears.

Screen Elements

Timescale section:

Timescale list

The Gantt chart time interval options. Select from one of the following intervals:

Year/Quarter

784

Year/Month

Quarter/Month

Month/Week

Week/Day

Financial Period

The Financial Period option is available if financial periods exist in Enterprise Data and

are configured properly.

Show shading for non-worktime option

Determines whether to apply a shade of gray to calendar non-worktime in the Gantt

chart.

Select a shade of gray from the Color menu.

Color list

The shades of gray available to represent the shading for non-work.

This list is disabled if the Show shading for non-work time option is cleared.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a view from the EPS View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Project View dialog box, click the Gantt Chart tab.

Gantt Chart Tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the Assignments

Page

Overview

Use the Gantt Chart tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View dialog box to

modify the date format for the timescale.

Screen Elements

Timescale list

The Gantt chart time interval options. Select from one of the following intervals:

Year/Quarter

Year/Month

Quarter/Month

Month/Week

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

785

Week/Day

Financial Period

The Financial Period option is available if financial periods exist in Enterprise Data and

are configured properly.

Show shading for non-work time option

Determines whether to apply a shade of gray to calendar non-work time in the Gantt

chart. Select the shade of gray from the Color list.

Color list

The shades of gray available to represent the shading for non-work.

This list is disabled if the Show shading for non-work time option is cleared.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click the View and select Customize View.

4) In the Customize Resource Assignments View dialog box, click the Gantt Chart tab.

General Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to configure activity durations, general information, constraints,

and units and costs.

Screen Elements

Activity selector

Cycles through the available activities and determines which data display in the

detail window. Click or to change which activity and its corresponding data

are displayed.

Details section:

Activity ID field

The unique identifier of the activity.

System generated.

Activity Name field

The name of the activity. The activity name does not have to be unique.

Activity Type list

Determines how duration and schedule dates are calculated for an activity:

786

Task Dependent: If resources should be scheduled based on the activity's

calendar.

Resource Dependent: If resources should be scheduled based on their assigned

calendars.

Level of Effort: For an ongoing activity whose duration depends on other activities.

The duration of a Level of Effort activity is calculated based on the schedule dates

from its predecessors and successors.

Start or Finish Milestone: If an activity marks the beginning or end of a major

project phase.

WBS Summary: For an activity with a particular WBS code.

Durations section:

Planned Duration field

The total working time from the activity planned start date to the planned finish date.

The planned working time is calculated using the activity's calendar.

Actual Duration field

The total working time from the activity actual start date to the actual finish date for

completed activities, or the current data date for in-progress activities.

The actual working time is computed using the activity's calendar.

Remaining Duration field

The total working time from the activity remaining start date to the remaining finish

date.

The remaining working time is calculated using the activity's calendar. Before the

activity is started, the remaining duration is the same as the planned duration. After

the activity is completed the remaining duration is zero.

At Completion Duration field

The total working time from the activity's current start date to the current finish date.

The current start date is the planned start date until the activity is started, then it is the

actual start date. The current finish date is the activity planned finish date while the

activity is not started, the remaining finish date while the activity is in progress, and the

actual finish date once the activity is completed. The total working time is calculated

using the activity's calendar.

Duration Type list

Determines whether the schedule, resource availability, or costs are most important

when updating activities. The duration type applies only when you have resources

assigned to the activity. Choose a duration type based on which factor is most

important (least flexible) in planning your project.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

787

Units and Costs section:

Units and Cost list

Determines which types of units and costs the application will track: Labor Units, Labor

Costs, Non-Labor Units, Non-Labor Costs, or Material Costs.

The fields that display in this section depend upon what type of unit or cost you

choose.

Planned <unit or cost> field

The Planned unit or cost. This field name varies on your choice from the Units and

Costs list.

Actual <unit or cost> field

The Actual unit or cost. This field name varies based on your selection from the Units

and Costs list.

Remaining <unit or cost> field

The remaining unit or cost. This field name varies on your choice from the Units and

Costs list.

At Completion <unit or cost> field

The At Completion unit or cost. This field name varies on your choice from the Units

and Costs list.

Status section:

Started option

Determines whether the activity has started. Click to select the date from a

calendar.

Finished option

Determines whether the activity has been completed. Click to select the date

from a calendar.

Activity % Complete field

The percent of the activity that has been completed.

Calculated as (Original or Planned Duration minus Remaining Duration) divided by

Original or Planned Duration.

If the activity's percent complete type is set to Physical, the application will not

calculate a value for the Activity % Complete field.

Units % Complete equals (Actual Labor Units plus Actual Non-labor Units) divided by

(Actual Labor Units plus Actual Non-labor Units plus Remaining Labor Units plus

Remaining Non-labor Units).

788

Percent Complete Type list

Determines whether activity percent complete is calculated based on:

Physical: Select to specify that the activity's percent complete will be entered by

the user for this activity.

Duration: Select to specify that the activity's percent complete be calculated

from the actuals and remaining duration.

Units: Select to specify that the activity's percent complete be calculated from

the actuals and remaining units.

Constraints section:

Primary Constraint list

Determines the primary constraint on the activity. Choose from one of the following

options:

Start On: Imposes the specific start date you choose. The Start On constraint can

delay an activity's early start or move forward an activity's late start to satisfy the

constraint date.

Start On or Before: Defines the latest date an activity can start. This constraint only

affects late dates and might decrease total float. When calculating a schedule,

P6 imposes the start on or before constraint in the backward pass only if the

calculated late start date will be later than the imposed date

Start On or After: Defines the earliest date an activity can begin. This constraint

affects only early dates. When calculating a schedule, P6 imposes the start on or

after constraint in the forward pass only if the calculated early start date will be

earlier than the imposed date.

Finish On: Imposes the specific finish date you choose. The Finish On constraint can

delay an activity's early finish or move forward an activity's late finish to satisfy the

constraint date

Finish On or Before: Defines the latest time an activity can finish. The finish on or

before constraint affects only late dates.

Finish On or After: Defines the earliest date an activity can finish. The finish on or

after constraint reduces float to coordinate parallel activities, ensuring that the

finish of an activity is not scheduled before the specified date. It is usually applied

to activities with few predecessors that must finish before the next phase of a

project.

As Late As Possible: Imposes a restriction on an activity with positive float to allow it

to start as late as possible without delaying its successors. When calculating a

schedule, P6 sets the activity's early dates as late as possible without affecting

successor activities.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

789

Mandatory Start: Imposes the early and late start dates you choose. P6 uses the

mandatory early start date regardless of its effect on network logic. A mandatory

early start date could affect the late dates for all activities that lead to the

constrained activity and all early dates for the activities that lead from the

constrained activity.

Mandatory Finish: Imposes the early and late finish dates you choose. P6 uses the

mandatory finish date regardless of its effect on network logic. This constraint

affects the late dates for all activities that lead to the constrained activity and all

early dates for the activities that lead from the constrained activity.

Secondary Constraint list

Determines the secondary constraint on the activity. Available only when the Primary

Constraint is not Start On, Finish On, Mandatory Start, or Mandatory Finish. Choose

from one of the following options:

Start On or After: Defines the earliest date an activity can begin. This constraint

affects only early dates. When calculating a schedule, P6 imposes the start on or

after constraint in the forward pass only if the calculated early start date will be

earlier than the imposed date.

Finish On or After: Defines the earliest date an activity can finish. The finish on or

after constraint reduces float to coordinate parallel activities, ensuring that the

finish of an activity is not scheduled before the specified date. It is usually applied

to activities with few predecessors that must finish before the next phase of a

project.

Tips

If you have more than one activity selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the General detail window.

General Detail Window of the EPS Page

Overview

Use this detail window to add or modify information about the selected project.

Screen Elements

Project selector

Cycles through the available projects and determines which data display in the detail

window. Click or to change which project and its corresponding data are

displayed.

790

Project ID field

The unique identifying code for the project.

Project Name field

The name of the project.

Details section:

Project Status list

The status of the selected project. Use status to identify active or inactive projects.

You can select What-If status for analysis before establishing a more permanent

project schedule, or Planned status for use during the project planning phase. For

Inactive status, a project-level option on the Progress Reporter tab of the Project

Preferences dialog box controls whether P6 Progress Reporter users can view inactive

projects.

Responsible Manager field

The project’s assigned organizational breakdown structure (OBS) element.

A responsible manager is required for each project and each level of the EPS.

Project Owner field

The resource designated as responsible for the project.

The project owner designation provides a user with viewing access for the project.

Total Activities field

The number of activities in the project.

Checked Out By field

The name of the user who checked out the project. If the project is not checked out,

this field is blank.

Date Checked Out field

The date and time the user checked out the project. If the project is not checked out,

this field is blank.

Planned Dates section:

Anticipated Start field

The date the project is expected to start.

Anticipated Finish field

The date the project is expected to finish.

Project Planned Start field

The date the project is planned to begin.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

791

Must Finish By field

The date constraint placed on the project end date.

Actual Dates section:

Actual Start field

The actual start date of the project, if the project has started.

Actual Finish field

The actual finish date of the project.

Scheduled Finish field

The calculated latest early finish date, which is based on the schedule most recently

generated for the project.

Data Date field

The date used as the starting point to calculate the schedule. Each project has its

own data date.

Tips

If you have more than one project selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, select a project and click the General detail window.

General Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page

Overview

Use the General detail window of the Resources tab to modify basic information about a

selected resource.

Screen Elements

Resource selector (Ctrl+Up Arrow) or (Ctrl+Down Arrow)

Cycles through the available resources and determines which data display in the

detail window. Click (Ctrl+Up Arrow) to move to the previous resource, or click

(Ctrl+Down Arrow) to move to the next resource. The content in the detail window is

refreshed with the data for the selected resource.

Resource ID field

The unique identifier for the resource.

792

Name field

The name of the resource.

Active option

Determines whether the resource is currently active. A marked option indicates the

resource is active.

Non-active resources might have left the organization, but are not deleted from the

system since they might have actual hours.

Office Phone field

The office phone number for the resource.

Resource Type field

The resource type. Valid values are:

Labor: Indicates that the selected resource performs labor, measured in units of time.

Nonlabor: Indicates that the resource is a nonlabor resource, such as equipment,

measured in units of time.

Material: Indicates that the resource has a unit of measure other than time. You can

select a unit of measure for the material resource.

Employee ID field

The resource identifier within the organization, typically the employee number or

social security number.

Parent Resource field

A resource categorized at a higher level than the current resource, in a resource

hierarchy.

The parent resource is generally the larger department or organization for which you

work.

For example, a salesperson might be assigned to an element of the resource

hierarchy called Region 1 Sales.

Other Phone field

The alternate phone numbers for the resource.

Unit of Measure field

The unit of measure this material resource uses.

Title field

The job title for the resource, such as Senior Engineer.

E-mail field

The e-mail address for the resource.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

793

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resources tab.

4) On the Resources tab, click the General detail window.

General Page

Overview

Use this page to specify general default options.

Screen Elements

Starting Day of Week

First day of week for calendars list: Use the arrow to choose a day. The start day of

the week affects how all days in a week are displayed in profiles, spreadsheets,

and other layouts in which a weekly timescale can be displayed. For example, if

Wednesday is selected as the starting day of the week, the week is displayed as

WTFSSMT.

Note: When using View Calendar or going to Calendar views in

Enterprise Data, the First day of week for calendars setting is

ignored.

Activity Duration

Default duration for new activities field: The number of days you enter here is the

default duration for new activities in all projects. Having a default duration

simplifies the process of adding new activities.

Password Policy

Use the Password Policy to authorize a password that is 8-20 characters long and

that contains at least one letter and one number.

Enable password policy option: Determines whether to enable the password

policy.

Code Separator

Specify the character for separating concatenated codes. It is also the default

WBS code separator for new projects. field: The character you enter separates

hierarchy levels in roles, resource codes, project codes, cost accounts, issue

codes, and activity codes; it is also the default separator for WBS codes in all new

projects.

794

Contract Management

Contract Management URL field: The Contract Management URL you enter will

enable access to Contract Management from P6.

Document Management

P6 URL field: The P6 URL you enter in P6 to enable users to view content repository

documents in P6 Professional.

Summarization Periods

Specify the interval to summarize and store project and resource spreads.

By Calendar option: Determines whether to display the summarization periods by

calendar.

WBS Level list: Use the list arrow to choose Week or Month.

Resource/Role Assignment Level list: Use the list arrow to choose Week or Month.

By Financial Periods option: Determines whether to display the summarization

periods by financial periods.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select Application Settings.

2) On the Application Settings pane, click General.

General Page of the Project Preferences Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to view or configure basic project information.

Screen Elements

Character for separating code fields for the WBS tree field

The character(s), such as a period, used to separate code fields. You may use one or

two characters.

Fiscal year begins on the 1st day of list

The list of months to determine when the fiscal year begins.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Set Project Preferences....

4) In the Project Preferences pane, click General.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

795

General Section of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this section to view dates and duration and to communicate with the project

manager about the activity. If you are the primary resource for the activity, you can use

the General section to edit the start, finish, and expected finish dates.

Screen Elements

Edit General Information link

Enables you to edit activity information that is presented as read-only in the General

section.

Activity ID field

The unique identifier of the activity.

System generated.

Activity Name field

The name of the activity. The activity name does not have to be unique.

WBS field

The name of the WBS that corresponds to the selected activity.

Calendar field

The name of the calendar selected for the resource.

Primary Resource option

Determines whether the corresponding resource is the activity's primary resource.

Typically, the primary resource is the person responsible for the overall work on the

activity and for updating activity status.

Activity Type field

The type of activity.

Task Dependent: Activities are scheduled using the activity's calendar rather than

the calendars of the assigned resources. Choose task dependent when you want

to control the duration of the activity yourself (that is, no resources are assigned),

or when one or more resources assigned to the same activity can work according

to the same calendar. The activity is scheduled according to the activity’s

calendar, not the resource calendars. For example, you might have an activity to

cure concrete; you know how long the task takes and the addition of resources

won’t complete the task any earlier. You would designate this activity as task

dependent.

796

Resource Dependent: Activities are scheduled using the calendars of the assigned

resources. This type is used when several resources are assigned to the activity, but

they might work separately. Choose resource dependent when you want to

schedule each resource according to his/her own time schedule, or resource

calendar, not the activity calendar. The assigned resource availability determines

the start and finish dates of the activity. Typically, you use this type when multiple

resources assigned to the same activity can work independently, or when

availability can affect the activity’s duration. For example, an activity that requires

an Inspector might be delayed if that resource is assigned to multiple projects or is

on vacation.

Start or Finish Milestone: Milestone activities are zero-duration without resources,

marking a significant project event. Choose start milestone or finish milestone to

indicate that the activity marks the beginning or end of a major stage in the

project. Milestones have zero duration. They can have expenses assigned to

them, but not resources. In an office building addition project, examples of

milestones might include Project Definition Complete, Structure Complete, or End

Bidding Process.

Level of Effort: Activities have a duration that is determined by its dependent

activities and are typically administration type. Choose level of effort to indicate

that the activity’s duration depends on its predecessor and/or successor activities.

A level of effort activity is usually one that is ongoing, such as clerical work,

change management, or project management tasks. For example, site cleanup

could be considered a level of effort activity; it occurs repeatedly and is

dependent on the completion of a phase.

WBS Summary: Activities that are used to roll up date, duration, and percent

complete values for a group of activities that share a common WBS code level.

Choose WBS Summary to indicate that the activity is a summary-level WBS activity.

A WBS Summary activity represents a group of activities that share a common WBS

level. The summary-level WBS activity enables roll-ups of dates for the activity

group. The duration of a WBS Summary activity extends from the start of the earliest

activity in a group to the finish of the latest activity. WBS codes control which

activities are part of a WBS Summary activity; P6 incorporates any activities that

share a component of the WBS Summary activity's WBS code into the WBS

Summary activity. For example, all activities whose WBS codes begin with A (A.1,

A.1.1, A.1.2, etc.) can be part of one WBS Summary activity whose WBS code is A.

At a lower level, all activities whose WBS codes start with A.1 (A.1.1, A.1.2, etc.) can

be part of a WBS Summary activity whose WBS code is A.1.

Duration Type field

The duration type of the activity.

Fixed Units/Time: The resource units per time are constant when the activity

duration or units are changed. This type is used when an activity has fixed

resources with fixed productivity output per time period.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

797

Fixed Duration and Units/Time: The activity duration is constant as the units or

resource units per time are changed. This type is used when the activity is to be

completed within a fixed time period regardless of the resources assigned.

Fixed Units: The activity units are constant when the duration or resource units per

time are changed. This type is used when the total amount of work is fixed, and

increasing the resources can decrease the activity duration.

Percent Complete Type field

The way in which the application calculates the percent complete for the activity.

Auto Compute Actuals option

Determines whether to calculate the expense actual and remaining units based on

the budgeted or planned cost and the activity's percent complete.

Started option

Determines whether the activity has started.

Finished option

Determines whether the activity has been completed.

Remaining Duration field

The total working time from the activity remaining start date to the remaining finish

date.

The remaining working time is calculated using the activity's calendar. Before the

activity is started, the remaining duration is the same as the planned duration. After

the activity is completed the remaining duration is zero.

Total Duration field

The activity's actual duration plus the remaining duration.

Percent Complete field

The activity percent complete.

This value is tied to the activity duration percent complete, units percent complete, or

physical percent complete, depending on the setting for the activity's percent

complete type, which is either duration, units, or physical. Always in the range 0 to

100.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

798

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the General section.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the General section.

General Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page

Overview

Use this section to configure basic dashboard properties such as title, filter, and portlet

rows.

Screen Elements

Dashboard Title field

The unique title for the dashboard.

Dashboard Filter field

The selected filter for displaying information on the dashboard.

Restricts users from changing dashboard filter option

Determines whether to allow users to change the dashboard filter.

User Filter field

The Selected filter for displaying information on the dashboard specific to the user.

This field is unavailable if Restrict users from changing dashboard filter option is

selected.

Maximum number of rows displayed in dashboard portlets field

The maximum number of rows you want to display in the dashboard portlets.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, click Customize.

4) On the Dashboard Details page, click the Content tab.

5) On the Content tab, expand the General section.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

799

General Section of the Documents Details Page (without content repository)

Overview

This section displays configurable options for general document information of the

selected document.

Screen Elements

Title field

The identifying name of the document.

Author field

The person who authored or created the document.

Version field

The latest or most current version of the document.

Revision Date field

The date of the document's last update.

Document Category list

The classification label used to organize documents.

Reference Number field

The document's reference or catalog number.

The reference number is defined by the user.

Public Location field

The selected document's publicly-accessible file location. All project participants can

view this file.

Private Location field

The selected document's private file location. Typically, the private location is found

on the user's personal computer rather than a location that anyone could access.

Browse button

Enables you to select a file for a Public or Private Location from the Select dialog box.

Open button

Enables you to launch the file (if it is recognized by the system) or open the file

location (if you have permissions to view the location). If the system can perform

neither of these functions, you will receive an error message.

Deliverable option

Determines whether the work product or document is a project deliverable.

800

Status list

The current review status of the document. If the document is not under review, this

field is blank.

Owner field

The person responsible for the document.

If you have the appropriate privileges, you can browse to assign a person to this field.

Getting Here

From the Documents page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page:

a. Select a project from the Select Project list if applicable.

b. Select a document from the left pane.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page:

a. Select a project from the Select Project list if applicable.

b. Expand the Project Documents portlet.

4) In the Project Documents portlet, expand the project and select a document.

General Section of the Global Tab of the My Preferences Page

Overview

Use this section to modify general preferences.

Screen Elements

Send e-mail to resources upon adding or removing assignments option

When a resource is replaced on an activity, an e-mail is sent to the removed resource

and to the replacement resource.

When the automatic e-mail option is on, confirmation messages are sent to you,

indicating the names of the recipients. If a resource does not have an e-mail address

stored in the project database, no e-mail can be sent. In this case, you will know that

the resource was not notified because you will not receive a confirmation message

with that resource's name.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

801

Prompt before sending e-mail option

Determines whether to prompt you before sending an e-mail.

Calculate performance and earned value information by

Select from one of the following options to calculate performance and earned value

information. Calculate Performance and Earned Value Information lets you choose

whether to display earned value information, performance indicators, and indices

based on cost or labor units. For example, when you display earned value information

on the Portfolios Performance Status tab, you will see either Costs or Labor Units data,

depending on how you set this preference.

Cost option: Select to display earned value information, performance indicators,

and indices based on cost.

Labor Units option: Select to display earned value information, performance

indicators, and indices based on labor units.

Display actual and earned value using financial period data option

Display actual and earned value using financial period data lets you choose to view

information based on past period actuals data that has been stored for custom

financial periods. This option applies to the histogram and spreadsheet displays in the

Portfolios Gantt Chart, Projects Team Usage view, and Resources Usage view.

When you choose this option, stored financial period values for actuals are distributed

evenly from the start to the finish date defined for a financial period and earned

value calculations are based on these stored period quantities.

If you do not choose this option, actuals data is spread evenly from the actual start to

the data date or actual finish date of the activity or assignment.

Note: If you choose this option but period performance has not

been stored, total reported actuals display in the timescale period

representing the data date. For more information, contact your P6

administrator or Project Management Office.

If projects are summarized by financial period (which is controlled in Application

Settings in P6), this option is ignored. When projects are summarized by financial

period and you display a financial period timescale, the profile displays past period

actual values if performance has been stored for a financial period; for financial

periods that do not have stored performance, the profile displays all unit and cost

values in financial period intervals.

Display text under page icons option

Display text under page icons enables you to show or hide toolbar button text on the

Portfolios and Projects toolbars.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

802

3) On the Global tab, expand the General section.

General Tab of the Add Project Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to define the unique qualities of a new project. You can start with an empty

project and add new activities or base your new project off an existing template or

project.

Screen Elements

Project ID field

The unique identifying code for the project.

Project Name field

The name of the project.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

EPS field

The node in the EPS hierarchy where this template belongs. Click to select an EPS

from the dialog box. See Working with 'Select a Value' Dialog Boxes for more details.

Responsible Manager field

The project’s assigned organizational breakdown structure (OBS) element.

A responsible manager is required for each project and each level of the EPS.

Planned Start field

The proposed start date of the project.

Copy from Existing Project or Template field

The predefined project or template that the application will copy to create a new

project.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, expand the EPS element where you want to add the new

project.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

803

4) Within the EPS element, right-click the EPS element or any project and select

Add Project.

5) In the Add Project dialog box, click the General tab.

Related Topics

Advanced Tab of the Add Project Dialog Box ................................................... 574

General Tab of the Add Project Template Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to define the properties of a new project template. You can start with a

clean template and add new activities or base your new template off of an existing

template or project.

Screen Elements

Template ID field

The unique alphanumeric short name (up to 20 characters) you assign to your new

project template.

Template Name field

The long name (up to 100 characters) of your project template.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

EPS field

The node in the EPS hierarchy where this project belongs. Click to select an EPS

element from the dialog box. See Working with 'Select a Value' Dialog Boxes for more

details.

Responsible Manager field

The project’s assigned organizational breakdown structure (OBS) element.

A responsible manager is required for each project and each level of the EPS.

Copy from Existing Project or Template field

The predefined project or template that the application will copy to create a new

project.

804

Use Actual Costs and Units option

Determines whether the application uses actual units and costs.

This option is only available if you have elected to create the new project by copying

an existing project or template. The Use Actual Costs and Units option is only enabled

if the existing project or template contains actuals.

Use Planned Costs and Units option

Determines whether the application uses planned units and costs.

This option is only available if you have elected to create the new project by copying

an existing project or template.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, expand the EPS element where you want to add the new

project.

4) Within the EPS element, right-click the EPS element or any project and select

Add Project Template.

5) In the Add Project dialog box, click the General tab.

Related Topics

Advanced Tab of the Add Project Template Dialog Box ................................. 576

General Tab of the Customize Spreadsheet Dialog Box of the Planning Page

Overview

Use the General tab of the Customize Spreadsheet dialog box to select the information

that is displayed in the spreadsheet.

Screen Elements

Time Units Display list

Determines the units to display time.

Decimal places list

The number of decimal places to include in the currency display: 0, 1, or 2.

Timescale list

Determines the timescale. Select from the following intervals:

Month/Week

Year/Month

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

805

Year/Quarter

Decade/Year

Financial Period

The available timescale options are determined by the selected summarization

option on the General page of the Application Settings pane. The calendar

timescale options are only available if the By Calendar option is selected. The

Financial Period option is only available if the By Financial Periods option is selected. If

both options are selected, you can select from a calendar or financial period

timescale.

Spreadsheet Start Date field

Determines the date to begin displaying resource allocation data.

Show Availability option

Determines whether to show availability.

Automatically summarize on leaving spreadsheet option

Determines whether to automatically summarize projects upon leaving the

spreadsheet.

Hide WBS if empty option

Determines whether to hide the WBS if it does not contain information.

Show other assignments when filtered by resources or roles option

Determines whether to show other assignments not specific to the selected resource

or role. If disabled, the total units column and timescale interval columns show the

summary totals only for the displayed allocated elements.

Show only unassigned role requests option

Determines whether to show only unassigned role requests. If disabled, role

assignments that are not assigned to any resources will be hidden.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Planning.

3) On the Planning page, click the Customize link.

4) In the Customize Spreadsheet dialog box, click the General tab.

General Tab of the Document Details Section

Overview

This tab displays configurable options for general document information of the selected

document.

806

Screen Elements

Title field

The identifying name of the document.

Access Level field

The list of who can access the document. There are three access levels:

Project: If you have access to the project, you will have access to this document.

Workgroup: If you are included in the workgroup you will have access to this

document.

Private: Only the user who created the document will have access.

Security Policy list

The security policy for the selected document or folder:

Personal: Can be viewed, modified, or deleted only by the user who added it to

the project.

Read-Only: Can be viewed by any project team member, but team members

cannot modify or delete it.

Shared: Can be viewed, modified, or deleted by any project team member.

Template Document option

Determines whether the document is to be used as a template. This template in turn

can be used to create new documents.

Author field

The person who authored or created the document.

Version field

The latest or most current version of the document.

Last Modified By field

The name of the person who last modified the document. (This field is read-only.)

Modified Date field

The date and time the document was last modified.

Format field

The application format that the selected document was created in or checked in as,

after being updated. (This field is read-only.)

Size field

The document size in KB. (This field is read-only.)

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

807

Review Status field

The current review status of the document. If the document is not under review, this

field is blank.

The review statuses are Blank, In Review, Approved, Rejected, and Terminated.

Owner field

The person responsible for the document.

If you have the appropriate privileges, you can browse to assign a person to this field.

Document Category list

The list of classifications that can be used to organize various documents.

The category is set up in the client/server application by the user.

Reference Number field

The document's reference or catalog number.

The reference number is defined by the user.

Tips

The document you select and where you access the General tab might change which

screen elements are visible.

Getting Here

From the Documents page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab, select a document and click the General tab.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Documents portlet and click the Private

Documents tab.

4) On the Private Documents tab, select a document and click Edit Details.

5) In the Document Details dialog box, click the General tab.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Documents portlet and click the Project

tab.

808

4) On the Project tab, select a document and click Edit Details.

5) In the Document Details dialog box, click the General tab.

General Tab of the Modify Template Dialog Box of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to configure basic information for the template.

Screen Elements

Template Name field

The name for the import/export template. This field is required and can contain up to

40 characters.

Select a currency list

Determines the currency used in cost fields.

Import Microsoft Project summary tasks as WBS summary activities option

Determines whether to import a summary task from Microsoft Project as a P6 WBS

summary task in addition to the WBS hierarchical element.

Select the Microsoft Project baseline to use for planned/budgeted values list

Determines which of the ten Microsoft Project baselines the application will use for

planned or budgeted values.

Selecting 0 indicates the current project baseline.

Tips

The Import or Export Type must be set as Microsoft Project XML (2007) to enable the

options icons.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export XML Project

Import/Export.

4) In the Import/Export Project dialog box, click the Import or Export tab.

5) On the Import or Export tab:

a. Select Microsoft Project XML (2007) from the Import or Export Type list.

b. Click MSP Export Template Options or MSP Import Template Options.

6) In the Modify Template dialog box, click the General tab.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

809

General Tab of the Scheduling Options Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to specify various scheduling options such as schedule progressed activities,

calculate start-to-start lag, and the method (Total Float or Longest Path) by which you

want to analyze critical activities.

Screen Elements

Ignore relationships to and from other projects option

Determines whether to ignore activity relationships between projects.

Make open-ended activities critical option

Determines whether to label open-ended activities as critical during the scheduling.

Use expected finish dates option

Determines whether to schedule activity finish dates as the expected finish dates..

Level resources during scheduling option

Determines whether to level resources automatically each time you schedule a

project.

This is the only scheduling option that is saved at the user level, so will likely vary

among project users, generating inconsistent results.

This option is not available unless the Oracle Primavera Job Service is used for

scheduling. Based on administrative settings, scheduling jobs are run using either the

Web Scheduler or Job Service. The Web Scheduler, which is enabled by default does

not provide the option to level resources when scheduling. To level resources, you

must use the Primavera Job Service. Contact your P6 administrator for information

and assistance.

Recalculate assignment costs after scheduling option

Determines whether the application should enforce that costs remain accurate when

rescheduled dates reflect a rate change.

Select to recalculate the costs of resource or role assignments that use multiple rates.

When scheduling progressed activities use option

Determines the type of logic used to schedule dependent activities with

out-of-sequence progress. For example, a Finish to Start relationship in which the

predecessor has not finished but the successor has started.

Retained Logic: The remaining duration of a progressed activity is not scheduled

until all of its predecessors are finished.

Progress Override: The schedule ignores network logic and allows the activity to

progress without delay.

Actual Dates: Backward and forward passes are calculated using actual dates.

810

Calculate Start-to-Start lag from option

Determines when you want the successor to start. When a start to start relationship

exists and the predecessor starts out of sequence, the scheduler delays the successor

activity until the lag expires and all predecessor relationships have been satisfied. Use

this option to specify whether to subtract the lag from the predecessor's internal early

start date or its actual start date.

Early Start: Calculates the expired lag as the number of work periods between the

actual start and the data date and determines the successor's start date as the

predecessor's internal early start plus any remaining lag. Select this option when

the successor's start depends on the amount of work that the predecessor activity

accomplishes.

Actual Start: Determines the successor's start date as the data date plus any

remaining lag. Select this option when you want the successor's start to depend

on the time elapsed from the predecessor's actual start (regardless of the amount

of work that has been accomplished in the predecessor activity).

Define critical activities as option

Determines the method used to identify critical activities:

Total float less than or equal to: Select this option to identify critical activities based

on the lack of flexibility in their scheduled dates. Enter a number and time unit to

specify a minimum float duration. When the project is scheduled, activities with

total float values less than or equal to this value are marked critical. The value you

specify is automatically converted into the time units you specified in My

Preferences.

Longest Path: Select this option to define critical activities based on the sequence

of driving activities that determine the project end date.

Calculate float based on finish date of option

Determines whether to calculate float based on the finish date of each project or

opened projects.

Each Project: Schedules external relationships on the backward pass using each

project’s finish date for open-ended activities, including activities that have an

external relationship.

Opened Projects: Schedules external relationships on the backward pass using the

latest finish date of all opened projects and external relationship dates to

calculate late dates of activities. Float for open-ended activities is calculated

using the latest finish date of all opened projects, allowing for more float than the

Each project option. Each Project's Scheduled Finish date field is calculated as the

latest finish date of all opened projects.

Compute Total Float As option

Determines the method to calculate total float for all activities based on the following

methods:

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

811

Start Float: The difference between the early and late start dates (Start Float

equals Late Start minus Early Start).

Finish Float: The difference between the early and late finish dates (Finish Float

equals Late Finish minus Early Finish).

Smallest value: Select to use the most critical value, which is the smaller of the start

float and finish float values.

Calendar for scheduling Relationship Lag is list

The calendar used to calculate relationship lag. The default calendar for new

activities is specified on the Administration > Calendars page or in P6 Professional.

Predecessor Activity Calendar: Calculates lag based on the predecessor activity's

calendar

Successor Activity Calendar: Calculates lag based on the successor activity's

calendar

24 hour Calendar: Specifies work time 7 days/week and 24 hours/day

Project Default Calendar: Uses the calendar that is designated as the default for

new activities

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions and select Run Scheduler....

4) In the Schedule Project dialog box, click Options.

5) In the Scheduling Options dialog box, click the General tab.

Generate Financial Periods Dialog Box of the Financial Periods Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to automatically create new financial periods at the same time.

Screen Elements

Last Period Finish Date

This field displays the finish date of last period. This field is read-only.

Batch Start Date field

This field displays date, month, year, and the day of the week. Enter a date for the

batch to start or click to choose a date.

Batch Finish Date field

This field displays date, month, year, and the day of the week. Enter a date for the

batch to finish or click to choose a date.

812

Period Cycle field

Choose from one of the following to set as the period cycle:

Every [ ] Weeks: Select 1-52 to set the period cycle by weeks.

Every [ ] Months: Select 1-100 to set the period cycle by months.

Every Year: Select to set the period by years.

Tips

Although you are alerted in each case, be aware of the following constraints when

creating or configuring financial periods:

You cannot introduce gaps in a series of financial periods. Any new periods you

create must start or end flush with any existing entries. For example, if October 7-13

and October 14-20 are existing financial periods, you can create a new one that

either ends on October 6 or starts on October 21.

You cannot overlap financial periods. In order to serve their purpose, financial periods

must represent unique slices of time.

You can create financial periods with a duration of fewer than seven days (one

week); however, you cannot view them in timescales in P6. Use P6 Professional if you

need to view data by financial periods spanning increments of fewer than seven

days (one week).

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Financial Periods.

3) On the Financial Periods page, click Add Batch.

Generate Timesheet Periods Dialog Box of the Timesheet Periods Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to automatically create new timesheet periods at the same time.

Screen Elements

Last Period Finish Date

This field displays the finish date of last period. This field is read-only.

Batch Start Date field

This field displays date, month, year, and the day of the week. Enter a date for the

batch to start or click to choose a date.

Batch Finish Date field

This field displays date, month, year, and the day of the week. Enter a date for the

batch to finish or click to choose a date.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

813

Period Cycle field

Choose from one of the following to set as the period cycle:

Every Week: Select to set the period cycle to every week.

Every Two Weeks: Select to set the period cycle to every two weeks.

Every Four Weeks: Select to set the period cycle to every four weeks.

Every Month: Select to set the period cycle to every month.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Timesheet Periods.

3) On the Timesheet Periods page, click Add Batch.

Global Calendars Page

Overview

Use this page to view or configure global calendar information and options.

Screen Elements

Global Calendars Toolbar

See Enterprise Data Global Calendar Toolbar (on page 1267).

Calendar tab

See Calendar Tab of the Global Calendars Page (on page 605).

Standard Work Week tab

See Standard Work Week Tab of the Global Calendars Page (on page 1085).

Used By tab

See Used By Tab of the Global Calendars Page (on page 1135).

Search field

The means to find a project.

Search

Displays options for finding a specific matching entry or entries based on search

criteria.

Calendar List

Displays a list of all available calendars to view.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

814

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Global Calendars.

Global Data Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign global data privileges to the selected global security

profile.

Screen Elements

Privilege field

The name of the security permission that is assigned (option selected) or denied

(option cleared) to users of the currently selected profile.

Privilege option

The option in the column header that determines whether the privileges are all

assigned (selected), all denied (clear), or individually configured (indicated with a

dash or - sign).

Add/Edit/Delete Categories and Overhead Codes option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

categories and overhead codes data, which can be applied to all projects.

Overhead codes are only available to P6 Progress Reporter users.

Add/Edit/Delete Cost Accounts option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove cost

accounts data.

Add/Edit/Delete Currencies option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

currencies data.

Add/Edit/Delete Financial Period Dates option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

financial periods data. To edit period data, users must also have the 'Edit Period

Performance' project privilege assigned to their profile.

Add/Edit/Delete Funding Sources option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

funding source data.

Add/Edit/Delete Global Calendars option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

global calendars data.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

815

Add/Edit/Delete Global Portfolios option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

global portfolio configurations in Manage Portfolios Views.

Add/Edit/Delete Global Scenarios option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

scenarios configurations in the Manage Scenarios link.

Add/Edit/Delete Rick Categories, Matrices, and Thresholds option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove risk

categories, risk scoring matrices, and risk thresholds data.

Add/Edit/Delete Timesheet Period Dates option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

individual timesheet periods and batches of timesheet periods.

Add/Edit/Delete User Defined fields option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove User

Defined fields. Even without this privilege, users can still display User Defined fields

information.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Global Security Profiles.

3) On the Global Security Profiles page, click the Global Data detail window.

Global Data Section of the Import Tab of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to select an import action when the same data exists in the import file

and project being updated.

Screen Elements

Name field

The name of the global or project data element that will be imported. Use in

correspondence with the Import Action lists to select an action for each name.

Import Action list

Determines what action to take when importing:

Insert New: Retains data in the existing methodology and adds any new data

items. For example, if a new role was added to the data, but you don’t want to

change the existing roles, select Insert New to add the new role to the existing

methodology.

816

Keep Existing: Retains data in the existing methodology and does not overwrite

them with the updated data; adds new data if the record does not exist.

Update Existing: Overwrites data in the existing methodology with updated data;

adds new data if the record does not exist.

Do Not Import: Retains data in the existing methodology and does not import the

updated data.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export XML Project

Import/Export.

4) In the Import/Export Project dialog box, click the Import tab.

5) On the Import tab:

a. Select Primavera XML from the Import Type list.

b. Click Advanced .

Global Security Profiles Page

Overview

Use this page to configure global security profiles by assigning privileges on the seven

detail windows. The options you configure in each tab apply to the selected profile.

Screen Elements

Global Security Profiles toolbar

See User Access Security Profiles Toolbar (on page 1358).

Profile Name field

The name of the global security profile.

Description field

The full description for the profile.

Default field

Default option is to assign this security profile to new users.

Note: Only one profile can be the active default.

Assigned Privileges field

View privileges assigned to the profile.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

817

Global Security Profile detail windows

Administration Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page (on page 572)

Codes Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page (on page 621)

Global Data Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page (on page 814)

Resources Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page (on page 1020)

Templates Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page (on page 1118)

Tools Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page (on page 1128)

Views and Reports Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page (on page 1152)

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Global Security Profiles.

Global Tab of the Activity Codes Page

Overview

Use this tab to configure all existing global activity codes and values for your

organization.

Screen Elements

Activity Codes Global toolbar

The elements of the toolbar are described in Activity Codes Toolbar (see "Enterprise

Data Activity Codes Toolbar" on page 1255).

Name field

This field displays the name of an activity code or value. Activity codes enable you to

categorize activities into logical groups based on your organization's criteria. You can

define unlimited hierarchical activity codes to fulfill the filtering, sorting, and reporting

requirements for your activities, and arrange them hierarchically for easier

management and assignment. Global activity codes organize activities across all

projects in an organization.

Description field

This field shows the description you entered for the activity code or value.

Maximum Length field

Indicates the maximum length for an activity code or value. The value cannot

exceed the maximum character length specified for the activity code.

Color field

The color for the activity code value.

818

Secure option

Secure codes enable privileged users to hide Project, Activity, Issue and Resource

codes from users that do not have security privileges to view them. Secure codes are

structured hierarchically. In other words, if a user is granted add/delete privileges, that

user automatically has edit, assign, and view privileges. If a user is granted edit

privileges, that user is automatically granted assign and view privileges. If a user is

granted assign privileges, that user is automatically assigned view privileges.

Tips

You can specify the maximum number of global activity codes and maximum

Activity Code tree levels on the Data Limits tab of Admin Preferences in P6.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Activity Codes.

3) On the Activity Codes page, click the Global tab.

Global Tab of the My Preferences Page

Overview

Use this tab to customize data display formats for all sections of the application.

Screen Elements

Maximum number of rows displayed in each section field

For pages with standard lists of data (not tables), the number of rows that display

together before the list is divided. Generally, the lower the number, the better

performance will be since the user interface is displaying fewer rows of data.

Example: You specify a value of five in this field. Later, you navigate to the Portfolio

Status page or Project Issues page. Up to five rows will be listed. If more than five rows

of data are available, a [Next >>] link appears for you to navigate to the next five

items in the list.

Note: This preference does not apply to workspace portlets. To

specify the number of rows that display for lists in the portlets of a

specific workspace, customize the workspace.

Maximum number of rows displayed in trees and pick lists field

This field controls the number of elements that display in hierarchical lists, such as the

EPS/project hierarchy in the Open Projects dialog box.

If the number of items available to display exceeds the maximum you specify, a

message appears to inform you that you are viewing only a partial list.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

819

Click one of the links below for other detailed screen definitions.

General Section of the Global Tab of the My Preferences Page

Currency Section of Global Tab of the My Preferences Page

Time Units Format Section of the Global Tab of the My Preferences Page

Date Format Section of the Global Tab of the My Preferences Page

Resources Section of the Global Tab of the My Preferences Page

Issues Section of the Global Tab of the My Preferences Page

Project Score Section of Global Tab of the My Preferences Page

Performance Threshold Section of the Global Tab of the My Preferences Page

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

Group Tab of the Customize Cost Worksheet Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to modify grouping options.

Screen Elements

Level 1 field

Determines how data is grouped at the first level.

Band Color list

The color to display for each hierarchical level.

Text Color list

The color for the text to be displayed within each grouping band.

Sort Order list

Determines whether the application sorts values in ascending or descending order.

Show field title in band option

Determines whether to display the title of the field in the band.

Getting Here

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Cost Worksheet portlet.

820

4) In the Cost Worksheet portlet, click Customize.

5) In the Customize Project Cost Worksheet dialog box, click the Group tab.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the selected dashboard, expand the Cost Worksheet portlet.

4) In the Cost Worksheet portlet, click Customize.

5) In the Customize Dashboard Cost Worksheet dialog box, click the Group tab.

Group Tab of the Customize Project Issues Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to select how you want to arrange or group issues.

On this tab, you can select up to three levels, or fields, by which you want to group issues.

Grouping gathers all of the issues together that contain the same value for the selected

field. For example, if you select to group by Status, all issues with an Open status are

grouped together, all issues with an On Hold status are grouped together, and all issues

with a Closed status are grouped together. To display issues in the Chart format, you must

select at least one group by level. Each selected grouping level appears with a colored

band when displaying issues in the List format. From the Band Color list, you can select

the background color you want to display for each grouping level. The Text list lets you

select the color of the text that displays in the grouping level band.

You can additionally mark or clear the following options to customize the text that

appears in each colored band:

Screen Elements

Field list

The field you want to use to arrange the data into smaller more manageable groups.

Data rows with similar field values can be arranged into expandable hierarchies with

up to 10 or 20 levels and sorted by group to reduce visual complexity and speed user

access to specific data.

Band Color field

The color to visually represent each hierarchical level.

Text Color list

The color for the text to be displayed within each grouping band.

Sort Order list

The type of sorting, either ascending (A to Z; 1 to 10) or descending (Z to A; 10 to 1),

that you want applied to the data in each grouping level.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

821

For example, if you group by a field called Zone with possible values of A, B, and C

and select a descending sort order, the group of Zone: C rows appears first, followed

by the group of Zone: B rows, and finally the group of Zone: A rows. Choose

ascending to restore an alphabetic order.

Screen elements for grouping and column selection often accompany one another.

The preferred default sort order for the main table's rows is specified on the Columns

tab, if available.

Show field title in band option

Determines whether to display the selected field name in each grouping level

followed by the field value in the format field Name: Value. You can click each level

or band to expand its list of entries.

For example, if you set up a grouping level by a field called Zone, the following text

appears in the bands of actual table data:

Zone: Zone A

Zone: Zone B

Zone: Zone C

Show field rollups in band option

Determines whether to display summary information for all cost, numeric, integer, start

date, and end date fields in the grouping level.

Show ID/Code Value in band option

Determines whether to display the issue code value associated with the grouping

level.

This option applies only when grouping by an issue code.

Show Name/Code Description in band option

Determines whether to display the issue code description associated with the

grouping level.

This option applies only when grouping by an issue code.

Getting Here

From the Issues page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, click Customize.

4) In the Customize Project Issues dialog box, click the Group tab.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

822

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Issues portlet and click Customize.

4) In the Customize Project Issues dialog box, click the Group tab.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Issues portlet and click Customize.

4) In the Customize My Issues dialog box, click the Group tab.

Group Tab of the Customize Project Statistics Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to configure grouping options for the Project Statistics portlet.

Screen Elements

Field list

The field you want to use to arrange the data into smaller more manageable groups.

Data rows with similar field values can be arranged into expandable hierarchies with

up to 10 or 20 levels and sorted by group to reduce visual complexity and speed user

access to specific data.

To Level list

The level to which values of a hierarchy are shown, or, if a date is selected, the way

dates are broken up for the group bands.

Band Color field

The color to visually represent each hierarchical level.

Text Color list

The color for the text to be displayed within each grouping band.

Sort Order list

The type of sorting, either ascending (A to Z; 1 to 10) or descending (Z to A; 10 to 1),

that you want applied to the data in each grouping level.

For example, if you group by a field called Zone with possible values of A, B, and C

and select a descending sort order, the group of Zone: C rows appears first, followed

by the group of Zone: B rows, and finally the group of Zone: A rows. Choose

ascending to restore an alphabetic order.

Screen elements for grouping and column selection often accompany one another.

The preferred default sort order for the main table's rows is specified on the Columns

tab, if available.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

823

Show field title in band option

Determines whether to display the selected field name in each grouping level

followed by the field value in the format field Name: Value. You can click each level

or band to expand its list of entries.

For example, if you set up a grouping level by a field called Zone, the following text

appears in the bands of actual table data:

Zone: Zone A

Zone: Zone B

Zone: Zone C

Show field rollups in band option

Determines whether to display summary information for all cost, numeric, integer, start

date, and end date fields in the grouping level.

Getting Here

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, click Customize.

4) On the Customize page, click the Content tab.

5) On the Content tab, expand the Project Performance section.

6) In the Project Performance section, expand Project Statistics and click Customize

Columns.

7) In the Customize Project Statistics dialog box, click the Group tab.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, click Customize.

4) On the Dashboard Details page, click the Content tab.

5) On the Content tab, expand the Project Performance section.

6) In the Project Performance section, expand Project Statistics and click Customize.

7) In the Customize Project Statistics dialog box, click the Group tab.

Group Tab of the Customize Scorecard Dialog Box of the Portfolio Views Section of the

Customize Dashboard Page

Overview

Use this tab to configure how information is grouped in a scorecard portfolio view.

824

Screen Elements

Level field list

The field used for each level preferred to 10 to determine how data is grouped.

To Level list

The number from 1 to 10 that determines the number of fields displaying the

information chosen in the level. This option is only available when a field from Project

Codes is selected.

Background Color field

The color to be displayed as a background for each level of chosen data displayed.

Text Color field

The color to be displayed for text for each level of chosen data displayed.

Sort Order list

Determines whether to sort information in an ascending or descending order.

Show field title in band option

Determines whether to display the field title in band.

Show field rollups in band option

Determines whether to display the field rollups in band.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, click Customize.

4) On the Dashboard Details page, click the Content tab.

5) On the Content tab, expand the Portfolio Views section and expand a view.

6) In the view section, select Scorecard from the Type list and click Customize.

7) In the Customize Scorecard dialog box, click the Group tab.

Grouping Tab of the Customize Activity View Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to determine how fields are grouped.

Screen Elements

Select fields to group by section:

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

825

Field list

The field you want to use to arrange the data into smaller more manageable groups.

Data rows with similar field values can be arranged into expandable hierarchies with

up to 10 or 20 levels and sorted by group to reduce visual complexity and speed user

access to specific data.

To Level list

The level to which values of a hierarchy are shown, or, if a date is selected, the way

dates are broken up for the group bands.

Band Color field

The color to visually represent each hierarchical level.

Text Color list

The color for the text to be displayed within each grouping band.

Sort Order list

Determines whether columns are sorted in ascending or descending order, or by

hierarchy.

Band Options section

Show field title option

Determines whether to show the title of the field in the table or Gantt chart.

Show field rollups option

Determines whether to display summarized values, such as the dates of the table or

Gantt chart.

Clear the option to prevent this information from displaying.

Hide if empty option

Determines whether to hide grouping bands that do not contain any projects (if on

the EPS page) or activities (if on the Activities page).

Display text in bands using section:

ID/Code option

The short name or ID/Code within the grouping band.

If you select this option and EPS is selected in the field list, you can edit the EPS code in

the first column on the EPS page.

Name/Description option

The long name or name/description within the grouping band.

If you select this option and EPS is selected in the field list, you can edit the EPS

description in the first column on the EPS page.

826

ID/Code and Name/ Description option

The short and long name within the grouping band.

If you select this option and EPS is selected in the field list, you can edit the EPS code in

the first column on the EPS page.

Tips

Grouping bands are displayed by default when you group by a project code or EPS

even if the bands are empty. Select the Hide if empty option in the Customize View or

Customize Groupings dialog boxes to remove these bands from view.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select a view from the Activity View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Activity Views dialog box, click the Grouping tab.

Grouping Tab of the Customize Project View Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to determine how fields are grouped.

Screen Elements

Field list

The field you want to use to arrange the data into smaller more manageable groups.

Data rows with similar field values can be arranged into expandable hierarchies with

up to 10 or 20 levels and sorted by group to reduce visual complexity and speed user

access to specific data.

To Level list

The level to which values of a hierarchy are shown, or, if a date is selected, the way

dates are broken up for the group bands.

Band Color field

The color to visually represent each hierarchical level.

Text Color list

The color for the text to be displayed within each grouping band.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

827

Sort Order list

Determines whether columns are sorted in ascending or descending order, or by

hierarchy.

Band Options section

Show field title option

Determines whether to show the title of the field in the table or Gantt chart.

Show field rollups option

Determines whether to display summarized values, such as the dates of the table or

Gantt chart.

Clear the option to prevent this information from displaying.

Hide if empty option

Determines whether to hide grouping bands that do not contain any projects (if on

the EPS page) or activities (if on the Activities page).

Display text in bands using section:

ID/Code option

The short name or ID/Code within the grouping band.

If you select this option and EPS is selected in the field list, you can edit the EPS code in

the first column on the EPS page.

Name/Description option

The long name or name/description within the grouping band.

If you select this option and EPS is selected in the field list, you can edit the EPS

description in the first column on the EPS page.

ID/Code and Name/ Description option

The short and long name within the grouping band.

If you select this option and EPS is selected in the field list, you can edit the EPS code in

the first column on the EPS page.

Tips

Grouping bands are displayed by default when you group by a project code or EPS

even if the bands are empty. Select the Hide if empty option in the Customize View or

Customize Groupings dialog boxes to remove these bands from view.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

828

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a view from the EPS View list.

b. Click the View menu and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Project View dialog box, click the Grouping tab.

Grouping Tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the Assignments

Page

Overview

Use this tab to determine how fields are grouped.

Screen Elements

Field list

The field you want to use to arrange the data into smaller more manageable groups.

Data rows with similar field values can be arranged into expandable hierarchies with

up to 10 or 20 levels and sorted by group to reduce visual complexity and speed user

access to specific data.

To Level list

The level to which values of a hierarchy are shown, or, if a date is selected, the way

dates are broken up for the group bands.

Band Color field

The color to visually represent each hierarchical level.

Text Color list

The color for the text to be displayed within each grouping band.

Sort Order list

Determines whether columns are sorted in ascending or descending order, or by

hierarchy.

Band Options:

Show field title option

Determines whether to show the title of the field in the table or Gantt chart.

Show field rollups option

Determines whether to display summarized values, such as the dates of the table or

Gantt chart.

Clear the option to prevent this information from displaying.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

829

Display text in bands using:

ID/Code option

The short name or ID/Code within the grouping band.

Name/Description option

The long name or name/description within the grouping band.

ID/Code and Name/ Description option

The short and long name within the grouping band.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click View and select Customize View....

4) In the Customize Resource Assignments View dialog box, click the Grouping tab.

Hard Constraints - Constraints That Prevent Activities Being Moved Section of the Schedule

Check Report Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to view activities with hard constraints. Hard constraints override logical

relationships and thereby prevent activities from being scheduled according to the

logic. Hard constraints should only be used when they reflect real dates. Examples of

hard constraints are Mandatory Start and Mandatory Finish. If possible, replace hard

constraints with logical relationships.

Only a subset of all the activities in the open projects are checked. WBS summary

activities, activities with an actual finish date, and Level of Effort activities are removed

from the subset to create a list of activities that are checked for Hard Constraints. Start

constraints are ignored if they are on activities that have an actual start. The Actual

percentage is calculated as the number of activities found that match the check

divided by the total number of subset activities checked.

Screen Elements

Project ID field

The unique identifying code of the project containing the activity which failed the

check.

Activity ID field

The unique identifying code of the activity which failed the check.

830

Activity Description field

The brief description of the listed activity.

Constraint Type field

The type of constraint that is preventing the activity from being moved.

Hard constraint types include: Mandatory Start and Mandatory Finish.

Soft constraint types include: Finish On, Finish On or After, Finish On or Before, Start On,

Start On or After, and Start On or Before.

Constraint Date field

The date, if applicable, to which the activity must adhere.

Position field

The constraint position: primary or secondary.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box:

a. Select the Hard Constraints - Constraints that prevent activities being moved

option.

b. Click Check Schedule.

5) In the Schedule Check Report dialog box, expand the Hard Constraints - Constraints

that prevent activities being moved section.

History Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to view details about the jobs for the currently selected report

including the date and time each job was run and its status.

Note: The run history is only captured for scheduled reports or

on-demand reports delivered by e-mail.

Screen Elements

Run Date field

The date and time the report schedule ran.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

831

User field

The identifier for the user who created the scheduled job.

Status field

The state of the individual reports run from the schedule or on-demand delivered by

e-mail.

Results are:

Completed: The scheduled report run is successful.

Failed: The scheduled report run encountered an error and the report did not run.

Delete All History button

Deletes the historical report run records for the selected schedule.

Getting Here

1) Click Reports.

2) On the Reports page:

a. Click View and select Reports.

b. Select a report, and then click the Schedule detail window.

3) In the Schedule detail window, click History.

History of Workflow Instance Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to view a chronology of the actions that have been performed for the

human tasks in the currently selected workflow instance.

Screen Elements

Date field

The date the human task was last changed. A change includes claiming, reassigning,

approving, escalating, and other actions.

Action field

The type of change that occurred for each activity in the history. Examples include

instance created marking the start of a workflow, instance entered activity marking

entry into the next task or stage of the workflow, and instance completed activty

marking the end of the task or stage.

Depending on your edition of BPM, you may see the type of operation performed by

a user upon a human task within the workflow. Valid action values include:

832

Escalated: The task was reassigned further up the organizational chain of command

or given priority.

Suspended: The task was put on hold.

Purged: The task was purged.

Deleted: The task was deleted.

Withdrawn: The task was withdrawn.

Submitted: The task was submitted to users within the workflow.

Reassigned: The task was reassigned to another user, group, or role.

Claimed: The task was claimed for exclusive follow-up action by the user making the

claim.

Approved: The task was approved or supported by the reviewer.

Rejected: The task was rejected or not-supported by the reviewer.

User field

The Personal Name of the user associated with the change to the human tasks within

the workflow. This includes claiming, reassigning, approving, escalating, and other

actions. This field displays the value Workflowsystem if the change was made by

another application or system event.

Stage field

The name of the current workflow phase. The stage also provides an indication of the

workflow's current progress within the total sequence of all its defined phases. For

example, Stage 1: Just Initiated vs. Stage 5: Final Review.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Workflows portlet.

4) In the Workflows portlet, click the My Workflows tab.

5) On the My Workflows tab, select a workflow instance and click History.

History Tab of the Document Details Section (with content repository)

Overview

Use this tab to view an audit trail of all actions that have been performed on a selected

document. You can see all document activities, the user who performed the activity,

and when the activity occurred.

Screen Elements

Date field

The date and time the activity was performed.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

833

User field

The name of the user who performed the activity.

Action field

The activity performed on the selected document. Examples include Created

Document and Review Terminated.

Version field

The version of the document on which the activity was performed.

Getting Here

From the Documents page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab, select a document and click the History tab.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand My Documents and select the Private Documents

tab.

4) On the Private Documents tab, select a document and click Edit Details.

5) In the Document Details dialog box, click the History tab.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Documents portlet and click the Project

tab.

4) On the Project tab, select a document and click Edit Details.

5) In the Document Details dialog box, click the History tab.

ID Lengths Page

Overview

Use this page to specify the maximum number of characters for IDs and codes.

834

Table of Screen Elements

Specify the number of characters to allow for ID fields at each tree level

You can enter a value of 1-20 for the following options:

Project ID maximum characters

WBS Code maximum characters

Resources ID maximum characters

Activity ID maximum characters

Cost Account ID maximum characters

Role ID maximum characters

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select Application Settings.

2) On the Application Settings pane, click ID Lengths.

Impacts Detail Window of the Risk Scoring Matrices Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign impacts to the selected risk scoring matrix.

Screen Elements

Add (Insert)

Adds impact thresholds to the risk scoring matrix. You must define a cost and

schedule impact for a risk scoring matrix. User-defined impacts are optional.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Type field

The type of impact threshold assigned to the risk scoring matrix. Types of impacts are

schedule, cost, and user-defined. You must define a cost and schedule impact for a

risk scoring matrix. User-defined impacts are optional.

Name field

The name of the selected cost, schedule, or user-defined impact.

Severity fields

The ranges and values assigned to the chosen thresholds. The number of severity

fields is determined by the number of levels chosen for the impact thresholds.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

835

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and click Risk Scoring Matrices.

3) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, click the Impacts detail window.

Import Calendar Events Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to select a file containing nonwork exception time to import into My

Calendar.

Screen Elements

File field

The name of the specific nonwork time from an .ics file to be imported into a personal

calendar.

Import nonwork time option

Determines which nonwork time is imported from the .ics file. By default, all nonwork

time is selected. When the option at the top of the column is cleared, you can select

individual entries.

Name field

The name of the nonwork time set in the calendar. This field is read-only.

Start field

The start date of the nonwork time. This field is read-only.

Finish field

The finish date of the non-work time.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Calendar.

2) On the My Calendar page, click Import.

Import Tab of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to import information to a central database.

836

Screen Elements

Import Type list

Determines whether the Primavera XML or Microsoft Project XML import type is used.

If you select Primavera XML, the Advanced button becomes available. Clicking the

Advanced button allows you to determine how data is updated when projects are

imported.

Import File field

The file to be imported.

Click browse and select a Primavera XML or Microsoft Project XML file to import.

Microsoft Project Template list

The template to use for importing or exporting a project. To enable this list, you must

select Microsoft Project XML from the Import Type or Export Type list.

Select Import Action section:

Create New Project option

Select to create a new project.

Update Existing Project option

Determines whether to update an existing project.

Advanced button

Displays Global Data and Project Data options. Modify the selected options by

selecting the action to take when the same data exists in the import file and project

being updated.

See Global Data Section of the Import Tab of the XML Project Import/Export Dialog

Box (see "Global Data Section of the Import Tab of the Import/Export Project Dialog

Box" on page 815) for more details on the Global Data area.

See Project Data Section of the Import Tab of the XML Project Import/Export Dialog

Box (see "Project Data Section of the Import Tab of the Import/Export Project Dialog

Box" on page 956) for more details on the Project Data area.

Basic button

Hides Global Data and Project Data options.

Import button

Imports a file or project with your selected options.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

837

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export XML Project

Import/Export.

4) In the Import/Export Project dialog box, click the Import tab.

Import/Export Project Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to import and export information to and from this database using

external files and then share this information with other P6 Professional users, Oracle

Primavera Contractor users, other project management tools (such as Microsoft® Project

2007 and Microsoft® Excel®), and your organization's human resource and accounting

systems. You can also use external files to archive your projects or create a backup of

your database.

You can import and export between P6 and other applications using the following file

formats:

Oracle Primavera's P6 Professional XML format, which enables you to share project

information between Project Management databases.

Microsoft Project XML format enables you to share information with Microsoft Project

2007.

Screen Elements

Import tab

See Import Tab of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box (on page 835).

Export tab

See Export Tab of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box (on page 767).

Status tab

See Status Tab of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box (on page 1097).

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export XML Project

Import/Export.

838

Index Performance Portlet of the Dashboards Page

Overview

Use this portlet to view Schedule Performance Index (SPI), Cost Performance Index (CPI),

and To Complete Performance Index (TCPI) calculations. SPI indicates whether you are

meeting earned and planned values within your schedule; CPI indicates whether you

have spent money over the budget to date; TCPI enables you to determine the level of

performance needed to achieve the cost or time objectives. Status indicators help you

gauge whether these index values are within an acceptable range or whether you will

need to take corrective action, based on thresholds you define.

Screen Elements

Legend

Key to performance threshold indicators. Use these visual indicators to quickly scan

values based on thresholds you define:

Critical: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio requires significant corrective

action.

Warning: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio needs attention and is

performing below expectations.

Acceptable: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio is performing within an

expected range.

Exceptional: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio is exceeding

expectations.

Projects list

The available projects. Selecting a project allows the user to view the index

performance for each project and WBS within the project.

Schedule Performance Index (SPI) field

A measure of the work accomplished as a percentage of the work scheduled.

SPI indicates whether you are meeting earned and planned values within your

schedule. You can set performance thresholds for SPI calculated values to determine

whether you need to take corrective action.

Calculated as: Earned Value of Cost or Quantity divided by Planned Value of Cost or

Quantity

The variance percentage is calculated as: Earned Value divided by Planned Value.

Cost Performance Index (CPI) field

A measure of the value of work accomplished as a percentage of the actual costs.

CPI indicates whether you have spent money over the budget to date. You can set

performance thresholds for CPI calculated values to determine whether you need to

take corrective action.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

839

Calculated as: Earned Value divided by Actual Cost

Where: Actual Cost equals actual equipment cost plus actual expense cost plus

actual work cost plus material cost

The variance percentage is calculated as: Earned Value divided by Actual Cost.

To Complete Performance Index (TCPI) field

A measure of the value of the project work that is remaining. TCPI is essentially a ratio

of the remaining work to the remaining funds. It helps determine the level of

performance that must be achieved on the remaining work to meet recognized

business goals, such as the Budget at Completion (BAC) or the Estimate at

Completion (EAC).

You can set performance thresholds for calculated TCPI values to display visual

indicators that help you determine whether you need to take corrective action.

Calculated as: (BAC minus Earned Value) divided by (EAC minus Actual Cost or Units)

Where: BAC equals base equipment cost plus base expense cost plus base work cost

plus base material cost; EAC equals (actual equipment cost plus actual expense cost

plus actual work cost plus actual material cost) plus (remaining equipment cost plus

remaining expense cost plus remaining work cost plus remaining material cost);

Actual Cost equals actual equipment cost plus actual expense cost plus actual work

cost plus actual material cost

Tips

The Index Performance portlet calculates and displays data in cost or labor units

based on the option selected on the Global tab in My Preferences.

If a dashboard's Filter by option is set to a portfolio or project code, the portlet lists

each project included in the portfolio or project code filter and displays each

project's index performance data.

You can click a project name in the portlet to display the Performance Status page or

the associated Project Workspace; the page displayed depends on your module

access.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Index Performance portlet.

Index Performance Portlet of the Workspace Page

Overview

Use this portlet to view the schedule performance index (SPI), cost performance index

(CPI), and to complete performance index (TCPI) calculations. Use the status indicators

to help you gauge whether these index values are within an acceptable range or

whether you will need to take corrective action, based on thresholds you define.

840

Screen Elements

Legend

Key to performance threshold indicators. Use these visual indicators to quickly scan

values based on thresholds you define:

Critical: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio requires significant corrective

action.

Warning: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio needs attention and is

performing below expectations.

Acceptable: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio is performing within an

expected range.

Exceptional: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio is exceeding

expectations.

Schedule Performance Index (SPI) field

A measure of the work accomplished as a percentage of the work scheduled.

SPI indicates whether you are meeting earned and planned values within your

schedule. You can set performance thresholds for SPI calculated values to determine

whether you need to take corrective action.

Calculated as: Earned Value of Cost or Quantity divided by Planned Value of Cost or

Quantity

The variance percentage is calculated as: Earned Value divided by Planned Value.

Cost Performance Index (CPI) field

A measure of the value of work accomplished as a percentage of the actual costs.

CPI indicates whether you have spent money over the budget to date. You can set

performance thresholds for CPI calculated values to determine whether you need to

take corrective action.

Calculated as: Earned Value divided by Actual Cost

Where: Actual Cost equals actual equipment cost plus actual expense cost plus

actual work cost plus material cost

The variance percentage is calculated as: Earned Value divided by Actual Cost.

To Complete Performance Index (TCPI) field

A measure of the value of the project work that is remaining. TCPI is essentially a ratio

of the remaining work to the remaining funds. It helps determine the level of

performance that must be achieved on the remaining work to meet recognized

business goals, such as the Budget at Completion (BAC) or the Estimate at

Completion (EAC).

You can set performance thresholds for calculated TCPI values to display visual

indicators that help you determine whether you need to take corrective action.

Calculated as: (BAC minus Earned Value) divided by (EAC minus Actual Cost or Units)

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

841

Where: BAC equals base equipment cost plus base expense cost plus base work cost

plus base material cost; EAC equals (actual equipment cost plus actual expense cost

plus actual work cost plus actual material cost) plus (remaining equipment cost plus

remaining expense cost plus remaining work cost plus remaining material cost);

Actual Cost equals actual equipment cost plus actual expense cost plus actual work

cost plus actual material cost

Tips

The Index Performance portlet data is derived from your choice of cost or labor units.

Make this selection in the Project Performance section of the Workspace Details page.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Index Performance portlet.

Indicators Detail Window of the Project UDFs Page

Overview

Use this detail window to define one or more graphical indicators to appear with the

currently selected project user-defined field. The parameters you define are based on

the relationship between your UDF's value and other values or fields.

Screen Elements

Parameter field

The comparison operator expressing the relationship between the project UDF value

and the value, range, or field you specify. When you select a parameter of is within

range of or is not within range of, the value or field you enter in the Value column

represents the low values in the range, and the High Value column represents the

high values in the range.

Value options

Determines whether the project UDF value should be compared with a value you

specify or a field value you choose from the list.

Value/Field field

The manually-specified value or field-supplied value used for the logical comparison

to define this indicator. When you select a comparison parameter of is within range of

or is not within range of, the value or field in this column represents the low value in the

range.

842

High Value options

Determines whether the project UDF value should be compared with a range defined

by a high value you specify or determined by a field value for comparison

parameters of only is within range of or is not within range of.

High Value/Field field

The manually-specified value or field-supplied value representing the high value of

the optional range used in the comparison parameter for each indicator.

Indicator field

The graphical image or icon used to symbolically represent a specific project UDF

value relative to another value, range, or relationship you define.

Bubble Color field

The color used in portfolio view bubble charts to represent this project UDF value or

range relative to others.

Add Row button

Adds an additional row to the bottom of the detail window so you can define

another indicator.

Remove Row button

Removes the current row and indicator parameters from the detail window.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project UDFs.

3) On the Project UDFs page, select a user-defined field and click the Indicators detail

window.

Invalid Progress Dates - Activities with Actual Dates After the Data Date Section of the

Schedule Check Report Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to view activities that have actual dates after the data date.

Only a subset of the activities in the open projects are checked. WBS summary activities,

Level of Effort activities, and activities with actual finish dates before the data date are

removed from the subset to create the list of activities checked for actual start or finish

dates occurring after the data date. The Actual percentage is calculated as the number

of activities found that match the check divided by the number of subset activities

checked.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

843

Screen Elements

Project ID field

The unique identifying code of the project containing the activity which failed the

check.

Activity ID field

The unique identifying code of the activity which failed the check.

Activity Description field

The brief description of the listed activity.

Data Date field

The date used as the starting point to calculate the schedule. Each project has its

own data date.

Actual Start Date field

The actual start date of the activity, if the activity has started.

Working hours before data date field

The number of hours between the data date and the actual start date. Calculated as

the Data Date minus the Actual Start Date.

Actual Finish Date field

The actual finish date of the activity.

Working hours before data date field

The number of hours between the data date and the actual finish date. Calculated

as the Data Date minus the Actual Finish Date.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box:

a. Select the Invalid Progress Dates - Activities with invalid progress dates option.

b. Click Check Schedule.

5) In the Schedule Check Report dialog box, expand the Invalid Progress Dates -

Activities with actual dates after the data date section.

844

Invalid Progress Dates - Incomplete Activities Before the Data Date Section of the Schedule

Check Report Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to view incomplete activities that are scheduled before the data date.

Only a subset of the activities in the open projects are checked. WBS summary activities,

Level of Effort activities, and activities with actual finish dates before the data date are

removed from the subset to create the list of activities checked for planned dates that

occur before the data date. The Actual percentage is calculated as the number of

activities found that match the check divided by the number of subset activities

checked.

Screen Elements

Project ID field

The unique identifying code of the project containing the activity which failed the

check.

Activity ID field

The unique identifying code of the activity which failed the check.

Activity Description field

The brief description of the listed activity.

Data Date field

The date used as the starting point to calculate the schedule. Each project has its

own data date.

Start Date field

The scheduled start date of the activity that is before the data date.

Working hours before data date field

The number of hours between the data date and the scheduled start. Calculated as

the Data Date minus the Start Date.

Finish Date field

The scheduled finish date of the activity that is before the data date.

Working hours before data date field

The number of hours between the data date and the scheduled finish date.

Calculated as the Data Date minus the Finish Date.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

845

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box:

a. Select the Invalid Progress Dates - Activities with invalid progress dates option.

b. Click Check Schedule.

5) In the Schedule Check Report dialog box, expand the Invalid Progress Dates -

Incomplete activities before the data date section.

Issue Codes Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure issue codes and code values for projects.

Screen Elements

Issue Codes toolbar

See Enterprise Data Issue Codes Toolbar (on page 1268).

Name field

The name of each issue. Issue codes enable you to organize and categorize issues in

a way that is meaningful to you. For example, you can create an issue code titled

Severity, and subsequently create issue code values: High, Medium, and Low. You

can assign each of these code values to issues across multiple projects, enabling you

to categorize each issue according to how severe it is. Similarly, you can create

codes to categorize issues by responsibility, subproject, or any other classification you

require to organize issues. Assigning issue codes enables you to quickly search for and

view issues according to specific criteria.

Description field

The description to each corresponding issue.

Secure option

Secure codes enable privileged users to hide Project, Activity, Issue and Resource

codes from users that do not have security privileges to view them. Secure codes are

structured hierarchically. In other words, if a user is granted add/delete privileges, that

user automatically has edit, assign, and view privileges. If a user is granted edit

privileges, that user is automatically granted assign and view privileges. If a user is

granted assign privileges, that user is automatically assigned view privileges.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

846

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Issues and click Issue Codes.

Issue Codes Section of the Issue Forms Page

Overview

Use this section to edit and remove existing issue code assignments as well as assign issue

codes to the form. Each issue code assigned will be displayed on the Add Issue page for

all issues created from this form.

Screen Elements

Assign Issue Codes link

Enables you to select an issue code to assign.

Issue Codes section

The area where you can view, assign, or configure issue codes:

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, click Issue Forms.

4) On the Issue Forms page, select an issue form and expand the Issue Codes section.

Issue Details Page

Overview

Use this page to view or modify details about a specific project issue. If you have the

required security privilege, you can additionally modify issue information, relate items,

assign issue codes, and remove the issue.

Screen Elements

General area

Use the following field to modify general options:

Issue Name field

The name of the project issue.

In P6 Professional, issues which are automatically generated by the threshold monitor

are named after the threshold parameter that triggered the project issue.

Responsible Manager field

The name of the person responsible for the issue.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

847

If you have edit privileges, you can select a different Responsible Manager. The list of

available resources depends upon your resource access security privileges.

Owner field

The list of available resources you can select from depends upon your resource

access security privileges.

Priority list

Determines the priority of the activity when performing resource leveling.

Status field

The current status of the issue: Open, On Hold, Closed.

Identified By field

The name of the person who identified the issue. By default, this field displays your user

name.

Date Identified field

The date on which the issue was identified. By default, this field displays today's date.

Resolution Date field

The planned (open issue) or actual (closed issue) resolution date for the issue.

Applies to field

The activity, project, or WBS with which the issue is associated.

Description section

The brief summary of the item at hand. The field or section might be editable.

Issue Codes section

The area where you can view, assign, or configure issue codes:

Assign Issue Codes link

Enables you to select an issue code to assign.

Issue Code field

The name of the issue code.

Code Value field

The value of the assigned code.

848

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

User Defined fields section

The section where you can assign values to user-defined fields associated with the

issue:

Related Items section

The section where you can assign related documents or issues to the issue:

Name field

The name of the item related to the issue.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

Relate Documents link

Enables you to select a document to relate to the currently selected document. See

Working with 'Select a Value' Dialog Boxes for further details.

Relate Issue link

Enables you to select an issue to relate to the currently selected document. See

Working with 'Select a Value' Dialog Boxes for further details.

Remove link

Removes the selected related item. You must first select the option beside an item's

name before you click the Remove link.

Tips

When editing a workgroup issue, if you associate a project activity with the issue, the

same issue will also appear as a project issue on the Project Issues portlet and Issues

page. If you remove the project activity from the issue, the issue no longer appears as a

workgroup issue in the Issues portlet on the Workgroup page; it only appears as a project

issue.

Getting Here

From the Issues page:

1) Click Projects.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

849

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, select an issue.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Issues portlet.

4) In the My Issues portlet, expand a project and select an issue.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Issues portlet and select an issue.

Issue Form Tab of the Issue Forms Page

Overview

Use this tab to view and configure details about an issue form including what is displayed

or required and the assigned issue codes or user-defined fields.

Screen Elements

Form Name field

The name of the selected issue form.

Field Name area:

Issue Name field

The name or description of the issue.

Applies to field

The activity, project, or WBS with which the issue is associated.

Date Identified field

The date on which the issue was identified. By default, this field displays today's date.

Owner field

The resource responsible for the selected issue.

If you have edit privileges, you can select a different owner. The list of available

resources you can select from depends upon your resource access security privileges.

Priority list

Determines the priority of the activity when performing resource leveling.

850

Resolution Date field

The planned (open issue) or actual (closed issue) resolution date for the issue.

Responsible Manager field

The name of the person responsible for the issue.

If you have edit privileges, you can select a different Responsible Manager. The list of

available resources depends upon your resource access security privileges.

Status field

The current status of the issue: Open, On Hold, Closed.

Display section

The options to display the selected item on the issue form.

Default Value section

The section where you can assign items to the selected field Name item.

Required section

The options that you can select to require a user to enter information in that field on

the issue form.

Issue Codes section

See Issue Codes Section of the Issue Forms Page (on page 846).

User Defined Fields section

See User Defined Fields Section of the Issue Forms Page (on page 1136).

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, click Issue Forms.

4) On the Issue Forms page, click the Issue Form tab.

Issue Forms Page

Overview

Use this page to view details about a specific issue form, create new forms, modify

information such as the name of the form, and determine which fields appear on the

Add Issue page for all future issues created from the form. Additionally, you can assign

issue codes and user-defined fields.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

851

Screen Elements

Refresh

Refreshes the current screen with any new, updated, or removed data.

Modify

Displays the following options to modify the issue forms page:

Close Modify: Closes the Modify options.

Add Form: Enables you to select a form to add.

Delete: Deletes the currently selected issue forms.

Search list

The criteria with which to search.

for field

The search inquiry based on your selection in the Search list.

Search button

Displays options based on your entered criteria.

Clear Results button

Clears the for field and removes the options based on your entered criteria to display

all possible codes.

Issue Form tab

See Issue Form Tab of the Issue Forms Page (on page 849).

Access tab

See Access Tab of the Issue Forms Page (on page 538).

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, click Issue Forms.

Issue UDFs Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure user defined fields for issues.

852

Screen Elements

User Defined Fields toolbar

See User Defined Fields Toolbar (on page 1361).

User Defined Field field

The name of the user-defined field.

Data Type field

The name of the type of data that corresponds to each user-defined field. The data

type you select determines the type of data you can specify in a field. The following

data types are available:

Text: Allows you to use text or a combination of text and numbers.

Start Date: Allows you to enter Start Date information only.

Finish Date: Allows you to enter Finish Date information only.

Cost: Allows you to enter currency values.

Number: Allows you to use numerals with two decimal places.

Integer: Allows you to use numeric data, but not a number related to money.

Indicator: Allows you to use an indicator field that you can use to enter

color-coded icon values in columns and display color-coded text in reports.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Issues and click Issue UDFs.

Issues Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to list and manage issues associated with the selected activity.

Screen Elements

Issues toolbar

See Issues Toolbar (on page 1292).

Issue Name field

The name of the project issue.

In P6 Professional, issues which are automatically generated by the threshold monitor

are named after the threshold parameter that triggered the project issue.

Priority list

Determines the priority of the activity when performing resource leveling.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

853

Issue Status Code field

The current status of the project issue.

Owner field

The resource responsible for the issue.

Applies To field

The activity, project, or WBS to which the issue is associated.

Identified By field

The name of the person who identified the issue.

Date Identified field

The date that the issue was identified.

Responsible Manager field

The name of the manager responsible for the issue.

Resolution Date field

The date that the issue was resolved.

Description field

The description of the topic.

Tips

If you have more than one activity selected, the detail window will not be visible.

If you have a project template open, the icons in the detail window will be disabled.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Issues detail window.

Issues Detail Window of the EPS Page

Overview

Use this detail window to list and manage issues associated with the selected project.

Screen Elements

Issues toolbar

See Issues Toolbar (on page 1292).

854

Issue Name field

The name or description of the issue.

Priority list

Determines the priority of the activity when performing resource leveling.

Status field

The current status of the issue: Open, On Hold, Closed.

Owner field

The resource responsible for the selected issue.

If you have edit privileges, you can select a different owner. The list of available

resources you can select from depends upon your resource access security privileges.

Responsible Manager field

The name of the person responsible for the issue.

If you have edit privileges, you can select a different Responsible Manager. The list of

available resources depends upon your resource access security privileges.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

Tips

If you have a project template open, the icons in the detail window will be disabled.

If you have more than one project selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, select a project and click the Issues detail window.

Issues Page

Overview

Use this page to view a list or chart of all the issues for the currently open projects or

portfolios. This page helps you manage issues in the following ways:

View issue status and priority

View a short description or link directly to the full issue details page

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

855

Send e-mail about issues to multiple recipients who have configured their My

Preferences settings to automatically receive issue notifications

Screen Elements

Add an Issue link

Displays a dialog box in which you can search and select a form to create a new

project issue. Use the Add Issue page that is displayed once a form is chosen to

record basic issue information (such as responsible manager, owner, priority, and a

description).

Expand All/Collapse All link

Shows or hides the contents of each group of issues. To show or hide the contents of a

single group of issues, click or beside the grouping band. You can specify

grouping options when you customize the issues list. If you do not have any grouping

options selected, these links are not enabled.

Customize link

Enables you to specify how issues should be filtered, grouped, charted, and

columnized. For viewing issues in List format, you can specify the columns of

information you want to display. For viewing issues in chart format, you can specify

chart type and color options. The customize options you choose apply only to you.

Issue Forms link

Redirects you to the Issue Forms page. See Issue Forms Page (on page 850).

Display options

Determine the format in which you want to display project issues. The display option

applies for all users who can access the Project Issues portlet.

List: this option displays issues in a list, and enables you to add, edit, or delete

issues. By default, all issues display in the List format, but you can customize the list

to display only the issues you want to see. You can also select the columns of

information you want to display, and choose how to group and sort issues in the

list.

Chart: this option enables you to graphically display issue count information based

on your customized group and filter selections. The Chart format enables you to

graphically display issue count information based on your customized group and

filter selections. When you customize the portlet, you can change these group

and filter options. You can additionally customize the portlet to specify chart type

and color options. To view group by and issue count details, move the mouse over

each bar or slice in the chart.

To view issues in Chart format, you must customize the portlet and select at least one

grouping level option; otherwise, the chart does not display. To select grouping level

options, click Customize and then click the Group tab. To rotate the display of a pie

chart, you can click and drag the chart either clockwise or counter clockwise.

856

Issue Name field

The name or description of the issue.

Priority field

The level of importance assigned to the issue.

Responsible Manager field

The name of the person responsible for the issue.

If you have edit privileges, you can select a different Responsible Manager. The list of

available resources depends upon your resource access security privileges.

Owner field

The resource responsible for the selected issue.

If you have edit privileges, you can select a different owner. The list of available

resources you can select from depends upon your resource access security privileges.

Resolution Date field

The date the selected issue was resolved.

Status field

The current status of the issue: Open, On Hold, Closed.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

E-mail field

The e-mail dialog prepopulated with issue details.

Tips

When sorting by a specific issue column in the List format, an up-facing triangle

indicates the column is sorted in ascending order, and a down-facing triangle

indicates the column is sorted in descending order.

To add, edit, or delete an issue, you must have the required security privilege.

All issues that are added to a workgroup, and are then associated with a project

activity, appear as project issues on the Issues page, as well as in the Project Issues

portlet on the Workspace page.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

857

Issues Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page

Overview

Use this portlet to view information about issues that belong to the workgroup. The

information that appears depends on the display format and customize options you

select.

Screen Elements

Add link

Enables you to create a new project issue. You can select the issue form you want to

use to create the issue, then subsequently use the Add Issue page to record basic

issue information, such as responsible manager, owner, priority, and a description.

Expand All/Collapse All link

Shows or hides the contents of each group of issues. To show or hide the contents of a

single group of issues, click or beside the grouping band. You can specify

grouping options when you customize the issues list. If you do not have any grouping

options selected, these links are not enabled.

Customize link

Displays a dialog box for specifying how you want to filter, group, and sort issues. For

viewing issues in List format, you can specify the columns of information you want to

display. For viewing issues in Chart format, you can specify chart type and color

options. The customize options you choose apply for all users who can access the

Project Issues portlet. Refer to Customizing the Project Issues portlet for more detailed

information. See Customize Project Issues Dialog Box (on page 686).

Display options:

List option

Determines whether issues are displayed in a list, and enables you to add, edit, or

delete issues.

By default, all issues display in the List format, but you can customize the list to display

only the issues you want to see. You can also select the columns of information you

want to display, and choose how to group and sort issues in the list.

Chart option

Determines whether issue count information is graphically displayed based on your

customized group and filter selections.

The Chart format enables you to graphically display issue count information based on

your customized group and filter selections. When you customize the portlet, you can

change these group and filter options. You can additionally customize the portlet to

specify chart type and color options. To view group by and issue count details, move

the mouse over each bar or slice in the chart.

858

Filter field

The name of the filter currently applied to the portlet. By default, all issues display, but

you can customize the portlet to apply a custom filter. If a custom filter is applied, the

filter description appears in this field, and only those issues that meet the filter criteria

appear for both the List and Chart format.

Issue Name field

The name or description of the issue.

Priority field

The level of importance assigned to the issue.

Owner field

The resource responsible for the selected issue.

If you have edit privileges, you can select a different owner. The list of available

resources you can select from depends upon your resource access security privileges.

Resolution Date field

The date the selected issue was resolved.

Status field

The current status of the issue: Open, On Hold, Closed.

E-mail field

The e-mail dialog prepopulated with issue details.

Tips

The "No information is available" message appears when no workgroup issues have

been added, or when your filtering criteria excludes existing issues.

When a project activity is associated with a workgroup issue, the issue will also appear

as a project issue on the Project Issues portlet and the Issues page. If the activity

association is removed, the issue no longer appears in the Issues portlet on the

Workgroup page; it only appears as a project issue.

To view issues in chart format, you must customize the portlet and select at least one

grouping level option; otherwise, the chart does not display. To select grouping level

options, click Customize, and then click the Group tab.

To rotate the display of a pie chart, you can click and drag the chart either clockwise

or counter clockwise.

Getting Here

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

859

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Workgroups portlet and select a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, expand the Issues portlet.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the My Workgroups portlet and select a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, expand the Issues portlet.

Issues Section of the Global Tab of the My Preferences Page

Overview

Use this section to configure e-mail notifications for issues.

Screen Elements

Send me a notification when

Use the following options to determine whether you receive a notification and when.

Issues are added with priority of [ ] or higher option

Determines whether issues that are added with a priority you specify from the list are

sent. Value options are Top, High, Normal, Low, and Lowest.

Issues are assigned issue code field

Determines whether issues that are assigned an issue code are sent. Click to

display a dialog box with search options to assign an issue code.

Issues are modified option

Determines whether issues that are modified are sent.

Only notify me about Issues for Projects and Workgroups if I

The following options determine whether you are notified about issues for Projects

and Workgroups when one or multiple selections are made:

have project access rights option

Determines whether you are notified about issues for Projects and Workgroups if you

have Project access rights.

have issue access rights option

Determines whether you are notified about issues for Projects and Workgroups if you

have Issue access rights.

860

am the Project Owner option

Determines whether you are notified about issues for Projects and Workgroups if you

are the Project Owner.

am the Issue Owner option

Determines whether you are notified about issues for Projects and Workgroups if you

are the Issue Owner.

am assigned as a resource to that activity option

Determines whether you are notified about issues for Projects and Workgroups if you

are assigned as a resource to the specified activity.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab, expand the Issues section.

Lags - Relationships with a Positive Lag Duration Section of the Schedule Check Report Dialog

Box

Overview

Use this section to identify relationships with positive lags. Lags are a scheduled delay

between activities. It is important to identify lags in the schedule as they can manipulate

float and constrain a schedule. You can replace a lag with a task to avoid the problems

that lags can create.

Only a subset of all the internal and external links in the open projects are checked. Any

links between activities that both have actual finish dates are removed from the subset

to create the list of links checked for positive lag. The Actual percentage is calculated as

the number of links found that match the check divided by the total number of subset

links checked.

Screen Elements

Predecessor Project ID field

The identifying code for the project containing the predecessor activity that failed

the check.

Predecessor Activity ID field

The identifying code for the predecessor activity that failed the check.

Predecessor Activity Description field

The brief description of the predecessor activity.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

861

Relationship Type field

The relationship between two activities. See About Relationships for more

information on relationship types.

Lag Duration (hours) field

The number of hours of lag duration.

Successor Project ID field

The identifying code of the project that contains the successor activity.

Successor Activity ID field

The identifying code of the successor activity.

Successor Activity Description field

The brief description of the successor activity.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box:

a. Select the Lags - Relationships with a positive lag duration option.

b. Click Check Schedule.

5) In the Schedule Check Report dialog box, expand the Lags - Relationships with a

positive lag duration section.

Large Durations - Activities That Have a Remaining Duration Greater Than 352 Hours Section

of the Schedule Check Report Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to view activities with duration greater than the value you listed in the

Large Durations field in the Check Schedule dialog box. Activities with a large duration

are difficult to manage. You can break these activities down into smaller activities which

provide a better insight into cost and schedule.

Only a subset of the activities in the open projects are checked. WBS summary activities,

activities with an actual finish date, milestones, and Level of Effort activities are removed

from the subset to create the list of activities checked for large remaining duration. The

Actual percentage is calculated as the number of activities found that match the check

divided by the number of subset activities checked.

862

Screen Elements

Project ID field

The unique identifying code of the project containing the activity which failed the

check.

Activity ID field

The unique identifying code of the activity which failed the check.

Activity Description field

The brief description of the listed activity.

Remaining Duration (hours) field

The activity's remaining duration in hour format.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box:

a. Select the Large Durations - Activities that have a remaining duration greater than

352 hours option.

b. Click Check Schedule.

5) In the Schedule Check Report dialog box, expand the Large Durations - Activities that

have a remaining duration greater than 352 hours section.

Large Float - Activities with a Total Float Greater Than 352 Hours Section of the Schedule

Check Report Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to view activities with a float greater than the number of hours you

specify in the Large Float field in the Check Schedule dialog box. Activities with a large

float might be missing a suitable predecessor or successor. A high percentage of large

floats can indicate an unstable network that is not logic driven.

Only a subset of the activities in the open projects are checked. WBS summary activities,

activities with an actual finish date, and Level of Effort activities are removed from the

subset to create the list of activities checked for total float greater than the specified

value. The Actual percentage is calculated as the number of activities found that match

the check divided by the total number of subset activities checked.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

863

Screen Elements

Project ID field

The unique identifying code of the project containing the activity which failed the

check.

Activity ID field

The unique identifying code of the activity which failed the check.

Activity Description field

The brief description of the listed activity.

Total Float (hours) field

The total number of hours an activity can be delayed before the project is delayed.

Zero hours indicate that the activity cannot be delayed at all and negative float

indicates that the project is already behind schedule.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box:

a. Select the Large Float - Activities with a total float greater than 352 hours option.

b. Click Check Schedule.

5) In the Schedule Check Report dialog box, expand the Large Float - Activities with a

total float greater than 352 hours section.

Late Activities - Activities Scheduled to Finish Later Than the Project Baseline Section of the

Schedule Check Report Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to view activities that are scheduled to finish later than the project

baseline. This indicates how well the project is performing against the currently selected

baseline.

Only a subset of the activities in the open projects are checked. WBS summary activities,

activities with an actual finish date, milestones, and Level of Effort activities are removed

from the subset to create the list of activities checked for a Baseline Finish Variance of

less than 0. The Actual percentage is calculated as the number of activities found that

match the check divided by the total number of subset activities checked.

864

Screen Elements

Project ID field

The unique identifying code of the project containing the activity which failed the

check.

Activity ID field

The unique identifying code of the activity which failed the check.

Activity Description field

The brief description of the listed activity.

Finish Variance (hours) field

The number of hours the task has been delayed.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box:

a. Select the Late Activities - Activities scheduled to finish later than the project

baseline option.

b. Click Check Schedule.

5) In the Schedule Check Report dialog box, expand the Late Activities - Activities

scheduled to finish later than the project baseline section.

Layout Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page

Overview

Use this tab to arrange the size and position of portlets on a dashboard.

Screen Elements

Dashboard Portlets work area

A customizable arrangement of the selected portlets simulating their actual size and

position on the dashboard.

Narrow option

The application displays the selected portlet as a narrow box.

Wide option

The application displays the selected portlet as a wide box.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

865

Moves the selected portlet left in the workspace layout

Moves the selected portlet up in the workspace layout

Moves the selected portlet right in the workspace layout

Moves the selected portlet down in the workspace layout

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the selected dashboard, click Customize.

4) On the Dashboard Details page, click the Layout tab.

Layout Tab of the Customize Workgroup Workspace Page

Overview

Use this tab to arrange the layout of the selected portlets from the Content tab.

Screen Elements

Portlet Name group

The enabled portlets and their locations and size on the page.

Narrow option

The application displays the selected portlet as a narrow box.

Wide option

The application displays the selected portlet as a wide box.

Moves the selected portlet left in the workspace layout

Moves the selected portlet up in the workspace layout

Moves the selected portlet right in the workspace layout

Moves the selected portlet down in the workspace layout

Getting Here

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Workgroups portlet and click a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, click Customize.

866

5) On the Customize page, click the Layout tab.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Workgroups portlet and select a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, click Customize.

5) On the Customize page, click the Layout tab.

Layout Tab of the Workspace Details Page

Overview

Use this tab to size and position portlets in a workspace.

Screen Elements

Workspace Portlets work area

A customizable arrangement of the selected portlets simulating their actual size and

position on the workspace. You can drag and drop portlets in this work area.

Narrow option

The application displays the selected portlet as a narrow box.

Wide option

The application displays the selected portlet as a wide box.

Moves the selected portlet left in the workspace layout

Moves the selected portlet up in the workspace layout

Moves the selected portlet right in the workspace layout

Moves the selected portlet down in the workspace layout

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, click Customize.

4) On the Workspace Details page, click the Layout tab.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

867

Level Resources Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to ensure that resource demand does not exceed resource

availability.

Screen Elements

Options tab

See Options Tab of the Level Resources Dialog Box of the Activities Page (on page

912).

Resources tab

See Resources Tab of the Level Resources Dialog Box of the Activities Page (on page

1037).

Level button

Compares the resource requirements of all scheduled activities to the maximum

quantity available at the time of leveling.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Leveler...

(Shift+F9).

Leveling Report Log

Overview

When you level open projects, you have the option of generating this log in a new

window. Use it to view details about the projects you just leveled.

Screen Elements

Scheduling Settings section

See Scheduling Settings Section of the Leveling Report Log (on page 1073).

Leveling Settings section

See Leveling Settings Section of the Leveling Report Log (on page 869).

Statistics section

See Statistics Section of the Leveling Report Log (on page 1092).

868

Errors section

Activities that have invalid relationship loops field: Displays a value for the specified

field in a read-only format.

Warnings section

See Warnings Section of the Leveling Report Log (on page 1154).

Leveling Warnings section

See Leveling Warnings Section of the Leveling Report Log (on page 870).

Scheduling Results section

See Scheduling Results Section of the Leveling Report Log (on page 1072).

Leveling Results section

See Leveling Results Section of the Leveling Report Log (on page 868).

Exceptions section

See Exceptions Section of the Leveling Report Log (on page 758).

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Leveler...

(Shift+F9).

4) In the Level Resources dialog box, click the Options tab.

5) On the Options tab, select the Display leveling log upon completion and click Level.

Leveling Results Section of the Leveling Report Log

Overview

Use this section to view the results of leveling for the selected project. All fields are

read-only.

Screen Elements

Activities that cannot be Leveled field

The list of activities that the application cannot level in a read-only format.

Activities delayed by Leveling table

The ID and name of activities that have been delayed in a read-only format. Also

shows the Project ID and Project Name of the project to which the activity belongs.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

869

Project ID field

The unique identifying code for the project.

Project Name field

The name of the project.

Activity ID field

The unique identifier of the activity.

System generated.

Activity Name field

The name of the activity. The activity name does not have to be unique.

Activities indirectly delayed by Leveling field

The activities indirectly delayed by leveling in a read-only format.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Leveler...

(Shift+F9).

4) In the Level Resources dialog box, click the Options tab.

5) On the Options tab, select the Display leveling log upon completion and click Level.

6) In the Leveling Report Log, expand the Leveling Results section.

Leveling Settings Section of the Leveling Report Log

Overview

Use this section to view the configuration of various leveling settings. All fields are

read-only.

Screen Elements

Preserve scheduled early and late dates option

Determines whether to retain the project's current early dates before scheduling.

Level resources only within activity total float option

Determines whether to delay activities with resource conflicts only up to their late

dates (late finish when based on finish float, late start when based on start float).

Minimum preserved float field

The minimum amount of float maintained for each activity during leveling.

870

Maximum percent to over allocate resources field

The maximum percentage by which resource availability can be increased.

Consider assignments in closed projects option

Determines whether the assignments contained in closed projects will be considered

when leveling.

Consider closed projects with Priority equal/higher than field

Determines which closed projects, based on their priority level, will be considered

when leveling.

Level all resources option

Determines whether to level all the resources within the project.

Priorities field

The value for the specified field in a read-only format.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Leveler...

(Shift+F9).

4) In the Level Resources dialog box, click the Options tab.

5) On the Options tab, select the Display leveling log upon completion and click Level.

6) In the Leveling Report Log, expand the Leveling Settings section.

Leveling Warnings Section of the Leveling Report Log

Overview

Use this section to view the leveling warnings for various projects.

Screen Elements

Non-driving resource assignments moved off activity dates due to leveling field

The value for the specified field in a read-only format.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Leveler...

(Shift+F9).

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

871

4) In the Level Resources dialog box, click the Options tab.

5) On the Options tab, select the Display leveling log upon completion and click Level.

6) In the Leveling Report Log, expand the Leveling Warnings section.

Levels Detail Window of the Risk Thresholds Page

Overview

Use this detail window to view level configurations for the selected risk threshold.

Screen Elements

Threshold Sort

Sorts the threshold name order from lowest to highest or highest to lowest.

Code field

The short name for the threshold level.

For example, a risk threshold with three levels named High, Medium, and Low, might

have the codes H, M, L to represent the level names.

Name field

The name of the threshold level.

An example of names for a threshold with three levels are High, Medium, and Low.

Range field

The user-defined range for each threshold level where the breadth of the range

specifies the amount of risk associated with the assigned level.

This field allows for text or numeric data depending on the threshold type.

Probability: The value is a percentage.

Tolerance: The value is a number.

Cost Impact: The value is the cost.

Schedule Impact: The value is a duration.

User-defined Impact: The value is text.

Color field

The color representing the threshold in the score field or probability and impact

diagram (PID).

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and click Risk Thresholds.

3) On the Risk Thresholds page, click the Levels detail window.

872

Limits Detail Window of the Roles Tab of the Administration Page

Overview

Use this detail window to define the units/time for the role over time.

Screen Elements

Add (Insert)

Adds a role limit row.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Role selector (Ctrl+Up Arrow) or (Ctrl+Down Arrow)

Cycles through the available roles and determines which data display in the detail

window. Click (Ctrl+Up Arrow) to move to the previous role, or click (Ctrl+Down

Arrow) to move to the next role. The content in the detail window is refreshed with the

data for the selected role.

Effective Date field

Displays the date that the corresponding units/time period goes into effect for the

role.

Max Units/Time field

The maximum work units per time this role can perform on all their assigned activities.

This number should correspond to the number of people who can fill this role.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Roles tab.

4) On the Roles tab, click the Limits detail window.

Links to Closed Projects - Activities with Links to Closed Projects Section of the Schedule

Check Report Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to view data for activities that have links to closed projects.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

873

Screen Elements

Predecessor Project ID field

The identifying code for the project containing the predecessor activity that failed

the check.

Predecessor Activity ID field

The identifying code for the predecessor activity that failed the check.

Predecessor Activity Description field

The brief description of the predecessor activity.

Relationship Type field

The relationship between two activities. See About Relationships for more

information on relationship types.

Lag Duration (hours) field

The number of hours of lag duration.

Successor Project ID field

The identifying code of the project that contains the successor activity.

Successor Activity ID field

The identifying code of the successor activity.

Successor Activity Description field

The brief description of the successor activity.

Tips

Asterisks (*) are used in the report to show which activities are contained in closed

projects.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box, configure the options and click Check Schedule.

5) In the Schedule Check Report dialog box, expand the Links to Closed Projects -

Activities with links to closed projects section.

874

Logic - Activities Missing Predecessors or Successors Section of the Schedule Check Report

Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to identify activities missing a predecessor, successor, or both. This

indicates how well or poorly the schedule is linked together.

Only a subset of all the activities in the open projects are checked. WBS summary

activities and activities with an actual finish date are removed to create the list of

activities that are checked for missing logic. In the logic check, activities with an actual

start or that are Start Milestones pass the predecessor check even if they do not have a

predecessor. Finish Milestone activities always pass the successor check even if they do

not have a successor. Activities with external predecessors or successors pass the check.

Any of the remaining activities that were found to not have a predecessor or successor

are then reported in the check. The Actual percentage is calculated as the number of

activities found that match the check divided by the number of subset activities

checked.

Screen Elements

Project ID field

The unique identifying code of the project containing the activity which failed the

check.

Activity ID field

The unique identifying code of the activity which failed the check.

Activity Description field

The brief description of the listed activity.

State field

The items that the listed activity is missing; whether predecessor, successor, or both.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box:

a. Select the Logic - Activities missing predecessors or successors option.

b. Click Check Schedule.

5) In the Schedule Check Report dialog box, expand the Logic - Activities missing

predecessors or successors section.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

875

Long Lags - Relationships with a Lag Duration Greater Than 352 Hours Section of the

Schedule Check Report Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to identify relationships with lags longer than than the number of hours

you specify in the Long Lags field of the Check Schedule dialog box. Lags, especially

long lags, can manipulate float and constrain a schedule.

Only a subset of all the internal and external links in the open projects are checked. Any

links between activities that both have actual finish dates are removed from the subset

to create the list of links checked for long lag. The Actual percentage is calculated as

the number of links found that match the check divided by the total number of subset

links checked.

Screen Elements

Predecessor Project ID field

The identifying code for the project containing the predecessor activity that failed

the check.

Predecessor Activity ID field

The identifying code for the predecessor activity that failed the check.

Predecessor Activity Description field

The brief description of the predecessor activity.

Relationship Type field

The relationship between two activities. See About Relationships for more information

on relationship types.

Lag Duration (hours) field

The number of hours of lag duration.

Successor Project ID field

The identifying code of the project that contains the successor activity.

Successor Activity ID field

The identifying code of the successor activity.

Successor Activity Description field

The brief description of the successor activity.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

876

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box:

a. Select the Long Lags - Relationships with a lag duration greater than 352 hours

option.

b. Click Check Schedule.

5) In the Schedule Check Report dialog box, expand the Long Lags - Relationships with a

lag duration greater than 352 hours section.

Manage Dashboards Page

Overview

Use this page to view all dashboards available in your user interface view and those that

are currently displayed on the Dashboards page.

Note: This page displays the global and multi-user dashboards

available to you as defined in your view settings, along with your

private, user dashboards. If you have the appropriate rights, you

can modify the list of available dashboards that display on this

page.

Screen Elements

Create Dashboard link

Enables you to create a new dashboard based on another dashboard or the default

dashboard settings.

Search field

The means to find a project.

Title field

The dashboard name. The dashboard name links to redirect the current view to the

Content tab of the Customize Dashboard page.

Filter field

The portfolio, project, or project code filter defined for the dashboard.

Available To field

Indicates the user access for each dashboard:

Global: All users can view the dashboard.

User: Only you (the currently logged on user) can access the dashboard.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

877

Multiple Users: A select group of users, including you, have access to the

dashboard.

Created By column

The login name of the person who created the dashboard.

Date Created column

The date and time the dashboard was created.

Move Down

Moves the selected item one level down in the sort order.

Move Up

Moves the selected item one level up in the sort order.

Delete link

Removes the selected item.

Getting Here

Click the Dashboards menu and select Manage Dashboards.

Manage Portfolio Views Page

Overview

This page lists all portfolio views available to you. Use this page to create, modify, and

delete portfolio views. A portfolio view is a scorecard or chart providing high-level

information spanning an entire group of projects.

Screen Elements

Create View button

Creates a new portfolio view.

Search field

Incremental search field. As you type, the list of entries is refreshed and matching

scenario names automatically expand in the list. To reset the list, clear the search

field.

List of Entries

Arranged by the types of portfolio views

878

Title

Displays the name of the view. The list of views is organized by type: Bubble Chart,

Histogram, Pie Chart, Scorecard, Side-by-side Histogram, and Stacked Histogram. The

total number of views available for each type is displayed in parentheses.

Available to

Indicates the user access for the view:

Global: All users with module access to global portfolio views can use the view.

User: Restricted to current, specified user.

Getting Here

Click the Portfolios menu and choose Manage Portfolio Views.

Manage Portfolios Page

Overview

The Manage Portfolios page lists all global and user portfolios. Use this page to review the

list of projects inside each portfolio and to create, modify, and delete portfolios.

Screen Elements

Create Project Portfolio link

The link opens the Create Portfolio page.

Portfolios

The name of the portfolio with an icon that indicates its type.

Projects

Click to view a list of all projects contained in a selected portfolio.

Available to

Specifies whether the portfolio is available to an individual user or globally to those

with the appropriate access rights.

# of Projects

Lists the number of projects you have access to within a portfolio.

Getting Here

Click the Portfolios or Dashboards menu and choose Manage Portfolios.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

879

Manage Scenarios Page

Overview

The Scenarios page enables you to view the list of all scenarios available to you. Use this

page to modify and delete scenarios, view or add notes for a scenario, and send e-mail

to users associated with a scenario. Each entry represents a project code, EPS node, or

portfolio and includes an identifying icon, name or title, and the number of associated

scenarios. Only entries with existing scenarios are defined.

Screen Elements

Search field

Enter information, such as title, to search for a specific scenario.

Title field

Displays the name of the scenario as a hyperlink you can click to open.

List of entries

Click to expand an entry in the list to view its scenarios.

Available To

Indicates the user access level for each scenario:

Global: all users can view the scenario.

User: only you (the currently logged on user) can access the scenario.

Multiple Users: a select group of users, including you, have access to the scenario.

Created By

The username of the person who created the scenario.

Date Created

The date and time the scenario was created.

Notes

Click to view or add notes for the scenario.

E-Mail

Displays options for sending information about the currently selected item to one or

more recipients via electronic mail. For user scenarios, this field is blank.

Tips

The notes you append to a scenario are not related to the application-wide

Notebooks feature.

880

Getting Here

Click the Portfolios menu and choose Manage Scenarios.

Milestone Status Portlet of the Workspace Page

Overview

Use this portlet to view the project milestones completed or due within a specified

number of days before and after the current date. Milestones are sorted by their due

dates. E-mail links let you easily contact team members associated with each milestone.

Screen Elements

Milestone Name field

The name of the milestone activity. For example, Start Foundation Phase II or Structure

Completed.

Responsible Resource field

The primary resource, if any, associated with this milestone.

Due field

The date the remaining work is scheduled to finish or, if the milestone is completed,

the actual date.

Note: The Due date that appears for milestones depends on two

factors: the Project Baseline that is currently selected and the status

of the activity.

If the current project is used as the Project Baseline, the Due date reflects the

remaining start/finish for not completed milestones and the actual start/finish for

completed milestones. Otherwise, the Due date reflects the Project Baseline

start/finish date of the milestone activity, whether completed or not.

Completed field

The actual finish date.

E-Mail

Displays options for sending information about the currently selected item to one or

more recipients via electronic mail.

Tips

The "No information is available" message appears in this portlet when no milestones exist

for the project, or when no milestones meet the date range criteria specified when you

configured the workspace to display this portlet.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

881

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Milestone Status portlet.

Modify Template Dialog Box of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to create a new template or modify an existing template to

exchange data between P6 and Microsoft Project or other third-party applications.

When importing from Microsoft Project to P6, you are required to use an import file and

an import template. You can create or select and customize an import template in this

dialog box.

Screen Elements

General tab

See General Tab of the Modify Template Dialog Box of the Import/Export Project Page

(see "General Tab of the Modify Template Dialog Box of the Import/Export Project

Dialog Box" on page 808).

Activity tab

See Activity Tab of the Modify Template Dialog Box of the Import/Export Project Page

(see "Activity Tab of the Modify Template Dialog Box of the Import/Export Project

Dialog Box" on page 562).

Resource tab

See Resource Tab of the Modify Template Dialog Box of the Import/Export Project

Page (see "Resource Tab of the Modify Template Dialog Box of the Import/Export

Project Dialog Box" on page 1013).

Notebooks tab

See Notebooks Tab of the Modify Project Template Dialog Box of the Import/Export

Project Page (see "Notebooks Tab of the Modify Project Template Dialog Box of the

Import/Export Project Dialog Box" on page 906).

Custom Field Mapping tab

See Custom Field Mapping Tab of the Modify Template Dialog Box of the

Import/Export Project Page (see "Custom Field Mapping Tab of the Modify Template

Dialog Box of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box" on page 659).

882

Tips

In addition to importing entire projects into and exporting projects from P6 EPPM

version 8.0, you can import activities into a current project or export activities to a

project in P6 or another application.

The Import or Export Type must be set as Microsoft Project XML (2007) to enable the

options icons.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export XML Project

Import/Export.

4) In the Import/Export Project dialog box, click the Import or Export tab.

5) On the Import or Export tab:

a. Select Microsoft Project XML (2007) from the Import or Export Type lists.

b. Click MSP Export Template Options or MSP Import Template Options.

Module Access Detail Window of the Users Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign module access for the selected user. Users cannot log

into P6 without one of the following module access options marked: Projects, Portfolios,

Resources, Team Member, or Enterprise Reporting. If the user only has a P6 Professional,

P6 Analytics, Progress Reporter, API, or Web Services license, they will be prompted that

they don't have a valid license.

Screen Elements

Module field

The name of each module. This field is read-only.

Enterprise Reports option

Determines user access to the Reports section in P6. By selecting this module access

option, an ODS database user is created for the P6 EPPM user as long as the user

name matches Oracle database user name requirements. For example, if the P6

EPPM user name begins with anything other than a letter, an ODS database user

cannot be created. If the P6 EPPM user name contains spaces or disallowed special

characters, they will be removed when creating the ODS database user name.

Disallowed special characters include: { } [ ] : ; < > , . ? ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ | / \ ~ `. For

example, a P6 EPPM user name of "mgr.example.com" will be created as

"mgrexamplecom" in the ODS database. Once an ODS database user is created, the

P6 user will be able to view and run reports to which the user has access in Oracle BI

Publisher.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

883

Notes:

If running in LDAP or SSO authentication mode and a user is

granted Enterprise Reports module access, you will not be able

to log into the ODS database directly through Oracle BI

Publisher with the P6 EPPM user name if it contains spaces or

disallowed special characters.

In order for a user to log into the ODS database directly (for

example, using SQL Plus) with the P6 EPPM user name, a system

database administrator must first reset the ODS database user's

password.

Integration API option

Determines user access to log into the PMDB database through P6 Integration API via

Java.

P6 Analytics option

Determines user access only to the Star database through Oracle Business

Intelligence. By selecting this module access option, a Star user is created for the P6

EPPM user as long as the user name matches Oracle database user name

requirements. For example, if the P6 EPPM user name begins with anything other than

a letter, a Star user cannot be created. Once a Star user is created, the user will be

able to access the Oracle Business Intelligence Dashboards application.

P6 Professional option

Determines user access to P6 Professional, including Primavera Timescaled Logic

Diagram.

Portfolios option

Determines user access to the following functionality in P6: the Portfolios section,

Project Performance portlets, the Portfolio View portlet in the Dashboards section,

document management functionality (if the Content Repository is configured), and

workflow functionality (if the Workflows Repository is configured).

Progress Reporter option

Determines user access to P6 Progress Reporter. For users who require access to P6

Progress Reporter, you must grant them either Team Member or Progress Reporter

module access.

Projects option

Determines user access to the following functionality in P6: the Projects section,

Project Performance portlets in the Dashboards section, document management

functionality (if the Content Repository is configured), and workflow functionality (if

the Workflows Repository is configured).

884

Resources option

Determines user access to the following functionality in P6: the Resources section,

Resources portlets in the Dashboards section, document management functionality

(if the Content Repository is configured), and workflow functionality (if the Workflows

Repository is configured).

Team Member option

Determines user access to P6 Progress Reporter and to limited functionality in P6, such

as the Dashboards and Projects sections (Workspace and Activities pages). For User

Interface Views, only the options on the Activity Editing tab apply to Team Members.

Access to P6 functionality is additionally determined by a user’s OBS access and

relationship to the project, that is, whether the user is assigned as a resource to

activities and designated as an activity owner. You must clear all other module

access options in order to select Team Member module access; conversely, you must

clear Team Member module access in order to select any other module access

option.

Web Services option

Determines user access to P6 Web Services, which uses open standards, including

XML, SOAP, and WSDL, to seamlessly integrate P6 EPPM functionality into other

applications. Using P6 Web Services, organizations can share P6 EPPM data between

applications independent of operating system or programming language.

Access option

Determines whether to grant access to each corresponding module.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Users.

3) On the Users page, click the Module Access detail window.

My Activities Portlet

Overview

Use this portlet to view activities to which you are either assigned as a resource or

designated as the activity owner. The portlet displays activities based on assignment

dates and your current portlet customization settings. You can click an activity to open it.

Screen Elements

Enter Time link

Accesses P6 Progress Reporter.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

885

Note: This link is available only with the appropriate configuration

and access rights. Contact your P6 administrator for more

information.

Activity Name field

The unique name for each activity.

Start Date field

For started activities, the actual start date. For not started activities, set to the planned

start date until the project is scheduled. When scheduled, set to the remaining early

start date.

Finish Date field

For completed activities, the actual finish date. For not started and in-progress

activities, set to the planned finish date if the project has not been scheduled. When

scheduled, set to the remaining early finish date.

Remaining Units field

The remaining Units for completing the assignment.

Calculated as Remaining Duration multiplied by Remaining Units per Time.

Primary Resource option

Determines whether the corresponding resource is the activity's primary resource.

Typically, the primary resource is the person responsible for the overall work on the

activity and for updating activity status.

Tips

The "No information is available" message appears in the My Activities portlet if you:

have no activities scheduled during the range of days specified on the Content

tab of the Dashboard Details page.

are not assigned as a resource or owner to any activities in, or do not have the

appropriate access rights to, the projects included in the portfolio, project, or

project code filter specified in the dashboard's Filter by field.

Note: If the dashboard containing the portlet is your private

dashboard, or a multi-user or global dashboard you created, you

can change the Filter by option at any time; if the dashboard is a

multi-user or global dashboard created by another user, your

ability to change the Filter by option is controlled by dashboard

settings.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

886

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the My Activities portlet.

My Calendar Dialog Box

Overview

Use the My Calendar dialog box to view and manage your own personal resource

calendar. For example, you can:

Rename your calendar or change your base calendar.

Edit your standard work week or day, including designating special non work days.

Import appointments from outside P6.

Screen Elements

My Calendar toolbar

See My Calendar Dialog Box Toolbar (on page 1293).

Calendar tab

The Calendar tab displays work hours that can be modified. This tab is identical to the

Calendar tab of the Resource Calendar. See Calendar Tab of the Resource

Calendars Page (on page 607) for further details.

Standard Work Week tab

The Standard Work Week tab displays the length of work hours in a day as well as

calculates the total number of hours worked in a specific day. This tab is identical to

the Standard Work Week tab of the Resource Calendar. See Standard Work Week

Tab of the Resource Calendars Page (on page 1087) for further details.

Getting Here

Click the Administer menu and select My Calendar.

Note: The My Calendar link will only appear on the Administer

menu when your user access account has an Associated Resource

and that resource has a personal resource calendar.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

887

My Calendar Portlet

Overview

Use this portlet to see a week's worth of activities that pertain to your projects. The My

Calendar portlet displays all activities that you are either assigned to as a resource or

designated as the activity owner. Display the current week or click past or future dates to

see the list of activities and milestones for the selected week. The selected week is

highlighted in blue.

Screen Elements

Calendar

The different months and activities associated with each month.

The arrows to the left display the previous month and the arrows to the right display

next month. The selected week is highlighted in blue.

Activities list

The list of activities for specified month above.Activities can be displayed and hidden

by the arrows.

Tips

Click a project or activity to view more detailed project or activity data. You can edit

details only if you have the required access rights.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the My Calendar portlet.

My Documents Portlet

Overview

Use this portlet for quick access to project documents you have recently worked on or

accessed. It also enables you to create and manage private documents for your own

personal use.

By default, the My Documents portlet contains two tabs:

Recent Project Documents

My Private Documents

Screen Elements

Recent Documents tab

See Recent Documents Tab of the My Documents Portlet (on page 982).

888

Private Documents tab

See Private Documents Tab of the My Documents Portlet (with content repository) (on

page 947).

Tips

This portlet appears only if P6 is configured to use the content repository

A dashboard's Filter by selection does not apply to documents displayed in this

portlet.

A appears beside a document if it is checked out.

Documents added via P6 Professional do not appear in the Project Documents

portlet. You can access these documents from the WP & Docs tab on the Project

Documents portlet of the Project Workspace.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the My Documents portlet.

My Issues Portlet

Overview

Use this portlet to view information about issues with which you are associated . The

information that appears depends on the display format and customize options you

select.

Screen Elements

Add link

Enables you to create a new project issue. You can select the issue form you want to

use to create the issue, then subsequently use the Add Issue page to record basic

issue information, such as responsible manager, owner, priority, and a description.

Customize link

Opens a dialog box with configurable options for viewing your issues. This dialog box is

identical to the Customize Issues dialog box of the Projects section. See Customize

Project Issues Dialog Box (on page 686).

Display options

Determine the format in which you want to display project issues. The display option

applies for all users who can access the Project Issues portlet.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

889

List: this option displays issues in a list, and enables you to add, edit, or delete

issues. By default, all issues display in the List format, but you can customize the list

to display only the issues you want to see. You can also select the columns of

information you want to display, and choose how to group and sort issues in the

list.

Chart: this option enables you to graphically display issue count information based

on your customized group and filter selections. The Chart format enables you to

graphically display issue count information based on your customized group and

filter selections. When you customize the portlet, you can change these group

and filter options. You can additionally customize the portlet to specify chart type

and color options. To view group by and issue count details, move the mouse over

each bar or slice in the chart.

To view issues in Chart format, you must customize the portlet and select at least one

grouping level option; otherwise, the chart does not display. To select grouping level

options, click Customize and then click the Group tab. To rotate the display of a pie

chart, you can click and drag the chart either clockwise or counter clockwise.

Filter field

The name of the filter currently applied to the portlet. By default, all issues display, but

you can customize the portlet to apply a custom filter. If a custom filter is applied, the

filter description appears in this field, and only those issues that meet the filter criteria

appear for both the List and Chart format.

Issue Name field

The name or description of the issue.

Priority field

The level of importance assigned to the issue.

Owner field

The resource responsible for the selected issue.

If you have edit privileges, you can select a different owner. The list of available

resources you can select from depends upon your resource access security privileges.

Resolution Date field

The date the selected issue was resolved.

Status field

The current status of the issue: Open, On Hold, Closed.

E-mail field

The e-mail dialog prepopulated with issue details.

890

Tips

The "No information is available" message is displayed when no workgroup issues

have been added, or when your filtering criteria excludes existing issues.

When a project activity is associated with a workgroup issue, the issue will also appear

as a project issue on the Project Issues portlet and the Issues page. If the activity

association is removed, the issue no longer appears in the Issues portlet on the

Workgroup Workspace page; it only appears as a project issue.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the My Issues portlet.

My Preferences Page

Overview

Use this page to customize options that influence all sections of the application.

Screen Elements

Global tab

See Global Tab of the My Preferences Page (on page 818).

View tab

See View Tab of the My Preferences Page (on page 1148).

Password tab

See Password Tab of the My Preferences Page (on page 917).

Getting Here

Click the Administer menu and choose My Preferences.

My Projects Portlet

Overview

Use this portlet to view projects you are the owner of, have OBS access to, or are

assigned to as a resource or as an activity owner. The portlet displays the project start

and finish dates, current percent complete, date last summarized, and the project

owner. You can click a project name link to open the project.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

891

Screen Elements

Name field

The name of the project. The icon next to the project name indicates your association

with the project, the type of project, and its check-out status.

Start Date field

The earliest start date derived from all activities in the project baseline if the project

has not started. If the project has started or finished, this is the earliest actual start date

derived from all activities. This field is blank for new projects that have not yet been

summarized.

Finish Date field

The latest finish date derived from all activities in the project baseline if the project has

not started. If the project is in progress, this is the date the remaining work is scheduled

to end. If the project is finished, this is the latest actual finish date derived from all

activities. This field is blank for new projects that have not yet been summarized.

Percent Complete field

The duration Percent Complete for the project.

Calculated as (Planned Duration minus Remaining Duration) divided by Planned

Duration. This field is blank for projects that have not been summarized.

Last Summarized field

The date the project was last summarized. This field is blank for projects that have not

been summarized.

Project Owner field

The resource designated as responsible for the project.

The project owner designation provides a user with viewing access for the project.

Tips

The "No information is available" message appears in this portlet if you are not

associated with any projects, if no projects meet your portfolio, project, or project

code filtering criteria, or if you have cleared all of the My Projects display options on

the Dashboard Details page.

Click a project name to view more details about the project; the page that displays

when you open the project is determined by your user interface view settings.

Depending on the settings defined in your view, you might be able to change your

view preferences.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

892

3) On the dashboard, expand the My Projects portlet.

My Reviews Tab of the Document Reviews Portlet

Overview

Use this tab to display a list of all document reviews that you have created along with

their initiation date and due date.

Screen Elements

My Reviews Tab toolbar

See My Reviews Toolbar (on page 1294).

Name field

The name of the review. This field displays the selected document's name by default.

Initiator field

The name of the user who initiated the review.

Date Initiated field

The date and time the review was initiated.

Due Date field

The date all reviewers need to complete the review. If no due date is specified for the

review, then this field appears blank.

Status field

The current status of the document.

Tips

If you have not created any document reviews, the "No information is available"

message displays.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Document Reviews portlet and click the My Reviews

tab.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

893

My Risks Portlet

Overview

Using your portfolio, project, or project code filter criteria specified for the current

dashboard, the My Risks portlet displays information about your associated risks. You can

customize the portlet to specify the columns of information you want to display, as well as

the types of risks you want to appear.

Screen Elements

Customize link

Specifies the columns of information you want to display and filters risks based on

status.See Customize Risks Dialog Box (on page 690).

Name field

The name of the risk.

ID field

The unique identifier for the risk.

Category field

The name for a particular type of risk classification. Use risk categories to identify and

organize project risks consistently throughout your organization.

Technical, Operational, External are examples of risk categories that might apply to a

typical project.

Owner field

The resource that has ownership of the risk.

Description field

The description of the risk.

Cause field

The description of the cause of the risk.

Effect field

The resulting effect of the presence of the risk.

Notes field

The notes or comments entered for the associated with the risk.

Status field

The current state of the risk. Valid values are:

Proposed: The risk is identified and awaits approval.

894

Open: The risk is approved as a valid risk to the project.

Active: The risk is currently impacting the project.

Rejected (Closed): The risk is not seen as a valid risk to the project and therefore

will not be tracked and managed by the project. The data for this risk cannot be

modified once it is closed.

Managed (Closed): The risk occurred and was successfully managed by the

project team and is no longer an active risk. The data for this risk cannot be

modified once it is closed.

Impacted (Closed): The risk occurred, impacted the project and is no longer an

active risk. The data for this risk cannot be modified once it is closed.

Type field

The classification of the risk as a threat or an opportunity.

A threat will have a negative impact on your project, while an opportunity can have

a perceived benefit to the project.

User Defined field

Fields defined by your P6 administrator that are not standard in the application, but

are necessary to capture additional data for the project or the company.

Tips

The "No information is available" message appears when your project and risk filtering

criteria excludes risks that are associated with you, or when you don't have risks

associated with you.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the My Risks portlet.

My Workflows Tab of the Workflows Portlet

Overview

Use this tab to monitor workflows where you are assigned as a reviewer, owner, or

initiator, and have been granted permission in BPM to access all stages of the workflow.

Screen Elements

My Workflows toolbar

See My Workflows Toolbar (on page 1294).

Days Pending field

The total number of days the workflow has been assigned and awaiting action.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

895

Calculated as the Current Date minus the Assigned Date of the oldest currently

assigned human task for the currently logged in user.

Due Date field

The deadline for this workflow and all its tasks based on predefined expectations for

workflows within this particular business process.

ID field

The unique numeric identifier for each workflow instance.

Initiated Date field

The date the workflow instance was originally initiated.

Instance field

The unique name assigned to each individual instance of the original predefined

workflow.

Formatted as "Instance Name of Process Name."

Initiator field

The name of the person who initiated the request.

Last Modified By field

The Personal Name of the user associated with the most recent changes to any of the

tasks within the workflow or to the workflow itself. This includes workflow initiation, and

task claiming, reassigning, approving, escalating, and other actions. This field displays

the value Workflowsystem if the change was made by another application or system

event.

Last modified date field

The date when this workflow was most recently changed. The most recent change to

any task within this workflow is reflected in this date.

Name field

The name of the predefined or master workflow. The workflows that appear in the My

Workflows tab are instances or copies of this original predefined workflow.

Pending Tasks field

The total number of pending tasks for the current stage of the workflow.

Pending User field

The name of the user, role, or group of users assigned to the oldest pending task

holding up the workflow's advancement to the next stage.

Priority field

The current priority of the workflow instance.

896

Category or Process field

The name of the original workflow type or template from which this instance of the

workflow is derived. When multiple tasks share the same or similar names, refer to this

field to view the originating or parent workflow.

Stage field

The name of the current workflow phase. The stage also provides an indication of the

workflow's current progress within the total sequence of all its defined phases. For

example, Stage 1: Just Initiated vs. Stage 5: Final Review.

Status field

The current state of the workflow instance.

Values include In Progress (in process), Failed (completed with errors), Approved

(completed), and Rejected (aborted). The names in parentheses are the BPM values.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Workflows portlet.

4) In the Workflows portlet, click the My Workflows tab.

My Workgroups Portlet of the Dashboards Page

Overview

Use this portlet to view, by project, all workgroups with which you are associated.

Worgkgroups are organized by project.

Note: You cannot add or delete workgroups from the My

Workgroups portlet.

Screen Elements

Workgroup Name field

Displays the name of the project and each workgroup associated with each project.

Click beside the project name to display all associated workgroups. Click to

hide the workgroups. Click the project name to open the Project Workspace page;

see Workspace Page (on page 1172). Click the workgroup name to open the

Workgroup Workspace page; see Workgroup Workspace Page.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

897

Tips

The Workgroups portlet is the only portlet on the Project workspace that displays

information based on your association to the workgroup; other Project Workspace

portlets display the same information to all members of the project team who can

access the workspace.

Project Workspace portlets display data for the selected project only. When multiple

projects are open, you must choose the project you want to work with in the Select

Project box at the top right of the Project Workspace. When a single project is open,

the Select Project box does not appear.

The "No information is available" message displays in the My Workgroups and

Workgroups portlets when you are not associated with any workgroups.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the My Workgroups portlet.

Negative Float - Activities with a Total Float Less Than 0 Section of the Schedule Check Report

Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to view activities with negative float. Negative float can occur when a

constraint or actual date creates a schedule that is shorter than the duration calculated

to complete the activities on the critical path. Activities with negative float are critical.

Only a subset of the activities in the open projects are checked. WBS summary activities,

activities with an actual finish date, and Level of Effort activities are removed from the

subset to create the list of activities checked for negative float. The Actual percentage is

calculated as the number of activities found that match the check divided by the total

number of subset activities checked.

Screen Elements

Project ID field

The unique identifying code of the project containing the activity which failed the

check.

Activity ID field

The unique identifying code of the activity which failed the check.

Activity Description field

The brief description of the listed activity.

898

Total Float (hours) field

The total number of hours an activity can be delayed before the project is delayed.

Zero hours indicate that the activity cannot be delayed at all and negative float

indicates that the project is already behind schedule.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box:

a. Select the Negative Float - Activities with a total float less than 0 option.

b. Click Check Schedule.

5) In the Schedule Check Report dialog box, expand the Negative Float - Activities with

a total float less than 0 section.

Negative Lags - Relationships with a Lag Duration of Less Than 0 Section of the Schedule

Check Report Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to identify relationships with negative lags. Negative lags can affect

critical path and distort total float. When activity durations change, activities with

negative lag can be scheduled unrealistically. Negative lags can be used to schedule

overlapping activities. For example, when digging a trench, workers can start laying pipe

in the completed sections of the trench while the rest of the trench is still in progress. To

avoid the distortion that negative lag can cause, you might consider using positive lag

on a Start to Start relationship rather than a negative lag on a Finish to Start relationship.

Only a subset of all the internal and external links in the open projects are checked. Any

links between activities that both have actual finish dates are removed from the subset

to create the list of links checked for negative lag. The Actual percentage is calculated

as the number of links found that match the check divided by the total number of subset

links checked.

Screen Elements

Predecessor Project ID field

The identifying code for the project containing the predecessor activity that failed

the check.

Predecessor Activity ID field

The identifying code for the predecessor activity that failed the check.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

899

Predecessor Activity Description field

The brief description of the predecessor activity.

Relationship Type field

The relationship between two activities. See About Relationships for more

information on relationship types.

Lag Duration (hours) field

The number of hours of lag duration.

Successor Project ID field

The identifying code of the project that contains the successor activity.

Successor Activity ID field

The identifying code of the successor activity.

Successor Activity Description field

The brief description of the successor activity.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box:

a. Select the Negative Lags - Relationships with a lag duration of less than 0 option.

b. Click Check Schedule.

5) In the Schedule Check Report dialog box, expand the Negative Lags - Relationships

with a lag duration of less than 0 section.

Notebook Details Page of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this page to view, update, or remove the activity notebook topics.

Screen Elements

Remove Assignment link

Removes the notebook assignment.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

900

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Notebook section and select a notebook

topic.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Notebook section and select a notebook

topic.

Notebook Section of Activity Details of the Resources Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to view notebook topics associated with the activity, along with

descriptive text.

Screen Elements

Assign Notebook Topic link

Opens a dialog box to search for and select a notebook topic to assign. See Working

with 'Select a Value' Dialog Boxes for further details of use of this dialog box.

Topic Name field

The name of the notebook topic. Click to display the work area for modifying the

description field. See Text Editor Toolbar (on page 1352) for further details.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

Getting Here

From the Team Usage page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Team Usage.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

901

3) On the Team Usage page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Project list.

b. Click the Organized By list and select Roles.

1. Expand a project and select a role in the left pane.

2. Select the Spreadsheet option and click a project in the right pane.

4) In the Resources dialog box:

a. Click the Unstaffed and Staffed option to show all activities.

b. Click an activity name.

5) On the Activity Details page, expand the Notebook section.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, expand the Open Requests for Resources portlet and

select a project or a role name depending on your customization options.

3) On the Resource Staffing Details page:

a. Click the Unstaffed and Staffed option.

b. Select an activity.

4) On the Activity Details page, expand the Notebook section.

Notebook Section of the Activity Details Dialog Box

Overview

Use the Notebook section of the Activity Details dialog box to view notebook topics

associated with the activity, along with descriptive text.

Screen Elements

Assign Notebook Topic link

Displays a dialog box to search for and select a notebook topic to assign. See

Selection Dialog Boxes for further details of use of this dialog box.

Topic Name field

The name of the notebook topic. Click to display the work area for modifying the

description field. See Text Editor Toolbar (on page 1352) for further details.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

902

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) On the Analysis page, click the Role Usage tab.

4) On the Role Usage tab, select a role and select to display the Spreadsheet.

5) On the Spreadsheet, click a project name.

6) In the Resource Staffing dialog box, click an activity name then expand the Notebook

section.

Notebook Section of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this section to view notebook topics associated with the activity, along with

descriptive text.

Screen Elements

Assign Notebook Topic link

Opens a dialog box to search for and select a notebook topic to assign. See Working

with 'Select a Value' Dialog Boxes for further details of use of this dialog box.

Topic Name field

The name of the notebook topic.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Notebook section.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

903

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Notebook section.

Notebook Topics Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure notebook topics.

Screen Elements

Notebook Topics toolbar

See Enterprise Data Notebook Topics Toolbar (on page 1270).

Topic Name field

This field displays available topic names.

EPS option

Determines whether the selected notebook topic is available for assignment to an

EPS node.

Project option

Determines whether the selected notebook topic is available for assignment to a

project.

WBS option

Determines whether the selected notebook topic is available for assignment to a

WBS.

Activity option

Determines whether the selected notebook topic is available for assignment to an

activity.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Notebook Topics.

904

Notebook Topics Portlet of the Workspace Page

Overview

Use this portlet to review notebook descriptions for all projects within the open project

group. Notebooks are used to set up general categories for information relating to

activity, project, EPS, and WBS notes. You can use HTML editing features to modify

notebooks.

Screen Elements

Notebook Topic field

The name of the notebook topic. Click the name of a notebook topic to edit the

description using the work area and Text Editor Toolbar. See Text Editor Toolbar (on

page 1352) for further details.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Notebook Topics portlet.

Notebooks Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign a notebook topic to an activity, view, add, or assign a

notebook topic, or remove a topic assignment.

Screen Elements

Notebooks toolbar

See Notebooks Toolbar (on page 1295).

Topic field

The name of the assigned topic.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

905

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

Tips

If you have more than one activity selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Notebooks detail window.

Notebooks Detail Window of the EPS Page

Overview

Use this detail window to configure notebook topics and descriptions for the selected

project.

Screen Elements

Notebooks toolbar

See Notebooks Toolbar (on page 1295).

Topic field

The name of the associated notebook topic.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

Tips

If you have more than one project selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, select a project and click the Notebooks detail window.

906

Notebooks Tab of the Modify Project Template Dialog Box of the Import/Export Project Dialog

Box

Overview

Use this tab of the to select the notebook topics you want to use to exchange data with

Microsoft Project notes. Notes from the import file are imported into the selected

notebook topics. Data from the notebook topics are exported to Microsoft Project notes.

Screen Elements

Project notes list

The Microsoft Project notebook topic to exchange data with a project notebook.

WBS notes list

The Microsoft Project notebook topic to exchange data with a P6 WBS notebook.

Activity notes list

The Microsoft Project notebook topic selected to exchange data with an activity

notebook.

Export all notebook topics to Microsoft Project note option

Determines whether to export all notebook topics associated with the project, WBS, or

activity to the notes field in Microsoft Project.

For export, this option overrides the previously-selected notebook topics.

Tips

The Import or Export Type must be set as Microsoft Project XML (2007) to enable the

options icons.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export XML Project

Import/Export.

4) In the Import/Export Project dialog box, click the Import or Export tab.

5) On the Import or Export tab:

a. Select Microsoft Project XML (2007) from the Import or Export Type list.

b. Click MSP Export Template Options or MSP Import Template Options.

6) In the Modify Template dialog box, click the Notebooks tab.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

907

Notes Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page

Overview

Use this detail window to add, view, or update notes describing a resource.

Screen Elements

Text Editor Toolbar

See Text Editor Toolbar (on page 1352).

Work area

The area where you can enter a note. Use the Text Editor Toolbar (on page 1352) to

modify text.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resources tab.

4) On the Resources tab, click the Notes detail window.

Notes Detail Window of the Risks Page

Overview

Use this detail window to write notes about the selected risk.

Screen Elements

Text Editor toolbar

See Text Editor Toolbar (on page 1352).

Work area

Use this area to enter text and modify it using the Text Editor Toolbar.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Risks.

3) On the Risks page, click the Notes detail window.

908

OBS Page

Overview

Use this page to configure the organizational breakdown structure (OBS) for your

enterprise.

Screen Elements

OBS toolbar

See User Access OBS Toolbar (on page 1356).

OBS Name field

The unique name for the OBS element. OBS elements represent responsible managers

arranged in a hierarchy.

Description field

The description that corresponds with the OBS name.

Responsibility detail window

See Responsibility Detail Window of the OBS Page (on page 1041).

Users detail window

See Users Detail Window of the OBS Page (on page 1140).

Description detail window

See Description Detail Window of the OBS Page (on page 711).

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click OBS.

Open a Request for a Resource Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to search for a resource to assign to an activity.

Screen Elements

Find a resource matching options

Determines what criteria is used in your search:

All search criteria: Finds a resource based on all selections of search criteria that

you select from or enter in the fields of the dialog box.

Any search criteria: Finds a resource based on a random criteria search.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

909

Roles field

The name of the roles to use in the search. Unless you specify only one resource and

no other criteria, you must specify a primary role. When a single resource is selected

with no other criteria, the search criteria will include the primary role of the resource

you specify. If that resource does not have a primary role, a message displays to ask

you to select a primary role.

Proficiency field

The resource's proficiency at performing this role.

The values are 1 - Master, 2 - Expert, 3 - Skilled, 4 - Proficient, and 5 - Inexperienced. If

you do not have the proper privilege, you cannot access this field.

Resources field

The names of specific resources to use in the search.

The displayed hierarchy includes only those resources that belong to your access

node, based on resource security, and current project resources. If you chose the

option to show results that match all criteria, you can specify only one resource.

Resource Codes field

The specific codes to use in the search. If you chose the option to show results that

match all criteria, you can specify only one code value for each resource code you

select.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page:

a. Click the resource.

b. Click the Yes or No link in the Search Criteria column.

Note: If the Search Criteria column is not visible, click Customize

Columns. In the Customize Columns dialog box, expand General

and double-click Search Criteria to move the column to the

Selected Columns list. Click OK.

Open a Request for a Resource Dialog Box of the Assignments Detail Window of the Activities

Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to search for a resource to assign to an activity.

910

Screen Elements

Find a resource matching options

Determines what criteria is used in your search:

All search criteria: Finds a resource based on all selections of search criteria that

you select from or enter in the fields of the dialog box.

Any search criteria: Finds a resource based on a random criteria search.

Roles field

Determines the organizational roles to use as criteria in searching for a resource.

Proficiency field

The resource's proficiency at performing this role.

The values are 1 - Master, 2 - Expert, 3 - Skilled, 4 - Proficient, and 5 - Inexperienced. If

you do not have the proper privilege, you cannot access this field.

Resources field

The resource assigned to a task.

Resource Codes field

The search query for a resource by resource code.

Primary Role field

The name of the primary job title or skill for the resource.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Assignments detail window.

4) In the Assignments detail window, click Request Resources (Ctrl+Alt+Q).

Open Portfolio Dialog Box

Overview

Use the Open Portfolio dialog box to open a group of projects by EPS, code, or portfolio.

After opening a portfolio, the application will continue to open that same portfolio

whenever you click Portfolios.

Screen Elements

Group by

View the project groups by EPS, portfolio, or project code. Select an option from the

menu:

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

911

EPS: Each EPS node contains projects that belong to a specific organizational entity

defined by your administrator at the corporate or strategic level.

Portfolio: Each portfolio contains projects specified manually by the portfolio

creator or automatically according to filter criteria. The list of portfolios available for

you to open includes all global portfolios, portfolios created by other users you have

rights to access, and all portfolios you created.

Project Codes: Each project code group contains projects that have been

assigned to a specific user-defined code, or category, by your administrator at the

corporate or strategic level.

Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

Search (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding a specific matching entry or entries based on search

criteria.

Getting Here

Click the Portfolios menu and choose Open Portfolio.

Open Projects Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to limit the volume of information appearing in the Projects section to

only the current project or projects of most interest to you. You can search, identify, and

select any number of projects to open. If you specify a portfolio, EPS node, or project

code to open, every project you have access to in this group will open.

This dialog box is also used to open project templates.

Screen Elements

Open Projects dialog box toolbar

See Open Projects Dialog Box Toolbar (on page 1296).

Available Projects and Selected Projects sections

See Configuring Columns or Values.

Description section

The brief summary of the item at hand. The field or section might be editable.

912

Tips

To limit the number of projects that display in the dialog box, enter the value you want in

the Maximum number of rows displayed in trees and pick lists field in Global Preferences.

Getting Here

Click the Projects menu and select Open Projects.

Open Requests for Resources Portlet

Overview

Use this portlet to view the staffing for projects to which you are associated.

Screen Elements

Name field

The names of the unstaffed roles for the current role team, organized and filtered

according to your portlet preferences. Each project or role name is a link that displays

the activities for the role and enables you to access the resource staffing features.

Unstaffed Units field

The total units that require resource assignments for each role. Units for all roles are

totaled at the level you organize by.

Staffed Units field

The total units currently assigned to individual resources for each role.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Open Requests for Resources portlet.

Options Tab of the Level Resources Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this tab to configure leveling options and priorities.

Screen Elements

Consider assignments in other projects with priority equal or higher than field

The numeric priority level used when considering assignments in other projects during

the leveling process.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

913

For example, if resources are assigned across multiple projects, you can determine

whether to consider the resource assignments in other projects when leveling. A

leveling priority number is assigned to each project. In the Level Resources dialog box,

mark the option to consider assignments in other projects and specify the priority

value you want to consider.

Preserve scheduled early and late dates option

Determines whether early and late dates are preserved as scheduled or adjusted

during the leveling process.

If you mark this option, the project’s current early dates are retained before leveling.

To review the leveled early dates, select to show the Remaining Start/Finish dates or

the Start and Finish dates. In addition, when you preserve these dates, the module

only forward-levels the schedule, which means that the early dates of activities from

the start to the finish of the project are scheduled.

If you clear this option, the application also performs backward leveling. Backward

leveling schedules activities to occur as late as possible without delaying the project

finish. The application reverses the leveling process, beginning at the project’s late

finish and working towards the beginning of the project. If insufficient resources are

available to schedule an activity on its late dates, the activity is advanced to an

earlier date. When the schedule is leveled forward and backward (by clearing the

option) the project’s early and late start/finish dates are updated.

Level resources only within activity total float option

Determines whether to delay activities with resource conflicts only up to their late

dates (late finish when based on finish float, late start when based on start float).

Preserve minimum activity float field

The minimum amount of total float you want to maintain for each activity during

leveling.

Maximum percent to over allocate resources field

The maximum percentage by which resource availability can be increased.

Recalculate assignment costs when leveling option

Determines whether to recalculate the costs of assignments when leveling.

Display leveling log upon completion option

Determines whether to display the leveling log when leveling is complete.

Leveling Priorities table

The priorities associated with the resources and the sort order for each.

Your priorities are used to handle scheduling conflicts that might occur during

leveling, and determine which project or activity is leveled first. The table displays the

type of priority, and the order in which the item specified in the priority is leveled.

914

Add Leveling Priority

Creates a new leveling priority row in the Leveling Priorities table.

Delete

Deletes the selected item or items permanently.

Field Name field

The fields considered to be leveling priorities.

Sort Order list

Determines whether the application sorts values in ascending or descending order.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Leveler...

(Shift+F9).

4) In the Level Resources dialog box, click the Options tab.

Options Tab of the Report Settings Dialog Box

Overview

Set the options on this tab to determine how your scheduled report output will be

generated, formatted, and delivered.

Screen Elements

Report Name field

The title for the report defined in BI Publisher.

Schedule Name field

The name for the report schedule. A single report will have multiple schedule names.

For example, an original source report named Quality Report can be scheduled and

given the following schedule names: Weekly Quality Report, Monthly Team Quality

Report, and Region 3 Quality Report.

Template list

The template you want to use to apply style to the report data.

Format list

The file formats that you can use for file output.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

915

Delivery Type field

The way users will access or take delivery of this report. On-demand reports can be

delivered by electronic mail as attachments or downloaded as files. You can only

deliver scheduled reports by electronic mail.

E-mail Options button

Launches the E-mail Options dialog box used to enter all e-mail recipients for the

selected report.

Notification options

Determines the types of e-mail status notifications the user who scheduled the report

should receive when the scheduled report attempts to run.

Report Completed option: Determines whether e-mail is sent if the report is delivered

without errors.

Report Complete with warnings option: Determines whether e-mail is sent if the report

is delivered, but has errors.

Report Failed option: Determines whether e-mail is sent if the report failed to run.

Report Parameters table

If a report has field parameters predefined in BI Publisher, they will appear here in P6. You

must specify report parameter values in order to generate valid output. For example, a

weekly timesheet compliance report would require that you specify the start and finish

dates for the target period of the report.

Caution: To avoid system performance issues, be as specific as

possible when entering values for reports. Narrow down your

choices to include only what is absolutely necessary.

Field Name field

The key field used by P6 to construct valid data for each specific instance of report

output.

Value field

The parameter value for the field shown in the field Name column. The field changes

to a picklist, date editor, check box, combo box, or a text field depending on the

settings pre-defined for the field Name. The data entered in a text field must be

accurate, otherwise the report will fail to run.

Example: Jay in Accounting would like to run a report showing

data derived from three active projects, X, Y, and Z. Janice, VP of

Strategic Development, wants the same report but is only

concerned at the moment with Project Y. They each

independently schedule the same report; however, they specify

different report parameter values for Project ID:

916

Jay: Project X, Project Y, Project Z

Janice: Project Y

Getting Here

1) Click Reports.

2) On the Reports page:

a. Click View and select Reports.

b. Select a report, and then click the Schedule detail window.

3) In the Schedule detail window, click Add (Insert).

4) In the Report Setting dialog box, click the Options tab.

Overallocated Resources Portlet of the Workspace Page

Overview

Use this portlet to view the name and role of each project resource that is overallocated.

You can click on a resource name to view allocation details.

Screen Elements

View Project team link

Redirects you to the Team Usage page.

Resource Name field

The name of a resource who is overallocated for the current project.

Roles on Project field

The resource's assigned roles for the project.

Tips

The No information is available message displays when there are no overallocated

resources for the project.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Overallocated Resources portlet.

Overhead Codes Page

Overview

Use this page to add, configure, and export overhead codes.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

917

Screen Elements

Overhead Codes toolbar

See Enterprise Data Overhead Codes Toolbar (on page 1271).

Name field

This field displays the overhead code name.This field can be modified by

double-clicking on a select code.

Description field

The description of the overhead code.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Overhead Codes.

Password Tab of the My Preferences Page

Overview

Use this tab to change your own password.

Screen Elements

Current Password field

Enter the current password for the selected user.

New Password field

When the Password Policy is disabled in Application Settings, the password must be

between 1 and 20 characters. P6 EPPM does not allow blank passwords.

When the Password Policy is enabled in Application Settings, the password must

be between 8 and 20 characters and contain at least one number and one letter.

Confirm New Password field

To confirm the change, enter the new password.

When the Password Policy is disabled in Application Settings, the password must be

between 1 and 20 characters. P6 EPPM does not allow blank passwords.

When the Password Policy is enabled in Application Settings, the password must

be between 8 and 20 characters and contain at least one number and one letter.

Tips

You cannot change passwords if you are running P6 EPPM in LDAP or SSO

authentication mode.

918

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Password tab.

Performance Threshold Section of the Content Tab of the Workspace Page

Overview

Use this section to specify parameters for Performance, Earned Value, and Index values

that appear in project performance portlets. The values you specify determine which

visual indicators apply to each metric.

Screen Elements

Performance section

Use the options in this section to define what is considered Exceptional, Warning, or

Critical when assessing schedule performance for a project, WBS, or EPS. The values

you specify determine which indicators apply to the Schedule to date, Labor units to

date, Schedule at completion, and Labor units at completion metrics.

Exceptional: For schedule values, the minimum number of days that the

project, WBS, or EPS must be ahead of schedule to be considered exceptional. For

labor units, the minimum percentage under 100 that the labor units variance must

be less than to display the exceptional indicator. For example, if you set the

exceptional threshold at 10% and the actual labor units variance is 85%, then that

item would be considered exceptional.

Warning: For a schedule value, the minimum number of days that the project,

WBS, or EPS must be behind schedule to display the warning indicator. For labor

units, the minimum percentage over 100 that the labor units variance must be

greater than to display the warning indicator.

Critical: For a schedule value, the minimum number of days that the project,

WBS, or EPS must be behind schedule to display the critical indicator. For labor

units, the minimum percentage over 100 that the labor units variance must be

greater than to display the critical indicator.

Some examples of threshold percentage calculations are as follows:

Labor units to date: (Earned Value Labor Units minus Actual Labor Units) divided by

Earned Value Labor Units

Labor units at completion: (Budget At Completion Labor Units minus Estimate At

Completion Labor Units) divided by Budget At Completion Labor Units

Earned Value section

Use the options in this section to define what is considered Exceptional, Warning, and

Critical when assessing earned value performance for a project, WBS, or EPS. The

values you specify determine which indicators apply to the Schedule to date, Labor

units to date, Schedule at completion, and Labor units at completion metrics.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

919

Exceptional: The minimum percentage under 100 that the schedule or labor

units variance must be less than to display the exceptional indicator. For example,

if you set the exceptional threshold at 10% and the actual earned value variance

is 85%, then that item would be considered exceptional.

Warning: The minimum percentage over 100 that the schedule or labor units

variance must be greater than to display the warning indicator.

Critical: The minimum percentage over 100 that the schedule or labor units

variance must be greater than to display the critical indicator.

Some examples of threshold percentage calculations are as follows:

Schedule to date: (Earned Value Labor Units minus Planned Value Labor Units)

divided by Planned Value Labor Units

Labor units to date: (Earned Value Labor Units minus Actual Labor Units) divided by

Earned Value Labor Units

Schedule at completion: (Budget At Completion multiplied by Schedule Variance

Index) divided by Budget At Completion

Labor units at completion: (Budget At Completion Labor Units multiplied by Cost

Variance Index) divided by Budget At Completion Labor Units

Index section

Use the options in this section to define what is Exceptional, Warning, and Critical

when assessing index performance. The values you specify determine which

indicators apply to the Cost Performance Index (CPI), Schedule Performance Index

(SPI), and To Complete Performance Index (TCPI).

Exceptional: The minimum percentage over 100 that the index variance must

be greater than to display the exceptional indicator. For example, if you set the

exceptional threshold at 10% and the actual index variance is 115%, then that

item would be considered exceptional.

Warning: The minimum percentage under 100 that the index variance must be

less than to display the warning indicator.

Critical: The minimum percentage under 100 that the index variance must be

less than to display the critical indicator.

Some examples of percentage calculations are as follows:

CPI: Earned Value divided by Actual Units

SPI: Earned Value divided by Planned Value

TCPI: (Budget At Completion minus Earned Value) divided by (Estimate At

Completion minus Actual Units)

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, click Customize.

920

4) On the Customize page, click the Content tab.

5) On the Content tab, expand the Performance Threshold section.

Performance Threshold Section of the Global Tab of the My Preferences Page

Overview

Use this section to specify parameters for Performance, Earned Value, and Index values

that appear in dashboard Project Performance portlets and on the Portfolios

Performance Status tab. The settings you specify in Global Preferences only apply to the

dashboard portlets; for each project, you can specify project-specific Performance

Threshold settings when you customize the project Workspace.

Screen Elements

Performance section

Use the options in this section to define what is considered Exceptional, Warning, or

Critical when assessing schedule performance for a project, WBS, or EPS. The values

you specify determine which indicators apply to the Schedule to date, Labor units to

date, Schedule at completion, and Labor units at completion metrics.

Exceptional: For schedule values, the minimum number of days that the

project, WBS, or EPS must be ahead of schedule to be considered exceptional. For

labor units, the minimum percentage under 100 that the labor units variance must

be less than to display the exceptional indicator. For example, if you set the

exceptional threshold at 10% and the actual labor units variance is 85%, then that

item would be considered exceptional.

Warning: For a schedule value, the minimum number of days that the project,

WBS, or EPS must be behind schedule to display the warning indicator. For labor

units, the minimum percentage over 100 that the labor units variance must be

greater than to display the warning indicator.

Critical: For a schedule value, the minimum number of days that the project,

WBS, or EPS must be behind schedule to display the critical indicator. For labor

units, the minimum percentage over 100 that the labor units variance must be

greater than to display the critical indicator.

Some examples of threshold percentage calculations are as follows:

Labor units to date: (Earned Value Labor Units minus Actual Labor Units) divided by

Earned Value Labor Units

Labor units at completion: (Budget At Completion Labor Units minus Estimate At

Completion Labor Units) divided by Budget At Completion Labor Units

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

921

Earned Value section

Use the options in this section to define what is considered Exceptional, Warning, and

Critical when assessing earned value performance for a project, WBS, or EPS. The

values you specify determine which indicators apply to the Schedule to date, Labor

units to date, Schedule at completion, and Labor units at completion metrics.

Exceptional: The minimum percentage under 100 that the schedule or labor

units variance must be less than to display the exceptional indicator. For example,

if you set the exceptional threshold at 10% and the actual earned value variance

is 85%, then that item would be considered exceptional.

Warning: The minimum percentage over 100 that the schedule or labor units

variance must be greater than to display the warning indicator.

Critical: The minimum percentage over 100 that the schedule or labor units

variance must be greater than to display the critical indicator.

Some examples of threshold percentage calculations are as follows:

Schedule to date: (Earned Value Labor Units minus Planned Value Labor Units)

divided by Planned Value Labor Units

Labor units to date: (Earned Value Labor Units minus Actual Labor Units) divided by

Earned Value Labor Units

Schedule at completion: (Budget At Completion multiplied by Schedule Variance

Index) divided by Budget At Completion

Labor units at completion: (Budget At Completion Labor Units multiplied by Cost

Variance Index) divided by Budget At Completion Labor Units

Index section

Use the options in this section to define what is Exceptional, Warning, and Critical

when assessing index performance. The values you specify determine which

indicators apply to the Cost Performance Index (CPI), Schedule Performance Index

(SPI), and To Complete Performance Index (TCPI).

Exceptional: The minimum percentage over 100 that the index variance must

be greater than to display the exceptional indicator. For example, if you set the

exceptional threshold at 10% and the actual index variance is 115%, then that

item would be considered exceptional.

Warning: The minimum percentage under 100 that the index variance must be

less than to display the warning indicator.

Critical: The minimum percentage under 100 that the index variance must be

less than to display the critical indicator.

Some examples of percentage calculations are as follows:

CPI: Earned Value divided by Actual Units

SPI: Earned Value divided by Planned Value

TCPI: (Budget At Completion minus Earned Value) divided by (Estimate At

Completion minus Actual Units)

922

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab, expand the Performance Threshold section.

Planning Page

Overview

The Planning page is a valuable tool to use to quickly and easily establish resource

demand on a proposed project without the need to perform time-consuming

resource-loading on a detailed project plan. This high-level allocation data can be

maintained through the life of the project and referenced when planning resources at a

more detailed level. While resources may not be assigned to specific activities at this

point, a portion of their time can be allocated towards the project, which informs project

managers of the intended commitment of the resource to the project. This helps to avoid

overallocation of resources during project planning.

Use the Planning page spreadsheet to specify, review, or modify project-level and

WBS-level allocation data for individual resources and roles across a project lifecycle. For

each resource or role assignment, you can record total allocated units, which are

calculated live and distributed across the project timescale, or you can record individual

timescale allocated values, which are summed to provide an allocation units total. For

resource assignments, you can base your allocation decisions on the resources' current

availability, which is recalculated live as you edit allocated values.

On this page, you can choose to work with a single project or all projects associated with

a single portfolio, project code, resource, resource team, resource code, role, or role

team.

Screen Elements

Synchronize Resource Dates link

Ensures all assignments are based on the current project timeline.

Export Spreadsheet link

Exports the current spreadsheet to a Microsoft Excel .xls file.

Full Screen mode link

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display in a separate window.

Nonessential controls are hidden from this mode.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

923

Resource Analysis link

Redirects you to the Analysis page in order to evaluate resource usage and costs in

customizable chart formats. Examine units or costs for an individual resource or

summary values for all resources belonging to a resource team or code. See

Resource Analysis Tab of the Analysis Page (on page 997).

Customize link

Displays a dialog box with configurable options for customizing the Planning page.

See Customize Spreadsheet Dialog Box of the Planning Page (on page 697).

Filter and group by

The items to be displayed.

If portfolio or project code value is selected, all projects you have access to within the

portfolio or project code value are displayed in the Resource Planning spreadsheet.

If resource is selected, all projects the resource is assigned to, and that you have

access to, are displayed.

If resource team is selected, all projects that all resources on the team are assigned

to, and that you have access to, are displayed.

If resource code is selected, all projects that all resources on the resource code are

assigned to, and that you have access to, are displayed.

If role is selected, all projects that the selected role is assigned to and that you have

access to, are displayed.

If role team team is selected, all projects that all roles on the team are assigned to,

and that you have access to, are displayed.

Planning Toolbar

See Planning Toolbar (on page 1302).

Name field

The name of the project element.

Role field

The name of the role assigned to the project or WBS.

Search Criteria field

The indication of whether there is saved search criteria.

Committed field

Determines whether a resource is committed.

The resource assignment is stable and unlikely to change. When calculating

availability, only assignments that are marked as committed are considered.

924

Start Date field

The planned start date of the project, or the start date for the WBS, or resource or role

assignment. If the spreadsheet is grouped by portfolio, the start date is the earliest

planned start date of all projects within the portfolio.

Finish Date field

The scheduled finish date of the project, or the finish date for the WBS, or resource or

role assignment. If the spreadsheet is grouped by portfolio, the finish date is the latest

scheduled finish date of all projects within the portfolio.

Project Forecast Start field

The alternate start date to be used by the scheduler.

The user sets the alternate start date by dragging the project bar in the Gantt chart

while manually leveling the resource profile in a resource analysis layout.

Forecast Finish Date field

The planned finish date of a project or WBS based in a what-if scenario designed to

stimulate project performance and outcomes and plan resource allocation.

Life of Project option

Determines whether to assign the resource or role for the full project duration.

Status field

The status codes used to classify resource or role assignments.

Usage field

Determines whether the resource or role is allocated.

Total Units field

The total number of units allocated to the project.

View Total Units by Hour, Day, Week, or Month.

% Allocation field

The percentage of available resource units.

As you make changes to the % Allocation field, the total units and corresponding

timescale allocated units are recalculated and displayed in the spreadsheet.

Tips

Designating a resource or role assignment as Life of Project sets the assignment start

and finish dates to match these project dates, if there is a scheduled finish date.

At the WBS level, Start and Finish reflect the earliest assignment start date and latest

assignment finish date, respectively.

At the portfolio, project code value, and resource levels, Start and Finish reflect the

earliest Planned Start and latest scheduled Finish, respectively.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

925

At the portfolios, project codes, and project levels, the total units column (labeled as

Total Hours, Days, Weeks, or Months) and timescale interval columns display a

summary total of allocated units for all resources and roles. For example, if you

choose project A when filtering the spreadsheet by projects, allocated units of all

resources belonging to project A would roll up and show summary totals in the total

units column and timescale interval columns in the spreadsheet. To show the

summary totals at the WBS level, expand the WBS to show assignments.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Planning.

Portfolio Analysis Page

Overview

Use this page to analyze portfolio data, conduct side-by-side comparisons of two project

groups, and apply what-if scenarios and waterline analysis techniques to assist with

executive-level critical decision making. The Portfolio Analysis page is divided into two

halves. Information related to one project group appears on one side and information

specific to a second project group appears on the other side.

For each project group, you can choose to display the latest summarized data, or a

snapshot of historical project data that has been saved as a scenario. You can also

select a portfolio view to determine the layout of project data.

Screen Element

Compare options

Choose one of the following options for viewing the two selected project groups.

Vertically (stacked)

Horizontally (side-by-side)

Portfolio Analysis toolbar

See Portfolio Analysis Toolbar (on page 1304).

Portfolio Analysis Settings bar

See Portfolio Analysis Settings Area (on page 1303)

Work Area

Displays the data or chart you selected in the View field on the settings bar.

Getting Here

1) Click Portfolios.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Portfolio Analysis.

926

Portfolio Capacity Planning Page

Overview

Use this page to analyze role allocation and cost over time. Multiple chart formats display

role allocation for the projects and roles you select, enabling you to quickly identify areas

of under or over allocation.

Using this page, you can perform what-if analysis, graphically change project forecast

dates, and apply waterline analysis techniques to assist with critical, executive-level

decision making. During your analysis, you can create and update scenarios that

provide varying snapshots of project and role allocation data. After conducting your

analysis, you can create portfolios containing only the projects that meet your planning

criteria.

Screen Elements

Capacity Planning toolbar

See Capacity Planning Toolbar (on page 1247).

Scorecard area

The scorecard displays project data in spreadsheet format.

When you select an option in the scorecard, the project's role allocation is included in

the Capacity Planning chart at the bottom of the page.

Gantt Chart area

The Gantt chart displays current and forecast data according to the timescale you

specify when you customize the page. Each project in the scorecard has two

corresponding bars: the Current Bar (top) and Forecast Bar (bottom).

The Current Bar is based on the project start and finish dates; blue indicates current

project progress, while green indicates remaining work. The Forecast Bar spans from

the project's forecast start date to the forecast finish date. If forecast dates have not

been defined, the Forecast Bar spans from the remaining start date to the remaining

finish date.

When the page displays the latest summarized data, you can move the Forecast Bar

to change the forecast dates; you cannot move the Forecast Bar when displaying

scenario data, and you can never move the Current Bar.

Note: If the project group you are viewing is an EPS containing child EPS nodes, the

Gantt chart displays a yellow Summary Bar rather than an orange Forecast Bar

because forecast dates do not apply to EPS nodes.

Capacity Planning Chart area

In the lower half of the work area, the Capacity Planning Chart area consists of the

following components:

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

927

Chart toolbar; see Capacity Planning Chart Toolbar (on page 1245)

Role selector

Capacity Planning Chart

Chart legend

Role selector

The role selector displays roles according to the Group By or Search options you

specify.

When the page displays the latest summarized data, you can choose to group roles

by the current portfolio's roles, the role hierarchy, or role teams, or you can search for

roles. When displaying scenario data, the role selector only displays the current

portfolio's roles. The allocations for the roles you select are displayed in the Capacity

Planning chart at the bottom of the page. For example, if you only choose the Project

Manager role in the role selector, the Capacity Planning chart only displays the

Project Manager role's allocation. You can use this information to determine which

projects or time periods the Project Manager role is under- or over-allocated.

Capacity Planning Chart work area

The Capacity Planning chart displays historical scenario data or the latest

summarized data according to the type of chart you choose to view, the roles and

projects you select, the customize options you choose, and global preference

settings for calculating role limits.

Whichever chart type you choose, when you hover over a color-coded section of the

chart, the application displays the data pertaining to that section.For each role you

select in the role selector, the Capacity Planning chart displays role allocation over

time for the projects you select in the scorecard or for all projects in the database

(click Customize to choose options). The chart can display role allocation as a

stacked histogram, area chart, net availability chart, or spreadsheet. You can choose

to display role allocation per project, role, or project code, or you can choose to

display staffed versus unstaffed units or costs. Additionally, you can compare data for

the current project group's roles versus roles assigned to all other projects.

Tips

To display the Financial Period timescale, projects must be summarized by financial

period and financial periods must be properly configured. To display a calendar

timescale (for example, Month/Week), projects must be summarized by calendar

intervals.

The scorecard on this page does not display WBS rows, only project rows. On the

Portfolio Analysis page and the Portfolio View portlet, scorecards display WBS rows

along with project rows.

Getting Here

1) Open a portfolio in the Portfolios section using one of the following methods:

Click Portfolios to open the last portfolio you were working with.

928

Click the Portfolios menu and choose one of the most-recently used

portfolios.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose Open Portfolio to select a group of

projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Capacity Planning.

Portfolio Details Page

Overview

Use this page to modify a group of projects, called a portfolio. Use portfolios to group

multiple projects according to filter criteria or manual selection based on portfolio

management goals not limited to projects of a particular EPS level or those sharing the

same project code. Portfolios enable you to review and analyze data easily at a

summary level. You can even create portfolios consisting of other portfolios.

Screen Elements

Portfolio Name field

The unique name of the project portfolio according to its access type, user specific or

global.

For example, two users could have a portfolio with the same name, but no two global

portfolios can have the same name.

Filter last refreshed on field

For filtered portfolios only, displays the date and time the portfolio's filter was last

refreshed.

Manage this portfolio options

Choose one of the two options for configuring the portfolio:

Manually: You will configure the projects you want added to or removed from the

portfolio.

By Filter: The portfolio will dynamically configure and refresh itself over time based

on criteria you specify.

This portfolio is available to options

Choose a user access option for the portfolio.

Current User: Only you, the currently logged in user, will be able to view this

portfolio.

All Users: Every user will be able to view this global portfolio.

Another User: Only the user you select will be able to view this portfolio.

If Manual option is chosen under the Manage this Portfolio field, the following options will

be available:

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

929

Manual Portfolio selection controls

Configure the projects you want to include in your portfolio. See Customize Columns

or Values.

If By Filter option is chosen under the Manage this Portfolio field, the following options will

be available:

Select Filter Criteria

Select from one of the following options:

All of the Following

Any of the Following

Parameter field

Select from one of the following options:

General

User Defined fields

Project Codes

Is field

Select from one of the following options:

equals

is not equal to

Value field

Enter a value that either equals or is not equal to the parameter, chosen with the

correct parameter and is fields.

Tips

Portfolio names must be unique according to their access type, that is, user specific or

global. For example, two users could have a portfolio with the same name, but no

two of a single user's portfolios or global portfolios can have the same name.

You can only modify a portfolio if you were its original creator.

Filtered portfolios automatically refresh themselves according to an interval set by

your administrator. To manually refresh a filtered portfolio so it captures the most

recent projects meeting the filter criteria, click Save.

Getting Here

1) Click the Portfolios menu and select Manage Portfolios.

2) On the Manage Portfolios page, click on a portfolio.

930

Portfolio Gantt Chart Page

Overview

Use this page to display timescaled performance or earned value schedule information

at the WBS level, along with unit or cost data, in a spreadsheet or histogram. The Gantt

chart summary and baseline bars reflect data for all projects in the currently open

project group down to the WBS level.

Screen Elements

Customize button

Opens a dialog box for choosing display options for the Gantt chart, such as the

timescale increment and the type of data to display.

Display options

Options for displaying the data associated with the Gantt chart in either a

spreadsheet or histogram format.

Spreadsheet option

Displays the chart data in a timescaled row and column format.

Histogram option

Displays the chart data as a timescaled bar chart.

Legend area

Displays the actual work, remaining work, baseline, summary, and project duration

colors represented in the chart.

Gantt Chart work area

Displays the Gantt chart including its timeline. Position your mouse cursor over a bar to

display a summary.

Zoom In

Increases the current magnification of items in the work area so they appear larger.

Zoom Out

Decreases the current magnification of items in the work area so they appear smaller.

Spreadsheet or Histogram area

Based on the choice you made for the Display options field, this area displays either

the spreadsheet or histogram. In the histogram, click and hold the mouse button

down on a bar to view baseline, actual, and remaining data, including cumulative

totals.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

931

List of projects, codes, portfolios, or EPS nodes

Depending on the type of project group or portfolio you open, a list of its sub-items

might appear below the chart. Click a hyperlink in the list to open the item.

Tips

Because the Gantt chart uses summarized data, it is only as current as the last date

the summarizer was run for each project. Furthermore, the number of WBS levels you

can summarize and view is determined by the Summarize to WBS Level setting.

Configure this setting and view the date and time of the last summarization on the

Summarization Page of the Project Preferences Dialog Box (on page 1112).

To view detail bars for the group, click Expand next to the summary bar or

double-click a bar.

To adjust the width of the timescale increments, click Zoom In or Zoom Out. Or,

click and drag a timescale interval to the left or right.

The histogram displays only the positive values for bars and cumulative curves. Click

on an individual bar or curve to review any negative values.

The blue dotted vertical line represents the data date of the selected project, or the

earliest data date of all projects in the selected EPS, portfolio, or project code.

To print the Gantt chart, spreadsheet, or histogram, right click and choose Print.

To show or hide the legend in a Gantt chart with histogram, right-click the chart and

then mark or clear the check box beside the legend you want to display.

Labor resource fields, such as budgeted or planned units, will not display a time unit

designation (h, d, w, m, or y) unless you have set your preferences to show time units.

Getting Here

1) Open a portfolio in the Portfolios section using one of the following methods:

Click Portfolios to open the last portfolio you were working with.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose one of the most-recently used

portfolios.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose Open Portfolio to select a group of

projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Gantt Chart.

Portfolio Performance Status Page

Overview

Use this page to display summarized schedule and cost or labor unit data based on the

performance metric you select. To date and forecast data are provided at the group,

project, and WBS levels.

932

Arranged by EPS, portfolio, or project code, each entry represents a project, code, EPS

node, or portfolio and includes an identifying icon, name, and summary data including a

visual indicator. When a name appears as a hyperlink, you can open it by clicking the

link. Click Return to go back.

Screen Elements

Return

Navigates back to the previous page.

Schedule, Earned Value, or Index selector

Displays the performance status information using the metric you select, shown in

bold.

Performance Status legend

Displays the series of visual indicators and their short descriptions. By default, there are

four (4) indicators representing customizable metrics to help you quickly assess status

and identify areas that require attention.

Critical

Warning

Acceptable

Exceptional

To Date Schedule column

Displays the actual vs. schedule date variance expressed in units of time. For

example, 10 days ahead or behind schedule.

To Date Labor Units column

Displays actual vs. schedule labor unit or cost variance.

Forecast at Completion Schedule column

Displays the estimated schedule variance at completion.

Forecast at Completion Labor Units column

Displays the estimated labor unit or cost variance at completion.

Page: n of N

Displays the page number and total page count for the Performance Summary.

[Next >>] link

Advances to the next page.

[<< Previous] link

Returns to the previous page.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

933

Getting Here

1) Open a portfolio in the Portfolios section using one of the following methods:

Click Portfolios to open the last portfolio you were working with.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose one of the most-recently used

portfolios.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose Open Portfolio to select a group of

projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Performance Status.

Portfolio ROI Page

Overview

Use this page to display cost/benefit information based on live data for the open project

group. After recording spending and benefit plan data, the discount rate, and the rate

application period on the Project Details ROI page, navigate to this page to view Net

Present Value (NPV), ROI, and payback period calculations. If you attempt to view a

chart on the Portfolio ROI page but no discount rate or spending/benefit plan data has

been recorded for the project, a message appears to notify you.

At the project level, you can view a time-distributed chart showing project-level

spending, cash inflow, and NPV.

Screen Elements

Return

Navigates back to the previous page.

Name field

The name of the project, code, EPS node, or portfolio.

Annual Discount Rate field

The interest rate associated with the cost of an investment from your commercial

bank or another funding source. Valid values are 0 to 100. This rate is used to

calculate Total Spending Plan Present Value and Total Benefit Plan Present Value.

For example, an annual growth rate of an investment such as 4.75% can be used as

an annual discount rate. This rate is used when a future value is assumed and you are

trying to find the required net present value.

Total Benefit Plan field

The sum of the monthly benefit plan.When you select an EPS node, project Code, or

portfolio in the hierarchy, this is the sum of Total Benefit for all projects in the group.

Calculated as Plan period $ divided by (1 plus annual discount rate) multiplied by n

934

Where n equals the current discount application period value (e.g., for yearly over 8

years, values are calculated for n equals year 0, year 1, year 2, ... year 7). The project

start date is used as the beginning of period 0. If the project start date or annual

discount rate change, Total Spending Plan PV, Total Benefit Plan PV, NPV, ROI, and

Payback Period are recalculated.

Payback Period field

The length of time required to elapse before net profits have recovered the initial and

periodic costs of an investment.

Total Spending Plan field

The sum of the monthly spending plan.When you select an EPS node, project Code,

or portfolio in the hierarchy, this is the sum of Total Spending for all projects in the

group.

Calculated as Plan period $ divided by (1 plus annual discount rate) multiplied by n

where n equals the current discount application period value (e.g., for yearly over 8

years, values are calculated for n equals year 0, year 1, year 2, ... year 7). The project

start date is used as the beginning of period 0. If the project start date or annual

discount rate change, Total Spending Plan PV, Total Benefit Plan PV, NPV, ROI, and

Payback Period are recalculated.

Net Present Value field

The difference between the present value (PV) of the future cash flows from an

investment and its investment cost. Present value of the expected cash flows is

computed by discounting them at the required rate of return or discount rate. Positive

net present value (NPV) is an indicator of projects that should be pursued.

Calculated as Total Benefit Plan (PV) minus Total Spending Plan (PV).

Return on Investment field

A calculation of the expected return or benefit over and above the investment costs

of a project or portfolio, expressed as a percentage.

Calculated as the Net Present Value divided by the Total Spending Plan Present

Value.

For example, a project is expected to cost 1.0 million dollars with a total benefit of 1.2

million dollars. It's NPV is $200,000. The return on investment is 20%.

Details link

Opens the Return on Investment of Project page where you can view NPV, ROI, and

Payback Period for a project or edit its spending and benefit plans.

View Chart link

Displays the cumulative NPV curve and per period spending and benefit bars across

the timescale, based on the time increment you select.

To view a value legend for a specific timescale increment, click on a bar or the curve.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

935

To print the chart, right-click it and choose Print.

To show or hide the chart legend, right-click over the chart, then mark or clear Show

Histogram Legend.

Tips

Arranged according to your choice of EPS, portfolio, or project code, each entry on

the page represents a project, code, EPS node, or portfolio and includes an

identifying icon, name, and ROI data. When a name appears as a hyperlink, click it to

open it. Click Return to go back.

To view a value legend for a specific timescale increment, click on a bar or point

along the curve.

To print the chart, right-click it and choose Print.

To show or hide the chart legend, right-click over the chart, then mark or clear Show

Histogram Legend.

Getting Here

1) Open a portfolio in the Portfolios section using one of the following methods:

Click Portfolios to open the last portfolio you were working with.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose one of the most-recently used

portfolios.

Click the Portfolios menu and choose Open Portfolio to select a group of

projects by portfolio type, EPS node, or project code.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click ROI.

Portfolio Scenario Details Page

Overview

Use this page to view and modify details about an existing scenario.

Screen Elements

Title field

A name for the scenario. The title can contain up to 255 characters, and it does not

have to be unique.

This scenario is available to options

Mutually exclusive options for setting which users can access the scenario. Choose

one of the following:

Current User

All Users

List of Users

936

Selected Users area

Only appears when the This scenario is available to option is set to List of Users. Use

the controls in this area to configure the users who have access to this scenario. See

Customize Columns or Values.

Search

Displays a search field and any related options and controls for finding a specific

matching entry or entries based on your search criteria. Search by user name or

personal name.

Search for field

The item you want to find. Type the full name or as many characters as you know to

limit the search.

Go button

Searches for the chosen and entered information.

Getting Here

1) Click the Portfolios menu and choose Manage Scenarios.

2) On the Manage Scenarios page, expand a portfolio in the Title column and click on a

scenario.

Portfolio Scenario Notes Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to enter notes about a scenario.

Screen Elements

Date field

Displays the date the note was added.

Added By field

Displays the name of who added the note.

Note field

Enter the note in this box.

Tips

To create a scenario, see

After they are saved, notes cannot be modified.

Getting Here

1) Click the Portfolios menu and choose Manage Scenarios.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

937

2) On the Manage Scenarios page, expand a portfolio in the Title column.

3) Locate a scenario in the list, and click Scenario Notes in the Notes column.

Portfolio Scenario Save As Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to save the current portfolio scenario as a new portfolio scenario.

Screen Elements

Title field

Enter a unique title name for your portfolio.

This scenario is available to option

The value indicating who can access the scenario.

Current User: Enables you to access the scenario.

All Users: Enables all users to access the scenario.

List of Users: Enables only the users you specify to access the scenario.

Getting Here

1) Click Portfolios.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Capacity Planning.

3) On the Capacity Planning page, click Save As.

Portfolio View Details Page

Overview

Use this page to create a portfolio view, or modify details about an existing portfolio

view. You can specify the type of project information you want to display in the view,

and choose who can access it.

Screen Elements

Title

The name of the portfolio view. Because P6 portfolio view titles support up to 255

characters, this field can include descriptive information helpful to users in identifying

each view. Histogram of Remaining Effort by Sponsor and At Completion Variance

Analysis by Product Bubble Chart are examples of portfolio views that have been

assigned helpful descriptive titles. The portfolio view title appears in the portlet titlebar.

938

Type

The type of chart to be displayed. If you change the type to Scorecard, the

information that displays on the page changes so you can input scorecard details.

X-Axis

The data field represented in the X-axis of the chart. This field is not displayed for a pie

chart.

Y-Axis

The data field represented in the Y-axis of the chart. This field is not displayed for a Pie

chart.

Group By

The data field used to group projects in the chart. Grouping gathers, or groups,

together all of the projects that contain the same value for the selected data field.

This field is not displayed for a Histogram.

Bubble Size

Specifies the size of the bubbles that display in a Bubble chart.

Color Theme

The type of colors included in the chart: pastel or primary.

Show 3-D

Displays the chart in 3-D format. Clearing this option displays the chart in 2-D format.

Show horizontal gridlines

Displays horizontal gridlines in the chart. This field is not displayed for a Pie chart.

Show vertical gridlines

Displays vertical gridlines in the chart. This field is not displayed for a Pie chart.

Show all values on axis, not just assigned values

Displays all values on the X axis and Y axis, even if there is no assigned value. For

example, if you choose to display Project Status on the X axis, the X axis displays all

types of Project Status (Active, Inactive, What-If), even if no projects are assigned to a

status type. This option only applies when you choose to display project code, project

status, or risk level on the X or Y axis. This option is not displayed for a Pie chart.

Data

The data field represented in a Pie chart.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

939

Show pie data label

For each section of the Pie chart, displays the value for the customize option you

select in the Data field. For example, if the data you choose to display in the Pie chart

is Actual Cost, the chart displays the Actual Cost value next to each section of the Pie

chart.

Show group by label

For each section of the Pie chart, displays the value for the customize option you

select in the Group By field. For example, if you choose to group the chart by Project,

the chart displays the Project Name next to each section of the Pie chart.

Show percentage

Displays the percentage of each slice of the Pie chart.

Select user access to this view

Specify user access to the view. You can make the view available only to you

(Current User) or for another user you select. If you have the required security

privilege, you can make the view available to all users with module access to

portfolio views, indicating it is a global portfolio view.

Select the custom columns to display

select each column of information you want to display in the scorecard, and specify

any sorting options you require. The top-to-bottom order of the fields in the Selected

Columns list determines how the columns display, left to right, in the scorecard.

Sort by

Use the Sort by list to specify how you want to sort all projects in the scorecard. If you

choose to display a waterline on the scorecard, the fields you select to sort by in the

Select waterline options section override your selection for this field.

Sort Order

From the Sort Order list, you can select to list projects in the scorecard in either

ascending (e.g., A to Z) or descending (e.g., Z to A) order.

Show Project Requests option

Determines whether to analyze potential projects along with approved projects in the

scorecard. If you select this option, only a limited number of columns will display

values for the requested projects. If you choose to show requested projects, they will

not be included in a scorecard if the page on which you are viewing the scorecard is

filtered by a portfolio. Filter by code or EPS element instead to view project requests.

940

Select the fields to group by

Choose up to ten levels, or fields, by which you want to group projects in the

scorecard. Grouping gathers, or groups, all of the projects together that contain the

same value for the selected field. For example, if you select to group by Project

Status, all projects with a Planned status are grouped together, all projects with an

Active status are grouped together, all projects with an Inactive status are grouped

together, and all projects with a What-if status are grouped together. Group by

options are not available when you have a waterline displayed in the scorecard.

Select waterline options

Specify waterline options to help analyze projects in the scorecard. Waterlining ranks

projects into two groups by sorting and applying a constraining limit. When you

display a waterline, the projects in the scorecard are sorted into two separate groups

based on the defined constraint limit and sort by options you specify. The projects

above the waterline, displayed with a white background, are those that collectively

meet the constraint limit value; all other projects, displayed with a light blue

background, appear below the waterline.

Getting Here

1) Click the Portfolios menu and choose Manage Portfolio Views.

2) On the Manage Portfolio Views page, click the Create View link and configure a new

view; or expand a view type and click on an existing view.

Portfolio View Portlet

Overview

Use this portlet to analyze project data for an entire portfolio in a chart or scorecard

format. You can customize the exact data fields you want to display and the type of

chart or scorecard you want to view. When displaying a scorecard, you can also add

and delete projects, export data, and even edit certain project data. As you analyze

data for a project group, you might identify issues with a particular project or require

more detailed project information. In this case, click Open Project.

Screen Elements

Title

The name of the portfolio view. Because P6 portfolio view titles support up to 255

characters, this field can include descriptive information helpful to users in identifying

each view. Histogram of Remaining Effort by Sponsor and At Completion Variance

Analysis by Product Bubble Chart are examples of portfolio views that have been

assigned helpful descriptive titles. The portfolio view title appears in the portlet titlebar.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

941

Screen Elements for Charts

The following screen elements apply only to bubble, histogram, and pie chart

portfolio views (not scorecards).

Chart toolbar

The first icon that appears in your portlet's toolbar is based on the selection you made

in the portfolio view Type field.

Bubble Chart: Displays the bubble chart.

Histogram Chart: Displays the stacked, side-by-side, or standard histogram.

Pie Chart: Displays the pie chart.

Spreadsheet

Displays the actual source data used to generate the chart.

Customize link

Opens a dialog box for modifying how the information is presented in the chart. See

Portfolio Views Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page for

further details.

Screen Elements for Scorecards

The following screen elements apply only to scorecard portfolio views.

Save link

Saves any changes made to project data within the current portfolio.

Cancel link

Cancels any pending changes made to project data within the current portfolio.

Add link

Creates a new What If project within the current portfolio.

Note: The first time you click this link in the portlet, the Add Project

dialog box appears prompting you to select the default

Responsible Manager for all newly created projects.

Delete link

Deletes the currently selected project from the database.

Expand link

Shows the contents of each group. To show the contents of individual groups, click

beside the group title.

942

Collapse link

Hides the contents of each group. To hide the contents of individual groups, click

beside the group title.

Export Spreadsheet link

Exports the scorecard data to a spreadsheet file.

Customize link

Enables you to set the Title, Type, and applicable options for the portfolio view.

Scorecard table

The scorecard presents its data in a table or spreadsheet format. You can customize

the fields displayed as columns.

Total summary row

Dates, sums, and other totals calculated from all the data in the scorecard.

Open Project icon

Opens the selected project in the Projects section. The default destination page (EPS,

Activities, Workspace, etc.) is determined by your user interface view settings and My

Preferences page view settings.

Tips

When viewing a scorecard in the portlet, if you add or delete a project or edit project

data, you must save your changes before navigating to another page. If you do not,

any projects you add or delete, and any data you edit, will not be saved to the

database.

When you customize a dashboard, you can add up to 50 Portfolio View portlets. You

can add any existing portfolio views (global or user views) to a private dashboard;

however, you can add only existing global views to a global or multi-user dashboard.

Any new portfolio views you add to a private dashboard are added as user views;

any new portfolio views you add to a global or multi-user dashboard are added as

global views. You can modify a portfolio view from the Portfolios page to change

whether it is a user or a global view.

Information displayed in the Portfolio View portlet is based on summarized data, so it is

current as of the last date the summarizer was run for a project. You can easily

determine the date the summarizer was last run if you are displaying a scorecard

view. To determine the date, add the column Last Summarized Date, which is

available under the Summary section of the Available Columns list when you

customize the portlet.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

943

3) On the dashboard, expand the Portfolio View portlet.

Portfolio View Save As Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to save the current portfolio view as a new portfolio view or as a new

scenario.

Screen Elements

Title field

A name for the portfolio.

Save the portfolio view as a options

Choose one of the following options:

New Portfolio View

New Scenario

This portfolio view is available to options

The value indicating who can access the view.

Current User: Enables you to access the view.

All Users: Enables all users to access the view.

Another User: Enables only the users you specify to access the view.

Getting Here

1) Click Portfolios.

2) On the Portfolios navigation bar, click Portfolio Analysis.

3) On the Portfolio Analysis page, click Save As.

Portfolios Page

Overview

Use the Portfolios page to start your review, analysis, and evaluation of high-level

summarized data about projects grouped into portfolios. This page presents a shared

toolbar of buttons (or tabs) for navigating to other pages in the portfolios section.

Screen Elements

Portfolios toolbar

See Portfolios Toolbar (see "Portfolios Navigation Bar" on page 1305). The first button in

this configurable toolbar is your current portfolios home page.

944

Work Area

The main work area for each portfolio page. Each tabbed page presents its own

separate data, buttons, links, toolbars, charts, and other items in the work area.

Tips

The term "home" page is given to the first page (or tab) that appears when you open

this section of the application. Your assigned user interface view determines the first

page that appears as your Portfolios home page.

Getting Here

Click Portfolios.

Predecessors Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign or configure predecessor relationships for the selected

activity.

Screen Elements

Predecessors toolbar

See Predecessors Toolbar of the Activities Page (on page 1311).

Project ID field

The unique identifier of the project.

Project Name field

The name of the associated project.

Activity ID field

The unique identifier of the activity.

System generated.

Activity Name field

The name of the activity. The activity name does not have to be unique.

Relationship Type field

The relationship between two activities. Select from the following types:

Finish to Start: A relationship in which the start of a successor activity depends on

the completion of its predecessor activity. This is the default activity relationship.

Finish to Finish: A relationship in which the finish of a successor activity depends on

the finish of its predecessor activity.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

945

Start to Start: A relationship between activities in which the start of a successor

activity depends on the start of its predecessor.

Start to Finish: A relationship between activities in which a successor activity

cannot complete until its predecessor activity starts.

Lag field

The amount of time the predecessor activity was delayed, affecting the ability of its

successor activity to start or finish.

This value is specified by the project manager and is used by the project scheduler

when scheduling activities.

The time lag is based on the successor activity's calendar.

Tips

If you have more than one activity selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Predecessors detail window.

Predecessors Section of the Relationships Section of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this section to add, revise, or remove a predecessor relationship.

Screen Elements

Assign predecessor activity link

Opens a dialog box to search for and select a predecessor activity. See Working with

'Select a Value' Dialog Boxes.

Project ID field

The unique identifier of the project containing the predecessor activity.

Activity ID field

The unique identifier of the predecessor activity.

System generated.

Activity Name field

The name of the selected activity's predecessor. See Relationships Details Page of the

Activity Form Page (on page 988) for further details.

946

Relationship Type field

The relationship between two activities. Select from the following types:

Finish to Start: A relationship in which the start of a successor activity depends on

the completion of its predecessor activity. This is the default activity relationship.

Finish to Finish: A relationship in which the finish of a successor activity depends on

the finish of its predecessor activity.

Start to Start: A relationship between activities in which the start of a successor

activity depends on the start of its predecessor.

Start to Finish: A relationship between activities in which a successor activity

cannot complete until its predecessor activity starts.

Lag field

The amount of time the predecessor activity was delayed, affecting the ability of its

successor activity to start or finish.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Relationships section.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, expand any portlet containing activities.

3) In the portlet, click an activity.

4) On the Activity Form page, expand the Relationships section.

Prices Detail Window of the Roles Tab of the Administration Page

Overview

Use this detail window to define the price/unit for up to five available rate types for each

role.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

947

Screen Elements

Role selector (Ctrl+Up Arrow) or (Ctrl+Down Arrow)

Cycles through the available roles and determines which data display in the detail

window. Click (Ctrl+Up Arrow) to move to the previous role, or click (Ctrl+Down

Arrow) to move to the next role. The content in the detail window is refreshed with the

data for the selected role.

Price/Unit fields

The non-overtime price for the role, which is used to compute costs for any activities

the role is assigned to. You can define up to five rate types, or price/unit values, per

role. Price/unit is a default name and can be modified by your P6 administrator.

Examples of Price/Unit names include Internal Rate, External Rate and Standard Rate.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Roles tab.

4) On the Roles tab, click the Prices detail window.

Private Documents Tab of the My Documents Portlet (with content repository)

Overview

Use this tab to view all private documents that you have added.

Screen elements

Private Documents Tab toolbar

See Private Documents Toolbar (on page 1316).

Title field

Displays the name of the project and the titles of all associated documents.

Version field

The latest or most current version of the document.

Creation Date field

The date and time that the selected document was created.

Modified Date field

The date and time the document was last modified.

948

Tips

Add Document enables you to create a new private document only.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the My Documents portlet and click the Private

Documents tab.

Probability and Impact Diagram Detail Window of the Risk Scoring Matrices Page

Overview

Use this detail window to view a graphical representation of probability, impact, and

tolerance thresholds defined for a selected risk scoring matrix.

Screen Elements

Toggle between text and numeric score ratings

The risk scoring matrix score is available in a numeric or a text format.

: Displays the numeric score ratings of the severity fields.

: Displays the text score ratings of the severity fields.

Probability field

The values defined for the probability threshold assigned to the risk scoring matrix.

Severity fields

The ranges and values assigned to the chosen thresholds. The number of severity

fields is determined by the number of levels chosen for the impact thresholds.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and click Risk Scoring Matrices.

3) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, click the Probability and Impact Diagram detail

window.

Probability and Impact Diagram Detail Window of the Risks Page

Overview

Use this detail window to view a graphical representation of probability and impact for a

selected risk scoring matrix.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

949

Screen Elements

Toggle between text and numeric score ratings

The risk scoring matrix score is available in a numeric or a text format.

: Displays the numeric score ratings of the severity fields.

: Displays the text score ratings of the severity fields.

Probability field

The values defined for the probability threshold assigned to the risk scoring matrix.

Severity fields

The ranges and values assigned to the chosen thresholds. The number of severity

fields is determined by the number of levels chosen for the impact thresholds.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Risks.

3) On the Risks page, click the Probability and Impact Diagram detail window.

Probability Detail Window of the Risk Scoring Matrices Page

Overview

Use this detail window to view the probability threshold assigned to the selected risk

scoring matrix.

Screen Elements

Code field

Displays the code values defined for the probability threshold assigned to the risk

scoring matrix.

Name field

Displays the name for each value defined for the probability threshold assigned to the

risk scoring matrix.

Range field

The threshold range values defined for the probability assigned to the risk scoring

matrix.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and click Risk Scoring Matrices.

950

3) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, click the Probability detail window.

Progress Reporter Page of the Project Preferences Dialog Box

Overview

Use this page to configure options for statusing and managing activities within P6

Progress Reporter.

Screen Elements

Specify the field resources use to status their activities options

Select from Percent Complete or Remaining Units.

Primary resources can mark activities as completed option

Determines whether primary resources can mark activities as completed.

Resources can mark assignments as completed option

Determines whether resources can mark assignments as completed.

Resources can view activities from an inactive project option

Determines whether resources can view activities from an inactive project.

Resources can assign themselves to activities option

Determines whether resources can assign themselves to activities.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Set Project Preferences....

4) In the Project Preferences pane, click Progress Reporter.

Project Access Detail Window of the Users Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign user access permissions to projects under different

responsible managers.

Screen Elements

Assign OBS

Enables you to select an OBS to assign to the selected user.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

951

Remove OBS Assignment

Removes the OBS Assignment from the selected user.

Responsible Manager field

List of OBS elements assigned to this user. This field is read-only.

Project Security Profile field

From the list of project security profiles, you can select the security profile you want to

apply for each OBS assignment. The type of access granted to a user is determined

by the project security profile assigned to the user.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Users.

3) On the Users page, click the Project Access detail window.

Project Calendar Portlet of the Workspace Page

Overview

Use this portlet to view a week's worth of activities that pertain to your project. In a

workspace, the Project Calendar portlet displays all activities scheduled for the selected

week. Display the current week or click past or future dates to see the list of activities and

milestones for the selected week. The selected week is highlighted in blue.

Screen Elements

Calendar

The graphic displaying different months and your activities associated with each

month. Click the left and right arrows to move to the previous or next months. The

selected week is highlighted in blue.

Activities list

The activities for the specified month.

Tips

Click a project or activity link to view more detailed project or activity data.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Calendar portlet.

952

Project Calendars Page

Overview

Use this page to configure project calendars, define the standard work week, and view

the activities using a given calendar.

Screen Elements

Project Calendar Toolbar

See Enterprise Data Project Calendar Toolbar (on page 1272).

Calendar tab

See Calendar Tab of the Project Calendars Page (on page 606).

Standard Work Week tab

See Standard Work Week Tab of the Project Calendars Page (on page 1086).

Used By tab

See Used By Tab of the Project Calendars Page (on page 1135).

Search field

The means to find a project.

Search

Displays options for finding a specific matching entry or entries based on search

criteria.

Calendar List

Displays a list of all available calendars to view.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project Calendars.

Project Codes Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure project codes and code values.

Screen Elements

Project Codes toolbar

See Enterprise Data Project Codes Toolbar (on page 1274).

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

953

Name field

This field displays the name of a project code or value. Project codes help to organize

the projects in your EPS in groups according to specific categories. You can define

unlimited hierarchical project codes to fulfill the filtering, sorting, and reporting

requirements for your projects, and arrange them hierarchically for easier

management and assignment.

Description field

This field displays a description of the corresponding project code.

Maximum Length field

The field displays the maximum length of the project code. You can arrange codes

by ascending, descending, or random order.

Secure option

Secure codes enable privileged users to hide Project, Activity, Issue and Resource

codes from users that do not have security privileges to view them. Secure codes are

structured hierarchically. In other words, if a user is granted add/delete privileges, that

user automatically has edit, assign, and view privileges. If a user is granted edit

privileges, that user is automatically granted assign and view privileges. If a user is

granted assign privileges, that user is automatically assigned view privileges.

Weight field

This field displays the weight of each project code. Weighted project codes make it

possible to rank or prioritize projects by using numerical values to calculate a project

score. P6 calculates project score based on the weights associated with project

codes and project code values assigned to a project. To use project scoring features,

you must create weighted project codes and code values and assign them to the

projects you want to rank.

Weight Percent field

P6 will calculate the percent value that corresponds to the code's weight.

Maximum Code Value Weight field

This field shows the maximum allowed weight value for a specific project code type.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project Codes.

954

Project Collaboration Section of the Content Tab of the Workspace Details Page

Overview

Use this section to configure which portlets are displayed on the Workspace page.

Screen Elements

Communication Center option

Determines whether to display the Communication Center portlet.

Show Team Members who are assigned as resources option

Determines whether to display the team members who are assigned as resources.

Show Team Members who have access rights option

Determines whether to display the team members who have access rights.

Project Calendar option

Determines whether to display the Project Calendar portlet. This portlet includes an

adjustable monthly calendar and, if enabled, shows any activities for the currently

selected week in the calendar.

Show activities option

Determines whether activities should appear in the Project Calendar portlet for the

currently selected week you select in the calendar.

Workgroups option

Determines whether to display the workgroups portlet on the Workspace page.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, click Customize.

4) On the Workspace Details page, click the Content tab.

5) On the Content tab, expand the Project Collaboration section.

Project Data Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign project data privileges to the selected project security

profile.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

955

Screen Elements

Privilege field

The name of the security permission that is assigned (option selected) or denied

(option cleared) to users of the currently selected profile.

Privilege option

The option in the column header that determines whether the privileges are all

assigned (selected), all denied (clear), or individually configured (indicated with a

dash or - sign).

Add/Edit/Delete Issues and Issue Thresholds option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

thresholds and issues assigned to projects. The privilege also enables users to assign

issue codes to project issues.

Add/Edit/Delete Project Baselines option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

baselines for projects.

Add/Edit/Delete Project Calendars option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

calendars assigned to projects.

Add/Edit/Delete Risks option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove risks

assigned to projects.

Add/Edit/Delete Template Documents option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, remove project

template documents. If the content repository is installed and configured, this

privilege also enables users to check out and start reviews for project template

documents. A profile must be assigned the 'Add/Edit/Delete Work Products and

Documents' project privilege before you can select this privilege.

Add/Edit/Delete Work Products and Documents option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

project documents that do not have a security policy applied. Document security

policies are available only in P6 and only for documents stored in the content

repository. When the content repository is installed and configured, this privilege also

enables users to create document folders in P6.

Add/Edit Workgroups option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create and modify workgroups.

956

Delete Workgroups option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to remove workgroups.

Edit Workspace and Workgroup Preferences option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to customize the project workspace

and workgroup preferences.

Assign Project Baselines option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to assign project baselines to

projects. To assign project baselines, users must also have the 'Edit Project Details

Except Costs/Financials' project privilege assigned to their profile.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Project Security Profiles.

3) On the Project Security Profiles page, click the Project Data detail window.

Project Data Section of the Import Tab of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to select an import action when the same data exists in the import file

and project being updated. Select Delete to delete those values in the database that

are not contained in the file you are importing.

Screen Elements

Name field

The name of the project, code, EPS node, or portfolio. Use in correspondence with the

Import Action lists to select an action for each name.

Import Action list

Determines what action to take when importing:

Keep Existing: Retains data in the existing methodology and does not overwrite

them with the updated data; adds new data if the record does not exist.

Update Existing: Overwrites data in the existing methodology with updated data;

adds new data if the record does not exist.

Do Not Import: Retains data in the existing methodology and does not import the

updated data.

Delete option

Determines whether to delete the selected item.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

957

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export XML Project

Import/Export.

4) In the Import/Export Project dialog box, click the Import tab.

5) On the Import tab:

a. Select Primavera XML from the Import Type list.

b. Click Advanced .

Project Documents Portlet of the Workspace Page (with content repository)

Overview

Use this portlet to view all documents that have been added to the project, modify

document details, and to add new documents to the project.

Screen Elements

Project tab

See Project Tab of the Project Documents Portlet of the Workspace Page (with content

repository) (on page 975).

WP & Docs tab

See WP & Docs Tab of the Project Documents Portlet of the Workspace Page (with

content repository) (on page 1174).

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Documents portlet.

Project Documents Portlet of the Workspace Page (without content repository)

Overview

Use this portlet to share project documents, view document details, and add new

documents related to the current project.

Details

Add Document link

Enables you to add documents to the selected project.

958

Title field

Displays the name of the project and the titles of all associated documents.

Version field

The latest or most current version of the document.

Revision Date field

The date of the document's last update.

Tips

You can add documents to the project only if you have project access and the

required privilege.

To control the number of documents that display, click Customize at the top of the

workspace and enter a number in the Maximum number of rows displayed in project

workspace lists field.

Project Workspace portlets display data for the selected project only. When multiple

projects are open, you must select the project you want to work with in the Select

Project list at the top right of the Workspace page. When a single project is open, the

Select Project list does not appear.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Documents portlet.

Project Gantt Chart Portlet

Overview

Use this portlet to quickly view the status of projects and review its milestones.

The table on the left side of the portlet lists projects that meet the portfolio, project code

value, or project filter criteria specified in the dashboard's Filter by field. In the table, you

can expand the project rows to display a list of each project's start and finish milestone

activities. You can filter the milestones that display in the portlet by selecting an activity

code filter.

The Gantt chart on the right side of the portlet displays a bar for each project, which

represents the span between the Project Planned Start and Scheduled Finish dates of the

project. The blue section of each project bar indicates current progress, while the green

section of each bar indicates remaining effort. When you expand a project row in the

table to display the project's milestone activities, the Gantt chart shows milestone icons (

) for each start and finish milestone activity in the project and baseline milestone ( )

icons for each start and finish milestone in the baseline if one has been applied to the

project.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

959

Screen Elements

Project Gantt Chart Portlet toolbar

See Project Gantt Chart Portlet Toolbar (on page 1318).

ID field

The unique identifier of the project and associated milestones. This field is fixed and

cannot be modified using the customize columns icon.

Name field

The name of the project and associated milestones.

Start field

The start date of the project and associated milestones.

Scheduled Finish field

The calculated latest early finish date, which is based on the schedule most recently

generated for the project.

BL Start field

The current earliest start date of all activities in the project baseline.

BL Finish field

The current latest finish date of all activities in the project baseline.

Project Gantt Chart area

The Current Bar is drawn using the Project Planned Start and Scheduled Finish date

fields. Progress is displayed as blue and future work as green. Milestones appear as

black diamonds. The Baseline Bar is drawn underneath the Current Bar using the BL

Start and BL Finish dates of the project. Baselines and baseline milestones are

displayed in yellow.

Tip

Position your mouse pointer over a milestone to view its name and dates.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Project Gantt Chart portlet.

960

Project Health Portlet of the Dashboards Page

Overview

Use this portlet to quickly see how well a portfolio or individual project is performing.

Status indicators (shown below) identify areas where you might need to focus attention

or implement corrective action.

Screen Elements

Exceptional

Indicates that a project or portfolio is exceeding expectations.

Acceptable

Indicates that a project or portfolio is performing as expected.

Warning

Indicates that the project or portfolio needs attention and is near critical.

Critical

Indicates that the project or portfolio requires significant corrective action.

Tips

Status indicators are based on performance thresholds you set on the Global tab in

My Preferences. You can set performance thresholds to correspond to each of the

status indicators.

Project Workspace portlets display data for the selected project only. When multiple

projects are open, you must choose the project you want to work with in the Select

Project list at the top right of the Project Workspace. When a single project is open,

the Select Project list does not appear.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Project Health portlet.

Project Health Portlet of the Workspace Page

Overview

Use this portlet to view how well a portfolio or individual project is performing. Status

indicators identify areas where you might need to focus attention or implement

corrective action.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

961

Screen Elements

Exceptional

Indicates that a project or portfolio is exceeding expectations.

Acceptable

Indicates that a project or portfolio is performing as expected.

Warning

Indicates that a project or portfolio needs attention and is near critical.

Critical

Indicates that a project or portfolio requires significant corrective action.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Health portlet.

Project Issues Portlet of the Workspace Page

Overview

Use this portlet to view information about issues that belong to the project. The

information that appears depends on the display format and customize options you

select.

Screen Elements

Add link

Enables you to create a new project issue. You can select the issue form you want to

use to create the issue, then subsequently use the Add Issue page to record basic

issue information, such as responsible manager, owner, priority, and a description.

Expand All/Collapse All link

Shows or hides the contents of each group of issues. To show or hide the contents of a

single group of issues, click or beside the grouping band. You can specify

grouping options when you customize the issues list. If you do not have any grouping

options selected, these links are not enabled.

962

Customize link

Displays a dialog box for specifying how you want to filter, group, and sort issues. For

viewing issues in List format, you can specify the columns of information you want to

display. For viewing issues in Chart format, you can specify chart type and color

options. The customize options you choose apply for all users who can access the

Project Issues portlet. Refer to Customizing the Project Issues portlet for more detailed

information. See Customize Project Issues Dialog Box (on page 686).

Display options

Determine the format in which you want to display project issues. The display option

applies for all users who can access the Project Issues portlet.

List: this option displays issues in a list, and enables you to add, edit, or delete

issues. By default, all issues display in the List format, but you can customize the list

to display only the issues you want to see. You can also select the columns of

information you want to display, and choose how to group and sort issues in the

list.

Chart: this option enables you to graphically display issue count information based

on your customized group and filter selections. The Chart format enables you to

graphically display issue count information based on your customized group and

filter selections. When you customize the portlet, you can change these group

and filter options. You can additionally customize the portlet to specify chart type

and color options. To view group by and issue count details, move the mouse over

each bar or slice in the chart.

To view issues in Chart format, you must customize the portlet and select at least one

grouping level option; otherwise, the chart does not display. To select grouping level

options, click Customize and then click the Group tab. To rotate the display of a pie

chart, you can click and drag the chart either clockwise or counter clockwise.

Filter field

The name of the filter currently applied to the portlet. By default, all issues display, but

you can customize the portlet to apply a custom filter. If a custom filter is applied, the

filter description appears in this field, and only those issues that meet the filter criteria

appear for both the List and Chart format.

Issue Name field

The name or description of the issue.

Priority field

The level of importance assigned to the issue.

Owner field

The resource responsible for the selected issue.

If you have edit privileges, you can select a different owner. The list of available

resources you can select from depends upon your resource access security privileges.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

963

Resolution Date field

The date the selected issue was resolved.

Status field

The current status of the issue: Open, On Hold, Closed.

E-mail field

The e-mail dialog prepopulated with issue details.

Tips

When sorting by a specific issue column in the List format, a indicates the column is

sorted in ascending order, and a indicates the column is sorted in descending order.

To add, edit, or delete an issue, you must have the required security privilege.

To customize the portlet, you must have the required security privilege, as well as the

required access.

All issues that are added to a workgroup, and are then associated with a project

activity, appear as project issues on the Project Issues portlet in the Project

Workspace, as well as on the Issues page.

Project Workspace portlets display data for the selected project only. When multiple

projects are open, you must select the project you want to work with in the Select

Project box at the top right of the Project Workspace. When a single project is open,

the Select Project box does not appear.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Issues portlet.

Project Notebooks Portlet of the Dashboards Page

Overview

Use this portlet to view all notebooks assigned to the selected project. In a dashboard,

the Project Notebooks portlet displays all of the notebooks assigned to the projects that

meet the dashboard's selected filter criteria.

Notebooks are used to store and share notes relating to a project. When you add notes

for a given notebook topic, you can enter text and use HTML editing features such as

formatting text and lists, inserting pictures, adding hyperlinks and e-mail links, and

inserting tables.

Screen Elements

Notebook Topic field

The title or name for the notebook topic assigned to the current project.

964

Description field

A web presentation of the notes for the currently selected notebook topic.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Project Notebooks portlet.

Project Preferences Dialog Box

Overview

Use this page to configure project data and settings for the currently open and selected

project, its activities, and related items.

Screen Elements

Calculations page

See Calculations Page of the Project Preferences Dialog Box (on page 604).

Contract Management page

See Contract Management Page of the Project Preferences Dialog Box (on page 645).

Defaults page

See Defaults Page of the Project Preferences Dialog Box (on page 704).

General page

See General Page of the Project Preferences Dialog Box (on page 794).

Progress Reporter page

See Progress Reporter Page of the Project Preferences Dialog Box (on page 950).

Summarization page

See Summarization Page of the Project Preferences Dialog Box (on page 1112).

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a project.

b. Click the Actions menu and select Set Project Preferences....

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

965

Project Risks Portlet

Overview

Use this portlet to view information about risks that belong to the selected project. You

can customize the portlet to specify the columns of information you want to display, as

well as the types of risks you want to appear.

Screen Elements

Customize link

Specifies the columns of information you want to display and filters risks based on

status.

Category field

The name for a particular type of risk classification. Use risk categories to identify and

organize project risks consistently throughout your organization.

Technical, Operational, External are examples of risk categories that might apply to a

typical project.

Cause field

The description of the cause of the risk.

Description field

The description of the risk.

Effect field

The resulting effect of the presence of the risk.

ID field

The unique identifier for the risk.

Name field

The name of the risk.

Notes field

The notes or comments entered for the associated with the risk.

Owner field

The resource that has ownership of the risk.

Status field

The status of the response action item. The response action item usually goes through

a process from being proposed to sanctioned, and then if it is not rejected it is

planned into the project.

966

Proposed: The default status. Action has been proposed.

Sanctioned: The action has been proposed and sanctioned.

Rejected: The action has been proposed and then rejected. This action is not used

to drive the post-response position and its cost is not included in the Total Cost.

In-Progress: The response action item has started and there is some work still

remaining.

Complete: The response action item has been completed.

Type field

The type of risk.

User Defined field

Fields defined by your P6 administrator that are not standard in the application, but

are necessary to capture additional data for the project or the company.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Risks portlet.

Project Score Section of Global Tab of the My Preferences Page

Overview

Use this section to configure how the project score is calculated.

Screen Elements

Calculate Project Score based on selected Project Codes option

Determines whether to calculate project scores based on project codes.

Project Codes link

Displays a dialog box with configurable options to determine what project code to

select for the project score. See Customize Project Score Dialog Box of the Project

Score Section of the Global Tab of the My Preferences Page (on page 687).

High is greater than or equal to: field

The high value will be greater than or equal to the value entered in this field.

Medium is greater than or equal to: field

The medium value will be greater than or equal to the value entered in this field.

Low is greater than:0

Indicates that the low value must be greater than 0.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

967

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab, expand the Project Score section.

Project Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Workspace Page

Overview

Use this section to configure the core project data portlets you want to show on the

Workspace page. This includes issues, risks, notebooks, documents, activities, and

milestones.

Screen Elements

Project Documents option

Determines whether to display the Project Documents portlet.

In this portlet, users can add, view, download, and check out project documents.

Advanced document management capabilities are available when the optional

Content Repository is configured for use.

Allow Team Members to view this section option

Determines whether team members can view the portlet.

Project Risks option

Determines whether to display the Project Risks portlet.

Users can view, but not add or edit, project risks.

Customize link

Displays a dialog box or page that allows you to configure the current page, tab,

dialog box, or portlet. See Customize Risks Dialog Box.

Project Issues option

Determines whether to display the Project Issues portlet.

Users with OBS access to the project can add and edit issues if they are assigned the

required project privilege. Users without OBS access to the project can view, but not

add or edit, project issues.

Customize link

Displays a dialog box or page that allows you to configure the current page, tab,

dialog box, or portlet. See Customize Project Issues Dialog Box (on page 686).

Project Notebooks option

Determines whether to display the Notebook Topics portlet.

968

Overallocated Resources option

Determines whether to display the Overallocated Resources portlet.

This portlet lists the name and role of each project resource who is overallocated. You

can click a resource name to view allocation details.

Critical Activities Behind Schedule option

Determines whether to display the Critical Activities Behind Schedule portlet.

Users can view all activities behind schedule for the project. For users without OBS

access to the project, all activity details accessed from this portlet are read-only. For

users with OBS access to the project, users can edit activity details accessed from this

portlet if they have the appropriate security privileges and are a resource on the

activity or are the activity owner.

Milestone Status option

Determines whether to display the Milestone Status portlet where users can view

milestones for the project.

Users with OBS access to the project can edit activity details accessed from this

portlet if they have the appropriate security privileges and are a resource on the

activity or are the activity owner. For users without OBS access to the project, all

activity details accessed from this portlet are read-only.

Displays milestones completed <#> days before today and field

The number of days to display completed milestones prior to the current date.

Completed and not completed <#> days after today field

The number of days to display completed and not completed milestones after the

current date.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, click Customize.

4) On the Workspace Details page, click the Content tab.

5) On the Content tab, expand the Project section.

Project Security Profiles Page

Overview

Use this page to configure project security profiles and define assigned privileges. Define

specific privileges for the profile using the detail windows. The options you configure on

each detail window apply to the selected profile.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

969

Screen Elements

Project Security Profiles toolbar

See User Access Security Profiles Toolbar (on page 1358).

Profile Name field

The name of the global security profile.

Description field

The full description for the profile.

Default field

Default option is to assign this security profile to new users.

Note: Only one profile can be the active default.

Assigned Privileges field

View privileges assigned to the profile.

Project Security Profiles detail windows

Activities Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page (on page 543)

Codes Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page (on page 624)

EPS and Projects Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page (on page 750)

Project Data Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page (on page 954)

Related Applications Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page (on page

983)

Resource Assignments Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page (on page

998)

Timesheets Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page (on page 1125)

Tools Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page (on page 1129)

Views and Reports Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page (on page 1153)

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Project Security Profiles.

970

Project Statistics Page

Overview

Use this page to view project information in columns of your choice, down to the WBS

level. For each WBS level, you can view a list of activities and their resource assignments.

The activity and resource assignment lists are customizable, allowing you to select the

columns of data you are interested in. You can also export the contents of the page to a

comma separated value (.csv) file suitable for use with a spreadsheet application such

as OpenOffice Calc or Microsoft Excel.

Note: Data is current as of the last date the summarizer service was

run for the project. To determine the date a project was last

summarized, you can add the column Last Summarized Date. This

column is available under the Summary section of the Available

Columns list.

For the project element you select in the Project Statistics portlet, the page displays a

summary row and a row for each component one level down from the project element

you selected. For example, selecting a project in the Project Statistics portlet displays a

summary row for the project and individual statistics rows for each top-level WBS element

in the project.

Screen Elements

Export Spreadsheet link

Exports the current project data to a .csv file.

Customize link

Displays a dialog box or page that allows you to configure the current page, tab,

dialog box, or portlet.

Name field

The name of the project, code, EPS node, or portfolio.

Project Owner field

The resource designated as responsible for the project.

The project owner designation provides a user with viewing access for the project.

Start field

The date that the remaining work for the project element is scheduled to begin.

This date is computed by the project scheduler. Before the project starts, the

remaining start date is the same as the planned start date.

Finish field

The date that the remaining work for the project element is scheduled to finish.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

971

This date is computed by the Project Scheduler. Before the project starts, the

remaining finish date is the same as the planned finish date.

Tips

The same columns appear in both the Project Statistics portlet and the Project Statistics

page; customizing the columns in one location automatically changes the other

location.

Getting Here

You can access the Statistics page from the Project Statistics portlet in a dashboard or

the Project Workspace. In a dashboard, the portlet displays project data based on the

dashboard's specified portfolio, project, or project code filter. In a Project Workspace,

portlet data is project-specific.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Statistics portlet and click a project

name.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Project Statistics portlet and click a project name.

Project Statistics Portlet

Overview

Use this portlet to analyze project information in row and column format for a particular

project or project group. Depending on your information needs, you can customize the

portlet to select the columns of information you want to appear, and specify the display

format to analyze data in a way that is meaningful to you.

The information displayed in the portlet depends upon where it appears:

In a dashboard, the portlet displays the information you select down to the WBS level

for all projects included in the current dashboard filter. For example, if you filter a

dashboard by a portfolio, the Project Statistics portlet displays data for all projects

included in that portfolio.

In a project workspace, the portlet displays the information you select down to the

WBS level for the currently open project.

972

Screen Elements

Customize link

Displays a dialog box or page that allows you to configure the current page, tab,

dialog box, or portlet. See Customize Project Statistics Dialog Box (on page 688).

Display List option

Displays the projects in a list by the code or portfolio used to filter the dashboard.

When you display the portlet using the list format, each project and WBS appear as

hyperlinks you can click to navigate to successively deeper levels within the project.

Display Group option

Displays the projects in a hierarchical table you can expand and collapse. When you

display the portlet using the group format, each project and WBS appear as levels or

nodes you can click to expand successively deeper levels within the project.

Name field

The name of the project, portfolio, project code, or WBS.

Project Owner field

The resource designated as responsible for the project.

The project owner designation provides a user with viewing access for the project.

Start field

The date that the remaining work for the project element is scheduled to begin.

This date is computed by the project scheduler. Before the project starts, the

remaining start date is the same as the planned start date.

Finish field

The date that the remaining work for the project element is scheduled to finish.

This date is computed by the Project Scheduler. Before the project starts, the

remaining finish date is the same as the planned finish date.

Tips

Information displayed in the Project Statistics portlet is based on summarized data, so

it is current as of the last date the summarizer was run for a project. To easily

determine this date, add the column Last Summarized Date, which is available under

the Summary section of the Available Columns list when you customize the portlet.

However, activity-level information is based on live data.

To specify filter criteria for a dashboard, use the Filter by list at the top of the

dashboard tab. For any dashboard you create, you can select to filter data by

portfolio, project, or project code; for multi-user and global dashboards created by

other users, your ability to change the filter is determined by the Restrict users from

changing the dashboard filter setting on the Customize Dashboards page.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

973

Project Workspace portlets display data for the selected project only. When multiple

projects are open, you must select the project you want to work with in the Select

Project list at the top right of the Workspace page. When a single project is open, the

Select Project list does not appear.

Getting Here

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Statistics portlet.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Project Statistics portlet.

Project Tab of the Activity Codes Page

Overview

Use this tab to configure all project activity codes and values specific to the projects you

select.

Screen Elements

Toolbar

See Activity Codes Toolbar (see "Enterprise Data Activity Codes Toolbar" on page

1255).

Name field

This field displays the name of an activity code or value. Activity codes enable you to

categorize activities into logical groups based on your organization's criteria. You can

define unlimited hierarchical activity codes to fulfill the filtering, sorting, and reporting

requirements for your activities, and arrange them hierarchically for easier

management and assignment. Project activity codes categorize activities based on

specific features within a project.

Description field

This field shows the description you entered for the activity code or value.

Maximum Length field

Indicates the maximum length for an activity code or value. The value cannot

exceed the maximum character length specified for the activity code.

974

Color field

The color for the activity code value.

Tips

You can specify the maximum number of project-level activity codes that can be

defined for a project and maximum tree levels on the Data Limits tab of Admin

Preferences in P6.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Activity Codes.

3) On the Activity Codes page, click the Project tab.

Project Tab of the Documents Page (with content repository)

Overview

Use this tab to view a list of projects and their associated documents.

Screen Elements

Project Tab toolbar

See Project Tab Toolbar of the Documents Page (on page 1319).

Document Details section

See Document Details Section of the Documents Page (with content repository) (on

page 717)

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

Project Tab of the Documents Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page

Overview

The Project tab contains all of the project documents that have been added to the

portlet.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

975

Screen Elements

Project Tab toolbar

See Project Tab Toolbar of the Documents Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page

(on page 1322).

Title field

The activity name and all of its associated documents.

Version field

The document's version or revision number.

Creation Date field

The date and time that the selected document was created.

Modified Date field

The date and time the document was last modified.

Getting Here

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Workgroups portlet and select a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, expand the Documents portlet and click the

Project tab.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Workgroups portlet.

4) In the My Workgroups portlet, expand a project and select a workgroup.

5) On the Workgroup Workspace page, expand the Documents portlet and click the

Project tab.

Project Tab of the Project Documents Portlet of the Workspace Page (with content repository)

Overview

Use this tab to view all of the documents that have been added to the project.

976

Screen Elements

Project Tab toolbar

See Project Tab Toolbar of the Project Documents Portlet (on page 1323).

Title field

Displays the name of the project and the titles of all associated documents.

Version field

The document's version or revision number.

Creation Date field

The date and time that the selected document was created.

Modified Date field

The date and time the document was last modified.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Documents portlet and click the Project

tab.

Project UDFs Page

Overview

Use this page to create and configure user defined fields for projects.

Screen Elements

User Defined Field field

The name of the user-defined field.

Data Type field

The name of the type of data that corresponds to each user-defined field. The data

type you select determines the type of data you can specify in a field. The following

data types are available:

Text: Allows you to use text or a combination of text and numbers.

Start Date: Allows you to enter Start Date information only.

Finish Date: Allows you to enter Finish Date information only.

Cost: Allows you to enter currency values.

Number: Allows you to use numerals with two decimal places.

Integer: Allows you to use numeric data, but not a number related to money.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

977

Indicator: Allows you to use an indicator field that you can use to enter

color-coded icon values in columns and display color-coded text in reports.

UDF Type field

Indicates whether a formula is specified for the field. A formula is any custom

calculation created for the field to automatically determine field values.

Indicator field

Indicates that at least one graphical indicator is defined for the project user defined

field. A graphical indicator is any icon selected to display based on criteria set for

field values.

Display Data Value field

Determines whether the value of the calculated UDF displays in the column.

Display Indicator field

Determines whether the indicator of the calculated UDF displays in the column.

Formula detail window

See Formula Detail Window of the Project UDFs Page (on page 774).

Indicators detail window

See Indicators Detail Window of the Project UDFs Page (on page 841).

Summary Indicators detail window

See Summary Indicators Detail Window of the Project UDFs Page.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project UDFs.

Projects Checked Have Links to the Following Closed Projects Section of the Schedule Check

Report Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to view any closed projects that have relationships to or from the projects

being checked. The details of these relationships are displayed at the end of the report.

Screen Elements

Closed Project ID field

The identifying code of the closed project that is linked to the currently open project.

978

Closed Project Description field

The brief description of the closed project which is linked to the currently open

project.

Data Date field

The date used as the starting point to calculate the schedule. Each project has its

own data date.

Links to/from Closed Project field

The number of links between the closed project and the open projects that were

checked.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box, configure the options and click Check Schedule.

5) In the Schedule Check Report dialog box, expand the Projects Checked have links to

the following Closed Projects section.

Projects Checked Section of the Schedule Check Report Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to view projects that were checked and included in the report.

Screen Elements

Project ID field

The unique identifying code for each project that the application checked.

Project Description field

The brief description of the project.

Data Date field

The date used as the starting point to calculate the schedule. Each project has its

own data date.

Total Activities field

The number of activities in the project.

Complete Activities field

The total number of activities in the project with an actual finish date.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

979

Total Links field

The total number of links to or from activities in open projects. This number includes

links that exist between activities in open projects and activities in closed projects.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box, configure the options and click Check Schedule.

5) In the Schedule Check Report dialog box, expand the Projects Checked section.

Projects Detail Window of the Risk Scoring Matrices Page

Overview

Use this detail window to add or remove projects for the selected risk scoring matrix.

Screen Elements

Add (Insert)

Adds a project to the currently selected risk scoring matrix. A risk scoring matrix must

be assigned to a project to perform qualitative analysis on project risks.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Project ID field

The unique identifier of the project associated with the risk.

Project Name field

The name of the associated project.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and click Risk Scoring Matrices.

3) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, click the Projects detail window.

980

Projects Page

Overview

Use this page to plan projects and manage them to completion.

Screen Elements

Workspace

Displays the Workspace page in the Projects section, which enables you to display

specified, as well as create, custom portlets. These portlets will display information

directly related to specific projects which enables you to focus on the project data

you want to monitor most often.

EPS

Displays the EPS page in the Projects section, which enables you to view the

hierarchical structure of the project database. This page is defined within P6 and is

used, among other things, to implement and maintain secure access to project data

throughout the enterprise.

Activities

Displays the Activities page in the Projects section which enables you to switch

between views and manage multiple views with various features. This page includes

customizable table, calendar, Gantt chart, and Activity Network views.

Team Usage

Displays the Team Usage page in the Projects section, which enables you to display

timescaled information in histogram or spreadsheet format. This page displays costs or

usage data at the team level and for individual roles and resources assigned to the

project with which you are currently working.

Issues

Displays the Issues page in the Projects section, which provides filtering and charting

features in addition to the capability to add issues and display issue details. This page

lists issues for the open project or project group.

Risks

Displays the Risks page in the Projects section, which enables you to customize the

page to specify which types of risks you want to view. The Risks page displays

information about the risks that belong to the selected project.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

981

Documents

Displays the Documents page in the Projects section, which enables you to view,

check in, check out, and download selected documents from one or more projects.

With appropriate privileges, you can edit document information or use a selected

document as a template for creating new documents of the same type for multiple

projects.

Getting Here

Click Projects.

Rate Types Page

Overview

Use this page to create a title for each of the five available Price/Unit fields. The title

should describe what the rate type represents. It will appear wherever the rate types are

displayed in a list or column.

Screen Elements

Rate Types toolbar

See Rate Types Toolbar (see "Enterprise Data Rate Types Toolbar" on page 1276).

Default Title field

Displays the default title for the Rate Type. This field is read-only.

User Defined Title field

A title that you create to correspond with the Default Title. The title should describe

what the rate type represents, such as External or Internal Rate.

Getting Here

To access enterprise data:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Rate Types.

To access enterprise resource data:

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data.

2) In the Enterprise Resource Data pane, click Rate Types.

982

Recent Documents Tab of the My Documents Portlet

Overview

Use this tab to view project documents on which you have performed some recent

action. For example, all documents that you have created, viewed, downloaded, or

checked out appear in this folder. The Recent Documents tab lists up to fifty documents,

grouped by project. Click next to a project name to view documents associated with

the project.

Screen Elements

Recent Documents toolbar

See Private Documents Toolbar (on page 1316).

You can customize the following columns, using the Customize Columns button on the toolbar.

Title field

The identifying name of the document.

Version field

The latest or most current version of the document.

Project field

The name of the associated project.

Access Time field

The date and time the document was last accessed.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the My Documents portlet and click the Recent

Documents tab.

Reject Document Review Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to reject a document and make comments.

Screen Elements

Name field

The name of the review.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

983

Description field

Displays the description, if provided, in a read-only field.

Initiator field

Displays the name of the initiator of the document review in a read-only field.

Due Date field

The date all reviewers need to complete the review. If no due date is specified for the

review, then this field appears blank.

Comments field

Enter comments of the document review. (This field is optional.)

Attachments field

Click to search and select a file to attach. (This field is optional.)

Reject button

Click to reject the document review and send any comments and/or attachments

included.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Document Reviews portlet and click the Action

Required tab.

4) On the Action Required tab, select an action and click the Reject Document.

Related Applications Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign related applications privileges to the selected project

security profile.

Screen Elements

Privilege field

The name of the security permission that is assigned (option selected) or denied

(option cleared) to users of the currently selected profile.

Privilege option

The option in the column header that determines whether the privileges are all

assigned (selected), all denied (clear), or individually configured (indicated with a

dash or - sign).

984

Import/View Contract Management Data option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to import and display data from

Contract Management in P6 Professional.

Administer Project External Applications option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to modify entries in the External

Applications feature in P6 Professional.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Project Security Profiles.

3) On the Project Security Profiles page, click the Related Applications detail window.

Related Items Section of the Document Details Page (without content repository)

Overview

Use this section to view all items that are related to the document by name and

description. Related items can include activities, documents, WBS, or issues.

Screen Elements

Name field

The name of the related item.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

Relate Activities or WBS link

Enables you to select an activity or a WBS to associate with the currently selected

document. See Working with 'Select a Value' Dialog Boxes for further details.

Relate Issue link

Enables you to select an issue to relate to the currently selected document. See

Working with 'Select a Value' Dialog Boxes for further details.

Relate Documents link

Enables you to select a document to relate to the currently selected document. See

Working with 'Select a Value' Dialog Boxes for further details.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

985

Remove link

Removes the selected related item. You must first select the option beside an item's

name before you click the Remove link.

Getting Here

From the Documents page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page:

a. Select a project from the Select Project list if applicable.

b. Select a document from the left pane.

4) On the Document Details page, expand the Related Items section.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page:

a. Select a project from the Select Project list if applicable.

b. Expand the Project Documents portlet.

4) In the Project Documents portlet, expand the project and select a document.

5) On the Document Details page, expand the Related Items section.

Related Items Tab of the Document Details Section (with content repository)

Overview

Use this tab to view all items that are related to the document by name and description.

Related items can include activities, documents, WBSs, or issues.

Screen Elements

Related Items toolbar

See Related Items Toolbar of the Project Tab (on page 1327).

Name field

The name of the project, code, EPS node, or portfolio.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

986

Tips

The document you select and where you access it can change which tabs are visible.

Getting Here

From the Documents page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab, select a document and click the Related Items tab.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Documents portlet and click the Private

Documents tab.

4) On the Private Documents tab, select a document and click Edit Details.

5) In the Document Details dialog box, click the Related Items tab.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Documents portlet and click the Project

tab.

4) On the Project tab, select a document and click Edit Details.

5) In the Document Details dialog box, click the Related Items tab.

Relationship Types - The Majority of Relationships Should be Finish to Start Section of the

Schedule Check Report Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to view the percentage of each relationship type in the schedule. To

ensure schedule stability, the majority of relationships should be Finish to Start.

Only a subset of all the internal and external links in the open projects are checked. Any

links between activities that both have actual finish dates are removed from the subset

to create the list of links checked for relationship type. The Actual percentage is

calculated as the number of links found that match the check divided by the total

number of subset links checked.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

987

Screen Elements

Relationship Type field

The relationship between two activities. See About Relationships for more information

on relationship types.

Count field

The number of relationships of that type.

% field

The percentage of that type of relationship. Calculated as the number of

relationships of a certain type divided by total relationships checked.

Predecessor Project ID field

The identifying code for the project containing the predecessor activity that failed

the check.

Predecessor Activity ID field

The identifying code for the predecessor activity that failed the check.

Predecessor Activity Description field

The brief description of the predecessor activity.

Lag Duration (hours) field

The number of hours of lag duration.

Successor Project ID field

The identifying code of the project that contains the successor activity.

Successor Activity ID field

The identifying code of the successor activity.

Successor Activity Description field

The brief description of the successor activity.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box:

a. Select the Relationship Types - The majority of relationships should be Finish to Start

option.

b. Click Check Schedule.

988

5) In the Schedule Check Report dialog box, expand the Relationship Types - The

majority of relationships should be Finish to Start section.

Relationships Details Page of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this page to add predecessor and successor activities or to remove a relationship.

Screen Elements

Activity field

The name of the activity.

Relationship Type field

The relationship between two activities. Select from the following types:

Finish to Start: A relationship in which the start of a successor activity depends on

the completion of its predecessor activity. This is the default activity relationship.

Finish to Finish: A relationship in which the finish of a successor activity depends on

the finish of its predecessor activity.

Start to Start: A relationship between activities in which the start of a successor

activity depends on the start of its predecessor.

Start to Finish: A relationship between activities in which a successor activity

cannot complete until its predecessor activity starts.

Lag field

The amount of time the predecessor activity was delayed, affecting the ability of its

successor activity to start or finish.

Delete Relationship button

Deletes the current relationship.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Relationships section and select an activity

from the Predecessors or Successors section.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

989

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Relationships section and select an activity

from the Predecessors or Successors section.

Relationships Section of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this section to select the appropriate option to view a list of the activity's

predecessors or successors, along with status, dates, and primary resource contact

information.

Screen Elements

Predecessors section

See Predecessors Section of the Relationships Section of the Activity Form Page (on

page 945).

Successors section

See Successors Section of the Relationships Section of the Activity Form Page (on

page 1111).

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Relationships section.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Relationships section.

990

Report Settings Dialog Box

Overview

Set the options on this dialog box to determine how your on-demand report output will

be generated, formatted, and delivered.

Screen Elements

Report Name field

The title for the report defined in BI Publisher.

File Name field

The name assigned to the report file.

Template list

The template you want to use to apply style to the report data.

Format list

The file formats that you can use for file output.

Delivery Type field

The way users will access or take delivery of this report. On-demand reports can be

delivered by electronic mail as attachments or downloaded as files. You can only

deliver scheduled reports by electronic mail.

E-mail Options button

Launches the E-mail Options dialog box used to enter all e-mail recipients for the

selected report.

Notification options

Determines the types of e-mail status notifications the user who scheduled the report

should receive when the scheduled report attempts to run.

Report Completed option: Determines whether e-mail is sent if the report is delivered

without errors.

Report Complete with warnings option: Determines whether e-mail is sent if the report

is delivered, but has errors.

Report Failed option: Determines whether e-mail is sent if the report failed to run.

Report Parameters table

If a report has field parameters predefined in BI Publisher, they will appear here in P6. You

must specify report parameter values in order to generate valid output. For example, a

weekly timesheet compliance report would require that you specify the start and finish

dates for the target period of the report.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

991

Caution: To avoid system performance issues, be as specific as

possible when entering values for reports. Narrow down your

choices to include only what is absolutely necessary.

Field Name field

The key field used by P6 to construct valid data for each specific instance of report

output.

Value field

The parameter value for the field shown in the field Name column. The field changes

to a picklist, date editor, check box, combo box, or a text field depending on the

settings pre-defined for the field Name. The data entered in a text field must be

accurate, otherwise the report will fail to run.

Example: Jay in Accounting would like to run a report showing

data derived from three active projects, X, Y, and Z. Janice, VP of

Strategic Development, wants the same report but is only

concerned at the moment with Project Y. They each

independently schedule the same report; however, they specify

different report parameter values for Project ID:

Jay: Project X, Project Y, Project Z

Janice: Project Y

Getting Here

From the Reports view:

1) Click Reports.

2) On the Report page:

a. Click View and select Reports.

b. Select a report, and then click Run Report.

From the Schedules view:

1) Click Reports.

2) On the Reports page:

a. Click View and select Schedules.

b. Select a report, and then click Run Schedule ASAP.

Report Settings Dialog Box (Add Report Schedule)

Overview

Use this dialog box to define scheduling options, including run frequency and dates,

report format, delivery method, and report parameters.

992

Screen Elements

Report Settings dialog box tabs:

Options Tab of the Report Settings Dialog Box (on page 914)

Schedule Tab of the Report Settings Dialog Box (on page 1066)

Getting Here

From a report:

1) Click Reports.

2) On the Reports page:

a. Click View and select Reports.

b. Select a report, and then click the Schedule detail window.

3) In the Schedule detail window, click Add (Insert).

From a report schedule:

1) Click Reports.

2) On the Reports page:

a. Click View and select Schedules.

b. Select a schedule, and then click Replicate Schedule.

To view the report settings in read-only mode for scheduled report runs:

1) Click Reports.

2) On the Reports page:

a. Click View and select Schedules.

b. Select a schedule, and then click Schedule Details.

Reports Page

Overview

Use this page to manage, run, and schedule the reports available to you. The

arrangement of reports, including folder names and structure, is determined in BI

Publisher.

The Reports page can generally be used two ways based on your View list setting:

choose Reports to select a single report at the top and schedule it at the bottom, or

choose Schedules to select one of your own scheduled instances of a report at the top

and only view a description at the bottom.

Screen Elements

Reports View

See Reports View of the Reports Page (on page 993).

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

993

Schedules View

See Schedules View of the Reports Page (on page 1068).

Getting Here

Click Reports.

Note: If Reports is not visible on the P6 navigation bar, confirm that

your administrator has granted you the Enterprise Reports option in

the Module Access field.

Reports View of the Reports Page

Overview

Use this page to manage, run, and schedule the reports available to you. The

arrangement of reports, including folder names and structure, is determined in BI

Publisher.

Screen Elements

Reports toolbar

See Reports View Toolbar (on page 1328).

Report Name field

The title for the report defined in BI Publisher.

Default Format field

The standard or proprietary file format automatically used to deliver each instance of

the report. You can schedule another instance of a report where you change the

actual format that is applied to another format listed in the Available Formats field.

For example, the default might be XML but you can decide to format the specific

report instance as PDF or Microsoft Excel.

Default Template field

The common template automatically used to apply style to the raw data in the

report.

Available Formats field

The permitted file formats that can be used for file output.

The file types available for output in P6 are specified in BI Publisher. One or more of the

following outputs types are available:

HTML (.htm): The standard hypertext markup language file format used for web

pages.

994

MHTML (.mht): The variant of HTML used to combine related external files such as

images or audio with markup code into a single file for ease and portability.

XML (.xml): Standard extensible markup language file format.

PDF (.pdf): The Adobe Portable Document Format.

RTF (.rtf): Rich text format suitable for use with common word processor

applications.

Microsoft Excel (.xls): The spreadsheet data file format for Microsoft Excel.

Microsoft Excel 2000 (.xls): An older variant of the spreadsheet data file format for

Microsoft Excel 2000.

Microsoft PowerPoint (.ppt): The popular presentation or slideshow file format from

Microsoft.

Available Templates field

The permitted templates that you can use to apply styles to the raw data in the

report.

A report template is a set of style rules applied to a report in order to best format and

present its data. You can design templates using BI Publisher and also determine

which templates should be available for users to apply to their reports.

Reports view detail windows:

Description Detail Window of the Reports Page (on page 711)

Schedule Detail Window of the Reports Page (on page 1061)

Getting Here

1) Click Reports.

2) On the Reports page, click View and select Reports.

Note: If Reports is not visible on the P6 navigation bar, confirm that

your administrator has granted you the Enterprise Reports option in

the Module Access field.

Request for Information (RFI) Portlet of the Workspace Page

Overview

Use this portlet to view the number of requests for information (RFI) based on status that

exist for the project in Contract Management. If you have a valid user name and

password, you can additionally access Contract Management from this portlet to view a

list of requests for a specific status.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

995

Screen Elements

Request for Information (RFI) portlet

The total number of RFIs, as well as the number of approved, closed, and new RFIs.

Place the cursor over a section of the chart to display the number of RFIs for that type.

Click a section to view a list of all requests for a specific status in Contract

Management in a new browser. To view this information here, you must have a valid

user name and password.

Tips

The number at the top of the portlet indicates the total number of project requests.

If you have the required security privilege, you can customize the Project Workspace

to specify how RFI information displays in the portlet. The customize options set for the

portlet apply for all projects in the organization. Depending on these options, the

status types that appear in the chart might include:

CLO = Closed

OPN = Open

PRO = Proceed

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Request for Information (RFI) portlet.

Resource Analysis Chart Portlet

Overview

Use this portlet to view a variety of chart formats plotting the total (remaining plus

actuals) units or costs for a resource, resource team, or resource code you select.

Note: The Resource Analysis Chart uses summary data, so it reflects

values as of the last date the summarizer was run for the source

projects. Assignment changes within projects after that date will

not be reflected until the projects are again summarized.

The histograms display resource data summarized by calendar in weekly increments.

While the option to create charts with data summarized by financial period is

unavailable from the portlet, you can create histograms and other charts with data

summarized by calendar period or financial period on the Resource Analysis tab of the

Resource Analysis page.

996

Screen Elements

Customize link

Enables you to configure the current chart or change the chart type. See Customize

Chart Dialog Box of the Resource Analysis Chart Portlet (on page 670).

Resource field

The field to select a resource, resource team, or resource code to display in the

Resource Analysis Chart portlet.

Note: The list of resources you can select from includes only

resources you have access to, based on resource security features.

Group By field

Select a field value to determine your preferred option to group your data.

Tips

To display numeric allocation totals for a project or project code, move the mouse

over the corresponding area on a bar.

The Resource Analysis portlet is available for display in a dashboard if your

administrator granted you access to it. If it does not appear, customize a dashboard

to display it.

If you select a resource team or resource code that includes either all material

resources, or a mix of material and labor/nonlabor resources, no chart data displays

for Units. Since these resource types use varying units of measure, for example, time

units for labor versus gallons for a material resource, summing units values for the

team or code would not be meaningful.

An option setting for each project determines whether this view displays summary

data based on resource assignments at the activity or project/WBS level. If you have

the appropriate module access, you can view or change its setting. After opening

the project, click in the Projects navigation bar, then click Settings.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Resource Analysis Chart portlet.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

997

Resource Analysis Tab of the Analysis Page

Overview

Use the Resource Analysis tab of the Analysis page to evaluate resource usage and costs

in customizable histogram, stacked histogram, area chart, and pie chart formats. You

can examine total units or costs for an individual resource or summary values for all

resources belonging to a resource team or code.

Screen Elements

Group By

Displays options for re-arranging a list of values by grouping them into a hierarchy and

sorting.

Group By list

Select from one of the following options by which to group the available resources:

Resource Hierarchy

Resource Team

Resource Codes

Primary Role

Search

Displays options for finding a specific matching entry or entries based on search

criteria.

Show Legend link

Displays interpretive information about a chart. This option is not available in the Pie

Chart view.

Plan Resources link

Redirects you to the Planning page in order to plan resource and role allocation for a

project or WBS, export resource planning data, and search for resources to allocate

to a project or WBS. See Planning Page (on page 922).

Customize link

Displays a dialog box with configurable options to customize the selected chart type.

See Customize Chart Dialog Box of the Resource Analysis Tab of the Analysis Page (on

page 671).

Chart Type list

The chart options in which to display information.

998

Histogram: A histogram lets you analyze project data in a vertical bar chart

format. You can select a project data field to display on the x-axis and another

field to display on the y-axis of the chart; typically, the x-axis represents

categorical data, and the y-axis represents individual data values.

Stacked Histogram: A stacked histogram is a more sophisticated version of the

histogram. In this type of chart, categorized data can be grouped, or stacked, to

assist with comparisons. A stacked histogram is useful when analyzing relative parts

of a whole.

Area Chart: A line chart that lets you quantitatively analyze data. The space in

between the line and the axis is usually colored.

Pie Chart: A pie chart is a circular chart divided into slices, where each slice

represents a particular group; the size of the slice represents the value of the

selected data field, specific to the group. A pie chart is useful for analyzing relative

parts of a whole.

Filter by field

The portfolio, project code, or project used to filter the displayed data.

Group by field

The project or project code used to group the data retrieved from the selected filter.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) On the Analysis page, click the Resource Analysis tab.

Resource Assignments Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign resource assignments privileges to the selected project

security profile.

Screen Elements

Privilege field

The name of the security permission that is assigned (option selected) or denied

(option cleared) to users of the currently selected profile.

Privilege option

The option in the column header that determines whether the privileges are all

assigned (selected), all denied (clear), or individually configured (indicated with a

dash or - sign).

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

999

Add/Edit Activity Resource Requests option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create and modify resource

requests for activities.

Add/Edit/Delete Resource Assignments for Resource Planning option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to assign, modify, and remove

resource assignments on a project or WBS level in Resources. This privilege also

enables users to define search criteria and conduct a search for resource

assignments. For users who do not have this privilege assigned to their profile, the

resource assignment information on the Planning page is read-only for that particular

project or WBS. Since project-level security privileges go down to the WBS level, it is

possible to be able to assign a resource to one WBS in a project and not another.

Add/Edit/Delete Role Assignments for Resource Planning option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to assign, modify, and remove role

assignments on a project or WBS level in Resources. This privilege also enables users to

define search criteria for role assignments. For users who do not have this privilege

assigned to their profile, role assignment information on the Planning page is

read-only for that particular project or WBS. Since project-level security privileges go

down to the WBS level, it is possible to be able to assign a role to one WBS in a project

and not another.

Edit Committed Flag for Resource Planning option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to identify committed resource and

role assignments on a project or WBS level on the Planning page. The

'Add/Edit/Delete Resource Assignments for Resource Planning' project privilege is also

required for this functionality.

Edit Future Periods option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to enter, modify, and delete future

period assignment values in the Original or Planned Units and Remaining (Early) Units

fields of the Resource Usage Spreadsheet using P6 Professional. The 'Add/Edit

Activities Except Relationships' project privilege is also required for this functionality.

Edit Period Performance option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to modify period performance values

for labor and nonlabor units as well as labor, nonlabor, material, and expense costs

using P6 Professional. The 'Add/Edit Activities Except Relationships' and 'View Project

Costs/Financials' project privileges are also required for this functionality.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Project Security Profiles.

3) On the Project Security Profiles page, click the Resource Assignments detail window.

1000

Resource Calendars Page

Overview

Use this page to view or configure resource calendar information and options.

Screen Elements

Resource Calendar toolbar

See Enterprise Data Resource Calendar Toolbar (on page 1276).

Calendar tab

See Calendar Tab of the Resource Calendars Page (on page 607).

Standard Work Week tab

See Standard Work Week Tab of the Resource Calendars Page (on page 1087).

Used By tab

See Used By Tab of the Resource Calendars Page (on page 1136).

Search field

The means to find a project.

Search

Click to display all available options to your specified search criteria entered in the

search field.

Calendar List

Displays a list of all available calendars to view.

Getting Here

To access enterprise data:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Resource Calendars.

To access enterprise resource data:

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data.

2) In the Enterprise Resource Data pane, click Resource Calendars.

Resource Codes Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure resource codes and code values for projects.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1001

Screen Elements

Resource Codes toolbar

See Enterprise Data Resource Codes Toolbar (on page 1278).

Name field

You can categorize resources using codes. With potentially hundreds of resources

being used across an enterprise of projects, codes provide another method for

filtering the resources you need to access quickly, or for grouping resources for

analysis and summarization in layouts. You can also use resource codes to group, sort,

and filter resources in profiles and spreadsheets.

Description field

A description of the Resource Code or the Resource Code Value Names.

Maximum Length field

Indicates the maximum length for a resource code or value. The value cannot

exceed the maximum character length specified for the resource code.

Secure option

Secure codes enable privileged users to hide Project, Activity, Issue and Resource

codes from users that do not have security privileges to view them. Secure codes are

structured hierarchically. In other words, if a user is granted add/delete privileges, that

user automatically has edit, assign, and view privileges. If a user is granted edit

privileges, that user is automatically granted assign and view privileges. If a user is

granted assign privileges, that user is automatically assigned view privileges.

Getting Here

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Resource Data pane, expand Resources and click Resource Codes.

Resource Curves Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure resource curves.

Screen Elements

Resource Curves toolbar

See Enterprise Data Resource Curves Toolbar (on page 1280).

Name field

The name of the resource curve. The name is composed of alpha-numeric characters

or symbols and must be unique.

1002

Resource Curves Curve Definition window

See Curve Definition Detail Window of the Resource Curves Page (on page 659).

Getting Here

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Resource Data pane, expand Resources and click Resource Curves.

Resource Details Page of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this page to assign resources and specify details for the resources such as units, costs,

and rate.

Screen Elements

Resource field

The name for the resource. Click the name of a resource to view their usage in a

spreadsheet or histogram format.

Role field

The name of the role.

Primary Resource option

Determines whether the corresponding resource is the activity's primary resource.

Typically, the primary resource is the person responsible for the overall work on the

activity and for updating activity status.

Proficiency field

The skill level of the resource: Master, Expert, Skilled, Proficient, or Inexperienced.

Planned field

The expected number of units required to complete the activity.

Actual field

The exact number of units that have been expended or the total cost that has been

incurred for the selected activity.

Remaining field

The number of units required to complete the activity.

Planned Units/Time field

The planned units per time at which the resource is to perform work on this activity.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1003

For example, a person assigned full time would perform 8 hours of work per day. A

department of five people might perform at 5 days per day.

Remaining Units/Time field

The units per time required to complete the activity.

Price/Unit field

The price per time for the resource on this activity.

This price is used to calculate the resource's cost for the activity. When the resource is

assigned to the activity, the resource's price is copied to the assignment based on the

effective date of the price and the activity start date. The assignment price is

refreshed whenever resource prices are synchronized for the project.

Planned field

The planned total cost for the activity, including labor resources, nonlabor resources,

and project expenses.

Calculated as Planned Labor Cost plus Planned Nonlabor Cost plus Planned Expense

Cost.

Actual field

The actual total cost for the activity, including labor resources, nonlabor resources,

and project expenses.

Calculated as Actual Labor Costs plus Actual Nonlabor Costs plus Actual Expense

Costs.

Remaining field

The remaining total cost for the activity, including labor resources, nonlabor

resources, and project expenses.

Calculated as Remaining Labor Costs plus Remaining Nonlabor Costs plus Remaining

Expense Costs.

Curve field

The resource's units and costs distributed over the duration of an activity.

A curve can only be assigned to activities that have a duration type of Fixed Duration

and Units or Fixed Duration and Units/Time.

A manual curve type indicates that the assignment's future period resource

distribution was manually entered in the Resource Usage Spreadsheet of P6

Professional. If you select a different curve type, the manually-entered distribution is

deleted, and the units and costs for the assignment are redistributed according to the

curve you select. Be sure this is the appropriate course of action before replacing a

manual curve with another curve.

1004

Rate Source field

The value that indicates which price/unit will be used to calculate costs for the

assignment, such as Resource, Role, and Override.

When a resource and only a resource is assigned to an activity, the rate source will

automatically equal Resource. When a role and only a role is assigned to an activity,

the rate source will automatically equal Role. When both a resource and role are

assigned to the activity, the rate source can be either Resource or Role determined

by the Rate Source Preference. In any case, the Override value allows you to specify

any other price/unit.

Rate Type field

The price/unit used to calculate costs for the resource or role assignment.

Resources and Roles can have up to five rate types, with each rate type reflecting a

different price/unit. Rate types are defined in P6. When you add a new assignment,

the rate type defaults to the setting specified for the project. When you edit a rate

type and click Save, the Price/Unit is updated to reflect your change, and if the Calc

Cost from Units option is selected, costs are recalculated.

Calc Cost from Units option

Determines whether to override the cost calculation setting that is specified for the

assigned resource or role.

Drive Activity Dates option

Determines whether to override a resource's default setting for the selected activity.

Cost Account field

The cost account associated with the resource.

Delete Assignment link

Deletes the current assignment.

Tips

You can determine the default units/time, overtime factor, and price/unit for an

activity on the Global tab of the My Preferences page.

When you add or remove activity assignments, a setting on the Global tab of the My

Preferences page, which is turned on by default, automatically e-mails affected

resources. To turn off this feature or add a prompt before sending e-mail, clear this

option or mark the option to prompt in the General section of the Global tab.

In the Select Resources and Select Roles windows:

To change the list order, select an option from the Organized by list.

When assigning resources for unstaffed roles, to list only resources who can staff an

assigned role, use the Resources by Role organize option.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1005

To search for a role or resource, select the search criteria from the list and type the

search variable, then click Search. Click Clear Results to return to the full resource

or role display.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Resources section and click a resource.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Resources section and click a resource.

Resource Search Criteria Dialog Box

Overview

Use the Resources Search dialog box to search for resources who meet specific

requirements.

Screen Elements

Return to Spreadsheet link

Closes the current dialog box and returns to the Spreadsheet view.

This link does not appear if you arrive at this page from the Open Requests for

Resources portlet from the Dashboard page.

Start/Finish/Total Requested Units field

Displays the information about the activity from the Resource Staffing dialog box.

If more than one activity is selected in the Resource Staffing dialog box, this field

displays the earliest actual/early start of all activities, the latest actual/early finish of all

activities, and the total remaining units of all activities.

Requested Units/Time field

The units/time at which the resource is needed to work on the selected activity.

1006

This field does not display if the activity has a resource curve assigned or when

multiple activities are selected in the Resource Staffing dialog box.

Resource Curve field

The field displays in place of Requested Units/Time if a curve is associated with this

resource assignment.

This field does not display when multiple activities are selected in the Resource

Staffing dialog box.

Define Search Criteria area

The configurable fields to define the search criteria. Defining search criteria enables

you to more accurately identify the type of resource required to staff the role.

Show Results Matching field

Determines what criteria is used in your search.

All search criteria: Finds a resource based on all selections of search criteria that you

select from or enter in the fields of the dialog box.

Any search criteria: Finds a resource based on a random criteria search.

Primary Role field

The name of the primary job title or skill for the resource.

Roles field

The name of the role(s) to use as search criteria. A Primary Role must be identified.

Proficiency field

The skill level of the resource: Master, Expert, Skilled, Proficient, or Inexperienced.

Resource field

The name for the resource. Click the name of a resource to view their usage in a

spreadsheet or histogram format.

Resource Code field

The name of the resource code.

Define Sort Criteria area

The configurable fields used to define the sort criteria.

Sort results by availability option

Determines whether to sort the results by resource availability.

Do not show overallocated resources option

Determines whether to show overallocated resources.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1007

Compute availability for date range options

Determines whether to search availability based on the activity start and finish or by a

custom date that you enter.

If multiple activities are selected in the Resource Staffing dialog box the Activity Start

to Finish option uses the earliest early start date and the latest early finish date of all

assignments.

Resource Staffing link

Displays the Resource Staffing dialog box without saving any changes.

Run Search link

Displays a list of available resource who meet the specified criteria. See Resource

Search Results Dialog Box (on page 1008).

Select Template link

Displays a list of preexisting search criteria from which you can select to search by.

Save as Template link

Saves the current search criteria as a template to use again.

Getting Here

From the Analysis page:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) On the Analysis page, click the Role Usage tab.

4) Select a role and select to display the Spreadsheet.

5) In the Spreadsheet, click a project name.

6) In the Resource Staffing dialog box:

a. Click the Unstaffed and Staffed option to show all activities.

b. Select at least one activity and click Search.

From the Team Usage page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Team Usage.

3) On the Team Usage page:

a. If more than one project is open, select a project from the Select Project list.

b. Click the Organized By list and select Roles.

1. Expand a project and select a role in the left pane.

2. Select the Spreadsheet option and click a project in the right pane.

c. In the Resources dialog box:

1. Click the Unstaffed and Staffed option to show all activities.

1008

2. Select one or more activities and click Search.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the Open Requests for Resources portlet and select

project or a role, depending on your customize options.

4) On the Resource Staffing Details page:

a. Click the Unstaffed and Staffed option to show all activities.

b. Select one or more activities and click Search.

Resource Search Results Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to review results of your search and assign a resource from the list of

resources that match your criteria.

Screen Elements

Return to Spreadsheet link

Closes the current dialog box and returns to the Spreadsheet view.

Start/Finish/Total Requested Units field

Displays the information about the activity from the Resource Staffing dialog box.

If more than one activity is selected in the Resource Staffing dialog box, this field

displays the earliest actual/early start of all activities, the latest actual/early finish of all

activities, and the total remaining units of all activities.

Requested Units/Time field

The units/time at which the resource is needed to work on the selected activity.

This field does not display if the activity has a resource curve assigned or when

multiple activities are selected in the Resource Staffing dialog box.

Timescale list

Determines the timescale. Select from the following intervals:

Month/Week

Year/Month

Year/Quarter

Decade/Year

Financial Period

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1009

The available timescale options are determined by the selected summarization

option on the General page of the Application Settings pane. The calendar

timescale options are only available if the By Calendar option is selected. The

Financial Period option is only available if the By Financial Periods option is selected. If

both options are selected, you can select from a calendar or financial period

timescale.

Resource Curve field

The field displays in place of Requested Units/Time if a curve is associated with this

resource assignment.

This field does not display when multiple activities are selected in the Resource

Staffing dialog box.

Select options

Determines whether to assign a known resource to the corresponding activity or

search for a list of possible resources.

Resource Name field

The name of the available resources that match your search criteria.

Score field

The number of units the resource will have available after being assigned to the

activity.

Calculated as Available Units of the resource across the expanded activity time

frame minus Total Requested Units.

Resource Staffing link

Displays the Resource Staffing dialog box without saving any changes.

Search link

Displays the Search dialog box without saving any changes.

Assign Resource link

Assigns the selected resource to the current activity.

Getting Here

From the Analysis page:

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) On the Analysis page, click the Role Usage tab.

4) Select a role and select to display the Spreadsheet.

5) In the Spreadsheet, click a project name.

6) In the Resource Staffing dialog box:

1010

a. Click the Unstaffed and Staffed option to show all activities.

b. Select at least one activity and click Search.

7) In the Resource Search Criteria dialog box, enter search criteria and click the Run

Search link.

From the Team Usage page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Team Usage.

3) On the Team Usage page:

a. If multiple projects are open, select a project from the Select Project list.

b. Click the Organized By list and select Roles.

1. Expand a project and select a role in the left pane.

2. Select the Spreadsheet option and click a project in the right pane.

4) In the Resources dialog box:

a. Click the Unstaffed and Staffed option to show all activities.

b. Select one or more activities and click Search.

c. Define search and sort criteria and click Run Search.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the Open Requests for Resources portlet and select a

project or role name, depending on your customization options.

4) On the Resource Staffing Details page:

a. Click the Unstaffed and Staffed option to show all activities.

b. Select one or more activities and click Search.

5) On the Resource Search Criteria page, define search and sort criteria and click Run

Search.

Resource Staffing Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to view project activities that have unstaffed and staffed assignments

for a particular role and to search for and assign resources to those activities. The activity

list is sorted alphabetically by name.

Screen Elements

Return to Spreadsheet link

Closes the current dialog box and returns to the Spreadsheet view.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1011

Display options

Determines whether to display only unstaffed activities, or staffed and unstaffed

activities, for the selected role.

Select options

Determines whether to assign a known resource to the corresponding activity or

search for a list of possible resources.

Activity Name field

The activity associated with the role.

To view more details about the activity, such as steps and notebook items, click the

activity name link.

Resource Name field

The name of the resource assigned to the activity.

Resource Type field

The type of resource/role assignment.

Labor: Indicates that the selected resource performs labor, which is measured in units

of time.

Nonlabor: Indicates that the selected resource does not perform labor, but its work is

measured in units of time.

Material: Indicates that the selected resource does not perform labor and its work is

measured in units you specify.

Start field

The planned start date for an activity not yet started or the actual start date for an

activity that has already started.

Finish field

The planned finish date for an activity not yet started or the remaining finish date for

an activity that has already started.

Remaining Units field

The remaining Units for completing the assignment.

Calculated as Remaining Duration multiplied by Remaining Units per Time.

Remaining Units/Time field

The units/time at which the resource is expected to perform the remaining work on

the activity.

Search Criteria field

The indication of whether there is saved search criteria.

1012

Search link

Displays configurable options to search for resources.

At least one activity must be selected. See Resource Search Criteria Dialog Box (on

page 1005).

Assign Resource link

Displays a dialog box with search options and a list of resources that includes only

resources that belong to your access node, based on resource security, and current

project resources. See Working with 'Select a Value' Dialog Boxes for further details.

Tips

Staffed resource assignments that have actual units are not listed on the Resource

Staffing page.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) On the Analysis page, click the Role Usage tab.

4) On the Role Usage tab:

a. Select a role from the list of available rows.

b. Select Spreadsheet from the Display options.

c. Click a project name.

Or

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Team Usage.

3) On the Team Usage page:

a. Select Roles from the Organized By list.

b. Select a role.

c. Select Spreadsheet from the Display options.

d. Click a project name.

Resource Staffing Dialog Box of the Team Usage Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to view project activities that have unstaffed and staffed assignments

for a particular search and assign resources to those activities.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1013

Screen Elements

This dialog box is identical to the Resource Staffing dialog box of the Role Usage tab on

the Analysis page of the Resources section. See Resource Staffing Dialog Box of the Role

Usage Tab of the Analysis Page (see "Resource Staffing Dialog Box" on page 1010) for

further details.

Getting Here

From the Team Usage page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Team Usage.

3) On the Team Usage pane:

a. If multiple projects are open, select a project from the Select Project list.

b. Click the Organized By list and select Roles.

c. Expand a project and select a role.

d. Select the Spreadsheet display option.

e. Click a project in the list below the role.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Open Requests for Resources portlet and select a

resource.

Resource Tab of the Modify Template Dialog Box of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to configure resource information associated with the template.

Screen Elements

Choose the Microsoft Project field to import as the Resource ID options

Determines whether to import Microsoft Project Resource name or Resource Initials as

the P6 Resource ID.

If a resource already exists options

Determines the action to be taken:

Keep existing resource: Retains the resource in the existing project and does not

overwrite it with the resource from the import file.

Update existing resource: Overwrites the resource in the existing project with the

resource from the import file.

1014

Add a new resource: Retains the resource in the existing project and adds a new

resource for the resource in the import file. The system creates a Resource ID for

the new resource by appending a hyphen followed by a sequential number to

the Resource ID when it is imported.

Add a new resource if a resource does not exist option

Determines whether to add resources and their assignments from the import file to the

existing project.

This option only affects resources that do not currently exist in P6.

Import under resource field

The name of the resource under which to place Microsoft Project resources that do

not yet exist in P6.

All Resource Access is required to import Microsoft Project XML.

Tips

The Import or Export Type must be set as Microsoft Project XML (2007) to enable the

options icons.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export XML Project

Import/Export.

4) In the Import/Export Project dialog box, click the Import or Export tab.

5) On the Import or Export tab:

a. Select Microsoft Project XML (2007) from the Import or Export Type list.

b. Click MSP Export Template Options or MSP Import Template Options.

6) In the Modify Template dialog box, click the Resource tab.

Resource Team Summary Portlet

Overview

Use this portlet to view the resources, their primary role, and the number of active

projects for a team you select. The portlet lists those members of the resource team that

you have access to, based on resource security. For example, if you choose to view a

global resource team that includes a combination of resources within and outside of

your resource access node, you see only the team members to which you have access.

If you choose to view a resource team that is available only to you, all resources that you

added to the team are listed.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1015

Screen Element

Select a resource team field

The field used to select a resource team to display its members in the portlet.

E-mail resource team link

Sends an e-mail to the entire resource team.

Resource field

The name for the resource. Click the name of a resource to view their usage in a

spreadsheet or histogram format.

Primary Role field

The name of the primary job title or skill for the resource.

Active Projects field

The number of active projects to which the resource is currently assigned.

Tips

Resource usage data is based on summary data, so it reflects values as of the last

date the summarizer was run for a project. Assignment changes within a project after

that date will not be reflected until the project is again summarized on the Activities

or EPS page.

To control the number of items that display in the portlet, click Customize at the top of

the page. Then, specify a number for 'Maximum number of rows displayed in

dashboard portlets'. When the number of items exceeds the maximum, Next and

Previous links display.

You can always customize your private dashboards, as well as multi-user dashboards

you create; you cannot customize multi-user dashboards created by another user.

You must have the required security privilege to customize a global dashboard.

From the spreadsheet, for projects you have access to, you can view a list of the

resource's activities along with basic details, such as start and finish dates.

After you create a resource team, if a resource is removed from your resource access

node or your access is modified, that resource will no longer be listed in the portlet.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Resource Team Summary portlet.

1016

Resource Teams Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign a resource to a resource team, view all resource teams

to which a resource is assigned, or remove a resource from a resource team.

Screen Elements

Add (Insert)

Assigns the resource to a resource team.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Resource selector (Ctrl+Up Arrow) or (Ctrl+Down Arrow)

Cycles through the available resources and determines which data display in the

detail window. Click (Ctrl+Up Arrow) to move to the previous resource, or click

(Ctrl+Down Arrow) to move to the next resource. The content in the detail window is

refreshed with the data for the selected resource.

Team Name field

The name of the team to which the resource is assigned.

Available To field

Indicates the user access for the team.

Global: all users with module access can view this team.

User: only you have access to this team.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resources tab.

4) On the Resources tab, click the Resource Teams detail window.

Resource Teams Tab of the Administration Page

Overview

Use this tab to create, modify, or delete a resource team.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1017

Screen Elements

Resource Teams Toolbar

See Teams Tabs Toolbar (on page 1351).

Name field

The name of the global or user resource team.

Resources field

The list of resources assigned to the resource team.

Resources detail window

See Resources Detail Window of the Resource Teams Tab of the Administration Page

(on page 1022).

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resource Teams tab.

Resource UDFs Page

Overview

Use this page to configure user defined fields for resources.

Screen Elements

User Defined Fields toolbar

See User Defined Fields Toolbar (on page 1361).

User Defined Field field

The name of the user-defined field.

Data Type field

The name of the type of data that corresponds to each user-defined field. The data

type you select determines the type of data you can specify in a field. The following

data types are available:

Text: Allows you to use text or a combination of text and numbers.

Start Date: Allows you to enter Start Date information only.

Finish Date: Allows you to enter Finish Date information only.

Cost: Allows you to enter currency values.

Number: Allows you to use numerals with two decimal places.

Integer: Allows you to use numeric data, but not a number related to money.

1018

Indicator: Allows you to use an indicator field that you can use to enter

color-coded icon values in columns and display color-coded text in reports.

Getting Here

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Resource Data pane, expand Resources and click Resource UDFs.

Resource Usage Tab of the Analysis Page

Overview

Use this tab to view resource allocation as a histogram (total allocation across time) or as

a spreadsheet (of resource allocation values by project). You can view totals for

individual resources or for multiple resources grouped by resource code, resource team,

or primary role.

The resource usage data displayed on this page is derived from summary data, so it is

current as of the last date the summarizer was run for a project. Assignment changes

within a project after that date will not be reflected until the project is again summarized.

See Summarizing Projects.

Screen Elements

Group By

Displays options for re-arranging a list of values by grouping them into a hierarchy and

sorting.

Group By list

Select from one of the following options by which to group the available resources:

Resource Hierarchy

Resource Team

Resource Codes

Primary Role

Search

Displays options for finding a specific matching entry or entries based on search

criteria.

Customize link

Displays a dialog box with configurable options to customize the Spreadsheet or

Histogram. See Customize Spreadsheet or Histogram Dialog Box of the Analysis Page

(on page 697).

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1019

Export Spreadsheet link

Exports the current spreadsheet to a Microsoft Excel .xls file.

Display options

Determines whether to view information about the selected role/resource and

associated projects in Spreadsheet or Histogram format.

Zoom In

Increases the current magnification of items in the work area so they appear larger.

Zoom Out

Decreases the current magnification of items in the work area so they appear smaller.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) On the Analysis page, click the Resource Usage tab.

Resource/Cost - Activities That Do Not Have an Expense or a Resource Assigned Section of

the Schedule Check Report Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to view activities that do not have an expense or resource assigned.

Plans without resources or costs are not as meaningful particularly when you are tracking

Earned Value.

Only a subset of the activities in the open projects are checked. WBS summary activities,

milestones, and Level of Effort activities are removed from the subset to create the list of

activities checked for no resources or expense assignments. The Actual percentage is

calculated as the number of activities found that match the check divided by the total

number of subset activities checked.

Note: There is no check for the number of units or the value of the

expenses.

Screen Elements

Project ID field

The unique identifying code of the project containing the activity which failed the

check.

Activity ID field

The unique identifying code of the activity which failed the check.

1020

Activity Description field

The brief description of the listed activity.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box:

a. Select the Resource/Cost - Activities that do not have an expense or a resource

assigned option.

b. Click Check Schedule.

5) In the Schedule Check Report dialog box, expand the Resource/Cost - Activities that

do not have an expense or a resource assigned section.

Resources Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign resources privileges to the selected global security

profile.

Screen Elements

Privilege field

The name of the security permission that is assigned (option selected) or denied

(option cleared) to users of the currently selected profile.

Privilege option

The option in the column header that determines whether the privileges are all

assigned (selected), all denied (clear), or individually configured (indicated with a

dash or - sign).

Add Resources option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create resource data. This privilege

also selects the 'Edit Resources' global privilege.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1021

Edit Resources option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to modify resource data. This privilege

also enables users to assign, modify, and remove role assignments. To display

resources' price/unit in reports, users must have this privilege and the 'View Resource

and Role Costs/Financials' global privilege assigned to their profile. To display

resource skill level (a resource’s role proficiency) in the application and in reports,

users must have this privilege and the 'View Resource Role Proficiency' global

privilege assigned to their profile.

Delete Resources option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to remove resource data. This

privilege also selects the 'Add Resources' and 'Edit Resources' global privileges.

Add/Edit/Delete Resource Calendars option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

resource calendars data. This privilege also enables users to edit Shifts in P6

Professional.

Add/Edit/Delete Resource Curves option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

resource distribution curves definitions.

Add/Edit/Delete Roles option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove roles

data.

Add/Edit/Delete Global Resource and Role Teams option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

global Resource Teams and Role Teams. A Resource/Role Team is a collection of

resources/roles.

Add/Edit/Delete Rate Types and Units of Measure option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

resource rate types and units of measure data.

1022

View Resource and Role Costs/Financials option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to display all values for labor,

material, and nonlabor resource costs, price/unit values for roles, and costs for

resource and resource assignments User Defined fields. For users who do not have this

privilege assigned to their profile, all areas that display monetary values for labor,

material, and nonlabor resources and roles will display dashes and cannot be edited.

For resources, such areas include resource price/unit, values in resource spreadsheets

and histograms in Resource Analysis and Team Usage, and Cost data types for

Resource User Defined fields. For roles, the area is the price/unit value in roles data. To

display resources' price/unit, users must have this privilege and the 'Edit Resources'

global privilege assigned to their profile.

View Resource Role Proficiency option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to display, group/sort, filter, search,

and report on resource and role proficiency. To display resource skill level (a

resource’s role proficiency), users must have this privilege and the Edit Resources

global privilege assigned to their profile.

Approve Resource Timesheets option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to approve or reject submitted

timesheets as a Resource Manager.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Global Security Profiles.

3) On the Global Security Profiles page, click the Resources detail window.

Resources Detail Window of the Resource Teams Tab of the Administration Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign or remove resources from a resource team.

Screen Elements

Add (Insert)

Assigns a resource to the selected group.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Resource ID field

The unique identifier of the resource.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1023

Resource Name field

The name of the resource.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resource Teams tab.

4) On the Resource Teams tab, click the Resources detail window.

Resources Detail Window of the Roles Tab of the Administration Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign resources to a role, modify resource settings, or delete a

resource from the role.

Screen Elements

Add (Insert)

Assigns a resource to the selected group.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Role selector (Ctrl+Up Arrow) or (Ctrl+Down Arrow)

Cycles through the available roles and determines which data display in the detail

window. Click (Ctrl+Up Arrow) to move to the previous role, or click (Ctrl+Down

Arrow) to move to the next role. The content in the detail window is refreshed with the

data for the selected role.

Resource field

The name of the resource.

Proficiency field

The resource's proficiency at performing this role.

The values are 1 - Master, 2 - Expert, 3 - Skilled, 4 - Proficient, and 5 - Inexperienced. If

you do not have the proper privilege, you cannot access this field.

Primary Role option

Determines whether this is the resource's main role; a role that does not have this

option selected indicates that this is a secondary role for the resource. You can only

assign one primary role per resource; a resource is not required to have a primary role.

1024

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Roles tab.

4) On the Roles tab, click the Resources detail window.

Resources Page

Overview

Use the Resources section to manage resources, including adding, modifying, or deleting

resources, resource teams, roles, and role teams. You can also plan for resources

assignments, assign resources to projects and WBSs, and analyze resource and role

usage.

Screen Elements

Resources Navigation Bar

See Resources Navigation Bar (on page 1329).

Work Area

The main work area for each resources page. Each page opened from the

navigation bar, as well as tabs included on each page, presents its own separate

data, buttons, links, toolbars, charts, and other items in the work area.

Getting Here

Click Resources.

Resources Section of Activity Details of the Resources Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to view a list of resources assigned to an activity, report time worked on

an activity, report estimates of remaining work for your activities, report estimates of

remaining work for a non-labor or material resource, and to report completed

assignments.

Screen Elements

Assign Resources link

Opens a dialog box to search for and select a resource to assign. See Working with

'Select a Value' Dialog Boxes for further details of how to use this dialog box.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1025

Assign Roles link

Opens a dialog box to search for and select a role to assign. See Working with 'Select

a Value' Dialog Boxes for further details of how to use this dialog box.

E-mail these resources link

Enables you to send an e-mail about the selected activity to resources, including the

activity name and other information, such as the WBS name, Start, Finish, and

Resources.

Resource Name field

The name of the resource. Click to open the Resource Details page. See Resource

Details Page of the Activity Form Page (on page 1002) for further details.

Primary Resource option

Determines whether the corresponding resource is the activity's primary resource.

Typically, the primary resource is the person responsible for the overall work on the

activity and for updating activity status.

Role Name field

The name of the role assigned to the resource for the selected activity.

Search Criteria field

The resource request used as a search template to search for a qualified resource.

Planned Units field

The sum of planned labor units and planned nonlabor units.

Actual Units field

The number of work units the resource has spent working on the selected activity. It is

the sum of the actual labor units and the actual nonlabor units.

Calculated as Actual Labor Units plus Actual Nonlabor Units.

Remaining Units/Time field

The units per time required to complete the activity.

Resource Details

Click a resource name or a role name to display the resource details. See Edit

Resource Assignment of Activity Details of the Resources Dialog Box (see "Edit

Resource Assignment Dialog Box" on page 738).

Getting Here

From the Projects section:

1) Click Projects.

1026

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Team Usage.

3) On the Team Usage pane:

a. If multiple projects are open, select a project from the Select Project list.

b. Click the Organized By list and select Roles.

c. Expand a project and select a role.

d. Select the Spreadsheet display option

e. Click a project in the list below the role.

4) In the Resources dialog box:

a. Click the Unstaffed and Staffed option to show all activities.

b. Select an activity.

c. Expand the Resources section.

From the Dashboards section:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, expand the Open Requests for Resources portlet and

select a project or role name, depending on your customization options.

3) On the Resource Staffing page:

a. Click the Unstaffed and Staffed option to show all activities.

b. Select an activity.

4) On the Activity Details page, expand the Resources section.

Resources Section of the Activity Details Dialog Box

Overview

Use the Resources section of the Activity Details dialog box to view a list of resources

assigned to an activity, report time worked on an activity, report estimates of remaining

work for your activities, report estimates of remaining work for a non-labor or material

resource, and to report completed assignments.

Screen Elements

Assign Resources link

Displays a dialog box to search for and select a resource to assign. See Selection

Dialog Boxes for further details of how to use this dialog box.

Assign Roles link

Displays a dialog box to search for and select a role to assign. See Selection Dialog

Boxes for further details of how to use this dialog box.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1027

E-mail these resources link

Enables you to send an e-mail about the selected activity to resources, including the

activity name and other information, such as the WBS name, Start, Finish, and

Resources.

Resource Name field

The name of the resource. Click to open the Resource Details page. See Resource

Details Page of the Activity Form Page (on page 1002) for further details.

Primary Resource option

Determines whether the corresponding resource is the activity's primary resource.

Typically, the primary resource is the person responsible for the overall work on the

activity and for updating activity status.

Role Name field

The name of the role assigned to the resource for the selected activity.

Search Criteria field

The resource request used as a search template to search for a qualified resource.

Planned Units field

The sum of planned labor units and planned nonlabor units.

Actual Units field

The number of work units the resource has spent working on the selected activity. It is

the sum of the actual labor units and the actual nonlabor units.

Calculated as Actual Labor Units plus Actual Nonlabor Units.

Remaining Units/Time field

The units per time required to complete the activity.

Resource Details

Click a resource name or a role name to display the resource details. See Edit

Resource Assignment Dialog Box (on page 738).

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) On the Analysis page, click the Role Usage tab.

4) On the Role Usage tab, select a role and select to display the Spreadsheet.

5) On the Spreadsheet, click a project name.

6) In the Resource Staffing dialog box, click an activity name then expand the

Resources section.

1028

Resources Section of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this section to view a list of resources assigned to an activity, report time worked on

an activity, report estimates of remaining work for your activities, report estimates of

remaining work for a non-labor or material resource, and to report completed

assignments.

Screen Elements

Assign Resources link

Opens a dialog box to search for and select a resource to assign. See Working with

'Select a Value' Dialog Boxes for further details of how to use this dialog box.

Assign Roles link

Opens a dialog box to search for and select a role to assign. See Working with 'Select

a Value' Dialog Boxes for further details of how to use this dialog box.

Request Resources link

Opens the Open a Request for a Resource dialog box. This dialog box is identical to

the open a request for resource located on the Activities page. See Open a Request

for a Resource Dialog Box of the Assignments Detail Window of the Activities Page (on

page 909) for more details.

E-mail these resources link

Enables you to send an e-mail about the selected activity to resources, including the

activity name and other information, such as the WBS name, Start, Finish, and

Resources.

Customize link

Opens a dialog box to customize the columns viewed in the resources portlet. See

Configuring Columns or Values for further details.

Resource Name field

The name of the resource. Click to open the Resource Details page. See Resource

Details Page of the Activity Form Page (on page 1002) for further details.

Role Name field

The name of the role assigned to the resource for the selected activity.

Search Criteria field

The resource request used as a search template to search for a qualified resource.

Planned Units field

The sum of planned labor units and planned nonlabor units.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1029

Actual Units field

The number of work units the resource has spent working on the selected activity. It is

the sum of the actual labor units and the actual nonlabor units.

Calculated as Actual Labor Units plus Actual Nonlabor Units.

Remaining Units field

The remaining units of work to be performed by this resource on this activity.

Calculated as Budgeted or Planned Units minus Actual Units.

Planned Units/Time field

The planned units per time at which the resource is to perform work on this activity.

For example, a person assigned full time would perform 8 hours of work per day. A

department of five people might perform at 5 days per day.

Remaining Units/Time field

The units per time required to complete the activity.

Getting

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Resources section.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Resources section.

Resources Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page

Overview

Use this section to enable and configure portlets in the dashboard that display

information you can use to analyze and view resource information.

1030

Screen Elements

Resource Team Summary option

Determines whether to display the resources that belong to a team you select,

including each resource's primary role and number of active projects.

Open Requests for Resources option

Determines whether to display which roles require staffing at any time in your projects.

Display options

all projects option: Displays all projects for which you are associated.

projects based on dashboard filter option: Displays projects that obey the current

filter option.

Organize list

Determines how the portlet data is organized.

Note: The Role by Project by Project Codes option works the same

as Role by Project, but additionally filters the list by the project

code you select.

Role Team field

The currently selected role team, whose resources youwant to display if their roles

need resource assignments.

Project Code field

The currently selected project code of the projects you want to display if their roles

need resource assignments.

Resource Analysis Chart option

Determines whether to display the total (remaining plus actuals) units or costs for a

resource, resource team or resource code in a variety of chart formats.

Chart Type list

Determines the following chart options in which to view resource allocation data:

histogram, stacked histogram, pie chart, or area chart formats.

Display list

Determines whether to view by units or costs.

Limit option

Determines whether to display a limit line on the chart. When you choose to display

units, a limit line helps you easily spot under or overallocation.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1031

Allocation Limit option

Determines whether to display an allocation limit line on the chart.

Display resource allocation fields

The specified number of weeks for which to display the resource allocation. Enter

values for how many weeks prior and after the current date.

Color Theme list

The option to view chart elements in pastel or primary colors.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, click Customize.

4) On the Dashboard Details page, click the Content tab.

5) On the Content tab, expand the Resources section.

Resources Section of the Global Tab of the My Preferences Page

Overview

Use this section to configure resource staffing and assignment options.

Screen Elements

Resource Staffing

Expand this section to choose your resource staffing options.

Automatically summarize project after assigning resources option

Determines whether to summarize a project after you assign resources. Because

availability calculations for resource staffing features are based on summary data,

choosing this option ensures that your staffing decisions are based on the most

up-to-date resource allocation data.

When this feature is enabled, you can check the status of the summarizer job on the

Activities page in the View Service Status dialog box.

Within the resource staffing feature, click on an activity name to show limited activity

details, based on whether you select Display Resource Assignments, Display

Notebook, and/or Display Steps.

An administrative setting is also required to implement this feature. For more

information, contact your P6 administrator.

Display Resource Assignments option

Determines whether to display an activity's resource assignment details, for example,

planned units and remaining units/time.

1032

Display Notebook option

Determines whether to display activity Notebooks when viewing activity details.

Display Steps option

Determines whether to display activity steps when viewing activity details.

Resource Assignments

Expand this section to choose your resource assignment options.

When adding or removing multiple resource assignments on activities options

When adding or removing multiple resource assignments, you can choose to

preserve or recalculate units, duration, and units/time. Choose from the following

options:

Preserve the Units, Duration, and Units/Time for existing assignments: Choose this

option for units, durations, and units/time to remain constant when additional

resources are assigned to any activity. Regardless of the duration type of an

activity, this equation is always true:

Remaining Units = Remaining Duration x Remaining Units/Time

Recalculate the Units, Duration, and Units/Time for existing assignments based on

the activity Duration Type: Choose this option to calculate a resource

assignment’s remaining values based on the activity’s duration type, specified in

an activity's General tab.

When assigning a resource to an existing activity assignment options

When selecting a resource to staff an existing role assignment or replacing a current

resource assignment with a different resource, you can choose to always use the

current units/time and overtime factor of the new resource or you can choose to be

prompted every time so you can select the units/time and overtime factor you want

to apply to the assignment. Choose from the following options:

Always use the new resource's Units/Time and Overtime factor option

Always use current assignment's Units/Time and Overtime factor option

Ask me to select each time I assign option

When a resource and role share an activity assignment options

When selecting a resource to staff an existing role assignment or specifying a role for

an existing resource assignment, you can choose to always apply either the resource

or role rate (Price/Unit) to the assignment or you can choose to be prompted every

time so you can select which rate you want to apply. Use the following options:

Note: The assignment Rate Source field indicates whether the

resource or role rate is applied to an assignment. The Rate Source,

along with the Rate Type, determines the price/unit value used to

calculate costs for the assignment.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1033

Always use resource's Price/Unit option

Always use role's Price/Unit option

Ask me to select each time I assign option

Display the role limit based on options

In P6 Professional and P6, you can define the maximum availability (limit) over time for

each role in the Roles dictionary. By default, role limits are calculated using the limit

defined for each role's primary resource; however, you can choose to display role

limits based on the custom role limits. In P6, role limits are displayed in charts,

histograms, and spreadsheets that display role allocation data, such as the Capacity

Planning chart and Role Usage histogram. Use the following options:

Custom role limit option

Calculated primary resources' limit option

Number of available items to search for Roles, Resources, and Resource Codes field

The number of search criteria items allowed when searching for resources to staff

activities. The maximum valid value is 10.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab, expand the Resources section.

Resources Tab of the Administration Page

Overview

Use this tab to add resources, including assigning the resource to a role and resource

team, assigning resource codes, and defining price and unit values.

Screen Elements

Resources toolbar

See Resources Tab Toolbar (on page 1330).

Active option

Determines whether the resource is currently active. A marked option indicates the

resource is active.

Non-active resources might have left the organization, but are not deleted from the

system since they might have actual hours.

Added By field

The name of the user that added this resource in the system.

1034

Added Date field

The date this resource record was created.

Auto Compute Actuals option

Determines whether the activity actual and remaining units, and start and finish dates

for the resource are calculated automatically using the planned dates, planned

units, and the activity's schedule percent complete.

If this option is selected, the actual/remaining units and actual dates are

automatically updated when project actuals are applied. This assumes that all work

by the resource proceeds according to plan.

This option is not available if the Uses Timesheets option is selected.

Calculate Costs from Units option

Determines whether by default any new assignments for this resource will have its

costs recalculated whenever any quantity changes occur. This setting can be

overwritten on a per project basis.

Calendar field

The name of the calendar selected for the resource.

Currency field

The name of the currency associated with this resource.

For example, US Dollars or Japanese Yen.

Default Units/Time field

The default units/time for resource assignments in projects, which is shown as either a

percentage or units/duration depending on your settings in My Preferences. If you

change the default setting, existing resource assignments are not affected. The

default setting only applies to new resource assignments.

E-mail field

The e-mail address for the resource.

Employee ID field

The resource identifier within the organization, typically the employee number or

social security number.

ID field

The unique identifier of the resource.

Integrated Resource field

Indicates whether the resource came from another Enterprise Resource Planning

(ERP) system that is integrated with this application. A blank field indicates that this is

not an integrated resource.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1035

Last Modified By field

The name of the user that last updated the resource record.

Last Modified Date field

The date this resource record was last updated.

Name field

The name of the resource.

Notes field

The notes about the resource.

Office Phone field

The office phone number for the resource.

Other Phone field

The alternate phone numbers for the resource.

Overtime Allowed option

Determines whether the resource is allowed to log overtime hours.

Overtime Factor field

The overtime factor used to compute the overtime price for the resource. The default

is 1.5.

Used in overtime calculations where the rate is multiplied by the overtime factor to

figure the total overtime price.

Parent Resource field

A resource categorized at a higher level than the current resource, in a resource

hierarchy.

The parent resource is generally the larger department or organization for which you

work.

For example, a salesperson might be assigned to an element of the resource

hierarchy called Region 1 Sales.

Primary Role field

The name of the primary job title or skill for the resource.

Resource Teams field

The list of resource teams to which the resource is assigned.

Resource Type field

The resource type. Valid values are:

Labor: Indicates that the selected resource performs labor, measured in units of time.

1036

Nonlabor: Indicates that the resource is a nonlabor resource, such as equipment,

measured in units of time.

Material: Indicates that the resource has a unit of measure other than time. You can

select a unit of measure for the material resource.

Timesheet Approval Manager field

The resource manager assigned to approve timesheets for the resource.

Timesheet User Login field

The user name for the timesheet user login.

Title field

The job title for the resource, such as Senior Engineer.

Unit of Measure field

The unit of measure this material resource uses.

Uses Timesheets option

Determines whether the labor resource uses P6 Progress Reporter timesheets to record

hours for assigned activities.

This option is not available if the Auto Compute Actuals option is selected.

User Defined field

Fields defined by your P6 administrator that are not standard in the application, but

are necessary to capture additional data for the project or the company.

Resource Code field

The fields specific to your company's use. These fields are created by the system

administrator.

Resource Tab detail windows:

General Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page (on page 791)

Roles Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page (on page 1056)

Resource Teams Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page (on

page 1016)

Codes Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page (on page 625)

Notes Detail Window on Resources Tab of the Administration Page (see "Notes Detail

Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page" on page 907)

Units and Prices Detail Window on Resources Tab of the Administration Page (see "Units

and Prices Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page" on page

1131)

Settings Detail Window on Resources Tab of the Administration Page (see "Settings

Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page" on page 1083)

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1037

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resources tab.

Resources Tab of the Level Resources Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this tab to specify which resources to level.

Screen Elements

Select resources to level options

Determines whether all resources or only the resources you select are leveled.

Available Resources option

The list of resources available to level.

Selected Resources option

The list of resources you selected from the available resources.

Available Resources and Selected Resources lists

See Configuring Columns or Values.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Leveler...

(Shift+F9).

4) In the Level Resources dialog box, click the Resources tab.

Response Plans Detail Window of the Risks Page

Overview

Use the Response Plans detail window to add response plans and response plan action

items to the risk.

Screen Elements

Response Plans toolbar

See Response Plans Toolbar (on page 1333).

1038

Active field

Indicates whether the response plan is currently active for the associated risk.

One response plan must always be active, and only one response plan can be active

at a given time for a risk.

Activity field

The activity assigned to a response action item.

Actual Cost field

The actual cost of the response plan or response action item. The actual cost of the

response plan is the sum of the actual cost of each response action item.

If an activity is assigned to the response action item, the field is set to display the

actual cost of the activity.

Added By field

The name of the user that created the response plan or response action item.

Added Date field

The date that the response plan or response action item was added.

Finish Date field

The latest finish date of all response action items displays in the response plan row.

The scheduled finish date for the project is the default finish date for a response

action item. If the scheduled finish date is not set for the project, the project must

finish by date is used. If that is not set, then the project start date is used.

If an activity is assigned to the response action item, this field is set to display the

finish date for the activity.

ID field

The unique identifier of the response plan or response action item.

Last Modified By field

The name of the user who last modified the response plan or response action item.

Last Modified Date field

The date the response plan or response action item was last updated.

Name field

The unique identifying name of the risk response plan or response action item.

Owner field

The name of the resource responsible for the response plan action item.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1039

Planned Cost field

The planned cost of the response action item.

If an activity is assigned to the response action item, the field is disabled and the total

cost of the activity displays.

Planned Finish Date field

The latest planned finish date of all the response action items displays in the response

plan row.

The scheduled finish date for the project is the default finish date for a response

action item. If the scheduled finish date is not set for the project, the project must

finish by date is used. If that is not set, then the project start date is used.

If an activity is assigned to the response action item, this field is set to display the

planned finish date for the activity.

Planned Start Date field

The earliest planned start date of all response plan action items displays in the

response plan row.

The project planned start date is the default planned start date for the response

action item.

If an activity is assigned to the response action item, the field is set to display the

planned start date of the activity.

Remaining Cost field

The remaining total cost required to complete the response action item in the

response plan.

If an activity is assigned to the response action item, the field is disabled and the

remaining cost of the activity displays.

If the status of the response action item is rejected, the cost will not roll up in the

remaining cost total.

Response Type field

The type of response actions implemented for threats or opportunities.

Valid values are:

Threats

Avoid: Change the project so the risk is avoided. This will usually reduce the

post-response plan probability to zero.

Transfer: Transfer the risk to another party.

Reduce: Reduce the probability and/or impact of the risk.

Accept: Accept the risk and take no action. Post-response impacts are set to the

same values as Pre-Response no matter what the response type.

Opportunities

Exploit: Actively seek out the opportunity.

1040

Facilitate: Help another party increase the likelihood of the opportunity occurring.

Enhance: Increase the probability and/or impact of the opportunity.

Reject: Reject the opportunity and take no actions.

Start Date field

The earliest start date of all response plan action items displays in the response plan

row.

The project start date is the default start date for the response action item.

If an activity is assigned to the response action item, the field is set to display the start

date of the activity.

Status field

The status of the response action item. The response action item usually goes through

a process from being proposed to sanctioned, and then if it is not rejected it is

planned into the project.

Proposed: The default status. Action has been proposed.

Sanctioned: The action has been proposed and sanctioned.

Rejected: The action has been proposed and then rejected. This action is not used

to drive the post-response position and its cost is not included in the Total Cost.

In-Progress: The response action item has started and there is some work still

remaining.

Complete: The response action item has been completed.

Post-mitigated Threshold fields:

Cost field

The cost impact of the risk after the response action item has been completed.

Probability field

The probability of the risk occurring after the response action item has been

completed.

Schedule field

The schedule impact of the risk after the response action item has been completed.

Score field

The risk score after the response action item has been completed.

Score (text) field

The text-based risk score values after the response action item has been completed.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1041

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Risks.

3) On the Risks page, click the Response Plans detail window.

Responsibility Detail Window of the OBS Page

Overview

Use this detail window to view the responsibilities assigned to each organizational

breakdown structure (OBS).

Screen Elements

Project ID/WBS Code field

The Project Identifier or WBS Code. This field is read-only.

Project Name/WBS Name field

The Project or WBS Name. This field is read-only.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click OBS.

3) On the OBS page, click the Responsibility detail window.

Return on Investment of Project Page

Overview

Use this page to view the project's net present value, ROI, and payback period or to edit

spending and benefit plans.

Screen Elements

Specify the timescale for entering ROI spending and benefit plans list

The time interval (month, quarter, or year) you want to use to track ROI for this project.

Note: The top of the page also displays the annual discount rate,

application period, and project start date.

Date field

The month, quarter, or year in which you want to track ROI for this project. The dates

listed correspond to the choice you made in the Specify the timescale for entering

ROI spending and benefit plans list. You will see one of the following series of dates for

viewing your spending and benefit plans depending on the timescale selected:

Twelve (12) months within a single year

1042

Eight (8) quarters spanning two (2) years

Ten (10) years

Spending Plan field

The anticipated or actual project spending for the corresponding time period.

Benefit Plan field

The anticipated or actual profit or benefit portion for each time period. Typically, the

benefit plan begins after the project has completed.

Total Present Value (Discounted) of Spending Plan field

The projected project spending for the corresponding time period. Numbers can be

positive or negative, and should be entered as non-discounted dollars.

Total Present Value (Discounted) of Benefit Plan field

The calculated total of spending and benefit plans for all periods, reduced to current

dollars by the discount rate.

Current dollars for individual spending plan and benefit plan periods are calculated

as:

Plan period $ divided by (1+discount rate)n

Where n equals the current discount application period value (for example, for yearly

over 8 years, values are calculated for n equals year 0, year 1, year 2, ... year 7). The

project start date is used as the beginning of period 0. If the project start date or

discount rate are changed, Total Spending Plan PV, Total Benefit Plan PV, NPV, ROI,

and Payback Period are recalculated.

Net Present Value field

The difference between present value of the total projected cash flow and present

value of the initial investment.

Calculated as Total Benefit Plan PV minus Total Spending Plan PV.

Return on Investment field

The efficiency of the investment.

Calculated as NPV divided by Total Spending Plan PV.

Payback Period field

The period of time required to recover the initial investment amount.

Edit Spending and Benefit Plans link

Revises the Spending Plan and Benefit Plan details. After revising information, click

Save or to exit without changing any information, click Cancel.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1043

Tip:

Depending on the timescale you chose in the Specify the timescale for entering ROI

spending and benefit plans list at the top, the bottom of the page will display links to the

previous and next year, two (2) years, or ten (10) years.

Getting Here

1) Click Portfolios.

2) On the Portfolio navigation bar, click ROI.

3) On the Portfolio ROI page, click the Details link for a project.

RFI Turnaround Portlet of the Workspace Page

Overview

Available only in environments integrating P6 with Contract Management, this portlet

displays the average turnaround time for requests that exist for the project in Contract

Management. The requests that appear depend on the customize options set for the

portlet. If you have a valid user name and password for Contract Management, you can

additionally access Contract Management from this portlet to view a list of requests for a

specific grouping.

Screen Elements

RFI Turnaround Time portlet

The RFI Turnaround Time portlet displays the average turnaround time for RFIs based

on the criteria that you set.

Place the cursor over a section of the chart to display the average turnaround time

for that topic. Click a section of the chart to open the RFI Turnaround Time log from

which you can directly access RFIs of the type selected with a valid user name and

password.

Tips

The number at the top of the portlet indicates the total number of project requests for

the criteria selected for the portlet.

If you have the required security privilege, you can customize the Project Workspace

to configure the way RFI information appears in the portlet. The customize options set

for the portlet apply for all projects in the organization.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the RFI Turnaround Time portlet.

1044

Risk Categories Page

Overview

Use this page to create, modify, or delete categories for risk classification.

Screen Elements

Risk Categories toolbar

See Categories Toolbar (see "Enterprise Data Categories Toolbar" on page 1258).

Category field

The name for a particular type of risk classification. Use risk categories to identify and

organize project risks consistently throughout your organization.

Technical, Operational, External are examples of risk categories that might apply to a

typical project.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and click Risk Categories.

Risk Scoring Matrices Page

Overview

Use this page to create, modify and delete risk scoring matrices which are used to

perform qualitative analysis on project risks. Project risk is assessed based on the values

you assign to the thresholds defined in the risk scoring matrix.

Screen Elements

Risk Scoring Matrices toolbar

See Enterprise Data Risk Scoring Matrices Toolbar (on page 1282).

Name field

The name of the risk scoring matrix.

Matrix Size field

The dimensions of the risk scoring matrix, which are defined by the number of levels

required for the probability threshold and the impact thresholds. The visual

representation of the risk scoring matrix is the probability and impact diagram (PID).

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1045

Probability Threshold field

The name of the probability threshold, which is defined on the Risk Thresholds page,

assigned to the risk scoring matrix. The probability threshold defines the likelihood of

the risk occurring.

Impact Thresholds field

The names of the impact thresholds, which are defined on the Risk Thresholds page,

assigned to the risk scoring matrix. Each risk scoring matrix must have a cost impact,

which is the monetary impact if the risk occurs, and a schedule impact, which is the

amount of time the risk will increase or decrease the project schedule. User-defined

impacts are optional.

Tolerance Threshold field

The name of the tolerance threshold, which is defined on the Risk Thresholds page,

assigned to the risk scoring matrix. The tolerance threshold is the acceptability or

manageability of a risk on a project.

Risk Scoring Method field

The type of calculation used to obtain an overall impact value, which is then used

along with the probability to determine the score used to evaluate project risk. The

overall impact value is calculated using one of the following three methods:

Highest Impact: The overall impact for a risk is set to the highest of all the impacts

assigned to the risk.

Average Impact: The overall impact is determined by calculating the average of all

impact values.

Average Individual Impact: The overall impact is determined by combining the value

of each impact individually with the probability obtaining a score from the Probability

and Impact Diagram. The total of all impact scores is then divided by the number of

impacts.

For more information, see Risk Scoring Method Description (on page 1334).

Description field

The description of the scoring matrix.

Risk Scoring Matrices Page detail windows:

Description Detail Window of the Risk Scoring Matrices Page (on page 712).

Projects Detail Window of the Risk Scoring Matrices Page (on page 979).

Probability and Impact Diagram Detail Window of the Risk Scoring Matrices Page (on

page 948).

Probability Detail Window of the Risk Scoring Matrices Page (on page 949).

Impacts Detail Window of the Risk Scoring Matrices Page (on page 834).

Tolerance Detail Window of the Risk Scoring Matrices Page (on page 1127).

1046

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and click Risk Scoring Matrices.

Risk Thresholds Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure risk thresholds.

Screen Elements

Risks toolbar

See Risk Thresholds Toolbar (on page 1336).

Name field

The name of the risk threshold.

Type field

The type of risk threshold you are defining.

Valid values are:

Probability: The likelihood of a risk occurring.

Tolerance: The acceptability or manageability of a risk on a project.

Schedule Impact:: The amount of time the risk will increase or decrease the project

schedule.

Cost Impact:: The cost impact if a risk occurs.

User-defined Impact: An impact you create for your particular project or company.

These impact values will be calculated in the risk score.

Levels field

The number of levels assigned to a threshold.

Valid values are between 2 and 9.

Risk Thresholds Page detail window:

Levels Detail Window of the Risk Thresholds Page (on page 871).

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and click Risk Thresholds.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1047

Risk UDFs Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure user defined fields for risks.

Screen Elements

User Defined Fields toolbar

See User Defined Fields Toolbar (on page 1361).

User Defined Field field

The name of the user-defined field.

Data Type field

The name of the type of data that corresponds to each user-defined field. The data

type you select determines the type of data you can specify in a field. The following

data types are available:

Text: Allows you to use text or a combination of text and numbers.

Start Date: Allows you to enter Start Date information only.

Finish Date: Allows you to enter Finish Date information only.

Cost: Allows you to enter currency values.

Number: Allows you to use numerals with two decimal places.

Integer: Allows you to use numeric data, but not a number related to money.

Indicator: Allows you to use an indicator field that you can use to enter

color-coded icon values in columns and display color-coded text in reports.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and choose Risk UDFs.

Risks Detail Window

Overview

Use this detail window to list, modify, and manage your project risks.

Screen Elements

Risks toolbar

See Risks Toolbar of the Activities and EPS Pages (on page 1339).

1048

Category field

The name for a particular type of risk classification. Use risk categories to identify and

organize project risks consistently throughout your organization.

Technical, Operational, External are examples of risk categories that might apply to a

typical project.

ID field

The unique identifier for the risk.

Name field

The name of the risk.

Owner field

The resource that has ownership of the risk.

Project ID field

The unique identifier of the project associated with the risk.

Project Name field

The name of the associated project.

Status field

The current state of the risk. Valid values are:

Proposed: The risk is identified and awaits approval.

Open: The risk is approved as a valid risk to the project.

Active: The risk is currently impacting the project.

Rejected (Closed): The risk is not seen as a valid risk to the project and therefore

will not be tracked and managed by the project. The data for this risk cannot be

modified once it is closed.

Managed (Closed): The risk occurred and was successfully managed by the

project team and is no longer an active risk. The data for this risk cannot be

modified once it is closed.

Impacted (Closed): The risk occurred, impacted the project and is no longer an

active risk. The data for this risk cannot be modified once it is closed.

Type field

The classification of the risk as a threat or an opportunity.

A threat will have a negative impact on your project, while an opportunity can have

a perceived benefit to the project.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1049

3) On the EPS page, click the Risks detail window.

Risks Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use the Risks detail window to list, modify, and manage your project risks.

Screen Elements

Risks toolbar

See Risks Toolbar of the Activities and EPS Pages (on page 1339).

Category field

The name for a particular type of risk classification. Use risk categories to identify and

organize project risks consistently throughout your organization.

Technical, Operational, External are examples of risk categories that might apply to a

typical project.

ID field

The unique identifier for the risk.

Name field

The name of the risk.

Owner field

The resource that has ownership of the risk.

Project ID field

The unique identifier of the project associated with the risk.

Project Name field

The name of the associated project.

Status field

The current state of the risk. Valid values are:

Proposed: The risk is identified and awaits approval.

Open: The risk is approved as a valid risk to the project.

Active: The risk is currently impacting the project.

Rejected (Closed): The risk is not seen as a valid risk to the project and therefore

will not be tracked and managed by the project. The data for this risk cannot be

modified once it is closed.

1050

Managed (Closed): The risk occurred and was successfully managed by the

project team and is no longer an active risk. The data for this risk cannot be

modified once it is closed.

Impacted (Closed): The risk occurred, impacted the project and is no longer an

active risk. The data for this risk cannot be modified once it is closed.

Type field

The classification of the risk as a threat or an opportunity.

A threat will have a negative impact on your project, while an opportunity can have

a perceived benefit to the project.

User Defined field

Fields defined by your P6 administrator that are not standard in the application, but

are necessary to capture additional data for the project or the company.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Click on an activity.

b. Click the Risks detail window.

Risks Page

Overview

Use this page to add, modify, or delete project risks.

Note: If the Probability, Schedule, and Cost fields are disabled, a

risk scoring matrix is not assigned to the current project. You can still

enter risk data on this page; however, a risk scoring matrix must be

assigned to a project to perform qualitative risk analysis.

Screen Elements

Risks toolbar

See Risks Toolbar (on page 1338).

Added By field

The name of the user that created the risk.

Added Date field

The date this risk was created.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1051

Category field

The name for a particular type of risk classification. Use risk categories to identify and

organize project risks consistently throughout your organization.

Technical, Operational, External are examples of risk categories that might apply to a

typical project.

Cause field

The description of the cause of the risk.

Description field

The description of the risk.

Effect field

The resulting effect of the presence of the risk.

ID field

The unique identifier for the risk.

Last Modified By field

The name of the user that last updated the risk.

Last Modified Date field

The date this risk was last updated.

Name field

The name of the risk.

Notes field

The notes or comments entered for the associated with the risk.

Owner field

The resource that has ownership of the risk.

Project ID field

The unique identifier of the project associated with the risk.

Project Name field

The name of the associated project.

Response Total Cost field

The total cost of the active response plan.

If a response plan is active, the Response Total Cost field is disabled and displays the

sum of the Remaining Cost plus Actual Cost fields for all response action items in the

response plan. Rejected response action items are not included in the calculation.

1052

Risk Scoring Matrix field

The name of the risk scoring matrix assigned to the project.

Status field

The current state of the risk. Valid values are:

Proposed: The risk is identified and awaits approval.

Open: The risk is approved as a valid risk to the project.

Active: The risk is currently impacting the project.

Rejected (Closed): The risk is not seen as a valid risk to the project and therefore

will not be tracked and managed by the project. The data for this risk cannot be

modified once it is closed.

Managed (Closed): The risk occurred and was successfully managed by the

project team and is no longer an active risk. The data for this risk cannot be

modified once it is closed.

Impacted (Closed): The risk occurred, impacted the project and is no longer an

active risk. The data for this risk cannot be modified once it is closed.

Type field

The classification of the risk as a threat or an opportunity.

A threat will have a negative impact on your project, while an opportunity can have

a perceived benefit to the project.

User Defined field

Fields defined by your P6 administrator that are not standard in the application, but

are necessary to capture additional data for the project or the company.

Pre-response Thresholds:

Cost field

The monetary impact on the project if the risk occurs.

Probability field

The probability of the risk occurring.

Schedule field

The impact on the schedule if the risk occurs.

Score field

The risk calculation based on the values defined for probability, cost impact,

schedule impact, and any additional user-defined impacts for the risk.

Score (Text) field

The text-based risk score based on the values defined for probability, cost impact,

schedule impact, and any additional user-defined impacts for the risk.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1053

Risks Page detail windows:

Response Plans Detail Window of the Risks Page (on page 1037)

Activities Detail Window of the Risks Page (on page 544)

Description Detail Window of the Risks Page (on page 712)

Cause Detail Window of the Risks Page (on page 613)

Effect Detail Window of the Risks Page (on page 744)

Notes Detail Window of the Risks Page (on page 907)

Probability and Impact Diagram Detail Window of the Risks Page (on page 948)

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Risks.

Role Teams Detail Window of the Roles Tab of the Administration Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign roles to role teams.

Screen Elements

Add (Insert)

Assigns one or more role teams to the selected role.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Role selector (Ctrl+Up Arrow) or (Ctrl+Down Arrow)

Cycles through the available roles and determines which data display in the detail

window. Click (Ctrl+Up Arrow) to move to the previous role, or click (Ctrl+Down

Arrow) to move to the next role. The content in the detail window is refreshed with the

data for the selected role.

Name field

The name of the role team.

Available To field

Indicates the user access for the team.

Global: all users with module access can view this team.

User: only you have access to this team.

1054

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Roles tab.

4) On the Roles tab, click the Role Teams detail window.

Role Teams Tab of the Administration Page

Overview

Use this tab to create roles teams, assign roles to teams, and modify or delete existing role

teams.

Screen Elements

Role Teams Toolbar

See Teams Tabs Toolbar (on page 1351).

Name field

The name of the role team.

Roles field

The list of roles assigned to the selected role team.

Roles detail window

See Roles Detail Window of the Role Teams Tab of the Administration Page (on page

1057).

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Role Teams tab.

Role Usage Tab of the Analysis Page

Overview

Use this tab to view role or staffing information as a histogram (staffed, unstaffed, and

overallocated values over time) or as a spreadsheet (staffed and unstaffed values by

project). You can view totals for an entire role grouping (a parent role or role team) or for

individual roles. Use the navigation hierarchy on the left side of the page to select and

organize the roles you want to view. You can organize the view by role hierarchy or role

team.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1055

The usage data displayed on the Role Usage tab is based on summary data, so it reflects

values as of the last date the summarizer was run for a project. Assignment changes

within a project after that date will not be reflected until the project is again summarized.

See Summarizing Projects.

Screen Elements

Group By

Displays options for re-arranging a list of values by grouping them into a hierarchy and

sorting.

Group By list

Select from one of the following by which to group the available roles:

Role Hierarchy

Role Team

Search

Displays options for finding a specific matching entry or entries based on search

criteria.

Customize link

Displays a dialog box with configurable options to customize the Spreadsheet or

Histogram. See Customize Spreadsheet or Histogram Dialog Box of the Analysis Page

(on page 697).

Export Spreadsheet link

Exports the current spreadsheet to a Microsoft Excel .xls file.

Display options

Determines whether to view information about the selected role/resource and

associated projects in Spreadsheet or Histogram format.

Zoom In

Increases the current magnification of items in the work area so they appear larger.

Zoom Out

Decreases the current magnification of items in the work area so they appear smaller.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) On the Analysis page, click the Role Usage tab.

1056

Roles Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page

Overview

Use this detail window to view and assign roles to the selected resource.

Details

Add (Insert)

Assigns a role.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Resource selector (Ctrl+Up Arrow) or (Ctrl+Down Arrow)

Cycles through the available resources and determines which data display in the

detail window. Click (Ctrl+Up Arrow) to move to the previous resource, or click

(Ctrl+Down Arrow) to move to the next resource. The content in the detail window is

refreshed with the data for the selected resource.

Role ID field

The unique identifier of the associated role.

Role Name field

The name of the role assigned to the resource.

Proficiency field

The resource's proficiency at performing this role.

The values are 1 - Master, 2 - Expert, 3 - Skilled, 4 - Proficient, and 5 - Inexperienced. If

you do not have the proper privilege, you cannot access this field.

Primary Role option

Determines whether this is the resource's main role; a role that does not have this

option selected indicates that this is a secondary role for the resource. You can only

assign one primary role per resource; a resource is not required to have a primary role.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resources tab.

4) On the Resources tab, click the Roles detail window.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1057

Roles Detail Window of the Role Teams Tab of the Administration Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign or remove roles from role teams.

Screen Elements

Add (Insert)

Assigns a role.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Role Name field

The name of the role assigned to the role team.

Role ID field

The unique identifier of the associated role.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Role Teams tab.

4) On the Role Teams tab, click the Roles detail window.

Roles Tab of the Administration Page

Overview

Use this tab to add, modify, and delete roles.

Screen Elements

Roles Tab toolbar

See Roles Tab Toolbar (on page 1340).

Calculate Cost from Units option

Determines whether by default any new assignments for this role will have its costs

recalculated whenever any quantity changes occur. This setting can be overwritten

on a per project basis.

1058

Price/Unit fields

The non-overtime price for the role, which is used to compute costs for any activities

the role is assigned to. You can define up to five rate types, or price/unit values, per

role. Price/unit is a default name and can be modified by your P6 administrator.

Examples of Price/Unit names include Internal Rate, External Rate and Standard Rate.

Description field

The responsibilities for the role.

ID field

The unique identifier for the role.

Name field

The name of the role.

Resources field

The list of resources assigned to the role.

Role Teams field

The list of role teams assigned to the role.

Roles Tab detail windows:

Description Detail Window on Roles Tab of the Administration Page (see "Description

Detail Window of the Roles Tab of the Administration Page" on page 713)

Resources Detail Window of the Roles Tab of the Administration Page (on page 1023)

Prices Detail Window of the Roles Tab of the Administration Page (on page 946)

Limits Detail Window of the Roles Tab of the Administration Page (on page 872)

Role Teams Detail Window on Roles Tab of the Administration Page (see "Role Teams

Detail Window of the Roles Tab of the Administration Page" on page 1053)

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Roles tab.

Safety Portlet

Overview

Use this portlet to view the number of open and closed safety notices, and their

dispositions (e.g. resolved or duplicate) that exist for the project in Contract

Management (formerly known as Expedition). Red indicates open documents, and blue

indicates closed documents.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1059

Screen Elements

Safety portlet

The Safety portlet displays documented safety violation notices, recorded injuries on

job sites, and recorded federal regulations, such as Occupational Safety and Health

Administration (OSHA).

Move the mouse over a section of the chart to display the number of safety notices

for a specific disposition. Click a section to view a list of all safety notices for a specific

disposition. This information will be displayed in Contract Management, which

displays in a new browser. This information can only be accessed here if you have a

valid user name and password.

Tips

The number at the top of the portlet indicates the total number of project safety

notices.

If you have the required privilege, you can customize the Project Workspace to

configure the way safety information appears in the portlet. The customize options set

for the portlet apply for all projects in the organization. Depending on these options,

the disposition types that appear in the chart can include:

FOLW = Follow-up needed

RSLV = Resolved

DUPE = Duplicate

UNFD = Unfounded

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Safety portlet.

Schedule Check Report Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to view potential issues in a schedule. For example, the report might

identify missing logic or a large number of constraints in the schedule.

Screen Elements

Click one of the links below for detailed screen definitions:

Projects Checked Section of the Schedule Check Report Dialog Box (on page 978)

Projects Checked Have Links to the Following Closed Projects Section of the

Schedule Check Report Dialog Box (on page 977)

Check Summary Section of the Schedule Check Report Dialog Box (on page 619)

1060

Logic - Activities Missing Predecessors or Successors Section of the Schedule

Check Report Dialog Box (on page 874)

Negative Lags - Relationships with a Lag Duration of Less Than 0 Section of the

Schedule Check Report Dialog Box (on page 898)

Lags - Relationships with a Positive Lag Duration Section of the Schedule Check

Report Dialog Box (on page 860)

Long Lags - Relationships with a Lag Duration Greater Than 352 Hours Section of the

Schedule Check Report Dialog Box (on page 875)

Relationship Types - The Majority of Relationships Should be Finish to Start Section

of the Schedule Check Report Dialog Box (on page 986)

Hard Constraints - Constraints That Prevent Activities Being Moved Section of the

Schedule Check Report Dialog Box (on page 829)

Soft Constraints - Constraints That Do Not Prevent Activities Being Moved Section of

the Schedule Check Report Dialog Box (on page 1084)

Large Float - Activities with a Total Float Greater Than 352 Hours Section of the

Schedule Check Report Dialog Box (on page 862)

Negative Float - Activities with a Total Float Less Than 0 Section of the Schedule

Check Report Dialog Box (on page 897)

Large Durations - Activities That Have a Remaining Duration Greater Than 352

Hours Section of the Schedule Check Report Dialog Box (on page 861)

Invalid Progress Dates - Incomplete Activities Before the Data Date Section of the

Schedule Check Report Dialog Box (on page 844)

Invalid Progress Dates - Activities with Actual Dates After the Data Date Section of

the Schedule Check Report Dialog Box (on page 842)

Resource/Cost - Activities That Do Not Have an Expense or a Resource Assigned

Section of the Schedule Check Report Dialog Box (on page 1019)

Late Activities - Activities Scheduled to Finish Later Than the Project Baseline

Section of the Schedule Check Report Dialog Box (on page 863)

BEI - Activities with No Project Baseline Finish Date Section of the Schedule Check

Report Dialog Box (on page 602)

Links to Closed Projects - Activities with Links to Closed Projects Section of the

Schedule Check Report Dialog Box (on page 872)

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and click Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box, configure the options and click Check Schedule.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1061

Schedule Detail Window of the Reports Page

Overview

Use this detail window to manage one or more scheduled reports. The same report can

be configured with multiple scheduled variations. For example, a listing can be

generated as a PDF and delivered through e-mail daily to one person, but delivered just

once per week to another.

Screen Elements

Schedule detail window toolbar

See Schedule Detail Window Toolbar (on page 1342).

Schedule Name field

The name for the report schedule. A single report will have multiple schedule names.

For example, an original source report named Quality Report can be scheduled and

given the following schedule names: Weekly Quality Report, Monthly Team Quality

Report, and Region 3 Quality Report.

Delivery Type field

The way users will access or take delivery of this report. On-demand reports can be

delivered by electronic mail as attachments or downloaded as files. You can only

deliver scheduled reports by electronic mail.

Enabled option

Determines whether the selected report schedule is actively generating output as

defined by its scheduling settings. When this option is selected, the schedule is active.

When this option is cleared, the schedule remains in the list with all its settings but no

future report output is actually generated.

Finish Date field

The date and time for the last report output in the schedule. For example, if a report is

scheduled to run weekly for 3 weeks this field would show the date and time of the

third and final report output.

Report Location field

The path to the predefined source report in the folders shared by P6 and BI Publisher.

Report Name field

The title for the report defined in BI Publisher.

Report Recipients field

The distribution list showing each e-mail user set to receive the report.

1062

Run Type field

The scheduled report job's recurrence pattern.

For example, run once, daily, weekly, or monthly.

Schedule ID field

A unique system-generated identifier assigned by BI Publisher to each report

schedule.

Start Date field

The date and time for the first report output in the schedule.

For example, if a report is scheduled to run weekly for 3 weeks this field would show

the date and time of the first report output.

Status field

The state of the scheduled report.

Results are:

Completed: All scheduled runs are complete.

Failed: An error occurred during the scheduled run and a report did not generate.

Pending: The entire scheduled report run is not complete. For example, if a report is

scheduled to run every Monday for 10 weeks and only 2 weeks have passed, the

status for the scheduled report run remains Pending until all 10 instances of the report

have run.

Suspended: The Enabled field is cleared and the scheduled report run will not

continue until the Enabled field is selected.

User field

The identifier for the user who created the scheduled job.

Getting Here

1) Click Reports.

2) On the Reports page:

a. Click View and select Reports.

b. Select a report and click the Schedule detail window.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1063

Schedule Performance Portlet of the Dashboards Page

Overview

Use this portlet to view both current and forecast schedule summary performance

information, in either costs or labor units. Positive performance schedule values indicate

that the project is ahead of schedule; negative values indicate that the project is behind

schedule. Positive performance cost values indicate that the project is under budget;

negative values indicate that the project is over budget. Status indicators help you

gauge whether a variance is within an acceptable range or whether you will need to

take corrective action, based on thresholds you define.

The following calculated data is displayed in the Schedule Performance portlet. Data is

calculated and displayed in either costs or labor units, depending on your preference

selection (see Tips).

Screen Elements

Schedule field

Calculated as: Earned Value Labor Units minus Planned Value Labor Units

The variance percentage is calculated as: (Earned Value Labor Units minus Planned

Value Labor Units) divided by Planned Value Labor Units.

To Date - Labor Units field

The value used to determine if the project is over or under labor units.

Calculated as Earned Value Labor Units minus Actual Labor Units.

Forecast at Completion - Schedule field

The estimated labor unit or cost variance at completion.

For costs: Calculated as Budget at Completion multiplied by Schedule Variance

Index (SVI), where SVI equals SV divided by Planned Value Cost.

For labor units: Calculated as Baseline (BL) Labor Units multiplied by SVI Labor Units,

where SVI equals SV divided by Planned Value Labor Units.

Forecast at Completion - Labor Units

The estimated labor unit at completion.

Calculated as BAC Labor Units minus EAC Labor Units.

Tips

The Schedule Performance portlet calculates and displays data in cost or labor units

based on the option selected in Global Preferences.

If a dashboard's Filter by option is set to a portfolio or project code, the portlet lists

each project included in the portfolio or project code filter and displays each

project's schedule performance data.

1064

You can click a project name in the portlet to display the Performance Status page or

the associated Project Workspace; the page displayed depends on your module

access.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Schedule Performance portlet.

Schedule Performance Portlet of the Workspace Page

Overview

Use this portlet to view both current and forecast schedule performance information

derived from cost or labor unit summary calculations. The values are expressed in your

preferred units of time and provide both text and visual indicators to help you

understand the data at a glance.

Screen Elements

Legend

Key to performance threshold indicators. Use these visual indicators to quickly scan

values based on thresholds you define:

Critical: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio requires significant corrective

action.

Warning: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio needs attention and is

performing below expectations.

Acceptable: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio is performing within an

expected range.

Exceptional: Indicates that a WBS, project, or portfolio is exceeding

expectations.

To Date columns:

Schedule field

The variance between the baseline schedule and actual schedule to date. This value

is expressed in units of time accompanied by a convenient visual indicator mapped

to performance thresholds you can define. The value can be derived based on costs

or labor units; and will often yield different results.

This variance helps address the basic question, "How did we do so far?" It provides

concise answers such as 4 days early, No Progress, on schedule, or 12 days late.

Calculated as: (Baseline Duration multiplied by Performance % Complete) minus

(Baseline Duration multiplied by Schedule % Complete)

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1065

Where: Performance % Complete equals Earned Value divided by BAC and

Schedule % Complete equals Planned Value divided by BAC

Labor Units field

Calculated as: Earned Value Labor Units minus Actual Labor Units

The variance percentage is calculated as: (Earned Value Labor Units minus Actual

Labor Units) divided by Earned Value Labor Units.

Forecast at Completion columns:

Schedule field

Calculated as: Remaining Finish Date minus Baseline Finish Date

Labor Units field

Calculated as: BAC Labor Units minus EAC Labor Units

The variance percentage is calculated as: (BAC Labor Units minus EAC Labor Units)

divided by BAC Labor Units.

Tips

The Schedule Performance portlet calculates and displays data in cost or labor units

based on the option selected in the Project Performance section of the Customize

Workspace page.

This portlet displays data for the selected project only. When multiple projects are

open, you must select the project you want to work with in the Select Project list at the

top right of the Workspace page. When a single project is open, the Select Project list

does not appear.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Schedule Performance portlet.

Schedule Project Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to manage the project schedule according to your requirements.

Screen Elements

Data Date options

The options to display the data date at the starting point to calculate the schedule:

All projects use their own data date option: Specifies that all projects are to use

their own data date.

1066

Apply selected data date to all open projects option: Specifies a single date for all

projects to use as the data date. Enter a date and time into the Data Date field

which becomes available upon selecting this option.

Data Date field

The date used as the starting point to calculate the schedule. Each project has its

own data date.

Display scheduling log upon completion option

Determines whether to display the scheduling log when all options are completed

and you click the Schedule button.

Options button

Opens a dialog box with configurable options for scheduling a report. This dialog box

is identical to the Scheduling Options dialog box on the Tools page. See Scheduling

Options Dialog Box (on page 1070) for further details.

Schedule button

Saves changes and schedules the project accordingly.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Scheduler...

(F9).

Schedule Tab of the Report Settings Dialog Box

Overview

Set the options on this tab to determine when your scheduled report output will be

generated.

Screen Elements

Run list

The level of recurrence or frequency with which the selected report is scheduled to

generate output. The value you choose answers the question How often should report

output be generated and delivered? Valid values are described below.

Once: You want the report to generate output on a specific date at a specific

time.

Daily: You want the report to generate output once a day on specified days of

the week at a specific time.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1067

Weekly: You want the report to generate output once a week on a specific day of

the week at a specific time.

Monthly: You want the report to generate output once a month during specified

months of the year on a specific day within the month at a specific time.

Note: The screen elements available in the Schedule Options

section will automatically change to reflect your choice in the Run

field.

Getting Here

1) Click Reports.

2) On the Reports page:

a. Click View and select Reports.

b. Select a report, and then click the Schedule detail window.

3) In the Schedule detail window, click Add (Insert).

4) In the Report Settings dialog box, click the Schedule tab.

Scheduled Services Page

Overview

Use this page to schedule, verify status, modify, and delete routine recurring project

management jobs, called services. The services run in the order in which they appear.

The services you can schedule to run automatically include:

Apply Actuals

Summarize

Level Project Resources

Schedule Project

Screen Elements

Scheduled Services toolbar

See Scheduled Services Toolbar (on page 1343).

Enabled option

Determines whether a service is enabled.

Name field

The title of the scheduled service.

Service field

The type of service. (This is a read-only field.)

1068

Status field

The status of the service. (This is a read-only field.)

Delegated: When the summarize service is running and waiting for child records to

complete summarizing.

Pending: Status defaults to pending after initial creation or if the service is waiting

in queue to be run.

Running: When the service is running on the service machine.

Failed: When the service cannot complete, an error occurs, or data could not be

committed.

Completed: When the service completes successfully.

Owner field

The creator of the service.

Last Run field

The last time the service was run.

Next Run field

The next time the service is scheduled to run.

Service Summary detail window

See Service Summary Detail Window (on page 1081).

Getting Here

Click the Projects menu and select Scheduled Services.

Schedules View of the Reports Page

Overview

Use this page to view details for all scheduled reports, run a scheduled report

on-demand, delete scheduled reports, replicate a scheduled report, and view the

history for a scheduled run.

Screen Elements

See Reports Schedules View Toolbar (on page 1327).

Schedule Name field

The name for the report schedule. A single report will have multiple schedule names.

For example, an original source report named Quality Report can be scheduled and

given the following schedule names: Weekly Quality Report, Monthly Team Quality

Report, and Region 3 Quality Report.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1069

Delivery Type field

The way users will access or take delivery of this report. On-demand reports can be

delivered by electronic mail as attachments or downloaded as files. You can only

deliver scheduled reports by electronic mail.

Enabled option

Determines whether the selected report schedule is actively generating output as

defined by its scheduling settings. When this option is selected, the schedule is active.

When this option is cleared, the schedule remains in the list with all its settings but no

future report output is actually generated.

Finish Date field

The date and time for the last report output in the schedule. For example, if a report is

scheduled to run weekly for 3 weeks this field would show the date and time of the

third and final report output.

Report Location field

The path to the predefined source report in the folders shared by P6 and BI Publisher.

Report Name field

The title for the report defined in BI Publisher.

Report Recipients field

The distribution list showing each e-mail user set to receive the report.

Run Type field

The scheduled report job's recurrence pattern.

For example, run once, daily, weekly, or monthly.

Schedule ID field

A unique system-generated identifier assigned by BI Publisher to each report

schedule.

Start Date field

The date and time for the first report output in the schedule.

For example, if a report is scheduled to run weekly for 3 weeks this field would show

the date and time of the first report output.

Status field

The state of the scheduled report.

Results are:

Completed: All scheduled runs are complete.

Failed: An error occurred during the scheduled run and a report did not generate.

1070

Pending: The entire scheduled report run is not complete. For example, if a report is

scheduled to run every Monday for 10 weeks and only 2 weeks have passed, the

status for the scheduled report run remains Pending until all 10 instances of the report

have run.

Suspended: The Enabled field is cleared and the scheduled report run will not

continue until the Enabled field is selected.

User field

The identifier for the user who created the scheduled job.

Reports Schedules View detail window:

Description Detail Window of the Reports Page (on page 711)

Getting Here

1) Click Reports.

2) On the Reports page, click View and select Schedules.

Scheduling Options Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to set options in order to manage the project schedule according to

your requirements.

Screen Elements

General tab

See General Tab of the Scheduling Options Dialog Box (on page 809).

Advanced tab

See Advanced Tab of the Scheduling Options Dialog Box (on page 577).

Tips

When you access scheduling options from the Activities page, the options you select

apply to all open projects. All options are saved with the projects, except for the option

to level resources.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Scheduler....

4) In the Schedule Project dialog box, click Options.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1071

Scheduling Report Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to view errors, warnings, and exceptions as well as basic information

about the job, such as option settings and statistics.

Screen Elements

Scheduling Settings section

See Scheduling Settings Section of the Scheduling Report Dialog Box of the Activities

Page (on page 1075).

Statistics section

See Statistics Section of the Scheduling Report Dialog Box of the Activities Page (on

page 1093).

Errors section

Activities that have invalid relationship loops field: Displays a value for the specified

field in a read-only format.

Warnings section

See Warnings Section of the Scheduling Report Dialog Box of the Activities Page (on

page 1155).

Scheduling Results section

See Scheduling Results Section of the Scheduling Report Dialog Box of the Activities

Page (on page 1072).

Exceptions section

See Exceptions Section of the Scheduling Report Dialog Box of the Activities Page (on

page 759).

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Scheduler...

(F9).

4) In the Schedule Project dialog box:

a. Configure the options and select the Display scheduling log upon completion

option.

b. Click Schedule.

1072

Scheduling Results Section of the Leveling Report Log

Overview

Use this section to view the results of scheduling for the selected project. All fields are

read-only.

Screen Elements

Number of Activities Scheduled field

The number of scheduled activities for the project.

Number of Relationships with other projects field

The number of relationships between the selected project and other projects.

Earliest Data Date field

The date used as the earliest starting point to calculate the schedule.

Earliest Early Start Date field

The earliest possible date the activity can start. When scheduling on the forward pass,

if the activity has any driving resource assignments, P6 will calculate the early start

date as the earliest Early Start date of all driving resource assignments.

Latest Early Finish Date field

The latest possible date the activity can finish.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Leveler...

(Shift+F9).

4) In the Level Resources dialog box, click the Options tab.

5) On the Options tab, select the Display leveling log upon completion and click Level.

6) In the Leveling Report Log, expand the Scheduling Results section.

Scheduling Results Section of the Scheduling Report Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this section to view the results of scheduling for the selected project. All fields are

read-only.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1073

Screen Elements

Number of Activities Scheduled field

The number of scheduled activities for the project.

Number of Relationships with other projects field

The number of relationships between the selected project and other projects.

Earliest Data Date field

The date used as the earliest starting point to calculate the schedule.

Earliest Early Start Date field

The earliest possible date the activity can start. When scheduling on the forward pass,

if the activity has any driving resource assignments, P6 will calculate the early start

date as the earliest Early Start date of all driving resource assignments.

Latest Early Finish Date field

The latest possible date the activity can finish.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Scheduler...

(F9).

4) In the Schedule Project dialog box:

a. Configure the options and select the Display scheduling log upon completion

option.

b. Click Schedule.

5) In the Scheduling Reports dialog box, expand the Scheduling Results section.

Scheduling Settings Section of the Leveling Report Log

Overview

Use this section to view the configuration of various scheduling settings. All fields are

read-only.

Screen Elements

Ignore relationships to and from other projects option

Determines whether to ignore activity relationships between projects.

Make open-ended activities critical option

Determines whether to label open-ended activities as critical during the scheduling.

1074

Use expected finish dates option

Determines whether to schedule activity finish dates as the expected finish dates.

When scheduling progressed activities use option

Determines the type of logic used to schedule dependent activities with

out-of-sequence progress. For example, a Finish to Start relationship in which the

predecessor has not finished but the successor has started.

Retained Logic: The remaining duration of a progressed activity is not scheduled

until all of its predecessors are finished.

Progress Override: The schedule ignores network logic and allows the activity to

progress without delay.

Actual Dates: Backward and forward passes are calculated using actual dates.

Calculate Start-to-Start lag from option

Determines when you want the successor to start. When a start to start relationship

exists and the predecessor starts out of sequence, the scheduler delays the successor

activity until the lag expires and all predecessor relationships have been satisfied. Use

this option to specify whether to subtract the lag from the predecessor's internal early

start date or its actual start date.

Early Start: Calculates the expired lag as the number of work periods between the

actual start and the data date and determines the successor's start date as the

predecessor's internal early start plus any remaining lag. Select this option when

the successor's start depends on the amount of work that the predecessor activity

accomplishes.

Actual Start: Determines the successor's start date as the data date plus any

remaining lag. Select this option when you want the successor's start to depend

on the time elapsed from the predecessor's actual start (regardless of the amount

of work that has been accomplished in the predecessor activity).

Define critical activities as Total Float less than or equal to field

Determines which activities are critical based on the number and time unit which

specify the minimum float time for activities before they are marked critical.

Compute Total Float As option

Determines the method to calculate total float for all activities based on the following

methods:

Start Float: The difference between the early and late start dates (Start Float

equals Late Start minus Early Start).

Finish Float: The difference between the early and late finish dates (Finish Float

equals Late Finish minus Early Finish).

Smallest value: Select to use the most critical value, which is the smaller of the start

float and finish float values.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1075

Calendar for scheduling Relationship Lag is list

The calendar used to calculate relationship lag. The default calendar for new

activities is specified on the Administration > Calendars page or in P6 Professional.

Predecessor Activity Calendar: Calculates lag based on the predecessor activity's

calendar

Successor Activity Calendar: Calculates lag based on the successor activity's

calendar

24 hour Calendar: Specifies work time 7 days/week and 24 hours/day

Project Default Calendar: Uses the calendar that is designated as the default for

new activities

Calculate multiple float paths option

Determines whether multiple critical float paths (sequences of activities) are

calculated in the project schedule. You can specify the number of critical float paths

to identify in the Specify the number of paths to calculate field. If you do not select

this option, you cannot edit the remaining fields.

Recalculate Assignment Costs option

Determines whether the costs of resource or role assignments that use multiple rates

are recalculated.

Using this option ensures that costs remain accurate when rescheduled dates reflect

a rate change.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Leveler...

(Shift+F9).

4) In the Level Resources dialog box, click the Options tab.

5) On the Options tab, select the Display leveling log upon completion and click Level.

6) In the Leveling Report Log, expand the Scheduling Settings section.

Scheduling Settings Section of the Scheduling Report Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this section to view the configuration of various scheduling settings. All fields are

read-only.

Screen Elements

Ignore relationships to and from other projects option

Determines whether to ignore activity relationships between projects.

1076

Make open-ended activities critical option

Determines whether to label open-ended activities as critical during the scheduling.

Use expected finish dates option

Determines whether to schedule activity finish dates as the expected finish dates.

When scheduling progressed activities use option

Determines the type of logic used to schedule dependent activities with

out-of-sequence progress. For example, a Finish to Start relationship in which the

predecessor has not finished but the successor has started.

Retained Logic: The remaining duration of a progressed activity is not scheduled

until all of its predecessors are finished.

Progress Override: The schedule ignores network logic and allows the activity to

progress without delay.

Actual Dates: Backward and forward passes are calculated using actual dates.

Calculate Start-to-Start lag from option

Determines when you want the successor to start. When a start to start relationship

exists and the predecessor starts out of sequence, the scheduler delays the successor

activity until the lag expires and all predecessor relationships have been satisfied. Use

this option to specify whether to subtract the lag from the predecessor's internal early

start date or its actual start date.

Early Start: Calculates the expired lag as the number of work periods between the

actual start and the data date and determines the successor's start date as the

predecessor's internal early start plus any remaining lag. Select this option when

the successor's start depends on the amount of work that the predecessor activity

accomplishes.

Actual Start: Determines the successor's start date as the data date plus any

remaining lag. Select this option when you want the successor's start to depend

on the time elapsed from the predecessor's actual start (regardless of the amount

of work that has been accomplished in the predecessor activity).

Define critical activities as Total Float less than or equal to field

Determines which activities are critical based on the flexibility of scheduled dates.

Compute Total Float As option

Determines the method to calculate total float for all activities based on the following

methods:

Start Float: The difference between the early and late start dates (Start Float

equals Late Start minus Early Start).

Finish Float: The difference between the early and late finish dates (Finish Float

equals Late Finish minus Early Finish).

Smallest value: Select to use the most critical value, which is the smaller of the start

float and finish float values.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1077

Calendar for scheduling Relationship Lag is list

The calendar used to calculate relationship lag. The default calendar for new

activities is specified on the Administration > Calendars page or in P6 Professional.

Predecessor Activity Calendar: Calculates lag based on the predecessor activity's

calendar

Successor Activity Calendar: Calculates lag based on the successor activity's

calendar

24 hour Calendar: Specifies work time 7 days/week and 24 hours/day

Project Default Calendar: Uses the calendar that is designated as the default for

new activities

Calculate multiple float paths option

Determines whether multiple critical float paths (sequences of activities) are

calculated in the project schedule. You can specify the number of critical float paths

to identify in the Specify the number of paths to calculate field. If you do not select

this option, you cannot edit the remaining fields.

Recalculate Assignment Costs option

Determines whether the costs of resource or role assignments that use multiple rates

are recalculated.

Using this option ensures that costs remain accurate when rescheduled dates reflect

a rate change.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Scheduler...

(F9).

4) In the Schedule Project dialog box:

a. Configure the options and select the Display scheduling log upon completion

option.

b. Click Schedule.

5) In the Scheduling Reports dialog box, expand the Scheduling Settings section.

Select Projects Dialog Box of the Project Calendars Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to select projects that will filter the calendars displayed on the Project

Calendars page.

1078

Screen Elements

Select Project Dialog Box Toolbar

See Select Projects Toolbar (on page 1345).

Available/Selected Projects

See Configuring Columns or Values.

Description list

Displays the description corresponding with each project.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project Calendars.

3) On the Project Calendars page, click Select Projects.

Select Projects Dialog Box of the Project Tab of the Activity Codes Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to add projects to the Project tab.

Screen Elements

Select Project Type

Filters available information by project or template.

Group By

Displays a menu of the available fields you can select to group related rows in a table

into hierarchical lists you can expand and collapse. For example, group by a

Category field to arrange all rows hierarchically by their Category field values. Expand

the Category A group to view its data rows, the Category B group to view its data

rows, and so on.

Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

Search

Displays a search field and any related options and controls for finding a specific

matching entry or entries based on your search criteria. Search by user name or

personal name.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1079

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Activity Codes.

3) On the Activity Codes page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab, click Select Projects.

Send Projects to ERP Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to select the project, project data, project budget, project status,

and timesheet hours to send to ERP.

In P6 security profiles, your administrator is required to enable the integration of your

project data with your Oracle ERP system before you can send projects to your ERP

application. If you require appropriate security privileges to send projects to your

configured ERP application, see your administrator.

Screen Elements

Select the projects to send to ERP section

The list of projects available to send to your Oracle ERP system.

Project ID field

The unique identifier of the project.

Project Name field

The name of each project. Can be arranged in an ascending or descending order.

Select Data to Include:

The types of project data to include when you send the selected project to your

Oracle ERP system.

Project Budget option

Determines whether to send budget information at a specific level of the WBS, with

resource and role summaries, to your Oracle ERP system.

Project Status option

Determines whether to include project, WBS, activity, resource assignments, and

activity expense details to your Oracle ERP system.

1080

Timesheet Hours option

Determines whether to enable timesheet data to be sent to your Oracle JD Edwards

ERP application. From the Date Range menu, select the date range of timesheets to

be sent.

Note: Timesheet data is sent only when P6 is integrated with an Oracle JD Edwards

ERP application.

Send button

Creates an XML file that contains the list of projects to send and the data that is to be

sent. Your integration of P6 with the Oracle ERP system might create a new project or

synchronize with an existing project in the Oracle ERP system.

Cancel button

Closes the Send Projects to ERP dialog box and returns you to the Gantt chart view.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export

Send to ERP.

Service Status Dialog Box

dzzzzzzOverview

Use this dialog box to view the status and other details for as soon as possible (ASAP)

services running in real time such as Apply Actuals, Summarize Project, or Schedule

Project. No scheduled services appear in this dialog box.

Note: To view the status of scheduled services, see Scheduled

Services Page (on page 1067).

Screen Elements

Service Status toolbar

See Service Status Toolbar (on page 1346).

Service field

The type of service. (This is a read-only field.)

Status field

The status of the service. (This is a read-only field.)

Delegated: When the summarize service is running and waiting for child records to

complete summarizing.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1081

Pending: Status defaults to pending after initial creation or if the service is waiting

in queue to be run.

Running: When the service is running on the service machine.

Failed: When the service cannot complete, an error occurs, or data could not be

committed.

Completed: When the service completes successfully.

Submitted field

The date the service was submitted. (This is a read-only field.)

Completed field

The date the service was completed. (This is a read-only field.)

Initiator field

The personal name of the user who initiated the service.

Projects field

The names of the projects or EPSs that were included in the specific service job.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click Actions and select View Service Status.

Service Summary Detail Window

Overview

Use this detail window to view a brief summary of the general information associated

with the selected scheduled service.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Scheduled Services.

2) On the Scheduled Services page, click the Service Summary detail window.

Set Time Periods Dialog Box of Calendars

Overview

Use this dialog box to specify the number of work hours for each time period. These

settings are only available if your P6 Application Settings are set to ignore the default

hours per time period specified on the Time Periods tab, and instead use the assigned

calendar to specify the number of work hours for each time period.

1082

Screen Elements

Hours/Day field

The number of work hours within a calendar day. The value you enter must be

between 1.0 and 24.0 hours.

Hours/Week field

The number of work hours within a calendar week. The value you enter must be

between 1.0 and 168.0 hours.

Hours/Month field

The number of work hours within a calendar month. The value you enter must be

between 1.0 and 744.0 hours.

Hours/Year field

The number of work hours within a calendar year. The value you enter must be

between 1.0 and 8784.0 hours.

Getting Here

To access enterprise project data:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data.

2) In the Enterprise Project Data dialog box, expand Projects and click Project

Calendars.

3) On the Project Calendars page, select a calendar and then click Edit Hours Per

Period.

To access enterprise resource data:

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data.

2) In the Enterprise Resource Data pane, click Resource Calendars.

3) On the Resource Calendars page, select a calendar and then click Edit Hours Per

Period.

To access enterprise data:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, perform one of the following steps:

expand Global and click Global Calendars.

expand Projects and click Project Calendars.

expand Resources and click Resource Calendars.

3) On the Global, Project, or Resource Calendars page, select a calendar and then

click Edit Hours Per Period.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1083

Settings Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page

Overview

Use this detail window to choose user settings such as calendar, overtime factor,

resource currency, and P6 Progress Reporter settings.

Screen Elements

Resource selector (Ctrl+Up Arrow) or (Ctrl+Down Arrow)

Cycles through the available resources and determines which data display in the

detail window. Click (Ctrl+Up Arrow) to move to the previous resource, or click

(Ctrl+Down Arrow) to move to the next resource. The content in the detail window is

refreshed with the data for the selected resource.

Calendar field

The name of the calendar selected for the resource.

Default Units/Time field

The default units/time for resource assignments in projects, which is shown as either a

percentage or units/duration depending on your settings in My Preferences. If you

change the default setting, existing resource assignments are not affected. The

default setting only applies to new resource assignments.

Overtime Allowed option

Determines whether the resource is allowed to log overtime hours.

Overtime Factor field

The overtime factor used to compute the overtime price for the resource. The default

is 1.5.

Used in overtime calculations where the rate is multiplied by the overtime factor to

figure the total overtime price.

Auto Compute Actuals option

Determines whether the activity actual and remaining units, and start and finish dates

for the resource are calculated automatically using the planned dates, planned

units, and the activity's schedule percent complete.

If this option is selected, the actual/remaining units and actual dates are

automatically updated when project actuals are applied. This assumes that all work

by the resource proceeds according to plan.

This option is not available if the Uses Timesheets option is selected.

Currency field

The name of the currency associated with this resource.

For example, US Dollars or Japanese Yen.

1084

Calculate Costs from Units option

Determines whether by default any new assignments for this resource will have its

costs recalculated whenever any quantity changes occur. This setting can be

overwritten on a per project basis.

Timesheet User Login field

The user name for the timesheet user login.

Uses Timesheets option

Determines whether the labor resource uses P6 Progress Reporter timesheets to record

hours for assigned activities.

This option is not available if the Auto Compute Actuals option is selected.

Timesheet Approval Manager field

The resource manager assigned to approve timesheets for the resource.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resources tab.

4) On the Resources tab, click the Settings detail window.

Soft Constraints - Constraints That Do Not Prevent Activities Being Moved Section of the

Schedule Check Report Dialog Box

Overview

Use this section to view activities in the schedule with soft constraints. Soft constraints do

not prevent activities from being moved, but they can distort float and create negative

float.

Only a subset of activities in the open projects are checked. WBS summary activities,

activities with an actual finish date, and Level of Effort activities are removed from the

subset to create the list of activities check for Soft Constraints. Start constraints are

ignored if they are on activities that have an actual start. The Actual percentage is

calculated as the number of activities found that match the check divided by the total

number of subset activities checked.

Screen Elements

Project ID field

The unique identifying code of the project containing the activity which failed the

check.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1085

Activity ID field

The unique identifying code of the activity which failed the check.

Activity Description field

The brief description of the listed activity.

Constraint Type field

The type of constraint that is preventing the activity from being moved.

Hard constraint types include: Mandatory Start and Mandatory Finish.

Soft constraint types include: Finish On, Finish On or After, Finish On or Before, Start On,

Start On or After, and Start On or Before.

Constraint Date field

The date, if applicable, to which the activity must adhere.

Position field

The constraint position: primary or secondary.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Check

Schedule....

4) In the Check Schedule dialog box:

a. Select the Soft Constraints - Constraints that do not prevent activities being moved

option.

b. Click Check Schedule.

5) In the Schedule Check Report dialog box, expand the Soft Constraints - Constraints

that do not prevent activities being moved section.

Standard Work Week Tab of the Global Calendars Page

Overview

Use this tab to specify the length of work hours in a day or to calculate the total number

of hours worked in a particular day.

Screen Elements

Work area

The typical work week that can be modified by day and hour. After choosing a

calendar to be added while on the calendar tab, the Standard Work Week tab will

display the similar template by days and hours.

1086

Day label

The name of each day. This label begins the week with Sunday, ends with Saturday,

and cannot be modified.

Total Hours field

The total number of work hours for each day. If hours are manually changed here, the

Work Period display will automatically change to incorporate the total hours and vice

versa.

Hour list

The listing of hours in the day.

Work Period display

The application displays a box that represents worked hours and that has a direct

relationship to the Total Hours field. At the top of this box, the start time is displayed.

There can be multiple Work Period boxes displayed in one day. This box can be

dragged by left-clicking and dragging the box up or down. If another Work Period

box is in the path of the dragged box, the dragged box will shrink and perhaps erase

the other box. This box can also be sized manually by left-clicking the top or bottom

edge and dragging it to the size you want. Right-clicking a Work Period box displays

Edit Calendar Day, Remove work period, and Set as nonwork options. Right-clicking a

space on the calendar not occupied by a Work Period box, displays the Edit

Calendar Day and Create work period options.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Global Calendars.

3) On the Global Calendars page, click the Standard Work Week tab.

Standard Work Week Tab of the Project Calendars Page

Overview

Use this tab to specify the length of work hours in a day or to calculate the total number

of hours worked in a particular day.

Screen Elements

Work area

The typical work week that can be modified by day and hour. After choosing a

calendar to be added while on the calendar tab, the Standard Work Week tab will

display the similar template by days and hours.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1087

Day label

The name of each day. This label begins the week with Sunday, ends with Saturday,

and cannot be modified.

Total Hours field

The total number of work hours for each day. If hours are manually changed here, the

Work Period display will automatically change to incorporate the total hours and vice

versa.

Hour list

The listing of hours in the day.

Work Period display

The application displays a box that represents worked hours and that has a direct

relationship to the Total Hours field. At the top of this box, the start time is displayed.

There can be multiple Work Period boxes displayed in one day. This box can be

dragged by left-clicking and dragging the box up or down. If another Work Period

box is in the path of the dragged box, the dragged box will shrink and perhaps erase

the other box. This box can also be sized manually by left-clicking the top or bottom

edge and dragging it to the size you want. Right-clicking a Work Period box displays

Edit Calendar Day, Remove work period, and Set as nonwork options. Right-clicking a

space on the calendar not occupied by a Work Period box, displays the Edit

Calendar Day and Create work period options.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project Calendars.

3) On the Project Calendars page, click the Standard Work Week tab.

Standard Work Week Tab of the Resource Calendars Page

Overview

Use this tab to specify the length of work hours in a day or to calculate the total number

of hours worked in a particular day.

Screen Elements

Work area

The typical work week that can be modified by day and hour. After choosing a

calendar to be added while on the calendar tab, the Standard Work Week tab will

display the similar template by days and hours.

1088

Day label

The name of each day. This label begins the week with Sunday, ends with Saturday,

and cannot be modified.

Total Hours field

The total number of work hours for each day. If hours are manually changed here, the

Work Period display will automatically change to incorporate the total hours and vice

versa.

Hour list

The listing of hours in the day.

Work Period display

The application displays a box that represents worked hours and that has a direct

relationship to the Total Hours field. At the top of this box, the start time is displayed.

There can be multiple Work Period boxes displayed in one day. This box can be

dragged by left-clicking and dragging the box up or down. If another Work Period

box is in the path of the dragged box, the dragged box will shrink and perhaps erase

the other box. This box can also be sized manually by left-clicking the top or bottom

edge and dragging it to the size you want. Right-clicking a Work Period box displays

Edit Calendar Day, Remove work period, and Set as nonwork options. Right-clicking a

space on the calendar not occupied by a Work Period box, displays the Edit

Calendar Day and Create work period options.

Getting Here

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Resource Data pane, expand Resources and click Resource

Calendars.

3) On the Resource Calendars page, click the Standard Work Week tab.

Standard Work Week Tab of the View Calendar Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to view the work hours in a day.

Screen Elements

Work area

The typical work week broken down into days and hours.

Day label

The name of each day. This label begins the week with Sunday, ends with Saturday,

and cannot be modified.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1089

Total Hours field

The total number of work hours each day.

Hour list

The listing of hours in the day.

Work Period display

The box that represents worked hours and that has a direct relationship to the Total

Hours field. At the top of this box, the start time is displayed. There can be multiple

Work Period boxes displayed in one day.

Getting Here

From the Activities page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select an activity.

b. Click the Actions menu and select View Calendar.

4) In the View Calendar dialog box, click the Standard Work Week tab.

From the EPS page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) :

a. Select a project.

b. Click the Actions menu and select View Calendar.

4) In the View Calendar dialog box, click the Standard Work Week tab.

Standard Work Week Tab of the View Calendar Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to view the length of work hours in a day or to calculate the total number of

hours worked in a particular day.

Screen Elements

Work area

The typical work week that can be modified by day and hour. After choosing a

calendar to be added while on the calendar tab, the Standard Work Week tab will

display the similar template by days and hours.

1090

Day label

The name of each day. This label begins the week with Sunday, ends with Saturday,

and cannot be modified.

Total Hours field

The total number of work hours for each day. If hours are manually changed here, the

Work Period display will automatically change to incorporate the total hours and vice

versa.

Hour list

The listing of hours in the day.

Work Period display

The application displays a box that represents worked hours and that has a direct

relationship to the Total Hours field. At the top of this box, the start time is displayed.

There can be multiple Work Period boxes displayed in one day. This box can be

dragged by left-clicking and dragging the box up or down. If another Work Period

box is in the path of the dragged box, the dragged box will shrink and perhaps erase

the other box. This box can also be sized manually by left-clicking the top or bottom

edge and dragging it to the size you want. Right-clicking a Work Period box displays

Edit Calendar Day, Remove work period, and Set as nonwork options. Right-clicking a

space on the calendar not occupied by a Work Period box, displays the Edit

Calendar Day and Create work period options.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page:

a. Click on a resource name.

b. Click Actions and select View Calendar.

4) In the View Calendar dialog box, click the Standard Work Week tab.

Start Review Dialog Box

Overview

Use this page to initiate the review process for a document.

Screen Elements

Name field

The name of the review. This field displays the selected document's name by default.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1091

Review Type list

Determines the type of review:

Anyone May Review: Enables any one of the listed reviewers to approve or reject

the document version. Once one reviewer approves it, the review status changes

to Review Approved; once one reviewer rejects it, the review status changes to

Review Rejected.

Everyone Must Review: Requires each listed reviewer to respond to the document

review to complete it. To change the review status to Review Approved, all

reviewers must approve the document. To change the review status to Review

Rejected, only one reviewer needs to reject the document.

Everyone Must Review in Sequence: Requires each listed reviewer to respond to

the document review in a designated sequence to complete it. To change the

review status to Review Approved, all reviewers must approve the document. To

change the review status to Review Rejected, only one reviewer needs to reject

the document. Once one reviewer rejects the document, the review is complete.

Reviewers field

The selected users assigned to review the document.

Use the arrows to move the selected users up or down in the sequence; this is the

order in which they will review if you select the option Everyone Must Review in

Sequence.

Due Date field

The date all reviewers need to complete the review. If no due date is specified for the

review, then this field appears blank.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

Create Review button

Creates a review based on the entered criteria. Once the review is created, the

document appears in the Action Required portlet on a dashboard for each specified

reviewer. The document also appears in the Project and Document Workflows portlet

on a dashboard.

Tips

To create the review, you must select at least one reviewer. Once a review is created,

you cannot add additional reviewers to the list. You can select as many reviewers as

you want.

1092

Use the and buttons to specify the order of the names in the list. If you have

selected the Everyone Must Review in Sequence review type, the order of the names

in the list determines the sequence in which each user is required to review the

document.

If the review type is Everyone Must View in Sequence, then all reviewers must

complete the review by the specified Due Date.

You can customize a dashboard to display the Action Required and Project and

Document Workflows portlets.

Getting Here

From the Documents page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab, select a document and click Start Review.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Documents portlet and select the Recent

Documents tab.

4) On the Recent Documents tab, select a document and click Start Review.

Statistics Section of the Leveling Report Log

Overview

Use this section to view activity statistics of the selected project. All fields are read-only.

Screen Elements

Number of Activities field

The number of activities associated with the selected project.

Number of Not Started Activities field

The number of activities that have not been started.

Number of In Progress Activities field

The number of activities that have been started but not completed.

Number of Completed Activities field

The number of activities that have been completed.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1093

Number of Relationships field

The number of relationships within the activities.

Number of Activities with constraints field

The number of activities that have constraints.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Leveler...

(Shift+F9).

4) In the Level Resources dialog box, click the Options tab.

5) On the Options tab, select the Display leveling log upon completion and click Level.

6) In the Leveling Report Log, expand the Statistics Section section.

Statistics Section of the Scheduling Report Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this section to view activity statistics of the selected project. All fields are read-only.

Screen Elements

Number of Activities field

The number of activities associated with the selected project.

Number of Not Started Activities field

The number of activities that have not been started.

Number of In Progress Activities field

The number of activities that have been started but not completed.

Number of Completed Activities field

The number of activities that have been completed.

Number of Relationships field

The number of relationships within the activities.

Number of Activities with constraints field

The number of activities that have constraints.

Tips

If use the shortcut, you must first select a project or activity.

1094

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Scheduler...

(F9).

4) In the Schedule Project dialog box:

a. Configure the options and select the Display scheduling log upon completion

option.

b. Click Schedule.

5) In the Scheduling Reports dialog box, expand the Statistics section.

Status Section of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this section to add or edit activity status details, if you have the required privileges.

Screen Elements

Edit dates and constraint link

See Edit Dates and Constraint Page of the Activity Form Page (see "Edit Dates and

Constraints Page of the Activity Form Page" on page 731).

Edit duration and units link

See Edit Duration and Units Page of the Activity Form Page (on page 736).

Dates section:

Started option

Determines whether the activity has started.

Finished option

Determines whether the activity has been completed.

Start Date field

For started activities, the actual start date. For not started activities, set to the planned

start date until the project is scheduled. When scheduled, set to the remaining early

start date.

Finish Date field

For completed activities, the actual finish date. For not started and in-progress

activities, set to the planned finish date if the project has not been scheduled. When

scheduled, set to the remaining early finish date.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1095

Suspend Date field

The date work has stopped on a given activity for an unknown, but temporary, period

of time. For example, an event might force an activity to be interrupted or resource

constraints might put an activity on hold.

The suspend date must be later than the actual start date, which the activity must

have. The progress of the activity can be resumed by setting the resume date. The

suspend/resume period behaves like a non-work time on the activity calendar or

resource calendar for task and resource dependent activities.

Resume Date field

The date when a suspended task or resource dependent activity is resumed. The

resume date must be later than the suspend date and earlier than the actual finish

date.

The suspend/resume period behaves like a non-work time on the activity calendar or

resource calendar for task and resource dependent activities.

Duration Percent field

The calculation from the original or planned and remaining duration. The type of

percent you see depends on the percent complete type you select for the activity in

the General section of the Activity Form page.

Total Float field

The amount of time the activity can be delayed before delaying the project finish

date.

Calculated as Late Start minus Early Start or as Late Finish minus Early Finish.

Constraints section:

Primary Constraint field

The primary constraint type for the selected activity.

Primary Constraint Date field

The date associated with the primary constraint, if the activity has a primary

constraint assigned.

Secondary Constraint field

The secondary constraint type for the selected activity.

Secondary Constraint Date field

The date associated with the secondary constraint, if the activity has a secondary

constraint assigned.

This field is only available if a primary constraint is already entered.

1096

Expected Finish field

The date the activity's primary resource expects the activity to end.

Only the primary resource can edit this field if the activity has started.

Duration section:

Planned field

The expected number of work periods required to complete the selected activity.

Actual field

The number of work periods spent on the selected activity.

Remaining field

The number of work periods needed to complete the selected activity.

Labor Units section:

Planned field

The expected number of labor units required to complete the activity.

Actual field

The exact number of labor units that have been expended or the total cost that has

been incurred for the selected activity.

Remaining field

The number of labor units required to complete the activity.

Non-Labor Units section:

Planned field

The expected number of non-labor units required to complete the activity.

Actual field

The exact number of non-labor units that have been expended or the total cost that

has been incurred for the selected activity.

Remaining field

The number of non-labor units required to complete the activity.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1097

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Status section.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Status section.

Status Tab of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box

Overview

Use this tab to view the import or export status of a project.

Screen Elements

Status toolbar

See Status Toolbar of the Import/Export Project Dialog Box (see "Status Toolbar of

Import/Export Project Dialog Box" on page 1347).

Name field

The file names that have been scheduled for import.

Action field

The action performed on the file: import or export.

Status field

The status of a current import: Complete, Running, Failed, or Pending.

The application displays a 'failed' status for an export if it fails. Otherwise, export status

is not displayed.

Submitted field

The date and time the import was scheduled.

Completed field

The date and time the import was completed.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

1098

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Import/Export XML Project

Import/Export.

4) In the Import/Export Project dialog box, click the Status tab.

Step Templates Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure step templates.

Screen Elements

Activity Step Templates toolbar

See Activity Step Templates Toolbar (see "Step Templates Toolbar" on page 1347).

Template Name field

The name of the activity step template. By creating templates for groups of activity

steps that are relevant in many projects, an organization can streamline data entry

and ensure that work is identified consistently throughout the organization.

Step Count field

The number of steps you assign for each corresponding template name.

Steps detail window

See Steps Detail Window of the Step Templates Page (on page 1101).

Getting Here

To access enterprise project data:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Step Templates.

To access enterprise data:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Step UDFs.

Step UDFs Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure user defined fields for steps.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1099

Screen Elements

User Defined Fields toolbar

See User Defined Fields Toolbar (on page 1361).

User Defined Field field

The name of the user-defined field.

Data Type field

The name of the type of data that corresponds to each user-defined field. The data

type you select determines the type of data you can specify in a field. The following

data types are available:

Text: Allows you to use text or a combination of text and numbers.

Start Date: Allows you to enter Start Date information only.

Finish Date: Allows you to enter Finish Date information only.

Cost: Allows you to enter currency values.

Number: Allows you to use numerals with two decimal places.

Integer: Allows you to use numeric data, but not a number related to money.

Indicator: Allows you to use an indicator field that you can use to enter

color-coded icon values in columns and display color-coded text in reports.

Tips

Right-click in any field to Add, Delete, Find, and Find Next.

Getting Here

To access enterprise project data:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data.

2) In the Enterprise Project Data dialog box, expand Activities and click Step UDFs.

To access enterprise data:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Step UDFs.

Steps Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to add new steps, add a predefined group of steps, remove or

revise a step, or report completed progress. Select the step name to edit it.

1100

Screen Elements

Steps toolbar

See Steps Toolbar of the Activities Page (on page 1349).

Completed option

Determines whether the step has been completed.

Step % Complete field

The percent complete for the step.

Step Description field

The brief narrative for the step. The description provides more information than short

names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose for the step.

These details help differentiate between steps with similar names and are especially

useful in multi-user environments.

Step Name field

The name of the activity step.

Step Weight field

The weight that is assigned to the step.

This user-defined field is used to calculate the physical percent complete when the

project option is set.

Step Weight Percent field

The step weight as a percentage. (Step Weight divided by Sum of Weight for all steps)

multiplied by 100.

User Defined field

Determines the user-defined field the application will use in the chart.

Tips

If you have more than one activity selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Steps detail window.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1101

Steps Detail Window of the Step Templates Page

Overview

Use this detail window to add, organize, and weigh steps in a step template.

Screen Elements

Steps Detail Window toolbar

See Steps Detail Window Toolbar (on page 1348).

Step Name field

The name of each step that you add to the step template.

Description field

The description of each corresponding step. To modify the text in your description, use

the dialog box which contains configurable options for your description.

Weight field

The weight of each corresponding step. To indicate the portion of activity work that a

single step represents, you can assign it a numerical value, or Step Weight. Once work

for a step is underway, P6 can use the step weight and the reported progress of step

work (Step Percent Complete) to calculate the percentage of total work that has

been completed for the activity (Activity Percent Complete).

Getting Here

To access enterprise project data:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data.

2) In the Enterprise Project Data dialog box, expand Activities and click Step Templates.

3) On the Step Templates page, click the Steps detail window.

To access enterprise data:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Activities and click Step Templates.

3) On the Step Templates page, click the Steps detail window.

Steps Details Dialog Box

Overview

Use the Steps Details page to view and modify information about the selected activity

step.

1102

Screen Elements

Step Name field

The step name, which is unique for the activity.

Step Weight field

The weight associated with the step. The step weight indicates the step’s importance

to the activity. The higher the value, the greater the importance. If no value is

entered, a default value of 1 is entered.

Step % Complete field

The completed percentage for each step.

Completed option

Determines whether the step has been completed.

Delete Step link

Deletes the currently selected activity step.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) On the Analysis page, click the Role Usage tab.

4) On the Role Usage tab, select a role and select to display the Spreadsheet.

5) On the Spreadsheet, click a project name.

6) In the Resource Staffing dialog box, click an activity name then expand the Steps

section.

7) In the Steps section, click a step name.

Steps Details of Activity Details of the Resources Dialog Box

Overview

Use this page to view and modify information about the selected activity step.

Screen Elements

Step Name field

The name of the step, which is unique to the activity.

Step Weight field

The weight associated with the step. The step weight indicates the step’s importance

to the activity. The higher the value, the greater the importance. If no value is

entered, a default value of 1 is entered.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1103

Step % Complete field

The completed percentage for each step.

Completed option

Determines whether the step has been completed.

Delete Step link

Deletes the currently selected activity step.

Getting Here

From the Team Usage page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Team Usage.

3) On the Team Usage page:

a. If multiple projects are open, select a project from the Select Project list.

b. Click the Organized By list and select Roles.

c. Expand a project and select a role in the left pane.

d. Select the Spreadsheet option and click a project in the right pane.

4) In the Resources dialog box:

a. Click the Unstaffed and Staffed option to show all activities.

b. Select an activity.

c. Expand the Steps section.

5) In the Steps section, click a step name.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, expand the Open Requests for Resources portlet and

select a resource.

3) On the Resource Staffing Details page, select an activity.

4) On the Activity Details page, expand the Steps section and click a step.

Steps Details Page of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this page to view and modify information about the selected activity step.

Screen Elements

Step Name field

The name of the step, which is unique to the activity.

1104

Step Weight field

The weight associated with the step. The step weight indicates the step’s importance

to the activity. The higher the value, the greater the importance. If no value is

entered, a default value of 1 is entered.

Step % Complete field

The completed percentage for each step.

Completed option

Determines whether the step has been completed.

Description field

The description of the activity step. See Text Editor Toolbar (on page 1352) for details

for modifying entered text.

Delete Step link

Deletes the currently selected activity step.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Steps section and select a step.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Steps section and select a step..

Steps Section of Activity Details of the Resources Dialog Box

Overview

Use this page to review existing activity steps and their status. You can customize the

data columns in the Steps section to display percent complete and user defined fields. If

you are the primary resource, you can report steps as completed and, depending on

administrative and security settings, you can edit user defined fields associated with

steps.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1105

Screen Elements

Add Steps link

Opens the add steps page. This page is identical to the Add Steps page of the

Workspace. See Add Steps Page of the Activity Form Page (on page 569) for further

details.

Step Name field

The name of the step, which is unique to the activity. Click a step name to edit the

step. See Steps Details Dialog Box (on page 1101).

Step Weight field

The weight associated with the step. The step weight indicates the step’s importance

to the activity. The higher the value, the greater the importance. If no value is

entered, a default value of 1 is entered.

Step Weight Percent field

The step weight as a percentage. (Step Weight divided by Sum of Weight for all steps)

multiplied by 100.

Step % Complete field

The completed percentage for each step.

Completed field

The status of the step.

Displays Yes if the step is completed and No if the step is not completed.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

Getting Here

From the Team Usage page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Team Usage.

3) On the Team Usage page:

a. If multiple projects are open, select a project from the Select Project list.

b. Click the Organized By list and select Roles.

c. Expand a project and select a role in the left pane.

d. Select the Spreadsheet option and click a project in the right pane.

4) In the Resources dialog box:

1106

a. Click the Unstaffed and Staffed option to show all activities.

b. Select an activity.

c. Expand the Steps section.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, expand the Open Requests for Resources portlet and

select a resource.

3) On the Resource Staffing Details page, select an activity.

4) On the Activity Details page, expand the Steps section.

Steps Section of the Activity Details Dialog Box

Overview

Use the Steps section of the Activity Form page to review existing activity steps and their

status. You can customize the data columns in the Steps section to display percent

complete and user defined fields. If you are the primary resource, you can report steps as

completed and, depending on administrative and security settings, you can edit user

defined fields associated with steps.

Screen Elements

Add Steps link

Click to display the add steps page. This page is identical to the Add Steps page of

the Workspace. See Add Steps Page of the Activity Form Page (on page 569) for

further details.

Step Name field

The name of the step, which is unique to the activity.See Steps Details Dialog Box (on

page 1101).

Step Weight field

The weight associated with the step. The step weight indicates the step’s importance

to the activity. The higher the value, the greater the importance. If no value is

entered, a default value of 1 is entered.

Step Weight Percent field

The step weight as a percentage. (Step Weight divided by Sum of Weight for all steps)

multiplied by 100.

Step % Complete field

The completed percentage for each step.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1107

Completed field

The status of the step.

Displays Yes if the step is completed and No if the step is not completed.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Analysis.

3) On the Analysis page, click the Role Usage tab.

4) On the Role Usage tab, select a role and select to display the Spreadsheet.

5) On the Spreadsheet, click a project name.

6) In the Resource Staffing dialog box, click an activity name then expand the Steps

section.

Steps Section of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this section to review existing activity steps and their status. You can customize the

data columns in the Steps section to display percent complete and user defined fields. If

you are the primary resource, you can report steps as completed and, depending on

administrative and security settings, you can edit user defined fields associated with

steps.

Screen Elements

Add Steps link

Opens the add steps page. See Add Steps Page of the Activity Form Page (on page

569).

Add Steps from Templates link

Opens a dialog box to search and select a template to apply. See Working with

'Select a Value' Dialog Boxes for details of use of the dialog box.

Step Name field

The name of the step, which is unique to the activity.

1108

Step Weight field

The weight associated with the step. The step weight indicates the step’s importance

to the activity. The higher the value, the greater the importance. If no value is

entered, a default value of 1 is entered.

Step Weight Percent field

The step weight as a percentage. (Step Weight divided by Sum of Weight for all steps)

multiplied by 100.

Step % Complete field

The completed percentage for each step.

Completed field

The status of the step.

Displays Yes if the step is completed and No if the step is not completed.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Steps section.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Steps section.

Store Period Performance Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this dialog box to store past period actuals per financial period.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1109

Screen Elements

Project Name field

The name of each project. Can be arranged in an ascending or descending order.

Data Date field

The date used as the starting point to calculated the schedule.

The project status is up to date as of the data date. The data date is modified when

project actuals are applied.

Financial Period field

The unique identifier of the associated financial period.

Store button

Stores the period performance for the selected projects.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Store Period

Performance.

Submittals Portlet

Overview

Available only in environments integrating P6 with Contract Management, this portlet

displays the number of submittals based on status that exist for the project in Contract

Management. If you have a valid user name and password, you can additionally access

Contract Management from this portlet to view a list of submittals for a specific status

Screen Elements

Submittals portlet

The Submittals portlet displays a chart showing the number of submittals based on

status. Place the cursor over a section of the chart to display the number of submittals

for that type. To view this information in Contract Management, click a section and

enter a valid user name and password in the new browser.

Tips

The number at the top of the portlet indicates the total number of project submittals.

1110

If you have the required privilege, you can customize the Project Workspace to

configure the way submittals information displays in the portlet. The customize options

set for the portlet apply for all projects in the organization. Depending on these

options, the status types that appear in the chart can include:

NEW = New Item

APP = Approved

AAN = Approved as Noted

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Submittals portlet.

Successors Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign or configure successor relationships for the selected

activity.

Screen Elements

Successors toolbar

See Successors Toolbar of the Activities Page (on page 1350).

Activity ID field

The unique identifying code for the activity.

Activity Name field

The name of the activity to which the activity code is assigned.

Lag field

The amount of time the predecessor activity was delayed, affecting the ability of its

successor activity to start or finish.

Project ID field

The unique identifier of the project.

Project Name field

The name of the associated project.

Relationship Type field

The relationship between two activities. Select from the following types:

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1111

Finish to Start: A relationship in which the start of a successor activity depends on

the completion of its predecessor activity. This is the default activity relationship.

Finish to Finish: A relationship in which the finish of a successor activity depends on

the finish of its predecessor activity.

Start to Start: A relationship between activities in which the start of a successor

activity depends on the start of its predecessor.

Start to Finish: A relationship between activities in which a successor activity

cannot complete until its predecessor activity starts.

Tips

If you have more than one activity selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Successors detail window.

Successors Section of the Relationships Section of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this section to add, revise or remove a successor relationship.

Screen Elements

Assign successor activity link

Opens a dialog box to search for and select a successor activity. See Working with

'Select a Value' Dialog Boxes.

Project ID field

The unique identifier of the project containing the successor activity.

Activity ID field

The unique identifier of the successor activity.

System generated.

Activity Name field

The name of the selected activity's successor. See Relationships Details Page of the

Activity Form Page (on page 988) for further details.

Relationship Type field

The relationship between two activities. Select from the following types:

1112

Finish to Start: A relationship in which the start of a successor activity depends on

the completion of its predecessor activity. This is the default activity relationship.

Finish to Finish: A relationship in which the finish of a successor activity depends on

the finish of its predecessor activity.

Start to Start: A relationship between activities in which the start of a successor

activity depends on the start of its predecessor.

Start to Finish: A relationship between activities in which a successor activity

cannot complete until its predecessor activity starts.

Lag field

The amount of time the predecessor activity was delayed, affecting the ability of its

successor activity to start or finish.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Relationships section.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the Relationships section

Summarization Page of the Project Preferences Dialog Box

Overview

Use this page to configure summarization options for the selected project.

Screen Elements

Enable Summarization option

Determines whether a project will be summarized. If you select this option, the fields

on the Summarization page are enabled. If this option is cleared, the project will not

be summarized.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1113

Summarize project based on options

Determines whether the project is summarized based on High-level resource planning

or Detailed activity resource assignments.

Typically, use the High-level resource planning option for future projects that are

currently specifying only high-level (project and WBS) resource allocation

requirements, or for projects that are underway, but for which you do not want to

assign resources at a detailed activity level. Use the Detailed activity resource

assignments option for in-progress projects when you want to review detailed

activity-level summarized data, for example, when evaluating detailed resource

usage against planned allocation or for earned value reporting.

Summarize to WBS Level list

Determines the number of summary WBS levels stored in the database.

Last Summarized On field

The date on which the summarizer service was last run for the project.

This is useful for assessing whether summary data for the project is current.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the Actions menu and select Set Project Preferences....

4) In the Project Preferences pane, click Summarization.

Summary Indicators Detail Window of the Project UDFs Page

Overview

Use this detail window to define one or more graphical indicators to appear with the

currently selected project user-defined field when its values are summarized or grouped

in bands. The parameters you define are based on the relationship between your UDF's

summary value and other values or fields.

Screen Elements

Parameter field

The comparison operator expressing the relationship between the project UDF

summary value and the value, range, or field you specify. When you select a

parameter of is within range of or is not within range of, the value or field you enter in

the Value column represents the low values in the range, and the High Value column

represents the high values in the range.

1114

Value options

Determines whether the project UDF summary value should be compared with a

value you specify or a field value.

Value/Field field

The manually-specified value or field-supplied value used for the logical comparison

in order to define this summary indicator. When you select a comparison parameter

of is within range of or is not within range of, the value or field in this column represents

the low value in the range.

High Value options

For comparison parameters of is within range of or is not within range of only,

determines whether the project UDF summary value should be compared with a

range defined by a high value you specify or determined by a field value.

High Value/Field field

The manually-specified value or field-supplied value representing the high value of

the optional range used in the comparison parameter for the summary indicator.

Indicator field

The graphical icon used to symbolically represent a specific project UDF summary

value relative to another value, range, or relationship you define.

Bubble Color field

The color used in portfolio view bubble charts to represent this project UDF summary

value or range relative to others.

Add Row button

Adds an additional row to the bottom of the detail window so you can define

another summary indicator.

Remove Row button

Removes the current row and summary indicator parameters from the detail window.

Getting Here

To access enterprise project data:

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data.

2) In the Enterprise Project Data dialog box, expand Projects and click Project UDFs.

3) On the Project UDFs page, select a user-defined field and click the Summary

Indicators detail window.

To access enterprise data:

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project UDFs.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1115

3) On the Project UDFs page, select a user-defined field and click the Summary

Indicators detail window.

Table Format of the Activities Page

Overview

Use the table format to view activity, project, and WBS information in a spreadsheet

format. Use filters and group data to see only those activities with a specific activity that

match the required criteria, or you can customize table columns. You can change the

font of the activity information and the color of the table background.

Screen Elements

Hovering over the WBS/Activity field or the Resource Names field will display the full

project, WBS, or activity name and the resource name respectively.

Tips

Right-click the table for quick access to a list of actions you can perform in the table.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the View menu and select Table.

Table Format of the EPS Page

Overview

Use this table format to display project data in a spreadsheet format. You can specify

which columns you want to include in the table and the rows display according to your

current group and sort selections. In addition, you can create filters to more narrowly

define the information you see.

Tips

Right-click the table for quick access to a list of actions you can perform in the table.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page, click the View menu and select Table.

1116

Team Usage Page

Overview

Use this page to view cost or usage data at the team level and for individual roles and

resources assigned to the project you are working with. Information is displayed in a

timescaled histogram or spreadsheet format.

Screen Elements

Refresh

Refreshes the current screen with any new, updated, or removed data.

Organized By list

Determines whether to organize the available options by Resources or Roles.

Customize link

Displays a dialog box with configurable options to filter data to reflect current project

allocation only or allocation across all projects. See Customize Dialog Box of the Team

Usage Page (on page 678).

Export Spreadsheet link

Exports the current spreadsheet to a Microsoft Excel .xls file.

Spreadsheet view

The spreadsheet displays data for the selected role, resource, or project in a

timescaled row and column format.

Selecting a role displays totals for staffed and unstaffed units/costs for that particular

role.

Selecting a resource displays totals for allocation and limit units/costs for that

resource.

Note: Under/Overallocated is calculated as Allocated minus Limit.

Overallocated values display in red; underallocated values are

negative.

Selecting a project displays usage data for all resources or roles assigned to the

project.

To view a list of activities for a selected role or resource, select a role or resource and

click a project name in the spreadsheet.

For a resource, you can view start and finish dates, remaining units, and units percent

complete for each activity assignment. You can also e-mail the project manager.

For a role, you can view activities categorized as staffed and unstaffed. You might

assign a resource to an unstaffed activity or change the assignment on a staffed

activity. You can also search for resources.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1117

Note: When viewing activities for a resource, the start and finish

dates, remaining units, and units percent complete fields contain

values for the resource, not the activity. Therefore, the resource

information might not match the corresponding information for the

activity.

To view a list of active resources who can fill a selected role, click the role name in the

spreadsheet.

To save the contents of the spreadsheet to an Excel spreadsheet file (*.xls) file, click

Export Spreadsheet. The complete timescale and all spreadsheet rows are exported.

Timescale headings are adjusted to display in a single column, using Month/Day/Year

format.

Histogram view

The histogram displays a graphical view of frequencies for the selected role or

resource. In the histogram, the vertical blue dotted line represents the current data

date for the project.

To display a dialog box containing units or costs totals, click the histogram.

Depending on the histogram's timescale and where on that timescale you click, the

dialog box will display different information. For example, if the timescale is set to

Year/Quarter, the dialog box will display totals for the quarter and year you select.

Zoom In

Increases the current magnification of items in the work area so they appear larger.

(This option is available only in the Histogram view.)

Zoom Out

Decreases the current magnification of items in the work area so they appear smaller.

(This option is available only in the Histogram view.)

Tips

Units values do not display a label (h, d, w, m, y) unless you have set your Global tab

preferences to show a label for time units.

For units display, if the project team consists of only material resources or a mix of

material and labor/non-labor resources, when you select the project name in the

hierarchy, dashes display in the histogram and spreadsheet instead of team summary

bars or totals. This occurs because summing unit values for mixed resource types does

not provide an accurate total since labor and non-labor resources are usually

associated with time (such as hours or days), and material resources are often

expressed in non-time units of measure.

To adjust the width of the timescale increments, click or .

Click the role link when Team Usage is organized by role to view which resources can

perform a particular role.

The project must be summarized for data to appear in the spreadsheet or histogram.

1118

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Team Usage.

Templates Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign templates privileges to the selected global security

profile.

Screen Elements

Privilege field

The name of the security permission that is assigned (option selected) or denied

(option cleared) to users of the currently selected profile.

Privilege option

The option in the column header that determines whether the privileges are all

assigned (selected), all denied (clear), or individually configured (indicated with a

dash or - sign).

Add/Edit/Delete Activity Step Templates option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

Activity Step Templates, which are used to add a set of common steps to multiple

activities.

Add/Edit/Delete Issue Forms option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove issue

forms.

Add/Edit/Delete Microsoft Project Templates option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

Microsoft Project templates that are used to import/export data from/to Microsoft

Project.

Add/Edit/Delete Project Templates option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

templates that can be used when creating new projects. To create project

templates, users must also have the 'Add Projects' project privilege assigned to their

profile. To modify templates, you must have the same project privileges that are

required to modify projects. To delete project templates, users must also have the

'Delete Projects' project privilege assigned to their profile.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1119

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Global Security Profiles.

3) On the Global Security Profiles page, click the Templates detail window.

Time Periods Page

Overview

Use this page to define the number of hours in a given time period. You can also specify

abbreviations for time units.

Screen Elements

Hours per Time Period

The Hours per Time Period values are used as conversion factors when users choose to

display time units and durations in units other than hours. For example, if the default

Hours/Day is set to 8.0, when a user enters 1d as a duration, this value is stored as 8h in

the database.

Specify the number of work hours for each time period field

For this field, you can enter Hours/Day from 1.0-24.0, Hours/Week from 1.0-168.0,

Hours/Month from 1.0-744.0, and Hours/Year from 1.0-8784.0.

Use assigned calendar to specify the number of work hours for each time period option

Determines whether to use the assigned calendar's Hours per Time Period values as

the conversion factors when users choose to display time units and durations in units

other than hours. If your resources and activities require different hours per time period

settings, select this option, then specify the Hours per Time Period for each defined

calendar.

If you select the Use assigned calendar to specify the number of work hours for each

time period option, the Hours per Time Period values on this tab are ignored and the

module converts units and durations using the Hours per Time Period values defined in

the activity’s or resource’s assigned calendar. Using a task-dependent activity as an

example, the module converts units and durations for the activity using the settings

defined in the activity’s assigned calendar. You should type values for each time

period even if you mark this option since the Hours per Time Period values on this tab

are still used in the following cases:

The Planning page of the Resources section in P6.

The Planning Resources tab in the project and WBS views and Global Change in

P6 Professional.

In these cases the Use assigned calendar to specify the number of work hours for

each time period option will be ignored even if selected.

1120

If you clear the Use assigned calendar to specify the number of work hours for each

time period option, the Hours per Time Period values you specify on this tab are

always used to convert time units and durations.

Time Period Abbreviations

The Time Period Abbreviations contains the one-character abbreviations for minutes,

hours, days, weeks, months, and years.

Specify the abbreviation for each time period field

Each field uses a one-character abbreviation for minutes, hours, days, weeks, months,

and years.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select Application Settings.

2) On the Application Settings pane, click Time Periods.

Time Units Format Section of the Global Tab of the My Preferences Page

Overview

Use this section to configure how time is displayed throughout the application.

Note: P6 calculates and stores time unit values in hourly increments.

When you specify a display time increment other than hours, P6

uses the Hours per Time Period settings from Admin Preferences or

the calendar based on the setting in Application Settings in P6 to

convert hours to the time increment you specify.

Screen Elements

Display Time Units in list

Select to display time units from the following options:

Hour

Day

Week

Month

Year

Show sub units option

Determines whether to show sub units with time units. Select the Show sub units option

to display sub units in the next smaller time increment. This option is also available with

Display Durations in.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1121

Show unit label option

Determines whether to show the unit abbreviation with time units.

Decimal places list

Select to display 0, 1, or 2 decimal places. This option is also available with Display

Durations in.

Display Durations in list

Select to display durations from the following options:

Hour

Day

Week

Month

Year

Show duration label option

Determines whether to show the time unit abbreviation with the duration value.

Units/Time Format

Select one of the following to display resource units/time:

Show as a percentage option

Show as units/duration option

For example, if Robert is assigned a limit of eight hours/day and you assign him to a

task at a maximum limit of two hours/day, you can display this information one of two

ways: as 2h/ d or as 25 percent of his resource limit (since he is only assigned to this

task for two of his allotted eight hours per day).

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the Global tab.

3) On the Global tab, expand the Time Units Format section.

Timesheet Approval Page

Overview

Use this page to process timesheets. This includes approving or rejecting timesheets,

notifying resources about timesheet status, adding timesheet notes, and determining if a

resource has not started or not submitted a timesheet. If you are a timesheet approval

manager, you can assign delegates to act in your place when you are not available.

1122

This page displays a timesheet table and an activity work area. The timesheet table lists

timesheets, if any, for the time period and filter criteria you specify (Action Required,

Submitted, Not Submitted, etc.). For each timesheet you select, the activity work area

displays a breakdown of the number of regular, overhead, and total hours for the

associated resource. In both tables, you can group and sort based on predefined

criteria, customize the columns that display, search for timesheets or activities, and print.

Screen Elements

Approving as list

The type of manager approving the timesheets. For example, Project Manager or

Resource Manager.

This field is automatically based on your module access and timesheet approval

rights (Project Manager or Resource Manager) and is read-only unless you have rights

to approve as a Project Manager and Resource Manager; you must select one

option. If you are a delegate approval manager, this field displays the type of

manager who delegated approval rights to you (Project Manager or Resource

Manager), along with the approval manager's personal name; for example, Project

Manager delegate for John Doe.

Assign Delegate

Displays options for finding and designating an alternate user as a temporary

substitute for the approving manager.

You have an active delegate assigned

A visual reminder that you currently have at least one delegate assigned to approve

timesheets.

Timesheets filter label

A label that adjusts itself to always reflect your currently applied filter. For example, All

Timesheets for or Action Required Timesheets for (followed by your selection from the

Timesheet Periods list).

Timesheet Periods list

The list of available timesheet periods derived from your enterprise data settings.

Timesheet Approval toolbar

See Timesheet Approval toolbar (on page 1353).

Timesheet table

See Timesheet Table of the Timesheet Approval Page (on page 1123).

Activity table

See Activities Work Area of the Timesheet Approval Page (on page 551).

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1123

Tips

If a message indicates that there is no data available, you might have selected a

combination of approval role, time period, and status for which no timesheets exist.

Getting Here

Click the Dashboards menu and select Approve Timesheets.

Timesheet Periods Page

Overview

Use this page to view, add, and delete customized timesheet periods or batches of

timesheet periods. The P6 administrator must first create timesheet periods before

timesheet users can view and enter time against their timesheets.

Screen Elements

Timesheet Periods toolbar

See Timesheet Periods Toolbar.

Timesheet Period (batch) dialog box

See Generate Timesheet Periods Dialog Box of the Timesheet Periods Page.

Start Date field

The date that the Timesheet Period began.

Finish Date field

The date that the Timesheet Period ended.

Tips

Right-click in any field to display the options to Add, Delete, Find, and Find Next.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Timesheet Periods.

Timesheet Table of the Timesheet Approval Page

Overview

Use this table to view resource timesheet data.

1124

Screen Elements

Last Date Status Changed field

The date when this timesheet's status was last modified.

Last Reviewer field

The user who most recently reviewed the timesheet.

Overhead Reg/OT field

The sum of the number of overhead hours and overhead overtime hours.

Project Reg/OT field

The sum of the number of regular hours and standard overtime hours.

Resource ID field

The unique identifier of the associated resource.

Resource Name field

The name of the resource.

Reviewed Date field

The date when this timesheet was last reviewed.

Status field

The current state of the timesheet. Timesheets can have a status of Not Started, Not

Submitted, Submitted, Resubmitted, Approved, PM Approved, RM Approved, or

Rejected. The Action Required status displays all timesheets that currently require your

review.

Submitted Date field

The date when this timesheet was submitted by the resource.

Timesheet Period End Date field

The last day of the currently selected timesheet period.

Timesheet Period Start Date field

The first day of the currently selected timesheet period.

Total Hours field

The sum of the number of hours in the Project Reg/OT and Overhead Reg/OT fields.

Getting Here

Click the Dashboards menu and select Approve Timesheets.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1125

Timesheets Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign timesheets privileges to the selected project security

profile.

Screen Elements

Privilege field

The name of the security permission that is assigned (option selected) or denied

(option cleared) to users of the currently selected profile.

Privilege option

The option in the column header that determines whether the privileges are all

assigned (selected), all denied (clear), or individually configured (indicated with a

dash or - sign).

Approve Timesheets as Project Manager option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to approve or reject submitted

timesheets as a Project Manager in Timesheet Approval.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Project Security Profiles.

3) On the Project Security Profiles page, click the Timesheets detail window.

Timesheets Page

Overview

Use this page to specify default timesheet options and approval levels for the P6 Progress

Reporter application.

Screen Elements

General Settings:

New resources use timesheets by default option

Determines whether to require that all new resources use timesheets, unless you

specify otherwise.

1126

Resources can assign themselves to activities by default option

Determines whether you want every newly created project to grant permission for

resources to assign themselves to activities. When you change this setting, it does not

affect existing projects; the new setting is applied only when a new project is created.

For individual projects, you can override this setting on the Project Preferences dialog

box in the EPS page.

Enable timesheet auditing option

Determines whether you want to save the history of timesheet submission, approval,

rejection, reviewers, and associated dates. To view the historical data, you must

create reports using BI Publisher.

Timesheet Approval Level:

Auto Submission - No submission or approvals is required

Select to indicate that resource timesheets do not need to be submitted or

approved.

Auto Approval - Automatically approve upon submission

Select to indicate that resource timesheets do not require management approval.

Timesheets are approved automatically when they are submitted.

One approval level - Resource manager approval required

Select to indicate that resource timesheets require approval by the resource

manager only. If you select this option, the status of all submitted timesheets remains

Submitted until the approving manager changes the timesheet’s status. If you

previously required both project manager and resource manager approval, and you

select this option, the status of all current timesheets that have received one level of

approval changes to Approved.

Two approval levels - Project and Resource managers' approval required

Select to indicate that resource timesheets require approval by project and resource

managers. If you select this option, the status of all submitted timesheets remains

"Submitted" until both managers approve the timesheet.

Project manager must approve before Resource manager

Determines whether project managers must approve timesheets before resource

managers. Becomes available if Two Approval Levels is chosen.

Default Resource manager approving timesheets when one or two approval levels required

Select the approver you want to approve timesheets for resources. The default

approver will be assigned each time you create a resource who uses timesheets.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select Application Settings.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1127

2) On the Application Settings pane, click Timesheets.

Tolerance Detail Window of the Risk Scoring Matrices Page

Overview

Use this detail window to view the tolerance threshold assigned to the selected risk

scoring matrix.

Screen Elements

Code field

The short name for the threshold level.

For example, a risk threshold with three levels named High, Medium, and Low, might

have the codes H, M, L to represent the level names.

Name field

The name of the threshold level.

An example of names for a threshold with three levels are High, Medium, and Low.

Range field

The user-defined range for each threshold level where the breadth of the range

specifies the amount of risk associated with the assigned level.

This field allows for text or numeric data depending on the threshold type.

Probability: The value is a percentage.

Tolerance: The value is a number.

Cost Impact: The value is the cost.

Schedule Impact: The value is a duration.

User-defined Impact: The value is text.

Color field

The color representing the threshold in the score field or probability and impact

diagram (PID).

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Risks and click Risk Scoring Matrices.

3) On the Risk Scoring Matrices page, click the Tolerance detail window.

1128

Tools Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign tools privileges to the selected global security profile.

Screen Elements

Privilege field

The name of the security permission that is assigned (option selected) or denied

(option cleared) to users of the currently selected profile.

Privilege option

The option in the column header that determines whether the privileges are all

assigned (selected), all denied (clear), or individually configured (indicated with a

dash or - sign).

Administer Global External Applications option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

entries in the list of global external applications in P6 Professional.

Administer Scheduled Services option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to set up the Apply Actuals,

Summarize, Schedule, and Level scheduled services to run at specific time intervals.

Edit Global Change Definitions option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

Global Change specifications available to all users in P6 Professional.

Import Project Management XER, MPP, MPX, and P3 option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to import projects, resources, and

roles from XER, MPP, MPX, and P3 formats using P6 Professional. To create new

projects when importing, users must also have the 'Create Project' project privilege

assigned to their profile. Users must be an Admin or Project Superuser to update a

project from XER or P3 formats.

Import XLS option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to import projects, resources, and

roles from XLS files. Users must also be a Project Superuser to update a project from XLS

format.

Import XML option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to import projects from P6, P6

Professional, and Microsoft Project using XML format. To create new projects when

importing, users must also have the 'Create Project' project privilege assigned to their

profile.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1129

Note: For Microsoft Project imports, you can only create a new project (not update

an existing one) during import. Also, P6 supports imports from Microsoft Project 2007,

while P6 Professional supports imports from Microsoft Project 2002.

View All Global/Project Data via SDK option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to view All Global and Project Data

via SDK. For Admin Superusers, access to the P6 SDK will be read/write. For all other

users, access will be read only.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Global Security Profiles.

3) On the Global Security Profiles page, click the Tools detail window.

Tools Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign tools privileges to the selected project security profile.

Screen Elements

Privilege field

The name of the security permission that is assigned (option selected) or denied

(option cleared) to users of the currently selected profile.

Privilege option

The option in the column header that determines whether the privileges are all

assigned (selected), all denied (clear), or individually configured (indicated with a

dash or - sign).

Allow Integration with ERP System option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to send project data to an integrated

Oracle system using the Send to ERP feature on the Activities page in the Projects

section. This is a project level privilege and is not specific to each level of the WBS.

Apply Actuals option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to apply actuals to activities in

projects.

Check In/Check Out Projects option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to check projects out to work

remotely and then check them back in using P6 Professional.

1130

Edit Contract Management Project Link option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, edit, and delete a link to

Contract Management projects.

Level Resources option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to level resources in projects. This

privilege also selects the 'Schedule Project' project privilege.

Schedule Projects option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to schedule projects.

Monitor Project Thresholds option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to run the threshold monitor for

projects in P6 Professional.

Store Period Performance option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to track actual this period values for

actual units and costs in projects. The 'Add/Edit Activities Except Relationships' project

privilege is also required for this functionality.

Summarize Projects option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to summarize data for all projects in

the EPS.

Run Baseline Update option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to update baselines assigned to

projects with new project information using the Update Baseline tool in P6

Professional.

Run Global Change option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to run Global Change specifications

to update activity detail information in P6 Professional.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Project Security Profiles.

3) On the Project Security Profiles page, click the Tools detail window.

Trace Logic Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to view activity relationships using trace logic.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1131

Screen Elements

Trace Logic toolbar

See Trace Logic Toolbar of the Activities Page (on page 1355).

Trace Logic work area

The area in which you can view and trace logic relationships.

Activity boxes outlined in red are critical activities; activity boxes outlined in blue are

not critical activities. Solid red lines between boxes represent critical relationships,

while blue lines represent non-critical relationships. Solid lines represent driving

relationships, while dashed lines represent non-driving relationships. The selected box

has a light blue background. Boxes with a black diamond in the corner represent

milestones. Activity boxes have status icons in the corner. The status icons indicate

whether an activity is not yet started, in progress, completed, or critical.

Tips

If you have more than one activity selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select an activity and click the Trace Logic detail window.

Units and Prices Detail Window of the Resources Tab of the Administration Page

Overview

Use this detail window to define the price/unit for up to five available rate types per

effective date.

Screen Elements

Add (Insert)

Adds a new unit and price row to the detail window.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Resource selector (Ctrl+Up Arrow) or (Ctrl+Down Arrow)

Cycles through the available resources and determines which data display in the

detail window. Click (Ctrl+Up Arrow) to move to the previous resource, or click

(Ctrl+Down Arrow) to move to the next resource. The content in the detail window is

refreshed with the data for the selected resource.

1132

Effective Date field

Displays the date that the corresponding units/time period and rates go into effect for

the resource.

Max Units/Time field

The maximum work units per time this resource can perform on all their assigned

activities.

For example, a person working full time could perform 8 hours of work per day. A

department of five people might perform at 5 days per day.

Price/Unit 1-5 fields

The non-overtime rates expressed as a series of price per unit values for the resource

as of the effective date. The rates are used to compute resource assignment costs for

activities. You can define up to five rates for a resource for a timespan starting on the

Effective Date. Your organization can define text titles for each rate type as part of

enterprise data.

For example, enter 54 as a Standard Rate and 64 as an External Rate. The application

will automatically format the rates per unit of time, for example, 54/h.

Shift Start Hour field

The start time of the assigned shift.

Shift start time is a value in a shift calendar assigned to a resource in P6 Professional. If

a shift calendar is assigned to a resource, then the fields in the Units and Prices detail

window are disabled. If a shift calendar does not exist for a resource, this field is

disabled.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Administration.

3) On the Administration page, click the Resources tab.

4) On the Resources tab, click the Units and Prices detail window.

Units of Measure Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure units of measure.

Screen Elements

Units of Measure toolbar

See Enterprise Data Units of Measure Toolbar (on page 1285).

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1133

Unit Abbreviation field

The abbreviation of the unit of measure.

Unit Name field

The name of the unit for each corresponding abbreviation.

Getting Here

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Units of Measure.

Usage Page of the Resource Team Summary Portlet

Overview

Use this page to view resource allocation for an individual resource as a histogram (total

allocation across time) or as a spreadsheet (of resource allocation values by project).

The resource usage data displayed on this page is derived from summary data, so it is

current as of the last date the summarizer was run for a project. Assignment changes

within a project after that date will not be reflected until the project is again summarized.

See Summarizing Projects.

Screen Elements

Customize link

Displays a dialog box with configurable options to customize the Spreadsheet or

Histogram. See Customize Spreadsheet or Histogram Dialog Box of the Analysis Page

(on page 697).

Export Spreadsheet link

Exports the current spreadsheet to a Microsoft Excel .xls file.

Display options

Determines whether to view information about the selected role/resource and

associated projects in Spreadsheet or Histogram format.

Zoom In

Increases the current magnification of items in the work area so they appear larger.

Zoom Out

Decreases the current magnification of items in the work area so they appear smaller.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

1134

3) On the dashboard, expand the Resource Team Summary portlet and click a

resource.

Usage Tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View Dialog Box of the Assignments Page

Overview

Use the Usage tab of the Customize Resource Assignments View dialog box to select

which columns are displayed on the Usage spreadsheet as well as modify options for

displaying time distributed values and determining whether to calculate the average for

units and costs.

Screen Elements

Customize Columns

See Customize Columns or Values.

Display time distributed values for date range

Select a type of Start and End date for which to display time distributed values:

Start Date list

Determines the starting point for the timescale. You enter information according to

which fields are provided:

Current Date: The date of the current day. Enter the number and increment from

which to subtract from the current date.

Earliest Project Date: The earliest planned start date of the project.

Custom Date: The date chosen by you.

End Date list

The options to set as an end date for the timescale and enter information according

to which fields are provided:

Current Date: The date of the current day. Enter the number of days after the

current date you want to view in the timescale.

Latest Project Date: The latest scheduled finish date of all loaded project.

Custom Date: The date chosen by you.

Calculate average for units and costs option

Determines whether to calculate the average for units and costs.

Divide values by field: The number by which the average is divided. This field is only

available if the corresponding option is selected.

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1135

3) On the Assignments page, click View and select Customize View.

4) In the Customize Resource Assignments View dialog box, click the Usage tab.

Used By Tab of the Global Calendars Page

Overview

Use this tab to view the activities and resources assigned to projects on the selected

global calendar.

Screen Elements

ID field

This field displays a list of your calendars. You can expand the calendar list to display

activities assigned to that calendar.

Name field

This field displays a name that corresponds with each activity.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Global and click Global Calendars.

3) On the Global Calendars page, click the Used By tab.

Used By Tab of the Project Calendars Page

Overview

Use this tab to view the activities and resources assigned to projects on the project

calendar.

Screen Elements

ID field

This field displays a list of your calendars. You can expand the calendar list to display

activities assigned to that calendar.

Name field

This field displays a name that corresponds with each activity.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click Project Calendars.

3) On the Project Calendars page, click the Used By tab.

1136

Used By Tab of the Resource Calendars Page

Overview

Use this tab to view resources assigned to the resource calendar.

Screen Elements

ID field

A list of available calendars that can be expanded to display associated resources.

Name field

This field displays a name that corresponds with each activity.

Getting Here

1) Click the Resources menu and select Enterprise Resource Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Resources and click Resource Calendars.

3) On the Resource Calendars page, click the Used By tab.

User Access Page

Overview

Use this page to create and administer user accounts and configure their associated

levels of access to data in various areas of the application. This includes access to

application modules, resources, OBS level, and global and project security profiles.

Screen Elements

User Access pane

Users Page (on page 1141)

OBS Page (on page 908)

Global Security Profiles Page (on page 816)

Project Security Profiles Page (on page 968)

Getting Here

Click the Administer menu and choose User Access.

User Defined Fields Section of the Issue Forms Page

Overview

Use this section to edit and remove existing UDFs or assign new UDFs to the form. Each

UDF you assign displays on the Add Issue page for all issues created from this form.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1137

Screen Elements

Assign User Defined Fields link

Opens a dialog box for configuring user defined fields. See Configuring Columns or

Values.

User Defined fields work area

The user-defined fields assigned to the issue form.

Default Value section

The section where you can assign items to the selected field Name item.

Required section

The options that you can select to require a user to enter information in that field on

the issue form.

Tips

Depending on the assigned user-defined fields, different options appear in the Default

Value section.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Issues.

3) On the Issues page, click the Issue Forms link.

4) On the Issue Forms page, select an issue form and expand the User Defined Fields

section.

User Defined Section of the Activity Form Page

Overview

Use this section to assign and configure user defined fields for activities.

Screen Elements

Assign User Defined Fields link

Opens a dialog box for configuring user defined fields. See Configuring Columns or

Values.

User Defined field field

The name of the selected user-defined field. Click a name to display a page on

which you can enter a value for the selected UDF. For example, if Planned Finish is

selected, the detail needed to be entered is a date for the Planned Finish field.

1138

User Defined field Value field

The corresponding value for the user defined field name.

Getting Here

From the Workgroup Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the User Defined section.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand any portlet containing activities.

4) In the portlet, click an activity.

5) On the Activity Form page, expand the User Defined section.

User Interface View Details Page

Overview

Use this page to create or modify the content of the selected user interface view.

Screen Elements

Content Tab

Enables you to choose the menu items, pages, and Dashboard menu items that are

included in a user interface view. You can choose the order in which selected items

appear in the Dashboards, Projects, Portfolios, and Resources sections. See Content

Tab of the User Interface View Details Page.

Activity Editing Tab

Enables you to control the content a user can edit in the Activity page and Resource

Assignments page. See Activity Editing Tab of the User Interface View Details Page.

Users Tab

Enables you to assign users to a user interface view. See Users Tab of the User Interface

View Details Page.

Tips

Settings for changing user interface views are not available to users of the Team

Member application.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1139

Users who have access to Manage Dashboards (in the Dashboards menu) enabled in

their user interface view can use the Manage Dashboards page to create

dashboards and choose dashboards to display on their Dashboards page.

Getting Here

To modify a user interface view:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Interface Views.

2) On the User Interface Views page, click a View.

To create a user interface view:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Interface Views.

2) On the User Interface Views page, click Create User Interface View.

3) In the Copy from Existing User Interface View dialog box, select an existing view to use

as a starting point or click New User Interface View to start from a default view with all

menus and pages enabled and then click OK.

User Interface Views Page

Overview

Use this page to view or configure how a user views the entire application.

Screen Elements

Create User Interface View link

Click to display the Copy from Existing User Interface view dialog box. Use this dialog

box to copy an existing view, or create a new one.

User Interface View for new users field

The default user interface view automatically assigned to new users.

Search field

The means to find a project.

View Name

Displays the name of the user interface view. The icon represents a user interface

view that is not yet assigned to any users. The icon represents that the view is

assigned to at least one user.

Date Created

Displays the date this user interface view was created.

Delete link

Permanently removes the selected user interface view.

1140

Tips

The Search field on this page automatically adjusts the list of matching views based

on the name or characters you enter. You must clear the search box for all user

interface views to re-appear in the list.

Getting Here

Click the Administer menu and choose User Interface Views.

Users Detail Window of the OBS Page

Overview

Use this detail window to view and assign users for a selected organizational breakdown

structure (OBS).

Screen Elements

Assign User

You can assign users, by their login names, to the OBS elements to grant access to the

corresponding EPS nodes or projects.

Delete

Removes the currently selected user from the currently selected OBS element. You

must select both a single OBS element and a single user to perform this command.

Only the user's assignment to the OBS element is deleted, not the actual user

account.

Login Name field

Displays the Login Name for each user.

Personal Name field

The personal name for the user. This name might be a nickname, full name, reference

to a role or department, or include any information recognized by your organization

to identify the user.

For example, a global organization has three users with the following Login Name field

values to uniquely identify them: tharris, tjharris, and tsharris. The following

Personal Name values are added to assist the entire organization in identifying the

users:

tharris Thomas Harris in Accounting (USA) tjharris Thomas J. Harris in Legal (ESP) tsharris Tina S. Harris in Design (CAN)

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1141

Project Security Profile field

From the list of project security profiles, you can select the security profile you want to

apply for each OBS assignment. The type of access granted to a user is determined

by the project security profile assigned to the user.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click OBS.

3) On the OBS page, click the Users detail window.

Users Page

Overview

Use this page to create user accounts and configure their security profiles and access

privileges.

Screen Elements

Users Toolbar

See User Access Users Toolbar (on page 1359).

Associated Resource field

The Associated Resource of each user.

E-mail field

The e-mail address for each user.

Enable Modify option

Determines whether users can modify user interface options.

Enterprise Reports option

Determines user access to the Reports section in P6. By selecting this module access

option, an ODS database user is created for the P6 EPPM user as long as the user

name matches Oracle database user name requirements. For example, if the P6

EPPM user name begins with anything other than a letter, an ODS database user

cannot be created. If the P6 EPPM user name contains spaces or disallowed special

characters, they will be removed when creating the ODS database user name.

Disallowed special characters include: { } [ ] : ; < > , . ? ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ | / \ ~ `. For

example, a P6 EPPM user name of "mgr.example.com" will be created as

"mgrexamplecom" in the ODS database. Once an ODS database user is created, the

P6 user will be able to view and run reports to which the user has access in Oracle BI

Publisher.

Notes:

1142

If running in LDAP or SSO authentication mode and a user is

granted Enterprise Reports module access, you will not be able

to log into the ODS database directly through Oracle BI

Publisher with the P6 EPPM user name if it contains spaces or

disallowed special characters.

In order for a user to log into the ODS database directly (for

example, using SQL Plus) with the P6 EPPM user name, a system

database administrator must first reset the ODS database user's

password.

Global Security Profile field

The Global Security Profile of each user.

Integration API option

Determines whether a user has access to P6 Integration API.

Login Name field

The Login Name of the users.

The display of the following fields can be modified using the Customize Columns Icon

on the Users Toolbar.

Logged In field

The modules the selected user is currently logged into.

Module Access field

The Module Access of each user.

P6 Analytics option

Determines user access only to the Star database through Oracle Business

Intelligence. By selecting this module access option, a Star user is created for the P6

EPPM user as long as the user name matches Oracle database user name

requirements. For example, if the P6 EPPM user name begins with anything other than

a letter, a Star user cannot be created. Once a Star user is created, the user will be

able to access the Oracle Business Intelligence Dashboards application.

P6 Professional option

Determines user access to P6 Professional, including Primavera Timescaled Logic

Diagram.

Personal Name field

The personal name for the user. This name might be a nickname, full name, reference

to a role or department, or include any information recognized by your organization

to identify the user.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1143

For example, a global organization has three users with the following Login Name field

values to uniquely identify them: tharris, tjharris, and tsharris. The following

Personal Name values are added to assist the entire organization in identifying the

users:

tharris Thomas Harris in Accounting (USA) tjharris Thomas J. Harris in Legal (ESP) tsharris Tina S. Harris in Design (CAN)

Phone field

The phone number available for each user.

Portfolios option

Determines user access to the following functionality in P6: the Portfolios section,

Project Performance portlets, the Portfolio View portlet in the Dashboards section,

document management functionality (if the Content Repository is configured), and

workflow functionality (if the Workflows Repository is configured).

Progress Reporter option

Determines user access to P6 Progress Reporter. For users who require access to P6

Progress Reporter, you must grant them either Team Member or Progress Reporter

module access.

Project Access field

The Project Access of each user.

Projects option

Determines user access to the following functionality in P6: the Projects section,

Project Performance portlets in the Dashboards section, document management

functionality (if the Content Repository is configured), and workflow functionality (if

the Workflows Repository is configured).

Resource Access field

Displays the Resource Access of each user.

Resources option

Determines user access to the following functionality in P6: the Resources section,

Resources portlets in the Dashboards section, document management functionality

(if the Content Repository is configured), and workflow functionality (if the Workflows

Repository is configured).

Team Member option

Determines whether the user will have access to timesheets in the P6 Progress

Reporter application. In the P6 web application, enables limited access to features

such as certain dashboard and project workspace portlets (for projects the user has

rights to access) and the Activities page (for only the user's assigned activities).

1144

User Interface View field

The type of access of each user.

Project Access detail window

See Project Access Detail Window of the Users Page (on page 950).

Module Access detail window

See Module Access Detail Window of the Users Page (on page 882).

Tips

Users with the Admin Superuser global security profile will always see all user accounts on

this page. Other users will see only the user accounts permitted by their currently

assigned Resource Access settings.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access pane, click Users.

Users Tab of the User Interface View Details Page

Overview

Use this tab to assign users to a user interface view. You can also allow or disallow the user

to edit options in the view.

Screen Elements

Users of View common controls

Common controls for selecting the users of the view. See Configuring Columns or

Values.

Allow Editing option

Determines whether to allow users of the view to modify their own view preferences.

Search

Displays options for finding a specific matching entry or entries based on search

criteria.

Search list

Select from one of the following to specify where to search:

User Name

Personal Name

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1145

for field

Enter information to search with the corresponding Search list choice.

Go button

Searches for the chosen and entered information.

Tips

Users who have the Allow Editing privilege as assigned in their view can edit the

contents of their user interface view on the View Preferences tab.

The Available Users column lists both login name and personal name. Click to

search for users based on User Name or Personal Name, then enter your search

criteria in the Search for field. Click Go. The page displays all users who meet your

search specifications. To reset the list of available users, click again.

Getting Here

To modify an existing user interface view:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Interface Views.

2) On the User Interface Views page, click a View.

3) On the Details of page, click the Users tab.

To modify a new user interface view:

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Interface Views.

2) On the User Interface Views page, click Create User Interface View.

3) In the Copy from Existing User Interface View dialog box, click New User Interface

View or an existing view and click OK.

4) On the Create User Interface View page, click the Users tab.

Version Tab of the Document Details Section (with content repository)

Overview

Use this tab to view a list of all the stored versions of a selected document.

Your access to Documents features and functionality are determined by the type of

content repository installed. Features not supported by your content repository are

unavailable in P6, although they might be described in P6 Help.

Screen Elements

Version field

Lists the version number. Click the link to the version number to view a specific

document version. Version 1 represents the original version of the document.

1146

Review Status field

The current review status of the document. If the document is not under review, this

field is blank.

The review statuses are Blank, In Review, Approved, Rejected, and Terminated.

Modified By field

The name of the person who last modified the document.

Modified Date field

The date and time the document was last modified.

Comments field

Any comments associated with the document version.

Getting Here

From the Documents page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the Project tab.

4) On the Project tab, select a project and click the Version tab.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Documents portlet and select the Private

Documents tab.

4) On the Private Documents tab, select a document and click Edit Details.

5) In the Document Details dialog box, click the Version tab.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Documents portlet and click the Project

tab.

4) On the Project tab, select a document and click Edit Details.

5) In the Document Details dialog box, click the Version tab.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1147

View Calendar Dialog Box

Overview

Use this dialog box to view the calendar and standard work week associated with the

selected activity or project. If you select a project, the dialog box displays the calendar

for the selected project. If you select an activity, the dialog box displays the calendar for

the selected activity.

Screen Elements

Calendar tab

See Calendar Tab of the View Calendar Dialog Box (on page 609).

Standard Work Week tab

See Standard Work Week Tab of the View Calendar Dialog Box (on page 1088).

Getting Here

From the Activities page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page:

a. Select an activity.

b. Click the Actions menu and select View Calendar.

From the EPS page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click EPS.

3) On the EPS page:

a. Select a project.

b. Click the Actions menu and select View Calendar.

View Calendar Dialog Box

Overview

Use the View Calendar dialog box to view the calendar and standard work week

associated with the selected project.

Screen Elements

Calendar tab

See Calendar Tab of the View Calendar Dialog Box (on page 609).

1148

Standard Work Week tab

See Standard Work Week Tab of the View Calendar Dialog Box (on page 1088).

Getting Here

1) Click Resources.

2) On the Resources navigation bar, click Assignments.

3) On the Assignments page, click Actions and select View Calendar.

View Tab of the My Preferences Page

Overview

Use this tab to customize the user interface view for all sections of the application.

Screen Elements

User Interface View Name field

The unique name for the User Interface View. The naming scheme you choose for user

interface views might reflect the roles or permissions of their intended users. For

example, Intern, Associate, Project Staff, Manager, and Executive are all possible user

interface view names in a series offering distinct but sometimes overlapping access to

menus and pages.

Administer section

Enables you to customize which administrative functions you can access from the

Administer menu.

Menu Items options

Determines which Administer menu items you can access. By selecting the Menu

Items option itself, you can access all menu items.

Application Settings: Enables your organization to define a series of

application-wide parameters and values that apply globally and to set defaults

and settings that affect how the application behaves. For example, configure

general application settings including calendar and activity duration defaults,

URLs for related applications, summarization time periods (also used to store past

period performance actuals), and also enable the optional password policy

setting.

Enterprise Data: Enables you to define series of application-wide data that apply

to all projects. For example, you can set global data, such as currencies and

financial periods; project data, such as baseline types and funding sources;

activity data, such as activity codes and step templates; resource data, such as

rate types and units of measure; risk data, such as risk categories and scoring

matrices; issue data, such as issue codes and UDFs; and document data, such as

document categories and statuses.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1149

User Access: Enables you to create user accounts, assign access, manage the

organizational breakdown structure (OBS) and configure profiles.

User Interface Views: Enables you to create pre-configured sets of options you

assign to users so their view of Dashboards, Portfolios, Projects, Resources, and

Administration is optimized for their role. User interface views permit visibility to

features essential for a user's role while hiding functionality that is not applicable.

Dashboards section

Enables you to customize which functions you can access from the Dashboards

menu.

Menu Items options

Determines which functions you can access under the Dashboards menu. By

selecting the Menu Items option itself, you can acccess all menu items.

Manage Dashboards: Enables you to access Dashboards, which are customizable

pages consisting of the data you need to perform your role. Dashboard data

appears in one or more smaller regions called portlets.

Approve Timesheets: Enables you to approve timesheets submitted through P6

Progress Reporter. Timesheets allow users to record hours for assigned activities.

Displayed Dashboards option

Lists the dashboards you can access, based on what your P6 administrator assigned

to you.

Portfolios section

Enables you to customize which functions you can access from the Portfolios

menu and which pages you can access within the Portfolios section.

Menu Items option

Determines which functions you can access from the Portfolios menu. By

selecting the Menu Items option itself, you can acccess all menu items.

Manage Portfolio Views: Enables you to create, modify, and delete portfolio views.

A portfolio view is a scorecard or chart providing high-level information spanning

an entire group of projects.

Manage Scenarios: Enables you to create, modify, or delete scenarios, and

determine who can access them. A scenario is a snapshot of historical project

data; you can use it to compare against the latest summarized data, or to

compare to other scenarios.

Open Portfolio: Enables you to open a group of projects by EPS, code, or portfolio.

Manage Portfolios: Enables you to review the list of projects in each portfolio, and

to create, modify, and delete portfolios.

1150

Pages option

Determines which pages you can access. If you select the Pages option itself, you

can access all pages.

Portfolio Analysis: Use this page to analyze portfolio data, conduct side-by-side

comparisons of two project groups, and apply what-if scenarios and waterline

analysis techniques to assist with executive-level critical decision making.

Capacity Planning: Use this page to analyze role allocation and cost over time.

Performance Status: Use this page to display summarized schedule and cost or

labor unit data based on the performance metric you select.

Gantt Chart: Use this page to display timescaled performance or earned value

schedule information at the WBS level, along with unit or cost data, in a

spreadsheet or histogram.

ROI: Use this page to display cost/benefit information based on live data for the

open project group.

Details: Use this page to modify a group of projects, called a portfolio.

Projects section

Enables you to customize which functions you can access from the Projects

menu and which pages you can access within the Projects section.

Menu Items option

Determines which functions you can access from the Projects menu. By

selecting the Menu Items option itself, you can acccess all menu items.

Open Projects: Enables you to open projects by EPS, project code, or portfolio.

Enterprise Project Data: Enables you to configure project-related enterprise

project for your entire organization.

Scheduled Services: Enables you to schedule, verify status, modify, and delete

routine recurring project management jobs, called services.

Pages option

Determines which pages you can access. If you select the Pages option itself, you

can access all pages.

EPS: Use this page to manage the Enterprise Project Structure (EPS) and its projects.

The EPS page displays schedules for any single project or group of projects you

choose with detail windows, a Gantt chart, and a table.

Activities: Use this page as your central project management tool for all project

activities and their associated details. This includes all WBS elements, activities,

steps, issues, notebooks, resource assignments, risks, and other details.

Workspace: Use this page to view information specific to each project, including

project management and project performance information.

Team Usage: Use this page to view cost or usage data at the team level and for

individual roles and resources assigned to the project you are working with.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1151

Issues: Use this page to view a list or chart of all the issues for the currently open

projects or portfolios.

Documents:

With a content repository enabled: Use this page to view, check in, check

out, and download selected documents from one or more projects,

associate additional items with a selected document, and compare

documents across projects.

Without a content repository enabled: Use this page to view document

details and send e-mail about a document.

Risks: Use this page to add, modify, or delete project risks.

Resources section

Enables you to customize which functions you can access from the Resources

menu and which pages you can access within the Resources section.

Menu Items option

Determines whether to display the Resources menu, which provides the option to

view the Enterprise Resource Data page.

Pages option

Determines which pages you can access. If you select the Pages option itself, you

can access all pages.

Administration: Use this page to create, modify, and delete resources, resource

teams, roles, and role teams.

Planning: Use the Resource Planning spreadsheet on the Planning page to specify,

review, or modify project-level and WBS-level allocation data for individual

resources and roles across a project lifecycle.

Assignments: Use this page to view and modify resource assignment data using

filters, which enables you to view resource assignment data for only the resources

or projects that you need to view.

Analysis: Use this page to compare resource utilization between resource teams,

project resources, and department resource, all from one central location.

Move Up

Moves the selected item one level up in the sort order.

Move Down

Moves the selected item one level down in the sort order.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select My Preferences.

2) On the My Preferences page, click the View tab.

1152

Views and Reports Detail Window of the Global Security Profiles Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign views and reports privileges to the selected global

security profile.

Screen Elements

Privilege field

The name of the security permission that is assigned (option selected) or denied

(option cleared) to users of the currently selected profile.

Privilege option

The option in the column header that determines whether the privileges are all

assigned (selected), all denied (clear), or individually configured (indicated with a

dash or - sign).

Add/Edit/Delete Global Activity and Assignment Layouts, Views and Filters option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

global activity and resource assignment layouts, views, and filters.

Add/Edit/Delete Global Dashboards option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

global dashboards.

Add/Edit/Delete Global Project, WBS and Portfolio Layouts, Views and Filters option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

global project, WBS, and portfolio layouts, views, and filters. This privilege is required to

save view changes made to the Portfolio Analysis page.

Add/Edit/Delete Global Reports option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

global reports, including editing report groups and global report batches and saving

global reports created or modified in P6 Professional.

Edit Global Tracking Layouts option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

global tracking layouts in P6 Professional.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1153

Edit Projects from Scorecards option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

projects from scorecards in the Portfolio View portlet and the Portfolio Analysis page.

This privilege is required to save data changes made to the Portfolio Analysis

page.The following project privileges are also required for scorecards: 'Edit Project

Details Except Costs/Financials' to edit project data, 'View Project Costs/Financials' to

view project cost data, 'Edit WBS Costs/Financials' to edit project cost data, 'Create

Project' to add a project, and 'Delete Project' to delete a project.

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Global Security Profiles.

3) On the Global Security Profiles page, click the Views and Reports detail window.

Views and Reports Detail Window of the Project Security Profiles Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign views and reports privileges to the selected project

security profile.

Screen Elements

Privilege field

The name of the security permission that is assigned (option selected) or denied

(option cleared) to users of the currently selected profile.

Privilege option

The option in the column header that determines whether the privileges are all

assigned (selected), all denied (clear), or individually configured (indicated with a

dash or - sign).

Add/Edit Project Level Layouts option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to create, modify, and remove

project level layouts in the Activities, Assignments, or WBS windows in P6 Professional.

Edit Project Reports option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to modify reports, modify report

batches, and export reports for projects in P6 Professional.

Publish Project Website option

Determines whether the profile will enable users to publish a Web site for projects in P6

Professional.

1154

Getting Here

1) Click the Administer menu and select User Access.

2) On the User Access page, click Project Security Profiles.

3) On the Project Security Profiles page, click the Views and Reports detail window.

Warnings Section of the Leveling Report Log

Overview

Use this section to view warnings for various projects.

Screen Elements

Activities without predecessors/successors table

The information about the activities that do not have predecessors or successors in a

table format.

Project ID field

The unique identifying code for the project.

Project Name field

The name of the project.

Activity ID field

The unique identifier of the activity.

System generated.

Activity Name field

The name of the activity. The activity name does not have to be unique.

Out of sequence activities field

The activities which are taking more or less time to complete than originally planned.

Activities with actual date later than data date field

The activities in which the data date is before the actual date.

Milestones with invalid relationships field

The milestones which were found to have invalid relationships during the scheduling

or leveling process.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1155

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Leveler...

(Shift+F9).

4) In the Level Resources dialog box, click the Options tab.

5) On the Options tab, select the Display leveling log upon completion and click Level.

6) In the Leveling Report Log, expand the Warnings section.

Warnings Section of the Scheduling Report Dialog Box of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this section to view warnings for various projects.

Screen Elements

Activities without predecessors/successors table

The information about the activities that do not have predecessors or successors in a

table format.

Project ID field

The unique identifying code for the project.

Project Name field

The name of the project.

Activity ID field

The unique identifier of the activity.

System generated.

Activity Name field

The name of the activity. The activity name does not have to be unique.

Out of sequence activities field

The activities which are taking more or less time to complete than originally planned.

Activities with actual date later than data date field

The activities in which the data date is before the actual date.

Milestones with invalid relationships field

The milestones which were found to have invalid relationships during the scheduling

or leveling process.

Tips

If use the shortcut, you must first select a project or activity.

1156

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, click the Actions menu and select Run Scheduler...

(F9).

4) In the Schedule Project dialog box:

a. Configure the options and select the Display scheduling log upon completion

option.

b. Click Schedule.

5) In the Scheduling Reports dialog box, expand the Warnings section.

WBS Budget Log Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to create, delete, or modify a WBS budget log.

Screen Elements

Budget Log toolbar

See Budget Log Toolbar (on page 1245).

Date field

The date of the budgeted line item.

Amount field

The amount of the budgeted line item.

Responsible field

The name of the person with signature approval for the line item.

Status field

The approval status of the line item.

Reason field

The reason why the expense was required.

Change Number field

The quantity purchased.

Tips

If you have more than one WBS selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1157

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select a WBS and click the Budget Log detail window.

WBS Category Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure WBS categories in all projects.

Screen Elements

WBS Category toolbar

See Categories Toolbar (see "Enterprise Data Categories Toolbar" on page 1258).

Category field

The custom names of available WBS categories. You can use custom WBS categories

to organize, filter, and report WBS information in all projects.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click WBS Category.

WBS Documents Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to assign documents to a WBS, remove or revise the relationship

between a document and a WBS, and view documents assigned to a WBS.

Screen Elements

Documents toolbar

See WBS Documents Toolbar of the Activities Page (on page 1369).

Title field

The identifying name of the document.

Document Category list

The classification label used to organize documents.

1158

Note: This field only contains data for WP&Doc documents, or documents that were

not added from the content repository. This field is blank for documents that were

added from the content repository.

Status field

The current status of the document.

Public Location field

The selected document's publicly-accessible file location. All project participants can

view this file.

Note: This field only contains data for WP&Doc documents, or documents that were

not added from the content repository. This field is blank for documents that were

added from the content repository.

Tips

If you have more than one WBS selected, the detail window will not be visible.

If you have a project template open, the icons in the detail window will be disabled.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select a WBS and click the Documents detail window.

WBS Earned Value Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to configure earned value for the selected WBS.

Screen Elements

Earned Value toolbar

See WBS Earned Value Toolbar (on page 1370).

Technique for computing performance percent complete section

The options for computing the performance percent complete.

Activity Percent Complete radio button

Determines whether to calculate earned value according to current activity

completion percentages.

Use resource curves/future period buckets option

Determines whether to include resource curves and future period buckets in the

calculation of earned value using current activity completion percentages.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1159

WBS Milestones Percent Complete radio button

Determines whether to calculate earned value by defining milestones at the WBS

level and assigning a level of significance or weight to each of them.

As progress occurs and you mark each milestone complete, the WBS element’s

performance percent complete is calculated based on the weight of the milestone.

0/100 radio button

Determines whether to calculate earned value as 100 percent only after the activity

ends.

50/50 radio button

Determines whether to calculate earned value as 50 percent after the activity starts

and until the activity ends. After the activity ends, the activity's earned value is 100

percent.

Custom percent complete radio button

Determines whether earned value is calculated as a percentage you specify. This

percentage applies after the activity starts and until the activity ends. After the

activity ends, the activity's earned value is 100 percent.

Technique for computing Estimate to Complete (ETC) section

The options for calculating the ETC of an activity, which can be computed as either

the remaining total cost for the activity (Remaining Total Cost), or as PF multiplied by

(Budget at Completion minus Earned Value Cost), depending on the Earned Value

technique selected for the activity's WBS.

ETC=remaining cost for activity radio button

Determines whether to calculate ETC values as the remaining cost to complete an

activity where:

Calculated as remaining duration of activity multiplied by applicable resource rates.

ETC=PF * (Budget at Completion - Earned Value) radio button

Select to calculate the ETC as a performance factor (PF) multiplied by the difference

between the Budget at Completion (BAC) and Earned Value, as in the following

equation:

ETC=PF * (BAC - EV)

PF=1 radio button: Select to set the performance factor to equal 1.

PF=1/Cost Performance Index radio button: Select to calculate the ETC as a

performance factor of 1 divided by the Cost Performance Index (CPI), where the

CPI = Earned Value Cost / Actual Cost. The equation can be interpreted as: PF

equals 1 divided by (EVC divided by AVC) equals PF equals 1 divided by CPI.

1160

PF=1/(Cost Performance Index * Schedule Performance Index) radio button:

Select to calculate the ETC as a performance factor of 1 divided by the Cost

Performance Index multiplied by the Schedule Performance Index (the Earned

Value Cost divided by the Planned Value Cost). The equation can be interpreted

as: PF equals 1 divided by (EVC divided by AVC) multiplied by (EVC divided by

PVC) equals PF equals 1 divided by (CPI multiplied by SPI).

PF=<value> radio button: Select to calculate Estimate To Complete (ETC) values

as a Performance Factor (PF) you specify multiplied by Budget At Completion

(BAC) less Earned Value Cost. If you select this option, type a factor in the PF field.

Tips

If you have more than one WBS selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select a WBS and click the Earned Value detail window.

WBS General Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to add or modify information about the selected WBS.

Screen Elements

General toolbar

See WBS General Toolbar of the Activities Page (on page 1371).

Anticipated Finish field

The expected finish date of the WBS level.

Anticipated Start field

The date the WBS level is expected to start.

Contains Summary Data option

Determines whether the project has been summarized. If the option is selected, the

project has been summarized.

Current Budget field

The current budget of the WBS.

Calculated as original budget plus approved budgets.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1161

Distributed Current Budget field

The sum of all budgets that were assigned to control accounts during baseline

planning.

These budgets are allocated for work and planning packages.

Forecast Finish Date field

The planned finish date of a project or WBS based in a what-if scenario designed to

stimulate project performance and outcomes and plan resource allocation.

Forecast Start Date field

The planned start date of a project or WBS based in a what-if scenario designed to

simulate project performance and outcomes and plan resource allocation.

Independent ETC Labor Units field

The user-entered estimate to complete total labor.

Independent ETC Total Cost field

The user-entered estimate to complete total cost.

Integrated WBS field

The type of system integration, if any, in place at your organization. Activities and

other project data within this WBS will be shared with the integrated solution you

choose. For example, ERP. The default value is <none>.

Original Budget field

The estimate of the total amount you require for the selected WBS, including all

contributed funds.

Parent field

The name of the WBS that is the parent of the selected WBS.

In this context, the selected WBS has inherited the attributes of its parent and is

formed one level beneath its parent in the hierarchy.

Project Status field

The current status of the activity, WBS, or project.

Proposed Budget field

The sum of the original budget and pending budgets.

Responsible Manager field

The name of the manager responsible for the completion of the WBS tasks.

Unallocated Budget field

The sum of a budget that has not been allocated to the selected WBS.

1162

WBS Category field

The category of the selected WBS. Use this category to organize, filter, and report WBS

information in all projects. The category applies to this WBS in all projects to which the

WBS item is assigned.

WBS Code field

The unique identifying code for the WBS element.

WBS Name field

The name of the selected WBS element.

WBS Path field

The WBS path if one was applied. The WBS path is a group of identical WBS levels used

across multiple projects. The WBS path lists activities grouped by WBS levels, without

displaying the project level node.

User Defined fields

The selection of user defined fields displayed in the General detail window.

Tips

To search for an item in the WBS hierarchy list, from the Search list, select a search

criteria. Type a search variable and click Search. Select a WBS and click Go, or click

Clear Result to return to the full hierarchy list.

If you have more than one WBS selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select a WBS and click the General detail window.

WBS Issues Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to manage the issues associated with the selected WBS.

Screen Elements

WBS Issues toolbar

See Issues Toolbar (on page 1292).

Issue Name field

The name or description of the issue.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1163

Priority field

The level of importance assigned to the issue.

Status field

The current status of the issue: Open, On Hold, Closed.

Owner field

The resource responsible for the selected issue.

If you have edit privileges, you can select a different owner. The list of available

resources you can select from depends upon your resource access security privileges.

Applies To field

The WBS to which the issue applies.

Identified By field

The name of the person who identified the issue. By default, this field displays your user

name.

Date Identified field

The date on which the issue was identified. By default, this field displays today's date.

Responsible Manager field

The name of the person responsible for the issue.

If you have edit privileges, you can select a different Responsible Manager. The list of

available resources depends upon your resource access security privileges.

Resolution Date field

The planned (open issue) or actual (closed issue) resolution date for the issue.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

Tips

If you have more than one WBS selected, the detail window will not be visible.

If you have a project template open, the icons in the detail window will be disabled.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select a WBS and then click the Issues detail window.

1164

WBS Milestones Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to configure milestones for the selected WBS.

Screen Elements

WBS Milestones toolbar

See WBS Milestones Toolbar of the Activities Page (on page 1371).

WBS Milestone field

The name of a milestone associated with the selected WBS.

Weight field

The weight of the milestone in relation to other milestones in the same project. The

weight value determines the importance of the milestone. For example, a milestone

with a weight of 1 has a lower measure of importance where 10 has a higher measure

of importance.

Completed option

The completion status of the WBS milestone.

When selected, indicates that the WBS milestone is complete. When clear, indicates

that the WBS milestone has not been completed.

Tips

If you have more than one WBS selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select a WBS and click the WBS Milestones detail window.

WBS Notebooks Detail Window of the Activities Page

Overview

Use this detail window to add comments, diagrams, and other notes to a WBS.

Screen Elements

WBS Notebooks toolbar

See Notebooks Toolbar (on page 1295).

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1165

Topic field

The name of the assigned topic.

Description field

A more detailed summary for the item. The description provides more information

than short names or titles. It can give background information or establish a purpose

for the item. These details help differentiate between items with similar names and are

especially useful in multi-user environments.

Tips

If you have more than one WBS selected, the detail window will not be visible.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Activities.

3) On the Activities page, select a WBS and click the Notebooks detail window.

WBS UDFs Page

Overview

Use this page to add and configure user defined fields for work breakdown structures

(WBSs).

Screen Elements

User Defined Fields toolbar

See User Defined Fields Toolbar (on page 1361).

User Defined Field field

The name of the user-defined field.

Data Type field

The name of the type of data that corresponds to each user-defined field. The data

type you select determines the type of data you can specify in a field. The following

data types are available:

Text: Allows you to use text or a combination of text and numbers.

Start Date: Allows you to enter Start Date information only.

Finish Date: Allows you to enter Finish Date information only.

Cost: Allows you to enter currency values.

Number: Allows you to use numerals with two decimal places.

Integer: Allows you to use numeric data, but not a number related to money.

1166

Indicator: Allows you to use an indicator field that you can use to enter

color-coded icon values in columns and display color-coded text in reports.

Getting Here

1) Click the Projects menu and select Enterprise Project Data, or click the

Administer menu and select Enterprise Data.

2) In the Enterprise Data pane, expand Projects and click WBS UDFs.

Workflow Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page

Overview

Use this section to enable and configure the Workflow and Document Review portlets in

the currently selected dashboard.

Screen Elements

Project Workflows option

Determines whether to display the Workflows portlet. The Workflows portlet is only

available as an option if the BPM server is properly configured by your administrator.

Select from the following options:

Show initiations from the past n days field: Displays workflows that have been

initiated within the specified number of days.

Document Reviews option

Determines whether to display the Document Reviews portlet. This feature requires

additional configuration by your administrator.

Show documents initiated in the past days field

The documents that have been initiated within the past specified number of days.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, click the Customize link.

4) On the Dashboard Details page, expand the Workflow section.

Workflows Portlet

Overview

Use this portlet to initiate, coordinate, participate, and review all project workflow tasks.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1167

Screen Elements

Action Required tab

See Action Required Tab of the Workflows Portlet (on page 540).

My Workflows tab

See My Workflows Tab of the Workflows Portlet (on page 894).

Tips

The "No information is available" message displays if no workflows require your

attention.

The Workflows portlet is only available when you integrate P6 with BPM.

To control the number of items that appear in the My Workflows tab, click Customize.

On the Content tab, specify a number in the Show initiations in the past n days field.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, expand the Workflows portlet.

Workgroup Tab of the Documents Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page

Overview

Use this tab to view all documents that are private to the workgroup. Workgroup

documents are not associated with any project and are available only to members of

the workgroup.

Screen Elements

Workgroup Tab toolbar

See Workgroup Tab Toolbar of the Documents Portlet (see "Workgroup Tab Toolbar of

the Documents Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page" on page 1372).

Title field

Displays the name of the workgroup and the titles of all associated documents.

Version field

The document's version or revision number.

Creation Date field

The date and time that the selected document was created.

Modified Date field

The date and time the document was last modified.

1168

Getting Here

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Workgroups portlet and select a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, expand the Documents portlet and click the

Workgroup tab.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Workgroups portlet.

4) In the My Workgroups portlet, expand a project and select a workgroup.

5) On the Workgroup Workspace page, expand the Documents portlet and click the

Workgroup tab.

Workgroups Details Page

Overview

Use this page to modify the content and layout of portlets on the Workgroup Workspace

page.

Screen Elements

Content tab

See Content Tab of the Customize Workgroup Workspace Page (on page 638).

Layout tab

See Layout Tab of the Customize Workgroup Workspace Page (on page 865).

Getting Here

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Workgroups portlet and select a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, click Customize.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1169

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Workgroups portlet and select a workgroup.

4) On the Workgroup Workspace page, click Customize.

Workgroups Portlet of the Workspace Page

Overview

Use this portlet to view all of the workgroups you are associated with for that project. If

you have the required project privileges, you can add or delete workgroups from the

portlet.

Screen Elements

Add link

Displays a dialog box in which you can enter a name to create a new workgroup.

Workgroup Name field

The name of the selected workgroup. Click a name to open the Workgroup

Workspace for that workgroup.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Workgroups portlet.

Working with the Activity Gantt Chart

Use the Activity Gantt chart to view the progression and relationships of activities or

projects on a timeline.

Gantt chart bars and activity dates or durations

You can easily update dates and durations by resizing or moving Gantt chart bars. When

you change bar positions in a Gantt chart, the start and finish date columns update

automatically to reflect the new bar position. After moving a Gantt bar, when you save

your changes, the remaining duration is recalculated based on the new dates and the

activity or project calendar. Because this calendar is applied when you save, if you

move but do not resize a Gantt bar, the duration might shorten or lengthen based on the

calendar's nonworktime.

Note: If you click the center of a bar and drag it along the

timescale, you will be prompted to add a Start On or After

constraint. In the Gantt chart, you can impose only a Start On or

After constraint.

Customizing the Gantt chart

1170

You can change the progress line options or the timescale for the Gantt chart in the

Customize Activity View dialog box.

Viewing the Gantt chart

In the Gantt chart, a vertical blue line represents the current data date for the project.

Vertical sightlines appear at each minor increment (bottom) of the timescale. Horizontal

sightlines appear at the bottom of every fifth table row. The timescale background is

shaded to indicate nonworktime based on the global default calendar.

Activity highlight

To quickly locate the activities you need to update, you can use the Progress Spotlight

feature, which highlights all activities that should have progressed during a specific time

period. This time period is defined by the smallest increment of the current timescale

since the last data date. For example, if the current timescale is set to Month/Week,

Progress Spotlight highlights all activities that should have progressed during the week

since the data date.

Workspace Details Page

Overview

Use this page to modify which portlets are displayed on the Projects Workspace page as

well as the layout of the chosen portlets.

Screen Elements

Content tab

See Content Tab of the Customize Workspace Page (see "Content Tab of the

Workspace Details Page" on page 643).

Layout tab

See Layout Tab of the Customize Workspace Page (see "Layout Tab of the Workspace

Details Page" on page 866).

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, click Customize.

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1171

Workspace of Workgroup Page

Overview

A workgroup is a space where you can focus on activities, issues, and documents

relating to a specific segment of a project. Think of a workgroup as a subset of a Project

Workspace that is used to focus on specific activities related to that project.

Note: Workgroups are always available, however if P6 is not

installed with a configured content repository, the Documents

portlet in Workgroups will not be available.

Screen Elements

Expand All link

Expands all portlets (when portlets are collapsed).

Collapse All link

Collapses all portlets to display only their title bars (when portlets are expanded).

Customize link

Displays a dialog box or page that allows you to configure the current page, tab,

dialog box, or portlet. See Customize Workgroup Workspace Page (see "Workgroups

Details Page" on page 1168) for further details.

Issues portlet

The Issues portlet on the Workspace of Workgroup page is identical to the Workgroup

Workspace page in the Projects section. See Issues Portlet of the Workgroup

Workspace Page (on page 857) for further details.

Documents portlet

The Documents portlet on the Workspace of Workgroup page is identical to the

Workgroup Workspace page in the Projects section. See Documents Portlet of the

Workgroup Workspace Page (on page 725) for further details.

Activities portlet

The Activities portlet on the Workspace of Workgroup page is identical to the

Workgroup Workspace page in the Projects section. See Activities Portlet of the

Workgroup Workspace Page (on page 550) for further details.

Tips

You can access all of your workgroups from the My Workgroups portlet in a

dashboard. You can access workgroups for a specific project from the Workgroups

portlet in the Project Workspace.

1172

A project can have any number of associated workgroups. With the required security

privilege, you can add and delete workgroups in the Workgroups portlet of the

Project Workspace.

If the number of rows in a portlet exceeds the number specified in the 'Maximum

number of rows displayed in workgroup lists' field, Previous and Next links appear.

Getting Here

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Workgroups portlet.

4) In the Workgroups portlet, select a workgroup.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard tab.

3) On the dashboard tab, expand the My Workgroups portlet.

4) In the My Workgroups portlet, expand a project and select a workgroup.

Workspace Page

Overview

Use this page to view information specific to each project, including project

management and project performance information. With the proper configuration, you

can also communicate and share information and documents with other project

members in this workspace.

Screen Elements

Expand All link

Expands all portlets (when portlets are collapsed).

Collapse All link

Collapses all portlets to display only their title bars (when portlets are expanded).

Customize link

Displays a dialog box or page that allows you to configure the current page, tab,

dialog box, or portlet. See Customize Workspace Page (see "Workspace Details Page"

on page 1170).

Context-Sensitive Help Topics

1173

Tips

Contract Management is Oracle Primavera’s contract management and project

administration application.

Contract Management portlets are only available for display if your organization is set

up to access Contract Management and the project for which you are customizing

the Project Workspace is linked to a Contract Management project.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

WP & Docs Tab of the Documents Page (with content repository)

Overview

Use this tab to view all the documents that have been added using P6 Professional.

Screen Elements

WP and Docs Tab toolbar

See WP & Docs Tab Toolbar (on page 1375).

Getting Here

From the Documents page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Documents.

3) On the Documents page, click the WP & Docs tab.

From the Workspace page:

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Documents portlet and click the WP &

Docs tab.

From the Dashboards page:

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, expand the My Documents portlet and click the WP & Docs

tab.

1174

WP & Docs Tab of the Project Documents Portlet of the Workspace Page (with content

repository)

Overview

Use this tab to view all project documents, including documents that have been added

using P6 Professional.

Screen Elements

WP & Docs toolbar

See WP & Docs Tab Toolbar (on page 1375).

Title field

The identifying name of the document.

Version field

The latest or most current version of the document.

Revision Date field

The date of the document's last update.

Getting Here

1) Click Projects.

2) On the Projects navigation bar, click Workspace.

3) On the Workspace page, expand the Project Documents portlet and click the WP &

Docs tab.

1175

Action Required for Document Reviews Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Details

Enables you to view details about the document, including who initiated the review,

the due date for the review, as well as the status and type of review.

View

Opens the document.

Approve Document

Enables you to approve a document in review, make comments, and upload

attachments.

Reject Document

Enables you to reject a document in review, make comments, and upload

attachments.

Action Required for Workflows Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

View Form

Displays additional details about the currently selected human task shown on its

associated workflow form, if one is available, for you to review and make any

changes.

Reference Topics

1176

Note: For tasks with no associated form, this icon is disabled. To

perform an action on a workflow task with no associated form, log

into BPM and use its Actions menu. It is also possible to design a

solution using the P6 Integration API.

View Status

Displays a diagram representing the entire workflow instance and its current status.

Status is conveyed visually with a colorized border outlining the objects in the

diagram.

Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

Group By

Displays a menu of the available fields you can select to group related rows in a table

into hierarchical lists you can expand and collapse. For example, group by a

Category field to arrange all rows hierarchically by their Category field values. Expand

the Category A group to view its data rows, the Category B group to view its data

rows, and so on.

Choices include:

Category: this is the default setting. Workflow category (or process) groupings are

based on your custom folder structure configured in BPM.

Due Date: workflow due date groupings are arranged as follows:

Due Today: tasks due on the current day.

Due This Month: tasks due within the current month.

Due in the Future: tasks due at some point beyond the current month.

Past Due: tasks with due dates at some point in the past.

Initiator: groups the tasks by the initiator of their associated workflow instance.

None: Removes any hiearchical groupings and arranges the tasks into a flat list

sorted by the currently selected column.

Filter By

Displays options for reducing the number of values displayed in a list or table by

showing only selected values and removing or filtering out unwanted values.

Choices include:

All: View all the tasks in the Action Required table. This is the default setting. This

setting does not include every task in the workflow. In this particular context, it

includes all the tasks that are either assigned to you specifically, or to your

assigned group or role.

Assigned to Me: Filters the tasks so that only the ones assigned to you, the current

user, appear in the table.

Reference Topics

1177

Due This Week: Filters the tasks so that only the ones with a due date within seven

days of today appear in the table.

Actions Menu of the Assignments Page

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

View Calendar

Opens a read-only version of the resource's calendar.

Jump to next highlighted (Ctrl+Down)

Shifts focus to the next row highlighted by the Progress Spotlight.

Jump to previous highlighted (Ctrl+Up Arrow)

Shifts focus to the previous row highlighted by the Progress Spotlight.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Import/Export

The Import/Export menu contains the following icons:

Export to Excel

Exports all data as it appears in the current view to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet

(.xls) file. Customize the rows to display only the data you want to export.

1178

Actions Menu on Activities Page

Overview

All of the icons listed will appear on the Actions menu. You can determine which ones will

also appear on your Actions toolbar.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add

The add menu contains the following options for adding new data to the activities

page:

Add Activity (Insert): Creates a new activity in the current project schedule.

Add Sibling WBS (Shift+Insert): Creates a new WBS entry at the same level in the

hierarchy as the currently selected WBS in the current project.

Add Child WBS (Ctrl+Insert): Creates a new WBS entry one level lower than the

currently selected WBS.

Add WBS from Template: Creates a new WBS that is based on an existing template

that you select.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Assign Resource

Opens a dialog box where you select a resource to assign to the selected activity.

Assign Role

Displays options for selecting a role to assign to the selected activity.

Define Baselines

Opens the Baselines dialog box which you can use to configure baselines.

Open Dependent Projects

Displays the current activity's dependent projects introduced when the activity shares

a cross-project relationship to an activity in another project.

Reference Topics

1179

View Calendar

Opens a read-only version of the project's calendar.

E-mail Activity Details

Sends an electronic message containing the details of the selected activity.

Jump to next highlighted (Ctrl+Down)

Shifts focus to the next row highlighted by the Progress Spotlight.

Jump to previous highlighted (Ctrl+Up Arrow)

Shifts focus to the previous row highlighted by the Progress Spotlight.

Link Selected Activities

Creates a relationship between the selected activities. The link may be seen on the

Gantt chart.

Run

The run menu contains the following actions:

Scheduler... (F9): Displays options for scheduling projects.

Schedule Preview: Enables or turns on the optional Schedule Preview mode. Click

this icon again to disable this mode. Not recommended for very large projects, the

Schedule Preview feature immediately updates the schedule as you work with

activities, steps, and resources. It is available only when a single project is open.

Example: If thousands of activities appeared in your Gantt chart,

P6 will allow you to add, modify, or delete them; however, by

default, it won't immediately update the results in order to

maximize performance. You could reschedule the project in order

to view the impacts of your changes and share them with other

users, but this will take time to perform. As a convenience, turn on

Schedule Preview to instantly preview any schedule changes

locally on your PC. This allows you to view them immediately, and

then decide to apply them or discard them.

Check Schedule...: Runs a report based on your configurations to check schedule

health.

Leveler... (Shift+F9): Displays options for resource and role leveling to prevent

resource demand from exceeding availability.

Apply Actuals: Updates actual and remaining values to reflect current progress on

the project as of the specified data date.

Recalculate Assignment Costs: Updates resource and role assignment cost data in

the project to reflect recent changes to one or more rates. Perform this command

after scheduling a project in case changes to dates cause assignments to span

periods with more than one rate in effect.

1180

Store Period Performance: Stores past period actuals per financial period.

Summarize Projects: Summarizes the open projects.

View Service Status

Opens the Service Status dialog box where you may review all of the services and

their current status.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Import/Export

The Import/Export menu contains the following options for importing and exporting

project data:

Import from Excel: Enables you to select an .xls file to import your data into the

current project. Your file must be formatted based on the import template.

Export to Excel: Exports the current item and applicable attributes to an .xls file.

Create Import Template: Generates an .xls file pre-filled with the field data

sequence required to import project data into the current project.

Send to ERP: Sends the current project data to an integrated enterprise reporting

system (if so equipped).

Actions Menu on EPS Page

Overview

The buttons on the Actions menu are identical to the buttons on the Actions toolbar.

Though the buttons on the menu are fixed, the same list of buttons can be configured on

the toolbar.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Reference Topics

1181

Add menu

The Add menu contains the following options:

Add Project: Enables you to create projects.

Add Project Template: Enables you to create templates.

Add Sibling EPS (Shift+Insert): Adds an EPS of the same hierarchical level as the

currently selected EPS to the EPS page.

Add Child EPS (Ctrl+Insert): Adds an EPS to the EPS page that is subordinate to the

currently selected EPS.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Open Project

Opens the currently selected project. Open projects display an open folder icon (

)next to their name.

Open Project Template

Opens the currently selected template.

Close All

Closes all open projects.

Define Baselines

Opens the Baselines dialog box which you can use to configure baselines.

Set Project Preferences...

Opens the Project Preferences dialog box which you can use to configure

calculations, Contract Management, defaults, general, Progress Reporter, and

summarization preferences for the currently selected project.

View Calendar

Opens a read-only version of the project's calendar.

Summarize Projects

Summarizes the currently selected project or EPS node.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

1182

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Import/Export menu

The Import/Export menu contains the following options for importing or exporting

project data:

Export to Excel: Exports the table to a Microsoft Excel file.

XML Project Import/Export...: Opens the Import/Export Project dialog box which

you can use to configure import, export, and status options for project data.

Activities Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Actions menu

See Actions Menu on Activities Page (on page 1178).

Edit menu

See Edit Menu on Activities Page (on page 1253).

View menu

See View Menu on Activities Page (on page 1365).

Activity View toolbar

See Activity View Toolbar (on page 1182).

Activity View Toolbar

Overview

The Activity View Toolbar contains fixed toolbuttons for modifying the view of the activity.

Screen Elements

Gantt Chart

Opens the table, Gantt chart, and a corresponding toolbar. The Gantt chart enables

you to view a graphical display of progress. The Gantt chart is customizable.

Reference Topics

1183

Table

Opens the table which enables you to view column information for projects, WBSs,

and activities.

Activity Network

Opens the Activity Network which displays the relationships between activities.

Calendar View

Opens the Calendar View which displays activities in a calendar format.

View list

Identifies the view for the work area. Views are arranged in the following categories:

User: A view created by the user. Only the user can display, edit, or delete this

view.

Multiple Users: A view created by one user who designates other users who can

also display this view. Only the creator can edit or delete a multiple user view.

Global: A view that any user can display. Only the creator and users with the

required security privilege can edit or delete a global view.

View

The following icons are listed under the View list:

Save View

Saves the changes applied to the current view. If you navigate away from the page,

you are prompted to save the view or discard the changes you made.

Save View As

Displays options for saving the current view as a new view with a new name.

Delete View

Permanently removes the current view.

E-mail View

Sends a hyperlink of the current activity view to one or more users by electronic mail.

The link opens the view and, if the user has the proper security privileges, the same

projects that were open when the view was sent.

Customize View...

Opens the Customize View dialog box with options that vary depending on your

current page. The dialog box has a series of tabs to customize the columns, grouping,

filters, bars, Gantt chart, usage, and security access.

1184

Applying Actuals Based on the Auto Compute Actuals Method (Reference)

The following processing occurs behind the scenes when you Apply Actuals.

For all activities where the Planned Start Date field is less than the new data date,

set the Actual Start field equal to the Planned Start field.

Set Remaining Duration equal to the Early Finish field minus the new data date.

Set the Actual Duration equal to the Original Duration minus the Remaining

Duration.

Set Actual Units equal to the Unit Percent multiplied by the At Complete Units.

For all activities where the Planned Finish Date field is less than the new data date,

set the Actual Finish field equal to the Planned Finish field.

All Remaining values are set to At Complete values minus Actuals.

For all role assignments without a resource, processing will update progress on the

role assignment.

If Units and Cost are linked, then Remaining and Actual Cost will always be set to

Units multiplied by Price per unit.

If there are multiple price per units, then assignment actual cost will be calculated

using time-varying resource rates.

Note: Apply Actuals will take resource lags and resource curves

into consideration, just as the Auto Compute Actuals feature does.

If there is a curve applied to a resource, the application will apply

the actuals to the resource based on the distribution of the curve.

Example: A project's data date is June 1 and a user applies actuals with a new data

date of June 20. An activity is planned for June 18 and is estimated to last 10 days until

June 27. The activity's resource assignment has +5 days of lag (meaning it cannot start

until June 23). When the user applies actuals on June 20, the activity's status is updated;

however, because the assignment carries a resource lag beyond the new data date, it is

not updated.

Applying Actuals Based on the Timesheets Method (Reference)

Before you Apply Actuals, ensure the timesheets have been completed and approved.

In addition to updating actual units in timesheets, users can also update remaining units,

or actual and percent complete values.

The following processing occurs behind the scenes when you Apply Actuals.

For all approved timesheets where the timesheet period end date falls before the

new data date, set all applicable actual unit fields for activities and related labor

or nonlabor assignments based on approved actual hours from timesheets.

Recalculate Remaining Units, Actual Duration, and Percent Complete fields.

Reference Topics

1185

Very complex business rules dictate how each activity and/or assignment is

calculated based on each activity's duration type setting. These calculations also

take into consideration updates a user might make to the actual units, actual and

remaining units, or actual and percent complete values on their timesheets.

Note: If there are timesheet actuals for a resource and the resource

is changed to use Auto Compute Actuals, the actuals will be

recalculated based on the auto compute actual method. Original

timesheet actuals will remain in the database.

Assignments Toolbar

Overview

The Assignments page provides a powerful set of menus and toolbuttons, collectively

referred to as the Assignments toolbar, described below. The Actions, Edit, and View

menus are fixed by the system; however, the toolbuttons available in the toolbar are

customizable and are automatically enabled or disabled based on choices you make as

you work.

Screen Elements

Actions Menu

See Actions Menu of the Assignments Page (on page 1177).

Edit Menu

See Edit Menu of the Assignments Page (on page 1252).

View Menu

See View Menu of the Assignments Page (on page 1362).

Default toolbuttons:

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Export to Excel

Exports all data as it appears in the current view to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet

(.xls) file. Customize the rows to display only the data you want to export.

1186

Copy (Ctrl+C)

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted into another supported location.

Fill Down (Ctrl+I)

In a selected range of cells in a single table column, inserts the value in the first or top

cell into the remaining cells down the column.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Columns

Displays options for showing and hiding the columns (fields) that appear in the current

table or page.

Grouping

Displays options for re-arranging a list of values by grouping them into a hierarchy and

sorting.

Filters

The filters menu contains the following options for filtering data:

Show matches for : Select all applied filters or any applied filters to determine

which matches are displayed.

Filters: Displays a dialog box with configurable options for applying filters to the

current assignments view. See Customize Filters Dialog Box of the Assignments

Page (on page 681).

Add New Filter: Displays a dialog box with configurable options for adding a

new filter to the current assignments view. See Create Filter Dialog Box of the

Assignments Page (on page 652).

Clear Filters: Clears all set filters from the current assignments view.

Gantt Chart Options

Enables you to configure how the Gantt chart and its bars display. (Available only in

the Gantt chart view.)

Usage Options

Displays the Customize Usage Options dialog box. Use this dialog box to select which

columns are displayed as well as modify options for displaying time distributed values

and determining whether to calculate the average for units and costs.

Reference Topics

1187

Expand All (Alt+Plus)

In a hierarchical list or page of child items grouped by parent items, expands the list to

show all parent and child items.

Collapse All (Alt+Minus)

In a hierarchical list, arranges entries so that only the parent items are shown and child

entries are hidden.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Assignments View Toolbar

See Assignments View Toolbar (on page 1188).

Assignments Toolbar of the Activities Page

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability is subject to

change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions, and other factors.

Screen Elements

Apply Changes (Ctrl+S)

Saves any changes to the detail window.

Assign Resource and Save (Ctrl+Alt+R)

Opens a window where you select a resource to assign to the selected activity.

Assign Role and Save (Ctrl+Alt+O)

Opens a window where you select a role to assign to the selected activity.

Request Resources (Ctrl+Alt+Q)

Opens a window where you can request resources based on your search criteria.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Customize Columns

Displays choices for customizing the columns (fields) that appear on the selected

screen. (Available only in the Gantt chart and Table views.)

1188

Activity selector

Cycles through the available activities and determines which data display in the

detail window. Click or to change which activity and its corresponding data

are displayed.

Assignments View Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Gantt Chart

Opens the Gantt chart on the right side of the page. The Gantt chart is a graphical

display of the start and end dates for the resource assignments in your view.

Table

Displays the assigned resource and corresponding role with information regarding the

associated project and assignments in a spreadsheet format. When this option is

selected, the Gantt chart is not displayed.

Usage Spreadsheet

Displays the usage spreadsheet, which allows you to view live unit and cost spreads

for the resource or role assignment.

View list

Identifies the view for the work area. Views are arranged in the following categories:

User: A view created by the user. Only the user can display, edit, or delete this

view.

Multiple Users: A view created by one user who designates other users who can

also display this view. Only the creator can edit or delete a multiple user view.

Global: A view that any user can display. Only the creator and users with the

required security privilege can edit or delete a global view.

View

The following icons are listed under the View list:

Save View

Saves the changes applied to the current view. If you navigate away from the page,

you are prompted to save the view or discard the changes you made.

Reference Topics

1189

Save View As

Displays options for saving the current view as a new view with a new name.

Delete View

Permanently removes the current view.

Customize View...

Opens the Customize View dialog box with options that vary depending on your

current page. The dialog box has a series of tabs to customize the columns, grouping,

filters, bars, Gantt chart, usage, and security access.

Available Columns of the Activities Page

Overview

The following is a comprehensive list of all the columns/fields available to add to the

table on the Activities page.

Screen Elements

Activity Count category

Activity Count field

The number of activities that are currently in progress.

Activity Resource Assignment Count field

The number of resources assigned to the activity, WBS, or project.

Actual Completed Activities field

The number of activities that have an actual finish in the project.

Actual In-Progress Activities field

The number of activities that are currently in progress.

Actual Not Started Activities field

The number of activities that are currently not started.

BL Project Completed Activities field

The number of completed activities in the project baseline.

BL Project In-Progress Activities field

The number of in-progress activities in the project baseline.

BL Project Not Started Activities field

The number of activities not started in the project baseline.

1190

BL1 Completed Activities field

The number of activities that should be completed according to the primary baseline.

BL1 In-Progress Activities field

The number of activities that should be in progress according to the primary baseline.

BL1 Not Started Activities field

The number of activities that should be not started according to the primary baseline.

Activity Steps category

Step Count field

The number of steps assigned to the activity, WBS, or project.

Steps Completed field

The number of steps that are marked as complete.

Steps In Progress field

The number of steps currently in progress.

Steps Not Started field

The number of steps that are not yet started.

Costs category

Actual Expense Cost field

The actual costs for all project expenses associated with the activity.

Actual Labor Cost field

The actual costs for all labor resources assigned to the activity.

If no resources are assigned, calculated as the Activity Actual Labor Units multiplied

by Project Default Price divided by Time.

Actual Material Cost field

The actual units for all material resources assigned to the activity.

Actual Nonlabor Cost field

The actual costs for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activity.

If no resources are assigned, calculated as the Activity Actual Nonlabor Units

multiplied by Project Default Price divided by Time.

Actual This Period Labor Cost field

The costs for all labor resources assigned to the activity incurred during this financial

period.

Reference Topics

1191

If period performance is stored, the calculation is Actual Labor Cost minus the sum of

the stored Actual This Period Labor Cost fields for all previous periods.

If the period performance is not stored, Actual This Period Labor Cost is the same as

Actual Labor Cost.

Actual This Period Material Cost field

The material costs incurred during this financial period.

If period performance is stored, the calculation is Actual Material Cost minus the sum

of the stored Actual This Period Material Cost fields for all previous periods.

If the period performance is not stored, Actual This Period Material Cost is the same as

Actual Material Cost.

Actual This Period Nonlabor Cost field

The nonlabor costs incurred during this financial period.

If period performance is stored, the calculation is Actual Nonlabor Cost minus the sum

of the stored Actual This Period Nonlabor Cost fields for all previous periods.

If the period performance is not stored, Actual This Period Nonlabor Cost is the same

as Actual Nonlabor Cost.

Actual Total Cost field

The sum of the actual labor cost, the actual nonlabor cost and the actual expense

cost.

Calculated as Actual Labor Cost plus Actual Nonlabor Cost plus Actual Expense Cost

as of the project data date.

At Completion Expense Cost field

The sum of the actual plus remaining costs for all expenses associated with the

activity.

Calculated as actual Expense Cost plus Remaining Expense cost.

At Completion Labor Cost field

The sum of the actual plus remaining costs for all labor resources assigned to the

activity.

If the activity is not started, this equals the planned labor costs. If the activity is

completed, this equals the actual labor costs.

Calculated as Actual Labor Cost plus Remaining Labor Cost.

At Completion Material Cost field

The sum of all actual and remaining costs for material resources.

At Completion Nonlabor Cost field

The sum of the actual plus remaining costs for all nonlabor resources assigned to the

activity.

1192

It is the same as the planned nonlabor costs if the activity is not started, and the

actual nonlabor costs once the activity is completed.

Calculated as Actual Nonlabor Cost plus Remaining Nonlabor Cost.

At Completion Total Cost field

The total cost at completion for the activity including labor resources, nonlabor

resources, material resources and project expenses.

BL Project Expense Cost field

The project expenses associated with the activity in the project baseline.

BL Project Labor Cost field

The cost for all labor resources assigned to the activity in the project baseline.

BL Project Material Cost field

The budgeted (at completion) cost for all material resources assigned to the activity

in the project baseline.

BL Project Nonlabor Cost field

The cost for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activity in the project baseline.

BL Project Total Cost field

The total cost for the activity in the project baseline.

BL1 Expense Cost field

The cost for all project expenses associated with the activity in the primary baseline.

BL1 Labor Cost field

The cost for all labor resources assigned to the activity in the primary baseline.

BL1 Material Cost field

The cost for all material resources assigned to the activity in the primary baseline.

BL1 Nonlabor Cost field

The cost for all nonlabor resources assigned ot the activity in the primary baseline.

BL1 Total Cost field

The total cost for the activity in the primary baseline.

Planned Expense Cost field

The planned costs for all project expenses associated with the activity.

Planned Labor Cost field

The planned costs for all labor resources assigned to the activity.

Reference Topics

1193

If no resources are assigned, calculated as Activity Planned Labor Units multiplied by

Project Default Price divided by Time.

Planned Material Cost field

The planned cost for all material resources assigned to the activity.

Planned Nonlabor Cost field

The planned costs for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activity.

If no resources are assigned, calculated as Activity Planned Nonlabor Units multiplied

by Project Default Price divided by Time.

Planned Total Cost field

The planned total cost for the activity, including labor resources, nonlabor resources,

material resources, and project expenses.

Calculated as Planned Labor Cost plus Planned Nonlabor Cost plus Planned Material

Cost plus Planned Expense Cost.

Remaining Expense Cost field

The remaining costs for all project expenses associated with the activity.

Remaining Labor Cost field

The remaining costs for all labor resources assigned to the activity.

If no resources are assigned, calculated as the Activity Remaining Labor Units

multiplied by Project Default Price divided by Time.

Remaining Material Cost field

The sum of all material resource remaining costs.

Remaining Nonlabor Cost field

The remaining costs for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activity.

If no resources are assigned, calculated as Activity Remaining Nonlabor Units

multiplied by Project Default Price divided by Time.

Remaining Total Cost field

The remaining total cost for the activity, including labor resources, nonlabor

resources, material resources, and project expenses.

Calculated as Remaining Labor Costs plus Remaining Nonlabor Costs plus Remaining

Material Costs plus Remaining Expense Costs.

Variance BL Project - Expense Cost field

The difference between the baseline project expense cost and the at completion

expense cost.

Calculated as Baseline Project Expense Cost minus At Completion Expense Cost.

1194

Variance BL Project - Labor Cost field

The difference between the baseline project labor cost and at completion labor cost.

Calculated as Baseline Project Labor Cost minus At Completion Labor Cost.

Variance BL Project - Material Cost field

The difference between baseline project material cost and at completion material

cost.

Calculated as Baseline Project Material Cost minus At Completion Material Cost.

Variance BL Project - Nonlabor Cost field

The difference between the baseline project nonlabor cost and at completion

nonlabor cost.

Calculated as Baseline Project Nonlabor Cost minus At Completion Nonlabor Cost.

Variance BL Project - Total Cost field

The difference between the baseline project total cost and the at completion total

cost.

Calculated as Baseline Project Total Cost minus At Completion Total Cost.

Variance BL1 - Expense Cost field

The difference between primary baseline expense cost and at completion expense

cost.

Calculated as Primary Baseline Expense Cost minus At Completion Expense Cost.

Variance BL1 - Labor Cost field

The difference between primary baseline labor cost and the at completion labor

cost.

Calculated as BL1 Labor Cost minus At Completion Labor Cost.

Variance BL1 - Material Cost field

The difference between primary baseline material cost and the at completion

material cost.

Calculated as BL1 Material Cost minus At Completion Material Cost.

Variance BL1 - Nonlabor Cost field

The difference between the primary baseline nonlabor cost and the at completion

nonlabor cost.

Calculated as BL1 Nonlabor Cost minus At Completion Nonlabor Cost.

Variance BL1 - Total Cost field

The difference between the primary baseline and the at completion total cost.

Calculated as BL1 minus At Completion Total Cost.

Reference Topics

1195

Dates category

Actual Finish field

The latest actual finish date of all activities in the project.

Actual Start field

The earliest actual start date of all activities in the project.

Anticipated Finish field

The anticipated finish date of WBS, project, or EPS elements.

If there are no children WBS, project, or EPS elements, the anticipated finish date will

be the finish date displayed in the columns.

Anticipated Start field

The anticipated start date of WBS, project, or EPS elements.

If there are no children WBS, project, or EPS elements, the anticipated start date will

be the start date displayed in the columns.

BL Project Finish field

The current latest finish date of all activities in the project baseline.

BL Project Start field

The current earliest start date of all activities in the project baseline.

BL1 Finish field

The current finish date of the activity in the primary baseline.

Set to the activity planned finish date while the activity is not started, the remaining

finish date while the activity is in progress, and the actual finish date once the activity

is completed.

BL1 Start field

The current start date of the activity in the primary baseline.

Set to the planned start date until the activity is started, then set to the actual start

date.

Early Finish field

The earliest possible date the activity can finish.

The date is calculated based on network logic, schedule constraints, and resource

availability. Early finish dates can change as the project progresses and changes are

made to the project management plan.

Early Start field

The earliest possible date the remaining work for the activity can begin.

1196

The date is calculated based on network logic, schedule constraints, and resource

availability. Early start dates can change as the project progresses and as changes

are made to the project management plan.

Expected Finish field

The date the activity is expected to finish according to the progress made on the

activity's work products.

External Early Start field

The date value that determines the early start date for imported activities with

external constraints lost (relations to/from external projects that do not exist in the

database).

This field is the relationship early finish date when the lost relationship type is Finish to

Start or Start to Start. When the relationship type is Start to Finish or Finish to Finish, this

field is calculated as Relationship Early Finish Date minus Remaining Duration of the

successor.

External Late Finish field

The date value that determines the Late Finish Date for imported activities with

external constraints lost (to/from external projects that do not exist in the database).

This field is the relationship late finish date when the lost relationship type is Finish to

Start or Finish to Finish. When the relationship type is Start to Start or Start to Finish, this

field is calculated as Relationship Late Start plus Remaining Duration of the

predecessor.

Finish field

The planned finish date for an activity not yet finished or the actual finish date for an

activity that has already finished.

Late Finish field

The latest possible date the activity must finish without delaying the project finish

date.

Calculated by the project scheduler based on network logic, schedule constraints,

and resource availability.

Late Start field

The latest possible date the remaining work for the activity must begin without

delaying the project finish date.

This date is calculated by the project scheduler based on network logic, schedule

constraints, and resource availability.

Planned Finish field

The date the activity is scheduled to finish.

Reference Topics

1197

This date is calculated by the project scheduler but can be updated manually by the

project manager. This date is not changed by the project scheduler after the activity

has started.

Planned Start field

The proposed start date of the project.

This date the activity is scheduled to begin is calculated by the project scheduler but

can be updated manually by the project manager. This date is not changed by the

project scheduler after the activity has been started.

Primary Constraint Date field

The constraint date for the activity, if the activity has a constraint. The activity's

constraint type determines whether this is a start date or finish date.

Activity constraints are used by the project scheduler.

Remaining Early Finish field

The date the remaining work for the activity is scheduled to finish.

Remaining Early Start field

The date the remaining work for the activity is scheduled to begin.

Remaining Late Finish field

The remaining late finish date calculated by the scheduler.

Remaining Late Start field

The remaining late start date calculated by the scheduler.

Resume Date field

The date when a suspended task or resource dependent activity is resumed. The

resume date must be later than the suspend date and earlier than the actual finish

date.

The suspend/resume period behaves like a non-work time on the activity calendar or

resource calendar for task and resource dependent activities.

Secondary Constraint Date field

The date associated with the secondary constraint, if the activity has a secondary

constraint assigned.

This field is only available if a primary constraint is already entered.

Start field

The planned start date for an activity not yet started or the actual start date for an

activity that has already started.

1198

Suspend Date field

The date work has stopped on a given activity for an unknown, but temporary, period

of time. For example, an event might force an activity to be interrupted or resource

constraints might put an activity on hold.

The suspend date must be later than the actual start date, which the activity must

have. The progress of the activity can be resumed by setting the resume date. The

suspend/resume period behaves like a non-work time on the activity calendar or

resource calendar for task and resource dependent activities.

Durations category

Actual Duration field

The total working time from the activity actual start date to the actual finish date for

completed activities, or the current data date for in-progress activities.

The actual working time is computed using the activity's calendar.

At Completion Duration field

The total working time from the activity's current start date to the current finish date.

BL Project Duration field

The duration for the activity in the project baseline. The duration is the total working

time from the activity current start date to the current finish date.

Calculated as Actual Duration plus Remaining Duration.

The total working time is calculated using the activity's calendar.

BL1 Duration field

The duration for the activity in the primary baseline. The duration is the total working

time from the activity current start date to the current finish date.

It is the same as the actual duration plus the remaining duration.

The total working time is calculated using the activity's calendar.

Free Float field

The amount of time the activity can be delayed before delaying the start date of any

successor activity.

Planned Duration field

The total working time from the activity planned start date to the planned finish date.

The planned working time is calculated using the activity's calendar.

Remaining Duration field

The total working time from the activity remaining start date to the remaining finish

date.

Reference Topics

1199

The remaining working time is calculated using the activity's calendar. Before the

activity is started, the remaining duration is the same as the planned duration. After

the activity is completed the remaining duration is zero.

Remaining Float field

The amount of time remaining by which the activity can be delayed before delaying

the project finish date.

Calculates as Late Finish minus Remaining Finish. If the remaining finish is the same as

the early finish (in general, when the activity is not started), then the remaining float is

the same as the total float.

Total Float field

The amount of time the activity can be delayed before delaying the project finish

date.

Calculated as Late Start minus Early Start or as Late Finish minus Early Finish.

Variance BL Project - Duration field

The duration between the activity's baseline project duration and the at completion

duration.

Calculated as Baseline Project Duration minus At Completion Duration.

Variance BL Project - Finish Date field

The duration between the current project finish date in the baseline project finish

date.

Variance BL Project - Start Date field

The duration between the current project start date and the baseline project start

date.

Variance BL1 - Duration field

The duration between the activity's primary baseline duration and the at complete

duration.

Variance BL1 - Finish Date field

The duration between the current project finish date and the primary baseline finish

date.

Variance BL1 - Start Date field

The duration between the current project start date and the primary baseline start

date.

1200

Earned Value category

Accounting Variance field

The difference between the planned value of work scheduled and the actual cost of

work performed.

A negative value indicates that actual costs have exceeded the scheduled costs.

Calculated as Planned Value minus Actual Cost.

Accounting Variance - Labor Units field

The difference between the planned value of work scheduled and the actual work

performed.

A negative value indicates that actual costs have exceeded the scheduled costs.

Calculated as Planned Value Labor Units minus Actual Units.

Budget At Completion field

The planned total cost through activity completion.

Calculated as Planned Labor Cost plus Planned Nonlabor Cost plus Planned Expense

Cost.

Budget At Completion - Labor Units field

The baseline labor units.

Cost Performance Index field

A measure of cost efficiency on a project.

A value less than 1 indicates that the actual cost has exceeded the planned value.

Calculated as Earned Value divided by Actual Cost.

Cost Performance Index - Labor Units field

A measure of cost efficiency on a project.

A value less than 1 indicates that the actual cost has exceeded the planned value.

Calculated as Earned Value divided by Actual Cost.

Cost Variance field

A measure of cost performance on a project.

A negative value indicates that actual costs have exceeded the value of work

performed.

Calculated as Earned Value minus Actual Cost.

Cost Variance - Labor Units field

The difference between the earned value of labor units and the actual cost of labor

units.

A negative value indicates that actual costs have exceeded the value of work

performed.

Reference Topics

1201

Calculated as Earned Value Planned Units minus Actual Units.

Cost Variance Index field

The ratio of the cost variance and the earned value of work performed.

Calculated as Cost Variance divided by Earned Value.

Cost Variance Index - Labor Units field

The ratio of the cost variance labor units and the earned value of work performed.

Calculated as Cost Variance Labor Units divided by Earned Value Labor Units.

Earned Value Cost field

The portion of the project baseline total cost of the activity that is actually completed

as of the project data date.

Budget at completion is calculated from the project baseline.

Calculated as Budget At Completion multiplied by Performance Percent Complete.

The method for computing performance percent complete depends on the Earned

Value technique selected for the activity's WBS.

Earned Value Labor Units field

The portion of the project baseline labor units that is actually completed as of the

project data date.

Baseline labor units are taken from the project baseline.

Calculated as Project Baseline Labor Units multiplied by Performance Performance

Complete. The method for computing performance percent complete depends on

the Earned Value technique selected for the activity's WBS.

Estimate At Completion - Labor Units field

The estimated labor units at completion of the activity.

Calculated as Actual Labor Units plus Estimate to Complete Labor Units. Estimate to

complete labor units is calculated based off of the earned value setting on the WBS.

Estimate At Completion Cost field

The expected total cost of a schedule activity, a work breakdown structure

component, or the project when the defined scope of work will be completed.

Calculated as Actual Cost plus Estimate to Complete Cost. The method for

calculating estimate to complete depends on the earned value technique selected

for the activity's WBS.

Estimate To Complete field

The estimated cost to complete the activity.

1202

Calculated as either the Remaining Total Cost for the activity, or as Performance

Factor multiplied by (Budget At Completion minus Earned Value), depending on the

earned-value technique selected for the activity's WBS. Budget at completion is

calculated from the project baseline.

Estimate To Complete Labor Units field

The estimated quantity to complete the activity.

Calculated as either the Remaining Total Units for the activity or as Performance

Factor multiplied by (BL Labor Units minus Earned Value) depending on the

earned-value technique selected for the activity's WBS.

Planned Value Cost field

The portion of the project baseline total cost of the activity that is scheduled to be

completed as of the project data date.

Also known as the work scheduled to be performed for the activity. The schedule

percent complete specifies how much of the activity's project baseline duration has

been completed so far. Budget at completion is calculated from the project baseline

Calculated as Budget At Completion multiplied by Schedule Percent Complete.

Planned Value Labor Units field

The product of the budget at completion and the schedule percent complete.

The schedule percent complete specifies how much of the activity's baseline

duration has been completed so far. Budget at completion is calculated from the

primary baseline.

Calculated as Budget At Completion multiplied by Schedule Percent Complete.

Schedule Performance Index field

The ratio of the earned value of work performed and the work scheduled to be

performed.

A value less than 1 indicates that less work was actually performed than was

scheduled.

Calculated Earned Value divided by Planned Value.

Schedule Performance Index - Labor Units field

The ratio of the earned value labor units and the planned value labor units.

Calculated as Earned Value Labor Units divided by Planned Value Labor Units.

Schedule Variance field

The measure of schedule performance on a project.

A negative value indicates that less work was actually performed than was

scheduled.

Calculated as Earned Value minus Planned Value.

Reference Topics

1203

Schedule Variance - Labor Units field

The difference between the earned value of work performed and the work

scheduled to be performed.

Calculated as Earned Value Labor Units minus Planned Value Labor Units.

Schedule Variance Index field

The ratio of the schedule variance and the work scheduled to be performed.

Calculated as Schedule Variance divided by Planned Value.

Schedule Variance Index - Labor Units field

The ratio of schedule variance labor units and the planned value labor units.

Calculated as the Schedule Variance Labor Units divided by Planned Value Labor

Units.

To Complete Performance Index field

The ratio of the remaining work to the remaining funds.

Calculated as (Budget At Completion minus Earned Value) divided by (Estimate At

Completion minus Actual Units).

Variance At Completion field

The difference between the project baseline total cost and the current estimate of

total cost.

A negative value indicates an estimated cost overrun. Budget At Completion is

calculated from the current project baseline.

Calculated as Budget At Completion minus Estimate At Completion.

Variance At Completion - Labor Units field

The difference between the project baseline planned total labor units and the

estimate at completion labor units.

Calculated as Project Baseline Planned Total Labor Units minus Estimate At

Completion Labor Units.

General category

Activity ID field

The unique identifying code for the activity.

Activity Leveling Priority field

Determines the priority of the activity when performing resource leveling.

Activity Name field

The name of the activity. The activity name does not have to be unique.

1204

Activity Status field

The current status of the activity.

Activity Type field

The type of activity.

Task Dependent: Activities are scheduled using the activity's calendar rather than

the calendars of the assigned resources. Choose task dependent when you want

to control the duration of the activity yourself (that is, no resources are assigned),

or when one or more resources assigned to the same activity can work according

to the same calendar. The activity is scheduled according to the activity’s

calendar, not the resource calendars. For example, you might have an activity to

cure concrete; you know how long the task takes and the addition of resources

won’t complete the task any earlier. You would designate this activity as task

dependent.

Resource Dependent: Activities are scheduled using the calendars of the assigned

resources. This type is used when several resources are assigned to the activity, but

they might work separately. Choose resource dependent when you want to

schedule each resource according to his/her own time schedule, or resource

calendar, not the activity calendar. The assigned resource availability determines

the start and finish dates of the activity. Typically, you use this type when multiple

resources assigned to the same activity can work independently, or when

availability can affect the activity’s duration. For example, an activity that requires

an Inspector might be delayed if that resource is assigned to multiple projects or is

on vacation.

Start or Finish Milestone: Milestone activities are zero-duration without resources,

marking a significant project event. Choose start milestone or finish milestone to

indicate that the activity marks the beginning or end of a major stage in the

project. Milestones have zero duration. They can have expenses assigned to

them, but not resources. In an office building addition project, examples of

milestones might include Project Definition Complete, Structure Complete, or End

Bidding Process.

Level of Effort: Activities have a duration that is determined by its dependent

activities and are typically administration type. Choose level of effort to indicate

that the activity’s duration depends on its predecessor and/or successor activities.

A level of effort activity is usually one that is ongoing, such as clerical work,

change management, or project management tasks. For example, site cleanup

could be considered a level of effort activity; it occurs repeatedly and is

dependent on the completion of a phase.

Reference Topics

1205

WBS Summary: Activities that are used to roll up date, duration, and percent

complete values for a group of activities that share a common WBS code level.

Choose WBS Summary to indicate that the activity is a summary-level WBS activity.

A WBS Summary activity represents a group of activities that share a common WBS

level. The summary-level WBS activity enables roll-ups of dates for the activity

group. The duration of a WBS Summary activity extends from the start of the

earliest activity in a group to the finish of the latest activity. WBS codes control

which activities are part of a WBS Summary activity; P6 incorporates any activities

that share a component of the WBS Summary activity's WBS code into the WBS

Summary activity. For example, all activities whose WBS codes begin with A (A.1,

A.1.1, A.1.2, etc.) can be part of one WBS Summary activity whose WBS code is A.

At a lower level, all activities whose WBS codes start with A.1 (A.1.1, A.1.2, etc.)

can be part of a WBS Summary activity whose WBS code is A.1.

Added By field

The name of the user who added the activity to the project.

Added Date field

The date the activity was inserted into the project.

Auto Compute Actuals option

Determines whether the activity actual and remaining units, and start and finish dates

for the resource are calculated automatically using the planned dates, planned

units, and the activity's schedule percent complete.

If this option is selected, the actual/remaining units and actual dates are

automatically updated when project actuals are applied. This assumes that all work

by the resource proceeds according to plan.

This option is not available if the Uses Timesheets option is selected.

Calendar field

The calendar assigned to the activity.

Cost Account IDs field

The identifying codes of the cost accounts assigned to the activity.

Cost Account Names field

The name(s) of the cost accounts assigned to the activity.

Critical option

Determines whether the activity is critical.

An activity is critical when its total float is below the critical duration specified for the

project. Delaying critical activities will delay the finish date of the project.

Duration Type field

The duration type of the activity.

1206

Fixed Units/Time: The resource units per time are constant when the activity

duration or units are changed. This type is used when an activity has fixed

resources with fixed productivity output per time period.

Fixed Duration and Units/Time: The activity duration is constant as the units or

resource units per time are changed. This type is used when the activity is to be

completed within a fixed time period regardless of the resources assigned.

Fixed Units: The activity units are constant when the duration or resource units per

time are changed. This type is used when the total amount of work is fixed, and

increasing the resources can decrease the activity duration.

Est Weight field

The estimated weight for the activity, used for top-down estimation.

Top-down estimation weights are used to calculate the proportion of units that each

activity receives in relation to the other activities within the same WBS. Top-down

estimation distributes estimated units in a top-down manner to activities using the WBS

hierarchy.

Last Modified By field

The user who last modified the activity.

Last Modified Date field

The date the activity was last modified.

Longest Path option

Determines critical activities base on the sequence of driving activities that determine

the project end date.

Owner field

The resource responsible for the activity.

Primary Constraint field

The primary constraint type for the selected activity.

Primary Resource field

The person primarily responsible for performing or overseeing work related to a

specific activity. The first resource you assign to an activity is automatically identified

as the activity's primary resource.

Project ID field

The unique identifier of the project.

Project Name field

The name of the associated project.

Reference Topics

1207

Project Status field

The current status of the activity, WBS, or project.

Secondary Constraint field

The secondary constraint type for the selected activity.

WBS field

The name of the WBS element.

WBS Code field

The unique identifier of the WBS for the associated activity.

Lists category

Expenses field

The expenses assigned to the activity.

Notebook Topics field

The name of the notebook topics assigned to the activity.

Predecessors field

The predecessor activities assigned to the activity.

Resource IDs field

The identifiers of the resources assigned to the activity.

Resource Names field

The resources assigned to the activity.

Role IDs field

The identifiers of the roles assigned to the activity.

Roles field

The name of the roles assigned to the resources for the activity.

Steps field

The names of the steps assigned to the activity.

Successors field

The successor activities assigned to the activity.

Multiple Float Paths category

Float Path field

The integer representing the critical path this activity is on.

1208

Value 1 is the most critical path, value 2 is the second most critical path.

Float Path Order field

The integer representing the order in which this object was found on one of the critical

paths.

Percent Complete category

Activity % Complete field

The percent of the activity that has been completed.

Calculated as (Original or Planned Duration minus Remaining Duration) divided by

Original or Planned Duration.

If the activity's percent complete type is set to Physical, the application will not

calculate a value for the Activity % Complete field.

Units % Complete equals (Actual Labor Units plus Actual Non-labor Units) divided by

(Actual Labor Units plus Actual Non-labor Units plus Remaining Labor Units plus

Remaining Non-labor Units).

Cost % Complete field

The percent complete of costs for all labor resources, nonlabor resources, and

expenses for the activity.

Calculated as Actual Total Cost divided by At Completion Total Cost multiplied by

100.

Cost % of Planned field

The percent complete of planned costs for all labor resources, nonlabor resources,

and expenses for the activity.

Calculated as Actual Total Cost divided by BL Planned Total Cost multiplied by 100.

The value can exceed 100.

Duration % Complete field

The activity actual duration percent of planned.

The baseline planned duration is the activity's at complete duration from the primary

baseline.

Calculated as Actual Duration divided by Baseline Planned Duration multiplied by

100. The value can exceed 100.

Duration % Of Planned field

The activity actual duration percent of planned.

The baseline duration is the activity's at completion duration from the project

baseline.

Calculated as Actual Duration divided by BL Duration multiplied by 100. The value can

exceed 100.

Reference Topics

1209

Expense Cost % Complete field

The percent complete of cost for all expenses associated with the activity.

Calculated as Actual Expense Cost divided by At Completion Expense Cost multiplied

by 100. Always in the range 0 to 100.

Labor Cost % Complete field

The percent complete of costs for all labor resources assigned to the activity.

Calculated as Actual Labor Cost divided by At Completion Labor Cost multiplied by

100. Always in the range 0 to 100.

Labor Units % Complete field

The percent complete of units for all labor resources for the activity.

Calculated Actual Labor Units divided by At Completion Labor Units multiplied by 100.

Always in the range 0 to 100.

Material Cost % Complete field

The percent complete of costs for all material resources assigned to the activity.

Calculated as Actual Nonlabor Cost divided by At Completion Nonlabor Cost

multiplied by 100. Always in the range 0 to 100.

Nonlabor Cost % Complete field

The percent complete of costs for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activity.

Calculated as Actual Nonlabor Cost divided by At Completion Nonlabor Cost

multiplied by 100. Always in the range 0 to 100.

Nonlabor Units % Complete field

The percent complete of units for all nonlabor resources for the activity.

Calculated as Actual Nonlabor Units divided by At Completion Nonlabor Units

multiplied by 100. Always in the range 0 to 100.

Percent Complete Type list

Determines the way in which the application calculates the percent complete for the

activity.

This default activity percent complete type will be applied to all new activities added

to a project. If you change this setting for an existing project that has activities, the

percent complete type of those existing activities will not be changed.

Performance % Complete field

The performance percent complete specifies what percentage of the activity's

planned worth has been earned so far.

1210

The performance percent complete is used to calculate earned value. It can be

based on the activity percent complete, on the 0/100 rule, on the 50/50 rule,

depending on the technique for computing earned-value percent complete for the

activity's WBS.

Physical % Complete field

The physical percent complete, which can either be user entered or calculated from

the activity's weighted steps.

Schedule % Complete field

The activity schedule percent complete, which specifies how much of the activity's

project baseline duration has been completed so far.

If the data date is earlier than the baseline start, the schedule percent complete is 0.

If the data date is later than the baseline finish, the schedule percent complete is 100.

The schedule percent complete indicates how much of the activity duration should

be currently completed, relative to the selected project baseline.

Calculated based on where the current data date falls relative to the activity's

project baseline start and finish dates.

Units % Complete field

The percent complete of units for all labor and nonlabor resources assigned to the

activity.

Calculated as Actual Units divided by At Completion Units multiplied by 100. Always in

the range 0 to 100.

Timesheet Feedback category

Feedback from Resource field

The notes received from the resource.

New Feedback option

Determines whether there is new information about this activity which has not yet

been reviewed. If the option is not selected, then there is no new feedback or the

feedback has already been reviewed.

Review Finish Date field

The finish date of the activity as proposed by the primary resource using timesheets,

while the activity is in for review state.

If the project manager approves the activity completion, the review finish is copied to

the actual finish.

Review Status field

The activity review status.

Reference Topics

1211

Primary resources can set the status to For Review when they believe the activity is

completed, but a primary resource is not allowed to mark activities as completed.

Units category

Actual Labor Units field

The actual units for all labor resources assigned to the activity.

Actual Nonlabor Units field

The actual units for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activity.

Actual This Period Labor Units field

The number of labor units used during this financial period.

If period performance is stored, the calculation is Actual Labor Units minus the sum of

the stored Actual This Period Labor Units fields for all previous periods.

If the period performance is not stored, Actual This Period Labor Units is the same as

Actual Labor Units.

Actual This Period Nonlabor Units field

The nonlabor units used during this financial period.

If period performance is stored, the calculation is Actual Nonlabor Units minus the sum

of the stored Actual This Period Nonlabor Units fields for all previous periods.

If the period performance is not stored, Actual This Period Nonlabor Units is the same

as Actual Nonlabor Units.

At Completion Labor Units field

The sum of the actual plus remaining units for all labor resources assigned to the

activity.

It is the same as the planned labor units if the activity is not started, and the actual

labor units once the activity is completed.

Calculated as Actual Labor Units plus Remaining Labor Units.

At Completion Nonlabor Units field

The sum of the actual plus remaining units for all nonlabor resources assigned to the

activity.

It is the same as the planned nonlabor units if the activity is not started, and the actual

nonlabor units once the activity is completed.

Calculated as Actual Nonlabor Units plus Remaining Nonlabor Units.

BL Project Labor Units field

The units for all labor resources assigned to the activity in the project baseline.

BL Project Nonlabor Units field

The units for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activity in the project baseline.

1212

BL1 Labor Units field

The units for all labor resources assigned to the activity in the primary baseline.

Calculated as Baseline Actual Labor Units plus Baseline Remaining Labor Units.

BL1 Nonlabor Units field

The units for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activity in the primary baseline.

Planned Labor Units field

The planned units for all labor resources assigned to the activities in the project.

Planned Nonlabor Units field

The planned units for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activities in the project.

Remaining Labor Units field

The remaining units for all labor resources assigned to the activities.

The remaining units reflects the work remaining to be done for the WBS.

Remaining Nonlabor Units field

The remaining units for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activities.

The remaining units reflects the work remaining to be done for the WBS.

Variance BL Project - Labor Units field

The difference between baseline labor units and at completion labor units.

Calculated as Baseline Labor Units minus At Completion Labor Units.

Variance BL Project - Nonlabor Units field

The difference between the baseline nonlabor units and the at completion non labor

units.

Calculated as Baseline Nonlabor Units minus At Completion Nonlabor Units.

Variance BL1 - Labor Units field

The difference between primary baseline labor units and the at completion labor

units.

Calculated as BL1 Labor Units minus At Completion Labor Units.

Variance BL1 - Nonlabor Units field

The difference between the primary baseline nonlabor units and the at completion

nonlabor units.

Calculated as BL1 Nonlabor Units minus At Completion Nonlabor Units.

Global Activity Codes category

This category contains global activity codes listed in alphabetical order.

Reference Topics

1213

EPS Activity Codes category

This category contains EPS activity codes listed in alphabetical order.

Project Activity Codes category

This category contains project activity codes listed in alphabetical order.

User-Defined category

This category contains user-defined columns listed in alphabetical order.

Available Columns of the Assignments Page

Overview

The following is a comprehensive list of all the columns/fields available to add to the

table on the Assignments page.

Screen Elements

Costs category

Actual Cost field

The actual non-overtime plus overtime cost for the resource assignment on the

activity.

Calculated as Actual Regular Cost plus Actual Overtime Cost.

Actual Overtime Cost field

The actual overtime cost for the resource assignment on the activity.

Calculated as Actual Overtime Units multiplied by Cost Per Time multiplied by

Overtime Factor.

Actual Regular Cost field

The actual non-overtime cost for the resource assignment on the activity.

Calculated as Actual Regular Units multiplied by Cost Per Time.

Actual This Period Cost field

The labor, nonlabor, and material costs incurred during this financial period.

If period performance is stored, the calculation is Actual Cost minus the sum of the

stored Actual This Period Cost fields for all previous periods.

If the period performance is not stored, Actual This Period Cost is the same as Actual

Cost.

At Completion Cost field

The sum of the actual costs plus remaining costs for the resource assignment on the

activity.

1214

Calculated as Actual Costs plus Remaining Costs.

Planned Cost field

The planned cost for the resource assignment on the activity.

Calculated as Planned Units multiplied by Price Per Time.

Remaining Cost field

The remaining cost for the resource assignment on the activity.

Calculated as Remaining Units multiplied by Cost/Time.

Staffed Remaining Cost field

The remaining cost for resource assignments that have a filled role.

Unstaffed Remaining Cost field

The remaining cost for resource assignments that do not have a filled role.

Dates category

Activity Finish field

The finish date of the activity to which the assignment belongs. This is the planned

finish if the activity has not started, the remaining finish if the activity is in progress, or

the actual finish if the activity has completed.

Activity Start field

The start date of the activity to which the assignment belongs.This is the planned start

date if the activity has not started, the remaining start date if the activity is in progress,

or the actual start date if the activity has started.

Actual Finish field

The date the resource actually finished working on the activity.

Actual Start field

The date the resource actually started working on the activity.

Finish field

The planned finish date for a resource assignment not yet finished or the actual finish

date for a resource assignment that has already finished.

Planned Finish field

The date the resource is scheduled to finish working on the activity.

This date is calculated by the project scheduler but can be updated manually by the

project manager. This date is not changed by the project scheduler after the activity

has been started. This is the finish date that Timesheets users follow and schedule

variance is measured against.

Reference Topics

1215

Planned Start field

The date the resource is scheduled to begin working on the activity.

This date is calculated by the project scheduler but can be updated manually by the

project manager. This date is not changed by the project scheduler after the activity

has been started. This is the start date that Timesheets users follow and schedule

variance is measured against.

Remaining Early Finish field

The date the remaining work for the resource assignment is scheduled to finish.

Remaining Early Start field

The date the remaining work for the resource assignment is scheduled to begin.

Remaining Late Finish field

The remaining late finish date calculated by the scheduler.

Remaining Late Start field

The remaining late start date calculated by the scheduler.

Start field

The planned start date for an assignment not yet started or the actual start date for

an assignment that has already started.

Durations category

Actual Duration field

The total working time from the assignment actual start date to the actual finish date

for completed assignments. Or the current data date for in-progress assignments.

At Complete Duration field

The total working time from the activity's current start date to the current finish date.

The current start date is the planned start date until the activity is started, then it is the

actual start date. The current finish date is the activity planned finish date while the

activity is not started, the remaining finish date while the activity is in progress, and the

actual finish date once the activity is completed. The total working time is calculated

using the activity's calendar.

Planned Duration field

The planned working time for the resource assignment on the activity, from the

resource's planned start date to the planned finish date.

Planned Lag field

The planned time lag between the activity's planned start date and the resource's

planned start date on the activity.

1216

If the resource is planned to start work when the activity is planned to start, the

planned lag is zero.

Remaining Duration field

The remaining working time for the resource assignment on the activity, from the

resource's remaining start date to the remaining finish date.

The remaining working time is calculated using the calendar determined by the

activity type. Resource dependent activities use the resource's calendar, other

activity types use the activity's calendar. Before the activity is started, the remaining

duration is the same as the original duration. After the activity is completed, the

remaining duration is zero.

Remaining Lag field

The time lag between the activity's remaining start date and the resource's remaining

start date on the activity.

If the resource's remaining work starts on the activity's remaining start date, the lag is

zero. Before the activity is started, the remaining lag is the same as the planned lag.

General category

Activity ID field

The unique identifying code for the activity.

Activity Name field

The name of the activity. The activity name does not have to be unique.

Activity Status field

The current status of the activity.

Activity Type list

Determines how duration and schedule dates are calculated for an activity:

Task Dependent: If resources should be scheduled based on the activity's

calendar.

Resource Dependent: If resources should be scheduled based on their assigned

calendars.

Level of Effort: For an ongoing activity whose duration depends on other activities.

The duration of a Level of Effort activity is calculated based on the schedule dates

from its predecessors and successors.

Start or Finish Milestone: If an activity marks the beginning or end of a major

project phase.

WBS Summary: For an activity with a particular WBS code.

Assigned By field

The user who assigned the resource to the assignment.

Reference Topics

1217

Assigned Date field

The date the task was assigned to you, your group, or your role.

Calculate Costs from Units option

Determines whether by default any new assignments for this resource will have its

costs recalculated whenever any quantity changes occur. This setting can be

overwritten on a per project basis.

Calendar field

The name of the calendar selected for the resource.

Cost Account field

The cost account associated with the resource assignment.

Curve field

The resource's units and costs distributed over the duration of an activity.

A curve can only be assigned to activities that have a duration type of Fixed Duration

and Units or Fixed Duration and Units/Time.

A manual curve type indicates that the assignment's future period resource

distribution was manually entered in the Resource Usage Spreadsheet of P6

Professional. If you select a different curve type, the manually-entered distribution is

deleted, and the units and costs for the assignment are redistributed according to the

curve you select. Be sure this is the appropriate course of action before replacing a

manual curve with another curve.

Drive Activity Dates option

Determines whether new resource/role assignments drive activity dates by default.

Duration Type field

The duration type of the assignment.

Fixed Units/Time: The resource units per time are constant when the assignment

duration or units are changed. This type is used when an assignment has fixed

resources with fixed productivity output per time period.

Fixed Duration and Units/Time: The assignment duration is constant as the units or

resource units per time are changed. This type is used when the assignment is to

be completed within a fixed time period regardless of the resources assigned.

Fixed Units: The assignment units are constant when the duration or resource units

per time are changed. This type is used when the total amount of work is fixed,

and increasing the resources can decrease the assignment duration.

Overtime Factor field

The overtime factor used to compute the overtime price for the resource assignment

on this activity.

1218

When the resource is assigned to the activity, the resource's overtime factor is copied

to the assignment. The assignment overtime factor is refreshed from the resource

value when resource prices are synchronized for the project.

Calculated as Standard Price multiplied by Overtime Factor.

Planned Units/Time field

The planned units per time at which the resource is to perform work on this activity.

For example, a person assigned full time would perform 8 hours of work per day. A

department of five people might perform at 5 days per day.

Price/Unit field

The price per time for the resource on this activity.

This price is used to calculate the resource's cost for the activity. When the resource is

assigned to the activity, the resource's price is copied to the assignment based on the

effective date of the price and the activity start date. The assignment price is

refreshed whenever resource prices are synchronized for the project.

Primary Resource field

The person primarily responsible for performing or overseeing work related to a

specific assignment.

Proficiency field

The resource's proficiency at performing this role.

The values are 1 - Master, 2 - Expert, 3 - Skilled, 4 - Proficient, and 5 - Inexperienced. If

you do not have the proper privilege, you cannot access this field.

Project ID field

The unique identifier of the associated project.

Project Name field

The name of the associated project.

Rate Source field

The value that indicates which price/unit will be used to calculate costs for the

assignment, such as Resource, Role, and Override.

When a resource and only a resource is assigned to an activity, the rate source will

automatically equal Resource. When a role and only a role is assigned to an activity,

the rate source will automatically equal Role. When both a resource and role are

assigned to the activity, the rate source can be either Resource or Role determined

by the Rate Source Preference. In any case, the Override value allows you to specify

any other price/unit.

Reference Topics

1219

Rate Type field

Determines which of the five user-defined resource and role rate types will be used to

calculate the cost for the resource assignment.

Remaining Units/Time field

The units per time required to complete the activity.

Resource Type field

The resource type. Valid values are:

Labor: Indicates that the selected resource performs labor, measured in units of time.

Nonlabor: Indicates that the resource is a nonlabor resource, such as equipment,

measured in units of time.

Material: Indicates that the resource has a unit of measure other than time. You can

select a unit of measure for the material resource.

Search Criteria field

The resource request used as a search template to search for a qualified resource.

WBS ID field

The unique identifier of the WBS for the activity.

WBS Name field

The name of the WBS element.

WBS Path field

The WBS path if one was applied. The WBS path is a group of identical WBS levels used

across multiple projects. The WBS path lists activities grouped by WBS levels, without

displaying the project level node.

Percent Complete category

Pending % Complete field

The estimate of the percentage of the resource's units of work completed on this

activity.

The pending percent complete is entered by each resource using timesheets. This

value is used to compute the resource's remaining units for the activity when project

actuals are applied. The project manager specifies whether resources update their

percent complete or remaining units for each project.

Units % Complete field

The percent complete of units for the resource assignment on the activity.

Always in the range 0 to 100.

Calculated as Actual Units divided by At Completion Units multiplied by 100.

1220

Resource category

Active option

Determines whether the resource is currently active. A marked option indicates the

resource is active.

Non-active resources might have left the organization, but are not deleted from the

system since they might have actual hours.

Auto Compute Actuals option

Determines whether the activity actual and remaining units, and start and finish dates

for the resource are calculated automatically using the planned dates, planned

units, and the activity's schedule percent complete.

If this option is selected, the actual/remaining units and actual dates are

automatically updated when project actuals are applied. This assumes that all work

by the resource proceeds according to plan.

This option is not available if the Uses Timesheets option is selected.

Default Units/Time field

The default units/time for resource assignments in projects, which is shown as either a

percentage or units/duration depending on your settings in My Preferences. If you

change the default setting, existing resource assignments are not affected. The

default setting only applies to new resource assignments.

E-mail Address field

The e-mail address for the resource.

Employee ID field

The resource identifier within the organization, typically the employee number or

social security number.

Max Resource Units/Time field

The maximum work units per time this resource can perform on all their assigned

activities.

For example, a person working full time could perform 8 hours of work per day. A

department of five people might perform at 5 days per day.

Max Role Units/Time field

The maximum work units per time this role can perform on assigned activities.

Office Phone field

The office phone number for the resource.

Other Phone field

The alternate phone numbers for the resource.

Reference Topics

1221

Overtime Allowed option

Determines whether the resource is allowed to log overtime hours.

Resource ID field

The unique identifier of the resource.

Resource ID Name field

The identifying code and name of the resource.

Resource Name field

The name of the resource.

Role ID field

The unique identifier for the role the resource is performing on this activity.

You can assign a resource to the same activity more than once, performing different

roles. The project manager controls whether the same resource can be assigned to

an activity more than once.

Role ID Name field

The identifying code and name of the role.

Role Name field

The name of the role assigned to the resource.

Unit of Measure field

The unit of measure this material resource uses.

Units category

Actual Overtime Units field

The actual overtime units worked by the resource on this activity.

This value is calculated from timesheets when project actuals are applied or can be

entered directly by the project manager.

Actual Regular Units field

The actual non-overtime units worked by the resource on this activity.

This value is calculated from timesheets when project actuals are applied or can be

entered directly by the project manager.

Actual This Period Units field

The labor, nonlabor, and material units used during this financial period.

If period performance is stored, the calculation is Actual Units minus the sum of the

stored Actual This Period Units fields for all previous periods.

1222

If the period performance is not stored, Actual This Period Units is the same as Actual

Units.

Actual Units field

The actual units on this resource assignment during a financial period.

At Completion Units field

The sum of the actual units and remaining units for the resource assignment on the

activity.

Calculated as Actual Units plus Remaining Units.

Pend Remaining Units field

The estimate of the resource's remaining units on this activity.

The pending remaining units is entered by each resource using timesheets. This value

is copied to the resource's remaining units for the activity when project actuals are

applied. The project manager specifies whether resources update their percent

complete or remaining units for each project.

Planned Units field

The planned units of work for the resource assignment on the activity.

Remaining Units field

The remaining units of work to be performed by this resource on this activity.

Calculated as Budgeted or Planned Units minus Actual Units.

Staffed Remaining Units field

The remaining units for resource assignments that have filled a role.

Unstaffed Remaining Units field

The remaining units for resource assignments that have not filled a role.

User-Defined Code and Field categories

Global Activity Codes category

This category contains global activity codes listed in alphabetical order.

Resource Codes category

This category contains resource codes listed in alphabetical order.

User-Defined category

This category contains user-defined columns listed in alphabetical order.

Resource User-Defined category

This category contains user-defined columns for resources listed in alphabetical order.

Reference Topics

1223

Project Codes category

This category contains project codes listed in alphabetical order.

Available Columns of the EPS Page

Overview

The following is a comprehensive list of all the columns/fields available to add to the

table on the EPS page.

Screen Elements

Baseline category

Baseline Data Date field

The data date of the project baseline for the selected project.

Project Baseline field

The project baseline for the selected project.

Budget category

Annual Discount Rate field

The interest rate associated with the cost of an investment from your commercial

bank or another funding source. Valid values are 0 to 100. This rate is used to

calculate Total Spending Plan Present Value and Total Benefit Plan Present Value.

For example, an annual growth rate of an investment such as 4.75% can be used as

an annual discount rate. This rate is used when a future value is assumed and you are

trying to find the required net present value.

Current Budget field

The sum of the original budget plus the approved and pending budgets from the

budget change log.

Current Variance field

The difference between the current budget and the total spending plan. This value is

not rolled up.

Calculated as Current Budget minus Total Spending Plan.

Distributed Current Budget field

The current budget values from one level lower.

Independent ETC Labor Units field

The user-entered ETC total labor.

1224

Independent ETC Total Cost field

The user-entered ETC total cost.

Net Present Value field

The difference between the present value (PV) of the future cash flows from an

investment and its investment cost. Present value of the expected cash flows is

computed by discounting them at the required rate of return or discount rate. Positive

net present value (NPV) is an indicator of projects that should be pursued.

Calculated as Total Benefit Plan (PV) minus Total Spending Plan (PV).

Original Budget field

The original budget for the project.

Payback Period field

The length of time required to elapse before net profits have recovered the initial and

periodic costs of an investment.

Proposed Budget field

The sum of the original budget and approved and pending budgets from the budget

change log.

Calculated as Original Budget plus Approved and Pending Budgets from the budget

change log.

Return on Investment field

A calculation of the expected return or benefit over and above the investment costs

of a project or portfolio, expressed as a percentage.

Calculated as the Net Present Value divided by the Total Spending Plan Present

Value.

For example, a project is expected to cost 1.0 million dollars with a total benefit of 1.2

million dollars. It's NPV is $200,000. The return on investment is 20%.

Total Funding field

The total amount of funding contributed to the project by your funding sources.

Unallocated Budget field

The difference between the total current and distributed current budget.

Calculated as Total Current Budget minus Distributed Current Budget.

Cost category

Actual Expense Cost field

The actual costs for all project expenses associated with the EPS.

Reference Topics

1225

Actual Labor Cost field

The actual cost for all labor resources assigned to the activity.

Actual Material Cost field

The actual units for all material resources assigned to the activity.

Actual Nonlabor Cost field

The actual units for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activity.

Actual This Period Labor Cost field

The labor costs incurred during this financial period.

If period performance is stored, the calculation is Actual Labor Cost minus the sum of

the stored Actual This Period Labor Cost fields for all previous periods.

If the period performance is not stored, Actual This Period Labor Cost is the same as

Actual Labor Cost.

Actual This Period Material Cost field

The material costs incurred during this financial period.

If period performance is stored, the calculation is Actual Material Cost minus the sum

of the stored Actual This Period Material Cost fields for all previous periods.

If the period performance is not stored, Actual This Period Material Cost is the same as

Actual Material Cost.

Actual This Period Nonlabor Cost field

The nonlabor costs incurred during this financial period.

If period performance is stored, the calculation is Actual Nonlabor Cost minus the sum

of the stored Actual This Period Nonlabor Cost fields for all previous periods.

If the period performance is not stored, Actual This Period Nonlabor Cost is the same

as Actual Nonlabor Cost.

Actual Total Cost field

The sum of the actual labor cost, the actual nonlabor cost and the actual expense

cost.

Calculated as Actual Labor Cost plus Actual Nonlabor Cost plus Actual Expense Cost

as of the project data date.

At Completion Expense Cost field

The sum of the actual plus remaining cost for all project expenses associated with the

cost account.

Calculated as Actual Expense Cost plus Remaining Expense Cost.

1226

At Completion Labor Cost field

The sum of the actual plus remaining costs for all labor resources assigned to the

activity.

It is the same as the planned labor costs if the activity is not started, and the actual

labor costs once the activity is completed.

Calculated as Actual Labor Cost plus Remaining Labor Cost.

At Completion Material Cost field

The material cost at completion. It is the sum of the actual plus remaining costs for all

material resources assigned to the activity.

It is the same as the planned material costs if the activity is not started, and the actual

material costs once the activity is completed.

Calculated as Actual Material Cost plus Remaining Material Cost.

At Completion Nonlabor Cost field

The nonlabor cost at completion. It is the sum of the actual plus remaining costs for all

nonlabor resources assigned to the activity.

It is the same as the planned nonlabor costs if the activity is not started, and the

actual nonlabor costs once the activity is completed.

Calculated as Actual Nonlabor Cost plus Remaining Nonlabor Cost.

At Completion Total Cost field

The total cost at completion for the project including labor resources, nonlabor

resources, material resources and project expenses.

BL Project Expense Cost field

The project expenses associated with the project in the project baseline.

BL Project Labor Cost field

The cost for all labor resources assigned to the project in the project baseline.

BL Project Material Cost field

The budgeted (at completion) cost for all material resources assigned to the project

in the project baseline.

BL Project Nonlabor Cost field

The cost for all nonlabor resources assigned to the project in the project baseline.

BL Project Total Cost field

The total cost for the project in the project baseline.

Planned Expense Cost field

The planned costs for all expenses associated with the project or EPS.

Reference Topics

1227

Planned Labor Cost field

The planned costs for all labor expenses associated with the project or EPS.

Planned Material Cost field

The planned cost for all expenses associated with the project or EPS.

Planned Non Labor Cost field

The planned costs for all nonlabor expenses associated with the project or EPS.

Planned Total Cost field

The planned cost for all expenses associated with the project or EPS.

Remaining Expense Cost field

The remaining costs for all project expenses associated with the activities in the EPS.

Remaining Labor Cost field

The remaining costs for all labor resources assigned to the activities.

The remaining cost reflects the cost remaining for the EPS.

Remaining Material Cost field

The remaining material costs for all project expenses associated with the activities in

the EPS.

Remaining Nonlabor Cost field

The remaining nonlabor costs for all project expenses associated with the activities in

the EPS.

Remaining Total Cost field

The remaining total cost for the project, including labor resources, nonlabor resources,

and project expenses.

Calculated as Remaining Labor Costs plus Remaining Nonlabor Costs plus Remaining

Expense Costs.

Variance - Expense Cost field

The difference between project baseline expense cost and the at completion

expense cost.

Calculated as Project Baseline Expense Cost minus At Completion Expense Cost.

Variance - Labor Cost field

The difference between the project baseline labor cost and the at completion labor

cost.

Calculated as BL Labor Cost minus At Completion Labor Cost.

1228

Variance - Material Cost field

The difference between the project baseline planned material cost and the at

completion material cost.

Calculated as Project Baseline Planned Material Cost minus At Completion Material

Cost.

Variance - Nonlabor Cost field

The difference between the project baseline labor cost and at completion labor cost.

Calculated as BL Nonlabor Cost minus At Completion Nonlabor Cost.

Variance - Total Cost field

The difference between the project baseline total cost and at completion total cost.

Calculated as BL Total Cost minus At Completion Total Cost.

Dates category

Actual Finish field

The latest actual finish date of all activities in the EPS.

Actual Start field

The earliest actual start date of all activities in the EPS.

Anticipated Finish field

The anticipated finish date of the EPS.

If the EPS has no children, the anticipated finish date will be the finish date displayed

in the columns.

Anticipated Start field

The anticipated start date of the EPS.

If the EPS has no children, the anticipated start date will be the start date displayed in

the columns.

BL Finish field

The current latest finish date of all activities in the project baseline.

BL Start field

The current earliest start date of all activities in the project baseline.

Data Date field

The date used as the starting point to calculated the schedule.

The project status is up to date as of the data date. The data date is modified when

project actuals are applied.

Reference Topics

1229

Finish field

The date that the remaining work for the project element is scheduled to finish.

This date is computed by the Project Scheduler. Before the project starts, the

remaining finish date is the same as the planned finish date.

Forecast Finish Date field

The alternate end date to be used by the scheduler.

The user sets the alternate end date by dragging the project bar in the Gantt chart

while manually leveling the resource profile in a resource analysis layout.

Forecast Start Date field

The alternate start date to be used by the scheduler.

The user sets the alternate start date by dragging the project bar in the Gantt chart

while manually leveling the resource profile in a resource analysis layout.

Last Apply Actuals Date field

The last date apply actuals was run for this project.

Must Finish By field

The date constraint placed on the project end date.

Planned Finish Date field

The latest planned finish date for the project.

Planned Start Date field

The earliest planned start date of the project.

Project Forecast Start field

The alternate start date to be used by the scheduler.

The user sets the alternate start date by dragging the project bar in the Gantt chart

while manually leveling the resource profile in a resource analysis layout.

Project Planned Start field

The planned start date of the project.

Used by the project scheduler.

Scheduled Finish field

The calculated latest early finish date, which is based on the schedule most recently

generated for the project.

Start field

The date that the remaining work for the project element is scheduled to begin.

1230

This date is computed by the project scheduler. Before the project starts, the

remaining start date is the same as the planned start date.

Durations category

Actual Duration field

The total working time from the activity actual start date to the actual finish date for

completed activities, or the current data date for in-progress activities.

The actual working time is computed using the activity's calendar.

At Completion Duration field

The duration at completion.

BL Duration field

The planned duration for the activity in the primary baseline. Planned duration is the

total working time from the activity current start date to the current finish date.

It is the same as the actual duration plus the remaining duration.

The total working time is calculated using the activity's calendar.

Planned Duration field

The total working time from the project planned start date to the planned finish date.

Remaining Duration field

The total working time from the EPS remaining start date to the remaining finish date.

Total Float field

The amount of time the activity can be delayed before delaying the project finish

date.

Calculated as Late Start minus Early Start or as Late Finish minus Early Finish.

Variance - Duration field

The duration between the activity's baseline duration and the at complete duration.

Calculated as Baseline Duration minus At Completion Duration.

Variance - Finish Date field

The duration between the finish date in the current project and the baseline finish

date.

Calculated as Finish Date minus Baseline Finish Date.

Variance - Start Date field

The duration between the start date in the current project and the baseline start

date.

Calculated as Start Date minus Baseline Start Date.

Reference Topics

1231

Earned Value category

Accounting Variance field

The difference between the planned value of work scheduled and the actual cost of

work performed.

A negative value indicates that actual costs have exceeded the scheduled costs.

Calculated as Planned Value minus Actual Cost.

Accounting Variance - Labor Units field

The difference between the planned value of work scheduled and the actual work

performed.

A negative value indicates that actual costs have exceeded the scheduled costs.

Calculated as Planned Value Labor Units minus Actual Units.

Actual Cost field

The actual cost for the project expense.

Budget At Completion field

The planned total cost through activity completion.

Calculated as Planned Labor Cost plus Planned Nonlabor Cost plus Planned Expense

Cost.

Budget At Completion - Labor Units field

The baseline labor units.

Cost Performance Index field

A measure of cost efficiency on a project.

A value less than 1 indicates that the actual cost has exceeded the planned value.

Calculated as Earned Value divided by Actual Cost.

Cost Performance Index - Labor Units field

A measure of cost efficiency on a project.

A value less than 1 indicates that the actual cost has exceeded the planned value.

Calculated as Earned Value divided by Actual Cost.

Cost Variance field

A measure of cost performance on a project.

A negative value indicates that the actual cost has exceeded the planned value.

Calculated as Earned Value minus Actual Cost.

Cost Variance - Labor Units field

The difference between the earned value labor cost and the actual value labor cost.

Calculated as Earned Value Labor Cost minus Actual Value Labor Cost.

1232

Cost Variance Index field

The ratio of the cost variance and the earned value.

Calculated as Cost Variance divided by Earned Value.

Cost Variance Index - Labor Units field

The ratio of the cost variance labor units and the earned value labor units.

Calculated as Cost Variance Labor Units divided by Earned Value Labor Units.

Earned Value Cost field

The portion of the project baseline total cost of the project that is actually completed

as of the project data date.

Earned Value Labor Units field

The ratio of the schedule variance labor units and the planned value labor units.

Calculated as Schedule Variance Labor Units divided by Planned Value Labor Units.

Estimate At Completion - Labor Units field

The estimated labor units at completion of the activity.

Calculated as Actual Labor Units plus Estimate to Complete Labor Units. Estimate to

complete labor units is calculated based off of the Earned Value setting on the EPS.

Estimate At Completion Cost field

The expected total cost of a schedule activity, a work breakdown structure

component, or the project when the defined scope of work will be completed.

Calculated as Actual Cost plus Estimate to Complete Cost. The method for

calculating estimate to complete depends on the earned value technique selected

for the activity's WBS.

Estimate To Complete field

The estimated cost to complete the project.

Calculated as Remaining Total Cost for the activity or the Performance Factor

multiplied by (Budget At Completion minus Earned Value), depending on the Earned

Value technique selected for the activity's WBS (calculated from the primary

baseline).

Estimate To Complete Labor Units field

The estimated quantity to complete the project.

Calculated as either the Remaining Total Units for the activity, or as Performance

Factor multiplied by (Baseline Planned Labor Units minus Planned Quantity of Work

Performed), depending on the Earned Value Technique selected for the activity's

WBS.

Reference Topics

1233

Planned Value Cost field

The portion of the project baseline total cost of the project that is scheduled to be

completed as of the project data date.

Planned Value Labor Units field

The portion of the baseline labor units that is scheduled to be completed as of the

project data date.

The schedule percent complete specifies how much of the activity's baseline

duration has been completed so far. The baseline labor units is taken from the current

baseline.

Calculated as Baseline Labor Units multiplied by Schedule Percent Complete.

Schedule Performance Index field

The earned value divided by the planned value.

A value less than 1 indicates that less work was actually performed than was

scheduled.

Schedule Performance Index - Labor Units field

The ratio of the earned value of labor units and the planned value of labor units.

Calculated as Earned Value Labor Units divided by Planned Value Labor Units.

Schedule Variance field

The measure of schedule performance on a project.

A negative value indicates that less work was actually performed than was

scheduled.

Calculated as Earned Value minus Planned Value.

Schedule Variance - Labor Units field

The difference between the earned value of work performed and the work

scheduled to be performed.

Calculated as Earned Value Labor Units minus Planned Value Labor Units.

Schedule Variance Index field

The ratio of schedule variance labor units and the planned value labor units.

Calculated as the Schedule Variance Labor Units divided by Planned Value Labor

Units.

Schedule Variance Index - Labor Units field

The ratio of schedule variance labor units and the planned value labor units.

Calculated as the Schedule Variance Labor Units divided by Planned Value Labor

Units.

1234

To Complete Performance Index field

The ratio of remaining work to the funds remaining.

Calculated as (Budget at Completion minus Earned Value) divided by (Estimate at

Completion minus Actual Cost).

Variance At Completion field

The difference between the project baseline total cost and the current estimate of

total cost.

A negative value indicates an estimated cost overrun. Budget At Completion is

calculated from the current project baseline.

Calculated as Budget At Completion minus Estimate At Completion.

Variance At Completion - Labor Units field

The difference between the project baseline planned total labor units and the

estimate at completion labor units.

Calculated as Project Baseline Planned Total Labor Units minus Estimate At

Completion Labor Units.

General category

Added By field

The name of the user who added the project to the EPS.

Checked Out By field

The name of the user who checked out the project. If the project is not checked out,

this field is blank.

Date Added field

The date the project was added to the EPS.

Date Checked Out field

The date and time the user checked out the project. If the project is not checked out,

this field is blank.

EPS ID field

The unique identifying code of the EPS.

EPS Name field

The name of the EPS to which the project belongs.

Integrated Project field

The type of system integration, if any, in place at your organization. Data within this

project will be shared with the integrated solution you choose. For example, ERP. The

default value is <none>.

Reference Topics

1235

Portfolios field

The portfolios associated with the project.

Project ID field

The unique identifier of the project.

Project Leveling Priority field

The priority of each project during leveling.

You can enter a value from 1 to 100, with 1 being the highest priority.

Project Name field

The name of the project.

Project Owner field

The resource designated as responsible for the project.

The project owner designation provides a user with viewing access for the project.

Project Score field

The project score, based on all project code types assigned to this project.

Project Status field

The current status of the activity, WBS, or project.

Project Website URL field

The project Web site URL, which is the Web address of the project's website.

Responsible Manager field

The project’s assigned organizational breakdown structure (OBS) element.

A responsible manager is required for each project and each level of the EPS.

Risk Level field

The risk level for each project. Double-click to display the list and choose from Very

High, High, Medium, Low, or Very Low.

Risk Scoring Matrix field

The name of the risk scoring matrix assigned to the project.

Strategic Priority field

The project’s priority in the strategic plan.

This number ranges from 1 to 10,000 with a default of 500. Use of the priority value,

such as whether to place higher priority at the lower end of the scale, toward the

endpoint 1, or at the higher end, toward 10,000, is at the discretion of the user.

1236

Type field

The type of element, whether project or EPS.

Website Root Directory field

The root directory for storing project Web site files before they are published to the

Web server.

Number of Activities category

Actual Completed Activities field

The number of activities that have an actual finish in the EPS.

Actual In-Progress Activities field

The number of activities that are currently in progress.

Actual Not-Started Activities field

The number of activities that are currently not started.

BL Completed Activities field

The number of completed activities in the project baseline.

BL In-Progress Activities field

The number of in-progress activities in the project baseline.

BL Not-Started Activities field

The number of activities not started in the project baseline.

Total Activities field

The number of activities in the project.

Percent Complete category

Cost % Complete field

The percent complete of costs for the resource assignments in the EPS.

Calculated as Actual Units divided by At Complete Units multiplied by 100. Always in

the range 0 to 100.

Cost % of Planned field

The activity actual cost percent of planned.

Calculated as Actual Total Cost divided by Baseline Total Cost multiplied by 100. The

value can exceed 100. The baseline total cost is the activity's at completion cost from

the current baseline.

Duration % Complete field

The activity actual duration percent of planned.

Reference Topics

1237

Calculated as Actual Duration divided by At Completion Duration multiplied by 100.

Duration % Of Planned field

The summary actual duration percent of planned of all activities under this EPS.

The baseline duration is the activity's at complete duration from the current baseline.

Calculated as Actual Duration divided by Baseline Duration multiplied by 100. The

value can exceed 100.

Expense Cost % Complete field

The percent complete of cost for all expenses associated with the EPS.

Calculated as Actual Expense Cost divided by At Complete Expense Cost multiplied

by 100, and it is always in the range of 0 to 100.

Labor Cost % Complete field

The percent complete of cost for all labor resources assigned to the EPS.

Calculated as Actual Labor Cost divided by At Complete Labor Cost multiplied by

100, and it is always in the range of 0 to 100.

Labor Units % Complete field

The percent complete of units for all labor resources for the EPS.

Calculated as Actual Labor Units divided by At Completion Labor Units multiplied 100.

Always in the range 0 to 100.

Material Cost % Complete field

The percent complete of cost for all material resources assigned to the EPS.

Calculated as Actual Material Cost divided by At Complete Material Cost multiplied

by 100, and it is always in the range of 0 to 100.

Nonlabor Cost % Complete field

The percent complete of cost for all non-labor resources assigned to the EPS.

Calculated as Actual Nonlabor Cost divided by At Complete Nonlabor Cost

multiplied by 100. It is always in the range of 0 to 100.

Nonlabor Units % Complete field

The percent complete of units for all nonlabor resources for the EPS.

Calculated as Actual Nonlabor Cost divided by At Completion Nonlabor Cost

multiplied by 100. Always in the range 0 to 100.

Performance % Complete field

The percent complete of performance for all labor resources, nonlabor resources,

and expenses.

Calculated as Earned Value divided by Budget At Completion multiplied by 100.

Always in the range 0 to 100.

1238

Schedule % Complete field

The measure that indicates how much of the EPS baseline duration has been

completed so far.

If the data date is earlier than the baseline start, the schedule percent complete is 0.

If the data date is later than the Baseline finish, the schedule percent complete is 100.

The schedule percent complete indicates how much of the EPS duration should be

currently completed, relative to the selected baseline.

Calculated based on where the current data date falls between the activity's

baseline start and finish dates.

Units % Complete field

The percent complete of units for the resource assignments in the EPS.

Always in the range 0 to 100.

Calculated as Actual Units divided by At Complete Units multiplied by 100.

Preferences category

Activity % Complete from Steps option

Determines if the activity percent complete is calculated from activity steps or from

manual input. If the option is selected, the activity percent complete will be

calculated based on activity steps. This option is clear by default.

Activity ID Prefix field

The single or combination of letters and/or numbers to act as the Activity ID Prefix. This

field can contain 1 to 20 characters.

Activity ID Suffix field

The single or combination of letters and/or numbers to set as the Activity ID Suffix. The

value must be a number between 1 and 999,999.

Activity Type list

Determines how duration and schedule dates are calculated for an activity:

Task Dependent: If resources should be scheduled based on the activity's

calendar.

Resource Dependent: If resources should be scheduled based on their assigned

calendars.

Level of Effort: For an ongoing activity whose duration depends on other activities.

The duration of a Level of Effort activity is calculated based on the schedule dates

from its predecessors and successors.

Start or Finish Milestone: If an activity marks the beginning or end of a major

project phase.

WBS Summary: For an activity with a particular WBS code.

Reference Topics

1239

Allow Duplicate Resource Assignments option

Determines whether resources can be assigned to an activity more than once.

Allow Negative Actual Units field

Determines if negative actual units can be entered on activities via timesheets in the

project.

Baseline Option field

The baseline the project uses. This field is disabled if the project is checked out.

Calendar field

The calendar assigned to the project.

Cost Account field

The cost account associated with the project.

Drive Activity Dates by Default option

Determines whether assignments will drive activity dates.

Duration Type list

Determines whether the schedule, resource availability, or costs are most important

when updating activities. The duration type applies only when you have resources

assigned to the activity. Choose a duration type based on which factor is most

important (least flexible) in planning your project.

Fiscal year list

Determines on which month the fiscal year begins.

Increment field

The number to act as the increment. The number must be a value between 1 and

99,999.

Increment Activity ID based on selected activity option

Determines if the activity numbering is based on the selected activity of on the

project's default settings.

Link Actual and Period Actual Units and Cost option

Determines whether to recalculate all actual and period actual unit and cost values

using the actual values to date based on the financial period values.

Link Percent Complete with Actuals option

Determines whether the actual units and cost values are recalculated when duration

percent complete is updated.

1240

Link Planned and At Completion option

Determines whether to recalculate all of the planned unit and cost values using the

remaining costs and units for activities that have not started.

Percent Complete Type list

Determines the way in which the application calculates the percent complete for the

activity.

This default activity percent complete type will be applied to all new activities added

to a project. If you change this setting for an existing project that has activities, the

percent complete type of those existing activities will not be changed.

Price/Unit field

The non-overtime price per unit of time for the project.

Primary Can Complete Activity option

Determines whether primary resources can mark activities as completed.

Rate Type field

The price/unit used to calculate costs for the project.

There can be up to five rate types, with each rate type reflecting a different

price/unit. Rate types are defined in P6.

Recalculate Units from Cost option

Determines whether units are updated with costs.

Resources Can Assign Themselves option

Determines whether resources can assign themselves to activities.

Resources Can Complete Assignments option

Determines whether resources can mark assignments as completed.

Resources Can View Inactive Projects option

Determines whether resources can view projects that are not currently active.

Resources Status Activities Using field

Determines how P6 Progress Reporter users enter their status for assignments.

WBS Code Separator field

The character used for separating code fields for the cost account tree.

This is also the WBS code separator for new projects by default.

When Activity Progress Removed field

Determines what the application will do if activity progress is removed: reset planned

duration and units or reset remaining duration and units.

Reference Topics

1241

When Updating Units or Costs field

Determines what the application will do if activity progress is removed: add actual to

remaining or subtract actual from at completion.

Summary category

Contains Summary Data option

Determines whether the project has been summarized. If the option is selected, the

project has been summarized.

Enable Summarization option

Determines whether a project will be summarized. If you select this option, the fields

on the Summarization page are enabled. If this option is cleared, the project will not

be summarized.

Last Summarized Date field

The date the project was last summarized. This field is blank for projects that have not

been summarized.

Summarize to WBS Level list

Determines the number of summary WBS levels stored in the database.

Summary Type field

The type of summary that will be used for the project. Disabled if you are working with

a template project.

Units category

Actual Labor Units field

The actual labor units.

Actual Nonlabor Units field

The actual nonlabor units.

Actual This Period Labor Units field

The number of labor units used during this financial period.

If period performance is stored, the calculation is Actual Labor Units minus the sum of

the stored Actual This Period Labor Units fields for all previous periods.

If the period performance is not stored, Actual This Period Labor Units is the same as

Actual Labor Units.

Actual This Period Nonlabor Units field

The nonlabor units used during this financial period.

If period performance is stored, the calculation is Actual Nonlabor Units minus the sum

of the stored Actual This Period Nonlabor Units fields for all previous periods.

1242

If the period performance is not stored, Actual This Period Nonlabor Units is the same

as Actual Nonlabor Units.

At Completion Labor Units field

The sum of the actual plus remaining units for all labor resources assigned to the

activity.

It is the same as the planned labor units if the activity is not started, and the actual

labor units once the activity is completed.

Calculated as Actual Labor Units plus Remaining Labor Units.

At Completion Nonlabor Units field

The nonlabor units at completion. It is the sum of the actual plus remaining units for all

nonlabor resources assigned to the activity.

It is the same as the planned nonlabor units if the activity is not started, and the actual

nonlabor units once the activity is completed.

Calculated as Actual Nonlabor Units plus Remaining Nonlabor Units.

BL Project Labor Units field

The planned units for all labor resources assigned to the activity in the project

baseline.

Calculated as Baseline Actual Labor Units plus Baseline Remaining Labor Units.

BL Project Nonlabor Units field

The units for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activity in the project baseline.

Planned Labor Units field

The planned units for all labor resources assigned to the activities in the project.

Planned Non Labor Units field

The planned units for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activities in the project.

Remaining Labor Units field

The remaining units for all labor resources assigned to the activities in the project.

The remaining units reflects the work remaining to be done for the EPS.

Remaining Nonlabor Units field

The remaining units for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activities.

The remaining units reflects the work remaining to be done for the EPS.

Variance - Labor Units field

The difference between baseline labor units and at completion labor units.

Calculated as Baseline Labor Units minus At Completion Labor Units.

Reference Topics

1243

Variance - Nonlabor Units field

The difference the between baseline nonlabor units and the at completion non labor

units.

Calculated as Baseline Nonlabor Units minus At Completion Nonlabor Units.

Project Codes category

This category contains project codes listed in alphabetical order.

User-Defined category

This category contains user-defined columns listed in alphabetical order.

Baselines Dialog Box Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add Baseline

Creates a new project baseline.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Convert a Project to Baseline

Convert a project in the EPS hierarchy to a baseline for the current project.

Restore a Baseline

Restores a baseline converted to a project back to a baseline.

Copy Baseline

Creates a duplicate of the selected project baseline.

1244

Expand All

In a hierarchical list or page of child items grouped by parent items, expands the list to

show all parent and child items.

Collapse All

In a hierarchical list, arranges entries so that only the parent items are shown and child

entries are hidden.

Bubble Chart Settings Area

The Bubble Chart settings area displays configurable options for viewing portfolio data in

a bubble chart. Use the following fields to modify your bubble chart view.

Bubble Chart Settings:

X Axis field

Select a field value to determine information displayed through the X Axis.

Y Axis field

Select a field value to determine the information displayed through the Y Axis.

Group By list

Select a field value to determine your preferred option to group your data.

Bubble Size field

For bubble charts only, select a field value to determine the size of the bubble

displayed (optional).

Color Theme list

Determines colors displayed on the chart. Select a predefined or user-defined color

theme.

Horizontal Gridlines option

Determines whether to show or hide horizontal gridlines.

Vertical Gridlines option

Determines whether to show or hide vertical gridlines.

Show All Values on Axis option

Determines whether all values are displayed in the histogram. Select this option to

include all values on the X-axis and not just values with data.

Reference Topics

1245

Budget Log Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Original Budget field

Displays the amount of the original budget. Changing the value updates the amount

of the Current Budget and Proposed Budget.

Current Budget field

Displays the amount of the current budget.

Proposed Budget field

Displays the amount of the proposed budget.

WBS/EPS node/Project selector

Cycles through the available WBSs, EPS nodes, or projects and determines which data

display in the detail window. Click or to change which element and its

corresponding data are displayed.

Add (Insert)

Adds a new line item to the Budget Log detail window.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Capacity Planning Chart Toolbar

The Capacity Planning Chart toolbar includes the following options for working with your

capacity planning chart.

Toolbar Elements

Group Roles By

Groups the capacity planning chart by role.

Group By field

Select one of the following options:

Current Portfolio Roles

1246

Role Hierarchy

Role Team

Search

Displays options for finding a specific matching entry or entries based on search

criteria.

Search field

The means to find a project.

Search options

Role Name

Mach from Start

Mach Anywhere

Stacked Histogram

The display of the capacity planning chart as a stacked histogram. Categorized data

can be grouped, or stacked, to assist with comparisons. Stacked histograms are

useful when analyzing relative parts of a whole.

Area Chart

The capacity planning chart is displayed as an area chart. The chart data displays

total allocated amount (units or cost) across time..

Net Availability Chart

The capacity planning chart as a net availability chart. This chart displays the role's

availability over time; how much the role is over or under-allocated. The Net

Availability Chart is only available for units and is always grouped by role.

Spreadsheet

Displays the actual source data used to generate the chart.

Stacked By field

Select a value for stacking or dividing the presentation of data in your capacity

planning histogram, area chart, or spreadsheet. Choose one of the pre-defined

general options or a project code.

Stack the chart by role to display the total at completion units or costs, per role.

Stack the chart by project to display the total at completion units or costs, per

project.

Stack the chart by staffed vs. unstaffed units to display the total staffed and

unstaffed units over time.

Stack the chart by project code to display the total at completion units or costs for

associated roles and projects.

Reference Topics

1247

Stack the chart by current projects vs. other projects to display the aggregate total at

completion units or costs for the combination of selected roles across all projects, split

into two values. One value represents the role allocation for the projects selected in

the current project group (current projects); the other value represents the role

allocation for all other projects in the database (other projects).

Note: While the Current Projects vs. Other Projects value is always

available in the Stacked by field, it will only provide meaningful

data when you customize the page to display data for all projects

in the database. When the chart is customized to display data only

for selected projects in the current project group, you can still

select this option; however, the chart will only display data for the

current project group.

(The Stacked by field is not available for the Net Availability Chart.)

Capacity Planning Toolbar

The Capacity Planning toolbar includes the following commands:

Toolbar Elements

Save

Saves your new or modified entries to the database.

Save As

Displays options for saving the current item as a new instance with a new name.

Cancel

Cancels any pending changes and reverts back to the last saved state.

Create Portfolio from Selected Projects

Creates a new portfolio representing one or more selected projects.

Show Scorecard Only

Displays only the scorecard, or table view, hiding the charts and role selection areas

of the Capacity Planning page.

Show Scorecard and Gantt Chart

Displays the Scorecard and Gantt chart.

1248

Show Capacity Planning Chart

Displays the resource and roles capacity planning chart for the selected portfolio,

which enables you to analyze role allocation and cost over time. Multiple chart

formats display role allocation for the projects and roles you select, enabling you to

quickly identify areas of under or over allocation.

Full Screen Mode

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. To exit from this mode, click

Normal Mode.

Scenario field

Select <Latest Data> or a scenario to apply to the data. The Capacity Planning page

displays historical data preserved in a scenario, or the latest summarized data

(<Latest Data>), depending on your selection.

Capacity Planning Chart legend

Describes what each colored bar represents in the chart:

indicates current values

indicates forecast values

indicate EPS values

Customize link

Opens the Customize Capacity Planning Dialog Box (on page 667) where you can

specify the columns of information you want to display in the scorecard, as well as

grouping, sorting, waterline, and chart options.

Codes Toolbar of the Activities Page

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Assign Activity Code Value (Ctrl+Insert)

Creates a new activity code value for the selected activity code.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Reference Topics

1249

Activity selector

Cycles through the available activities and determines which data display in the

detail window. Click or to change which activity and its corresponding data

are displayed.

Codes Toolbar of the EPS Page

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Assign (Insert)

Assigns project codes to the selected project.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes the selected data items or table rows.

Project selector

Cycles through the available projects and determines which data display in the detail

window. Click or to change which project and its corresponding data are

displayed.

Command Line Support

This release supports running batch report jobs and exporting projects from a command

line.

Note: To view P6 Professional reports in P6, select the Store report in

Work Products and Documents option when creating report

batches or printing reports. See the P6 Professional Help for more

information.

Customizable Menus

Users can now change the display order of menus, rearrange menu commands, delete

menus and commands, and create custom menus.

1250

Customizable Toolbars

An improved default arrangement of toolbars and command buttons reduces visual

clutter. In addition, users can fully create and customize any toolbars in the client

interface with the commands of most importance to their goals and assignments.

Document Search Criteria

When creating document search criteria, you can use a combination of keywords,

operators, and wildcard characters to define your query. Try to be as specific as possible

when coming up with search criteria.

Use the following guidelines and examples to create effective document search criteria.

Keywords

Keywords are terms and phrases, including a combination of letters, numbers, and

special characters on which you can base your search.

Example: To search for documents that contain the keyword "budget", type budget.

You can also use quotation marks when defining keywords. Quotation marks enable you

to create phrases; the application will search for the entire phrase.

Example: To search for documents that contain the entire phrase "annual budget", type

"annual budget" (with the quotation marks).

Operators

Operators enable you to establish associations, or relationships, between keywords and

phrases. Logical operators, such as Boolean operators (AND, OR, required operator +,

and prohibit operator -), place conditions on the search criteria and identify which

keywords you want to include or exclude from your search.

Note: Type Boolean operators in capital letters.

The AND operator returns all documents that contain both keywords specified on each

side of the operator.

The required operator (+) returns all documents that contain the keyword listed after the

operator.

Example: To search for documents containing both the keywords, "budget", and

"analysis", enter budget AND analysis in the search bar. Or, you could enter

+budget+analysis.

The OR operator returns all documents that contain either or both of the keywords

specified on each side of the operator.

Example: To search for documents containing the keyword "budget", "analysis", or both,

enter budget OR analysis.

Reference Topics

1251

The prohibited operator (-) excludes the keyword listed after the operator from

appearing in the search results.

Example: To search for documents that contain the keyword "budget", but not the

phrase "fiscal year", enter budget-"fiscal year".

Wildcard Characters

Wildcard characters are special characters you can use to represent unknown

characters in your search. You can use one of the following two wildcard characters in

your search:

the question mark (?) represents a single alphanumeric character

the asterisk (*) represents a string of characters and is entered by default in the search

string

Example: To search for the keywords "test" or "text" enter te?t. To search for the keywords

"test," "tests," or "tester," type test.

Note: You cannot use a wildcard character as the first character in your search criteria.

Document Security (Reference)

Only the user who added the project document can modify its security policy.

Three document security policies are available:

Personal - A personal document can be viewed, modified, or deleted only by the

user who added it to the project.

Note - Although it is associated with a project, a personal policy document does not

appear in the list of project documents for any team member except the document

owner.

Shared - A shared document can be viewed, modified, or deleted by any project

team member.

Read-Only - A read-only document can be viewed by any project team member,

but team members cannot modify or delete it.

Documents Toolbar of the Activities Page

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Assign Document (Insert)

Assigns documents to the selected activity.

1252

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

View Document

Opens a selected document for viewing.

View Document in AutoVue

Opens a document or graphic in Oracle's AutoVue. This option is available when a

content repository is installed and your P6 administrator has configured the

appropriate privileges and project access for you.

Customize Columns

Displays choices for customizing the columns (fields) that appear on the selected

screen. (Available only in the Gantt chart and Table views.)

Activity selector

Cycles through the available activities and determines which data display in the

detail window. Click or to change which activity and its corresponding data

are displayed.

Edit Menu of the Assignments Page

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Copy (Ctrl+C)

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted into another supported location.

Fill Down (Ctrl+I)

In a selected range of cells in a single table column, inserts the value in the first or top

cell into the remaining cells down the column.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Reference Topics

1253

Find Next (F3)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry. Available only in tables after an original

Find operation.

Edit Menu on Activities Page

Overview

The buttons on the Edit menu are identical to the buttons on the Edit toolbar. Though the

buttons on the menu are fixed, the same list of buttons can be configured on the toolbar.

Screen Elements

Cut (Ctrl+X)

Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

removing it from its current location. The item and applicable attributes can then be

pasted to another supported location.

Copy (Ctrl+C)

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted into another supported location.

Paste (Ctrl+V)

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Note: The following items are not included if you paste an activity

from one project into another project: project-level activity codes,

EPS-level activity codes (if the projects belong to different EPS

nodes), work products and documents, and issues. If you are

working in a grouped activity view and paste an activity from one

group into another group, it inherits the value of the group you

paste it to, with some exceptions. For example, if your view is

grouped by activity type, and you cut a Task Dependent activity

and paste it into a Resource Dependent group, the activity type

changes to Resource Dependent. An exception to this occurs in

cases where the application business logic would be invalidated

by applying the attribute of the new group. For example, if you

copy a start milestone that has a constraint to a finish milestone

group, the activity changes to a finish milestone, but the start

constraint is removed because a finish milestone cannot have a

start constraint.

1254

Fill Down (Ctrl+I)

In a selected range of cells in a single table column, inserts the value in the first or top

cell into the remaining cells down the column.

Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up)

Moves the selected item one level higher in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down)

Moves the selected item one level lower in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Left (Ctrl+Alt+Left)

Moves the selected item one level to the left in a hierarchical arrangement. Outdents

text items.

Move Right (Ctrl+Alt+Right)

Moves the selected item one level to the right in a hierarchical arrangement. Indents

text items.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (F3)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry. Available only in tables after an original

Find operation.

Edit Menu on EPS Page

Overview

The buttons on the Edit menu are identical to the buttons on the Edit toolbar. Though the

buttons on the menu are fixed, the same list of buttons can be configured on the toolbar.

Screen Elements

Cut (Ctrl+X)

Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

removing it from its current location. The item and applicable attributes can then be

pasted to another supported location.

Copy (Ctrl+C)

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted into another supported location.

Reference Topics

1255

Paste (Ctrl+V)

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Fill Down (Ctrl+I)

In a selected range of cells in a single table column, inserts the value in the first or top

cell into the remaining cells down the column.

Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up)

Moves the selected item one level higher in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down)

Moves the selected item one level lower in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Left (Ctrl+Alt+Left)

Moves the selected item one level to the left in a hierarchical arrangement. Outdents

text items.

Move Right (Ctrl+Alt+Right)

Moves the selected item one level to the right in a hierarchical arrangement. Indents

text items.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (F3)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry. Available only in tables after an original

Find operation.

Enterprise Data Activity Codes Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save

Saves your new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel

Cancels any pending changes and reverts back to the last saved state.

1256

Add Activity Code

Creates a new activity code.

Add Activity Code Value

Creates a new activity code value for the currently selected activity code.

Delete

Deletes the selected item or items permanently.

Move to Global

Moves the current activity code to the global level.This option is available under the

EPS and Project Tabs.

Move to EPS

Moves the current activity code to a specific EPS level. This option is available only

under the Project Tab.

Cut

Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

removing it from its current location. The item and applicable attributes can then be

pasted to another supported location.

Copy

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted to another supported location.

Paste

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Find

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Move Up

Moves the selected item one level up in the sort order.

Move Down

Moves the selected item one level down in the sort order.

Move Left

Moves the selected item one level to the left in a hierarchical arrangement. Outdents

text items.

Reference Topics

1257

Move Right

Moves the selected item one level to the right in a hierarchical arrangement. Indents

text items.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Export to Excel

Exports all data as it appears in the current view to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet

(.xls) file. Customize the rows to display only the data you want to export.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Select Projects dialog box

Opens the Select Projects dialog box. This option is available only under the Project

tab. See Select Projects Dialog Box of the Project Tab of the Activity Codes Page (on

page 1078).

Enterprise Data Baseline Types Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Details

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

1258

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up)

Moves the selected item one level higher in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down)

Moves the selected item one level lower in a hierarchical arrangement.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Enterprise Data Categories Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Reference Topics

1259

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new category for managing different types of entries.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up)

Moves the selected item one level higher in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down)

Moves the selected item one level lower in a hierarchical arrangement.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

1260

Enterprise Data Cost Accounts Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Cut (Ctrl+X)

Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

removing it from its current location. The item and applicable attributes can then be

pasted to another supported location.

Copy (Ctrl+C)

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted into another supported location.

Paste (Ctrl+V)

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up)

Moves the selected item one level higher in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down)

Moves the selected item one level lower in a hierarchical arrangement.

Reference Topics

1261

Move Left (Ctrl+Alt+Left)

Moves the selected item one level to the left in a hierarchical arrangement. Outdents

text items.

Move Right (Ctrl+Alt+Right)

Moves the selected item one level to the right in a hierarchical arrangement. Indents

text items.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Export to Excel

Exports all data as it appears in the current view to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet

(.xls) file. Customize the rows to display only the data you want to export.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Enterprise Data Currencies Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

1262

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new currency type.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Copy (Ctrl+C)

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted into another supported location.

Paste (Ctrl+V)

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Select Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Reference Topics

1263

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Enterprise Data Document Statuses Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up)

Moves the selected item one level higher in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down)

Moves the selected item one level lower in a hierarchical arrangement.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

1264

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Enterprise Data Financial Periods Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Add Batch

Creates a new batch of financial periods.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

If any past period actual values for activities, resource assignments, resource

planning, or summary data have been stored for a given financial period, then that

financial period cannot be deleted.

Reference Topics

1265

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Enterprise Data Funding Sources Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

1266

If the funding sources to be deleted are currently assigned to one or more EPS nodes

or projects, then users can choose to merge assignments into a different funding

source, or delete the selected funding sources and any associated sources.

Cut (Ctrl+X)

Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

removing it from its current location. The item and applicable attributes can then be

pasted to another supported location.

Copy (Ctrl+C)

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted into another supported location.

Paste (Ctrl+V)

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up)

Moves the selected item one level higher in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down)

Moves the selected item one level lower in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Left (Ctrl+Alt+Left)

Moves the selected item one level to the left in a hierarchical arrangement. Outdents

text items.

Move Right (Ctrl+Alt+Right)

Moves the selected item one level to the right in a hierarchical arrangement. Indents

text items.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Reference Topics

1267

Export to Excel

Exports all data as it appears in the current view to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet

(.xls) file. Customize the rows to display only the data you want to export.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Enterprise Data Global Calendar Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Exception: You cannot delete the global or project-level default calendar.

If the calendar to be deleted is currently set as the project default calendar for at

least one project, as the default calendar for at least one resource, or as the assigned

calendar for at least one activity, then you will be prompted with a message similar to

the following: "The selected calendar has assignments. Would you like to select a

replacement calendar or change the assignments to the default global calendar?

Note: Selecting a replacement calendar may cause dates to be invalid for those

projects with assignments."

1268

The application does not check your resource or project access before allowing you

to delete a calendar and replace all of the assignments with a new calendar. The

application does check to see if you have the Add/Edit/Delete Global Calendars or

Add/Edit/Delete Resource Calendars security privileges. If you have rights to a

calendar, you can delete a calendar. The application will look to see if any

assignments exist, and if they do, you will be prompted to select a replacement

calendar.

Edit Hours Per Period

Displays a dialog box in which you specify the number of work hours for each time

period. See Set Time Periods Dialog Box of Calendars (on page 1081).

Set As Default Calendar

Sets the current calendar as the default calendar.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Enterprise Data Issue Codes Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add Code (Insert)

Creates a new issue code.

Reference Topics

1269

Add Issue Code Value

Creates a new issue code value for the currently selected issue code.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Copy (Ctrl+C)

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted into another supported location.

Paste (Ctrl+V)

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up)

Moves the selected item one level higher in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down)

Moves the selected item one level lower in a hierarchical arrangement.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Export to Excel

Exports all data as it appears in the current view to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet

(.xls) file. Customize the rows to display only the data you want to export.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

1270

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Enterprise Data Notebook Topics Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up)

Moves the selected item one level higher in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down)

Moves the selected item one level lower in a hierarchical arrangement.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Reference Topics

1271

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Enterprise Data Overhead Codes Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up)

Moves the selected item one level higher in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down)

Moves the selected item one level lower in a hierarchical arrangement.

1272

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Enterprise Data Project Calendar Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Reference Topics

1273

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click

Save.

Exception: You cannot delete the global or project-level default calendar.

If the calendar to be deleted is currently set as the project default calendar for at

least one project, as the default calendar for at least one resource, or as the assigned

calendar for at least one activity, then you will be prompted with a message similar to

the following: "The selected calendar has assignments. Would you like to select a

replacement calendar or change the assignments to the default global calendar?

Note: Selecting a replacement calendar may cause dates to be invalid for those

projects with assignments."

The application does not check your resource or project access before allowing you

to delete a calendar and replace all of the assignments with a new calendar. The

application does check to see if you have the Add/Edit/Delete Global Calendars or

Add/Edit/Delete Resource Calendars security privileges. If you have rights to a

calendar, you can delete a calendar. The application will look to see if any

assignments exist, and if they do, you will be prompted to select a replacement

calendar.

Edit Hours Per Period

Displays a dialog box in which you specify the number of work hours for each time

period.

See Set Time Periods Dialog Box of Calendars (on page 1081).

Promote to Global Calendar

Promotes the current calendar to the global calendar.

Assignments to the calendar will remain. This option is not available in the Global

Calendar View.

Select Projects

Displays the Select Projects dialog box. Use this dialog box to choose projects to

display in your current view. See Select Projects Dialog Box of the Project Calendars

Page (on page 1077).

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

1274

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Enterprise Data Project Codes Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add Code (Insert)

Creates a new project code.

Add Code Value (Shift + Insert)

Creates a new project code value for the currently selected project code.

Delete

Deletes the selected item or items permanently.

Cut (Ctrl+X)

Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

removing it from its current location. The item and applicable attributes can then be

pasted to another supported location.

Copy (Ctrl+C)

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted into another supported location.

Paste (Ctrl+V)

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up)

Moves the selected item one level higher in a hierarchical arrangement.

Reference Topics

1275

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down)

Moves the selected item one level lower in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Left (Ctrl+Alt+Left)

Moves the selected item one level to the left in a hierarchical arrangement. Outdents

text items.

Move Right (Ctrl+Alt+Right)

Moves the selected item one level to the right in a hierarchical arrangement. Indents

text items.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Select Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Export to Excel

Exports all data as it appears in the current view to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet

(.xls) file. Customize the rows to display only the data you want to export.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

1276

Enterprise Data Rate Types Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Enterprise Data Resource Calendar Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Reference Topics

1277

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click

Save.

Exception: You cannot delete the global or project-level default calendar.

If the calendar to be deleted is currently set as the project default calendar for at

least one project, as the default calendar for at least one resource, or as the assigned

calendar for at least one activity, then you will be prompted with a message similar to

the following: "The selected calendar has assignments. Would you like to select a

replacement calendar or change the assignments to the default global calendar?

Note: Selecting a replacement calendar may cause dates to be invalid for those

projects with assignments."

The application does not check your resource or project access before allowing you

to delete a calendar and replace all of the assignments with a new calendar. The

application does check to see if you have the Add/Edit/Delete Global Calendars or

Add/Edit/Delete Resource Calendars security privileges. If you have rights to a

calendar, you can delete a calendar. The application will look to see if any

assignments exist, and if they do, you will be prompted to select a replacement

calendar.

Assign Resource

Opens a dialog box where you select a resource to assign to the selected calendar.

Edit Hours Per Period

Displays a dialog box in which you specify the number of work hours for each time

period. See Set Time Periods Dialog Box of Calendars (on page 1081).

Promote to Global Calendar

Promotes the current calendar to the global calendar.

Assignments to the calendar will remain.

Convert to Personal Calendar or Convert to Shared Calendar

Converts the currently viewed resource calendar to a personal calendar or a shared

calendar, depending on your selection.

Filter By

Displays options for reducing the number of values displayed in a list or table by

showing only selected values and removing or filtering out unwanted values.

1278

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Enterprise Data Resource Codes Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add Code (Insert)

Creates a new resource code.

Add Code Value

Creates a new resource code value for the currently selected resource code.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Cut (Ctrl+X)

Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

removing it from its current location. The item and applicable attributes can then be

pasted to another supported location.

Reference Topics

1279

Copy (Ctrl+C)

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted into another supported location.

Paste (Ctrl+V)

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up)

Moves the selected item one level higher in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down)

Moves the selected item one level lower in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Left (Ctrl+Alt+Left)

Moves the selected item one level to the left in a hierarchical arrangement. Outdents

text items.

Move Right (Ctrl+Alt+Right)

Moves the selected item one level to the right in a hierarchical arrangement. Indents

text items.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Export to Excel

Exports all data as it appears in the current view to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet

(.xls) file. Customize the rows to display only the data you want to export.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

1280

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Enterprise Data Resource Curves Toolbar

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Copy (Ctrl+C)

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted into another supported location.

Paste (Ctrl+V)

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Reference Topics

1281

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Enterprise Data Risk Categories Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new category for managing different risk types. For example, Schedule

Constraints or New Requirements.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up)

Moves the selected item one level higher in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down)

Moves the selected item one level lower in a hierarchical arrangement.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

1282

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Enterprise Data Risk Scoring Matrices Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Cut (Ctrl+X)

Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

removing it from its current location. The item and applicable attributes can then be

pasted to another supported location.

Reference Topics

1283

Copy (Ctrl+C)

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted into another supported location.

Paste (Ctrl+V)

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Select Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

Group By

Displays a menu of the available fields you can select to group related rows in a table

into hierarchical lists you can expand and collapse. For example, group by a

Category field to arrange all rows hierarchically by their Category field values. Expand

the Category A group to view its data rows, the Category B group to view its data

rows, and so on.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

1284

Enterprise Data Timesheet Periods Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Add Batch

Creates a new batch of timesheet periods.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Reference Topics

1285

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Enterprise Data Units of Measure Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up)

Moves the selected item one level higher in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down)

Moves the selected item one level lower in a hierarchical arrangement.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

1286

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

EPS Toolbar

Overview

This toolbar contains toolbuttons also found in the Actions, Edit, and View menus and

their corresponding toolbars. These menus are fixed; however, the toobuttons available

in the toolbar are customizable and automatically enabled or disabled based on

selections you make.

Screen Elements

Actions menu

See Actions Menu on EPS Page (on page 1180).

Edit menu

See Edit Menu on EPS Page (on page 1254).

View menu

See View Menu on EPS Page (on page 1368).

EPS View toolbar

See EPS View Toolbar (on page 1286).

EPS View Toolbar

Overview

This toolbar contains fixed toolbuttons for modifying the view of the EPS.

Screen Elements

Gantt Chart

Opens the table, Gantt chart, and a corresponding toolbar. The Gantt chart enables

you to view a graphical display of progress. The Gantt chart is customizable.

Reference Topics

1287

Table

Opens the table which enables you to view column information for projects and EPSs.

View list

Identifies the view for the work area. Views are arranged in the following categories:

User: A view created by the user. Only the user can display, edit, or delete this

view.

Multiple Users: A view created by one user who designates other users who can

also display this view. Only the creator can edit or delete a multiple user view.

Global: A view that any user can display. Only the creator and users with the

required security privilege can edit or delete a global view.

View

Displays the following options:

Save View

Saves the changes applied to the current view. If you navigate away from the page,

you are prompted to save the view or discard the changes you made.

Save View As

Displays options for saving the current view as a new view with a new name.

Delete View

Permanently removes the current view.

Customize View...

Opens the Customize View dialog box with options that vary depending on your

current page. The dialog box has a series of tabs to customize the columns, grouping,

filters, bars, Gantt chart, usage, and security access.

Expenses Toolbar of the Activities Page

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Add Expense (Insert)

Creates a new expense for the selected activity.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

1288

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Customize Columns

Displays choices for customizing the columns (fields) that appear on the selected

screen. (Available only in the Gantt chart and Table views.)

Activity selector

Cycles through the available activities and determines which data display in the

detail window. Click or to change which activity and its corresponding data

are displayed.

Filters Dialog Box Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Modify Filter

Opens the Modify Filter dialog box where you can modify the filter's definition and

configure the users who can access it.

Add Filter

Opens the Create Filter dialog box where you can enter a name for the filter,

configure its definition, and configure the users who can access it.

Delete

Deletes the selected item or items permanently.

Cut

Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

removing it from its current location. The item and applicable attributes can then be

pasted to another supported location.

Copy

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted to another supported location.

Paste

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Reference Topics

1289

Show matches for list

Determines whether assignment data displayed is based on all applied filters or any

applied filters.

Filters Tab Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Modify Filter

Opens the Modify Filter dialog box where you can modify the filter's definition and

configure the users who can access it.

Add Filter

Opens the Create Filter dialog box where you can enter a name for the filter,

configure its definition, and configure the users who can access it.

Delete

Deletes the selected item or items permanently.

Cut

Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

removing it from its current location. The item and applicable attributes can then be

pasted to another supported location.

Copy

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted to another supported location.

Paste

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Show matches for list

Determines if activities display based on all applied filters or any applied filters.

1290

Funding Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Add (Insert)

Adds a funding source to the project. You can then configure the amount and

percentage of the contribution from the fund source.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes the selected data items or table rows.

Project/EPS selector

Cycles through the available projects or EPSs and determines which data display in

the detail window. Click or to change which element and its corresponding

data are displayed.

Histogram Chart Settings Area

The Histogram Chart settings area displays configurable options for viewing portfolio

data in a histogram, side-by-side histogram, or stacked histogram chart view. Use the

following fields to modify your histogram chart view.

Screen Elements

X Axis field

Select a field value to determine information displayed through the X Axis.

Y Axis field

Select a field value to determine the information displayed through the Y Axis.

Color Theme list

Determines colors displayed on the chart. Select a predefined or user-defined color

theme.

Horizontal Gridlines option

Determines whether to show or hide horizontal gridlines.

Vertical Gridlines option

Determines whether to show or hide vertical gridlines.

Reference Topics

1291

Show 3-D option

Determines whether to show a 3-Dimensional view of chart.

Show All Values on Axis option

Determines whether all values are displayed in the histogram. Select this option to

include all values on the X-axis and not just values with data.

Group By list

Select a field value to determine your preferred option to group your data.This option

is only available for the Side-by-Side Histogram view.

Stacked by field

Select a field value to determine your preferred option to stack your data. This option

is only available for the Stacked Histogram view.

Import Templates (Reference)

The following information is important to keep in mind when creating import templates:

If a duplicate activity name exists, it will be added again as a new activity.

In the import file, column order is irrelevant and the data fields you import are not

required to match the columns in your current activity view. Data for import is

identified by the internal names of the data fields in the first row of the spreadsheet.

The import process will start at the first tab of the import file, regardless of the tab

name.

Blank rows are ignored.

The import file contains two rows of column headings that match the columns you

previously selected to display in the table or Gantt chart. The first row of headings

identify the data to be imported into each column of your activity view. Do not

change the content in columns of the first row. The second row contains descriptive

information that is not used by the import process. You can modify the content in the

second row.

If values are not provided for mandatory fields, such as the date field, a default value

will be set and corresponding data will be imported.

Although the activity view is limited to 30 columns, you can add columns to your

spreadsheet to import more than 30 fields of data.

All activity fields except for non-editable fields are available for import. Examples of

non-editable fields include: expenses, notebook topics, predecessors, resource IDs,

resource names, role IDs, steps, and successors. Non-editable columns display an

asterisk (*). You cannot import data for these fields. At least one editable field must be

provided in a row of the import file for an activity to be imported.

If an Enterprise Data field value does not exist for a Global Activity Code, Enterprise

Project Structure (EPS) Activity Code, Project Activity Code, Calendar, Cost Account,

or Primary Resource, the assignment will not be added.

Secure activity codes are not imported, even if the column exists in the spreadsheet.

1292

Durations with abbreviations that match the abbreviations set on the Time Periods

page of the Application Settings page are imported.

Issues Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability is subject to

change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions, and other factors.

Screen Elements

Add Issue (Insert)

Creates a new issue.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Customize Columns

Displays choices for customizing the columns (fields) that appear on the selected

screen. (Available only in the Gantt chart and Table views.)

Activity/WBS/Project selector

Cycles through the available activities, WBSs, or projects and determines which data

display in the detail window. Click or to change which activity, WBS, or project

and its corresponding data are displayed.

Level Resources Dialog Box (Reference)

If you select Activity Leveling priority, ascending levels higher priority activities first, and

descending levels lower priority activities first.

If you select Project Leveling priority, ascending levels higher priority projects first, and

descending levels lower priority projects first.

If you select Planned Start priority, ascending levels activities with earlier planned start

dates first, and descending levels activities with later planned start dates first.

If you select Planned Finish priority, ascending levels activities with earlier planned finish

dates first, and descending levels lower activities with later planned finish dates first.

If you select Planned Duration priority, ascending levels activities with shorter original or

planned durations first, and descending levels activities with longer original or planned

durations first.

If you select Remaining Duration priority, ascending levels activities with shorter remaining

durations first, and descending levels activities with longer remaining duration first.

Reference Topics

1293

If you select Total Float priority, ascending levels activities with less total float or more

critical activities first, and descending levels activities with more total float or less critical

activities first.

If you select Early Start priority, ascending levels activities with earlier, early start dates first,

and descending levels activities with later, early start dates first.

If you select Early Finish priority, ascending levels activities with earlier, early finish dates

first, and descending levels activities with later, early finish dates first.

If you select Late Start priority, ascending levels activities with earlier, late start dates first,

and descending levels activities with later, late start dates first.

If you select Late Finish priority, ascending levels activities with earlier, late finish dates first,

and descending levels activities with later, late finish dates first.

My Calendar Dialog Box Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Edit Hours Per Period

Displays a dialog box in which you specify the number of work hours for each time

period. See Set Time Periods Dialog Box of Calendars (on page 1081).

Import

Displays a dialog box in which you search for and select files to import as calendar

events. See Import Calendar Events Dialog Box (on page 835).

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

1294

My Reviews Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Edit Details

Displays the Document Details dialog box to configure the details of the selected

document.

Terminate

Stops the selected document review and removes it from view.

Filter By

Displays options for reducing the number of values displayed in a list or table by

showing only selected values and removing or filtering out unwanted values.. Select

from one of the following options:

In Review

Approved

Rejected

All

My Workflows Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Initiate a Workflow

Initiates a new instance of a workflow based on your selection from a list of the

available predefined workflow templates.

History

Opens a History dialog box where you can view details for the currently selected

instance of the workflow.

Reference Topics

1295

View Status

Opens a visual image of the workflow diagram in the Workflow Instance dialog box

where you can view the current approval stage, remaining tasks required before the

workflow is appoved, and other details for this instance of the workflow.

Select Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

Group By

Displays a menu of the available fields you can select to group related rows in a table

into hierarchical lists you can expand and collapse. For example, group by a

Category field to arrange all rows hierarchically by their Category field values. Expand

the Category A group to view its data rows, the Category B group to view its data

rows, and so on.

Role list

A list of available workflow roles you can select to filter the My Workflows table. For

example, choose Initiator to filter all the entries such that only the workflows currently

assigned to the initiator role appear in the table. The default setting is All.

Status list

A list of available workflow status types you can select to filter the My Workflows table.

For example, choose Approved to filter all the entries such that only the workflows

that have been approved appear in the table. The default setting is In Progress.

Note: The Role and Status lists can be used together to filter the

data in the table. For example, you can filter by the Reviewer role

and the In Progress status to view all the current workflows awaiting

reviewer input.

Notebooks Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Add Notebook Topics (Insert)

Creates a new notebook topic or category for managing notes throughout a

project's lifecycle.

1296

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Activity/WBS/Project/EPS node selector

Cycles through the available activities, WBSs, projects, or EPS nodes and determines

which data display in the detail window. Click or to change which element

and its corresponding data are displayed.

Open Projects Dialog Box Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Select Project Type

Filters available information by project or template.

Organized By (Ctrl+M)

Organizes information based on EPS nodes, portfolios, or project codes.

Columns (Ctrl+Q)

Displays choices for customizing the columns that appear on the current screen.

Select Activity View (Ctrl+R)

Displays a menu of activity views. Choose the view to use when the selected projects

are opened.

Search (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding a specific matching entry or entries based on search

criteria.

Search For (Ctrl+Shift+F)

Displays options for customizing a search.

Pages Supporting Filters

The following areas of P6 support filtering:

Reference Topics

1297

Page Description

Activities page Apply filters based on project and activity parameters to

target specific activities.

EPS page Apply filters based on EPS and project parameters to

target specific projects.

Resource Assignments page Apply filters based on resource and role parameters to

target specific assignments.

Dashboards page Apply filters based on portfolios, projects, or codes to

target specific project and portfolio data displayed in

portlets on the dashboard.

Timesheet Approval page Apply filters based on timesheet status to target specific

timesheets.

Portfolio Analysis

page

Apply filters based on EPS, portfolio, and project code to

target specific portfolio data.

Issues page and

Issues portlets

Apply filters based on issue parameters to target specific

issues.

Risks page Apply filters based on risk parameters to target specific

risks.

Create Portfolio and

Portfolio Details

pages

Apply filters based on project data, codes, and UDFs to

target specific projects that make up a portfolio.

Workflow portlet Apply basic filters to view workflow tasks on the Action

Required tab and filter by role or status on the My

Workflows tab.

Performance Status Calculations

This topic provides additional information about the formulas used to calculate the

performance status metrics shown on the Portfolio Performance Status page. The

Portfolio Performance Status page displays summarized schedule and cost or labor unit

data based on one of three performance metrics you select:

Schedule

Earned Value (SV and CV)

Index (SPI, CPI, and TCPI)

For each metric, to date and forecast data are provided at the group, project, and WBS

levels. The values you specify in the Performance Threshold area of the My Preferences

page Global tab determine which visual indicators apply to each metric.

1298

Schedule

When you select Schedule, the page displays the following calculated data:

Schedule to Date

(Baseline Duration multiplied by Performance % Complete) minus (Baseline Duration

multiplied by Schedule % Complete)

Performance % Complete = Earned Value divided by BAC

Schedule % Complete = Planned Value divided by BAC

Labor Units to Date

Earned Value Labor Units minus Actual Labor Units

threshold percentage calculation = Labor Units to date divided by Earned Value

Labor Units

Cost to Date

Earned Value — Actual Cost

threshold percentage calculation = Cost to date/Earned Value

Schedule at Completion

Remaining Finish Date - Baseline Finish Date

Labor Units at Completion

BAC Labor Units - EAC Labor Units

threshold percentage calculation = Labor Units at Completion/BAC Labor Units

Cost at Completion

BAC- EAC

threshold percentage calculation = Cost at Completion/BAC

Earned Value

When you select Earned Value, the page displays the following calculated data:

Schedule to Date (SV)

Earned Value Labor Units - Planned Value Labor Units

threshold percentage calculation = Schedule to Date/Planned Value Labor Units

Labor Units to Date (CV)

Earned Value Labor Units - Actual Labor Units

threshold percentage calculation = Labor Units to Date/Earned Value Labor Units

Cost to Date (CV)

Earned Value - Actual Cost

threshold percentage calculation = Cost to Date/Earned Value

Reference Topics

1299

Schedule at Completion

BAC*SVI

SVI = SV/Planned Value Labor Units

threshold percentage calculation = Schedule at Completion/BAC

Labor Units at Completion

BAC Labor Units*CVI

threshold percentage calculation = Labor Units at Completion/BAC Labor Units

Cost at Completion

BAC*CVI

threshold percentage calculation = Cost at Completion/BAC

Index

When you select Index, the page displays the following calculated data:

SPI

SPI = bcwp / bcws

CPI

CPI = bcwp / ACWP

ACWP = act_equip_cost + act_expense_cost + act_work_cost

TCPI

TCPI = (BAC – bcwp) / (EAC – ACWP)

BAC = base_equip_cost + base_expense_cost + base_work_cost

EAC = (act_equip_cost + act_expense_cost + act_work_cost) + (remain_equip_cost +

remain_expense_cost + remain_work_cost)

ACWP = act_equip_cost + act_expense_cost + act_work_cost

Personal Information Section of the Content Tab of the Customize Dashboard Page

Overview

Use this section to enable and configure portlets in the dashboard that display

information pertaining directly to the projects on which you are working.

Screen Elements

My Projects option

Determines whether the My Projects portlet displays on the dashboard.

Show Projects where I: options

Determines whether the following options are applied to the dashboard:

1300

have access rights

am assigned as a resource

am the Project Owner

My Workgroups option

Determines whether the My Workgroups portlet displays on the dashboard. On the

dashboard, workgroups are organized by project from all workgroups that you are

associated with and are then sorted by name within a project.

My Activities option

Determines whether the My Activities portlet displays on the dashboard.

Show Activities field

The value that determines how many days worth of activities the portlet shows.

My Risks option

Determines whether the My Risks portlet displays on the dashboard.

Customize link

Opens a dialog box with configurable options for customizing risks. See Customize

Risks Dialog Box (on page 690).

My Issues option

Determines whether the My Issues portlet displays on the dashboard.

Customize link

Opens a dialog box with configurable options for customizing issues. See Customize

Project Issues Dialog Box (on page 686).

Communication Center option

Determines whether the Communication Center portlet displays on the dashboard.

Display: options

Determines if all teams or only the teams based on the dashboard filter are displayed

in the Communication Center portlet.

Show team members who: options

Determines what team members the application displays in the Communication

Center portlet.

My Documents option

Determines whether the My Documents portlet displays on the dashboard.

My Calendar option

Determines whether the My Calendar portlet displays on the dashboard.

Reference Topics

1301

Show activities option

Determines whether project activities are shown in the portlet.

Getting Here

1) Click Dashboards.

2) On the Dashboards page, select a dashboard.

3) On the dashboard, click Customize.

4) On the Dashboard Details page, click the Content tab.

5) On the Content tab, expand the Personal Information section.

Pie Chart Settings Area

The Pie Chart settings area displays configurable options for viewing portfolio data in a

pie chart view. Use the following fields to modify your pie chart view.

Screen Elements

Data list

Select a field of data to display in the Pie Chart view.

Select an option from the following categories:

Budget

Cost

Durations

Earned Value

General

Number of Activities

Percent Complete

Units

User Defined

Group By list

Select a field value to determine your preferred option to group your data.

Color Theme list

Determines colors displayed on the chart. Select a predefined or user-defined color

theme.

Pie Data Label option

Determines whether to show the Pie Data Label.

Group by label option

Determines whether to show the Group by label.

1302

Show percentage option

Determines whether to show percentage on the chart.

Show 3-D option

Determines whether to show a 3-Dimensional view of chart.

Planning Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Assign Resource

Opens a dialog box where you select a resource to assign to the selected project or

WBS.

Assign Resource Using Search

Opens a dialog box where you enter search criteria to locate a resource to assign.

Assign Role

Opens a dialog box where you select a role to assign to the selected project or WBS.

Assign Project

Open a dialog box where you select a project to assign to the selected resource.

Split Resource Assignment

Divides the selected resource assignment between the currently selected resource

and another one you choose based on an allocation percentage.

Cut

Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

removing it from its current location. The item and applicable attributes can then be

pasted to another supported location.

Copy

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted to another supported location.

Reference Topics

1303

Paste

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Delete

Deletes the selected item or items permanently.

Portfolio Analysis Settings Area

The Portfolio Analysis settings area displays configurable options for viewing portfolio

data.

Basic Settings

The following fields are common in all views.

Filter by field

The portfolio, project code, or project that the application uses to filter the

dashboard. The portlets only display information that meet the selected filtering

criteria.

You can change the Filter by option for a private (user-defined) dashboard, and for

any multi-user or global dashboard you create.

Scenario field

Select <Latest Data> or a scenario to apply to the data. The Portfolio Analysis page

displays historical data preserved in a scenario, or the latest summarized data

(<Latest Data>), depending on your selection.

View field

Determines how data is displayed in the work area.

Select type of view from following categories:

Bubble Chart: A Bubble chart lets you analyze three aspects of project data. The

x-axis represents one data field, the y-axis represents a second field, and the size

of the bubble represents a third field. A bubble chart is useful when you want to

analyze three independent project variables at one time.

Histogram: A histogram lets you analyze project data in a vertical bar chart

format. You can select a project data field to display on the x-axis and another

field to display on the y-axis of the chart; typically, the x-axis represents

categorical data, and the y-axis represents individual data values.

Pie Chart: A Pie chart is a circular chart divided into slices, where each slice

represents a particular group; the size of the size of the slice represents the value of

the selected data field, specific to the group. A pie chart is useful for analyzing

relative parts of a whole.

Scorecard: A scorecard lets you analyze data in a spreadsheet-type format. You

can use a scorecard to assist with more sophisticated analysis of a set of projects.

1304

Side-by-Side Histogram: A side-by-side histogram is a more sophisticated version of

the histogram. In this type of chart, categorized data can be grouped,

side-by-side, to assist with comparisons. A side-by-side chart is useful when

analyzing relative parts of a whole.

Stacked Histogram: A stacked histogram is a more sophisticated version of the

histogram. In this type of chart, categorized data can be grouped, or stacked, to

assist with comparisons. A stacked histogram is useful when analyzing relative parts

of a whole.

More Settings

Additional available settings vary according to your chosen view.

For Bubble Charts, see Bubble Chart Settings Area (on page 1244).

For Pie Charts, see Pie Chart Settings Area (on page 1301).

For Histograms, Side-by-Side Histograms, and Stacked Histograms, see Histogram

Chart Settings Area (on page 1290).

For Scorecards, see Scorecard Settings Area (on page 1345).

Portfolio Analysis Toolbar

The Portfolio Analysis toolbar includes the following:

Screen Elements

Save

Saves your new or modified entries to the database.

Save As

Displays options for saving the current item as a new instance with a new name.

Cancel

Cancels any pending changes and reverts back to the last saved state.

Create Portfolio View

Displays options for creating a new portfolio view based on either an existing view or

new attributes you define.

Maximize

Maximizes the current chart in the work area, temporarily hiding the vertical or

horizontal compare view. Click Restore to reset the page to its original view.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Reference Topics

1305

Scorecard View

When you choose a scorecard view, the Portfolio Analysis Toolbar displays the following

additional options:

Add Project

Displays a dialog box for selecting defaults for newly created projects. Click to

assign a Parent EPS and Responsible Manager. Click Select to close and save your

choices or Cancel to close the dialog box where all information will be lost.

Delete Project

Deletes a selected project in the view.

Create Portfolio from Selected Projects

Redirects you to the Create Portfolio page.

Waterline

Displays the Customize Scorecard dialog box and directs you to the Waterline tab.

Export Spreadsheet

Exports all data as it appears in the current view to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet

(.xls) file. Customize the rows to display only the data you want to export.

Portfolios Navigation Bar

Click a portfolio toolbar button to open its corresponding page.

Screen Elements

Portfolio Analysis

Opens the Portfolio Analysis page, which enables you to to analyze portfolio data,

conduct side-by-side comparisons of two project groups, and apply what-if scenarios

and waterline analysis techniques to assist with executive-level critical decision

making.

Capacity Planning

Opens the Capacity Planning page, which enables you to analyze role allocation

and cost over time. Multiple chart formats display role allocation for the projects and

roles you select, enabling you to quickly identify areas of under or over allocation.

Performance Status

Opens the Performance Status page, which displays summarized schedule and cost

or labor unit data based on the performance metric you select.

1306

Gantt Chart

Opens the Gantt Chart page, which displays timescaled performance or earned

value schedule information at the WBS level, along with unit or cost data, in a

spreadsheet or histogram.

ROI

Opens the ROI page, which displays cost/benefit information based on live data for

the open project group.

Details

Use this page to modify a group of projects, called a portfolio.

Pre-defined BI Publisher Reports

This section lists and describes the pre-defined BI Publisher reports that are supplied with

P6. You can use these reports to display various types of project and portfolio data you

need. Your administrator can modify the list of reports available for your use, including

removing pre-defined reports or adding additional reports to your view.

Report Name Description Parameters

Activity Reports

Activity Look Ahead Displays activities, along with

dates and status, occurring

within specified weeks for the

selected projects.

Project ID, Number of

Weeks

Schedule Report with

Notebooks

Provides a list of activities for

the selected projects along

with all associated notebook

topics.

Project ID

Cross Project

Relationships

Lists the projects and

associated activities that are

predecessors or successors to

the selected project,

providing visibility into cross

project impacts.

Project ID

Duration Analysis Compares planned and

actual duration of the

activities for the selected

projects along with upper and

lower thresholds to analyze

duration estimates.

Project ID

Reference Topics

1307

Activity Relationships Lists the activities for the

selected projects along with

their predecessors and

successors. Report includes

relationship type and lag

along with dates and float of

the related activities.

Project ID

Project Reports

High Level Planning

Assignments

A 9 month look ahead of high

level resources and roles

assigned to the selected

projects through the resource

planning spreadsheet.

Information includes effort,

commitment status and

dates.

Project ID

Qualitative Risk

Report

Reports on all risks for the

select projects. Includes risk

information, risk impact

assessment, impacted

activities, and risk response

plans.

Project ID

Issues Lists all issues identified for the

selected projects, grouped by

status. The issue details include

priority, criticality, and issue

description, if provided.

Project ID

Document

Assignments

Provides a list of all documents

assigned to activities and

WBSs within the specified

project, grouped by

document category.

Project ID

Project Earned Value Displays monthly actual cost,

earned value, and planned

value in both a bar chart

along with a table for the

selected projects.

Project ID

Project Status Report Provides a project overview

that includes project code

values, project costs, issues,

risks, status of the milestones,

and a list of notebook topics.

Project ID, Project Status

1308

Project Governance

Non-Compliance

Report

Lists all projects and their

critical project-level settings.

Settings that deviate from the

standard are highlighted in

the report.

Project ID

Weekly Schedule

Performance

Compares the activity actual

finish date to the baseline

finish date. Activities are

grouped by week and

project. The report will display

information starting 4 weeks

prior to the date set in the

report parameters.

Project ID, 4 Weeks Prior

To: <date>

Risk Scoring Report of the project risk

scoring matrix. Includes

threshold definitions grouped

by type (Probability,

Schedule, Cost, User-defined,

and Tolerance) and numeric

and alphanumeric probability

and impact diagrams (PIDs).

Project ID

Project Plan

Hierarchy

Displays the project plan

which lists all WBSs and

activities for the selected

project. The activity details

include the status, start and

finish dates, and the

associated activity steps.

Project ID

Portfolio Reports

Investment

Alignment Chart

Displays a bubble chart that

plots selected projects against

their strategic and financial

rating with the bubble size

representing the At

Completion Cost.

Project ID

Code Assignments Provides a list of projects for

the specified portfolio along

with the code values assigned

for the selected project code.

Project Code, Portfolio

Name

Reference Topics

1309

Project Portfolio

Review

Identifies issues and risks within

the selected portfolio and

groups them by project.

Includes status and priority of

the issue or risk along with

project-level information.

Portfolio Name

Portfolio Counts Provides a count of all

projects and activities within

the selected portfolio. In

addition, two pie charts

display representing the

number of open and closed

issues and risks.

Portfolio Name

Administrative Reports

Timesheets

Timesheets Status

without Notes

Lists timesheets for resources

along with the status,

submitted and reviewed

dates, and name of the last

reviewer.

NA

Timesheets Status

with Notes

Lists timesheets for resources

along with the status,

submitted and reviewed

dates, name of the last

reviewer, and associated

timesheet notes.

Number of Weeks

Timesheets with

Detailed Hours

Lists timesheets for the

specified date range. For

each timesheet, the activities

and detailed hours per day

are provided.

Start Date, End Date

Timesheet

Compliance

Displays a bar chart of

timesheets status by resource

team for a given period.

Includes a tabular view with

total number of approved

hours as well as percentage

completed versus those either

not started, in progress, or

rejected.

Timesheet Period Start,

Timesheet Period Finish

1310

Project Template

Management

Lists all project templates

along with status, division, and

added by person and date.

NA

Calendar Use Lists all Global, Project, and

Resource calendars, including

identification of the projects

and resources using each

calendar.

NA

Project Governance

Non-Compliance

Report

Lists core project-level settings

for each project, highlighting

setting values that are not

compliant.

Project ID

Users Lists all users and their personal

name along with their

associated resource and

global security profile.

NA

Profile Privileges Lists the privileges that are

enabled for each global and

project-level security profile.

NA

Users Project

Assignments

Displays OBS elements along

with the corresponding

security profile, EPSs, and

Projects assigned to selected

users.

User Name

Users OBS

Assignments

Displays all OBS elements

along with the corresponding

security profile assigned to

selected users.

User Name

Resource Reports

Resource Allocation

by Project

Displays a stacked histogram

that shows effort (in hours) for

selected resources, stacking

bars by project within the start

and end date ranges.

Project ID, Start Date, End

Date, Resource ID

Resource Role Skill

Sets

Lists all resources along with

their assigned roles. The

primary role and proficiency

level is identified for each role.

NA

Reference Topics

1311

Activity Resource

Assignments

Lists resources assigned to

each activity in the selected

projects. Information includes

start and finish dates along

with duration.

Project ID

Resource Stacked

Histogram

Displays a stacked histogram

that shows effort (in hours) for

selected resources, stacking

bars by resource within the

start and end date ranges.

Project ID, Start Date, End

Date, Resource ID

FTE (headcount)

report

Displays a list of roles assigned

to the selected project(s)

along with the amount of

time-phased effort for each

role, in full time equivalents, for

the specified date range.

Project ID, Start Date, End

Date

Resource Code

Assignments

Displays a list all resource

codes and resource code

values along with the

resources assigned to each

code value.

NA

Resource Role

Associations

Displays a list of all roles in the

system and the resources

assigned to each role. The

primary role and proficiency

level is identified for each

resource.

NA

Predecessors Toolbar of the Activities Page

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Assign (Insert)

Displays options for selecting a predecessor activity related to the current activity.

1312

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Customize Columns

Displays choices for customizing the columns (fields) that appear on the selected

screen. (Available only in the Gantt chart and Table views.)

Go to Activity (Ctrl+Home)

Moves from the current activity to the preceding activity in the hierarchal standing.

Activity selector

Cycles through the available activities and determines which data display in the

detail window. Click or to change which activity and its corresponding data

are displayed.

Preferences Columns of the EPS Table

Activity % Complete from Steps option

Determines if the activity percent complete is calculated from activity steps or from

manual input. If the option is selected, the activity percent complete will be

calculated based on activity steps. This option is clear by default.

Activity ID Prefix field

The single or combination of letters and/or numbers to act as the Activity ID Prefix. This

field can contain 1 to 20 characters.

Activity ID Suffix field

The single or combination of letters and/or numbers to set as the Activity ID Suffix. The

value must be a number between 1 and 999,999.

Activity Type list

Determines how duration and schedule dates are calculated for an activity:

Task Dependent: If resources should be scheduled based on the activity's

calendar.

Resource Dependent: If resources should be scheduled based on their assigned

calendars.

Level of Effort: For an ongoing activity whose duration depends on other activities.

The duration of a Level of Effort activity is calculated based on the schedule dates

from its predecessors and successors.

Start or Finish Milestone: If an activity marks the beginning or end of a major

project phase.

WBS Summary: For an activity with a particular WBS code.

Reference Topics

1313

Allow Duplicate Resource Assignments option

Determines whether resources can be assigned to an activity more than once.

Allow Negative Actual Units field

Determines if negative actual units can be entered on activities via timesheets in the

project.

Baseline Option field

The baseline the project uses. This field is disabled if the project is checked out.

Calendar field

The calendar assigned to the project.

Cost Account field

The cost account associated with the project.

Drive Activity Dates by Default option

Determines whether assignments will drive activity dates.

Duration Type list

Determines whether the schedule, resource availability, or costs are most important

when updating activities. The duration type applies only when you have resources

assigned to the activity. Choose a duration type based on which factor is most

important (least flexible) in planning your project.

Fiscal year list

Determines on which month the fiscal year begins.

Increment field

The number to act as the increment. The number must be a value between 1 and

99,999.

Increment Activity ID based on selected activity option

Determines if the activity numbering is based on the selected activity of on the

project's default settings.

Link Actual and Period Actual Units and Cost option

Determines whether to recalculate all actual and period actual unit and cost values

using the actual values to date based on the financial period values.

Link Percent Complete with Actuals option

Determines whether the actual units and cost values are recalculated when duration

percent complete is updated.

1314

Link Planned and At Completion option

Determines whether to recalculate all of the planned unit and cost values using the

remaining costs and units for activities that have not started.

Percent Complete Type list

Determines the way in which the application calculates the percent complete for the

activity.

This default activity percent complete type will be applied to all new activities added

to a project. If you change this setting for an existing project that has activities, the

percent complete type of those existing activities will not be changed.

Price/Unit field

The non-overtime price per unit of time for the project.

Primary Can Complete Activity option

Determines whether primary resources can mark activities as completed.

Rate Type field

The price/unit used to calculate costs for the project.

There can be up to five rate types, with each rate type reflecting a different

price/unit. Rate types are defined in P6.

Recalculate Units from Cost option

Determines whether units are updated with costs.

Resources Can Assign Themselves option

Determines whether resources can assign themselves to activities.

Resources Can Complete Assignments option

Determines whether resources can mark assignments as completed.

Resources Can View Inactive Projects option

Determines whether resources can view projects that are not currently active.

Resources Status Activities Using field

Determines how P6 Progress Reporter users enter their status for assignments.

WBS Code Separator field

The character used for separating code fields for the cost account tree.

This is also the WBS code separator for new projects by default.

When Activity Progress Removed field

Determines what the application will do if activity progress is removed: reset planned

duration and units or reset remaining duration and units.

Reference Topics

1315

When Updating Units or Costs field

Determines what the application will do if activity progress is removed: add actual to

remaining or subtract actual from at completion.

Print Preview Toolbar

When you click Print Preview in the toolbar on pages that support printing (or click

Print in a portlet), a Print Preview dialog box will appear with a page-by-page on-screen

representation of what you can expect from the actual printed output. The Print Preview

dialog box provides a Print Preview toolbar of its own. Use the toolbar to help you

preview the output before deciding to print, make small adjustments, or cancel printing

and go back to make edits and try printing again later.

Print

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

First Page

Displays the first page of the printed output in the print preview window.

Previous Page

Displays the previous (lower) page of the printed output in the print preview window.

Next Page

Displays the next (higher) page of the printed output in the print preview window.

Last Page

Displays the final page of the printed output in the print preview window.

Zoom Out

Decreases the current magnification of items in the work area so they appear smaller.

Zoom In

Increases the current magnification of items in the work area so they appear larger.

Portrait

Sets the page orientation to a portrait or tall format for the current page size.

Landscape

Sets the page orientation to a landscape or wide format for the current page size.

1316

Private Documents Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Add Document

Enables you to select a document to add.

Add Options menu

Displays a menu of actions supplementing the Add Document icon.

Add Document: Enables you to select a document to add.

Add from content repository: Enables you to search, browse by folder, and select

a document from the repository. You can then decide to copy the selected

document or just link to it.

Copy from existing template: Enables you to search and select a template to

copy as the basis for your new document.

Create new template: Enables you to browse and select a document template to

store for future use. You can then create new documents copied from this

template.

Add Folder: Enables you to add a document folder to the repository and set its

security policy.

Edit Details

Displays the Document Details dialog box to configure the details of the selected

document. See Document Details Dialog Box of the Private Documents Tab (with

content repository) for further details.

View Document

Opens a selected document for viewing.

View Options

Select from one of the following options in which to view the selected document

View: Displays the selected document in a separate wind

Download: Allows you to download the document to your computer. You must

select a path for where the downloaded document will be saved.

Assign to Project

Reassigns the selected document to a project.

Reference Topics

1317

Delete

Deletes the selected item or items permanently.

Check out

Enables you to specify where the to check out current document to. Use the to

browse for a location. You can also select the Open Document option to determine

whether to open or just check out the document.

Check Out Options

Check out: Displays a dialog box to enter a location for where you want the

document to be checked out to. Use to browse for a location. Use the Open

Document option to determine whether or not to open the document or just

check it out.

Check in: Displays a dialog box to select a document to be checked in. Use

to browse for a document. Use the comments field to enter a comment to be

associated with the document. The Format and Version Type fields are read-only.

Click the Check In button to keep your changes and check in the document or

click cancel to close the dialog box without checking in the document.

Undo Check Out: Displays a read-only dialog box displaying the Title, Version,

and Path of the selected checked out document. If you continue to undo the

check out, any changes made to the selected document will be lost. Click Undo

Check Out to continue or click Cancel to close the dialog and keep the

document checked out.

Cut

Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

removing it from its current location. The item and applicable attributes can then be

pasted to another supported location.

Move Options

Cut: Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary

clipboard, removing it from its current location.

Paste: Inserts an item into a new location that has been cut from its previous

location.

Search

Displays options for finding a specific matching entry or entries based on search

criteria.

Search Options

Search: Displays options for finding a specific matching entry based on criteria.

Clear Search Results: Removes the options based from your entered criteria to

display all possible entries.

1318

Project Gantt Chart Portlet Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Open Project(s)

Opens the currently selected projects in the Projects section using the first page set in

your preferred view or user interface view.

Filter By

Displays options for reducing the number of values displayed in a list or table by

showing only selected values and removing or filtering out unwanted values.

Set Filter - Displays a dialog box with configurable options to select an Activity

Code by which to filter. When a filter is applied, only milestones that have the

selected code value will appear in the Gantt. See Selection Dialog Boxes for

further details of use.

Clear Filter - This option is only available when a filter is currently set. Click to

remove the currently set filter and display all milestones.

Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

Timescale

The Gantt chart time interval options. The default setting is Year/Month. Select from

one of the following intervals:

Year/Quarter

Year/Month

Quarter/Month

Month/Week

Print

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Filter field

Indicates the name of the filter currently applied to the portlet. If a filter is not applied,

No Filter is displayed.

Reference Topics

1319

Legend

A read-only field that defines the bar and milestone colors in the Gantt chart.

Current Bar

Progress

Baseline Bar

Milestone

Baseline Milestone

Project Tab Toolbar of the Documents Page

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Note: This topic describes functionality only available with the

optional Content Respository feature.

Screen Elements

Refresh Documents

Refreshes the current page with any new, updated, or removed documents.

Add Document

Enables you to select a document to add.

Add Options menu

Displays a menu of actions supplementing the Add Document icon.

Add Document: Enables you to select a document to add.

Add from content repository: Enables you to search, browse by folder, and select

a document from the repository. You can then decide to copy the selected

document or just link to it.

Copy from existing template: Enables you to search and select a template to

copy as the basis for your new document.

Create new template: Enables you to browse and select a document template to

store for future use. You can then create new documents copied from this

template.

Add Folder: Enables you to add a document folder to the repository and set its

security policy.

1320

Edit Details

Displays the Document Details dialog box to configure the details of the selected

document.

View

Displays the selected document in a separate window.

View Options

Select from one of the following options in which to view the selected document:

View: Displays the selected document in a separate window.

Download: Allows you to download the document to your computer. You must

select a path for where the downloaded document will be saved.

Make Private

Click to make the selected document private.

Access Level

Select from one of the following options in which to grant access of the project:

Make Private - Click to make the selected project or document private.

Assign to Project - Click to assign the selected document to a project.

Assign to Workgroup - Click to assign the selected document to a workgroup.

Delete

Deletes the selected item or items permanently.

Check out

Enables you to specify where the to check out current document to. Use the to

browse for a location. You can also select the Open Document option to determine

whether to open or just check out the document.

Check Out Options

Check out: Opens a dialog box to enter a location for where you want the

document to be checked out to. Use to browse for a location. Use the Open

Document option to determine whether to open the document or just check it

out.

Check in: Opens a dialog box to select a document to be checked in. Use

to browse for a document. Use the comments field to enter a comment to be

associated with the document. The Format and Version Type fields are read-only.

Click the Check In button to keep your changes and check in the document or

click cancel to close the dialog box without checking in the document.

Reference Topics

1321

Undo Check Out: Opens a read-only dialog box displayed the Title, Version,

and Path of the selected checked out document. If you continue to undo the

check out, any changes made to the selected document will be lost. Click Undo

Check Out to continue or click Cancel to close the dialog and keep the

document checked out.

Start Review

Opens the Start Review dialog box where you specify the reviewers, type of review,

and due date. The document review is officially initiated when you complete the

required fields on this dialog box and click Create Review.

Add to recent documents

Adds the currently selected document to the recent documents list.

Cut

Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

removing it from its current location. The item and applicable attributes can then be

pasted to another supported location.

Move Options

Cut: Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the clipboard. This

removes them from their current locations.

Paste: Completes a cut operation by inserting the item and supported

attributes to a new location.

E-Mail

Displays options for sending information about the currently selected item to one or

more recipients via electronic mail.

Search

Displays options for finding a specific matching entry or entries based on search

criteria.

Search Options

Search: Displays options for finding a specific matching entry based from

search criteria.

Clear Search Results: Removes any specified results to display all documents.

1322

Project Tab Toolbar of the Documents Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Edit Details

Displays the Document Details dialog box to configure the details of the selected

document.

View Document

Opens a selected document for viewing.

View Options

Select from one of the following options in which to view the selected document:

View: Displays the selected document in a separate window.

Download: Allows you to download the document to your computer. You must

select a path for where the downloaded document will be saved.

Assign to Workgroup

Reassigns the selected document to a workgroup.

Delete

Deletes the selected item or items permanently.

Check out

Enables you to specify where the to check out current document to. Use the to

browse for a location. You can also select the Open Document option to determine

whether to open or just check out the document.

Check Out Options

Check out: Opens a dialog box to enter a location for where you want the

document to be checked out to. Use to browse for a location. Use the Open

Document option to determine whether to open the document or just check it

out.

Check in: Opens a dialog box to select a document to be checked in. Use

to browse for a document. Use the comments field to enter a comment to be

associated with the document. The Format and Version Type fields are read-only.

Click the Check In button to keep your changes and check in the document or

click cancel to close the dialog box without checking in the document.

Reference Topics

1323

Undo Check Out: Opens a read-only dialog box displayed the Title, Version,

and Path of the selected checked out document. If you continue to undo the

check out, any changes made to the selected document will be lost. Click Undo

Check Out to continue or click Cancel to close the dialog and keep the

document checked out.

Start Review

Opens the Start Review dialog box where you specify the reviewers, type of review,

and due date. The document review is officially initiated when you complete the

required fields on this dialog box and click Create Review.

E-Mail

Displays options for sending information about the currently selected item to one or

more recipients via electronic mail.

Project Tab Toolbar of the Project Documents Portlet

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Add Document

Enables you to select a document to add.

Add Options menu

Displays a menu of actions supplementing the Add Document icon.

Add Document: Enables you to select a document to add.

Add from content repository: Enables you to search, browse by folder, and select

a document from the repository. You can then decide to copy the selected

document or just link to it.

Copy from existing template: Enables you to search and select a template to

copy as the basis for your new document.

Create new template: Enables you to browse and select a document template to

store for future use. You can then create new documents copied from this

template.

Add Folder: Enables you to add a document folder to the repository and set its

security policy.

1324

Edit Details

Displays the Document Details dialog box to configure the details of the selected

document.

View Document

Opens a selected document for viewing.

View Options

Select from one of the following options in which to view the selected document:

View: Displays the selected document in a separate window.

Download: Allows you to download the document to your computer. You must

select a path for where the downloaded document will be saved.

Assign to Workgroup

Reassigns the selected document to a workgroup.

Delete

Deletes the selected item or items permanently.

Check out

Enables you to specify where the to check out current document to. Use the to

browse for a location. You can also select the Open Document option to determine

whether to open or just check out the document.

Check Out Options

Check out: Enables you to specify where you want the document to be

checked out to. Use to browse for a location. Use the Open Document option

to determine whether to open the document or just check it out.

Check in: Enables you to select a document to be checked in. Use to

browse for a document. Use the comments field to enter a comment to be

associated with the document. The Format and Version Type fields are read-only.

Click the Check In button to keep your changes and check in the document or

click cancel to close the dialog box without checking in the document.

Undo Check Out: Displays the Title, Version, and Path of the checked out

document you want to revert back to its previous state. After confirming, if you

decide to continue to undo the check out, any changes made to the selected

document while it was checked out will be lost. Click Undo Check Out to continue

or click Cancel to close the dialog and keep the document checked out.

Start Review

Opens the Start Review dialog box where you specify the reviewers, type of review,

and due date. The document review is officially initiated when you complete the

required fields on this dialog box and click Create Review.

Reference Topics

1325

E-Mail

Displays options for sending information about the currently selected item to one or

more recipients via electronic mail.

Recent Documents Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Note: This topic describes features available only with the

installation of the P6 content repository.

Screen Elements

Edit Details

Displays the Document Details dialog box to configure the details of the selected

document.

View Document

Opens a selected document for viewing.

View Options

Displays the following options:

View: Opens the selected document in a separate window.

Download: Allows you to download the document to your PC or a network

volume. You can select the path that determines where the downloaded

document will be saved.

Make Private

Changes the document accessibility; allows access only to the owner of the

document.

Make Private Options

Select from one of the following options to modify the select document:

Make Private: Makes the selected document private to the owner.

Assign to Project: Reassigns the selected document to a project.

Assign to Workgroup: Reassigns the selected document to a workgroup.

Delete

Deletes the selected item or items permanently.

1326

Check out

Enables you to specify where the to check out current document to. Use the to

browse for a location. You can also select the Open Document option to determine

whether to open or just check out the document.

Check Out Options

Check out: Displays a dialog box to enter a location for where you want the

document to be checked out to. Use to browse for a location. Use the Open

Document option to determine whether to open the document or just check it

out.

Check in: Displays a dialog box to select a document to be checked in. Use

to browse for a document. Use the comments field to enter a comment to be

associated with the document. The Format and Version Type fields are read-only.

Click the Check In button to keep your changes and check in the document or

click cancel to close the dialog box without checking in the document.

Undo Check Out: Displays a read-only dialog box displaying the Title, Version,

and Path of the selected checked out document. If you continue to undo the

check out, any changes made to the selected document will be lost. Click Undo

Check Out to continue or click Cancel to close the dialog and keep the

document checked out.

Start Review

Opens the Start Review dialog box where you specify the reviewers, type of review,

and due date. The document review is officially initiated when you complete the

required fields on this dialog box and click Create Review.

Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table. Select which fields you want displayed in the portlet from the following:

Title

Version

Creation Date

Modified Date

Project

Access Time

E-Mail

Displays options for sending information about the currently selected item to one or

more recipients via electronic mail.

Reference Topics

1327

Related Items Toolbar of the Project Tab

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Relate Activities or WBS

Relates an activity or WBS element to the selected item.

Relate Issues

Relates issues to the selected item.

Relate Documents

Relates documents to the selected item.

Delete

Deletes the selected item or items permanently.

Reports Schedules View Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Schedule Details

Opens the Report Settings dialog box in read-only mode.

1328

Run Schedule ASAP

Displays options for running the selected scheduled report on-demand.

Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

Replicate Schedule

Creates a new schedule based on the selected report schedule. The Report Settings

dialog opens enabling you to modify the scheduled report settings.

History

Displays details about the report jobs for the currently selected report including the

date and time each job was run and its status.

Export to Excel

Exports all data as it appears in the current view to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet

(.xls) file. Customize the rows to display only the data you want to export.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

View list

The type of data you want displayed in the reports table. Choose Reports, the default

value, to see a list of reports by category or folder. Choose Schedules to see a list of

the individually scheduled instances of a reports arranged by frequency, including

Once, Daily, Weekly, and Monthly.

Reports View Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Reference Topics

1329

Screen Elements

Run Report

Displays options for running the selected report on-demand.

Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries in the Report Name column.

Find Next (F3)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in the Report Name column after an

initial Find operation.

Export to Excel

Exports all data as it appears in the current view to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet

(.xls) file. Customize the rows to display only the data you want to export.

Print

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

View list

The type of data you want displayed in the reports table. Choose Reports, the default

value, to see a list of reports by category or folder. Choose Schedules to see a list of

the individually scheduled instances of a reports arranged by frequency, including

Once, Daily, Weekly, and Monthly.

Resources Navigation Bar

Overview

Click an icon on the Resources Navigation Bar to open its corresponding page.

1330

Screen Elements

Administration

Use the Administration page to create, edit and delete resources, resource teams,

resource roles, and role teams.

Planning

Use the Planning page spreadsheet to specify, review, or modify project-level and

WBS-level allocation data for individual resources and roles across a project lifecycle.

Assignments

Use the Assignments page to view and modify resource assignment data, view a

Gantt chart of current start and finish dates for assignments, and view a spreadsheet

that displays a variety of spreads.

Analysis

Use the Analysis page to evaluate resource usage and costs in customizable

histogram, stacked histogram, area chart, and pie chart formats. Examine total units

or costs for an individual resource or summary values for all resources belonging to a

resource team or code.

Resources Tab Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Add Child (Ctrl+Insert)

Creates a resource one level lower than the currently selected resource.

Reference Topics

1331

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Cut (Ctrl+X)

Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

removing it from its current location. The item and applicable attributes can then be

pasted to another supported location.

Copy (Ctrl+C)

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted into another supported location.

Paste (Ctrl+V)

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Fill Down (Ctrl+I)

In a selected range of cells in a single table column, inserts the value in the first or top

cell into the remaining cells down the column.

Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up)

Moves the selected item one level higher in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down)

Moves the selected item one level lower in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Left (Ctrl+Alt+Left)

Moves the selected item one level to the left in a hierarchical arrangement. Outdents

text items.

Move Right (Ctrl+Alt+Right)

Moves the selected item one level to the right in a hierarchical arrangement. Indents

text items.

View Calendar

Opens a read-only version of the project's calendar.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

1332

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Select Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

Group by

Displays options for re-arranging the information in the table by sorting the rows on the

available groupings.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Export to Excel

Exports all data as it appears in the current view to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet

(.xls) file. Customize the rows to display only the data you want to export.

Import from Excel

Enables you to search for the Microsoft Excel (.xls) file that includes a formatted list of

resources. The resources included in the Excel file are then added to the resource

pool displayed on the Resources tab.

Create Import Template

Opens a File Download dialog enabling you to Open or Save a preformatted

spreadsheet to use to capture and import resource data including resource name,

resource type, e-mail, and office phone number.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Reference Topics

1333

Response Plans Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Add a Response Plan (Insert)

Creates a response plan for the identified risk.

Add a Response Action

Adds a response action item to the selected response plan.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Select Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

Risk selector (Ctrl+Up Arrow) or (Ctrl+Down Arrow)

Cycles through the available risks and determines which data display in the detail

window. Click (Ctrl+Up Arrow) to move to the previous risk, or click (Ctrl+Down

Arrow) to move to the next risk. The content in the detail window is refreshed with the

data for the selected risk.

Risk Activities Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Assign Activities

Displays activities for the project currently assigned to the risk. Select one or more

activities to assign to the risk.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

1334

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Select Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

Risk selector (Ctrl+Up Arrow) or (Ctrl+Down Arrow)

Cycles through the available risks and determines which data display in the detail

window. Click (Ctrl+Up Arrow) to move to the previous risk, or click (Ctrl+Down

Arrow) to move to the next risk. The content in the detail window is refreshed with the

data for the selected risk.

Risk Scoring Method Description

The risk scoring method is a required input to the risk scoring matrix along with threshold

values for probability, tolerance, cost impact, and schedule impact to calculate risk

score. Review the following field definition and example to learn more about how risk

scores are calculated.

Risk Scoring Method field

The type of calculation used to obtain an overall impact value, which is then used

along with the probability to determine the score used to evaluate project risk. The

overall impact value is calculated using one of the following three methods:

Highest Impact: The overall impact for a risk is set to the highest of all the impacts

assigned to the risk.

Average Impact: The overall impact is determined by calculating the average of all

impact values.

Average Individual Impact: The overall impact is determined by combining the value

of each impact individually with the probability obtaining a score from the Probability

and Impact Diagram. The total of all impact scores is then divided by the number of

impacts.

Example: Harbour Pointe Assisted Living Center Risk Scoring Method

The Harbour Pointe Assisted Living Center project is a long-term construction project

where many risks have been identified. The scoring method used to calculate risk for this

project is the Highest Impact method.

Reference Topics

1335

Risk Register Illustrating Risk Scores using the Highest Impact Risk Scoring Method

Review the following chart to see how the score was calculated for Risk R001: Concrete

supply constrained, and how the score changes depending on the risk scoring method

assigned to the risk scoring matrix. Note that there are two impact types (Schedule and

Cost) used for the calculations in this example.

Method Calculation Details Scor

e

Highest

Impact

The highest impact for the activity is the Schedule

impact, which is marked as High. High is equivalent

to Severity 4 in the Probability and Impact Diagram

(PID). Using the PID, a Severity 4 and a High

Probability gives this risk a score of 28.

28

1336

Average

Impact

The overall impact for this risk is the sum of 2 (Low

Cost impact) plus 4 (High Schedule impact) divided

by 2 (number of impacts) equals 3. In this example,

the 3 represents a Medium impact and is equivalent

to Severity 3 in the PID. Using the PID, a Severity 3 and

a High Probability gives this risk a score of 14.

14

Average

Individual

Impact

The score for Cost Impact, given a High Probability

and a Low Cost Impact, is 7.

The score for Schedule Impact, given a High

Probability and a High Schedule Impact, is 28.

The Average Individual Impact score is 7 plus 28

divided by 2 (number of impacts), which is rounded

to 18.

18

Risk Thresholds Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Cut (Ctrl+X)

Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

removing it from its current location. The item and applicable attributes can then be

pasted to another supported location.

Reference Topics

1337

Copy (Ctrl+C)

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted into another supported location.

Paste (Ctrl+V)

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Group By

Displays a menu of the available fields you can select to group related rows in a table

into hierarchical lists you can expand and collapse. For example, group by a

Category field to arrange all rows hierarchically by their Category field values. Expand

the Category A group to view its data rows, the Category B group to view its data

rows, and so on.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

1338

Risks Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add a Risk

Creates a new risk.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Copy (Ctrl+C)

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted into another supported location.

Paste (Ctrl+V)

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Fill Down (Ctrl+I)

In a selected range of cells in a single table column, inserts the value in the first or top

cell into the remaining cells down the column.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Reference Topics

1339

Select Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

Group By

Displays a menu of the available fields you can select to group related rows in a table

into hierarchical lists you can expand and collapse. For example, group by a

Category field to arrange all rows hierarchically by their Category field values. Expand

the Category A group to view its data rows, the Category B group to view its data

rows, and so on.

Filter By

Displays options for reducing the number of values displayed in a list or table by

showing only selected values and removing or filtering out unwanted values.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Export to Excel

Exports all data as it appears in the current view to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet

(.xls) file. Customize the rows to display only the data you want to export.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Risks Toolbar of the Activities and EPS Pages

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

1340

Screen Elements

Add (Insert)

Creates a new risk.

Assign Risk

Opens a a window where you can select a risk to assign. (This icon is not available on

the Risks detail window of the EPS page.)

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Customize Columns

Displays choices for customizing the columns (fields) that appear on the selected

screen. (Available only in the Gantt chart and Table views.)

Activity/Project selector

Cycles through the available activities or projects and determines which data display

in the detail window. Click or to change which activity or project and its

corresponding data are displayed.

Roles Tab Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Add Child (Ctrl+Insert)

Creates a role one level lower than the currently selected role.

Reference Topics

1341

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Cut (Ctrl+X)

Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

removing it from its current location. The item and applicable attributes can then be

pasted to another supported location.

Copy (Ctrl+C)

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted into another supported location.

Paste (Ctrl+V)

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up)

Moves the selected item one level higher in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down)

Moves the selected item one level lower in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Left (Ctrl+Alt+Left)

Moves the selected item one level to the left in a hierarchical arrangement. Outdents

text items.

Move Right (Ctrl+Alt+Right)

Moves the selected item one level to the right in a hierarchical arrangement. Indents

text items.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Select Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

1342

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Export to Excel

Exports all data as it appears in the current view to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet

(.xls) file. Customize the rows to display only the data you want to export.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Schedule Detail Window Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Displays options and parameters that determine when the new report is scheduled to

run, and then adds the new scheduled report job to the table.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Schedule Details

Opens the Report Settings dialog box in read-only mode.

Reference Topics

1343

Run Schedule ASAP

Displays options for running the selected scheduled report on-demand.

Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

Replicate Schedule

Creates a new schedule based on the selected report schedule. The Report Settings

dialog opens enabling you to modify the scheduled report settings.

History

Displays details about the report jobs for the currently selected report including the

date and time each job was run and its status.

Scheduled Services Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Refresh

Refreshes the current screen with any new, updated, or removed data.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new scheduled service.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes the currently selected services.

CAUTION: If you confirm this operation, your selected data is

permanently deleted.

1344

Edit

Modifies the selected scheduled service.

Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up)

Moves the selected item one level higher in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down)

Moves the selected item one level lower in a hierarchical arrangement.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (F3)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry. Available only in tables after an original

Find operation.

View Log File

Launches the log file for the selected row. This icon is disabled if there is no log file for

the selected service or no row is selected.

Run Service

Runs the selected service immediately. This sets the service Start Time to the current

time. Once the service has completed, the Start Time is reset to the time you specified

in the Edit Service dialog box. This option is disabled if no row is selected, more than

one row is selected, or if you do not have the required security privileges.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Reference Topics

1345

Scorecard Settings Area

The Scorecard settings area displays configurable options for viewing portfolio data in a

Scorecard. Use the following fields to modify your scorecard view.

Screen Elements

Group By list

Select a field value to determine your preferred option to group your data.

Customize link

Displays customize scorecard dialog box. See: Customize Scorecard Dialog Box (on

page 692)

Select Projects Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Select Project Type

Filters available information by project or template.

Group By

Displays a menu of the available fields you can select to group related rows in a table

into hierarchical lists you can expand and collapse. For example, group by a

Category field to arrange all rows hierarchically by their Category field values. Expand

the Category A group to view its data rows, the Category B group to view its data

rows, and so on.

Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

Search

Displays options for finding a specific matching entry or entries based on search

criteria.

Search For (Ctrl+Shift+F)

Displays options for customizing a search.

1346

Service Status Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Refresh

Updates your screen to view the most current information.

View Log File

Launches the log file for the selected row. This icon is disabled if there is no log file for

the selected service or no row is selected.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (F3)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry. Available only in tables after an original

Find operation.

Filters menu

Click to add or remove filters from the Service Status dialog box. Filter options are My

Services and My Services for Open Projects. If you are an admin superuser you can

also select All Services.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Reference Topics

1347

Status Toolbar of Import/Export Project Dialog Box

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Refresh

Refreshes the current screen with any new, updated, or removed data.

View Log File

Displays the log file that contains details about the import or export for analysis.

Delete

Deletes the selected row from the table.

Step Templates Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Copy (Ctrl+C)

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted into another supported location.

1348

Paste (Ctrl+V)

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up)

Moves the selected item one level higher in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down)

Moves the selected item one level lower in a hierarchical arrangement.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Steps Detail Window Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Copy (Ctrl+C)

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted into another supported location.

Reference Topics

1349

Paste (Ctrl+V)

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Move Up (Ctrl+Alt+Up)

Moves the selected item one level higher in a hierarchical arrangement.

Move Down (Ctrl+Alt+Down)

Moves the selected item one level lower in a hierarchical arrangement.

Steps Toolbar of the Activities Page

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Add Activity Step (Insert)

Creates a new step for the selected activity.

Add Activity Steps from Template (Ctrl+Alt+S)

Creates a new activity step template.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Move Up

Moves the selected item one level up in the sort order.

1350

Move Down

Moves the selected item one level down in the sort order.

Customize Columns

Displays choices for customizing the columns (fields) that appear on the selected

screen. (Available only in the Gantt chart and Table views.)

Activity selector

Cycles through the available activities and determines which data display in the

detail window. Click or to change which activity and its corresponding data

are displayed.

Successors Toolbar of the Activities Page

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Assign (Insert)

Displays options for selecting a successor activity related to the current activity.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Customize Columns

Displays choices for customizing the columns (fields) that appear on the selected

screen. (Available only in the Gantt chart and Table views.)

Go to Activity (Ctrl+Home)

Moves from the current activity to the preceding activity in the hierarchal standing.

Activity selector

Cycles through the available activities and determines which data display in the

detail window. Click or to change which activity and its corresponding data

are displayed.

Reference Topics

1351

Tabbed Views

By popular demand, users can now switch between open layouts, screens, or views by

clicking their identifying tab. Tabs can also be grouped, splitting the window, and then

merged back into a single group of tabs within a window. This means that all main

windows in the entire application, including Projects, Activities, and Resources, can be

displayed simultaneously as tabs and can be tiled horizontally, vertically, or some

combination of both.

Teams Tabs Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Copy (Ctrl+C)

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted into another supported location.

Paste (Ctrl+V)

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

The Find feature on this tab only works in the Name column.

1352

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Text Editor Toolbar

Use the commands in this toolbar to format text. These tool buttons are common to most

word processing applications and appear throughout the P6 application wherever the

text editor is used to format text.

Style list

Select Normal or a type of Heading to apply to the structure of the selected text.

Font list

Select from a list of available fonts to apply to the appearance of the selected text.

Bold

Applies the bold font style to the selected text.

Italic

Applies the italics font style to the selected text.

Underline

Applies the underline font style to the selected text.

Align Left

Formats the selected lines of text to the left margin.

Align Center

Formats the selected lines of text to the center of the page.

Reference Topics

1353

Align Right

Formats the selected lines of text to the right margin.

Align Justified

Formats the selected lines of text to both the left and right margins.

Numbering

Applies numbered list formatting to the selected text.

Bullets

Applies bulleted list formatting to the selected text.

Foreground

Displays options for customizing the color of the selected foreground text.

Highlight Color

Displays options for customizing the color of the selected text's background or

highlighting

Timesheet Approval Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Approve Selected Timesheets

Approves the selected timesheets.

Reject Selected Timesheets

Rejects the selected timesheets.

Filter By

Displays options for reducing the number of values displayed in a list or table by

showing only selected values and removing or filtering out unwanted values.

Select from one of the following predefined filters based on the status of each

timesheet:

Action Required (Ctrl+Alt+C): Displays only timesheets that currently require your

review.

Submitted (Ctrl +Alt+S): Displays both submitted and resubmitted timesheets.

1354

Resubmitted (Ctrl+Alt+E): Displays all resubmitted timesheets for all timesheet

periods.

Not Submitted (Ctrl+Alt+U): Dislays timesheets with either a Not Started or Not

Submitted status.

Approved (Ctrl+Alt+P): Displays only timesheets that have already been

approved, either manually or automatically.

Rejected (Ctrl+Alt+R): Displays only the timesheets that were manually reviewed

and rejected.

All (Ctrl+Alt+A): Displays all timesheets with any status, but only for the selected

timesheet period.

Group By

Displays a menu of the available fields you can select to group related rows in a table

into hierarchical lists you can expand and collapse. For example, group by a

Category field to arrange all rows hierarchically by their Category field values. Expand

the Category A group to view its data rows, the Category B group to view its data

rows, and so on.

Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

Find

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

E-Mail

Displays options for sending information about the currently selected item to one or

more recipients via electronic mail.

Expand All

In a hierarchical list or page of child items grouped by parent items, expands the list to

show all parent and child items.

Collapse All

In a hierarchical list, arranges entries so that only the parent items are shown and child

entries are hidden.

Print

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Reference Topics

1355

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

Refresh

Refreshes the current screen with any new, updated, or removed data.

Toolbars Sub-Menu of the View Menu

Overview

The toolbars sub-menu displays configurable options for customizing the Actions, Edit,

and View toolbars on the Activities or EPS pages.

Screen Elements

Actions

Displays a list of icons available on the Actions toolbar. Select a menu item to show or

hide its icon on the toolbar. See Actions Menu on Activities Page (on page 1178) or

Actions Menu on EPS Page (on page 1180) for a list of available icons.

Edit

Displays a list of icons available on the Edit toolbar. Select a menu item to show or

hide its icon on the toolbar. See Edit Menu on Activities Page (on page 1253) or Edit

Menu on EPS Page (on page 1254) for a list of available icons.

View

Displays a list of icons available on the View toolbar. Select a menu item to show or

hide its icon on the toolbar. See View Menu on Activities Page (on page 1365) or View

Menu on EPS Page (on page 1368) for a list of available icons.

Customize Toolbars

Displays a dialog box where you can determine which icons from the Actions, Edit,

and View menus will be displayed on the corresponding toolbars. See Customize

Toolbar Items Dialog Box (on page 698).

Trace Logic Toolbar of the Activities Page

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

1356

Screen Elements

Pan

Enables a user to make fine adjustments to the current view by directly moving the

chart or diagram in the work area. This option is only available if you are working in the

Activity Network.

Zoom In

Increases the current magnification of items in the work area so they appear larger.

Zoom Out

Decreases the current magnification of items in the work area so they appear smaller.

Zoom to Fit

Adjusts the current view's height and width or timescale to fit as much of the data as

possible into the current work area.

Reset Zoom

Restores the magnification of the current work area to its default size of 100%.

Trace Logic Options (Ctrl+V)

Opens the Trace Logic details window for the selected activity.

Print

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

User Access OBS Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save

Saves your new or modified entries to the database.

Reference Topics

1357

Cancel

Cancels any pending changes and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add

Creates a new element or responsible manager in the organizational breakdown

structure (OBS) hierarchy.

Delete

Deletes the selected item or items permanently.

Cut

Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

removing it from its current location. The item and applicable attributes can then be

pasted to another supported location.

Copy

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted to another supported location.

Paste

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Find

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next

Available only in tables, finds and highlights the next matching entry in the selected

column after an initial Find operation.

Move Up

Moves the selected item one level up in the sort order.

Move Down

Moves the selected item one level down in the sort order.

Move Left

Moves the selected item one level to the left in a hierarchical arrangement. Outdents

text items.

Move Right

Moves the selected item one level to the right in a hierarchical arrangement. Indents

text items.

1358

Full Screen Mode

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. To exit from this mode, click

Normal Mode.

Export to Excel

Exports all data as it appears in the current view to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet

(.xls) file. Customize the rows to display only the data you want to export.

Print

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

User Access Security Profiles Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save

Saves your new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel

Cancels any pending changes and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add

Creates a new global security profile if on the Global Profiles tab, or a new project

security profile if on the Project Profiles tab.

Delete

Deletes the selected item or items permanently.

Any users assigned to a deleted global security profile will automatically be

reassigned to the current default global security profile.

Reference Topics

1359

Copy

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted to another supported location.

Paste

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Find

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next

Available only in tables, finds and highlights the next matching entry in the selected

column after an initial Find operation.

Export to Excel

Exports all data as it appears in the current view to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet

(.xls) file. Customize the rows to display only the data you want to export.

Print

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

User Access Users Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save

Saves your new or modified entries to the database.

1360

Cancel

Cancels any pending changes and reverts back to the last saved state.

Add

Creates a new user.

Delete

Deletes the selected item or items permanently.

Change Password

Enables you to specify a new password to replace or reset the old one.

Count

Shows the number of users assigned access to each module of the application. For

example, 12 users might be assigned access to the Projects module while only 3 are

assigned to the Resources module.

Cut

Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

removing it from its current location. The item and applicable attributes can then be

pasted to another supported location.

Copy

Copies the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

leaving the original in its current location. The copied item and applicable attributes

can then be pasted to another supported location.

Paste

Completes a Cut or Copy operation by inserting an item and its supported attributes

into a new location.

Fill Down

In a selected range of cells in a single table column, inserts the value in the first or top

cell into the remaining cells down the column.

Find

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next

Available only in tables, finds and highlights the next matching entry in the selected

column after an initial Find operation.

Reference Topics

1361

Columns

Displays a menu of the available fields you can show or hide as columns in the current

table.

Group By

Displays a menu of the available fields you can select to group related rows in a table

into hierarchical lists you can expand and collapse. For example, group by a

Category field to arrange all rows hierarchically by their Category field values. Expand

the Category A group to view its data rows, the Category B group to view its data

rows, and so on.

Full Screen Mode

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. To exit from this mode, click

Normal Mode.

Export to Excel

Exports all data as it appears in the current view to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet

(.xls) file. Customize the rows to display only the data you want to export.

Print

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

User Defined Fields Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves any new or modified entries to the database.

Cancel (Esc)

Cancels any new or modified entries and reverts back to the last saved state.

1362

Add (Insert)

Creates a new entry in the current table.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

When a user-defined field (UDF) is deleted, all its values are also deleted from all of

their respective appearances throughout the application. This includes user interface

views, activity views, calculated UDFs, reports, Activity Networks, filters, sorts,

groupings, waterlines, and columns.

Exception: Even after they have been deleted, UDFs are preserved in any saved

scenarios.

Find (Ctrl+F)

Displays options for finding matching entries based on specific search words or values

within a particular column in a table.

Find Next (Alt+F)

Finds and highlights the next matching entry in a column. Available only in tables after

an original Find operation.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Print (Ctrl+P)

Prints the current page, table, chart, or item.

Print Preview

Displays a temporary preview of the printed output. You can then decide to continue

printing or cancel.

Page Setup

Displays options for customizing the printed output.

View Menu of the Assignments Page

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Reference Topics

1363

Screen Elements

Gantt Chart

Opens the Gantt chart on the right side of the page. The Gantt chart is a graphical

display of the start and end dates for the resource assignments in your view.

Table

Displays the assigned resource and corresponding role with information regarding the

associated project and assignments in a spreadsheet format. When this option is

selected, the Gantt chart is not displayed.

Usage Spreadsheet

Displays the usage spreadsheet, which allows you to view live unit and cost spreads

for the resource or role assignment.

Columns...

Opens the Customize Columns dialog box which you can use to configure which and

how columns display.

Group...

Displays options for re-arranging a list of values by grouping them into a hierarchy and

sorting.

Filters

The filters menu contains the following options for filtering data:

Show matches for : Select all applied filters or any applied filters to determine

which matches are displayed.

Filters: Displays a dialog box with configurable options for applying filters to the

current assignments view. See Customize Filters Dialog Box of the Assignments

Page (on page 681).

Add New Filter: Displays a dialog box with configurable options for adding a

new filter to the current assignments view. See Create Filter Dialog Box of the

Assignments Page (on page 652).

Clear Filters: Clears all set filters from the current assignments view.

Gantt Chart Options

Enables you to configure how the Gantt chart and its bars display. (Available only in

the Gantt chart view.) See Customize Gantt Chart Options Dialog Box of the

Assignments Page (on page 683).

Usage Options

Displays the Customize Usage Options dialog box. Use this dialog box to select which

columns are displayed as well as modify options for displaying time distributed values

and determining whether to calculate the average for units and costs.

1364

Progress Spotlight

Creates a yellow curtain or background behind assignments that should have

progressed during a specific timeperiod. You can drag the current date line to

highlight assignments that occur between today's date and a new date. (Available

only in the Gantt chart view.)

Expand All (Alt+Plus)

In a hierarchical list or page of child items grouped by parent items, expands the list to

show all parent and child items.

Collapse All (Alt+Minus)

In a hierarchical list, arranges entries so that only the parent items are shown and child

entries are hidden.

Zoom to Fit

Adjusts the current view's height and width or timescale to fit as much of the data as

possible into the current work area.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Save View

Saves the changes you made to the current view. Changes include the columns you

chose to display, the grouping options you made, the filters you applied, and other

custom settings.

Save View As

Displays options for saving the current view as a new view with a new name.

Delete View

Permanently removes the current view.

Customize View...

Opens the Customize Resource Assignments View dialog box, which includes a series

of tabs for customizing columns, grouping, filters, the Gantt chart, and security

access.

Toolbars

Actions Displays a list of icons available on the Actions toolbar. Select a menu

item to show or hide its icon on the toolbar. See Actions Menu of the Assignments

Page (on page 1177) for a list of available icons.

Reference Topics

1365

Edit Displays a list of icons on available on the Edit toolbar. Select a menu item

to show or hide its icon on the toolbar. See Edit Menu of the Assignments Page (on

page 1252) for a list of available icons.

View Displays a list of icons on available on the View toolbar. Select a menu

item to show or hide its icon on the toolbar. See View Menu of the Assignments

Page (on page 1362) for a list of available icons.

Customize Toolbars... Displays a dialog box where you can determine which icons

from the Actions, Edit, and View menus will be displayed on the corresponding

toolbars. See Customize Toolbar Items Dialog Box of the Assignments Page (on

page 699).

View Menu on Activities Page

Overview

The menu items on the View menu are identical to the buttons on the View toolbar.

Though the buttons on the menu are fixed, the same list of buttons can be configured on

the toolbar.

Screen Elements

Gantt Chart

Opens the Gantt chart on the Activities page. The table and Gantt chart are tiled

side by side.

Table

Opens the table which enables you to view column information for projects, WBSs,

and activities.

Activity Network

Opens the Activity Network which displays the relationships between activities.

Calendar View

Opens the Calendar View which displays activities in a calendar format.

Columns...

Opens the Customize Columns dialog box which you can use to configure which and

how columns display.

Group...

Enables you to configure how elements are grouped.

Filters submenu

The Filters submenu contains the following options for filtering data:

Show matches for : Determines which matches are displayed.

1366

Filters: Enables you to create, configure, or apply filters. See Customize Filters

Dialog Box of the Activities Page (on page 680).

Add New Filter: Enables you to create a new filter. See Create or Modify Filter

Dialog Box of the Activities Page (on page 653).

Clear Filters: Clears all filters applied to the current view.

Gantt Chart Options

Enables you to configure how the Gantt chart and its bars display. (Available only in

the Gantt chart view.)

Activity Network Options...

Opens the Customize Activity Network dialog box, which you can use to configure

the display of Activity Network boxes and options. (Available only in the Activity

Network view.)

Progress Spotlight

Creates a yellow curtain or background behind activities that should have

progressed during a specific timeperiod. You can drag the data date line to highlight

activities that occur between the last data date and the new data date. (Available

only in the Gantt chart view.)

Show/Hide Relationship Lines

Toggles the view of activities in the Gantt chart by showing or hiding the lines and

arrows that represent their predecessor and successor relationships. (Available only in

the Gantt chart view.)

Show/Hide Progress Line

Toggles the view of the activities in the Gantt chart by showing or hiding the line that

represents progress in direct relation to the provided information displayed in the

chart. (Available only in the Gantt chart view.)

Show Only Driving Relationships/ Show All Relationships

Toggles the view of relationships in the Activity Network. Show only driving

relationships allows you to automatically and immediately identify the longest path

through your project, view the status and details of activities on the path, and make

relevant decisions regarding resources and scheduling. Show all relationships allows

you to automatically view all the existing relationships between activities in the

Activity Network. (Available only in the Activity Network view.)

Select

Enables a user to select activities in the Activity Network.

Reference Topics

1367

Pan

Enables a user to make fine adjustments to the current view by directly moving the

chart or diagram in the work area. This option is only available if you are working in the

Activity Network.

Magnify

Enables the user to select a section of the Activity Network and see a magnified

version of the section.

Expand All (Alt+Plus)

In a hierarchical list or page of child items grouped by parent items, expands the list to

show all parent and child items.

Collapse All (Alt+Minus)

In a hierarchical list, arranges entries so that only the parent items are shown and child

entries are hidden.

Zoom to Fit

Adjusts the current view's height and width or timescale to fit as much of the data as

possible into the current work area.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Save View

Saves the changes applied to the current view. If you navigate away from the page,

you are prompted to save the view or discard the changes you made.

Save View As

Displays options for saving the current view as a new view with a new name.

Delete View

Permanently removes the current view.

E-mail View

Sends a hyperlink of the current activity view to one or more users by electronic mail.

The link opens the view and, if the user has the proper security privileges, the same

projects that were open when the view was sent.

Customize View...

Opens the Customize View dialog box with options that vary depending on your

current page. The dialog box has a series of tabs to customize the columns, grouping,

filters, bars, Gantt chart, usage, and security access.

1368

Customize Detail Windows

Enables you to add or remove detail windows from the page.

Toolbars sub-menu

See Toolbars Sub-Menu of the View Menu (on page 1355).

View Menu on EPS Page

Overview

The buttons on the View menu are identical to the buttons on the View toolbar. Though

the buttons on the menu are fixed, the same list of buttons can be configured on the

toolbar.

Screen Elements

Gantt Chart

Opens the table, Gantt chart, and a corresponding toolbar. The Gantt chart enables

you to view a graphical display of progress. The Gantt chart is customizable.

Table

Opens the table which enables you to view column information for projects and EPSs.

Columns...

Opens the Customize Columns dialog box which you can use to configure which and

how columns display.

Group...

Enables you to configure how elements are grouped.

Filter By

Displays options for reducing the number of values displayed in a list or table by

showing only selected values and removing or filtering out unwanted values.

Gantt Chart Options

Enables you to configure how the Gantt chart and its bars display. (Available only in

the Gantt chart view.)

Expand All (Alt+Plus)

In a hierarchical list or page of child items grouped by parent items, expands the list to

show all parent and child items.

Collapse All (Alt+Minus)

In a hierarchical list, arranges entries so that only the parent items are shown and child

entries are hidden.

Reference Topics

1369

Zoom to Fit

Adjusts the current view's height and width or timescale to fit as much of the data as

possible into the current work area.

Full Screen Mode (F11)

Expands the current work area so it fills the entire display. Non-essential controls such

as navigation menus are hidden from this mode. When in full screen mode, click this

toolbutton again to restore the normal viewing mode.

Save View

Saves the changes applied to the current view. If you navigate away from the page,

you are prompted to save the view or discard the changes you made.

Save View As

Displays options for saving the current view as a new view with a new name.

Delete View

Permanently removes the current view.

Customize View...

Opens the Customize View dialog box with options that vary depending on your

current page. The dialog box has a series of tabs to customize the columns, grouping,

filters, bars, Gantt chart, usage, and security access.

Customize Detail Windows...

Enables you to select or clear options for each detail window, to add or remove it

from the page.

Toolbars sub-menu

See Toolbars Sub-menu of the View Menu (on page 1355).

WBS Documents Toolbar of the Activities Page

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Assign (Insert)

Assigns a document to the selected WBS.

1370

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

View Document

Opens a selected document for viewing.

View Document in AutoVue

Opens a document or graphic in Oracle's AutoVue. This option is available when a

content repository is installed and your P6 administrator has configured the

appropriate privileges and project access for you.

Customize Columns

Displays choices for customizing the columns (fields) that appear on the selected

screen. (Available only in the Gantt chart and Table views.)

WBS selector

Cycles through the WBS elements in your current view. The detail window shows data

from the currently selected WBS. Click or to advance to the next or previous

WBS.

WBS Earned Value Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Apply Current Settings to Child WBS Elements

Applies the current settings in the Earned Value detail window to the children of the

selected WBS.

WBS selector

Cycles through the WBS elements in your current view. The detail window shows data

from the currently selected WBS. Click or to advance to the next or previous

WBS.

Reference Topics

1371

WBS General Toolbar of the Activities Page

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Customize Columns

Displays choices for customizing the columns (fields) that appear on the selected

screen. (Available only in the Gantt chart and Table views.)

WBS selector

Cycles through the WBS elements in your current view. The detail window shows data

from the currently selected WBS. Click or to advance to the next or previous

WBS.

WBS Milestones Toolbar of the Activities Page

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Percent Complete field

Calculates earned value according to completion of the WBS element's weighed

milestones, rather than the completion percentages of the element's activities.

Add (Insert)

Creates a new WBS milestone.

Delete (Delete)

Deletes or removes the currently selected data items or table rows.

Caution: Your selected data is permanently deleted once you click Save.

Move Up

Moves the selected item one level up in the sort order.

Move Down

Moves the selected item one level down in the sort order.

1372

WBS selector

Cycles through the WBS elements in your current view. The detail window shows data

from the currently selected WBS. Click or to advance to the next or previous

WBS.

Workgroup Tab Toolbar of the Documents Portlet of the Workgroup Workspace Page

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Add Document

Enables you to select a document to add.

Add Options menu

Displays a menu of actions supplementing the Add Document icon.

Add Document: Enables you to select a document to add.

Add from content repository: Enables you to search, browse by folder, and select

a document from the repository. You can then decide to copy the selected

document or just link to it.

Copy from existing template: Enables you to search and select a template to

copy as the basis for your new document.

Create new template: Enables you to browse and select a document template to

store for future use. You can then create new documents copied from this

template.

Add Folder: Enables you to add a document folder to the repository and set its

security policy.

Edit Details

Displays the Document Details dialog box to configure the details of the selected

document.

View Document

Opens a selected document for viewing.

View Options

Select from one of the following options in which to view the selected document:

View: Displays the selected document in a separate window.

Download: Allows you to download the document to your computer. You must

select a path for where the downloaded document will be saved.

Reference Topics

1373

Assign to Project

Reassigns the selected document to a project.

Delete

Deletes the selected item or items permanently.

Check out

Enables you to specify where the to check out current document to. Use the to

browse for a location. You can also select the Open Document option to determine

whether to open or just check out the document.

Check Out Options

Check out: Opens a dialog box to enter a location for where you want the

document to be checked out to. Use to browse for a location. Use the Open

Document option to determine whether to open the document or just check it

out.

Check in: Opens a dialog box to select a document to be checked in. Use

to browse for a document. Use the comments field to enter a comment to be

associated with the document. The Format and Version Type fields are read-only.

Click the Check In button to keep your changes and check in the document or

click cancel to close the dialog box without checking in the document.

Undo Check Out: Opens a read-only dialog box displayed the Title, Version,

and Path of the selected checked out document. If you continue to undo the

check out, any changes made to the selected document will be lost. Click Undo

Check Out to continue or click Cancel to close the dialog and keep the

document checked out.

Start Review

Opens the Start Review dialog box where you specify the reviewers, type of review,

and due date. The document review is officially initiated when you complete the

required fields on this dialog box and click Create Review.

Add to recent documents

Adds the currently selected document to the recent documents list.

Cut

Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the temporary clipboard,

removing it from its current location. The item and applicable attributes can then be

pasted to another supported location.

Move Options

Cut: Cuts the selected item and applicable attributes to the clipboard. This

removes them from their current locations.

1374

Paste: Completes a cut operation by inserting the item and supported

attributes to a new location.

E-Mail

Displays options for sending information about the currently selected item to one or

more recipients via electronic mail.

Search

Displays options for finding a specific matching entry or entries based on search

criteria.

Search Options

Search: Displays options for finding a specific matching entry based from

search criteria.

Clear Search Results: Removes any specified results to display all documents.

Working with Activity Progress

You can update and view the progress of activities on the Activities page.

You can record activity progress directly into the Activity Table. The Progress Spotlight

can help you quickly locate activities that need to be updated as well as see all the

activities that should have progressed during a specific time period.

Progress Spotlight displays a yellow background, or curtain, behind activities to indicate

the time period during which progress should have occurred. The time period is defined

by the smallest increment of the current timescale since the last data date. For example,

if the current timescale is set to Month/Week, Progress Spotlight highlights all activities

that should have progressed during the week since the data date. You can drag the end

point of the curtain to extend or compress the time period.

To update the activities quickly, you can use Ctrl+Up or Ctrl+Down keys to navigate to

each highlighted activity in sequence. If instead you want to automatically calculate

progress for some activities, you can add the Auto-Compute Actuals column to your

activity view so you can turn this option on as needed for specific activities.

Note: The Update Progress feature, often used immediately after

the Progress Spotlight feature in P6 Professional, is not available in

P6. Users will be able to click Schedule to schedule the project;

however, the revised data date in the spotlight will not be applied.

Reference Topics

1375

WP & Docs Tab Toolbar

Overview

The following icons and screen elements appear in this toolbar; however, their availability

is subject to change based on your current selections, view settings, security permissions,

and other factors.

Screen Elements

Refresh

Refreshes the current screen with any new, updated, or removed data. (This option is

only available on the Documents page.)

Edit Details

Displays the Document Details dialog box to configure the details of the selected

document.

Delete

Deletes the selected item or items permanently.

E-Mail

Displays options for sending information about the currently selected item to one or

more recipients via electronic mail.